IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) sr.^ ^j 1.0 I.I 1^ ^ |2.2 ii ^ m L25 III U_ IJA '/] J^A^^' ^ '/ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WIST MAtN STRKT WEbSTfR.N.Y. MSSO (716) 873-4S03 iV \\ [V O^ > ^K0 Mr l/.x CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian da microraproductions historiques V Tschnical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual mothod of filming, are checked below. D D D D D D y Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagie Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurie et/ou pellicul6e I I Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque I I Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Relii avec d'autres documents r~71 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge intirieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouttles lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas iti filmtes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppldmentaires; Varioui pagings. L'Institut a microfilm* le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mithode normale de filmage sont indiquAs ci-dessous. Tha toti I I Coloured pages/ D Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommag^es Pages restored and/oi Pages restaur^es et/ou pelliculies Pages discoloured, stained or foxei Pages dicolordes, tachetdes ou piqu6es r~7] Pages damaged/ I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ r~n Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Th« po« oft film Ori( b«g th« •lor othi first •ior or 11 □ Pages detached/ Pages ddtachdes Showthrough/ Transparence I I Quality of print varies/ Quality inigale de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du materiel supplimentaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible Tho •hal TIN whi Mai diff( •nti bog righ roqi mol Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., heve been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont ix6 filmdes; A nouveau de fa^on d obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqui ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X V 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X Th« oopy fllmad h«r« has b««n r«produe«d thanks to tha o«naroaity of: Ntw Bruniwick MuMum Scint John Tha imagaa appaaring hara ara tha baat quality possibia eontidaring tha condition and lagibility of tha original copy and in- kaaping with tha filming contract ipaoificatlons. Original ooplaa in printad papar covara ara filmad baginning with tha front eovar and anding on tha last paga with a printad or iliustratad impras* sion, or tha back eovar whan appropriata. All othar original copiaa ara filmad baginning on tha first paga with a printad or iilustratad Impraa- sion. and anding on tha iaat paga with a printad or iiiuatratad impraaaion. L'axamplaira film* fut raprodult grica i la g*n*rosit* da: New Brunswick M'jissum Saint John Laa imagaa sulvantaa ont it* raprodultaa avac la plua grand soln, compta tanu da la condition at da la nattat* da l'axamplaira film*, at %n conf ormit* avac las conditions du contrat da fllmaga. Laa axamplalraa originaux dont la couvartura an paplar ast imprim*a sont fiim*s an commandant par la pramlar plat at an tarminant soit par la darnl*ra paga qui eomporta una amprainta d'Impraasion ou d'iilustration. soit par la sacond phit, salon la eas. Tous las autras «xamplairas originaux sont fiim*s an commandant par la prami*ra paga qui eomporta una amprainta d'imprassion ou d'iilustration at an tarminant par la darnl*ra paga qui eomporta una talla amprainta. Tha Iaat racordad frama on aach microficha shall contain tha aymbol «-•» (moaning "CON- TINUED"), or tha aymbol y (moaning "END"), whichavar appllaa. Un daa symbolaa sulvants apparaftra sur la dami*ra Imaga da chaqua microficha, salon la eas: la symbola -^ signifia "A SUiVRE", la symbols V signifia "FIN". Mapa. plataa, charts, ate., may ba filmad at diffarant raduction ratioa. Thosa too larga to ba antiraly ineludad in ona axposura ara filmad baginning in tha uppar laft hand cornar, laft to right and top to bottom, aa many framaa aa raqulrad. Tha following diagrams illustrata tha mathod: Laa cartas, planchas. tableaux, ate., pauvant *tra fllm*a * daa taux da r*duction diff*rants. Lorsqua la document ast trop grand pour *tra raprodult an un saul ellch*. ii aat film* * partir da I'angla sup*riaur gauche, da gauche * droita. et da haut an baa. an prenant la nombra d'imagas n*cessaira. Lea diagrammes sulvants illustrant la m*thode. 32X 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 \\ PRICES BEDUCED ELDRIDGES CHARTS, I^UBUSHSD BT 125 State Street, Boston. PBMTED ON THE BEST QUALITY OV LINE^ PAPEB, AMD MOUNTED ON CLOTH TO MAKE THSU DURABLE. Ho. 1. THE VINBTARD SOUND AND NANTUCKET flHOAIiS, on » very large scale, with a Book of Saiuhg DnioTiOMS. P6no|U n»lil|( thia Chart will Mve the expense of erqploylng a j^ot. Price fQU.4^/^ ' '. Ho. 9. THE COAST OP NORTH AMERICA, vbom Cave HsmiT to Capk Sabuc, including the Chesapeake and Delawara Bayi, and Oeorge's Shoals, on a Uirffe,$tiilt. Price 94-00. Ho. S. CAPE COD TO BBtLE ISLE, iucloding the Bay of Fuddy, Oulf of St. Lawrence, and Banks of Newfoundland, witii Ptana on • lirge scale of the Coast of NTova Sootia fLam Cape Canso to Pictou; the Coatt of Cape Breton from Seauri to Sydney, and the Harbor of 8t John, N6w Brunswick, Halifuc, and Miramichi. This is a new Chiit, prepared from tiie latest surreys, expressly for the Coal and Fishing trades. Price fS.OO. Ho. 4. BOSTON HARBOR, on a large scale, with Sailing Dbrections. This Chart affords a more practical guide to the various diannels, passages, flshlAg grounds, &c.. Of Boston Ha|;hor> than any that has ever been issued. The bearings and'distances of dangnrous Rocks and Shoals, and the principal ranges of objects, are all given on the Chart Price, cloth, 91. 00. Pipe ". Ho. S. TMs is a new Chart of LONG ISLAND SOUND from Nxwfort TO Niw ToMCt with a Book of Sailing Directions, contain .ng a ftill description of the dangers to be avoided in entering die various Harbors of the Sound. Price $»sao.9^v Ho. •. LiNN TO HALIBUT POINT, with the Harbors of Salem. Bevierly, Marblehead, Manchester, Olouoester, Rookport, ai d Annisfuam; also the Stone Quarries at Folly Cove, LanesviUe, Bay View, fto., an a large scale. Price, cloth, •l.CJO. Piper 76c. Ho. 7. CHESAPEAKE BAT, with the James, York, Rappahanttook, and Potomac Rivers. This is a new Chart, and the only one published v hich gives the rivers on a large scale on one sheet. Price $8.S0, Ho. 8. MONTAUK POINT TO ST. AUGUSTINE, with a Plan of New York Bay and Harbor, on ^ large scale. Price fS.SO. Ho. 9, ST. AUGUSTINE TO NEW ORLEANS, with Florida Reefr, Bahama Banks, and Entrance to Pensacola and Mobile Bays, on a large mile. Price $8.80. Ho. to. BUZZARD'S BAY, on a very large scale. Price #2.00. Ho. 11. NEW CHART OF* DELAWARE BAY AND RIVER, on a large scale. In one sheet. Price $8.00. , COAST PILOT. No. 1. Chatham to Gut or Canso. Price 98.80. COAST PILOT. No. 2. CHA-niAM TO thk Rio Grande. Price 98.50. In tfiarinp fh» Ohmrtt, frfMM 4imtomi*0 SMn* m MZDMID&X'B Km, i, 9, M- a, *c., inatvmd of»t/rMn»f fM t^U. ^.M .'x^: '' • .197 Fox Island Thoroughfare, . . • • 205 Frenchman's Bay, . . • • • ^34 Flag Cove, 295 French Tillage Harbor, .... 440 Fisherman Harbor, 519 Oloucester Harbor, 70 George's Harbor, . . . ... 170 Gilkey's Harbor, ...... 192 Gouldsboroiigh Harbor and Bay, . . • 251 Grand Menan, 292 Grand Harbor, 294 Giilliver Hole, 322 Grand Passage, 326 Green Harbor, 386 Green Bay, 406 Glasgow Harbor, 542 GutofCanso, 543 Hingham Harbor, 48 Hodgkins Cove, or Bay View, . . . .83 Hampton Harbor, 94 Hog Island Koads, . . . . . .127 INDEX. Xlll Eng- Harpswell Harbor, or Stover's Cove, Horse Island Harbor, Herring Gut Harbor, .... Head Harbor (Isle au Haut), . HulPs Cove, Harrington River, .... Head Harbor (West side of entrance to lishman's Bay), .... Head Harbor (East Quoddy Head), . Harbor Delute, Herring Cove (Liverpool Bay), Hubbard Cove Head Harbor (St. Margaret Bay), Halifax Harbor, Herring Cove (entrance to Halifax Harbor), HoUinsBay, ....... 511 PAGE 134 139 •174 220 237 258 265 273 274 401 436 439 467 466 Ipswich Harbor, . . . . . . 87 Isles of Shoals, . . . . . .102 Isles of Shoals, or Gosport Harbor, . . . 103 Ingram Biver, . . . . . . 438 Inner Beaver Harbor, ..... 497 Isaac Harbor, 520 Indian Bay, 509 Island Harbor, 521 John's Bay, 158 Jordon's River, 238 Jonesport Harbor, . . . • • . . 265 XIV INDKX. Jebouge River, . Jordan River, Jedore Harbor, Jegogan Harbor, Kcnnebunk River, Kennebec River, PAGE 341 385 469 507 109 142 Lynn Harbor, 53 Lane^s Cove, 83 Linekin's Bay, 155 Lincolnville, or Duck Trap Harbor, Little River (Maine), Lubec Harbor, L'Etang Harbor, Little River (Nova Scotia), . Liverpool Bay, .... Le Have River, . . . Lunenburg Harbor, . Liscomb Harboi', . Little Liscomb Harbor, Louse Harbor, Marblehead Harbor, .... Manchester Harbor, . . , , Mcrrimac River, .... Mackerel Cove, McFarland's Cove, .... Muscongus Harbor and Greenland Cove, 191 268 278 283 343 400 409 414 502 506 533 57 70 93 137 160 163 INDEX. xy PAOB Monhegan Harbor, ...... 173 Mosquito Harbor (Maine), .... 176 Mosquito Uarbor (Winter Harbor Sound), . 247 Moose-a-Bec Reach, 260 Machias Bay and River, 266 Musquash Harbor, 286 Memramcook River, 303 Mahone Bay, '. . 418 Mahone Harbor, 422 Mill Cove, . 436 Macnab Cove, 465 Musquidoboit Inlet, . . . . . 468 Mushaboon Harbor, . . . . . . 488 Macleod Cove, 497 Mary-Joseph Harbor, 502 Molasses Harbor, 527 McNair Cove, . . . . . . . 547 ^ew Harbor Bars, 8 North Dennis Landing, . . . . .18 Neponset River, 62 iN'ahant Harbor, 65 Newburyport Harbor, 90 New Meadows River, . . . . . 138 New Harbor (Maine), ..... 161 Northeast Harbor (Mt. Desert), . . . 230 Narraguagus Bay and River, . . . 256 Negro Harbor and Clyde River, . . . 376 XVi INDEX. PAGE Northeast Hfirbor, 380 Northwest Cove, 434 Nicomtau Bay, 498 New Harbor (Nova Scotia), . . » . 522 OwPs Head Harbor, . . . . . 1^6 Owl's Head Bay, 473 Provincetown Harbor, 11 Plymouth Harbor, . . . . . .20 Pigeon Cove Harbor, . .' . . . 82 Portsmouth Harbor, 94 Portland Harbor, , 118 Pott's Harbor, 136 Prospect Harbor (Maine), .... 248 Pigeon Hill Bay, or Bowbear Harbor, . . 254 Pleasant Bay and River, .... 258 Passamaquoddy Bay and St. Croix River, . . 270 Petit Coudiac River, 301 Parrsboro River, ...... 315 Petit Passage, 323 Pubnico Harbor, . . . , . . 361 PortLatour, 374 Port L'Hebert, . .. . . . . .392 PortJolie, 394 Port Mouton, 395 Princess Inlet, 421 Port Metway, 403 Port. Dover, 443. INDEX. xvii PAGE Pro8Dect Harbor (Nova Scotia), . . . 448 Pennant Bay, 449 Pennant Harbor, 452 Perpissawick Inlet, 467 Pope Harbor, . . . . . .482 Port Bickerton, . . . . . . .512 Port Howe, 531 Pirate Cove, or Port Mulgrave, . . . 547 Port Hastings, or Plaister Cove, . . . 547 Quincy or "Weymouth, . . . . .51 Quahaug Bay, 138 Quoddy Roads, 276 Eock Harbor, 17 Rockport Harbor (Moss.), . . . .78 Ecckport Granite Co.'s Harbor, . . . 80 Eye Harbor, . . . . . .. .94 Eichmond's Island Eoads, .... 117 Eound Pond Harbor, 162 Eockland Harbor, 186 Eockport Harbor (Maine), .... 187 Eugged Island Harbor, 1^87 Eose Bay, . . . . . . . 417 Sursuit Creek, 17 Sandwich Harbor, 20 Scituate Harbor, 25 Swampscott Harbor, 55 Zviii INDEX. PAGE Salem Harbor, .....•• ^1 Stage Island Harbor, 112 Saco River, 116 Sheepscott River, 1^7 St. George's River, 165 Seal Harbor (White Head), .... 185 Seal Harbor (West Penobscot Bay), . .193 Searsport Harbor, 196 Stockton, or Cape Jellison Harbor, . . . 196 Southern Harbor, 208 Sedgwick Village, or Benjamin River, . . 215 Southeast Harbor (Deer Isle), . . . 219 Southwest Harbor (Mt. Desert), . . . Ii26 Somes, or Somesville Harbor, . , . 233 Salisbury Cove, . . . . . . .237 Skillirgs River, 239 Sullivan Harbor, or River, .... 239 Stave Island Harbor, 242 Schoodic Harbor, 243 Sand Cove Harbor, 247 Seguin Passage, 262 St. Croix River, 278 St. Andrew's Harbor, 280 St. John Harbor, . . , . . .287 Seal Cove, or Wood Island Harbor, . . . 292 Sheepody River, . . • . • • - 304 Salisbury Bay, . . . . . . .299 Shubenacadic River, 317 INDEX. XIX Scotman's Cove, St. Croix Bay, St. Mary Bay, . Sissibou Eiver, Shag Harbor Sound, Stoddar'^ Cove, Shelburne Harbor, Sable River, . Southeast Cove, St. Margaret Bay, Shag Bay, . Sambro Harbor, Ship Harbor, Shoal Bay, Spry Harbor, Sheet H^i-rbor, Spanish Ship Bay, St. Mary Bay, Ship Harbor, or Port Hawksbury, Sable Island, .... Tennant Harbor, Tusket River, Turner Bay, .... Tangier Harbor, Taylor Bay, .... Tor Bay, .... PAOE . 318 319 . 320 330 . 365 306 . 380 392 . 428 432 . 445 455 . 475 478 . 48r> 488 . 606 508 . 546 648 . 177 355 . 450 480 . 487 523 Union River and Ellsworth, . 217 XX INDEX. Wellflcet Harbor, . "Weymouth Back River, Wood Island, or Winter Harbor, Waldoboro' Harbor, . West Gouldsborough Harbor, Winter, or Mosquito Harbor, Whale Cove, .... Walton Harbor, . , . Webb Cove, .... White Haven, .... York River, . Yarmouth River, or Harbor, Yarmouth Harbor, PAOB 14 49 113 163 ] 241 1 243 1 296 3 314 1 ^* 621 1 ^' 527 1 ^^ 106 1 ^' 130 1 *^° 337 1 M< i 1 Ni 1 0) 1 Pc ' Pc Pe Se T^ ' Ti INDEX. XXI Sailing Directions. PAGE Bay of Fundy, 369 Cape Cod Light to Provincetown Harbor, . 12 Fort Point Lighthouse to Bangor, , , . 182 Gannet Kock Channel, . . . , , 335 Jones Anchorage, ...... 360 Monhegan to Owl's Head, .... 179 [Nantasket Boads, 45 Owl's Head to Fort Point Ligh aouse, . , 181 Pollock Kip to Cape Cod Highland Light, . 9 Penobscot Bay (West), . . . .183 Penobscot Bay (East), ..... 184 Seallsland, 352 Two Bush Channel, .... . . 182 Tusket IslandB 348 iff-" xxli INDEX. Anchorages. PAOB jH ]] Brooklyn Anchorage, • 402 ■ ^ Capo Neddick, .... 108 ■ ^ Capo Blomidon, .... .312 ■ ^ Grand Monan, .... 297 ■ f Grindstone Island, . . . • .304 ■ ^ Grand Passage, .... . .327 ■ p Herring Cove, ' ^^ 1 I] Heckman's Anchorage, . 420 H j^ Jones Anchorage, . . • . • 358 ■ -^ Luke Anchorage, .... ^2 ■ p Mud Islands, . 353 ^m p Martin's River Anchorage, .423 1 I Saquish Koads, • 24 B ^ Spencer Island, . . . • .310 9 ^ Seal Island, ..... .352 B Spectacle and Mosher Islands, .412 1 ' "] Sable Island, • ^^^ Wi INDEX. XZIU Dangers Off the Coast. Boss Point to Apple River Lighthouse, Cape Neddick to Kennebunk River, . Cape Porpoise to Wood Island, . . Cape Spencer to Quaco Head, . Cape Sharp to Spencer Island, Cape St. Mary to Cape Forchu, Highland Light to Provincetown Harbor, Ipswich to Newburyport Bar, . M^rgaretville to Port Williams Lighthouse, Newburyport to Portsmouth Harbor, Portsmouth Harbc ' to Cape Xeddick, . Penobscot Bay (West), Port Williams to Point Prim, • Point Prim to Boar's Head Lighthouse, Quaco Head to Cape Enrage Lighthouse, Scotsman's Cove to Black Rock Lighthouse, Thatcher's Island Lights to Boston, PAOK 307 . 108 113 . 298 310 . 337 11 . 90 319 . 94 108 . 200 322 . 324 300 . 318 76 XXIV INDEX. Currents. Grand Menan Island, . . . . Gut of Canso, Port "Williams to Black Rock Lighthouse, Point Prim to Petit Passage, Sable Island, PAGE . 297 548 . 319 324 . 649 GEORGE'S SHOALS. These shoals, which lie upon the NorthweBtorn pnrt of Georgt's Bank, extend nearly N. by W. >4 W., ami S. by E. ]^ E., 1" miles. In 1850 the least depth of water upon thorn was 12 fi-et ; this depth lies in Latitute 41° 39' y^ N., and Longitude 07"' 42' y^ W. The currents set strong across these shoals, and tho depth of water upon* them, undoubtedly, like those in tho vicinity of Nun- tucket, varies with every heavy gale. By Inspooting Eldridg^ 'a Chart, No. 2, from Cape Henry to Cape Sable, a bettor idea can bo obtained of George's Bank and Shoals, than by any written descrip- tion. Heavy draught vessels should beware of George's Shoals. Bearings and Distances from 12-foot Shoal on George's Bank. Dhtnno*. New South Shoal Lightship, W. by S. J< S. . . . lOfl miles. Chatham Lighthouses, W. by N ^ N . . . . 1>U " Cape Cod (Highland) Lighthouse, NW. by W. ?i W. IOC '» Thatchers Island Lighthouses, Cape Ann, NW, f^ Sl^!, 139 " Cape Elizabeth Lighthouses, NW. by N. ^ N. . . 160 »* Seguin Lighthouse, N.NW 151 " Monhegan Island Lighthouse, N. by W. J4 W. . . 144 " Mt. Desert Rock Lighthouse, N. K E 188 " Cape Sable Lighthouse, NE. by E 189 " Turning of the Current in South Channel, between George's Bank and ]N''antuoket Shoals. In this channel between George's Bank and Nantucket Shoals, in from 80 to 40 fathoms water, the current commonoos to »'un Northerly about the time of low water in Boston, and Southerly nearly the same time it is high water at that place. 16 miles to tiic Eastward of George's Shoals the current was found to turn about 45 minutes sooner than in the South Channel. Tho current, \\\ changing, always goes round with the sun,'ar.(l is Holdom Still. CULTIVATOR SHOAL. About 20 miles to the Westward of George's Shoals, near the Western edge of the Bank, are several spots having from 7 fathoms to 1 7 feet water upon them ; this last named danger, which lies in Latitude 41° 37' >^ N. and Longitude 68° 13' W. is called Cul- tivator Shoal, so named from the ship Cultivator, which struck upon it when drawing twentj'-two ft. water. Bearings and Distances £rom Cultivator Shoal. Distance. New South Shoal Light Ship, W. by S. ^'^ S. . . 86 miles. Chatham Lighthouses, W. by N. ^ N 80 " Cape Cod (Highland) Lighthouse, NW. by W. ^4 W. 87 " Cape Ann (Thatchers Island) Lighthouses, NW. K W. 123 « Cape Elizabeth Liglithouses, NW. by N. ^ N. • . 146 Monhegan Island Liglithouse, N. ^ W 137 (( Cashe's Ledge. The shoalest part of this Ledge, which has 24 feet water upon it, is a white flat Rock, about one hundred yards in diameter, and known as Ammen's Rock. About 4 miles to the Southwest of Am- inen's Rock is another with 30 feet water upon it ; heavy draught vessels should give this Ledge a wide berth. Bearings and Distances from Ammen's Rock. Distance, Cape Cod (Highland) Lighthouse, SW. by W. }( W. 76 miles. Boston Lightljouse, W. ^ S . . 97 " Cape Ann, (Thatchers Island) Lighthouses, West. . 78 " Cape Elizabeth Lighthouses, NW. X N 69 " Monhegan Island Lighthouse, N. >^ W 54 " The Latitude of Ammen's Rock is 42° 55' N., and Longitude u«^ 53' W. (ii) The Bearings in this Book are by Compass, and Distance in Nautical Miles. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. From FoUook Rip to Highland Light. Chatham Idghta, These two Lighthouses, which show fixed White Lights, are locat- ed upon tlie mainland called James' Head ; they are 100 feet apart, ranging North and South, and bear about North from Pollock Rip Light-ship ; distance 8j4 miles. Nauaet Lights. These three Lighthouses, which show fixed White Lights, are located upon the Eastern part of Cape Cod, and bear N. by E. 11 miles from Chatham Lights ; they are 150 feet apart, and range North and South. Cape Cod Highland Light, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is located upon the Eastern part of Cape Cod, and bears N- by W. from Nauset Tlu'ee Lights, distance 12 miles. A Fog Trumpet is placed near the Lighthouse, gi^ ing blasts of 8 seconds at intervals of 30 seconds. Bearings and Distances from Cape Cod Highland Light. Boston Lighthouse, NW. % W distance 41 miles. Biker's Island Lighthouses, NW. ?< N. • . . " 43 ^ " Eastern Point Lighthouse, entrance to Gloucester Harbor, NW. by N. >^ N., distance 42 mil ^ Thatcher's Island Lighthouses, N. by W. ^ W. * . " 42 J^ " Boon Island Lighthouse, N. ^ W " 67 J4 " Capo Elizabeth Lighthouses, N. ?< E " 92 " Seguin Lighthouse, N. by E. 5^ E. . . . . . " 101 " Manliegan Lighthouse, NE. by N. ^ N. . . . " 108 " Mt. Desert Rock Lighthouse, NE. >4 E. ..." 143 " Cape Sable Lighthouse, E. ^ N. " 212 " a ELDKIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Dangers. New Harbor Bars, In April, 1851, an inlet was opened by the ftirious storm waves through Nauset Beach about 1^ miles Northeasterly from Chatham Lighthouses. The current of Ebb, by its great strength and velocity, has carried seaward into deep water large quantities of sand, forming the dangerous shoals called Chatham New Harbor Bars, which lie in the direct track of vessels, especiall}' with off- shore winds, bound east or west b}* way of Vineyard Sound. For several years a Nun Buoy has been placed off these Bars, but at night-time, with a smooth sea, there are neither marks nor bearings to warn the mariner of his approach to these dangerous shoals, and he is liable to mistake the main land for the beach, the latter being very deceptive on account of its being elevated but little above the water. From the best authority that can be obtained at the pres- ent time, 1879, there have been ashore upon these Bars, since their formation, including steamers and all other classes, 246 vessels ; of this number, from 50 to 100 havo been total losses. The above facts, together with my personal experience and observatio^js, show these Bars to be the most dangerous spot on the coast of the United States. Vessels passing Chatham in thick weather or night-time, bound to the northward, should, therefore, when the lights bear W.NW., make use of the lead, and not approach these Bars in less than 7 or 8 fathoms water. The above is reversed, bound to the southward. The furious storm waves have also been gradually wearing away the beach to the southeastward of Chatham Lights, leaving danger- ous Sand Bars which now extend a long distance from shore. Ves- sels, therefore, passing Chatham should, especially at night-time, give these dangerous Bars a wide berth. Since the above was writ- ten, a Whistling Buoy* has been placed off .hese Bars in about 7 fathoms water. Bearings and Distances trova. this Buoy. Chatham Lighthouses, W. ^ S., distance, 2J4, miles. Pollock Rip Light-ship, S. by W. X W., " 9^ " Monomoy Lighthouse, SW. ^ S., " 8>^ " * The Whistling Buoy off New Harbor Bars has been moved to a point about 34 miles NE, h N. from Pollock Rip Light-ship. At this date (July, 1883), there is no buoy to mark these dangers. m I •ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 9 Between New Harbor Bars and Cape Cod Highland Light there are Sand Bars which extend off some distance from shore. To avoid these dangers, vessels of 12 feet draught should not approach the land needier than three quarters of a mile. Sailing Directions from Pollock Rip to Cape Cod Highland Light in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. The Buoy off New Harbor Bars bears N. by E. }( S. from Pol- lock Light Ship ; distance 9% miles. Vessels leaving Broken Part of Pollock Rip, in either channel, should make good the course N.NE- until abreast of the Buoy off these bars, then follow the shore, keeping at least three quarters of a mile from it to Highland Light. Sailing Directions from Pollock Rip to Cape Cod Highland Light at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From Broken Part of Pollock Rip make good the course NE. by K. J^ N. 11 miles, or until Nauset (three) Lights bear N. by W. J^ W., then steer N. % W. ; in running this last course, Nauset Lights and Cape Cod Light will . be left Ixom 2 to 3 miles to the westward. Sailing Directions from Pollock Rip to Cape Cod Highland Light in thick weather. In order to avoid New Harbor Bars, vessels leaving the Broken Part of Pollock Rip in thick weather, in either of the channels, ■especially on the first of the Western Tide, with light winds, should make good the course NE. by N. 10^^ miles, or until the water deepens to 20 fathoms : Chatham Lights will then bear W. K S. ; distance 5^ miles; Nauset Lights N. by W. j4 W. 11 miles. By running N. J< W. from this last point, Nauset and High- land Lights will be left about 2y^ miles to the westward. Beating around Cape Cod. Vessels beating to windward bound to the northward, or around Cape Cod, when abreast of Chatham Lights, should keep in sho'-e, as the current sets to the southward quite strong, most of the time off shore, during northerly winds. 10 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Advice to Vessels in thick weather bound from. Cape Cod to Boston, Salem, or Cape Ann. To the Eastward of the Cape the Tide or Current turns much sooner in shore than it does off shore. In 40 fathoms water, about NE. 4 miles distant from Cape Cod Highland Light, the current commences to run into the Bay about the time of low water in Boston, and commences setting out about the time of high water at this place. In from 30 to 40 fathoms water off Noi cheast from Highland Light, the direct course to Boston Lighthouse is NW. by W. % W., distance about 42 miles. Vessels in thick weather leaving the Cape, bound to Boston, Salem, or Cape Ann, should make allowance for the current, which, for a considerable distance to the Northward of the Race, runs out and into Cape Cod Bay, especially at or near the full and change of the Moon, very strong. From Highland Light to Frovincetown or Cape Cod Harbor. Highland IdghU This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is located upon tho Eastern part of Cape Cod. Race Point Lighthouse bears from it W.NW., distance 8J^ miles. At this date, 1879, a Fog Trumpet is placed near the Lighthouse, giving blasts of 8 seconds at intervals of 30 seconds. Race Point Lighthouse. This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, varied by white flashes, is located upon the extreme Northwesterly part of Cape Cod ; Wood End Light bears from it SE. hy S., distance 8J^ miles. At this date, 1879, a Steam Whistle is placed near the Light- house, giving blasts of 4 seconds, with alternate intervals of 8 and 44 seconds. Wood End Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, which shows a flashing Red Light, is located upon Wood End Beach. Long Point Light bears from it NE. by E. ^ E. ; distance 1% miles. Long Point Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, vsrhich shows a fixed White Light, is located on the SW. side of entrance to Provincetown Harbor. Cape Cod ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 11 Highland Light bears ftrom it E. >4 S. ; distance about 6 miles. A Bell struck by machinery is placed near the Lighthouse. Dangers in Sailing from Cape Cod Highland Light to Frovincetown Harbor. Shoal Spots. From 1J4 to 8 miles to the Northwestward of Cape Cod Light there are several Shoal Spots, some of which have as little as 12 feet water upon them at very low tides. These dangers lie about a half mile fVora land, with a narrow channel of from 3 to 5 fathoms water between them and the shore. Peaked Hill Bars, These dangerous Shoals lie from 4 to 7}^ miles Northwesterly from Cape Cod Highland Light, and extend from >4 to ^ mile from shore. In order to avoid these dangers when sailing between Cape Cod Light and Race Point, vessels of 12 feet draught or upwards should not, especially at low tide, approach the shore in less than 10 fathoms water. Shoal Spots, Northwesterly tvom Peaked Hill Bars there are several Shoal Spots with narrow channels of from 3 to 5 fathoms within them ; the most dangerous one lies about % mile from shore, and has as little as 8 feet water upon it at very low tides. Race Point Light * bears from this last-mentionod danger SW. by W. % W. ; distance 2}4 miles. 20 fathoms water was found about North one-tenth of a mile from this shoal ; the lead, therefore, gives but little warning in approaching it from the Northward. Shank Painter Bar, This Bar, upon which there are fifteen feet of water at Low Tide, lies about hi^lf-way from Race Point to "Wood End Light, and extends about J4 «nilo from shore. 24 fathoms water was found 150 yards to the westward of this shoal ; the lead, therefore, gives but little warning in approaching this danger. • From Capo Cod Jil)^ mile. Leav- ing them on the port hand, run into the harbor, and anchor in from 3 to 10 fathoms water. Sailing Directions from Cape Cod Light to Prov- incetown Harbor at Night, with fair weather. When Cape Cod Light bears SW., from 1 to 2 miles distant, make good the course NW. J4 W. about 8 miles, or until Race Point Light bears SW., then run in W.SW. Leave this last- mentioned light about )^ of a mile to the Eastward, and run SE. by S. % S. until Wood End and Long Point Lights are in range bearing NE. by B. J^ E. ; the course is then E. by S. until Long Point Light* bears N.NE., then run NE. and haul round Long Point Light at a distance of % milo. Leaving it on the port han,d, run in NW. by W., and anchor in from 5 to 10 fathoms water. ♦Vessels of 12 feet draught or upwards, bound Into Provincetown Har- bor, should not approach Long Point Lighthouse, especially at low tide, nearer than half a mile, until it bears wast. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Thiok Weather. 13 At this date, 1879, there is a Fog Trumpet at Cape Cod Light, a Steam Whistle at Race Point Light, and a Fog Bell at Long Point Light ; the ear, assisted by the compass and lead, will there- fore be the best pilot for vessels sailing in thick weather fVom Cape Cod Light to Provincetown Harbor. Beating from Race Point to Wood End Light, bound into Provincetown Harbor. With Southerly or Southeasterly winds, vessels of 12 ft. draught or upwards, beating fVom Race Point to Wood End Light, should not approach nearer the shore than ^ of a mile, as it is very bold (especially after passing Herring Cove), and they will have 20 fathoms water at one cast of the lead, and be ashore at the next, before they can tack. Beating from Wood End Light into Provincetown Harbor, with Northerly or Northeasterly Winds. Vessels beating from Wood End Light bound into Provincetown Harbor, should keep the Eastern Shore aboard. Large vessels mi boldly approach this shore in 6 fathoms water, at night or day. Anchorage under the Eastern Shore, If it blows so hard from the NE. that you cannot beat into Prov- incetown Harbor, when abreast of Wood End Light, stand on close-hauled until the water shoals to 10 fathoms upon the Eastern Shore, then anchor. If the wind should back to the NW. and blow heavy, shelter may be found under Billingsgate Shoal. See Directions for Wellfleet Harbor. Best Anchorage in Provincetown Harbor. The Eastern part of this harbor is somewhat exposed to heavy southerly gales. In order, therefore, to find good shelter lYom all winds, vessels should anchor in from 8 to 10 fathoms water at low tide, — Long Point Light bearing from SE. to E. by S- ; distance about y^ mile. In anchoring be careful to avoid the Western Shore opposite Long Point Light, as it is verj'bold, and j'ou will have fro a 8 to 10 fathoms water within a stone's throw of the Flats. u ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. High Water at I^ovincetown Harbor. It is high water at this place 10 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean Rise and Fall of Tides about d'/ feet. Advioe to Masters of Vessels in regard to Leaving the Baoe Light with strong Indications of a heavy Northeast Qale, accompanied with Snow. If a vessel be off Cape Cod Light bound to Boston, with Easterly or Northeasterly winds, and strong indications of a heavy gale accompanied with snow, my advice is, to keep, if possible, the bear- ings of Race Point Light until it commences snowing ; then, by the following directions, run into Cape Cod Bay. When Race Point Light (which, at this date, 1879, has a Steam Whistle * near it) bears E.NE. A-om 1 to 2 miles distant, haul up SE. by S. J4 S. and run four miles on this course, or until Wood End Light bears NE. If the wind blows so hard or it snows so thick that she cannot get into Provincetown Harbor, stand on close-hauled until the water shoals to 10 or 15 fathoms, then anchor ; if she drags, cut away the spars until the anchors hold her. I consider this anchorage in Cape Cod Bay, during a heavy Northeasterly gale, safer than the open roadstead of Vineyard .Haven. Wellfleet Harbor. Billingsgate Light, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is located upon the Southeastern part of Billingsgate Island. In sailing into Wellfleet Harbor, this Light is left to the Westward. Bearings and Distances. Billingsgate Light bears from Race Point Light S.SE. ; distance 14 miles. From Wood End Light, S. by E. ^ E- ; distance 10>^ miles. From Sandy Neck Light, Barnstable Harbor, NE. by E. J4 E. ; distance 13 miles. * At this date, 1879, a powerful Steam Whistle is placed near the Race Light, giving blasts of 4 seconds with alternate intervals of 8 and 44 seconds. This whistle should in thick weather be heard at least 4 miles. ELDRIDOE'S COA T PILOT. 15 Mayo*a Beach Idght. This Lighthouse, ^hich shows a fixed White Light, is located at the head of Wellfleet Bay, upon Mayo's Beach, and bears fW>in Bil- lingsgate Light NE. by N. ; distance 4 miles. Dangers entering Wellfleet Harbor. Billingsgate Shoal, This Shoal extends off a long distance Southwesterly fVotn Bil- lingsgate Light. A Black Buoy (No. 1), placed in about two fathoms water at low tide, marks its outer part. This Buoy bears IVom Billingsgate Light W. by S> >^ S. ; distance iyi miles : from Race Point Light S. X B- ' distance 14^ miles : firom Wood End Light S. }4 W. ; distance 11^ miles. Vessels of not more than 7 feet draught may at low tide pass across this shoal ftom 1 to 1^ miles within the buoy ; and vessels of not more than 10 or 11 feet draught may, after half flood, pass fVom 1 to 2 miles within it ; but vessels of 9 feet draught or upwards, unacquainted, should not at low tide pass within it. Bibb Bock, This Rock, which is marked with a Buoy having Red and Black horizontal stripes, bears from Billingsgate Light S. ; distance 2% miles. At very low tides there are about 4 feet water upon this rock. Other Dangers, There are quite a number of Rocks (which, at this date, 1879, are not buoyed) at the entranc*> of Wellfleet Bay, some of which have but little water upon them at low tide. There are also exten- sive Flats on both sides of the Bay, and the place may at low tide be called a shoal-water harbor. !. ; distance Sailing Directions for Wellfleet Bay and Harbor in Day-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Northward, of from 9 to 11 feet draught, may bring Race Point Light to bear N. % W., distance 3 miles, and make good the course S. J4^ E. 11>6 miles to Black Buoy No. 1, which lies on the Southwest part of Billingsgate Shoal ; leave this Bu03' a short distance to the Northward, and make good the courst E. by S. until Billingsgate LIglit bears N. by E., then steer NE 16 ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. by S. In running this \ut course you will tee a Black Buoy, No. 8, which bearit ttom the light S.SE. 1^ n>>l<^»' ^'^^'^ ^^^^ ^^ DMtntioned Buoy a vhort (listance to the Westward, aiui run about N. by W. for the Red Buoy on Middle Ground. If it be low tide when the Lightbouae beara NW., it is advisable to anchor, and if bound up to town wait until about ^ flood. From this anchorage run for Ued Buoy No. 2, on Middle Ground, bearing about N. by W., leaving it a short dUtanoe to he Eastward, and make goo4 B., on which bearing keep it and steer S. % W. In run- ning this course, if you strike in less than 6 fathoms water before Billingsgate Light bears E.NE., haul to the Westward, and do hot come nearer the shoal than this last-mentioned depth until the light bears E.NE., then make good the course E. by N., and when the water shoals to 4 or 5 fathoms at low tide, anclior, Bil- UngHgate Liglit bearing about NE. J4 E. ; distance 2^ miles. Small vessels of 8 or U feet draught may run E. by N. until the Water shoals to 2;^ fathoms at low tide, and anchor with the light BLDRIDOB'S COAST PILOT. IT it is at Bos- da under ST. until the bearing N. by W. ; distanoe 1^ miles. With winds from N.NW. to SW. by way of E., there is good anchorage in 4 fathoms water, about three and a half miles South from Billingsgate Light. Th« Red and Black horizontal Striped Buoy on Bibb Rock bears North from this anchorage ; distance ^ of a mile. Rook Harbor. The entrance to this Creek or Harbor, which is dry at low ticht bears S. by E >^ E- from Billingsgate Light ; distance 5 mUes. Sailing Directions for Rock Harbor. Vessels from the Northward may bring Race Point Ligbt to bep.7 N. H ^*< distance 3 miles, and make good the course S. ^' E. 11^ miles to Black Buoy, otf Southwest part of Billingsgate Shoal. Leave this buoy a short distance to the Northward, and make good, the course SE. by E. % E. until the water shoals to 2>^ or 8 fathoms at low tide ; then anchor and wait for a pilot. Billingsgate Light bears from this anchorage N.^ W. ; distance about 4 miles. High Water, It is High Water at Rock Harbor about the same time it is in Wellfleet Bay. Brewster Landing. This Landing, which is dry at low tide, bears from Billingsgate Lighthouse about S.SW. ; distance nearly 6}i miles. Sailing Directions for Brewster Landing. Vessels from the Northward may bring Race Point Light to bear N. ^ W., distance 3 miles, and steer S. X B. 11>^ miles, until abreast of Buoy off Southwest part of Billingsgate Shoal. Leave this hv.oy a short distance to the Eastward and run SE. by S. >^ S., until the water shoals to 3 fathoms at low tide, then auchor, or laj' off and on till high water. High Water, It is High Water at Brewster Landing about 10 minutes before it is at Boston. Sursuit Creek, or East Dennis Landing. The entrance to this Creek or Landing, which is dry at low tide, bears from Race Point Light south ; distance about 19 miles. From Billingsgate Liglit SW. % S- ; distance 8 miles. 18 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Sursuit Creek, or East Dennis Landing. Vessels from the Northward may bring Race Point Light to bear North, distance 3 miles, and make good the course South to Sursuit Creek, distance 16 miles. On this course, the Black Buoy off Bil- lingsgate Shoal will be left about 1 mile to the Eastward. Run in on this course until the water shoals to 4 fathoms at Low Tide, then anchor, or lay off and on until high water, when, in order to enter the Creek, a pilot will be necessary. High Water. It is High Water at this place about the same time as it is at Brewster Landing. North Dennis Landing. This Landing, which is dry at low tide, bears from Race Point Light S. % W. ; distance about 19 miles. Sailing Directions for North Dennis Landing. Vessels from the Northward may bring Race Point Light to bear N. % E., distance 3 miles, and make good the course S. J^ W. 16 miles, to North Dennis Landing ; run in until the water shoals to 4 fathoms at low tide, then anchor or la}' off and on until high water. High Water, It is High Water at this place about 10 minutes before it is at Boston. Barnstable Harbor. Sandy Neck Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is situfited on Sandy Neck, West side of entrance to Barnstable Harbor. Bearings and Distances. Sandy Neck Light bears from Race Point L'ght S. by W. J^ W. ; distance 20i^ miles. From Wood End Light SW. by S. ^ S. ; distance 18^ miles. From Billingsgate Light SW. by W. Yt oe as it is at Race Point 3re it is at ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 19 W- ; distance 18 miles. From Gurnet Lights entrance to Pl}'m* outh Harbor, SE. by S. J^ S. ; distance 22 1^ miles. Dangers, This harbor is diflScult of access on account of a Sand Bar which extends across its entrance, and there are usually not more than 6 or 7 feet water upon it at low tide ; the best water across this bar is marked with a Red Buoy, which in sailing in is left to the west- ward. Sandy Neck Light bears from this Buoy SW. by S. ^ S. ; distance 1^ miles. The harbor at low tide may be called a shoal- water place. Sailing Directions for Barnstable Harbor in Day- time, with favorable Winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Northward of not more than 10 or 11 ft. draught may bring Race Point Light to bear N. by E. % B.^ distance about 3 miles, and run S. by W. J4 W. 16 miles, to Red Buoy No. 2, at the entrance of Barnstable Harbor. After making this Buoy, anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms water, or lay off and on until about ^ flood ; then run in, leaving the Red or Bar Buoy a short dis- tance to the Westward. When abreast of this Buoy make good the course S. by W. % W., for Black Buoy No. 1, which is left to tiie Eastward. From this last-mentioned buoy steer for the Lighthouse until within 150 yards from the beach, then follow the shore to the Westward, keeping about 150 yards from it, and anchor in about 2J^ fathoms water at low tide, the Light bearing NB. ; distance 300 yards. In runuing in from Black Buoy, No. 1, to LighthouBO Point, be careful to make good the course, as the flood tide sets strong to the Eastward over Yarmouth Flats.* If bound to Yarmouth or Barnstable, it is advisable to take a Pilot at the anchorage. Directions to enter this Harbor in heavy Northerly Winds. At night, if a vessel of not more than 9 feet draught, with heavy Northerly winds, should be compelled to enter this harbor, it must * Yarmouth Flats lie on the East side of the Channel, and nro dry in Homo places at low tide, A Black Buoy, No. 3, has been placed upon tlio Ilorao Shoe Shoal in Barnstable harbor ; this buoy in going to tlio Wharf is left on the port hand. 20 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. not be attempted until about ^ flood ; then bring Sandy Neck Light to bear SW. by S. J^ S. and run for it; as soon as she strikes 4 fathoms water, steer S. by W. until the Light bears SW. Yi S. ; then make good the course for it till she is J^ mile from it ; then steer a little more Southerly, keeping a sharp lookout for the Lighthouse Point,* and round it within a cable's length, and anchor with the light bearing NE. ; distance 800 yards. Sailing Directions for Vessels from the North- westward. When Gurnet Lights (entrance to Plymouth Harbor) bear W., distance 3 or 4 miles, make good the course S.SE. 20% miles to Red Buoy No. 2, on bar at entrance of Barnstable Harbor ; as soon as this Buoy is made follow the directions before given. High Water. It is High Water at Barnstable Harbor 7 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9% feet. Sandwich Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor, in which there is but little water a<; low tide, bears from Race Point Light SW. ; distance 21 miles. It is High Water at this place about the same time as at Barnstable. Plymouth Harbor. Gurnet Lights, These two Lighthouses, which show fixed White Lights, are located upon Gurnet Point, north side of entrance to Plymouth Harbor ; they are 31 feet apart, and range SE. and NW. Bearings and Distances. Gurnet Lights bear from Race Point Light W. ; distance 16^ miles. From Billingsgate Light NW. bj' W. % W. ; distance 251^ miles. From Thatcher's Island Lights S. by W. K W. ; distance 38 miles. * The Lighthouse stands on the West side of entrance to this Harbor, and if 350 yards from the Point. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 21 )r ; as soon Duxbury Bier lAghU This Lighthouse, which shows a fi:red White Light, is placed in 7 feet water at Low Tide, and bears from Gurnet Lights W. by S. ; distance 2>^ miles. In entering the Harbor this Light is left on the starboard Ifand. Dangers in approaching Plymouth Harbor from the Northward. Howland'a Ledge, This Ledge, which has but 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 4, which is placed off the East side of the Bocks. Gurnet Lights bear from this Buoy S. ; distance 4^ miles. Vessels unacquainted should not attempt to pass between this buoy and the shore. High Pine Ledge, This Ledge, which has but little water upon it at very Low Tides, is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 6, which lies off its Easterp part. Gurnet Lights bear ttom this buoy S. ^ W. ; distance 2 miles. Dangers in approaching Plymouth Harbor from the Southeastward. Vessels approaching Plymouth Harbor from the Southeastward should, in order to avoid the Rocks off Manomet Point, bring the Gurnet Lights in range, and run for them. These last-mentioned Rocks, which are not buoyed at this date (1879), bear about S.SE- fcoxa Gurnet Lights ; distance about 6 miles. Dangers in entering Plymouth Harbor. Upon the Southern side of the Channel lies a Dangerous Shoal, dry in some places at Low Tide, called Brown's Bank, which ex- toiids off Northeasterly from Long Beach, and is marked upon its outer part with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Gurnet Lights bear from this Buoy about N.NW. ; distance % mile. In passing in, this Buoy is left to the Southward. Gurnet Rock, This Rock, which is marked with a Red Buoy No. 2, bears from Gurnet Lights SE. by E. ^ E. ; distance Yi mile. Between the 22 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Buoy and the Lighthouses there are several Rocks having but little water upon them at Low Tide. In passing in, this Buoy is left to the [Northward. Baaa Rock, On which there are about 4 feet water at Low Tide, is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 4. This Buoy bears from Gurnet Lights S. % W. ; distance about yi mile. In passing in, this Buoy ia, left to the Northward. Sailing Directions for Plymouth Harbor in Day. time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Northward may run for Plymouth Lights, bear- ing from S. by W. to S.SW. ; * haul round the Lighthouse Point at u distance of yi mile, leaving the Red Buoys upon Gurnet and Bass Rocks a short distance to the Northward. When abreast of this last-mentioned Buoy, which bears S. % W. from the Light- houses, make good the course W. % S., leaving the Red Buoys to the Northward, and the Black Buoys off Brown's Bank to the Southward. When about midway between Duxbury Pier Light- house and a Black Buoy which bears from the Light about SW. by S. y2 S., distant | mile, make good the course N.NW., leaving the Lighthouse about one cable's length to the Eastward. Whea abreast of it you will see a Black Buoy bearing from it NW. K N., distance % mile. Leave this Buoy a short distance on the Port band, and anchor about 200 yards from it, bearing S.SW., in from 3 to 5 fathoms water at low tide. This anchorage is called the Cow Yard, and is well sheltered in Easterly Gales. Large vessels may anchor in from 5 to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide, the Light bearing from SE. by E. to E.SE. ; distance 300 to 400 yards from it. Vessels from the Eastward, or arour.dCape Cod, may bring Race Point Light to bear E., and make good the course W. As soon as the Gurnet Lights are made bring them to bear from W. to W. NW., and run for them until the Red Buoys on Gurnet and Bass Rocks are made, then follow the directions before given. * In order to clear Rowland's and High Pine Ledges, Plymouth Ligiita must not bear South of S. by W. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 23 From the Southeastward, bring the Gurnet Lights in range, bearing NW., and run for them until they are distant about >i mile, then proceed as before directed. Sailing Direoticas for Plymouth Harbor at Night-time. From the Northward, as soon as P'j^outh Lights are made, bring them to bear S-SW., and run for them on this course. Givt these lights a berth of from 1 to 2 miles, leaving them to the Westward ; continue the course to the Southward until Duxbury Pier Light bears W., then run for it on this course ; if there be no en-or in the compass, oi^ this bearing you will pass in Mid-channel between Brown's Bunk and Bass Rock. Continue the course W. for this light until the Gurnet Lights bear NE. by E., then steei W. by S. until Duxbury Pier Light bears W. by N. J^ N., dis. tance }i. mile ; the course is then W. >^ N. Leaving this Light from 200 to 300 yards to the Northward, continue the course W. J^ N. until it bears N.,* then run NW. by N., leaving it about two cables' lengths to the Eastward, and anchor with the Light bear- ing about E.SE. from 300 to 400 yards distant. Depth of Water entering Plymouth Harbor, In running into Plymouth Harbor at Night (according to direc- tions before given) , with strong winds, it is advisable, when the Gurnet Lights bear NW., to shorten sail and use the lead. With Duxbury Pier Light bearing W., if there be no error in the Com- pass, when Gurnet Lights bear from N.NW. to N., from 3j^ to 4^ fathoms water will be found. From N. to N13. by E., 3^ to On a W. by S. course to Duxbury Pier Li^jht, bearing W. by N. J^ N. 54 "^^^®' ^''o™ 3/'2 to 6 fathoms ; from this last point, on a W. y2 N. course to the Light, bearing N., distant three or four hundred yards, from 3 J^ to 11 fathoms ; fi-om this last point to the anchorage, from 5 to 12 fathoms. The depths above are all given at Low Tide, it will therefore be necessary' at High Water to ♦ A Shoal extends about 200 yards Southeasterly from Duxbury Pier Light- liouse, and is very bold off its Southeastern part. Vessels bound into the Cow Yard Bh«.uld not approach nearer than SOO to 400 yards until the Light bears N. 24 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. \^ fathom make an addition of V/z fathoms to them; at ^ flood should be added. At Night from the Eastward, or around Cape Cod, bring Race Point Light to bear E., and make good the course W. for Gurnet Lights ; as soon as Duxbury Pier Light is made, bring it to bear W. when the courses are as before given. From the Southeastward, bring Plymouth, or Gurnet Lights, in range bearing NW., and run for them until Duxbury Pier Light bears W., then follow the directions before given. Saquiah Roads. In these Roads vessels may find good shelter with winds from W. to N. The best anchorage is in about three fathoms at Low Tide, with Gurnet Lights 'bearing E.NE., distance % mile. At High 'water vessels should anchor in 4^ fathoms. Plsrmouth Inner Harbor. If bound into this Harbor, follow the directions before given until abreast of the Red Buoy on Bass Rock, which bears S- % W. from Gurnet Lighthouses, distance Yi mile. Leave this Buoy a short distance to the Northward and make good the course W. ^ S., leaving the Red Buoys to the Northward and the Black Buoys off Brown's Bank to the Southwai-d. As you approach Duxbury Pier Lighthouse you will see the Black Buoy off Dick's Flats bear- ing about SW. by S. J4 S., distant Ys mile from it. Haul round this Buoy, leaving it 50 feet to the Eastward, and make good the course SW. % S. As you sail in j-ou will see on the port hand, near long Beach Point, a Beacon. Continue the course SW. yi S. until the beacon is in range with Gurnet Lights, bearing E. by N. ^ N., then anchor in from 2^^ to 3>4 fathoms water at Low Tide. This harbor should be used only by small vessels ; large vessels should go into the Cow Yard. If bound up to Plymouth town it is advisable to take a pilot here, as the channel is both narrow and crooked. Duxbury and Kingston* Vessels unacquainted, bound to eltler of these places, should anchor a short distance to the Westword of Duxbury Pier Light, and take pilots. ELDKIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 25 Beating into Plymouth Harbor. If you are bound into this Harbor you should not at Night-time attempt to beat into the Cow Yard, but may anchor in Saquish Roads. The best anchorage is in about 3 fathoms at Low Tide, and 41^ at High Tide, the Gurnet Lights bearing E.NE., distance ^ mile. It is 5idvisable at Night-time to use the lead, and when Gurnet Lights bear N.NW. to stand in for the North side of the harbor until the water shoals to 8^ fathoms at Low Tide, and 5 at High Water ; as soon as you have this depth tack ship, and do not stand to the Southward more than yi mile * (about 400 yards), in order to avoid Brown's Bank, which lies on the South side of the Channel, and is very bold at some parts of it, and you will have 4 fathoms at one oast of the lead, and be ashore at the next before you can tack ; but you may boldly stand into S}i fathoms at Low Tide, and 5 fathoms at High Water, on the North side of tlie Channel, until you reach the above anchorage. High Water, It is High Water at Plymouth Harbor 12 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides XO}^ feet. Soituate Harbor. • This Harbor is formed by a 8mall shallow Cove, which at its entrance has a hard bed of stones and gravel, forming a Bar which varies but little in depth annually. The Northern point of the Harbor is marked with a Light Tower, from which a White Light was formerly exhibited, but for several years it has been discon- tinued. At this date (1870)i however, a small light is shown from the tower by private enterprise. Also, at this date, the Harbor is well buoyed, and strangers, in vessels of from 8 to 9 feet draught, in case of emergency, might at high water run into it. Sailing Directions for Soituate Harb<^ in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Northward pass }^ mile to the Eastward of Minot's Light and make good the coiu'sc SE. by S., in order to avoid the * Or niako short tacks. 26 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Ledges which lie to the Northward of this harbor. A little before mgh Water bring the Light Tower to bear W. and run for it. When about J4 mile from the entrance of the harbor you will see two Buoys, one Red the other Black ; then steer more Southerly, and enter about midway between them. When between these Buoys you will see in a westerly direction two Spindles or Beacons, one Black the other Red ; anchor a short distance outside of them, where you will lie aground at Low Tide, or after passing between these Spindles run directly for the wharves. If the Buoys at the entrance of this place should be gone ^^as they sometimes are), in entering it keep midway between the points of the Harbor, and pass the Spindles as before directed. From the Southeastward, or round Cape Cod, bring Race Point Light to bear SE. by E., and make good the course NW. by W- When the Light Tower is made, bring it to bear W. by N. ; then follow the directions before given. The Light Tower, which is located on the Northern side of the entrance to this Harbor, bears S. by E. J^ E., about 4^ miles from Minot's Lighthouse. From Race Point Light, NW. by W. 23 miles. High Water. It is High Water at Scituate Bar 14 minutes before it is at Bos- ton. Common Tides rise about 9% feet. Oohasset Harbor. This Harbor is situated about 2^ miles in a Southwesterly direc- tion from Minot's Light, and has but little water in it at low tide. It is very difficult of access on account of the numerous Rocks and Ledges that lie off its entrance. In approaching this Harbor there are three Channels (generally used) called Brush Island Channel, Middle Channel, and Eastern Channel. In this work, however, we shall only give directions for Brush Island, or the Western Channel, which has the most water in it at Low Tide, and may be entered by strangers in Daytime, with favorable winds, when the Buoys can be seen. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 27 Sailing Direotions for Cohasset Harbor in Day- time, with favorable Winds and fair weather. From the Southeastward leave Minot's Light about 300 yards to the Southward and run W. On this course 3'ou will see, on the port hand, two Buoys, one Black, the other Red. The Black Buoy No. 1 is placed near the western part of Hogshead Rock, and bears from Minot's Light W. X S. ; distance a little more than J^ mile. The Red Buoy No. 2 is placed off the Northeast part of Grampus Ledge, and bears about W. from Minot's Light ; distance Ji mile. Both these Buoys should be left not less than 300 yards to the Southward. After passing the Red Buoy No. 2, off Grampus Ledge, a Black Buoy, No. 1, will be seen to the Southwestward ; this Buoy lies off the "West side of Chittenden Rock, which is bare at half tide, and bears from Minot's Light W. ^ S. ; distance 1 }^ miles. Continue the course W. until this last-mentioned Buoy bears SW. by S.,then run for it on this course, leaving it 20 yards to the Eastward. When abreast of the last -mentioned Buoy, off Chittenden Rock, another Buoy will be seen (bearing S. by E., distance }( mile) , painted Red and Black in horizontal stripes. This Buoy lies on the Northern side of Barrel Rock, which is bare at half tide. Run directly for this Buoy, leaving it about 20 3-ards to the Eastward. When abreast of this Buoy, off the northern side of Barrel Rock, jou will see a dry Rock, surrounded by ledges bare at low tide ; these are called Sutton Rocks ; and j'ou will also, at the same time, see to the Westward of them another small, round, dry rock : this is called Quamino Rock : the Channel is between this and the Sutton Rocks. When you are abreast of the Red and Black horizontal-striped Buoy off Barrel Rock, run for Quamino Rock bearing S-SW., leaving it 20 yards to the Westward. After passing it bring it to bear N.NW., 75 yards distant, and run S.SEj. about 200 yards ; then anchor in about 8 feet water at low tide. If bound up to Cohasset, it is advisable to take a pilot here. By following the above directions, about 8 feet water at low tide can be brought up to this anchorage. From the Northwestward pass about }{ mile to the Eastward of Harding's Rocks, and bring the Beacon upon them to bear NW. }i N., distance 1 mile, and steer SE. }4 S. If there be no devia- tion from this course you will make the Red Buoy off the Gram- puses a little on the port bow, and the Black Buoy off Chittenden 28 ^LDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Rock on the starboard hand. When this last-mentioned Buoy bears S.PW. run for it, leaving it 20 yards to the eastward. When abreast of it, make good the course S. '/4 W. into the h«»r- bor, passing between the Buoy on Barrel Rock, the Ledges on the West side of the Channel, Sutton Rocks, and Quamino Rock. When this last-mentioned rock bears N.NW., 75 yards distant, run S.SE. about 200 yards, then anchor. If bound up to Cobas- Mt, wait at this place for high water and a pilot. High Water. It is High Water at Cohasset about 12 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise 9% feet. Boston Harbor. Dangers in approaching and entering this Harbor by the Main Ship Channel, Minot's Ledge, Upon one of the outermost of the Cohasset Rocks, on what is called the Outer Minot, which is bare at low tide, a Lighthouse has been erected, which (at this date, 1878,) has a Fog Bell and shows a Fixed White Light. From the deck of a common vessel this light should be visible at least 15 miles in clear weather. The Bearings and Distances of this Light are as follows : Distance. From Cape Ann (Thatcher's Island), SW. by S. nearly 23^ miles. Whistling Buoy off NE. part Graves, .... SE. by S. ^ S. " 1% Boston Lighthouse, . . . SE. }i E. " 6^ Spindle on Harding's Ledge, SE. ^ E. " 4i^ Race Point (Cape Cod), . . NW. >^ W. " 26 J4 Cape Cod Highland Light, NW. 5< W. " 34 1^ To the Westward of Minot's Light there are many bare and sunken Ledges. Strangers, therefore, should not attempt to pass to the Westwart; of it. ELDRIDGE'8 COAST P'LOT. 29 Davia* Ledge, This Ledge, on which there are about 12 feet water, is marked with a Black Buoy No. 1 , which lies upon its Eastern part, and bears E. ^ S. from Minot's Light, distance about ^ mile. There is a depth of 4 fathoms water about midway between the Buoy and Lii'hthouse. But large vessels should not attempt, excepting tlu'ough stress of weather, to pass through it. To the Southward of this Liglithouse there are several Shoal Spots of from 12 to 15 feet, one of which bears SE. by S. ; distance about yi mile. Harding*8 Ledge, The dry part of this ledge is marked with an Iron Beacon 31J^ feet in height, and also aa Iron Bell Boat, which is moored a short distance Northeastward from the Beacon. These Rocks are quite bold, and the lead gives but Uttle warning in approaching them. Bearings and Distances from Beaoon on Harding's Ledge. Distance. Black Buoy No. 1, offPt. AUerton, NW. by W. nearly I54 miles. Boston Lighthouse,* NW. " 2% " Minot's Light, SE. >^ E. " 41^ " SW., nearly ^ mile from the Beacon on Harding's Ledge is a bare Rock. Between this rock and the Flats off Nantasket Beach is a good Channel for vessels of not more than 12 feet draught; but large vessels should use it with caution, as there are several Shoal Spots /ibout half-way from the Beacon to the shore, having as little as 15 and 17 feet water upon them at Low Tide. Thieves* Ledge, Not less than 4j^ fathoms of water has been found upon this Ledge. At this date, 1878, it is not buoyed ; the spot of 4J^ fathoms bears E. by S. ^ S. from Boston Lighthouse ; distance about 2^ miles. The Graves, These are very dangerous Ledges extending about J^ mile in a N.NE. and S.SW. direction. About NE. 5< N., ^ mile from the dry part of these Ledges, is a dangerous Rock called the " Northeast Grave," which is bare at Low Tide. At this date, * Boston Lighthouse shows a Flashing White light. A Steam Whistle placed near it, gives two Blaste of five seconds' duration per minute, at inter- vals of 10 and 4U seconds. 80 ELDKIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 187fl, tWi rock !■ marked with nn Automatic Whistling Buoy, which ii placed a ahort distance Northeast fVom it. Baaringa and Diatancea from thia Buoy. Distance. Epcg Rock Light (rod), N. by W. nearly 4 m ilea. Long laiand Light, W. by S- ^ S. " 4^ " Boston Lighthouse, SW. ^ S. " 2^ " Minofa Light, SB. by S. K S. " 7^ " SW. by W., about ^ mile ft-om the Dry Graves, are several dan- gerous Rocka called the " Roaring Bulls"; they extend about yi mile in a NB. by B. X B. and SW. by W. ^ W. direction. Heveral of these rocks are bare at very low tides. Between the Graves and the last-mentioned rocks there is a Cliaunel having a depth of fVom 5 to 8 fathoms. Strangers should not attempt to go through thia passage. The Eastern part of the Graves are very bold, and there are 10 fathoms water within a stone's throw of the dry rocks. From the Eastward, therefore, in thick weather, the lead gives no warning in approaching these dangerous rocks : 10 fathoms water was found at a distance of about 200 yards N. by B. A-om the Northeast Grave, and 1 1 fathoms at a dhtance of 300 yards B. by S. fVom this rock. Martin's Ledge, Upon the Eastern part of this Ledge, in six fathoms water, is placed a Nun Buoy (No. 2). Boston Lighthouse bears from chis buoy SW. by W. ^ W. ; distance 1^ miles. From Whistling Buoy off the Graves S. J^ W. ; distance 1^ miles. At very low tides there are but 14 feet water upon this Ledge. Tewkshury Rock, This Rock, which at very low tides has but 9 feet water upon it, bears W. ^ N. from the Red Buoy on Martin's Ledge ; distance yi mile. This rock is not buoyed at this date (1878). BoHtan Ledge, This Ledge, which lias 11 feet water upon it, is left to the North- wanl in passing in. It is now marked with a Red Buoy No. 4, which lies on the soutiieasterly side of it. Boston Lighthouse bears from tills l)iioy W. l)y S. nearly ; distance 1 ^ miles. The Buoy oil tills Ledge boiirs A-oni Martin's Ledge SW. yi S. ; distance ^ mile. ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 81 Shag or Egg Rocks. Theee are a group of bare Rocky Islets about 20 or 80 feet above high-water mark, and extending about ^ mile in an Kasterly and Westerly direction. The Southern part of these Islets bear B. ^ N. ftom Boston Lighthouse ; distance al)out >^ mile. These rocks are bold, but they should not be approached nearer than ^ mile by vessels bound in. Point Allerton Bar, From this Point a rocky Shoal extends off in a Northerly direc- tion. It is marked with a Beacon, and also a Black Nun Buoy (No. 8), which, in passing in, le lefL on the port band. This Buoy bears ft-om Boston Lighthouse S. by E. }4 E. ; distance about ^ mile. Mock near Boston Idghthouae, A Rock bearing S. by E. f^om Boston Lighthouse, distance about J/j mile, hii frequently been struck, at very Low Tidea, by vessels of not more than 12 feet draught ; it is not buoyed at this date. Boston Light should not be approached nearer than yi mile (250 yards) by vessels bound out or into the harbor. Naah's Rock. This Rock, on which there are 13 feet water at Lov Tide, Is marked with a Red Buoy (No. 6), which is placed in about 20 feet w ier off the Southern side of the shoal. The Narrows Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. by N. nearly ; distance about 1 mile. Boston Lighthouse NE. ; distance ^ mile. Nash's Rock Ilea nearly mid-channel, and may be left on either hand passing in. Kelp Ledges, These Ledges, which have fVom 10 to 12 feet water upon them at Low Tide, lie nearly on a line and also about midway between Boston and Narrows Lighthouses ; they are not marked with buoys at this date. In sailing up the Lighthouse Channel, these Ledges are left on the starboard hand. Toddy Rocks. These Rocks extend off about Yi mile in a Northerly direction from the base of Nantasket Hill. At a distance of ^ mile from the shore there are, at Low Tide, not more than 2 or 3 feet water upon some of them. A Black Buoy (No. 1), which marks their 82 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. position, is placed in 20 feet water, on the Northern side of the Ledge. This Buoy bears SW. >^ W. from Boston Lighthouse ; distance about l}i mile. In passing in, this Buoy is left on the port hand. MunVa Ledge. N.NE. about Ys mile from the Black Buoy off Toddy Rocks, a Bnoy will be seen painted in Red and Black horizontal Stripes. This Buoy lies upon Hunt's Ledge, which has about 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and bears about SW. by W. from Boston Lighthouse ; distance 1 mile. Between the Buoys off Toddy Rocks and Hunt's Ledge thire is a good channel of from 4 to 5 fathoms water. 'Centurion Bocks, These Rocks, upon which there are about 12 feet water at Low Tide, extend NW. and |3E. : they are marked with two Buoys, one Red, the other Black. The Red Buoy (No. 2) is placed on the Southeast end of the Ledge, and bears from Boston Lighthouse W.SW. ; distance Ijt^o mile. From Narrows Lighthouse, SE. yi S. ; distance about J^ mile. The Black Buoy (No. 5) is placed on the Northwest end of it, and bears from Narrows Lighthouse SE. ^ S. ; distance ^ mile. These Buoys, in sailing up the main Ship Channel, are both left on the port hand. George*8 Island Rocks, I'hese Rocks extend off nearly yi mile from the Eastern part of George*s Island, and are marked with a Black Buoy (No. 7), which is placed on the Eastern part of them in 18 feet WGler. Narrows Lighthouse bears N. % E. ; distance about 400 yards from this Buoy. Between the last-mentioned Buoy and the two Buoys on the Centurion there is a Channel of about 4 fathoms water. False Spit Beacon. A little more thun ^ mile in an Easterly direction from the Narrows Lighthouse is a Beacon, which uarks the Southeast part of a Sand Bar, called " False S^>it." In passing in, this Beacon is left on the Starboard hand. Narrows Lighthouse. This Lig!itbouse is erected on the extreme Southwest part of the Sand Spit, which is on the Northern side of the main Ship Channel, ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 88 nearly opposite Fort Warren, and shows a Red Fixed Light. In order to avoid the shoal water extending from Oeorge's Island, vessels bound up through the Narrows should keep near to this Lighthouse. LovelV8 Island, The Southeast part of this Island lies % mile Northwesterly from the Narrows Lighthouse, and the Island also lies on the Northeasterly side of the Narrows. It is bold on its Southwestern side, but long Ledges, and a Shoal called " Seventy-four Bar," ex- tend from its Northern and Northwestern parts. A Red Buoy (No. 10) marks the Northwestern part of this bar, wbioh, in passing in, is left on the Starboard hand. Galloup*8 Island, This Island lies on the Western side of the Narrows, nearly opposite Lovell's lb! and : its sea-face is protected fVom the force of the waves by a granite sea-wall nearly a mile in length. The East- ern point of the Island is bold, but Shoal Water extends off ttoxa it in a Northerly and Northwesterly direction. A Beacon, painted Black, is erected about ^ mile from it, which will be seen on the port when sailing up the Narrows. This is called ♦' Nix's Mate Beacon." Northeast about }i mile from the Beacon is placed a Black Buoy (No. 9), which, in passing in, is left on the port hand. Deer Island, A dry Shoal extends off about }{ mile in a Southerly direction from this Island, upon the South end of winch is erected a Beacon, which is painted Red, and bears from Long Island Lighthouse * N. by E. % E. ; distance about ^ mile. In passing in, this Beacon is left on the Starboard hand. Long and Spectacle Islands, These Islands are both quite bold on their Northern parts. Shoal Water extends off in a Northerly direction about 200 j-ards ftom tea first-mentioned Island, and about the same distance ft'om the latte). President Roads. There is good anchorage between the Lower Middle, Governor's Island Flats, and Apple Island Fiats on the North, Deer Island * Long Island Lighthouse shows a fixed White Light. 34 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. on the East, Long and Spectacle Islands on the South, and Castle Island on the West. The above anchorage is called " President Roads." Lower Middle* A short distance to the Eastward of Fort Independence (Castle Island) is the Lower Middle, some parts of which are bare at Low Water. This shoal extends E.SE. and W.NW. about 1 mile, and is marked with two Red Buoys, one of which is placed on its Southeast part, the other on the Northwest part. The Red Buoy (iVo. 6) on the Southeast part of it, bears from Long Island Light- house NW. by W. ^ W. ; distance IJ^ miles. From Deer Is- land Beacon W. >^ N. ; distance 1>^ miles. From Black Buoy (No. 9), off Nix's Mate, W. by N. ^ N. ; distance 2 miles. The Red Buoy (No. 10), upon the upper part of Lower Middle, bears from the wharf at Fort Independence E. by N. K N. ; distance % mile. Between the Lower Middle and Governor's Island Flats is a narrow Channel having from 3>^ to 5 fathoms water in it. Stran- gers should not attempt to go through this passage. Castle Island Rocks and Shoals, Shoal Water extends off in every direction from this Island, ex- cepting its Northeast part, which is quite bold. Southeast, about Yi mile from the Island, is placed, in 18 feet water, a Black Nun Buoy (No. 7), which bears from Long Island Light W. by N. % N. ; distance 2% miles. From Black Buoy (No. 9) off Nix's Mate, W. by N. \i N. ; distance 2^ miles. A short distance to the westward of this Buoy, upon some of the rocks, there is but little water. Vessels beating up, when abreast of this Buoy, should keep to the Eastward of a line drawn from the Buoy to the Western part of Governor's Island. ' This precaution should be strictl}' adhered to until more than half-way from the Buoy to the wharf * off Northeast part of the Fort. State Ledge. On the Northern side of the Channel, nearly opposite (and bear- ing NE. by E. y2 E. from Black Buoy, No. 7, ott' Castle Island), is a Red Nun Buoy (No. 8), which is placed a short distance South of the Ledge, which has but 3 or 4 feet water upon it af. Low Tide. In passing in, this Buoy is left on the Starboard hand. ♦ The outer part of this wharf is in sixteen feet water. ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 35 Governor's Island Flats. These Flats extend Southwesterly about ^ mile ttom the South- ern point of the Island. Some parts of them are bare at Low Tide. A Red Buoy (No. 12), placed in 15 feet water, marks the Southwest end of this Shoal. The wharf at Fort Independence bears from this Buoy, SW. by S. >^ S. ; distance about ^ mile. This last- mentioned Buoy, and also the two Red Buoys on Northwest part of Lower Middle and State Ledge, lie nearly on a line. Beating up the harbor, vessels should not pass to the Eastward of this line. Upper Middle, From the Northern part of Castle Island, Shoal Water extends in a Northwesterly direction, nearly two miles, forming what is known as South Boston and Dorchester Flats. About ^ mile N.NW. from the wharf at Fort Independence is a small spot of 3 feet water at Low Tide ; this spot is called the Upper Middle. Strictly speaking, this Shoal is not a Middle Ground, as there is not any Channel to the westward of it. The above-mentioned spot, called the " Upper Middle," is marked with a Black Buoy (No. 9), which is placed a short distance from its Eastern part. This Buoy bears N.NW. about ^ mile from the wharf at Fort Independence. Governor's Island Northwest Flats, These Flats extend about J^ mile in a Westerly direction from the Northwest part of Governor's Island. A Black Buoy (No. 7) is placed on the Northwest part of these flats, which, in passing in, is left about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. Slate Ledge. About half-way from the Buoy on the Upper Middle to the city is a Black Buoy (No. 11). This Buoy lies in 17 feet water, upon the Northeastern part of this Ledge, some parts of which are bare at very Low Tides. There is no passage to the Westward of this Buoy excepting at High Water, and then for only light-draught vessels. 36 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT By Main Ship Channel, Sailing Directions from Cape Cod to Boston in Day-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. When Cape Cod Highland Light beard 3W., about 3 or 4 miles distance, the course to Boston Light (at this date, 1879 *) is NW. by W. }i W. ; distance 42 miles. If there be no deviation from this course, Minot's Light will be left about 1^ miles to the West- ward. As soon as Boston Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NW. by W. X W., and run for it. On this course the Bell Buoy- off Harding's Ledge will be left about J^ mile to the Westward. Continue the course NW. by W. % W- for the Lighthouse, until Point AUerton f bears SW. by W. Boston Lighthouse will then be distant about l}i mile. The course to enter the Lighthouse Channel is then W. % N., leaving the Beacon and Black Buoy off Point AUerton about ^ ™ile on the Port hand. In sailing up the Channel, you will see on the Starboard bow the Red Buoy (No. 6) on Nash's Rock, which is left on the Starboard hand ; you will also see on the Port, the Black Buoy on Toddy Rocks, the horizontal- striped Buoy on Hunt's Ledge, the two Buoys on the Centurion, one Black the other Red, and nearly ahead the Black Buoy off the Southeast part of George's Island : all these last-mentioned Buoys are left on the Port hand. Continue the course W. % N. until the Narrows Lighthouse bears NW. ^ W. ; run for it on this course : give the Lighthouse a small berth of about 150 yards, leaving it on the Starboard hand, and run about NW. ^-^ W. with the eastern point of Galloup's Island on the Port bow. In sailing this last course from Narroivs Light to LovelVs Island, particular attention must be given to the setting of the Current, et^pe- cially with light winds. Tlie Flood sets in strong through Black Jiock Channel } on to George's Island, while the Ebb sets out strong through this channel. Through the Narrows the Flood, during a • The variation of Compass at Cape Cod Highland Light in 1808 was 5^^' oO' W. It is now (1879) 12" 00 W. t This Iteadland or point is on the South side of the entrance to the M,.in Ship Channel. It is a bare hill 115 feet high. X The passage between Narrows Lighthouse and Southeast part of LovcU's Island is called Black Kock Channel. A ledge lies nearly midway the pas- sage, having at very low tides but 7 feet water upon it. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 37 part of its period, sets to tbe Southward, but is not strong ; the Ebb, which is strong, sets to the Northward through this last- mentioned place. When abreast of the eastern part of Galloup's Island, the course is about NW. by N., keeping nearest to Lov- ell's Island, which is quite bold. As j'ou sail through the Narrows, you will see, on the port. Nix's Mate Beacon, and the Black Buoy No. 9, and also, on the starboard, the Red Buoy No. 8, on Seventy- Four Bar. Leave the Black Buoy off Nix's Mate a short distance to the Westward -, and r;in NW. for Deer Island Beacon, about ^ mile, <^" until long Island Light bears W.SW. From this last point liiake good th*^ course W. Yi, N. until you see the Black Buoy No. 7, which lies off Southeast from Castle Island : you will also see the Red Buoy No. 8, which lies on State Ledge. Pass about midway between the two last-mentioned buoys, and steer about NW. Yi N., keeping the Black Buoy No. 9, on the Upper Middle, a little on the Port bow. On this last course you will see the two Red Buoys, Nos. 10 and 12, on NW. part of Lower Mid- dle and off Governor's Island, both of which are left on the Star- board hand. When abreast of Black Buoy No. 9, on Upper Middle (which must be left about fifty j'ards to the Westward), for the deepest water make good the course NW. Yi, N., about J^ mile, leaving a Red Buoy a short distance on the Starboard hand. When abreast of this last-mentioned buoy, steer NW. by W. for the anchorage. Sy Main, Ship Channel. Vessels approaching Boston Harbor at Night will find the fol- lowing directions best adapted to winds from East to Southwest by the way of South. Sailing Directions from Cape Cod to Boston in the Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Run NW. by W. K W. from Cape Cod (Highland Light) as before directed. As soon as Boston Light is made, bring it to bear NW. by W. % W., and run for it. On this course Minot's Light will be left about Ij/j mile to the Westward. Continue the course NW. by W. % W. for the Light, until the Narrows Light (Red) is in range with Long Island Light, bearing NW. by 88 ELDBIDOE'S COaST PILOT. W. ^ W. ; then run in on this range * until Boston Light bears NW. : you are then about half-way from the Beacon on Harding's Ledge to Black Buoy off Point Allerton, and must run a little more Northerly (NW. by W. ;4 W.)> keeping the Red Light on Spit a little open to the Westv/ard of Long Island Light in order to clear Point Allerton Ledge. When Boston Light bears N. by W. >^ W., you are then on a line with the Light and Point Allerton Buoy, and must make good the course W. by N. until the Narrows Light bears NW. ^ W., on which bearing keep it and run for it, leav- ing it about 75 j'ards on the Starboard hand ; then make allowance for the current as before directed. From this last-mentioned light to East point of Galloup's Island the course is NW. J^ W. ; but at night the eye must be the pilot through the Narrows to the Black Buoy off Nix's Mate. It is therefore recommended to keep a sharp lookout for the Eastern part of Galloup's Island, and also the Southern part of Lovell's Island, both of which are bold. When abreast of the Eastern point of Galloup's Island, keep nearest to Lovell's Island. When abreast of Black Buoy off Nix's Mate, run NW. until Long Island Light bears W.SW. ; then malcegood the course W. J^ N., until Long Island Light bears E. by S. ^ S. ; on which bearing keep it, and run W. bj' N. % N.,t keeping a sharp lookout for the Buoy off Castle Island. In running this last course, use the lead, and as soon as the water shoals to 3% fathoms at low tide (which will be five fathoms at high tide), you are then close aboard of the Buoy, and must steer N. by W. % W., about ^ mile, then about NW. ^ N., until up with the Black Buoy on the Upper Middle. Running the two last courses, do not go into less than 4 fathoms water. When abreast of the buoy on the Upper Middle, continue the course NW. ^ N. about Yi mile, then run NW. by W. for the anchorage : upon the last two courses use the lead, and do not go into less than 3 fathoms. , ♦ In ranning in with Long Island and Narrows Light in range, the Beacon on Harding's Ledge will be left about >^ mile to the Westward. This range also leads to Black Buoy No. 3, on Eight Foot Rock, off Point Allerton. t If there be no error in the compass, this course W. by N. H N. from Long Island Light leads direct to Black Buoy No. 7, off Southeast from Castle Island. ELDRIDQB'S COAST PILOT. 39 By Main Ship Channel, Sailing DirebUons tcom. Cape Ann to Boston in Daytime, with favorable Winds and fair weather. Bring Thatcher's Island Lights to bear NE. }i E., distance about two miles, on which bearing keep them, and run SW. ^ W. for Point AUerton ; distance 22 miles. If there be no devia- tion from this course, East Point Light will be left about 1J4 miles to the Northwestward, Halfway Rock 2^. miles, and Whistling Buoy off the Graves, 1J4 miles to the Northward. You will also see the Red Buoys on Martin's and Boston Ledges, which are both left on the Starboard hand. Continue the course for Point AUerton (bearing SW. ^ W.) until Boston Lighthouse beai-s W. >^ N., then make good the course W. by S., and follow the directions before given from Cape Cod to Boston in daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. At night, in fair weather, bring Thatcher's Island Lights to bear NE. ji N., distance 3 or 4 miles, and run SW. J< S. If this course be made good, the following dangers — Halfway Rock, Graves, Martin's, and Boston Ledges — will all be left a good dis- tance on the Starboard hand. When Boston Light bears W.NW. make good the course W. by N. for the Lighthouse Channel, taking care to keep the Narrows Light (Red) just open to the West- ward of Long Island Light, until Boston Light bears N. by W. J^ W., then follow the directions fVom Cape Cod to Boston in the Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. To guide the mariner in thick weather (at this date, 1878,) there is placed near the Lighthouses at Thatcher's Island a Steam Whistle ; at Eastern Point, a Fog Bell ; off the Graves, a Whistling Buoy ; and at Boston Lighthouse, an Air Trumpet, all of which are sounded in Thick weather. The ear, there fore, assisted by the compass and lead, will be the pilot from Cape Ann to Boston Light, when the other Lights cannot be seen. Broad Sound, Dangers in entering Boston Harbor through this Sound. The Graves. In sailing into Broad Sound, those Dangerous Rocks are left on the Port hand. (See description of Graves, p. 29, &c.) 40 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. MaffiVs Ledge, This Ledge, on which there are 18 feet water at Low Tide, bears NW. by N. J4 N. from Green Island,* distance ^ mile. It is not buoyed at this date (1878),and Light-Draught Vessels pay no attention to it passing into this Sound. C(nnnti8Btoner*8 Ledge. This Ledge, on which there are 16 feet water at Low Tide, is not buoyed at this date (1878). It bears from the Northerr point of Green Island NW. by W. >4 W., distance about J^ mile. In sailing into Broad Sound, this Ledge is left on the Port hand. DeviVa Back, This Ledge, which in several places is bare at Low Tide, extends about 300 yards in a NE. by N. and SW. by S. direction. It is marked with a Black Can Buoy (No. 1), which is placed on the Northern side of the Ledge. Long Island Light bears from this Buoy W. by S. % S-, distance 2^ miles ; Northern part of Green Island, E. ^ S., distance about ^s mile. The Eastern part of these Rocks are very bold, and 6 fathoms water was found within & stone's-throw of them. From the Eastward, in thick weather, bound into the Sound, the lead, therefore, gives no warning in ap> proaching them. JldeHdge*8 Ledge. Which has but little water upon it at Low Tide, Is marked with a Black Can Buoy (No. 3), which is placed on the Northwest part of it. Long Island Light bears from this buoy W. by S. J^ S-, dis- tance 2yi miles; Narrows Light S. by W. ^ W., distance \yi miles. Strangers beating into the Sound should not pass to the East- ward of this buoy. Ram Head Meef, From the Northeastern part of Lovell's Island a Reef extends off about ^ mile in a NE. by N. direction. Some parts of this Shoal are bare at Low Tide. It is marked with a Black Can B-ioy (No. 5) , which is placed off its Northeast point. Long Island Light bears ♦ Coining from the Noftlieastward, bound into Broad Sound, this is tha frst Island met with on the South side of the Channel. ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 41 firom this Buoy W. by S. }i S., distance about l}^ miles ; Narrows Liglit, S. ^ Em distance lyi mile. From tlie Black Buoy on the Devil's Back to the Black Buoy off Ram Head Reef, the channel is narrow, and vessels beating into Broad Sound at Low Tide should not stand but a short distance to the Northwest, until after passing Ram Head Buoy. The lead gives but little warning in approach- ing this Reef. Chreat Fawn Bar. This Bar extends off from the middle of Deer Island in an East- erly direction more than lj4 miles, and is dry at Low Tide, about Ys mile from the shore. Upon the Eastern eud of this part a Beacon is erected, which is painted red, and has a square granite base surmounted by a granite cap, with iron spindle and cage. This Beacon bears from Whistling Buoy, off the Graves, about W. ^ S., distance 3^ miles; from Nahant Head SW. by S., dis- tance 4^ miles. About E.SE., >^ mile f^-om the Beacon, is placed in about 13 feet water, at Low Tide, a Red Can Buoj' (No. 2), which is intended to mark the deepest water across this Bar. From }£ to }4 mile in an Easterly' direction from the Baoy there are sev- eral shoal spots of from 10 to 12 feet water. This Buoy bears from Whistling Buoy off the Graves W. ^ S., distance 3^ miles ; Long Island Light from it, SW. J^ W., distance 1^ miles. Passing in, this Buoy is left about 25 yards on the Starboard hand. Idttle Fawn Bar, This Shoal extends off about E. by S. 1^ miles from the South- em part of Deer Island, and is dry at Low Tide about |4 mile from the shore. About 200 yards to the Eastward of the Dry Bar, in 13 feet water, is placed a Red Can Buoy (No. 4) , which is intended to mark the deepest water at Low Tide (13 feet) across the Bar. About 250 yards East from the Buoy there are 10 feet water, and E. by S. Ys mile but 8 feet. This last spot is called the Middle Ground, and bears from the Red Buoy on Ram Head Reef N. by W. % mile. Long Island Light b jars from the Buoy on Little Fawn Bar SW. % S., distance \}i miles ; Beacon off South Point of Deer Island, SW. by W. \i W., distance ^ mile. this is the 42 ELDRIDQE'S .'AST PILOT. Hemarks, In entering Boston Harbor by the way of this Soond, there are two passages, called the North and South Channels. The North Channel, which is marked with two Bed Can Buoys, is across Great and Little Fawn Bars, and has a depth of about 12 feet water at Low Tide. The South Channel (which at this date [1878] is marked with three Black Can Buoys) has a depth of about 20 feet at JjOw Tide. With favorable winds, entering Broad Sound, a ves- sel cannot sail in the deepest water on one direct course for Long Island Light, in either of these Channels. Sailing Directions trom. Cape Ann to Boston, hy the way of South Channel (Broad Sound), in Dajrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels passing between Thatcher's Island and the Londoner, will, after leaving the latter, steer SW. >4 W., which is the direct course ft-om the Londoner to the Graves. As soon as Long Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear SW. by W. ^ W-, and run for it. On this last course, if there be no error in the compass, the Whistling Buoy off the Graves will be left on the Port hand about ys mile ; and as you approach nearer Long Island Lighthouse, you will see nearly in line three Black Can Buoys. The first is on the Northern part of Devil's Back ; the second on Northwestern part of Alderidge's Ledge ; and the third off Ram Head Ledge. Continue the course SW. by W. ^ W. for the Lighthouse, until the first Black Can Buoy bears S. by W. ; then steer more Southerly, leav- ing the three Black Buoys about 150 yards on the Port hand.* On these courses you will have a depth of not less than 20 feet water at Low Tide. When abreast the Black Buoy No. 5, off Ram Head Reef, make good the course W. by S. ^ S<, until Nix's Mate Beacon bears S. by E. ; then follow the directions fc Main Ship Channel fVom Cape Cod to Boston in Daytime, with fair weather. The Southern Channel of Broad Sound is perfectl}' safe for vessels of 20 feet draught, but should not be attempted by strangers in large or heavy-draught vessels when the Buoys cannot be seen. • The current of Ebb between the Buoys on Ram Head Ledge and Alde- ridgj's Ledge sets strong to the Eas^ yard ; tlierefore, with light winds, bound o-ut or in, care must be taken not to be carried on to Alderidge's Ledge. ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 43 DireotlonB for Vessels of not more than 10 or 11 feet draught, entering Broad Sound in thick weather. Having made the Whistling Buoy off the Graves, bring it to bear E. by N., about ^ mile distant, and make good tlit. "ourseW. by Q. ; when the water shoals to 3^ fathoms, at Love Tide, Long Island iiight will bear SW. by W. >4 W., distance 2^ miles. From this last point steer SW. by W. ^ W., which course made good, leads across Fawn Bars, in about 11 feet water at Low Tide, into the Ship Channel. It is, however, advisable for vessels of more than 10 feet draught to wait, if possible, until at least ^ flood before running in upon these courses. In running W. by S. in thick weather, fVom the Whistling Buoy off the Graves until you shoal to 3^ fathoms water, it is highly important that allow- ance should be made for the Tide, which rises and falls about 1 ^ fathoms at this place. It must be evident, therefore, that 3}4 fathoms, at ^ flood becomes 4 fathoms, at ^ flood 4^ , and at high water 5 fathoms. The judicious mariner will therefore make allowance for this rise and fall as circumstances require, before running SW. by W. ^ W. into the Harbor, or Ship Channel. Directions for approaching Nantasket Roads in thick Weather. Vessels of not more than 12 feet draught fVom the Eastward, making or hearing the Whistling Buoy off the Graves, may bring it to bear N. by E., distance % mile, and make good the course S. by W. 2^ miles, or until the Fog Signal at Boston Lighthouse bears W. by N. ; the course is then W. }i S. into the Roads. In running this last course, the ear, assisted by the compass and lead, will be the pilot. The course made good S. by W. from Whistling Buoy off the Graves, passes }i mile to the Westward of the Red Buoy No. 2, off Martin's Ledge, ^ mile to the Eastward of Red Buoy No. 4, off Boston Ledge, and 1}^ miles to the East- ward of Boston Lighthouse. 44 ELDRIDOE'B COAST I'lLOT. Balling Dlreotloni from Oape Ann to Boston, by the way of North Channel (Broad Sound), In Day- time, with favorable wlnda and fair weather. Veisels pawing between Thatcher'B Island and the Londoner • win, after leaving the lattpr, run SW. ^ W. for Long Island Light ; If the course Is made good, Halfway Rock will be left about \}i miles to the Westward, and Whistling Buoy off th^ Graves about the same distance to the Eastward. As soon as Long Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear SW. >4 W., and run for it on this bearing. As you approach it, you will see directly ahead A Red Can Buoy, No. 2, which marks the deepest water (about 12 Ibet at Low Tide) across Great Fawn Bar. Pass close to this Buoy, leaving it to the Westward, and run ^ mile SW. by W. yi W. for Red Can Buoy No. 4, on Little Fawn Bar. This last Buoy marks the deepest water (about 12 feet at Low Tide) across the Bar, and must also bo loft a short distance to the Westward. When abreast of it, make goml the course SW. for Long Island Light, and proceed according to directions before given. Sailing Directions from Cape Ann to Boston (by way of Broad Sound) in the Night-time, with fiavorable winds and fair weather. ^ When Thatcher's Island Lights bear W.NW., distance about 3 miles, make good the course SW. by W. ^ W., and as soon as Long Island Light is made, bring it to bear SW. by W., and run for it on this bearing, Continue this course until the Light is dis- tant about J^ mile; then proceed according to directions before given ft'om Capo Cod to Boston at Night-time. Although this bearing SW. by W. for Long Island Light crosses both Great and Little Fawn Bars, where there is, in some places, not more than 1 1 feet water at Low Tide, yet I consider it the safest course for strangers at Night, in vessels of not more than 10 foet draught. If there should be a heavy sea on the Bars, it is recommended to wait until about half flood, when 14 feet may be * Tho Londoner is a dangoroua Ledge, dry at low tide, and extends in a NE. by N. «nd 8W. by 8. direction about i mile. It is marked with an Iron Bptndle 45 feet high, with an Octagonal Cage on top. This Spindle bears from the Northern Lighthouse on Thatcher's Island SE. ; distance i mile aearly. ELDUIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 45 carried on this course over them without danger. From }^ to J4 flood, at Night, you may beat nat'ely into Hroad Sound if your ves- gcl does not draw over 1 2 feet water, with Long Island Light bear- ing fVom SW. >4 W. to SW. by W. 'A W. Nantasket xtoads in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Leave the Black Buoy No. 3, off Point Allerton, about 100 yards to the Soutliward, and make good the course W. by N. for the Horizontal-Striped Buoy otf Northern part of Hunt's Ledge ; leave this last-mentioned Buoy a few yards to the Southward, and run W* }4 S- until Long Island Lighthouse is well open to the Westward of George's Island ; then haul up for it, bearing NW. j4 N., and run in, under short sail, midway between the Black Buoy No. 1, off Eastern part of Hospital Shoal and George's Island, and anchor in from 3^ to 5 fathoms water, the Northwestern part of George's Island bearing about E.NE. Nantasket Roads at Night, with favorable winds and fair weather. Follow the directions given from Cape Cod to Boston in the Night, with favorable winds and fair weather, until Boston Light bears NE- by E. ^^ E., on which bearing keep it, and run SW. by W. -yi W., keeping a sharp lookout for the Buoy on the Cen- turion. If there be no deviation from this course, tlie, Red Buoy No. 2, on Southeast part of the Centurion, will bo left about 100 yards on the Starboard hand. When abreast of it, steer W. by S. j4 S., until Long Island Light bears NW. ^ N. ; then run for it on this bearing under short sail, and auv'hor when Boston Light is shut in behind George's Island, in from 3^ to 5 fathoms water. In running in SW. by W. ^ W. ficn Boston Light, if you should not make the Buoy on the Centurion : When the Narrows Light bears NW. by N., steer W. by S. }i S., until Long Island Light bears NW. J^ N. ; then proceed as before directed. Ves- sels from the Eastward bound into Nantasket Roads may bring the Narrows Light to bear W. by N. J4 N., and run for it on this bearing, until Boston Light bears NE. by E. ^^ E. ; then follow the directions before given. In Thick weather, at Daytime, when Boston Lighthouse cannot be seen, the ear, assisted by the ^ ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. compass and eye, will be the pilot into Nantasket Roads. Vessels from Nantasket Roads u I to the city may pass between George's and Galloup's Island into the Nanows. JPresident Roads, If intending to anchor in these Roads, follow the directions before given for Broad Sound and Main Ship Channel, at Night or Day, until Long Island Light bears W-SW. ; then make good the course W. ^ N. until Long Island Lighthouse bears SE. by E : then haul in SW. by S., and anchor in from ^% to byi fathoms water, the Light bearing about E. by S. j^ S. Back or Western Wiy- The entrance to this Passage is between he Southwest end of Long Island, Moon Head, Thompson's and J tectacle Islands. Sailing Directions for Jack or Wentem Way in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Follow the directions for Nantasket Roads in Daytime until abnmst of Red Buoy No. 2, on Southeast part of Centurion ; then run W.SW. until Long Island Lighthouse is well open to the Westward of George's Island, bearing NW. }^ N. ; then run for it OL this course, passing about midway between George's Island and Black Buoy No. 1, oflf Eastern part of Hospital Shoal. When cii'? South part of George's Island bears E. by S., make good the course W. by N. until you open the Passage between Rainsford Island and the Southeast point of Long Island ; then steer SW. by W., keeping about midway between the two Islands. Continue the course SW. by W. until the B.ick Way opei's ; then steer N.NW. through the Passage, keeping nearest to Long and Spec- tacle Islands. When the Northern part of the last-mentioned Island bears E. by S-, run about N. until abreast of Black Buoy No. 7, off SE. part of Castle Island ; then proceed according to directions before given. About 9 feet water can be carried through this Channel it Low Tide. Vessels with strong NW. winds beating up the Harbor may, on the first of the flood, use this Channel; and vessels with SE. winds, on the first part of the ebb, beating down into Nantasket Roads or to sea, should ma'iie use of this Passage, as the current of ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 47 ebb sets strong to the Northward through the Narrows, and U requires a smart-wurking vessel to beat through this Passage with SE. winds and an Ebb Tide. In beating through the Back or Western Passage, the deepest water will be found nearest Long and Spectacle Islands. Directions between Long and Spectacle IslandB. Vessels with NW. winds beating up the Back Way, when abreast of the SW. end of Long Island, will see on the Eastern side of the Channel a Red Buoy, No. 2, which lies off the SE. part of Sculpin Ledge,* and is intended to mark the Channel between Long and Spectacle Islands. When this Buoy is in range with Long Island Light, bearing about NE. by E<, run for it, leaving it about 20 yards on the Port hand. When abreast of it, make good the course NE. by N., leaving the Black Buoy off Hotel Wharf about }i mile to the Eastward. When this last-mentioned Buoy bears SE. by S., haul sharp upon the wind into the Main Ship Channel. About 12 feet water at Low Tide can be carried through between Long and Spectacle Islands. This last-mentioned depth (12 feet) is about SW. by W. H mile from the Red Buoy off Sculpin Ledge. The space between Point AUerton and Point Shirley is fUll of Islands ; the several Channels which lead into Boston Harbor are between them. The most common in use is the Main Ship Chan- nel, North and South Broad Sound Channels, and Back or Western Waj'. The H^'pocrite, Black Rock, and Shirley Gut Channels are considered as being too intricate for strangers; sailing diredioHB for them are, therefore, om^'*:ed. * Sculpin Ledge lies about balf-way r d nearly on a line between the 8W. and S. points of Long and ifpectacle Islands. It is a long Reef extending E.SE. and W.NW. nearly 400 yards. Several of the rocks upon it nro awnih at low tide. A Red Buoy, No. 2, is placed off its SE. part. In beating up or down the Back Way, in order to clear this ledge, care must be taken to koep GoTernorV, Island open to the westward of Spectacle Island. 48 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Hingham Harbor. For approaching and entering this Harbor, follow the directions before given for Nantasket Roads, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather, when the eye, assisted by the compass, is pilot. Bring Boston Lighthouse to bear NE. by E. ^ E., on which bearing keep it, and run SW. by W. H W. until you open the Passage called Nantasket Gut ; * then run through this Passage, keeping nearest Windmill Point, which is bold, and is left on the Port hand. When abreast of this Point, make good the course S. by E. }4 E. to Black Buoy No. 1, off Bumkin Island Shoal, which you will leave about 75 yards on the Port hand. From this Buoy steer SE. by S. j4 S., leaving Bumkin Island (the Western point of which is quite bold) about 150 yards to the Eastward. When abreast of this Island you will see nearly ahead two Buoys, one Black, the other Red ; leave the Red Buoy No. 2 about 20 yards to the Westward, and run S. }4 W- about ^ mile ; then S. by E. % E., for Crow Point Wharf (distance about }4 mile), which is left about 150 yards to the Westward. When abreast of this wharf, you will see nearly ahead a Black Buoj' No. 3, which lies on the West side of Channel Rock. Run for this Buoy, bearing S. by E. % E., and haul round it at a distance of 50 yards, leaving it on the Port hand ; then run E. j{ S. about }i mile, and anchor be- tween Chandler's and Sailor's Islands in from 2J^ to 3^ fathoms at Low Tide. About 12 feet water can be carried at Low Tide from Bumkin Island to this anchorage. From this point to the town, it is recommended for strangers to take pilots, as the Chan- nel is both narrow and crooked. The Channel is to the Eastward of Sailor's Island, and about 8 feet water at this date (1878) can be caiTied at Low Tide to the first wharf, f • The passage between Peddock's Island on the West and Windmill Point on the East, is called Nantasket Gut. The entrance to this Gut bears South flrom (Jeorge's Island ; distance about one mile. t In entering Hingham Harbor, three small Islands will be seen lying appar- ently in the middle of the passage. The most Northerly of these is called Chandler's Island, the most Westerly Kagged Island, and the most Easterly Sailor's Island. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 49 Weymouth Back River. The entrance to this River, which is between Grape Island op the North and Long Neck on the South, bears S.SE. from Pig Rock Beacon ; distance 1 mile. At High Tide, about 17 feet water can bo carried to the Bradley Fertilizer Company's Works, which is about ^ mile fVom its entrance, and about 15 feet to the Coal Wharf, which is J^ mile above these works. Sailing Directions for Weymouth Back Blver in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. By the following directions, at High Water, vessels of not more than 10 feet draught, with winds from N.NW. to NE., may safely enter this River. FroL. the Southward or Eastward, follow the directions before given for Boston Harbor until Boston Lighthouse bears NE. by E. ^ E. ; then make good the course SW. by W. % W. When the passage called Nantasket Gut * is fairly open, then run in, keeping nearest Windmill Point, which is on the Eastern side of this Gut ; bring this last-mentioned Point to bear NE. by N. J4 N., and make good the course SW. by S. % S. As you sail in, you will see to the South westward Pig Rock Beacon ; continue tne course SW. by S. j^ S. until this Beacon bears SW. by W . ; then run for it on this course, passing between two small Islands called Prince Head and Sheep Island ; the latter, which is low, is left on the Port hand. When about J^ mile from Pig Rock Beacon there ^ill be seen, about ^ mile to the Southward of Sheep Island, another Island, which is quite high ; this is called Gi.ipe Island. When the Western part of this last-named Island bears S. J^ E., run for it on this course until the Western part of Sheep Island bears NE. by N. ; then steer SW. by S. until Pig Rock Beacon bears N. by W. If it is Low Tide, then anchor in from 3 to 4 • The passage between Peddock's Island on the West and Windmill Point on the East is called Nantasket Gut. The centre of this Gut bears South from George's Island ; distance about 1 mile. i.-S' --:~^J- IjO ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. fathoms water, with the first Buoy (Black) , at the entrance of the River, bearing SB. ; distance about J^ mile. At ?^ Flood, in order to avoid the Shoal Water and Rocks which extend off from the Northwest part of Grape Island, steer from this anchorage S.SE. until the first Buoy (Black) at the entrance bears about East ; then run for it, leaving it close to on the Port, and haul round the next Buoy (Red) close to, leaving it on the Starboard, and steer to the Southward, leaving one Black Buoy on the Port, and two Red Buoys on the Starboard hand ; haul round the last Buoy off the Point, and if bound to the Bradley Fertilizer Company's Works, keep tlie outer end of the wharf a little on the Starboard bow ; but if bound up to the Coal Wharf, after passing the above works keep about in the middle of the River. Strangers should not attempt to beat into Wej'mouth Back River. It is advisable for vessels of more than 10 feet draught bound to this river, to anchor in Nantasket Roads and employ a Tug Boat. The distance from the above Roads to the entrance of Weymouth Back River is 3 miles. Sigh Water. It is High Water in Weymouth B^-k River about the same time that it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9% leet. ELDRIOQE'S COAST FILOT. 51 Quincy or Weymouth. Sailing Directions for approachmg and entering Weymouth Fore River in Daytime, with favor- able Winds and fair weather. After passing through Nantasket Gut, according to directions be- fore given for Hingham Harbor, bring Windmill Point (which is on the Eastern side of the Gut) to bear NE. by N. >4 N., on which bearing keep it, and run SW. by S. J54 S., until Pig Rock Beacon bears SW. by W. ; then run v..rectl3' for it on this course, until midway between Prince Head on the Starboard, and Sheep Island * on your Port hand ; then run for the Western part of Grape Island (which is quite high), bearing S. J^ E. On this last course Pig Bock Beacon will be left about ^ mile to the Westward, and Sheep Island about ^ mile to the Eastward. Continue the course S. Yz B. for the Western part of Grape Island, until the Western part of Sheep Island bears NE. Yz N., on which bearing keep it, and run SW. J^ S. until you make three Buo3's, which lie off to the Northward of Weymouth Great Hill. The first of these Buoys is No. 1, Black, and lies off the Northwest side of Jacknife Ledge ; the second is Red, No. 2, and lies on the West side of the Channel ; the third is Red and Black, horizontal-striped, and lies upon a large rock which is on the West side of the Channel. The Black Buoy is left on the Port, the others on the Starboard hand. After passing these Buoj's, a pilot is necessary, as the river is both nar- row and crooked. If the wind should not be strong enough to sail against the current through Nantasket Gut, bring the South part of George's Island to bear NE. J^ E., on which bearing keep it, and run SW. Yi W., which will take you betiveen the Northwest point of Peddock's Island and Sunken Ledge Beacon. As you sail in on this course SW. Y^ W., you will see a Red Buoj', No. 4, which lies off the Northeast side of a rock. When this Buoj'^ bears SW. by S. Y^ S., run for it, leaving it about 20 yards to the Westward, and steer SE. by E. Y^ E., leaving Pig Rock Beacon 250 yards to the Southward. When the Western part of Grape Island bears S- Y2 E., the courses are as before given. ♦ This is a small island bearing E. i S. from Pig Rock Beacon ; distance about \ mile. At low tide, vessels of 10 feet draught may approach its west- f rn part as near as \ mile. 52 ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. At Low Tide, vessels of not i^ore than 8 feet draught, from the city or Broad Sound, bound to Quincy or Weymouth, may leave Long Island Light about ^ mile to the Eastward, and run SW. by S., leaving the Black Buoy No. 1, on rock off Hotel Wharf, ^^ mile to the Eastward. As you sail between Long and Spectacle Islands, the Buoy No. 2, on Sculpin Ledge, will be seen nearly ahead. Bring this Buoy to bear SW. by S., and run for it, leav- ing it on the Starboard hand about 20 yards, and steer for Moon Head, bearing SW. by W., until the Southwest end of Long Island bears B. by S. ; then run SE. by S. >^ S., passing mid- way between Hangman's Island and Sunken Ledge Beacon. After passing the Beacon, you will see the Red Buoy No. 4, which bring to bear SE. by S. Yz S., and steer for it, leaving it 20 jards to the Westward. From this last Buoy steer SE. by E. J^ E., leav- ing Pig Rock Beacon 250 yards to the Southward ; then proceed according to directions before given. Neponset River. Vessels bound into this river, when about Yi mile to the North- ward of Spectacle Island, will see to the Southwestward, about ^^ mile distant, a Red Buo}',* No. 2. Bring this Buoy to bear SW. by W., and run for it on this course, leaving it a short distance on the Starboard hand, and steer W. by S. ^ S., passing midway between two Buo3-s, one Red, the other Black. From this last- mentioned point the course is SW. K W. to Red Buoy No. 6. When abreast of this Buoj' (which is left on the Starboard hand), it is recommended to anchor and take a pilot, as the Channel above this is both narrow and crooked. * This Buoy bears from the Northern part of Spectacle Island W. ; distunco A mile. From N£. end of Thomson's Island, N. ^ W. ; distance \ mile. ELDRIDOB'8 COAST PILOT. 63 Lynn Harbor. This Harbor is between Boston Liglithouse and Nahant, or on the Northern side of what is called Broad Sound. Strangers in vessels of more than 7 feet draught should not attempt to enter this place without pilots, as the Channels are narrow, crooked, and shallow. With a good pilot, about 12 feet water (at this date, 1879,) can be carried to the city at High Water. With Northerly winds, it is usual for vessels to enter Boston Harbor and anchor in President Roads until the winds are favorable for entering this place. Sailing Directions for approaching Lynn Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from Cape Cod may bring Minot's Lighthouse to bear SE. by S. H S., and steer NW. by N. ^ N. for Whistling Buoy off the Graves; distance 7^ miles. Leave this Buo}' a short dis- tance to the Westward, and nuiko good the course NW. for Bass Point.* When this point bears NE. by E., distance j4 mile, then wait for a pilot. Vessels passing between Thutoher's Island and the Londoner, will, after leaving the latter, steer SW. }4 W. until Nahant Head bears W. ; then haul round it at a distance of ji mile, and wait for a pilot. Strangers in vessels of not nioro than 7 feet draught may enter this Harbor at }^ flood by the following directions : — Leave Bass Point (which is bold) ^ mile to the Eastward, and run NW. by N. As you sail in you will ««»« two Buoys, one Black, the other Bed. The Red Buoy No. 2 lies off to the Southwestward of Lob- ster Rocks, which are bare at very Low Tides. The Black Buoy No. 1 lies to the Southwani of White Rocks, which are awash at Low Tide. When this last-mentioned Black Buoy bears N.NW., run for it, leaving it about AO yards to the Westward. When abreast of it, steer NE., leaving the Red Buoy No. 4, off Blpck Rocks, about 100 yartls to the Kastwai-d. From this last-mentioned Buoy make good the course N. by E. yi E. for the city. These * The western part of Nahant in oalUd Buta Point, it as near as H mile witliout danger. Vessels may approach 54 BLDRIDOB'S COAST PILOT. courses into Lynn Harbor should not be attempted until after ^ flood. It is High Water in Lynn Harbor 17 minutes before it is at Bos- ton ; common tides rise about 9>4 feet. From Boston or President Roads bound to Lynn, see sailing directions for Broad Sound in Dayt'u. u Chelsea Creese and Saugua Biver, : Ine'u 1 jint, on the West side of tlie entrance to this River and Creek, beai. • -.out N.NW. from Bass Point, the Western part of Nahant, distance \^^ mile. Strangers without a pilot in vessels of about 7 feet draught may, with favorable winds, at % flood, enter as far as the mouths of this Creek and River. SaiUng Directions for Chelsea Creek and Saugus River, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward or Eastward, follow the directions for Lynn Harbor, and at ^ flood leave Bass Point (which is bold) }i mile to the Eastward, and run NW. by N. On this course you will see the Red Buoy on Lobster Rocks, and also the Black Buoy No. 1, off White Rocks.* Leave this last Buoy 100 yards to the Eastward, and run N. ^ W., leaving the two Black Buoys, Nos. 3 and 5, about 75 yards to tiie Westward. From the last Buoy the course is N. by E. ^ E. until the Black Buoy No. 7, oflT Pine's Point, at the entrance of the River, bears N. by W. ; then run for it, leaving it a short distance to the Westward. From this last Buoy haul up NW. >4 W., leaving the Buoy No. 2, on Round Rock, 30 yards to the Eastward. When abreast of this Buoy, steer W.NW. until the draw in the Railroad Bridge bears N. by W. J^ W. ; then anchor a short distance from it. i^bove this no intelligible directions can bo given. Strangers, therefore, should not attempt to go above this anchorage without a pilot. It is High Water at the mouth of Chelsea Creek and Saugus River 15 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9^ feet. * Bound into Lynn, the Bliick Buoy off White Bocks is left to the Westward. Bound into Saugus Kiver, it is left to tlie Eastward. SLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Co Nahant Harbor. Sailing Direotions for Nahant Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Bun for the SE. part of Nahant (generally called Nahant Head), bearing NE. until you make the Spindle on Bass Rock,* and the Black Buoy No. 1 on Joe Beach Ledge. This Ledge has but 3 feet water upor it at Low Tide. Continue the course NE. until this Buoy bears N. hy W. ; then steer for it, leaving "; about 100 feet to the Westward. On this course you will ale le 8 Shag Rocks and Pea Island (which are both bold) a sb-^rt d.o,?.nce to the Eastward. When abreast of the Buoy, run N. by W. about 150 yards, and anchor in about 2 fathoms water at Low Tide (which will be 3^ fathoms at High Tide). This !" .arbor is ex- posed to Southerly winds. Swampscott Harbor. Seven-eighths of a mile N.NE. from the Eastern point of Nahant is a small rocky Island called Egg Rock. This Island is bold, and extends nearly East and West about }i mile, and is 60 feet in height. A Lighthouse has been erected upon its summit, which shows a Red Fixed Light, and is intended as a guide to Swamp- scott Harbor. Sailing Directions for Swampscott Harbor in Day- time, and also at Night, when the Lights can be seen. From Cape Cod. or the South westward, bring Egg Rock Light to bear NW. by N., and run for it, leaving it about ^ mile to the Westward. Wlien abreast of the Light, run N.NW., and anchor in from 5 to 7 fathoms water. At Night, run for the Light (as before given) , until abreast of it ; then haul round it to the West- * This Rock is bare at half tide. There is a good channel between the Spin- dle on this rock and the Buoy on Joe Beach Ledge. Entering by this passage, do not approach nearer to the Spindle than 125 yards, and nearer than 75 yards to the Buoy. 5(5 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. ward at a distance of % mile from it, until it bears S. by E. ^ E. ; then run N. by W. ^ W., and anchor as before directed. From the Northeastward, after passing between Thatcher's Island and the Londoner, make good the course SW. % W. until Egg Rock Lighthouse bears W. by S. ; then run for it on this course. If there be no error in the compass, Halfway Rock will be left \% mile to the Northward, and the Buoys off Great Tig Rocks ^ mile to the Northward. When the Spindle on Dread Ledge * bears NW. by W. ^ W., steer W. >4 N., leaving it about Yi mile to North- ward, and anchor in from 5 to 7 fathoms water. At Night, when Thatcher's Island Lights bear W. NW., distance about 3 miles, make good the course SW. by W., and as soon as the Red Light upon Egg Rock is made, bring it to bear West, and run for it on this bearing, leaving it ^ mile to the Soutlivvard. When the Light bears S. by E. K E., run N. by W. yi W., and anchor as before directed. In coming from sea. Egg Rock Light may be safely run for on any bearing from W. Yz S. to NW. The Rock called the Roaring Bull is awash at Low Water, and is marked with .a Red Buoy, No. 2. This Buoy bears from Marblehead Light S. by W. ]4 W., distance 1^ mile; from South part of Tinker's Island SW. by S., distance % mile. Vessels from the Eastward bound to Swampscott or the Westward may leave the Buoy on the Roar- ing Bull about J^ mile to the Northward, and run NW. until it bears NE. by E. %. E., on which bearing keep it, and run SW. bj' W. ^ W. On this course the Great Pig Rocks (which are above water), Outer Breaker, Southern Shoal, und Southwest Breaker, will be left to the Southward ; Middle Breaker, Dolphin Rock, Sammy's Rock, Ram Island, and Little Pig Rock, to the Northward. After passing these Rocks, f continue the course SW^. ^y W. % W., until the Spindle on Dread Ledge bears NW. hy W. Y W. ; then proceed and anchor as before directed. Swampscott Harbor is exposed to winds from S- to E.NE. ♦ This Ledge extends from Philips* Point, and is marked on its Southern part with a Spindle, which bears from Egg Rock Lighthouse N. by E. i E. ; distance 1^ mile. t The passage between thesf^ Rocks is about 4 mile in width. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 67 Marblehead Harbor.* Dangers in entering this Harbor. Halfway Rock, This Rock is about 40 feet higli, and very bold. Upon its sum- mit there was formerly a Beacon ; but all of this is now gone at this time, except the foundation, which shows as a white boulder on the top of it. It bears from Marblehead Light E. by S. >^ S., distance 2f^ miles. Roaring Bull, Which is awash at Low Tide, bears S. by W. J^ W. from Marble- head Light, distance 1^ mile. In going in, the Red Buoy No. 2 off this Rock is left to the Westward. Tom Moore*8 Rocks, These Rocks, which are bare at about Yz ebb, are marked off their Eastern part with a Black Buoy No. 1, which bears from Marblehead Light S. y^ E. about S/i mile. Bound in, this Buoy is left to the Westward. Marblehead Rock. This Rock, which is high out of water, is marked with a Beacon, which bears from Marblehead Light SE. by E., distance |4 mile. It is bold on its Northern and Eastern sides. There is a Channel of 5 fathoms water between it and the shore. La8que*8 Ledge, called by some Salf-Tide Rocks, This is a Rocky Shoal, extending off to the Northeastward from Marblehead Light. At Low Tide, the Rocks are bare 160 yards from the shpre. The Northeast end of the Ledge is marked with a Black Buoy No. 3, which bears from Marblehead Light E. }4 N., distance about yi mile. In passing in, this Buoy is left on the Port hand. Gordofi^s Rock, Which lies off 70 yards to the Northward of Marblehead Point, has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide. It is marked with a Black * South side of entrance to Marblehead Harbor is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. 58 ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. Buoy No. fi, which heart from Marblehead Light N. by B. ^ B., dlitanoo about 160 yarda. In pasiing in, thU Buoy U left to the 8outhward. Boden*a Jtock, Which lies oflf the Eastern ahore of the Harbor, has 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. It is marlced with a Blacit Buoy No. 7, which bears IVom the light W.SW., distance about ^ mile. Bailing Direotions for Marblehead Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. The course fVom Capo Cotl Highland Liglit to Marblehead Light, at this date, (1H78,) is NW. J4 N., distance 44j^ miles. Ves- •els, therefore, IVom the Southward bound to Marblehead will bring Cape Cod (Highland Light) to bear SE. Yz S., and make good the course NW. Yi N. As soon as Marblehead Lightliouse is made, bring it to bear NW. ^ N., and run for it on this course. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard bow what appears to be two small high roclty Islands, which are connected at Low Water. This is called Marblehead Rock. On the top of the Northeastern part of this Rock a Beacon has been built, which is painted Black and White In Horizontal stripes. This Beacon must be left % mile to the Westward. When abreast of it, you will see about Yi mile to the Northwestward a Black Buoy, which must also be left to the Westward. From this Buoy run NW. until you open the Harbor ; then run in, passing midway between Fort Sewall and the Lighthouse, and run up about SW. by W., and anchor off the town in iVom 8^ to 4 fUthoms at Low Tide. From Boston by Main Ship Channel or Broad Sound, bring the Whistling Buoy off the Graves to bear SW. by S. X S** ^"^ run NB. by N. % N. for Baker's Island Lights, distant 10>^ miles. On this course the Buoy off Southern Shoal (Great Pig Rocks) will be left ^ mile to the Northwestward. As soon as Baker's Island Lighthouses are made, bring them to bear NE. by N., on which bearing keep them, and run for them. On this course the Roaring Bull will be left about % mile to the Westward. Continue the course NE. by N. for the Lighthouses, until Marblehead Light bears NW. % N. ; thou run in according to directions before given. From the Eastward, after passing between Thatcher's Island and the Londoner, steer SW. by W. until you make Halfway Rock, ELDRIDOES COAST FILOT. 59 which must be brought to bear W. in order to clear the outer Brealiers. The Southern part of those Breakers are marked with a Red Buoy, No. 2, Halfway Rock bears SW. by W. from this Buoy, distance ^ mile ; Marblehead Light W- % N., distance 8^ miles; Baker's Island Lights NW. by N. ^ N., distance \}i miles. Leave Halfway Rock 150 yards on either side, and run for Marblehead Light, bearing W. by N. H N. until Marble> head Rock bears SW. ; then proceed according to direction* before given. From the eastward, with Northerly winds, vessels may enter Marblehead Harbor by the following directions : When Baker's Is- land Lighthouses bear W. by N. >^ N., run for them on this course, leaving the Black Buoy No. 5 off to the Northwest of them, about 150 3'ards to the Southward. Ai you sail in on this course (W. by N. J4 N.), you will see to the Southward the Black Buoy and Beacon on Hardy's Rocks, and the Horizon- tal-striped Buoy on House Ledge. After passing these, you will see the Beacon * on Bowditch's Ledge (which may be left 150 yards on either hand). After passing this last-mentioned Beacon a short distance, bring it to bear NE. J^ E., on which bear- ing keep it and run SW. % W., until the Red Buoy No. 6, which lies off Northwest from Eagle Island, is in range with Baker's Island Lights, bearing E. % N., then steer directly for Marblehead Lighthouse, bearing SW. by S. Yi S. On this course you will pass between Gray's Rock f and the Horizontal-striped Buoy on Chappel Ledge ; this ledge lies in Mid-channel, and is not dangerous for small vessels, as not less than 14 feet water has been found upon it up to this date. Continue the course for the Light until you open the harbor, then run in about SW. J^ W. and anchor off the town. Sailing Directions for Marblehead Harbor in the N ght-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward run NW. J^ N. from Highland Light, Cape CchI, and as soon as Baker's Island Lights are made, bring * The Beacon on Bowditch's Ledge is painted Black, and bears W.NW. from Baker's Island Lights; distance 1)^ mile. The Ledge has but little water upon it at low tide. t Gray's Rock is a small rocky Island. Marblehead Light bears from this Rock S. by W. % W. ; distance about % mile. Its Northeastern part may be approached as near as 125 yards, without danger. 60 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. them to bear NE. by N. J^ N., and run for fiem on this course until Marblehead Light bears W.NW., on which bearing keep it, and steer directly for it. On this last course Marblehead Roclc will be left 150 yards to the Southward. Keep a sharp lookout for the rock, iind when it bears SW., run NW. Yz N. On this last course, the Buoy of Lasque's Ledge will be left about 75 j'^ards to the Southwest; continue the course NW. Y^ N., until Marble- head Ligh;; bears S. by W., then run SW. Y^ W* ^"^^ ^^ ^^r- bor, and anchor off the towiv in from 3^ to 4j4 fathoms water at low tide. If the darkness be so great that Marblehead Rock can- not be seen from 100 to 200 yards, run for the Light bearing W.NW. under short sail, until you judge you are about J^ mile from it, then steer NW. Y^ N. until the light bears W. ^ S., then haul round it and pass the Lighthouse point in not less than 5 fathoms water ; when the light bears E. by N., anchor in about 4^ fathoms water at low tide. From, Boston by Main Ship Channel, passing South of the Graved. When abreast of the Whistling Buo}' off the Graves, run NE. b}' N., and as soon as Baker's Island Lights are made bring them to bear NE. by N- Y^ N., on which bearing keep them, and run for them until Marblehead Light bears W.NW., when the courses are as before given. From Boston, hy way of Broad Sound, passing 3/'orth of the Graves. When abreast of WhistUng Buoy, run NE. until Baker's Island Lights are made, then bring them to bear NE. by N. Y N., on v/hich bearing keep them, .nnd run for them until Marblehead Light bears W.NW. ; then run in according to directions before given. From the Eastward, when Thatcher's Island Lights bear W. NW., 3 or 4 miles distance, run SW. by W. Y W. until Mar- blehead Light bears W. NW. ; on which bearing keep it and run for it. If there be no error in the compass on this last course, Half- way Rock will be left Yi niile to the Northward ; it is, however, advisable, in »i dark night, to keep a sharp lookout for this rock, which is bold. When Marblehead Rock bears SW., run in accord- ing to directions before given. In beating into MarMehead Harbor the Light may be brougut to '^ ^ar from N.NW. to W.NW., until up with MaiMehead Rock. This harbjr is exposed to NE. winds. ,.* ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Gl ivcn. ^B r W. ■ Mar- H (1 mil ^1 Half- ■ vever, |H rock, ; ^ jcord- [arbor | Salem Harbor. JBaker*8 Island Lights, Upon this Island there are two Fixed Lights, which are intondoa as guides to Salera, Manchester, and Beverly Harbors. TIioho lighthouses are 40 feet apart, and bear SE. and NW. ft'om oacli other. The Southern light is the highest. Hospital Point Light. This is a Fixed White Light, and is intended as a guide to Salora Harbor : it is so arranged that it shows much brighter when a ves- sel is in Mid-channel. Fort . Ickering and Derby Wharf Range LlghtH, On a bare Rock, on the North side of the harbor, ^ ralle Kast from the city of Salem, is erected a Lighthouse or Tower, which shows a Fixed White Light ; and also upon Derby's Wharf is a Lighthouse which shows a Red Fixed Light. These two lights form a range to enter the harbor. Dangers in entering Salem Harbor- In entering this harbor there are many dangers, but wo slmll only describe those lying upon the sides of the Main Ship Chaunelt Outer {or Southeast) Breakers. This Ledge, upon which there are not more than 3 or 4 foot of water at low tide, is marked upon its Southern part with a Red Buoy No. 2 ; Baker's Island Lights bear from this Buoy NW. by N. ^ N., distance 1]4 miles; Halfway Rock SW. by W., diH- tance ^ mile. There are many dangers between this Buoy and Baker's Island ; strangers, therefore, should not attempt to pass between them. 10 fathoms water was found 200 yards in an P^asterly direction from the rocks ; the lead, therefore, gives but little warning in approaching it. Middle Breakers. These rocks, which are dry at low tide, are marked, off tliolr Northeast part, with a Black Buoy, No. I ; Baker's Island Lijjhts bear from this buoy NW. by N. ; distance lys miles. 10 Aith- 62 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. oms water was found 200 yards in a Southeasterly direction from these rocks; in approaching them from the southeast, the lead, therefore, gives but little warning. Bound in, the Buoy on these rocks is left to the Westward. SearVn Mock. This rock, upon which there are about 5 feet water at Low Tide, is marked, off its Northeast part, with a Black Buoy, No. 3. Baker's Island Lights bear from this Buoy NW. ; distance about J^ mile. A little west of a line drawn from Searl's Rock to the Middle Breakers is an extensive Shoal, called the " Inner Breaker." Ves- sels should not approach nearer than 6 fathoms to this shoal. In sailing into Salem by Ship Channel, this buoy is left to the Westward. Oale*8 Ledge, This is a very dangerous Ledge, having but 2 or 3 feet water upon it at very Low Tides. It is marked off its South side with a Red Buoj', No. 2. Baker's Island Lights bear from this Buoy SW. b}' W. ji W. ; distance 1% miles. 10 fathoms water was found % mile E.SE. from this Ledge. Bound into Salem by way of the Main Ship Channel, this Buoy is left to the Northward. JPilgrim Ledge, About 5^ mile to the Westward of Gale's Ledge is Pilgrim Ledge, which has 19 feet water upon it at Low tide. Baker's Island Lights bear from this Ledge SW. ^ W. ; distance about 1 mile. WJiale's Back, This Ledge is drj' at ^ ebb, and lies in the passage from Baker's Island to Manchester ; its centre is marked with a Red Spindle. Baker's Island Lights bear from this Spindle S. by W. % W. ; distance about ^ mile. Little Misery Island, Baker's Island Lights bear from the Southern point of this island SE. y2 S. ; distance about ^ mile. The South point of the island is bold, and vessels maj' approach as near to it as 100 yards witli- out danger. The Main Ship Channel k, between this and Baker's Island. ! -a k:j>bii>gs'8 coast pilot. 63 Misery Ledge, This Is a small Rock, having about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. It is marked with a Buoy having Red and Black Horizontal Stripes. Baker's Island Lights bear from this buoy SE. by E. ; distance 1)4 miles. Going in, this Buoy is left to the Northward. Tlie Main Ship Channel passes between this Buoy and Bowditch's Ledge. John*8 Ledge, About y^ mile to the Westward of Misery Ledge will be seen another Bvioy having Red and Black Horizo,ntal Stripes ; this is on John's Ledge, a small rock having 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Baker's Island Lights bear from this Buoy SE. by E. ^ E. ; distance lYi miles. In going into Salem or Beverly by Main Ship Channel, Gale's Ledge, Pilgrim Ledge, Whale's Back, Little Misery Island, Misery Ledge, and John's Ledge, are all left to the Northward. Baker*8 Island Shoal, The Rocky Shoal extending off Northwest from Baker's Island is marked on its Northern part with a Black Buoy, No. 5. Baker's Island Lights bear from this buoy SE. by S. J^ S. ; distance yi mile. Hardy*8 Rocks. The le Rocks are bare at half tide, and are marked with a Beacon painted Black, and also off their Northern part with a Black Buoy, No. 7. ""aker's Island Lights bear from this Buoy E. by S. 5^ S. ; distance % mile. In passing in, this Buoy is left to the Southward. House Ledge. In sailing in, a Buoy will be seen a short distance to the North- west of Hardy's Rocks Beacon, having Red and Black Horizontal Stripes. This is on House Ledge, which is a small rock having 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Baker's Island Lights bear from this Buoy SE. by E. >4 E. ; distance ^ mile. This Buoy is left to the Southward in going into Salem Harbor. JBowditch*s Ledge, After passing the Horizontal-striped Buoy on House Ledge, tbo next Beacon, with Cage on its top, painted Black, t l.t u ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. is on Bowditch's Ledge, which has but little water on it at Low Tide. Bakei's Island Lights bear from this Beacon E.SE. ; distance U/i miles. Bound into Salem or Beverly, Hardy's Rocks, House Ledge, and Bowditch's Ledge are aU left to the Southward. Little Haste Bock and Shoal, When ubrPidt of the Beacon on Bowditch's Ledge, you will see, about IJ^ miles distant on the Port bow, a spar painted Black, with a Cask on its top. This Beacon is on Little Haste Rock, which is dry at low water. About N.NW. from the Beacon on the point of the Shoal extending from Little Haste Rock, is placed in 16 feet water, a Black Buoy, No. 13. Bowditch's Ledge Beacon bears from this buoy E. J4 S. ; distance about IJ^ miles. Baker's Island Lights E. by S- ^ S. ; distance 25^ miles. Bound in, this buoy is left to the Southward. Middle Ground. When abreast of the Black Buoy No. 15, on Haste Shoal, there will be seen, about ^ mile to the Southwest, a Black Buoy, No. 15 ; this is on the Northwest side of the Middle Grouml. Fort Picker- ing Lighthouse bears from this buoy W. by S. J^ S. ; distance y^ mile. ^ S., 2(>0 yards from the Beacon, will be seen a Red Buoy, No. 10, which lies off South from Knapp's Rock, which has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Bound into Salem by Main Ship Channel, the Beacon and Buoy on Haste Rock and Shoal, Buoy on Northwest part of Middle Ground, and Beacon on Great Aqua \ itte, are all left to the Eastward. Abbott's MorJe. NE yi mile from Fort Pickei'ing lighthouse is a Monument painted Red, and surmounted with a wooden Staff with a Square %#p* '*^'- ■%^fl.% r^'f-: 'J ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Cage on top. This Monument is built upon Abbott's Rock, which is bare at Low Tide. Half Tide Bock, After passing Fort Pickering Lighthouse, a short distance to the Southward, a Red Buoy, No. 12, will be seen, which lies near a rock called " Half-Tide Rock." This Rock is bare at very Low Tides. Bound into Salem Harbor, Abbott's Monument and Buoj' off Half-Tide Rock are both left to the Westward. Sailing Directions for Salem Harbor, by Main Ship Channel, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. The course from Cape Cod Highland Light to Baker's Island Lights (at this date, 1878,) is NW. % N. ; distance 43%! miles. Vessels, therefore, from the Southward, bound to Salem, will bring Cape Cod Highland Light +0 bear SB. ^ S- and run NW. }i N. As soon as Baker's Island Lights are made, bring them to bear NW". J^ W., and run in, keeping them a little on the Port bow ; if there is no error in the compass, the SE. and Outer Breakers, and also Searl's Rock, will all be left to the AVestward. Give Baker's Island Lights a berth of }^ mile, leaving thvm to the Southward, and run for the Lighthouse on Hospital Point, bearing about W. by N. % N. On tliis course the Black Buoy No. 5, off Northwest part of Baker's Island ; Black Buoy No. 7, off Hardy's Rocks ; Horizontal- striped Buoj' off House Ledge ; and Black Beacon on Bowditch's Ledge, will all be left to tho Southward. Little Misery Island, Horizontal-striped Buo}' off Miser}' Ledge; and Horizontal-striped Buoy off John's Ledge, will all be left to the Northward. When midway between Misery Ledge and Beacon on Bowditch's Ledge* (which has a Cage on its top painted Black), run about W. j4- N. ; us you sail in, you will see, on the Port bow, the beacon on Little Haste Rock. (See description of this Beacon, and also the Black Buoy off Haste Shoal.) Leave this last-men- tioned Buoy about 200 yards to the Eastward, and run in about SW. by W., leaving the Black Buoy off Northwest part of Middle Ground, Beacon on Great Aqua Vitje Rooks, and Red B loy off Knapp's Rock, all to the Eastward. Abbott's Monu- « between Bowditch's and Misery Ledges tiie channel is but i "nile in widtht 66 ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. ment, Fort Pickering Lighthouse, and Red Buoy off Half-tidj Eock, all to the Westward. When Derby Wharf Light bears west, anchor in soft bottom, in from 3 to sj^ fathoms at Low Tide. From Boston by Main Ship Channel, or Broad Sound. Bring the Whistling Buoy off the Graves to bear SW. J^ S., and make good the course NE. ^2 N., leaving Halfway Rock and Buoy on SE. Breaker, a short distance to the Northward. When Baker's Island Lights bear NW. % W., run in as before directed. From, the Eastward, After passing between Thatcher's Island Lights and the Lon- doner, steer SW. by W. until Baker's Island Lights bear W. by N., then run for them, leaving them }i mile to the Southward, and proceed according to directions before given. Sailing Directions for Salem Harbor by Main Ship Channel, at Night-lime, with favorable Winds and fair weather. From the Southward make gootl the course NW. % N. from Cape Cod Highland Light, and as soon as Baker's Island Lights are made, bring them to bear W.NW., and run for them T^ith the low light open to the Eastward of the high light. Give Ba- ker s Island a berth of }i mile, leaving it to the Southward, and bring Hospital Point Light * to bear from W. by N. J^ N. to W. by N. ^ N. ; on which bearing keep it, and run for it •'intil the White Light on Fort Pickering and the Red Light on Derby's Wharf are in range, bearing SW. by W. ^ W. ; then run for them on this range until the Light upon Hospital Point beavs N. by E. ; then steer SW. Y^ W. into the harbor. When the Red Light on Derby's Wharf bears W., then anchor in soft b'^ttoi!? in from 3 to 3J^ fathoms water at Low Tide. On this last ♦ Tlie ship channel into Saletn Harbor is between Bowditch's Ledge and Misery Ledge ; the distance between these dangers is but \ mile. In order, therefore, to guide vessels safely at night, the Light upon Hospital Point is so arranged that i; shows brightest when in mid-cliannel , it is therefore highly necessary in sailing in to keep a sharp hiokout for thii light, and steer for it when it s' ovvs brightest, as i point error in the copjpass in sailing through tliis narrow passage may lead to difficulty. BLDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 67 course into the harbor it is recommended to use the lead and not go into less than four fathoms water at Low Tide, until the White range Light at Fort Pickering boars N.NE. From Boston by tvay of Main Ship Channel or Broad Sound. Bring the Whistling Buoy off the Graves to bear SW. % W., and malie good the courHO NE< % E., until Baiter's Island Lights bear W.NW. ; then run in as before directed. From the Eastward. When Thatcher's Island Lights boar W. NW., 3 or 4 miles dis- tant, run SW. by W. until Baker's Island Lights bear W. by N. ; then run for them and enter according to directions before given. Thick Weather. At this date (1878) a Fog Boll is placed near Baker's Island Lights, which is struck diu-ing thick weather. 13 fathoms water was found E. by S. >? milo from the Southeast Breaker ; 14 fath- oms ys mile SE. ; 13 fn thorns 150 yards SW. ; and 15 fathoms W.NW. >y W. ^ "W., leaving three black buoys on the port, and one red buoy on the star'aoard. As you sail in on this course you will see on the port the Beacon on Little Haste Rock (as before described) and also the Black Buoy off Northwest from it. When this last- mentioned buoy bears W. by N.. run for it, leaving it 200 yards to the Southeastward, and run in SW. by W. in accordance with directions before given. Oray*H Mock Channel. Vessels from the Southward bound to Salem may, in Daytime, with favorable winds und fair weather, safel}' run througli this channel by the following directions. As soon as Baker's Island Lights are made bring them to bear N.NE., and run for them until Marblehead Lighthouse bears NW. by N. ; then run inNW. by N. ^ N., leaving Marblehead Rock (see description of this Rock) 200 yards to the Westward. Bring the beacon on this rock to bear S. ^ W. ; distance ^^ mile. On this beanng keep it, and steer N.K E., leaving Gray's Rock f }4 mile to the Westward, and the Horizontal-striped Buoy on Chappel's Ledge ^ mile to the Eastward. From Gray's Rock continue the course N. }i E., leaving three Black Buoys to the Westward. As you pass in, you will see on the Port the Beacon on the Little Haste Rock (which is a s{)ar 85 feet long, painted black, with a cask on its top), and also tlie Black Buoy off Northwest IVom it. When this last-mentioned Buoy bears W. by N., run for it, leaving it 200 yards to the Southeast, * This i8 a small baro island. I'Xtonding NE. and SW. 200 yards ; it bi-ara N. by E. i E., S niilo from tho hotel on Cat Island. t Gray's Rock is a small Rocky Island. Marblehead Light bears from this rock S. by W. ^ W., distance about J^ mile; its Northeastern part may b« Approached as near as 126 y.'trds without danger. ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 69 and run in abont SW. by W., in accordance with directions before given. High Water, It is high water at Salem Harbor 16 minutes before it is at Boston ; common tides rise from 9 to 10 feet. Beverly Harbor. Sailing Directions for Beverly Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Follow the directions for Salem Harbor by either channel, night or day, until abreast of the Beacon on Little Haste Rock. (See de- scription of this Beacon.) Bring the Beacon to bear SE. by E. J^ E. , and steer NW. by W. J^ W. As you sail in on this course, you will see on the Port bow a Black Buoy, No. 1, and Beacon ; leave them both to the Southward, and haul round the Beacon at a distance of 75 yards from it, leaving it to the Eastward. When the Beacon bears East, 75 yards distant, you will see to the Southward two Red Buoys and a Beacon. The first Buo}', No. 4, is on the Middle-ground Ledge, and may be left 30 feet to the Westward ; the second Buoy, No. 6,* lies off" a shoal extending from Tuck's Point (Beverly), and may be left 25 yards to the Northwestward. The Beacon is on the East side of the Channel, and must be left to the Southeast. When abreast Buoy No. G, j-ou will see a Beacon bearing about NW. by W. ; run for this last-mentioned Beacon, leaving it 100 yards on the port, and run for the Eastern part of the town, where, if you wish, you may anchor off the wharves in 3j5^ fathoms water at low tide. Danvers. If bound to Danvers, it is advisable to take a pilot at Beverly. ♦ From Buoy No. 4 to No. 6 the Channel, especially at Low Tide, is very narrow ; it is therefore advisable, in sailing in between these buoys, to use the lead, and not go into less than 4 fathoms water, until past Buoy No. 6. 70 BLDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. Manchester Harbor. Bound into Manchester, Great and Little Misery Islands, and Sauli's Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, are left to the Westwr rd. "Whale's Back, which is dry at J^ Ebb ; White Ledge, dry at Lc" Water; House and Ram Islands, are all left to the Eastward. Sailing Directions for Manchester Harbor in Day- time, with favorable Winds and fair weather. You may run for Bakor's Island Lij^hts with them bearing from NW. y2 W. to W. by S. ; give tho Island a berth of ^ mile, leaving it to the Southward ; when abreast of the Lights, bring them to bear S. ^ W., on which bearing keep them, and run N. Y^ E. As you sail in, 3'ou will see on the Starboard bow the Spindle on the Whale's Back ; and the Red buoy No. 2, which lies off White Ledge : both of which are left to the Eastward. You will also see on the Port bow a Black Buoy, No. 1, on Sauli's Rock which is left to tlie Westward. Continue the course N. J^ E. until the Northern part of Great Misery Island bears W.SW. ; then anchor in about Z}1 fathoms water at Low Tide, which will be 5 at High Water. If bound to Manchester, wait for High Water ; and it is also advisable to take a pilot here. High Water at Manchester village about the same time as at Boston. Gloucester Harbor. Eastern 'Point Lighthouse, This Lighthouse is on the Eastern side of the entrance to this harbor. At this date, 1884, it shows a flashing Red Light. A Fog Bell is placed near the Lighthouse. Ten Pound Island Lighthouse, N. by E., from Eastern Point Lighthouse, distance l}( miles, is a small Island called Ten Pound Island. Upon the Western part of this Island is a Lighthouse which, at this date, 1879, shows a fixed "White Light. ELDBIDGE*S COAST PILOT. 71 Dangers entering this Harbor.* Eastern Point Ledge. This Ledge extends Southwesterly from the Lighthouse about ^ mile ; the least water upon it is on Webber's Rock, which has 7 feet at Low Tide. This rock is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 2, which is placed on the Southern side of it, and bears from the Lighthouse on Eastern Point SW. by S. about % mile. Dog Bar. This Bar, which is dry in several places at Low Tide, extends from Eastern Point (a little North of the Lighthouse) about 400 yards in a Westerly direction ; it is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 4, which bears from Eastern Point Light NW. by W. ^ W. ; distance % mile. Large vessels of more than 16 feet draught passing in should, at Low Tide, leave this Buoy 300 yards to the Eastward. Norman's Woe Rock, This is a dry rock about 100 yards square, and lies near the Western shore. Vessels beating out or into the harbor should not approach nearer to it than y^ mile, as a Ledge extends off about S-SEj. from it % mile. Eastern Point Light bears from this Rock E. by S. ; distance \%, miles. Round Mock Shoal, This is a Ledge extending nearly North and South 300 yards, and has, at very Low Tides, as little as 11 feet water upon it. A Black Buoy, No. 1, placed in 3^ fathoms water, marks its South- ern end. Eastern Point Light bears from this Buoy SE. by E. 54 E. ; distance 2,3 mile. In passing in, this Buoy, which is nearly in the middle of the harbor, is left to the Westward. Between Round Rock Shoal and Dog Bar the channel is about % mile in width, and has a depth of about 5^ fathou.s at Low Tide. Field Rocks, These are a gi'oup of Rocks lying near the Western shore, some of which are bare at Low Tide ; they are marked upon their South- east part with a Black Buo}', No. 3, which in passing in is left on * Since this was written several of the Bocks in Gloucester Harbor have been removed. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I l^|28 |2.5 U£ 1^ 1 2.2 2.0 lb 1.8 1^ 111^ i!^ 6" ^% Hiotographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. MS80 (7)6) 872-4503 \ \ 72 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. the port hand. Ten Pound Island Light bears from this Buoy E. by N. ; distance about fi mile. Ten Pound Ledge, On this Rock or Ledge, at very Low Tides, there are but 8 feet water ; a Red Buoy, No. 6, is placed on the West side of it. Ten Found Island Light bears from it NE. Yz E. ; distance yz mile. This Ledge lies nearly in midchannel, but the best water is between it and Field Rocks, the channel being nearly Yz mile in width. Bahaon's Ledge, This Ledge, on which, at very Low Tides, there are but 9 feet water, is marked on its Southeast side with a Black Buoy, No. 5. Ten Found Island Light bears from this Buoy S. ^ W. ; distance ^ mile. Black Mock, This Rock, which is bare at Half Tide, lies about 150 yards from the Eastern shore, and is marked with a Spindle. Ten Found Island Light bears from this Spindle SW. ; distance about ^ mile. The current of Ebb sets out of the harbor quite strong on to Black Rock, and vessels bound out or in with light winds must govern themselves accordingly. EU8ha'8 Ledge. This Ledge, which is dry at Low Tide, lies near the shore on the Srai'iern side of the harbor ; it is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 8. This Buoy bears about E.NE. from the Spindle on Black Rock ; distance li mile. Pinnacle Rock- This Rock lies on the Northern side of the harbor, nearly oppo- site Elisha's Ledge ; it has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and is marked on its Southern part with a Black Buoy, No. 7, which bears about E. 300 yards from Fort Foint Wharf. Harhor Bock, or Spindle Bock, NE., a little more than 100 yards from the Black Buoy, No. 7, off Finnacle Rock, is a Spindle with an open-worked Ball on top ; ELDRIDOS'S COAST PILOT. 73 the Spindle and Ball are both painted Black. This Spindle is on Harbor Rock, which is bare at Half Tide. Jjittle Harbor Bock. NB. by B., about 100 yards from the Spindle on Harbor Rock, is a Black Buoy, No. 9, which lies off to the Southward of this Rock. Little Harbor Rook has about 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Five Pound Island Ledge, This Ledge, which is marked with a Spindle, is bare at Half Tide, and lies about 80 yards West from Five Pound Island. Black Ledge, which is bare at Low Tide, lies a short distance to the Eastward of Ten Pound Island ; it is marked with a Red Buoy, which is placed a short distance Southwest from the Ledge. Vessels passing to the Eastward of Ten Pound Island should leave this Buoy about 30 feet to the Eastward. This passage \h narrow, and about 8 feet water can be carried through it at Low Tide. Clatn Bork, This Rock, which is dry at Low Tide, is marked on its Southern side with a Red Buoy, which bears NW. by W. ^ W. ; distant about 200 yards from the Black Buoy off Pinnacle Rock. Vessels bound to the Wharves in the Cove should leave this Buoy to the Northeastward. Sailing Directions for Gloucester Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. The course (at this date, 1879) from Cape Cod Highland Light to Eastern Point" Lighthouse is NW. by N. >^ N. ; dis- tance 42 miles. Vessels, therefore, from the Southward will bring Cape Cod Highland Light to bear SB. by S; % S-, and steer NW. by N. J4 N. When Eastern Point Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear from N.W. to NNB., and run for it. When about yi mile tcom the Lighthouse, you will see the two Red Buoys on Webber's Rock and Dog Bar ; leave the Red Buoy, No. 4, on Dog Bar, about 300 yards on the Star- board, and steer N. by B. for the Red Buoy, No. 6, on Ten Pound Ledge. Leave this Buoy 60 fbet to the Eastward, and continue the course N. by B. until Ten Pound Island Lighthouse bears B.SB., 74 ELDRIDGB'S COAST FILOT. «ben ran :S.NE., and anchor near the Black Buoy off Babson^s Ledge, Tea Pound Island Lighthouse bearing about S.SE. ; dis- tance ^ mile. If bound into the Inner Harbor, leave the Black Buoy on Bab- son's Ledge (which bears N. ^ E. ^ mile ttom Ten Found Island Lighthouse) to the Northward, and run in about E.NE., keeping midway of the harbor, and leaving the Spindle, and Red Buoy on Black Rock, and Elisha's Ledge, to the Eastward. When Five Pound Island, which is small, and lies nearly in the middle of the harbor, bears NE., 250 yards distant, then anchor in about 3 fathoms at Low Tide. 8. JE. Harbor. Leave the Red Buoy, No. 4, on Dog Bar (which bears NW. by W. ^ W. from Eastern Point Lighthouse) about 100 yards to the Eastward, and run N. }4 E. until Eastern Point Lighthouse bear& S. by E. ; then run NE. by E., and anchor in about 5 fathoma water at Low Tide ; Ten Pound Island Lighthouse bearing N. by W. j6 mile. From Boston* Vessels from Boston, by way of Broad Sound, or Main Ship Channel, bound to Qloucester, may bring the Whistling Buoy off the Graves to bear SW., and make good the course NE. When Eastern Point Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NE., and run for it until within j4 mile from it, when the courses are as before given. From the Eastward, Vessels from the Eastward, passing between Thatcher's Island and the Londoner, may bring the Spindle on it to Dear NE. by E., and steer SW. by W. until Eastern Point Lighthouse bears W.NW. ; then haul round it at a distance of ^ mile, and proceed according to directions before givn. Sailing Directions for Gloucester Harbor* at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward bring Cape Cod Highland Light to bear SE. by S. % S., and make good the course NW. by N. y^ N. When Eastern Point I^ht is made, bring it to bear about N.NW.> ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 75 and run for it on this course. Leave this Light about ^ mile to the Northeastward, and continue the course Northwesterly until Ten Pound Island Light bears NE. by N. ^ N. ; then run in on this bearing for it until Eastern Point Light bears S.SE. ; then make good the course N. % E. until Ten Pound Island Light bears E. by S. ; then run E.NE. until Ten Pound Island Light bears S.SE. ; then anchor. If bound into the Inner Harbor, or to the Wharves, wait at this anchorage until daj-light ; then proceed ac- cording to directions before given for daytime. S. E. Harbor. Run for Ten Pound Island Light, bearing NE. by N. j^ N., according to direction before given, until Eastern Point Light bears S.SE. ; then steer NE. j4 E. until Ten Pound Island Light bears N. by W. ; then anchor in about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. The Southeast Harbor is a good one to enter at night for vessels of more than 12 feet draught, especially at Low Tide. From Boston, From Boston, by the way of Broad Sound or Main Ship Channel, bring the Whistling Buoy off the Graves to bear SW. }i W., and make good the course NE. }4 E. until Eastern Point Light bears NE. by N. ; then run for it until ^ mile from the Light ; then steer Northwesterly until Ten Pound Island Light bears NE. by N. }{ N. The coutL Te then in ticcordance with directions before given. From the Eastward, From the Eastward bring Eastern Point Light to bear W., and run for it ; haul round the point at a distance of }4 mile from the Light, and run Northwesterly until Ten Pound Island Light bears NE. by N. J^ N. ; then proceed according to directions before given. Thick Weather,* At this date, 1879, there is placed near the Lighthouses at Thatcher's Island a Steam-Whistle, and Fog Bells Lave also been placed at Eastern Point and Baker's Island. The ear, assisted by the Lead and Compass, will therefore be the Pilot for vessels bound to Gloucester Harbor in thick weather. * A Whisxling Buoy has been placed off Eastern Point, near the entrance to Gloucester Harbor, in 16>i fathoms water. Eastern Point Lighthouse bears fron^ this buoy N. by B., >i mile; Thatcher's Island outer Lighthouse, NE. by B., 5ki miles. 76 ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. High Water, It is High Water at Gloucester Harbor 25 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides 9 feet. Dangers in Sailing from Thatcher's Island to Boston. The outermost dangers are the Londoner, Southeast or Outer Breaker off Baker's Island, Halfway Rock ; off Baker's Island, Outer Breaker to the Southward of Marblehead Light, Graves, Martin's, and Boston Ledges ; all of which have been previously described. (See Dangers in entering the different Hi^rbors from Cape Ann to Boston.) Depth of Water to avoid Dangers, If a vessel should be compelled to haul off or lay by on account of thick weather, when running for Boston, Salem, Gloucester, or any of the harbors between Minot's Light and Thatcher's Island for safety, she should not approach nearer the coast than 20 fath- oms water ; if less thaa this is found, make good the course E. until it deepens to 20 fathoms. This depth will clear all dangers from rocks or shoals. Thatcher's Island, This Island extends SW. and NE. nearly J^ mile in length, and a little more than 300 yards in breadth. Its highest part is about 50 feet above High-Water Mark, and is destitute of trees. Thatcher's Island Lights and Fog Signals* Upon the summit of this Island stand two lofty Towers (bear- ing from each other N. by E. ^ E., and S. by W. % W., dis- tance 895 feet apart) which show fixed White Lights of the first order of Freshnel, elevated 165 feet above sea-level. A powerful Steam- Whistle is placed near the Lighthouses, giving each minute a blast of 8 seconds, and one of 4 seconds, with alternate intervals of 4 and 44 seconds. BLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 77 Bearings and Distanoes firom Thatcher's Island Lighthc ^ses. Distance. Cape Cod (Highland Light), S. by E. ^ E., . 421^ miles nearly. Race Point Light, . . . Gurnet Lights (Plymouth), Minot's Light, .... Boston Light, .... Long Island Light, . . . Newburyport Lights, . . Isles of Shoals Light, . . Boon Island Light, . . Cape Elizabeth Lights, Seguin Li^ht, .... Monhegan Light, . . . Mount Desert Rock Light, Cape Sable Light, . . . S. by E. . . . ZIVz S.by W. ^W. 38 SW. by S. . . 24 SW. % W. . 23 SW. Y^ W. . 25 NW.byN. . . 14J^ N. >^ E. . . . 20 N.NE. . . . 29>^ NE. by. N. y2 N. 58>^ NE. 5^ E.NE. . . . 133 E> f^ S> • • • 222 Bearings and Distanoes of Dangers firom Thatcher's Island Lights. The Londoner, This is a dangerous Ledge extending about NE. by N. and SW. by S. nearly yz mile. On its Southern end, which is the dry part, is placed an Iron Spindle 45 feet high, with an Octagonal Cage on top. This Spindle bears from Thatcher's Island, North- ern Lighthouse, SE. ; distance % mile nearly. Between Thatch- er's Island and the Londoner there is a Channel ^ mvle in width, having a depth of about 6 fathoms at Low Tide. The Eastern side of this Ledge, in thick weather, may be approached with the Lead without danger. Oak Rock, This Rock, which lies between Thatcher's Island and Cape Ann, is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 2, which bears W.NW. from the Northern Light upon Thatcher's Island ; distance about ^ mile. Thatcher's Island Bar. A Bar extends from Thatcher's Island to Milk Island, and ves- sels of more than seven feet draught should not attempt this pas- sage at Low Tide. 78 ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Milk Island Bar. The passage between Milk Island and the main loud is only used by boats at Low Tide. Dry Salvages, Upon the highest part of the Dry Salvages is a Tripod, the top of which is 65 feet above High- Water Mark. About Yz of the upper part of this Tripod is covered so as to present the appear- ance of a Pyramid, and is painted red. Thatcher's Island, North- ern Light, bears from this Tripod S. by W. ^ W. ; distance 2 miles. This Ledge, including the bare and sunken Rocks, extende North and South about % mile. Vessels, in thick weather, ap- proaching this Ledge from the Eastward should proceed with cau- tion, as 15 fathoms water was found East, % mile from the Tripod, 13 fathoms South, % mile, and 10 fathoms North, % mile tcom it. Little Salvages, These Rocks, which are bare at Low Tide, lie about J^ mile West from the Dry Salvages. Thatcher's Island, Northern Light, bears from this Reef S. by W. % W. about two miles. The pas- sage between the Dry and Little Salvages is 300 yards in width, but is not safe, as there is a rock lying in it. Thi& rock bears about NW. from the Tripod, distance yi mile, and is bare at Low Spring Tides. Rockport Harbor. Straitsmouth Island Light, Upon the Northeast part of Straitsmouth Island * is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light This Lighthouse bears from the Northern Lighthouse upon Thatcher's Island N. by W. 1^ miles. Dangers in approaching Rockport Harbor. Avery*s Ledge, These are a sunken mass of Rocks about 200 yards square. Upon some of these rocks there are, at Low Tide, not more than • There is not any passage for vessels between Straitsmouth Island and the main land. ELDRIDOB'S COAST PILOT. 79 4 feet water. A Red Buoy, No. 2, marks the Sonthwestem part of the Ledge. Straitsmouth Island Light bears from this Buoy S. by W. }i W. ; distance J^ mile. Dry Salvages, Straitsmouth Island Light bears fh)m the Tripod on the Dry Salvages V7.SW. ; distance l>i miles. Idttlo Salvages. These Rooks, which are bare at Low Tide, lie about J^ mile West from the Dry Salvages. Straitsmouth Island Light bears from the centre of this Reef SW. by W. ut 1 mile. The pas- sage between the Dry and Little Salvages is 300 yards in width, but strangers should not attempt it on account of a rock which lies nearly midway between the two Ledges, and is drj) at very Low Tides. The Flat Ground Are three Ledges extending North and South about ^ mile, and lie near each other. The Northernmost Ledge has 10 feet water upon it, the Middle Ledge 9 feet, and the Southernmost Rock is bare at very Low Tides. A Red Buoy, No. 2, is placed off to the South- ward of this Rock. Straitsmouth Island Light bears from this Buoy SW. by S. }i S. ; distance % mile ; Rockport Breakwater SW. by W. % W. IJ^ miles. Vessels from seaward bound to Rockport generally pass about ^ mile to the Northward of the Salvages, and a short distance South of this Buoy. At this date (1879) theio is not any Buoy off the Northern part of the Flat Orround, and vessels from the Northward bound to any of the har- bors in Sandy Bay should, in order to avoid this Ledge, keep not more than &om }4 to ^^ mile from the main land. Nine-Feet Rock, This Rock, which is not Buoyed (at this date, 1879), has 9 feet water upon it at very Low Tides. Straitsmouth Island Light bears fVom this Rock ES.SE., distance about ^ mile; Rockport Break- water W. J^ S., distance J^ mile. Sailing Directions for Rockport Harbor, in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward, after passing Thatcher's Island and the Lon^ doner, bring Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse to bear NW. }^ N., 80 ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. and run for it ; give the Light a berth of about % mile, leaving the Red Buoy No. 2, on Avery's Ledge, a short distance to the North- ward, and run W. by N. until a large Granite Factory in the town bears W.SW. ; then run in for it on this course, passing midway between the points of the harbor. If it be Low Tide, anchor, and wait until Higli Water ; then run between the pier heads into the Basin, or Inner Harbor. In running in W.SW. for the Stone Factory, the 9 foot Rock will be left 250 yards to the Southward. On this course, the Rock lying a short distance to the Eastward of the end of the Breakwater will be left to the Northward. This last-mentioned rock is nearly dry at Low Tide, and is marked with a Red Buoy. From the Northward or Northeastward, Bring Andrews Point, the Northeastern part of Cape Ann, to bear SW., and run for it on this course until Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse is in range with the Northern Lighthouse on Thatcher's Island, bearing S. by E. ; then run for them until the large Stone Factory bears W.SW. ; then run in as before directed. In order to clear the three Ledges called the Flat Ground, ves- sels at night bound to any of the harbors in Sandy Bay should keep well to the Northward, until the last-mentioned lights are in range. Only 7 feet water can be carried into Rockport Harbor at Low Tide. Vessels of more than 7 feet draught, compelled in heavy easterly gales to enter this place as a harbor of refuge, should there- fore wait until Half Flood. It is High Water at Rockport 32 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides 8^ feet. The Rockport Granite Company's Harbor. By private enterprise a Granite Breakwater has been constructed here, which forms a small harbor, admitting vessels of 12 feet draught at Low Tide. The entrance to this harbor bears W.NW., Ij^ miles from Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse, and NW. yi N. about ^ mile from the end of Rockport Breakwater. ELDIUDGE'S COAST PILOT. 81 Dangers in approaching this Harbor. Dodge's Rock, This Rock, which is bare, lies about ^ mile from the shore, and is marked with a Spindle, which bears NW. by W. ^ W. from Siraitsmouth Island Lighthouse ; distance 1^ miles. Shoal ground extends in every direction fVom this Spindle, and vessels should not go near it. A Buoy is placed a short distance to the Southward of this ledge, which is left to the Northward in entering this harbor. MitcheVa Mock, This Rock, which is not buoyed at this date (1879), has about 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and lies about one-fifth of a mile from the shore. The Spindle on Dodge's Rock bears from it S. % W. yi mile. There are from 3 to 4 fathoms water between these two last-mentioned rocks and the shore. Sandy Bay Ledge, This is a small rocky Island, which lies about two hundred yards from the Western shore, and bears NW> % mile ftom the outer end of Rockport Breakwater, -vnd is left to the Southward by vessels bound into the Rockport Granite Company's Harbor. Sailing Directions for the Bockport Granite Com- ' pany's Harbor. From the Southward give Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse a berth of % mile, and run NW. until the Buoy on Avery's Ledge bears E. by S., on which bearing keep it, and steer W. by N. As you sail in, you will see, on the Starboard bow, a Buoy, and the Spindle on Dodge's Rock ; you will also see on the Port, a small rocky Island lying near the shore, called " Sandy Bay Ledge." The Buoy and Spindle are both left to the Northward ; the Ledge to the Southward. When about midway between the Spindle and this Ledge, run for the outer end of the Breakwater, and pass into the harbor. In going in, when abreast of the end of the .Break- water, keep nearer to it than the shore. From the Northward or Northeastward bring Andrews' Point (the Northeastern part of Cape Ann) to bear SW., and run for it on this course until Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse is in range with the Northern Lighthouse on Thatcher's Island, bearing S. by 82 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. B. ; then run for them on this course until the Tripod on the Dry Salvages bears East ; then steer West, and pass into the harbor, leaving the Buoy, Spindle, and Ledge as before directed. Pigeon Oove Harbor. The entrance to this Wve bears NW. % W. 1^ miles from iStraitsmouth Island Lighthouse, and N. by W. about 1 mile from the outer end of Rockport Breakwater. By private enterprise this Cove has been formed into a secure Harbor, and vessels of not more thai; 10 feet draught can enter it at low tide. It is said that a small charge is made to vessels using this cove as a harbor of reftige. Tlie only danger to be avoided in entering it is Pigeon Rock, which lies a short distance south from the outer end of the Breakwater. Sailing Directions for Figeon-Cove Harbor, in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward give Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse a berth of about % mile, leaving the Red Buoy No. 2, on Avery's Ledge, a short distance to the Northward. When abreast of this Buoy, steer W. by N. until Straitsmouth Island Lighthouse bears SE. ^ E. ; on which bearing keep it, and run NW. yi W., leaving Mitchcl's Rock and the Spindle on Dodge's Rock to the Westward ; continue the course NW. J^ W. until you open the cove bearing about N.NW. ; then run in, passing between the pier which ex- tends fVom the Dreakwater towards the Western shore, and anchor where you please. In entering this harbor, keep nearest the West- ern shore, to avoid Pigeon Rock, which lies a short distance to the Southward of the outer end of the Breakwater. From the Northward or Northeastward, Run for Andrew's Point (the Northeast part of Cape Ann) on any bearing fVom S. to SW. until about % mile from the shore ; then steer from S. by W. to S.SW. until you open the Cove ; then run in as before directed. BLDRIDOB'S COAST PILOT. 83 Lane's Cove. This Cove is situated upon the Northwestern shore of Cape Ann, about 1}^ miles Southwesterly A'om Halibut Point.* Sailing Directions for Lane's Cove, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Southward may give Straitsmouth Island Light- house a berth of ^ mile, leaving the lied Buoy No. 2, on Avery's Ledge, a short distance to the North wanl. iVhen abreast of this Buoy, stfcer about N. by W. J4 W., and haul round Halibut Point at a distance of }4 mile. Wlien abreast of this Point bearing S., eteer about W-SW., keeping J4 mile fVom the shore. As you sail to the Westward a settlement will appear, with a Church Tower rising abov e the houses ; this small village is Lanesvillc, or Lane's Cove. Continue the course W.SW. until tlie entrance to the har- bor bears SE. ; then run in, passing midway between the points of the Breakwater. In sailing in, the Black Buoy lying off to the Westward of this harbor is left about ^ mile to the South west ward. About 12 feet water can be carried in between the points of the Breakwater at Low Tide. Hodgkins' Cove, or Bay View. This Cove lies upon the Northwestern shore of Cape Ann, about halfway between Lane's Cove and Annisquam. Sailing Directions for Hodgkins' Cove, in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward or Eastward haul round Halibut Point, the Northern extremity of Cape Ann, at a distance of J4 mile from the shore. When this point bears S., steer about W.SW., keeping about ^2 mile from the land. When abrenst of Lane's Cove, you will see to tiie Westward a Black Buoy, No. 1 ; this Buoy lies upon the Northern part of a Ledge which extends from the shore. Leave this Buoy a short distance to the Southward, and run S.SW. until the outer end of the wharf bears S.SE. ; then run for it on * Halibut Point, the Northern extremity of Cape Ann, bears firom the Tri- pod on the Salvages, NW. by W. 8 miles. 84 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. this course. At this date (1879) there is at the outer end of this wharf from 8 to 10 feet water at Low Tide. Tho Eastern side of this wharf is somewhat exposed to Northerly winds. It is High Water at Hodgkins' Cove 30 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides 9 feet. There are extensive Granite Quarries both at Bay View and Laneaville. Harbor of Annisquam. The entrance to this harbor is about 2|^ miles in a Southwesterly direction from Halibut Point (the Northern extremitj' of Cape Ann), and there arc usually about 6 feet water on the Bar at Low Tide. Idghthouaes, A Lighthouse showing a fixed White Light is erected upon Wig- wam Point. This Light in entering the harbor is left to the East- ward. Dangers in entering this Harbor. Harviden's Rock* This Rock, which at very Low Tides has but 5 feet water upon it, is marked on its Western side with a Black Buoy, No. 3, which in entering the harbor is left to the Eastward. Annisquam Ligh";- house bears from this Buoy S. by W. )^ V* , distance about yi mile. Lobster Rock* A square Granite Beacon of open work, with its top painted black, is built upon this Rock, which is dry at Low Tide. This Beacon bears from Annisquam Lighthouse SW. by S. >^ S. about ^ mile, and in passing in is left on the Port hand. Bam Rocks, These Rocks, which generally can be seen, are not Buoyed nt this date, and lie on the Western side of the Channel. They are but a short distance from the Southern shore, and bear from An- nisquam Lighthouse SW. by S. a little more than Yt mile. In passing in, these Rocfes are left on the Starboard hand. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 85 Sailing Directions for Annisquam Harbor in Day- time, with favorable . inds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Southward haul round Halibut Point (the Northern part of Cape Ann) at a distance of % mile, and make good the course W.SW. until Annisquam Lighthouse is made. If your vessel draws as much as 10 feet water, wait until about ^ Flood ; then bring the Lighthouse to bear S., and run for it on this course, passing about midwa3'^ between the Eed Buoy upon the Bar and the Black Buoy off Harriden's Rock. When this last-men- tioned Black Buoy bears N.NE. make good the course S-SW.,. leaving the Lighthouse not more than 125 yards to the East^.ard, and the Beacon on Lobster Rock not more than 50 yardc to the Eastward. When abreast of the Beacon, shorten sail, and steer S. by W. % W. until you see another Beacon which stands ofi Lane's Point. When this last-mentioned Beacon comes in range of Babson Point* bearing SE., run SE. by S. (leaving Barn Rocks on the Starboard hand) until Lane's Point Beacon bears N. by E. ; then anchor in from 3 to 4 fathoms water. If bound into the Inner Harbor, when Lane's Point Beacon is on with Babson's Point, bearing SE., run SE. by S- until the Beacon bears E. by N. ; then run for it, leaving it close to on the Port hand. After passing the Beacon a short distance, run for the Wharves. From the Northeastward bring the Isle of Shoals Light to bear N.NE., and make good the course S.SW. to Annisquam Bar. From Newburyport Bar, bound to Annisquam, steer S. by E. yi E» At Night. Strangers in vessels of much size should not attempt at night to enter this harbor except in cases of emergency, as the Channel is narrow, and a slight deviation from the course may lead to diffi- culty ; but as it sometimes happens that, with heavy Northerly or Northeasterly gales, they are compelled to enter it in order to save the lives of those on board of them, the following directions may therefore be of great advantage. * Babion's Point is on the Northern side of the harbor, and bears NW* from Lane's Point Beacon ; distance 800 yards. 86 BLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Night-time. If possible, wait until ^ Flood ; then bring Annisquam Light to bear S., and run for it under short sail, making use of the Lead. When the water shoals to 2^ fathoms, the Light will be distant about ^ mile. The course is then S. by W. ^ W., leaving the Light and Beacon on Lobster Rock a short distance to the East- ward. After passing this Light about yi mile, steer more South- erly, and in order to clear Barn Rocks haul round Babson's Point (the land on the Port bow) at a distance of 50 yards, and anchor with this pomt bearing N. High Water, It is High Water at Annisquam Bar 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. Hemarka. In entering Annisquam Outer Harbor, the Channel is narrow, and the shoalest water is upon the Bar, which at Low Tide is about 6 feet. The above directions were good for 1879. Essex Harbor, or Biver. The entrance to this River is 4^ miles in a Southwesterly direc- tion from Halibut Point (the Northern extremity of Cape Ann) , and 2 miles Northwesterly from Annisquam Lighthouse. A Sand Bar having at Low Tide about 6 feet water upon it, extends across its entrance. The Channel across this Bqr is constantly changing, and Buoj's are placed upon it to mark its Northern and Southern spits, and likewise the Channel a part of the way up to Essex. This harbor may be called a shoal-water place. Sailing Directions for Essex Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Southward around Cape Ann, leave Halibut Point about ^ mile to thie Southward, and steer W. by S. % S. until you make the Buoys (one Black, the other Red) upon Essex Biver Bar. These Buoys lie about midway between Annisquam ELDRIDOB'8 COAST PILOT. 87 and Ipswich Lighthouses. After making these Buoys, anchor, or lay off and on until about ^ Flood ; then run to the Southwest- ward, crossing the Bar midway between the two Buoys, and run in, leaving the Beacon and Ked Buoys on the Starboard hand close to. When you are abreast of the upper Buoy, or can see no other Buoy above you, then anchor. This harbor should not be at- tempted by vessels of much size, excepting when necessity com- pels. Small vessels may make a harbor by the above directions ; but it is advisable, if bound up to Essex, to take a pilot. Lighthouses* At this date (1879) there is no Light at Essex Harbor. High Water, It is High Water at Essex River Bar 18 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. From the Northeastward bring the Isle of Shoals Light to bear NE. by N. ^ N., and make good the course SW. by S. ^ S. to Essex Bar ; then follow the directions before given. Ipswioh Harbor. This Harbor or River is situated about 7 miles in a Northwest- erly direction fi*om Halibut Point (the Northern extremity of Cape Ann). The Bar at its entraiu^e, like those of the other harbors in Ipswich Bay, is constantly changing, and the deepest water across it is usually not more than fl'om 4J^ to 6 feet at Low Tide. A movable Beacon, showing a fixed Wlilte Light, is placed in front of the main Lighthouse. This Beacon is sbifted so as to be always in range with the main Ligiit, and the line of best water over the Bar. Vessels can therefore, if necessity compels, run in on this range at night or day. Lighthouses. On Castle Neck, South side of the entrance to Ipswich Harbor, are located two Light Towers nearly 200 feet apart, ranging East and West. The Eastern Tower, which, at this date, is only lighted. 88 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. shows a fixed White Light, varied hy White Flashes. The West- ern Light has long been discontinued. These Towers bear from Halibut Point (the Northern extremity of Cape Ann) W. ^ N., distance 6 miles ; from Annisquam Lighthouse, NW. by W., dis- tance 4 miles ; fVom Isle of Shoals Lighthouse, SW. by S., distance 18^ miles ; fVom the Lighthouse on Whale's Back entrance to Ports- mouth Harbor, S. by W. j^ W., distance 23 miles. Ipswich Beacon Light, This movable Beacon, which shows a fixed White Light, is placed near the shore in front of the Main Lighthouse, and is shifted as often as the Channel changes. In order, therefore, to oross the Bar in the deepest water, vessels in daytime should bring this. Beacon in range with the Eastern Lighthouse. Dangers, A Sand Bar extends across the entrance of this harbor, and the depth of water upon it changes during every heavy gale. Sand Bars also extend from Plum Island Point and Castle Neck, which form the Northern and Southern sides of its entrance. This place may therefore be considered a shoal-water harbor. Memarks, Vessels bound to Ipswich should take pilots off the Bar ; but as it sometimes happens that they are compelled to make this harbor in order to save their lives, the following directions may therefore in such cases be invaluable. Sailing Directions for Ipswich Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. If your vessel draws as much as 10 feet water, wait, if possible, off the bar until about ^ Flood ; then bring the Beacon or Light- house near the shore in range with the Eastern Lighthouse, bearing Southwesterly, and run in on this range. As you approach the Lig.'ts, you will see the two Buoys (one red, the other black) on the Spits of the Bar. Pass between these two Buoys, and run about SW. by W. % W. for the Inner Spit Buoy (which is red). Leave this last-mentioned Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 89 steer for the Beacon Light (bearing about SW.) until you are about 200 or 800 yards from the Beach ; then follow the shore to the Northwestward, keeping about the same distance from it until abreast of Ipswich River (which is the first opening after passing the Lights). When abreast of this River, steer more Northerly for the middle of Plum Island Sound, and anchor in from 4 to 6 fathoms water, with Plum Island Point (which is on the Eastern side of the entrance) bearing about SE. from you. The anchorage in this Sound between Great Neck and Plum Island is somewhat exposed in heav}' Easterlygales and very High Tides, and the hold- ing-ground is said to be poor. If bound up to Ipswich, when abreast of the river a Pilot is necessary. Coming from the Southward around Cape Ann, leave Halibut Point about % mile to the Southward, and run W. J^ N. for Ips- wich Bar. From the Northeastward bring the Isle of Shoals Light to bear NE. by N. ^ N., and make good the course SW. by S. ^ S. for the above-mentioned Bar. Fluiu Island Sound. The entrance to Plum Island Sound bears about NW. by N. J^ N. from Ipswich Lights ; distance 1 J^ miles. Upon the Western side of this Sound are several small shallow streams, one of which is called Parker River. The old town of Newbury is built upon the Northern bank of this River. High Water, It is High Water at Ipswich Bar about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9}^ feet. Dangers to be avoided in sailing into Ipswich Bay. This Bay lies between Halibut Point (the Northern extremity of Cape Ann) and the Southern Point of Plum Island. The princi- pal dangers to be avoided in entering it are as follows: Plum Cove Ledge, Annisquam, Essex, and Ipswich Bars. Plum Cove Ledge, which is dry at Low Tide, lies about % mile from shore, and is marked upon its Northwestern part with a Black Buoy, No. 1. This Buoy bears NE. % N. from Annisquam Lighthouse; distance 1 % mile. In order to avoid the above-mentioned Bars, use the Lead, and do not approach them in less than 5 fathoms water. 90 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Beating into Ipswich Bay. Vessels at uight-time, or in thick weather, beating into Ipswich Bay should take care to avoid the Eastern shore, especially from Halibut Point to Lane's Cove,* as in some places the shores are very bold, and there are 9 fathoms water within a stone's throw of the rocks ; but you may boldly stand into 5 or 6 fathoms water on the Western side of this B iy without danger. The Coast firom Ipswich Entrance to Newburyport Bar. In sailing from Ipswich entrance to Newburyport Bar, the only dangers to be avoided are the Sand Bars, which extend from % to yi mile from shore. At night, use the Lead (which is a sure guide) » and do n .t approach nearer the land than 5 fnthoms water. Newburyport Harbor. * The entrance to this harbor (off the Bar in 6 fathoms water) bears from Halibut Point (the Northern extremity of Cape Ann) NW. by N., distance \Q]^ miles ; from the Isle of Shoals Light, SW. % W., distance 12^ miles; from Annisquam Lighthouse, N. by W. }^ W., distance Idyi miles ; from Ipswich Bar, N. % W., distance 7j4 miles ; from Light on Whale's Back, SW. by S. ^ S.) distance 15^ miles. Lighthouses, Upon the Northern end of Plum Island, South side of entrance to Newburyport Harbor, a Lighthouse is built, which shows a fixed White Light. Newburyport Beacon. This movable Beacon, which shows a fixed White Light, is placed in front of the Main Lighthouse, aud is shifted as often as the Channel changes. In order, therefore, to cross the Bar in the deepest water, vessels should bring this Beacon in range with the Lighthouse.f * Lane's Cotc is situated about 1 ^ miles Southwesterly from Halibut Point, t A Whistling Buoy has been placed off Newburyport Bar in 9 fathoms water. Newburyport Main Lighthouse bears W. >i S. from this Buoy. ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. 91 Upper Harbor Beacons, In firont of the city of Newburyport are placed two Range Lights. The Tower of the front Light (which stands upon Bai- ley's Wharf) is painted black, and shows a Red Fixed Light. The Rear Lighthouse is a Pyramidical Tower, red brick color, lantern black, and shows a Green Fixed Light. These lighthouses, when in range bearing W. ^ S.t lead midway between the two piers to the anchorage off the town. Dangers in entering this Harbor. A Sand Bar extends across the entrance of this harbor, and the depth of water upon it (which is usually ft-om 4 to 6 feet) changes during every heavy gale. Buoys are placed upon this Bar ; and, in order to show the best water across it, are shifted by the pilots whenever it is necessary. The Beacon in front of the Lighthouse is also moved, so as to be in range with the Light and Bar Buoys. Extensive ^lats, which are dry at Low Tide, lie on both sides of t^ Channel leading to the city. There are also several rocks, some of which are bare at Low Tide. Black JRocka. These Rocks, upon which a Beacon is built, lie upon the North- ern side of the Channel, ind are bare at Half Tide. This Beacon, which is painted red, bears from Newburyport Main Lighthouse about N.NW. ; distance y^ mile. About SE. by E. >^ E., >^ mile flrom Black Rock Beacon, is a bare rock, which lies about 20 yards fVom shore. Lunt'8 Mock, This Rock, which is bare at ^ .Ebb, lies upon the Northern side of the Channel, and is marked on its Southern side with a Red Buoy, No. 2. Newburj'port Main Lighthouse bears from this Buoy about SE. ; distance y% mile. Gangway Bock. This Rock, which at very Low Tide has but little water upon it, is marked with a Buoy painted in black and white perpendicular si;ripes. This is called Midchannel Buoy, and bears SE. ^ S. from the Northern Pier, distance 100 yards, and East 250 yards 92 SLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. ft-om the Southern Pier. In order to avoid this Rock, bring the harbor lights in range, and run for them. This range will carry you nearly midway between the Northern and Southern Piers, and about 50 yards to the Northward of Gangway Rock. Half-Tide Hock, On the Western side of the Channel, about 300 yards W. ^ S. from Channel Rock Buoy, is a large rock bare at Hp.lf Tide. There are several smaller rocks near it also bare at Low tide.* Tho Boilers. These are two sunken Rocks which lie close to the end of Cus- tom-House Wharf. The Sow and I^igs. These Rocks, some of which are bare at Low Tide, lie on the Noithern side of the river, about 100 yards SE. from the Ferry Wtys, at Ferry Village. Iieniark9, Upon Newburyport Bar at High Tide, in the best of the water, there is usually not less than 12 feet ; but as the depth and location of the Channel is constantly changing, it is therefore advisable for vessels of more than 9 feet draught, except in cases of great neces- sity, to take pilots. It must be also borne in mind that in East- erly gales this Bar cannot be safely crossed. In such weather, vessels should, if possible, make some other harbor. Sailing Directions for Newbmyiwrt Harbor rr Day- time, with favorable winds ard fair weather. From the Southeastward bring Halibut Point (the Northern ex- tremity of Cape Ann) to bear SE. by S., and make good the course NW. by N. for Newbur}'port Bar. If your vessel draws as much as 10 feet water, wait, if possible, until nearly High Water. Then bring the Lighthouses in range bearing about W., and steer for them until you make the black and white perpendicular-striped Buoy upon the outer Bar. Bring this Buoy in range with the main Lighthouse, and run in, leaving it close to on either hand. * An appropriation has been made bjr the United States Oovernment for the improvement of the Channel leading into Newburyport Harbor ; it is therefore pro^ble that some of these Bocks were removed before the publication of this work. ELDRIDQE'S COAi T PILOT. 98 When abreast of it, keep the Lights in range until yon see another black and .\^ite perpendicular-striped Buoy. This last is the Inner Bar Buoy. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy close to on the Port hand, and sner for the Black Buoy off Flum Island Spit, leaving it on the Port hand ; thence between another Black Buoy and Bea- con. "When about midway between this Buoy and Beacon, steer for the town, leaving the Black Buoys on the Port, and the Red onos on the Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see two more Beacons or Lighthouses. Bring them in range, and steer for them. On this range you will pasp ab^ut 50 yards to the Northward of the Buoy off Gangway Rock, aad also midway between the piers to the anchorage off the city. From the Northeastward bring the Isle of Shoals Light to bear NE. 54 E., and make good the course SW. ^ W. for Newbury- port Bar, then follow the directions before given. Sailing Directions for Night-time. Strangers should not at night attempt to enter this harbor except in cases of emergency, but if necessity compels, if possible, do not come nearer the bar than 10 fathoms of water until nearly high tide ; then bring the lights in range and run in for them, keeping a sharp lookout for the Buoys. When abreast of the Inner Bar Buoy, haul more Northerlv and pass in, keeping nearer Salisbury Point* than the Lighthouse. When the main or Western Light bears S. by E., steer W. by N. J^ N., leaving the Beacon upoh Black Rocks about 150 yards on the Starboard hand, until the Red and Green Lights in front of the city are in one ; then run for them on this range, which will take you between the piers to the an- chorage off the town. In crossing the Bar, with the Lights in range, if you should not make the Buoys, when you judge the Lights are }i mile from you, haul more Northerly for Salsburj- Pqint, leaving it about 150 yards on the Starboard hand, and proceed as before directed. Merrimac Hiver. The entrance to this River is across Newburyport Bar. • Salisbury Point is opposite Newburyport Lights, and forms the Northern 8id6 of entrance to the Harbor. The passage between tills point and the Lights is about | mile in width, and the Channel is usually nearest to this point. 94 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. ih Water, It is High Water at NewLuiyport Bar about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 7^ feet. Hampton Harbor. Tliis harbor is about 5 miles North IVom Newburyport entrance, and at this date (1879) is not buoyed. A number of dangerous roclcs and ledges lie off its entrance, and the harbor has but little water in it at Low Tide. Vessels therefore, bound into this place, should take pilots. Bye Harbor. This harbor lies about 4 miles Southwesterly fVom the light on Whale's Back (entrance to Portsmouth Harbor) , and is of but little consequence. The Count from Kewhuryport Bar to Entrance off Portsmouth Harbor, From Newburyport Bar to Whale's Back Lighthouse the course is NE. by N. J^ N. ; distance 15^ miles. Vessels in sailing from Newburj-port Bar to the entrance of Portsmouth Harbor should keep at least a mile from shore, as there are numerous rocks and shoals that lie off this part of the coast. In thick weather or night-time use the lead, and do not approach nearer to it than 10 fathoms water at Low Tide, and 11>^ at High Tide. Portsmouth Harbor. The entrance to this harbor is nearly North from Cape Ann, distant about 25 miles; Southwesterly from Cape Elizabeth, dis- tant 37 miles ; and Northeasterly from Newburyport Bar, distant about 15 miles. Whale's Back Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light varied by white flashes, is located upon a Ledge of Rocks called Whale's Back. In entering the harbor, this light is left on the Starboard hand. A Fog Trumpet (at this date) is placed near the Light- BLDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 95 house, giving blasts of 8 seconds' duration, at intervals of 22 sec- onds. Tills Lighthouse bears ft-om Thatcher's Island Lights (Cape Ann) North about 26 miles ; fVom the Isle of Shoals Light N- by W. }i W., distance 6}4 miles ; from Newburyport Bar NE. by N.^ N., distance 15^ miles; from Boon Island Light- house W. }i S., distance 10>^ miles. Portsmouth Harbor Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is located at Newcastle, and in entering the harbor is left on the Fort hand. This last-mentioned Lighthouse bears from the Light upon Whale's Back N.NW. ; distance about 1 mile. Dangers in approaching Portsmouth Harbor. York Ledge, This dangerous Ledge, which extends Northeasterly and South- westerly about ^ mile, is bare at three-quarters ebb, and is marked with an Iron Spindle 28 feet high, with an Iron Cage on top. From this Spindle the sunken portion of the Ledge extends about NE. nearly % mile. Vessels therefore from the Northeastward should give this Spindle a berth of 1 mile, and ft ^ the South- westward should not approach it nearer than J^ mile. Ten fathoma water was found 125 yards South from this Ledge, and 9 fathoma 200 yards North from it. In thick weather or night-time, the lead» therefore, gives but little or no warning in approaching it. Boon Island Light bears from this Spindle E. ^ N., distance 5^ miles; Isle of Shoals Light, S.SW., distance 7^ miles; Whale'a Back Light, W. by S., distance 5 miles ; Stone's Rocks, NW. ^ W., distance 2 miles. Cape Neddick Light N. by E. ^ E. Ayi miles. Stone's Rocks, This Ledge, which lies nearly ] i mile from the shore, abreast of York Ledge, is bare at Low Tide, and is marked with a Spindle, and also upon its outer part with a Black Buoy, which in sailing along the shore are both left to the Westward. York Ledge Spindle bears from this Buoy SE. % E. The Channel between York Ledge and Stone's Rocks is about 2 miles in width, with not less than from 4^ to 12 fathoms water in it. m ELDKI DOE'S COAST PILOT. THangledf or Mnrray*H Rock, These Ledges extend nearly North and South about % mile.. Upon the Southern Ledge in a rock, imvlng at very low tides but ft fbet water upon it. This is called Murray's Koclc, and is marked otr its Southern part witli a Buoy having Red and black horizontal stripes. Boon Island Lighthouse bears fVom this Buoy B. by N. % N-, distance 6>^ miles ; Isle of Shoals Light, S. by W. }i Wm distance 6^ miles ; Whale's Back Light, W., dis- tance 4 miles; York Ledge Spindle, NE. % N., distance 1% miles. The Channel between York Ledge and Murray's Rock is about \% miles in width ; heavy -draught vessels, in passing between them, should keep nearest York Ledge. Dangers on Eastern Side of Entrance to Ports- mouth Harbor. JEastem Sister. This is a small bare rock, surrounded by sunken ledges, lying about }( mile from shore, and bears from Whale's Back Light E. by N. ; distance 1^ miles. Western Sister, This rock is bare at Low Tide, and is also surrounded by sunken ledges ; it is marked off its Southern part with a Red Buoy No. 2, which, in coming from the (Eastward, is left on the Starboard hand. Whale's Back Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. ^ N. ; dis- tance about 1 mile. Philip's Hocks, These Rocks, which at very Low Tides have but 9 feet w.ater upon them, are not Buoyed at this date (1879). They lie about SW., distance }( mile, from the Buoy on the Western Sister, and E. by Sm a little more than ^ mile from Whale's Back Light- house. Vessels of more than 8 feet draught at Low Tide should give these Rocks a wide berth. « Kitt'8 Mocks, These sunken Ledges, which have at very Low Tides about 11 feet water upon them, are marked off their Southern part with a Bell Buoy, No. 4, which in passing in is left on the Starboard hand. Whale's Buck Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. by W. ; dis- ELDRIDOE'B COAST PILOT. 97 tance J4 mile. VesselB of more tlmn ft tout draught nt Low Tide should not pass between this Buoy and tlie Lighthouse, as there are several sunken rocks in this Channel. Dangers on Western Side of Entrance to Ports- mouth Harbor. Gun- Boat Ledge, This Ledge, which lies about 1 luilo firom shore, has at Low Tide about 20 feet water upon it. Whale's Back Light boars ftom the centre of this Ledge, N. by E. }^ E., distance 2^ miles; Isle of Shoals Light, SE. by S., distance 4^ miles. SHlettman't* Mocks* These Rocks, which extend about /j mile ftt)m the Western shore, lie ^ mile S. by W. fVom Portsmouth Lighthouse, and are marked on their outer part with a Black Buoy, No. 3, which in sailing in is left on the Port hand. Memarkti, The depth of water in entering Portsmouth Harbor is sufflcient to admit vessels of the heaviest draught, oven at the lowest Tides. With an Ebb Tide and light winds, or winds ahead, the harbor is difficult of access on account of the current, which sets out verj' strong. The shores in entering are very bold, and the Lead gives but little warning in approaching them. Sailing Directions for Portsmouth Harbor, in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward, after passing the Tripod or Spindle on the Dry Salvages, bring Thatcher's Island Lighthouses to bear South, and make good the course North for Whale's Back Lighthouse at the entrance of Portsmouth Harbor. If there is no deviation from this course, the Isle of Shoals Lighthouse will be left about 2 miles to the Eastward. As soon as the Lightliouse upon Whale's Back is made, bring it to bear North, and run for it on this course. When from 1 to 2 miles fVom this Lighthouse, haul to the Northwestward until you open the entrance to the harbor ; then run in about N. ^ E., keeping midway between Whale's Back Lighthouse and the 98 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Western shore. Continue the course N. ^ E., leaving the Black Buoy off Stilesman's Rocks and Portsmouth Lighthouse, both on the Port hand ; haul round the point on which the Fort stands at a distance of aboui 200 yards. As you enter the harbor, you will see the Black Buoy, No. 5, off Cod Rock. This Buoy lies about 250 yirds NW. from the Northeastern part of Fort Constitution.* Leave this Buoy close to on the Port hand, and make good the course NW. by W. about % mile ; then haul up about W. ^ N., keeping in mid-channel, leaving the Black Buoy No. 9, off Goat Island Ledge, about 50 yards on the Port hand. Continue the course W. }i N. until you open the two large Ship Houses at the Navy Yard from behind Seavy Point (which is on the Starboard hand) ; then steer about N.NW., passing in mid-channel through the Narrows. As j-ou sail in, you will see on the Port hand a Black Beacon, and also two Buoys, one black, the other painted in red and black horizontal stripes. Leave the Beacon and last- mentioned Buoys on the Port hand, and haul in for the Wharves, leaving another Black Buoy, No. 13, on the Port hand. It is advisable for vessels intending to anchor off the Wharves to have a long scope of Cable ovei'hauled around the Windlass, as there is from 10 to 12 fathoms water in the harbor at Low Tide. From the Northeastward, From the Northeastward leave Cape Neddick Light (which bears NW. yz W. from Boon Island Lirhthouse, distance 5^ miles) about 1 mile to the Westward, and make good the course SW. % S., passing midway between the Spindle on York Ledge and the Buoy and Spindle on Stone's Rocks, and also midway between the Buoy on Murray's Rock and shore. Continue the course SW. % S. (leaving the Red Buoy on the Western Sister on the Starboard hand) until Whale's Back Lighthouse bears W-NW. ; then run about West, leaving the Red Buo}' off Kitt's Rocks upon the Star- board hand. After passing this last-mentioned Buoy, run North- westerly until the entrance to the harbor is fairly open ; then run in midway between Whale's Back Lighthouse and the Western shore, and proceed as before directed. Buoy course. * Fort Constitution is about 100 yards Northwest from Portsmoutii Liglit- bouse. ELDBIDGES COAST PILOT. 99 Coming from Seaward or the Eastward, After passing Boon Island Lighthouse about 2 miles, bring it to bear E-NE. ; on which bearing keep it, and steer W.SW., leav- ing the red and black horizontal-striped Buoy on LIurray's Rock to the Northward. Continue the course W.SW. until Whale's Back Lighthouse bears W.NW. ; then steer about W. by N., leaving the Red Buoy off Kitt's Rocks on the Starboard hand. After pass- ing this Buoy, run Northwesterly until the harbor is fairly open ; then run in midwaj', and proceed as befoi'e directed. Anchorage in Daytime. In order to avoid the strong current or tide, the following, in daytime, are the best places for anchorage in Portsmouth Lower Harbor. After passing the Lighthouse Point in accordance with directions before given, bring Portsmouth Lighthouse to bear SE. j4 S. (distance about }^ mile) ; on which bearing keep it, and steer NW. J4 N. As 30U sail in, j'ou will see on the Port hand Clark's Island, which is small, and another nearly ahead ; this is Jamacia Island ; and on the Starboard a Red Buoy, No. 8, which lies off the Southwest part of Hick's Rocks. Continue the course NW. }4 N., passing about midway between this lar -mentioned Buoy and Clark's Island. When the Buoy bears E. by S. J4 S., steer W. by N. ^ N., and anchor about midway between t! ese two last- inentioned Islands in from 4 to 6 fathoms water. Or you maj' run NW. }4 N. from Portsmouth Lighthouse until abreast of the Red Buoy No. 8, which leave about 100 yards on he Starboard hand, and run up about N. bj- E. >^ E., and anchor in mid-channel near the Bridge in from 5 to 6 fathoms water. In running this last course, N. by E. }4 E., the Black Buoy No. 7, which lies oflf Jamaica Ledge, is left on the Port hand. Beating into Portsmouth Harbor, in Daytime. In daytime, beating between the Isle of Shoals and main land, bound into Portsmouth Harbor, do not approach the Western shore nearer than 1 mile until abreast of Odiorne's Point, which bears from Whale's Back Lighthouse SW. ; distance 1^ miles. From Jerry's Point (which bears West from Whale's Back Lighthouse) to Stilesman's Rocks, the Western shore may be approached within 850 yards without danger. 100 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Portsmouth Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward leave Thatcher's Island Lights 3 or 4 miles to the Westward, and when they bear W. by N., run N. ^ W. for the Isle of Shoals Light ; (on this course the Salvages will be left about 3 miles to the Westward.) Leave this last-mentioned Light (which is Red and White Flashing) about 2 miles to the East- ward, and steer N. ^ W. for Portsmouth Harbor. When about 3 miles from the entrance, bring Portsmouth Light (which is Fixed) to bear N. ^ W., and run for it on this course. If there is no error in the Compass, Whale's Back Light (which is Flashing) will be left % mile to the Eastward. Continue the course N. % W. for Portsmouth Light until Whale's Back Light bears ESE. ; then haul up N. ^ E-, keeping a sharp lookout for Wood Island, and also the Buoy off Stilesman's Rocks, the former of which is letl on the Starboard, and the latter on the Port hand. If the niglit is very dark when abreast of Whale's Back Light, use the Lead, which is a sure guide, and do not go into less than 7 fathoms at Low Tide, and Syi at High Tide. When abreast of Portsmouth Lighthouse, haul round the point (which is bold) at a distance of from 200 to 300 jards. If bound up to the city, when the Light bears S.SE., dis- tance about Yi mile, anchor in from 8 to 10 fathoms water, and wait until daylight. Coming from the Northeastward, leave Cape Neddick, which is bold, about ^ mile to the Westward. When Cape Neddick Light bears NW., steer SW. by W. until it bears NE. by N. >^ N. ; on which bearing keep it, and run SW. by S. ^ S., passing about midwa}" between York Ledge and Stone's Rocks. When Whale's Back Light bears W.NW., make good the course W. ^ N. until Portsmouth Light is well open to the Westward of Whale's Back Light, bearing N. % W. ; then run for it on this course, and proceed as before directed. From the Eastward or Seaward, leave Boon Island 2 or 3 miles to the Northward, and steer W.NW. until it bears NF by E. yi E. ; then run in as before directed. Beat Anchorages at Night-time* Haul round the Lighthouse Point (which is bold) at a distance of from 200 to 300 yards, in accordance with directions before given. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 101 When Portsmouth Light bears SW., haul up W.NW., and anchor in from 8 to 10 fathoms water, the Light bearing S.SE., distance about ^ mile. Or when Portsmouth Light bears S. by W- J^ W. make good the oourse N. by E. J4 E. until the water shoals to 4 fathoms at Low Tide, and bj4 at High Tide ; then anchor to the Westward of the Beacon upon Logy Ledge. This last place is somewhat exposed in heavy Southerly winds. N. Beating into Portsmouth Harbor at Night. • Beating into Portsmouth Harbor, it is not prudent at night to stand to the Westward ftirther than to bring Portsmouth Light to bear U.}4 E. ; and in order to cloar Kitt's Rocks in standing to the Eastward, it is necessary to keep Portsmouth Light well open to the Westward of Whale's Back Light. When abreast of this last- mentioned Light, use the Lead, and do not approach either shore nearer than 7 fathoms water at Low Tide, and 8j4 at High Tide. When about half-way IVom Whale's Back Light to Portsmouth Light, keep the Eastern shore best aboard in order to avoid Stiles- man's Rocks which extend off ft'om the Western shore, and bear S. by W. from Portsmouth Light ; distance ^ mile. Entering Portsmouth Harbor in Thick Weather. At this date (1879) there is a Fog Trumpet at Whale's Back (East side of entrance to this harbor) giving blasts of 8 seconds* duration at intervals of 22 seconds. As soon as this Trumpet or Fog Signal is heard, bring It to boar ft'om North to N. >^ E., and run for it on this course, leaving Whale's Back Lighthouse about 200 yards to the Eastward. When abreast this last-mentioned Light, steer about N. }i W., keeping in not less than 7 fathoms water at Low Tide, and 8j4 at High Tide, until past Portsmouth Light ; then anchor. IHseataqua River, The entrance to Dover and other places upon this River is by way of Portsmouth Harbor. High Water, It is High Water in Portsmouth Harbor Boston. Common Tides rino about 9 feet. minutes after it is at 102 ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Isles of Shoals. These are a group of rocky Islets (with many sunken Ledges near them) lying about 6 miles Southeasterly from the entrance of Portsmouth Harbor, and extend Northeasterly and Southwesterly about 3 miles. Isle of Shoals Lighthouse, This I^ Boon Island Lighthouse, . . . NE. yi E., . nVi miles. (( (( (( Dangers. There are numerous Rocks and Ledges lying near these Islands, some of which extend more than % mile from shore. The princi- pal dangers, however, to be avoided in passing to the Eastward of them are Anderson's and Cedar Island Ledges, both of which are bare at Low Tide. Isle of Shoals Light bears from Anderson's I edge, NW. by W. % W., distance ^ iriile ; from Cedar Island Ledge, W. by S., distance 1% miles. There is a Channel of 20 fathoms water between these Ledges and tbe Islands, but vessels passing to the Eastward of the Isles of Shoals should give these dangers a wide berth, as neither of them at this date are Buoyed. In passing to the Westward of these Islands, they may be ap- proached at a distance of a mile from them without danger. ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 103 Isles of Shoals, or Gosport Harbor. Remarks, These Roads, which lie about NE. by N., one mile from the Isle of Shoals Lighthouse, are situated between Hog and Smutty- nose Islands on the Northeastward, and Cedar and Star Islands on the Southward, and only afford good shelter with winds from N.NE. to SSW. by way of East. Sailing Directions for Isles of Shoals, or Gosport Harbor, in Dasrtiuie, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southward leave the Isles of Shoals about 1 mile to the Eastward, and when the Lighthouse bears East, steer N.NE., leaving Lunging Island (which is the first North of the Lighthouse) a little more than J^ mile to the Eastward in order to avoid the Ledges which extend Northwesterly about ^ mile from it. When the Northern part of this last-mentioned Island bears SE. ]/2 E. about Yz mile, steer E.SE. until the water shoals to 7 fathoms at Low Tide, and ^yi at High Tide ; then anchor. On the last course, the Red and Black Horizontal-striped Buoy on Halfway Rocks, which are nearlj' bare at Low Tide, will be left about 350 yards to the Southward. The Western part of Hog Island, the largest of the group, bears from this anchorage NW. by N. y^ N. Or you may bring the Isle of Shoals Lighthouse to bear N. by W., and run for it on this course. Leave the Liguthouse 200 or 300 yards to the Westward, and steer N. '^ E. After passing it, you will see nearly ahead a Buoy having red and black horizontal stripes, which lies to the Southward of Halfway Rocks, which are nearly bare at Low Tide ; and on the Port hand Lunging Island, which is small. Run in midway between the Buoy and Island, and when about 300 yards past the Buo}^ haul in about E. by S. for the anchorage. From Seaward you may bring the Isle of Shoals Light to bear W. by N., and run for it, passing between Cedar Island and Anderson's Ledges. When about % mile from the Lighthouse, steer about N. by W., passing about midway between Buoy off Hulfwa}' Rocks and Lunging Island (which is the first island North of the Light- house, and its Eastern part is bold). After passing the Buoy off Halfway Rock, according to directions before given, haul in and anchor. 104 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. From Portsmouth, after passing the Buoy off Kitt's Rocks (which bears S. by E. from Whale's Back Light, distant Yz mile) , bring the said light to bear NW. by N. ^ N., and make good the course SE. hy S. ^ S., leaving Hog Island (which is bold on its Western end, and is also the largest of the group) about 300 yards to the Eastward. After passing the Western part of this last-mentioned Island, run in and anchor as before directed. From the Eastward give Duck Island, which is the Northeastern- most of the group, a good berth, in order to avoid the ledges which extend off from it in every direction. When the Isle of Shoals Lighthouse bears S. by W., run for it. On this course the SW. Ledges, extending from Duck Island, will be left about % mile on the Port hand, and Hog Island, vv'hich is quite bold, about i^ mile also on the Port. After passing the Western part of this last-mentioned Island, haul in and anchor according to directiona before given. Passages between the Isles of Shoals. Duck Island, which is surrounded hy rocks and ledges, is the Northernmost of the group. Between this and Hog Island there is a Channel, having a width of more than ]/2 mile, with from 7 to 10 fathoms water in it. Vessels passing through this Channel should keep nearest to Hog Island. There is a Channel of 6 fathoms water between Hog and Smutty- nose Islands, but it is so narrow that strangers should not attempt it except in cases of emergency. In such times keep nearest Smuttynose Island. With NW. winds shelter maj' be found under the South side of Smuttynose Island. In coming in, pass to the Northward of Cedar Island Ledge and anchor close in to the shore, as tnere are 20 fathoms water % mile to the Eastward of the Island. The Isle of Shoals Lighthouse bears from this anchorage SW. by W. }^ W. ; distance 1^ miles. High Water, It is High Water at the Isles of Shoals 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 8 feet. The Isles of Shoals Roads, or Gosport Harbor, is exposed to both Westerly and Northerly winds. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. ion Been Island. This is a small, low Rocky Island, lying about 10 miles North- easterly from the Isles of Shoals, and about 6 miles from the coast ; it is destitute of all vegetation except grass. Boon Island Lighthouse, Upon this Island is erected a lofty Tower, which shows a fixed White Light. Bearings and Distances from Boon Island Lighthouse Distance. Cape Cod (Highland Light), . . . S. J< E. . . Thatcher's Island Lights, .... S.SW. . . Whale's Back Lighthouse, (entrance to Portsmouth Harbor,) W. ^ S. Cape Elizabeth Lights, NE. ^ N. Seguin Island Light, NE. }i E. Monhegan Island Light, .... NE. byE.^E. 63 Mount Desert Rock Light, . . . . E. byN. ^ N. 114 67>^ miles. 2914 " ioy2 " 29 " 4Gy2 " Dangers. Pollock Mock, This Rock, which at this date (1879) is not buoyed, bears from Boon Island Lighthouse W.SW., distant a little more than ^ mile ; and at very Low Tides there are 15 feet of water upon it. Small vessels may approach within ys of a mile of Boon Island without danger, but heavy-draught vessels should give it a wide berth. Soon Island Ledge, This Ledge, which is bare at very Low Tides, is marked on its SE. part with a Buoy having Red and Black Horizontal stripes.* This Buoy bears from Boon Island Lighthouse E. ^ S. ; distance about 3 miles. 24 fathoms water was found 400 yards SW. from this Ledge ; 30 fathoms J4 mile North from it ; and 13 fathoms J/S mile East from it. The lead, therefore, gives but little warning in approaching it in thick weather or at night-time. About East from Boon Island \% miles, are several rocky places, which break in rough weather. At very Low Tides as little as 24 feet water has been found upon some of theni. Heavy-draught vessels should ♦ A Whistling Buoy, with the Letters B. 300 yards SE. by S. from this Ledge. I. L. upon it, has been moorerl 106 ELDRIDGB'S COAST PILOT. not therefore attempt to pass between Boon Island Ledge and the Lighthouse. York River. The en\ ranee to this River, which lies between Sweat's Point on the South, and East Point on the North, is about 5'^ miles North- easterly from Portsmouth entrance ; SW. >^ W. 2>^ miles from Cape Neddick Lights W. by N. >4 N. 6^ mUes from Boon Island Lighthouse ; and NW. by N. >^ N. 2^ miles from York Ledge Spindle. At this date (1879) there is no light at the entrance to this Rivxi. Dangers. The first danger to be met with in approaching this River ia Black Rock, which lies on the Northern side of the Channel, and is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 2. This Buoy bears from East Point about SW. by W., distaut a little more than yi mile. Sweats Point Reef. This Ledge, which extends off from Sweat's Point, is marked with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Vart Point Rock, This Ledge, which is dry at Low Tide, is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 4, which lies about 50 feet Southeast from the Rock. Mock'8 Ifoae, This is a ledge of Rocks bare at Low Tide, lying about ^ mile above Sweat's Point, and extending off about 200 yards from the Southern shore of the River. In passing in, this danger is left on the Port hand. Remarks, The Channel leading into this River is both narrow and crooked, and vessels should enter it upon the flood, as in case of getting ashore they may, with the rising tide, get off again soon. About 8 feet water can be taken up to the anchorage at Low Tide. The current of ebb sets strongly upon Stage Neck Point, which is opposite the narrowest part of this River ; vessels, therefore, in rounding it, — especially with light winds, — should, if possible, keep in the middle of the River. ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 107 Sailing Directions for York Blver in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Eastward, leave Cape Neddick Light, which bears NW. ^2 W. from Boon Island Light, about a mile to the West- ward, and make good the course SW. by W., taking care not to approach nearer the shore tlian J4 mile. When the River is fairly open, run in, leaving the Red Buoy off Black Rock on the Starboard and the Black Buoy off Sweat's Point on the Port hand. As you sail in, you will see another Red Buoy, which lies off Fort Point ; leave this Buoy about 20 yards on the Starboard hand, and steer about W. % S., with the Red Buoy off Stage Neck Point a little on the Starboard bow. On this last course, the ledge called the Rock's Nose will be left on the Port hand. Between this last-men- tioned Ledge and the Northern shore of the River the Channel is very narrow ; leave the last- mentioned Buoy on the Starboard hand and haul round Stage Neck Point in mid-channel, and run up for the first wharf on the Eastern side of the River, bearing NE. % N., and anchor about 75 yards from it. If the wind should b© light, with ebb tide, so that jou cannot get up past Stage Neck Point, haul over and anchor in from 2 to 3 fathoms water, the point bearing NE. by E. ; distance about 200 yards. From the Southwestward, leave the Lighthouse upon the Whale's Back (entrance to Portsmouth Harbor) about IJ^ miles to the Westward, and steer NE. J4 E., passing about midway between York Ledge And Stone's Rocks. When the Spindle upon York Ledge bears S.SE., run N.NW. until the River is fairly open; then run in as before directed. High Water, It is High Water at York River the same time as at Boston. Common tides rise about 8 feet. Cape Neddick. This prominent headland extends out about 1 mile SE. by E. fron. the main shore. At a distance of about 50 yards from the Eastern point of this Cape lies an Island called Cape Neddick Knubble, which at low water is connected by a sand bar with the shore. Upon this Knubble a Lighthouse is erected, which shows a 108 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. fixed Red Light.* Boon Island Lighthouse bears from Cape Ncd- dielc Light SB. % E., distance 5f^ miles ; Cape Elizabeth Lights, NE. y2 E. 281^ miles ; Isle of Shoals Lighthouse, S. by W. ^ W., 12 miles; Spindle upon York Ledge, S. by W., 4}^ miles. Remarks, There is good anchorage on either side of this Cape. On the Northern side, vessels may find shelter with winds from SW. to N.NW. by way of West ; and on the Southern side from West to N. NE. by way of West. Sailing Directions for Cape Neddick Roads in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Northward or Southward may leave Cape Neddick Light about ]^ mile to the Westward, and with Northerly winds anchor in about 6 fathoms water at low tide, and 7)^ at High Tide, the light bearing about E. by N. ; distance ^ mile. With Westerly winds, anchor in 6 fathoms water at Low Tide, and ly^ at High Tide, the light blearing about South ; distance ^ mile. Tlie Coast frgm Whalers Back Light {entrance to Portsmouth Harbor) to Cape Neddick, The principal dangers are the Sisters, Stone's Rocks, Murray's Rock, York Ledge, and the ledges to the Northeastward of York River. In order to avoid these dangers, vessels sailing from Whale's Back Light to Cape Neddick should not approach near r than 1 mile to the shore. By following this last direction, Murray's Rock and York Ledge will be left more than a mile to the East- ward. The Coast from Cape Neddick to Kennebunk River, From Cape Neddick to entrance of Kennebunk River the course is NE. yi N. ; distance about 12 miles. There are several creeks or small streams between these places, but they are of little impor- tance to commerce. There are also several rocks off this part of the coast. To avoid these dangers, vessels should not approach the shore nearer than I % miles. * A Fog-bell is placed near this lighthouse. ELDKIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 100 Kennebunk River. The entrance to this River ia '2j4 miles to lie Westward of Cape Porpoise Lighthouse, and N. by E. 13^ miles from Boon Island Lighthouse. Lighthoiiaes, Upon the Eastern pier at the entrance of the River there was formerly a lighthouse, but it was destroyed by a gale some time since. At this date (1879) there is, therefore, no light at the entrance of this Harbor. Dangers in approaching and entering Kennebunk River. Fishing Rocks, These ddligerous Rocks, some of which are bare at h:ilf tide, are marked upon their Eastern part with an Iron Spindle, wliich bears S.SW. from the Lighthouse Pier at the entrance of the River ; dis- tance ^ mile. This Spindle, in entering Kennebunk River, is left on the Fort hand. Little Fishing Rocks, These Rocks, which are a\trash at very Low Tides, are marked off their Southeast part with a Black Buoy, No. 3. The Lighthouse Pier bears from this Buoy N. % E., distance J^ mile; Spindle upon Fishing Rocks, West, about 200 yards. Bound into Kenne- bunk River, this Buoy is left on the Port hand. Seven'Feet Rock,* About half a mile SE. from the Spindle upon Fishing Rocks is a dangerous Ledge, having at Low Tid^s but 7 feet water upon it. In order to avoid this Ledge, vessels bound into Kennebunk River should carefully watch the Spindle and Buoy upon Fishing Rocks. The pier at the entrance of the river should bear North before attempting to run in. Remarks, The entrance to this river is between two piers which were built for the purpose of improving the Channel. About 3 feet water at Low Tide, and 11 feet at High Tide, can be carried into this place ; but strangers should not attempt to enter it without a pilot. Ves- * A Black Buoy, No. 1, has been placed off the South side of this Rock. no ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. ■elfl mny find Hhelter off the mouth of the river in firom 8 to 4 fathooiH water, with winds fl-om West to North. Bailing Direotions for approaching Kennebunk River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Cape Neddicic Light about % mile on the Port hund, and malte good the course NE. by N. until Cape Porpoise Lighthouse bears NE. by B. ; then run for it, keeping a sharp looltout for the Spindle and Black Buoy off to the Eastward of the Fishing Rocks. As soon as these are made, bring the end of tlie pier on the Eastern side of the river to bear North, and run in, and anchor oil the entrance of the river in iVom 3 to 4 fathoms water. On this last course, the Black Buoy off the Fishing Rocka will bo left a short distance to the Westward, and buoy off Seven- feet Uock to tiie Eastward. From the Eastward, when abreast Capo Porpoise Light, do not Approach nearer the shore than one mile until you make the Spin- dle and Buoy off Fishing Rocks ; then bring the Pier to bear Nor-h, and run in, leaving the Buo}' and Spindle as before directed. High Water, It is High Water upon Kennebunk Bar about 15 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 8 feet. Cape Porpoise Harbor. This small harbor of refuge, which lies between a number of Is- lands, is situated 16 miles Southwesterly from Cape Elizabeth, and Northeasterly 22 miles from the entrance to Portsmouth Harbor. Goat Island Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is built upon the Southwestern end of Goat Island, North side of entrance to this harbor. Cape Elizabeth Lights bear from Goat Island Liglit- house, NE. }i E., distance 16 miles; Seguin Lighthouse, E.NE., distance 36 miles ; Boon Island Lighthouse, S. by W. ^ W., distance 14^ miles ; Cape Neddick Light SW., distance 14 miles. ba] This L it, extend its South bears A'oti ing the ha This L( w.sw.. The Westc No. 4. G, distance at close to on About M small Islan land. The and the Li^ A dangei fVom the S( Js bare at I this danger harbor, this This Led{ is marked Goat Island passing in, The Cham for ancborac but with thes especially to *( ELDRIDQE'8 COAST PILOT. Ill )or. Dangers in approaohing and entering Cape Porpoise Harbor. The Old J*rince. This Ledge, which at very Low Tides has but 8 fleet water upon it, extends nearly North and South 200 yards, and is marlced upon its Southern part with a Red Buoy, No. 2. (toat Island Light bears fVom this Buoy about N.NW. ; distance ^ mile. In enter- ing the harbor, this Buoy is left on the Starboanl hand. Goat Island Point Ledge. This Ledge, which is bare at Half Tide, extends off about W-SW., 150 yards fVom the Southwestern point of Goat Island. The Western part, which is very bold, is marked with a Red Buoy, No. 4. Goat Island Lighthouse bears fVom this Buoy, NE. >4 E. ; distance about 225 yards. Bound into the harbor, this Buoy is left close to on the Starboard hand. Folly Island Point Ledge* About 350 yai-ds W.SW. fVom Cape Porpoise Lighthouse is a small Island destitute of grass or trees, which is called Folly Is- land. The Channel leading into the harbor is between this Island and the Lighthouse. A dangerous Reef extends off about S* by "W., nearly }i mile from the Southern point of this Island, and for half that distance js bare at Low Tide. At this date (1879) there is no Buoy upon this danger, but the sea generally breaks upon it. In entering the harbor, this Ledge is left on the Port hand. Gangway Mock. This Ledge, upon which there are but () feet water at Low Tide, is marked upon its Northeastern part with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Goat Island Light bears from this Buoy E. >^ N. ^ mile. In passing in, this Ledge is left on the Port hand. Remarks. The Channel leading into Cape Porpoise is nt^rrow, and the place for anchorage small, most of the harbor being dry at Low Tide ; but with these disadvantages, it is sometimoa of gn-ut importance, especially to vessels of light draught, when overtaken by a storm. 112 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. The holding ground is excellent, and when once into it, you may lie secure from all winds. The current of both Flood and Ebb in running in and out of this harbor sets strong in several places upon the Ledges. Strangers should not therefore attempt to pass in or out of it unless they have a fair and commanding breeze. Sailing Directions for Cape Porpoise Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southwestward, leave Cape Neddick Light about ^ mile to the Westward, and make good the course NE. % E., taking care not to approach nearer to Cape Porpoise than 1 mile. When Cape Porpoise Lighthouse bears N. by W. ^ W., run for it, keeping a sharp lookout for the Red Buoy off the Old Prince. Leave this Buoy 75 yards on the Starboard hand, and steer about HrW. b}' N. for the Red Buoy off Southwest from the Lighthouse, leaving it on the Starboard hand close to. When abreast this last- mentioned Buoy, you will see to the Northward a pile of stones, surmounted b^' a pole, which stands upon a Dry Ledge (this is called the Pilot Beacon) . Run in with this Beacon a little on the Starboard bow, and anchor with it bearing E. by S. in about 13 feet water at Low Tide. In ver}' heavy weather, it is best to run upon the Flats, where 30U will ground, at Half Tide, soft, muddy bottom, and lie secure from all winds. From the Northeastward, leave Wood Island Light about 1% miles to the Westward, and steer SW. until Cape Porpoise Light l)ears N. by W. % W. ; then run in, and follow the directions before given. Strangers should not attempt to beat out or into this harbor. High Water, It is High Water at Cape Porpoise Harbor 15 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise from 8 to 9 feet. Stage Island Harbor. This Harbor, which lies a short distance to the Northward of Cape Porpoise Light, is formed by a group of Islands Ijing off the main land. It will afford shelter for vessels of light draught, but strangers should not attempt to enter it without a pilot. This is vcioxki Island I 1>^ mile ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. 113 The Coast from Cape Porpoise to Wood Island. From Cape Porpoise to Wood Island the course is NE. Yz E. ; distance 7^ miles. There are several small streams between these places, but they are of no commercial importance. There are also several dangers lying off this part of the coast. Strangers should not therefore approach nearer than 1 mile to it. Wood Island, or Winter Harbor. This Harbor lies about 9 miles Southwest from Cape Elizabeth, and about 7 miles Northeast from Cape Porpoise Lighthouse. Wood Island Lighthouse, Upon the Eastern extremity of Wood Island is a Lighthouse which shows a flashing Red Light. A Fog Bell, struck by machin- ery, is placed near the Lighthouse, and is struck two blows in rapid succession ; then a pause of 2.') seconds, then a single blow. Bearings and Distances from Wood Island Light. Cape Elizabeth Lights, . . . NE. ^ E. . . Diatanc e. miles Seguin Island Light, . . . . E. by N. ^ N. . . 29 u Monhegan Island Light, . . E. by N. . . . 48 (( Mount Desert Rock Light, . . E. J< N. . . . 100 (( Cape Porpoise Light,. . . sw. y2 w. . . . 7^ (( Boon Island Light, . . . . SW.by S. ]i S. . 21 (; Cape Cod (Highland Light), . S. Yi W. 86 Dangers in approaching and entering Wood Island Harbor by the Southern Passage. JEEussey's Mock, This Rock, upon which there are but 5 feet water at Low Tide, is irarked off its Southern side with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Wood Island Light bears from this Buoy NE. by N. }{ N. ; distance 1% miles. In passing in, this Buoy is left on the Port hand. 114 ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Dancehury Meef, This Beef, upca .v^hich there is but 5 feet water, extends nearly 360 yards North and South, and is marked off its Southern part with a Red Buoy, No. 2. Wood Island Light bears from this Buoy N. y^ W. ; distance a little more than ^ mile. At this date, this Ledge is not properly Buoyed, as the Channel between it and the shore is only 300 yards in width. It is therefore advisable for strangers to leave this Buoy at least 400 yards on the Port hand. Dangers in approaching Wood Island Harbor by the Northern Passage. Negro Island Ledge, This Ledge, upon which there is 8 feet water at Low Tide, is marked on its Northern side with a Black Buoj', No. 3. Wood Island Light bears from this Buoy SE. ; distance J4 mile. Be- tween this Buo}' and Wood Island there is a Channel 300 yards in width, having 4 fathoms water in it. The best and widest Channel, however, is to the Northward of this Buoy. ^evfiarks. This harbor, which has from 8 feet to 3 fathoms water in it, lies between Stage and Negro Islands (the former of which has a Monument upon it 40 feet in height). About 12 feet water at Low Tide can be carried through the Channel South of Wood Island into the harbor ; but strangers should only attempt this passage with fair winds, as it is very narrow in some places. The best Channel is to the Northward of the Island between the Black Buoy No. 3, on Negro Ledge, and the Red Buoy No. G, off Ram Island Ledge. Between these two Buoys the Channel is about Yi mile in width, and has a depth of 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. This harbor is exposed to Northerly- winds, but vessels may run up into the Pool, where they will lie secure from all winds. Sailing Directions for Wood Island Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Ship Channel. From the Southwestward, leave Cape Porpoise Light 3 or 4 miles to the Westward, and make good the course NE. Yz E. until Wood N., le When to the Buoy a ward. Southw with a about n off the water, 1 From or Cape land Lie course, leaving Continu Island I of the ] hand), s water, r Southws Direct Steer Wood Is course, about 1 Lighthou must ste( the Souf the Red Negro Is hand, an< between draught winds ah ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 115 "Wood Island Lighthouse bears NW. ; then run in about NW. J4 Km leaving the Lighthouse about ^ mile upon the Fort hand. When this Lighthouse bears W.SW., you will see about J4 mile to the Westward the Black Buoy otf Negro Ledge ; haul round this Buoy at a distance of 250 yards ft'om it, leaving it to the South- ward. When abreast this Buoy, you will see, about Yz mile to the Southw vrd, Negro Island, which is small ; and also Stage Island, with a Monument upon its Northeastern part. Run in, and anchor about midway between this last-mentioned Island and the Red Buoy off the Southern Point of Negro Island, in from 2J^ to 4 fathoms water, the Monument bearing about NW. by W. From the Eastward, after passing the Ledges off Cape Elizabeth, or Cape Elizabeth Lights, boar N. by E. >^ E. ; bring Wood Is- land Lighthouse tobearfVom W. to W.SW., and run for it on this course. When about a mile ft'oni this Light, steer NW. by W., leaving the Black Buoy ofl Nogro Ledge upon the Port hand. Continue the course NW. by W. until the Monument upon Stage Island bears W.SW. ; then run into the harbor. When abreast of the Black Buoy off Negro Ledge (which is left on the Port hand), steer more Southerly, and anchor in from 2J/^ to 4 fathoms water, midway between the Monument and Red Buoy off to the Southward of Negro Island. Directions to run in to the Southward of Wood Island. Steer NE. J4 E. fVom Cape Porpoise, as before directed, until Wood Island Light bears NW. by N. ; then run for it upon this course, leaving the Buoy off Dancobury Ledge (before described) about % mile upon the Port hand. When about % mile from the Lighthouse, you will be past the Northern part of this Ledge, and must steer about W. by N. % N., keeping about 200 yards from the Souf^^'^rn part of Wood Island. As you sail in, you will see the Red Buoy which lies a short distance to the Southward of Negro Island. Leave this Buoy about 100 yards on the Starboard hand, and anchor in about 2j4 fathoms at Low Tide, about midway between the Buoy and Monument. Vessels of more than 10 feet draught should not attempt this passage at Low Tide, or with winds ahead. 116 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Directions to enter the Fool. If it blows strong from the Northeast, when midway between the Monument upon Stage Island and the Buoy off the Southern part of Negro Island, steer about SW., leaving the Spindle upon Half- tide Rock 150 yards on the Port hand. When the entrance (which is about IOC yards in width) is fairly open, run in midway, and anchor as soon as you are through it. From the outer anchor- age about 8 feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken into the Pool. The current of Flood and Ebb sets strong in and out directly through this passage. Strangers should not attempt to enter Wood Island Harbor at night. High Water, It is High Water at Wood Island about 30 minutes before it is At Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. Saco River. To enter this River, leave Wood Island Light about J^ mile to the Southward, and steer W. b}' N. As you sail in, you will see the Black Buoy off Negro Ledge ; leave this Buoy 150 3ard8 on the Port hand, and steer W. by N., leaving the Red Buoy, No. 6, off Ram Island Ledge, and the Red Buoy, No. 8, off Sharp's Rocks, both to the Northward. When abreast the last-mentioned Buoy, you will see the lower bar Buoy, which is painted in Black and White perpendicular stripes. This last Buoy lies at the entrance of the river ; in entering, the Channel is to the Westward of the Breakwater. It is advisable for vessels bound to Saco to enter Wood Island Harbor and take pilots, as the frequent changes of the bar at the mouth of the river render it impossible to give any correct sailing directions. It is High Water upon Saco Bar the same time as at Wood Island Harbor. From the mouth of the River to Saco or Biddeford the distance is from 3 to 4 miles. Islands in Saco Bay. Rmn Island* Th is Island, which is very small, bears from Wood Island Light NW. yi W., distance U/i miles, and lies Northeast about % mile from the Buoy on the Bar at the entrance of Saco River. Thi» ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 117 Island is surrounded by shoals, and vessels should give ' a good berth. Magle Island. This Island is small, and bears from Wood Island Lighthouse NW. by N. ji N., distance 2 miles, and lies about 1 mile from shore. Vessels of 11 feet draught may, at Low Tide, approach it at a distance of yi mile without danger. Stvatton and Bluff Islands, These two Islands, which lie near each other, bear from Wood Island Lighthouse about N.NE. ; distaace 3 miles. Sunken rocks extend off Yi mile to the Eastward of these Islands, and vessels bound to Old Orchard Beach should give them a berth of at least y2 mile. There is no passage for vessels between these two last- mentioned Islands. Richmond's Island Roads. These Roads lie 2j^ miles Southwesterly from Cape Elizabeth Lights, and &% miles Northeast from Wood Island Lighthouse. Dangers. There are not really any dangers to be avoided in entering these Roads. There are two Rocks, called the Old Proprietor and Chimney Rock, both of which lie on the Northwestern side, and are buoyed. The Old Proprietor, which is bare a little before Low Tide, bears W. by N. from the Western part of Richmond's Island ; distance 2 miles. Chimney Rock is bare at Low Tide, and bears, from the Western part of Richmond's Island, NW. by N. J^ N., about yz mile. Neither of these rocks lie in the way, except 3 ou are obliged to beat in. Remarks, These Roads make an excellent harbor with winds from West to South by way of North, and can be easily entered in daytime, even by the largest vessels, when they cannot get into Portland. Tlie holding-ground is good, and I can see no reason why a large vessel, anchoring in from 7 to 8 fathoms water, could not safely ride out a heavy Northeast gale. 118 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Richmond's Island Roads, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westward, leave Wood Island Light about 1% miles to the Northwestward, and as soon as Cape Elizabeth Light- houses are made bring them to bear NE. and run for them until the Western part of Richmond's Island bears North ; then run in about N. by W. % W., and haul round the West part of Richmond's Island at a distance of J^ mile (leaving it to the I^stward), and anchor in from 4 to 6 fathoms water, good holding-ground. The best anchorage for large vessels is }{ mile S^ S., distance 5 miles ; Portland Head Light, NW. bj W., byi miles. In Easterly gales the sea breaks heavily upon this Reck. Round Rock, This Rock (which is not Buoyed at 'his date) has 4^^ fathoms water upon it at Low Tide. Cape Elizabeth Eastern Light bears from this Rock W. % S. ; distance 1% miles. Bulwark Shoal, This dangerous Ledge, which has but 12 feet water upon it at very Low Tides, is marked upon its Southeastern part with a Buoy painted in red and black horizontal stripes. Cape Elizabeth East- ern Light bears from this Buoy W. ^ S., 6^ miles ; Light upon Half-way Rock, NE. by N., 3^ miles ; Portland Head Light, NW. by W. % W., distance 6^ miles. Heavy -draught vessels passing Cape Elizabeth, bound to Portland, should give all these Ledges a wide berth, leaving them to the Northwestward. ELDRIDOES COAST PILOT. 123 Dangers to be avoided in approacliin«9; and entering Portland Harbor. Jordan's Ledge, or Bell Rx^'^k, This Ledge, upon which tliere are 18 feet water at Low Tide, is marked upon its Southeastern part with a Buoy painted in Red and Blaclc Horizontal stripes. Portland Head Light bears fVom this Buoy NW. by W. ; distance 1 mile. IHne-Tree Ledge. This Ledge, which has i'O feet water upon it at Low Tide, is not Buoyed at this date. Poriland Head Light bears from it NW. % W.. ; distance 1^ miles nearly. The sea breaks heavily upon this Ledge during heav}' Southeasterly gales. Witch Bock. This Rock, upon which there are 18 feet water at Low Tide, is marked off its Southeastern part with a Red Buoy having the white letters W. R. upon it. Portland Head Light bears from this Buoy W. by N., 1^ miles; the Buoy upon Jordan's Reef bears W. by S. |4 S. ; distance ^ mile from the Buoy upon Witch Rock. The Ship Channel into Portland is between these two Buoys. Ham Island Ledge, This Ledge, w^hich extends off to the Southward about J^ mile firom the Southwestern part of Ram Island, is marked upon its outer part with a Day Beacon 50 feet in height. Portland Head Light bears from this Beacon W. I y S. J4^ S. ; distance about 1 mile. In passing into Portland, this Beacon is left on the Star- board hand. Catfish Hock, This Rock, which has 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies 150 yards from, the Southwestern part of Bang's Island. A Red Buoy, No. 2, is placed near it. Portland Head Light bears from this Buoy S. by W. ^ W. ; distance ^ mile. Bang's Island Ledge, This Ledge, which has 2 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies near the Northwestern part of Bang's Island, and is marked upon )ts Northwestern part with a Red Buoy, No. 4. 124 KLDRI DOE'S COAST PILOT. Mill Hock, This Rock, which lies near the Western shore, about >4 mile to the Southward of Fort Preble, has 2 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and is marked off its Northeast part with a Black Buoy, No. 11. Spring Point Ledge, This Ledge, some parts of which are bare at Low Tide, extends otr Northeast 350 yards from Fort Preble. It is marked on its ojitor paft with a Black Buoy having the white letters S. P. L. upon it. Portland Breakwater Light bears from it NW. by W. ; distance y^ mile. 8taniford*8 Ledge, This Ledge extends off NE. by E. 250 yards from Portland Breakwater Light. It is marked upon its outer part with a Black Buoy having the white letters S. L. upon it. Portland Harbor Rocks, Those Rocks, which lie in the harbor upon the Southern side of the Channel, have but 4 feet water upon them at Low Tide. They are marked upon their Northwestern part with a Black Buoy, No. 3. Portland Breakwater Light bears from this Buoy E. by N. ; dis- tance a little more than ^^ mile. Remarks, On account of the Ledges that lie off its entrance, the approaches to Portland Harbor are exceedingly dangerous for large vessels. Small ones should give Alden's Rock, upon which there are but 4 feet water at Low Tide, a wide berth. The heaviest draught ves- sels may enter the Outer Harbor at Low Tide ; and 21 feet water, at this date, can be carried into the Inner Harbor at this time of Tide. Sailing Directions for Portland Harbor in Day* time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Cape Elizabeth Inshore Channel, Coming IVom the Southwestward, as soon as Cape Elizabeth LightJt are made, bring them to bear from NE. by N. to N.NE., and ruri for them. On this course, as you approach these Lighthouses, you will see, which hi l)oth Kai ^ mile. you can must ke be no df by E., 8 abreast t upon it, steer N.! N. ; thei Black Bi Port, anr off Jords mentione Light, st Westwar( Southwes the Starl leaving t When ab Black Bu Red Buo} to tiio cit; Chan Coming Cape Eliz upon the N. ; then Black anc than y2 m land Head From S( Elizabeth described) ELDUIDGF/8 COAST PILOT. 125 will 800, on Lho Starboard how, tho Black Hiioy olT Tnylor'rt Reef, which httH ihoiit 11 feet water upon it at Low Tide. (Cape Kliza- hetii EaHtcra Light hears from this Hiioy NW. )^ N. ; distance li mile.) Ah soon as this liiiov is made, you will rememl)er that you can pass it on either side. If you intend to go within it, you must keep midway between the liuoy and shore, and tliere will 1)0 no danger. If you wish to go without it, when it hears NE. by E., steer for it and leave it eloso to on the l*ort hand. When abreast this Buo}' (which may be knuwi\ by tho wliito letters T. II. upon it, and also by tho bearings of Cape Kli/abeth Kastern Light) steer N.NE. until Portland Head Light hears NW. by N. % N. ; then run for it. On these two last courses, you will leave the Black Buoys on Broad Cove Rock und Trundy Reef both on the Port, and the Buoy painted in Tied and Black Horizontal Stripes, off Jordan's Reef, on the Starboard hand. After passing this last- mentioned Buoy, or, you aro about }^ mile ft*om Portland Head Light, steer more Northerly, leaving the Lighthouse j^ mile to the Westward. When abreast it, you will see the Red Buoy off the Southwest part of Bn g's Island. Leave this Buoy 200 yards on the Starboard hand, and run up about N. ^ W. in midchannel, leaving the Black Buoy off Fort Preble close to on the Port hand. When abreast this Buoy, you will see to tho Northwestward another Black Buoy, which lies off Portland Breakwater Light, and also a Red Buoy ; pass midway between them and run in, keeping nearest to tiio city side of the harbor. ghtis run you Channel between Corwln Hoek and West Cod Jjedffe. Coming from Seaward or the Southward, do not approach nearer Cape Elizabeth than 4 or 5 miles, or keep outside all the Buoys upon the Ledges until Portland Head Light bears NW. by N. ^ N. ; then run for it on this course, leaving the Buoy painted in Black and Red Horizontal Stripes, off Corwin Rock, a little more than }4 mile on the Port hand. When about ^^ mile from Port- land Head Light, follow the directions before given. Ship Channel, From Seaward or the Southward, do not approach nearer Cape Elizabeth than 10 miles until tho Light upon Halfway Rock (before described) is made ; then bring this Light to bear North, and run y 126 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. for it until Portland Head Lighthouse bears W. by N. ^ N. ; then run for this last-mentioned Lighthouse on this course until about % mile from it, and proceed according to directions before given. This last course (W. by N. ^ N.) passes % mile to the Nci^heastward of the Buoy upon Bulwark Shoal, and about midway, in 9 fathoms water, between the Buoys upon Jordan's Reef and Witch Rock. Northern Channel, Coming from the Eastward, leave Seguin Lighthouse 3 or 4 miles to tiie Northward, and bring the Lljrhthouse upon Halfway Rock to bear W. by N., leaving it about ^ mile to the North- ward. Wasn past this last-mentioned Lighthouse, bang Portland Head Lighi to bear W. % N., and run for it upon this bearing until X '"^^® ^^o™ ^*» *^®" follow the directions before given. Upon this last course (W. % N. from Halfway Rock), Outer Green Island and ihe Beacon upon Ram Island Ledge will both be left to the Northward ; and the Red Buoy off Witch Rock 5^ mile to the Southward. White Head Passage. Remarks, The narrow channel leading into Portland Harbor between the Northern shore of Bang's^ f aland and the Southern shore of Peak's Island is called White Head Passage. Strangers should not attempt to pass in or out this channel unless thej' have a fair wind, and in no case with light winds, as there is danger of being carried ashore by the current, upon the Ledges. Sailing Directions. From the East^vard, to enter Portland Harbor by White Head Passage, leave tie Lighthouse on Halfway Rock about % mile to the Northward, md steer about W. ]4^ N. until the first Island (Outer Green Islai:1) bears North; then steer abou^. W.NW., leaving Ram Island on the Port hand. As you sail in, you will soe two Spindles in the passage ; pass midway between them and I'ln in, keeping the Southern shore best aboard. You may go on either side of House Island. If you pass to the Southward of it keep nearest to it, in order tc avoid the shoal water that extends off some d are froi Bang's 1 fore ad\ Hog When harbor, : bor, unti until Poi anchor n fathoms Hog Ish Harbor. Sailing time • A Whi water. ( tarice abo From \ Elizabeth bears N. Whistling the Port h Rock will course N! N.jJ^N. close to. ing in mic to Break nearer Foi When the this Ledge Light at a * Fort Sci board h.:nd w ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 127 some distance from the Northern part of Bang's Island. There are Arom 4 to 6 fathoms water in White Head Passage between Bang's and'Fe)fkk's Islands ; but the Channel is narrow ; it is there- fore advisable to proceed with caution. Hog Island Roads, or Portland Outer Harbor. When abreast of Portland Head Light, if you wish to make a harbor, follow the directions before given for Portland Inner Har- bor, until abreast the Black Buoy off Fort Preble ; then steer NE. until Portland Breakwater Light bears West, then steer East, and anchor midway between Little Hog and House Islands, in about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. During heavy Northeasterly gales. Hog Island Roads affords better shelter than Portland Inner Harbor. Sailing Directions for Portland Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. ' A Whistling Buoy is placed off Cape Elizabeth in 18 fathoms water. Cape Elizabeth Eastern Light bears from it about N. by W. % W., distance 2 J^ miles ; Buoy off Old Anthony, N-NE., dis- tance about ^ mile ; ' Alden's Rock, NE. % E-, distance 1^ miles. From the Southward or South west ward, do not approach Cape Elizabeth nearer than 5 miles until Cape Elizabeth Eastern Light bears N. by W. ; then run for it, keeping a sharp lookout for the Whistling Buoy. When you make or hear it, leave it close to on the Port hand, and steer NE. by N. % N. On this course, Alden's Rock will be left yz mile on the Starboard hand. Continue the course NE. by N. J4 N. until Portland Head Light bears NW. by N. K N. ; then run for it on this course, and pass it on the Port hand close to. When abreast of this Light, run about N. by W., keep- ing in mid-channel until about half-way from Portland Head Light to Breakwater Light ; then haul a little more Northerly, keeping nearer Fort Scammel * in order to avoid the Ledge off Fort Preble. When the Breakwater Light bears W. by N. J4 N., you are past this Ledge, and may haul in NW. and round this last-mentioned Light at a distance of % mile, and anchor nearest the city side. If * Fort Scammel is upon House Island, and in passing in is left on the Star- board h.:nd. 128 KLDEIDGE'S COAST PILOT. the night is very dark, after passing Fort Preble, use the lead, and do not go into less than 3^ fathoms water until the Breakwater Light bears S.SW. ; then haul in for the city. Hog Island Roads, or Portland Outer Harbor. If jou do not like to pass the Breakwater Light at night, when between Fort Preble and Fort Scammel, run N. by E., and anchor in from 5 to 7 fathoms water, the Breakr/ater Light bearing West ; distance about ^ mile. Channel between Cortvin Mock and West Cod Ledge, The channel between this Rock and Ledge is 1 J^ miles in width, and the heaviest-draught vessels may safelj- pass through it at night, provided there is no error in their compass. Coming from the Southward, do not approach nearer Cape Eliza- beth than 4 or 5 miles, and as soon as you make Portland Head Light bring it to bear NW. by N. X N., and run for it, leaving this Light 250 yards, or close to, on the Port hand, and proceed according to directions before given. Ship Channel. From Seaward or the Southward, do not approach nearer Cape Elizabeth than 10 miles until the Light upon Halfway Rock is made ; then bring this Light to bear North, and steer for it until Portland Head Light bears W. by N. ^ N. ; then run for it on this course, until about }^ mile from it, and proceed as beforo directed. This last course (W. by N. ^ N.) passes ^ mile to the Northeastward of the Buoy upon Bulwark Shoal, and about midway in 9 fathoms water between the Buoys upon Jordan's Reef and Witch Rock. Northern Channel, From the Eastward, as soon as the Light upon Halfway Rock is made, bring it to bear W. by N. (which course will clear all the Ledges), and run for this Light, leaving it about ^ mile to the Northward. When abreast this last-mentioned Lighthouse, bring Portland Head Light to bear W. % N., and steer for it ol this bear- ing until ^ mile from it, or close to it ; then follow the directions before given. Upon this last course (W. % N. from Halfway ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 129 Rock) , Outer Green Island and the Beacon upon Ram Island Ledge will both be left to the Northward, and the Buoy off Witch Rock i^ mile to the Southward. Beating into Portland Harbor at Night. At night or day, vessels of not more than 13 feet draught, from the Southwestward, with strong NW. winds, at Half Tide, may, as soon aa Cape Elizabeth Lights are made, bring them to bear from NE. by N. to N.NE., and run for them on this bearing, leaving the Cape Shore about }( mile to the Northwestward. When Cape Elizabeth Eastern Light bears NW. by W., steer NE. by N. until Portland Head Light bears NW. by N. X N. ; then haul sharp on the wind, or for this last-mentioned Light. In passing Cape Elizabeth at Half Tide, the only danger for vessels of not more than 13 feet draught is Alden's Rock. Remember this Rock bears from Cape Elizabeth Eastern Light SE. by E. ; dis- tance 2 miles. At night or day, after passing Cape Elizabeth Lights by the "Inshore Channel, vessels of not more than 15 feet draught may stand to the Eastward until Portland Head Light bears W. j4 N., and to the Westward until it bears NW. by N. X N. At night, vessels beating in may stantl pretty close to the Western shore, after passing Portland Head Ijight, until abreast of the Southern end of Bang's Island. After passing this to Fort Preble, give the Western shore a wide bortli ; and in order to avoid the Ledge that makes off from this Fort, when passing it, kiep nearest to House Island. Ship Channel, Beating into Portland Harbor in Ship Channel at night or day, when Halfway Rock Light boars North, jou may stand to the Northward until Portland Head Light bears W. J^ N., and to the Southward until it bears W. by N. ^ N. When Cape Elizabeth Lights bear SW., heavy-draught vessels may anchor, and wait for daylight in order to pass Jordan's Reef and Witch Rock. Sailing Directions for approaching and entering Portland Harbor in Thick Weather.* A Whistling Buoy is placed in 18 fathoms water, bearing about S. by E., J< E. 2 1^ miles from Capo Elizabeth Eastern Light. Fog Signals are also placed at Capo Rlixabcth and Portland Head Light. * A Bell Buoy has been plaood 'u inik) B>BW. from Bangs Island Point. This Buoy is loft on the Starboard hand by vimitols boiuid into Portland. From this Buoy, Portland Head Li){)>th(mHU boarM B. by W., H mile. 130 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Vessels fVom the Southwest, Southward, oif Seaward, making or hearing the Whistling Buoy off Cape Elizabeth, will run for it, bearing from NW. to NE. Leave it close to on either hand, and make good the course NE. b}- N. ^ N. until the Fog Signal upon Cape Elizabeth (before described) bears W. by S. ^ S. (Port- land Head Light will then bear NW. by N. ^ N., distance 3^ miles) ; then run for Portland Head Light on tb's last bearing, and when you hear the Fog Signal near this Lighthv: ie, pass it close to in 7 or 8 fathoms water, and steer about N. by W., keeping in not less than 7 or 8 fathoms water until past Fort Preble, when you may haul more Westerly, and round the Lighthouse in not less than 3}4 fathoms, and anchor. Yusp'^ls from the Eastward making or hearing the Whistling Bu'>y which lies about South 1 mile from the L'ght upon Halfway Kock, may leave it close to on either hand, and make good the course W- }4 N. for Portland Head Light. As soon as the Fog Signal is heard at this Ligbthouse, bring it to bear W- }4 N<, and run for it en this bearing, and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Portland Harbor 12 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. Yarmouth River, or Harbor. The entrance to this River is in Casco Bay, about 9 miles North- easterly from the city of Portland. From its mouth to Yarmouth Falls Village (which is situated upon its Western Bank), the dis- tance is 1^ miles. In going up, the Channel is extremely narrow, and has but little water in it at Low Tide. In approaching this River, there are two ways, the most direct of which is through Hussey's Sound ; the other by the way of Portland. MusHey's Sound, The passage into Casco Bay between Peak's Island and Long Island is called Husse3'8 Sound. By keeping in the middle of this passage, the heaviest-draught vessels mcy pass througli it in safety. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 131 Sailing Directions for Yarmouth River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. By Way of Hu88ey*8 Sound. Coming from the Southwestward, Southward, or Seaward, do not approach Cape Elizabeth nearer than 4 or 5 miles until Portland Head Light bears NW. by N. >^ N. ; then run for it on this course until Cape Elizabeth Lights are in range, bearing SW. by W. ; then steer N. by E. Yz E. On this last course, the Red Buoy ofT Witch Rock, and Tripod upon the Southern part of Ram Island, will both be left on the Port ; and Outer Green Island, and the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes off Hussey's Ledge, on the ?' --board hand. Continue the course N. by E. % E. until Portland Head Light is in range with the Northern point of Ram Island, bearing SW. by W. Hussey's Sound will tlien be fairly open, and you may run in about N. by W-, keeping in the middle of it. When abreast of the Northern part of Peak's Island, you will see on the Port hand a little round Islet called Pumpkin Knob. When the centre of this Islet bears SW., the course is N. by E. y2 E., and distance 3 miles to Red Buoj', No. 6, which lies about 100 feet Southeast from Upper Clapboard Ledge. This last- mentioned Ledge has 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy 150 yards on the Port hand, ami steer NE. 72 N-, leaving Birch Point, which is bold, about 400 yards on the Starboard hand. When this last-mentioned Point bears S. by W- J4 W., anchor in from 3 to 5 fathoms water, and take a pilot, as beyond this the channel is so crooked and nar- row that no correct sailing directions can be given. Birch Point bears NE. from the Red Baoy No. 6, off Upper Clapboard Ledge ; distance 1^ miles. From thb i^-^etward, leave the Lighthouse on Halfway Rock about ^ mile to the Northward, and steer W. % N., leaving the first Island (Outer Green Island) about % mile on the Starboard hand. When this last-named Island bears NE., haul in about NW., leaving the Buoy painted in Horizontal stripes off Hussey's Rock on the Starboard hand. After passing this Buoy, Hussey's Sound will be open ; then proceed as before directed. 132 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. By Way of Portland, From Portland bound to Yarmouth River, bring the Lighthouse or. Portland Breakwater to bear SW. %. W., and make good the course NE. ^ E., leaving Fort George % mile to the Southward, and carrying nothing less than 14 feet water at Low Tide past it. When abreast this Fort, you will see nearly ahead the Red Buo}' No. 2, off Hog Island Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and continue the course, leaving another Red Buoy No. 4, off Brimstone Ledge, also close to on the Starboard hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Buo}', you will see the Spindle and Black Buoy No. 1, off Cow Island Ledge, bearing about NE. by E. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy on the Port hand, and make good the course NE. b}' N. % N. for the Red Buoy, No. 6, upon Upper Clapboard Ledge, which may be left on the Port hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Buoy, proceed as before directed. High Water, It is High Water in Yarmouth River about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. Freeport River. The entrance to this River is in Casco Bay, about 11 miles Northeasterly from the city of Portland. There are several ways to approach this place, but the most direct one, especially foi* strangers, is by the way of Broad Sound. Sailing Directions for Freeport River, or Strout*s Point Village, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. By Way of Broad Sound, From the Southward, Southwestward, or Seaward, keep outsido of all the Ledges off Cape Elizabeth, and as soon as the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock is made, bring it to bear North, and run tor it on this course. Leave this Lighthouse about % mile to the Westwa ;;, and steer N. by W. y^ W., leaving the Black Buoy ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 133 off Webster Rock (which lies a short distance to the Northward of this Lighthouse) on the Port hand. When Halfway Rock Light bears S. % ffl., Broad Sound will be fairly open, and j'ou must make good the course N. % W. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard hand the Buoy painted in Black and Red Horizontal stripes, off Drunker's Ledge, and also Mark and Eagle Islands. The former Island has a stone Monument upon it 50 feet in height. These are all left to the Eastward. On the Port hand, you will see a small bare Island with ledges around it ; this is called the Brown Cow, and is left to the Westward. Continue the course N. % W. until 30U make the Red Buoy No. 14, off Whaleboat Ledge. (This last-mentioned Buoy bears N. Yz W. from Halfway Rock Light ; distance 6 miles.) Leave this Buoy on the Starboard hand close to, and steer N. by W. j^ W. \}i miles, leaving the Red Buoy No. 12, off Green Island Ledge, close toon the Starboard hand. (This last-mentioned Buoy lies Northeast about ^ mile from the Northeast point of Great Chebeag Island.) From this Buoy run N.NE. Ij^ miles to Black Buo}' No. 1, off Mosher Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Port hand, and steer N. by "W. % W., when you will see another Red Buoy, No. 2, (which lies upon Freeport Upper Ledge.) Continue the course until this Buoy bears NW. ; then run for it, leaving it close to on the Starboard hand. When abreast this Buoy, you will see at the entrance of the River the Black Buoy No. 3, off Bowman's Ledge. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy close to on the Port hand, and run up about N. ^ E., and anchor off the village ; not less than 4 fathoms may be carried from sea to this anchorage. If bound farther up, a pilot will be necessar}'. In running in, the Channel between the two last-mentioned Buo^'S is very narrow ; it is therefore necessary to proceed with caution. By Way of Portland. From Portland, bound to Freeport River, bring the Lighthouse on Portland Bieakwater to bear SW. J^ W., and make good the course NE. ^ E., leaving Fort George % mile to the Southward, and carrying nothing less than 14 feet water at Low Tide past it. When abreast this Fort, you will see nearly ahead the Red Buoy No. 2, off Hog Island Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and continue the course, leaving another Red Buoy, No. 4, off Brimstone Ledge, also close to on the Starboard 184 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Buoy, j'ou will see the Spindle and Black Buoy No. 1, off Cow Island Ledge, bearing about NE. by E. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy close to on the Port hand, and make good the course NE. by E. 2yi miles to Spindle and Black Buoy No. 7, off Lower Basket Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Fort hand, and run NE. >^ E. 2 miles to Red Buoy No. 10, off Great Chebeag Bar, leaving it on the Star- board hand. On this last course the Red Buoy No. 8, off Seal Ledge, will be left on the Starboard hand. The passage between the Red Buoy off Great Chebeag Bar and Little John's Island is narrow, but there is not less than 8 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. When abreast this last-mentioned Buoy, steer E. by N. 1^ miles to Red Buoy No. 12, off Green Island Ledge. On this last course the Black Buoy off the Northeastern part of Great Chebeag will be left on the Starboard hand. Continue the course E. by N. for the Red Buoy off Green Island Ledge until about 100 yards from it ; then steer N.NE. lyi miles to Black Buoy No. 1, off Mosher Ledge, and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Freeport River about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. Harpswell Harbor, or Stover's Cove. This Harbor is situated in Harpswell Sound, about 6^ miles Northeaiterly from the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock. The only obstructions in entering '^ from the Sound is the shoal water ex- tending from Stover's Point and Stover's Ledge. Both these dan- gers are marked with Black Buoys, which in entering are left on the Port hand. Sailing Directions for Harpswell Harbor, or Stover's Cove, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the SocHhwestward, Southward, or Seaward, keep outside of all the Ledges off Cape Elizabeth, and as soon as the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock is made, bring it to bear North, and run for it ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 135 on this course, leaving it about % mile to the Westward. After passing the Black Buoy off Webster Rock (which lies off a short distance to the Northward of this Light), bring the Lighthouse to bear S. by W. J4 W. ; on which bearing keep it, and run N. by B. J4 E. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard hand the Buoy painted in Black and Red Horizontal strii)e8 off Drun- ker's Ledge. This last-mentioned Buoy bears N.NE. from Halfway Rock Lighthouse, distance 2 miles, is bare at Half Tide, and in passing in is left to the Eastward. You will also see nearly ahead the Monument on Little Mai-k Island ; bring this Monument to bear N. by E. J4 E., and steer for it on this course. When about ^ mile from it, you will see on the Starboard hand the Black Buoy No. 1, off Mark Island Ledge. When this Buoy bears E. by N., distance Yi mile, and the Monument N. by E. Y^ E., distance about Y2 mile, steer about NE. ^ N. 4 miles to Black Buoy off Stover's Point. On this last course, you will pass about midway between Great Mark Island and the Red Buoy off Turnip Ledge. After passing this last-mentioned Island and Buoy, keep in the middle of the Sound until you make the Black Buoy No. 1, which lies off Stover's Point on the Western side of the Sound ; haul round this last-mentioned Buoy, leaving it close to on the Port, and run in, leaving another Black Buoy which lies off Stover's Ledge also on the Port hand. When this last-mentioned Buoy bears SE., distance about 400 yards, anchor in from 3 to 4J^ fathoms water. F.:om the Eastward, bound to Harpswell Harbor, as soon as Halfway Rock Lighthouse is made, in order to clear all the Ledges, bring it to bear W. by N.,-and run for it on this course. When about % mile from it, proceed according to directions before given. Strangers from the Eastward, with favorable winds, bound to Ilarpswell Sound, by observing the following directions, may safely pass inshore between the Ledges. Leave Cape Small Point (which bears W. % N., distance 3^^ miles from Seguin Island Lighthouse) about 1 mile to the North- ward; and when it bears N.NE., steer W.NW. 8J^ miles to Monument on Little Mark Island. As soon as this Monument is made, bring it to bear W.NW., and run for it on this course. When about ^ mile from it, if bound to Harpswell Harbor, run up according to directions before given. 136 ELDKIDGE'S CO/ PILOT. Pott's Harbor. This excellent Harbor of rcftige for small vessels is situated at the entrance of Casco hay, about half-'\ay between the city of Portland and entrance to Kennebec River, and bears N. by E. % E. about 5 miles from the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock. There are two entrances to this harbor : one by way of Broad Sound, the other (which is Buoyed) by way of Ilarpswell Sound. Vessels at many times overtaken by a Southeasterly storm, when sailing be- tween Cape Elizabeth and Kennebec River, will find this a very convenient place. Sailing Directions for Fott*s Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the South westward, Southward, or Seaward, keep outside of all the Ledges off Cape Elizabeth, and as soon as the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock is made, bring it to bear North, and run for it on this course, leaving it about ^ mile to the Westward. After passing the Black Buo}- off Webster Rock (which lies off a short distance to the Northward of the Light) , bring this Lighthouse to bear S- by W. % W. ; on which bearing keep it, and steer N. by E. j4 E. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard hand the Buoy painted in Black and Red Horizontal stripes off Drunker's Ledge. This last-mentioned Buoy bears N-NE. from Halfway Rock Light, distance 2 miles, is bare at Half Tide, and in passing in is left to the Eastward. You will also see nearly ahead the Monument on Little Mark Island ; bring this Monument to bear N. by E. % E., and steer for it on this course. When about ^ mile from it, you will see on the Starboard hand the Black Buoy No. 1, off Mark Island Ledge. When this Buoy bears E. by N., distance y^ mile, and the Monument N. by E. }4 E., distance yi mile, steer about NE. j4 N. On this last course you will pass between Great Mark Island, which bears NE. % N. from the Monument, a little more than J^ mile, and the Red Buoy No. 2, off Turnip Ledge. After passing this last-mentioned Island, you will see the Red Buoy No. 4, off Ram Island. When this last- mentioned Buoy bears North, steer for it, and leave it close to on the Starboard hand. From this last Buoy run N-NW. about 200 yards ; then haul up about W. by N., leaving the Red Buoy No. 2, off Pott's Point, close to on the Starboard hand. When past this ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 137 Buoy, run in N.NE., leaving two black Buo3*8 on the Port Imnd, and anclior in from 4 to 6 fathoms water, witli the Upper Buoy bearing about W.SW. ; distance from 300 to 500 yards. From tlie Eastward, leave Cape Small Point, which bears W. J4 N., distance 3J^ miles from Seguin Island Light, about 1 mile to the Northward; and when it bears N.NE., steer W.NW. 8y2 miles to Monument upon Little Mark Island. As >oon as the Monument is made, bring it to bear W.NW., and run for it on this course. When about ^ mile from it, proceed as before di- rected. This course (W.NW.) from Cape Small Point passes within the Buoys upon Lumbo's Ledge, Drunker's Ledge, and also Mark Island Ledge. If the wind is unfavorable to leave this harbor b}- the passage leading into Harpswell Sound, you may, by the following direc- tions, go out by the Western passage into Broad Sound. Leave the Upper Black Buoy No. 7, off Thrum Cap Ledge, close to on the Port band, and steer about W. by S. }4 S., leaving Horse Island (which is the first to the Westward of this Buoy) not more iban 200 j'ards on the Starboard hand ; continue the course until Halfway- Rock Lighthouse bears S. J^ E. Broad Sound will then be fairly open, and you ma}' run out with this Light bearing S. % E. In leaving Pott's Harbor by the Western passage, when abreast of Little Birch Island, which is the first to the Westward of Horse Island, you may steer W. >^ N. about one mile, leaving tho Black Buoj' off the Northeast part of Stove Island close to on the Port hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Buoy, continue the course W. ^2 N. about 200 or 300 yards. Luckse's Sound will then be fairly open, and you may boldly steer out SW. by W. for Portland Head Lighthouse, passing about midway between Ram Island and Bang's Island. The Northern part of Ram Island bears NE. by E. from Portland Head Light; distance 1^ miles. Mackerel Cove. The entrance to this small harbor bears E.NE. about 1% miles from the Monument upon Little Mark Island. The Cove is about J4 mile in length, and its general width is about 200 yards. There 138 ELDRIDOF'S COAST PILOT. are no dangers in entering it from the Sound, and the holding- ground is said to be good, although somewhat exposed to SW. winds. Sailing Direotions for Mackerel Coye in Daytime. Follow the directions for either Harpswell or Potfs Harbors^ and when the Monument upon little Mark Island bears W.SW.. make good the course E.NE. When at the entrance, keep mid- channel and run in, and anchor near the head of the Cove in from 6 to 7 fathoms water. High Water. It is High Water in Harpswell Sound about 30 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. Quahaug (or Quohog) Bay. The entrance to this Bay bears about NE. from Halfway Rock Lighthouse ; distance 8 miles. In entering it, there are numerous dry and sunken Ledges, which lie off its mouth, and at this date (1879) are not buoyed. Nu proper sailing directions can therefore be given for this place. New Meadows River. The entrance to this River bears NE. by E. from Halfway Rock Lighthouse ; distance about 9^ miles. Sailing Directions for New Meadows Biver in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the South westward, Southward, or Seaward, may, as soon as the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock is made, bring it to bear North, and run for it on this course. Leave the Light about ^ mile to the Westward and steer N.NE. until it bears W.SW., on which bearing keep it, and steer E.NE- for the small Island called the White Bull. This last Island bears E.NE. from the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock, distance 6 miles, and is the first met with on this course. It may also be known by the Islands called the Brown Cow and Mark Island. The former bears from ELDRIDQB'S COAST PILOT. 139 the White Bull SE. % E., distance ly'i roilos ; the latter, E. % S.., distance \% miles. When up with this island, tlic Buoy painted in Rod and Black Horizontal Stripes, otf Luinbo's Ledge, will be Bccn bearing S.1W. ; distance 'iyi miles. As soon as the Island called the Whico Bull is made, keep it a little on the Port bow, in order to clear the rock called Bold Dick, which bears W. by S. a little more than % m le fVom the Southwest Point of this last-men- tioned Island, and is bare at half tide. Leave the White Bull, which is bold, about 200 yards on the Port hand, and make good tlie course NE. ^ N. about 2J/4 miles. On this course and dis- tance you will pass between Flag's Island om tlie South, and Long Ledge upon the North ; keep nearer the latter. After i)assing this Island and Ledge, you will 8ee nearly ahead the Red Spin- dle upon Goudy Ledge, which may bo loft jn either hand. When past these, the river will be fairly open, bearing about N.NE. ; you can then run up, keeping tho Starboard hand best aboard for about 3 miles, in order to avoid Sheep Island Lodge. After pass- ing this Ledge, anchor where you can find less than 10 fathoms water. From the Eastward, leave Capo Small Point, which bears W. Y2 N., distance Sj^ miles from Seguin Island Light, about 1 mile to the Northward, and when it bears N.NE. steer NW. H W. 2Y2 miles, when you will be abreast the small Island called the Brown Cow. This Island bears W.NW., distance 2% miles, from Cape Small Point, and is bold. Loavo tho Island about 200 or 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and steer NW. yi W. 1J4 miles, to the White Bull. When about 200 yards from it, proceed as before directed. Horse Island Harbor. This small harbor, in which there is excoilcr* anchorage in all winds, in from 2 to 6 fathoms water at Low Tide, is North about 4^ miles from Cape Small Point, and Fast Northerly about 10 miles from the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock. Sailing Directions for Horse Island Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, pass a short distance to the Southward of the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock, and bring it to bear W. J4 140 ELDUIDGE'S COAST PILOT. S., on which bearing keep it, and steer E. J4 N. for Bahl Head, which is distant about Syi miles from this Lighthouse, and is the first Head to the Northwestw ^ vrl of Cape Small Point. As you approach Bald Head, you will see the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes, off the Southwest part of Lumbo's Ledge, which has about 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Leave this Buov at least }( mile on the Starboard hand, and after passing it continue the course E. ^2 N. for Bald Head until about 24 mile from it; then steer about N. J^ E., leaving the low, bare, rocky Islet called the Brown Cow, and Mark Island (wl ich is wooded), and alco Wyman's Ledge,* which has but 3 feet water upon it, all OK the Port hand ; the Red Buoy off Gooseberry Ledge, and also Wood Island, which lies about 1 mile North from the last-mentioned Buoy, on the Starboard hand. After passing Wood Island, keep a sharp lookout for the Black Spindle on the Souther 1 part of Jami- son's Ledge. When this Spindle is made, leave 'i 250 yartis on the Port and steer about NE. by N. J4 N. As ,\ou sail in, you will see on the Starboard a bare ro( ' y Islet, called North Black- snake, which may be left a short distance on the Starboard hand. When about 250 yards past this last Islet, haul more Ea&terly, and when the harbor is fairly open, bearing about N.NE., run in mid- way and anchor in about 3^ fathoms at Low Tide, which will be at High Tide. From the Eastward, haul round Cape Small Point at a distance of about 1 mile, leaving all the Ledges off this point well on the Siavboard hand. When Bald Head, which lies Northwest about ^ 0iile from Cape Small Point, bears E. }4 N., distance ^ mile, follow the directions before given. " High Water, It is High Water in Horse Island Harbor about 21 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. * This dangerous Ledge, which hns but 3 feet water upon it at low tiie, liei about >i mile E. by S. from the Southern erJ of Mark Island, and about W* miles NW. ^ W. from Bald Head. At tliis dnte, 1880, it is not buoved. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 141 Cundiz Harbor. This small harbor, in which there is good anchorage in from 3^ to 4J4 fathoms water at Low Tide, lies on the Northwestern side of New Meadows River, about 2 miles to the Northward of entrance to Horse Island Harbor. Sailing Directions for Oundiz Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the directions before given for Horse Island Harbor until you make the Black Spindle off the Southern part of Jamison's Ledge. Leave this Spindle about 300 yards on the Port, and make good the course about N. j^ W., leaving North Blacksnake on the Starboard, and the Red Spindle on Goudy Ledge on the Port. After passing this last- mentioned Spindle, New Meadows River will be fairly open, bear- ing about N. by "E. }4 E. ; then run up, keeping midway the entrance. As you sail in, you will see, on the Western side of the River, about 1^ miles from tne last-mentioned Spindle, a group of bare Rocks, ly?ng N.NE. and S.SW. These are Cedar Ledges, which form the Eastern side of Cundiz Harbor. Continue tlie course of the River until this harbor is fairly open ; then run in about midway, leaving the last-mentioned Rocks on the Starboard, anO anchor in from 3^ to 4j^ fathoms water at Low Tide. Cape Small PoId^i Harbor. This Harbor bears from tlie Lightuouse upon Halfway Rock about E.NE., distance 9^ miies ; from Cape Small Point, North 2j^ miles. A Bnr, having but little water upon it at Low Tide, extends across iXa mouth, making it only available for light-drauf^ht vessels. 142 BLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Cape Small Point Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair \ reather. Vessels from the Westward, bound to this Harbor, may bring the Lighthouse upon Halfway Rock to bear W. by S., distance about ^ mile ; on which bearing keep it, and steer E. by N. for the small Island called the Brown Cow ; distance 7 miles ftom this last- mentioned Lighthouse. On this course, the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off Lumbo's Ledge, will be left a little more than >^ mile upon the Starboard hand. When up with the Brown Cow (which is the first Island met with on this course from Halfway Rock Lighthouse), you may leave it 150 yards on the Port hand, and steer E. by N. 1 J^ miles to Red Buoy No. 2, off Gooseberry Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and run N. by E. ^ E. 1 mile, leaving Great and Little Wood Islands both on the Port hand, and the Buo}- painted in Black and Red Horizontal Stripes, off Middle Ledge, about 150 yards on the Starboard hand. After passing this Buoy continue the course N. by E. /i lSi.<, about ^ mile; then haul up E. by N., leaving the Red Buo}' No. 4, off Pitch Pine Ledge, about 100 yards on the Starboard hand, and anchor in from 3j4 to 5 fathoms water, the last-mentioned Buoy bearing SW. by W., distance 300 yards. Above this, a pilot is necessary. From the Eastward, haul round Cape Small Point at a distance of about 1 mile, leaving Bald Head Ledge — which bears W. % N. from Cape Small Point, distance ^ mile, and is bare at half tide — about }{ mile to the Eastward. When Cape Ismail Point bears E. by S., steer N. by E. for the Red Buoy off Gooseberry Ledge, and proceed as before directed. High Water, It is High Water at Cape Small Point Harbor about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. Upon which si of 8 seo Lightho Bean Cape Co< Thatcher Boon Islj Cape Elii Whistling beth, , Monhegai Matinicus Seal Islan Pond IsIj trance t( Light upoi Upon P( is built a Bell is plal bears fromf Dangers I River I This Bvai house, distJ Small PoinJ should not Eennebeck River. The entrance to this River is about East, 22 miles from the city of Portland ; 74 miles Northeasterly from Cape Ann ; and 19 miles W. by N. from Monhegan Island Lighthouse. This Led^ upon its Soij zontal Stri] E. ; distancj and Seguin BLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 143 Seguin Island Lighthouse, Upon the highest part of Seguin Island is built a Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light. A Steam Whistle, giving blasts of 8 seconds' duration at intervals of 52 seconds, is placed near this Lighthouse. Bearings and Distiwoeii flrom Seguin Island Lighthouse. Distance. Cape Cod Highland Lighthouse, S. by W. }i W., Thatcher's Island Lighthouses, .SW. J^ S., . . Boon Island Lighthouse, . . Cape Elizabeth Lighthouses, . Whistling Buoy off Cape Eliza- beth, Monhegan Island Lighthouse, . Matinicus Island Lighthouse, . Seal Island Lighthouse, . . . Pond Isl'nd Lighthouse, en- trance to Kennebec River, . Light upon Halfway Rock, . . SW. H W., . . W. by S., . W. by S. }i S., Si. ^ S*t • • Si.SxBm * p| •, • • • • Vt«, • • • • 101 74 46J^ 21 19 39 163 2 i2y2 miles. (i (( n n t(. ((. ((. Pond Island Lighthouse, Upon Pond Island, Western side of entrance to Kennebec River, is built a Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light. A Fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. Seguin Island Lighthouse bears ft-om Pond Island Lightjiouse South ; distance 2 miles. Dangers to be avoided in entering the Kennebec Biver to the Westward of Seguin Lighthouse. Fuller's Mock, This small, rocky Island bears West from Seguin Island Light- house, distance 3}( m'' a , "nd South, about J^ mile, from Cape Small Point. At Low Tide, vessels of more than 9 feet draught should not attempt to pass within this Island. Mile Ledge, This Ledge, upon which 11 foot water has been found, is marked upon its Southern part with a Buoy, having Red and Black Hori- zontal Stripes. Seguin Lighthouse boars fVom this Buoy N. J^ E. ; distance 1 mile. There is a good channel between this Ledge and Seguin Island. 144 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Jack'knife Ledge, This dangerous Ledge, which has but 5 feet water upon it at very Low Tides, is marked upon its Southern part with a Black Buoy. Seguin Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SE. by S., 1^ miles. This Buoy has the letters J. K. upon it. Dangers to be avoided in entering the Kennebec Biver to the Eastward of Seguin Lighthouse. Bantum Ledge. This dangerous Ledge, which is bare at Low Tide, is marked upon its Southwestern part with a Red Buoy, No. 10. Seguin Light bears from this Buoy West ; distance 6 miles. 25 fathoms water was found ^ mile E. by S. from this Ledge ; 24 fathoms West 400 yards from it; and 11 fathoms South 300 yards from it. In approaching this Ledge in thick weather or night-time, the lead, therefore, gives but little warning. There is a good channel between it and Damiscove Islands. Toni'8 Rock, This dangerous Rock, upon which there is but little water at Low Tide, is marked upon its Southwestern part with a Red Buoy, No. 2. Seguin Light bears from this Buoy SW. by W. % W. ; distance 2]/^ miles. Vessels passing to the Eastward of Seguin Island, bound into the Kennebec River, must leave this Buoy upon the Starboard hand. White Ledge, This Ledge, upon which there is 7 feet water at Low Tide, is marked upon its Eastern side with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Seguin Light bears from this Buoy SW. by S. >^ S. ; distance V/i miles. Vessels passing ^,o the Eastward of Seguin Island, bound into the Kennebec River, must leave this Buoy upon the Port hand. Be- tween this Buo3' and th.i Northern point of Seguin there are several Ledges. Strangers should not, therefore, attempt to pass through between them. Remarks. The depth of water in the Kennebec River from Pond Island Light to the city of Bath is sufficient to admit even the heaviest-draught vessels ; but the navigation is somewhat dangerous, on account of the cur should unless t Saiiinj time ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 145 the current, which in many parts runs very strong. Strangers should not, therefore, attempt to enter this River without a pilots unless they have a fair and commanding winu Sailing Directions for the Kennebec River in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the "Westward, pass without the Ledges off Cape Eliza- beth, and as soon as Seguin Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear E. NE., and run for it on this course until Pond Island Lighthouse bears N. by E. ^ E. ; then run for it on this bearing. On this last course, Seguin Lighthouse U be left a little more than y^ mile to the Eastward, and the Black Buoy off Jack-knife Ledge will be left on the Port hand. As you approach Pond Island Lighthouse you will see a little on the Starboard bow the Black Buoy No. 3. This Buoy lies off Pond Island Bar, and bears from the Lighthouse South, S/^ mile. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy close to on the Port hand and run in, leaving the Light- house about 300 yards to the Westward. "When abreast of it, or when it bears West, the course is about NW. by N. to Hunni- well's Point, or Fort Popham. As you sail in, you will see, nearly in mid-channel, two small, bare Rocky Islets, which are called the Sugar Loaves. You can go on either side of these, but the most direct course is to the "Westward of them. The current of Flood sets strong upon these Islets, and it is advisable, when past Pond Island Light, — especially' with light winds, — to haul over for the Western shore, in order to pass them in mid-channel. When abreast Fort Popham, the course is N. ^ E., 1^ miles to the Buo}' painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off Per- kins' Ledge. On this last course. Shag Rock, which is small, will be left on the Starboard, and Cox Head, which is bold, on the Port hand. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy on the Starboard hand, and then steer N. by E. 1^ miles to Bald Head. On this last course, you will pass about midway between the Black Buo}' No. 1, off Parker's Ledge, and Perkins' Island. There is good anchorage between the last Island and Bald Head in from 4 to 7 fathoms water. As you approach this last-mentioned Head you will see to the Northeastward another opening, which is the entrance to Back River. When Bald Head Point is distant about 300 yaids, steer NW. by N. about 1 mile, leaving the Spindle upon Seal Rocks on the Port hand. You will then be abreast of 146 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Phipsburg Centre, which is on the Western side of the river. From this point the course is about IT.NE., leaving some small, Rocky Islets and also the Black Buoy off Lee's Rock all on the Port, and Pettis's Rocks — which are above water — and the Spindle on the Northern part of Ram Island, on the Starboard hand. When past this last Spindle, which you must go close to, haul a little over toward the Eastern shore and keep in the middle of the river until you make the Black Buoy off Lithgow Ledge, which may be left 50 ycrds on either hand. From the Spindle upon the Northern point of Ram Island to this last Buoy the course is about N. by E. j!^ E. ; distance 2}{ miles. About ^ mile above this Buoj- the river suddenly turns to the Westward, having a width of about 300 yards, with a very strong and dangerous current. This sudden turn is called Fiddler's Reach. There are no obstructions in this Reach, but on account of the rapid current and baffling winds it may be considered one of the most dangerous places in the river. With a head tide, unless the wind is strong and nearl}- aft, vessels must not attempt to pass through it, but when nearly up with the last-mentioned Buoy, must haul in, and anchor in from 4 to 6 fathoms water in Morris Cove. The best anchorage is about SW. by W. from the Black Buoy off Lithgow Ledge ; distance about }( mile. In order to avoid the Ledges, after passing Fiddler's Reach, keep the Eastern shore best aboard to the city of Bath. The distance from Pond Island Light to Bath is about 1 1 miles. Strangers bound farther up the river should take a pilot at Bath. From the Eastward, in order to clear Bantum Ledge, as soon as Seguin Light is made, bring it to bear W. ^ N., and run for it on this course until Pond Island Lighthouse bears NW. by W. ; then run for this last-mentioned Lighthouse on this course, leaving the Red Buoy No. 2, off Tom's Rock, on the Starboard, and Seguin Dry Ledges and the Black Buoy off White Ledge, upon the Port hand. Continue the course NW. by W. for this Light until about 300 yards from it ; then follow the directions before given. Anchorage, for Daytime, If the wind and tide are both ahead, and you wish to find anchor- age, follow the directions for entering the Kennebec River until abreast Pond Island ; then bring the Light to bear SW. by W. >4 W.., on which bearing keep it and run NE. by E. yi E. until the water st then anc If you tions 1) of Flaty in from all This ai Bluff on Fort Pop Island Li Strang! night. It is Hi Kennebec mon Tidei The ent Lighthousi Upon H River is Light. The dej heaviest-di nel from tl 14 miles, entrance, Bnoys and| of it runs unless thej ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 147 water shoals to 5 fathoms at High Tide, and Byi at Low Tide ; then anchor between Stage and Salter's Islands. If you wish to make a harbor when off Seguin, follow the direc- tions before given for Kennebec River, and anchor upon Parker's Flaty in from 3j4 to 6 fathoms water, where you may lie secure from all winds. This anchorage is above Parker's Head, which is the second High Bluff on the Western side of the river above Hunniwell's Point, or Fort Popham. This anchorage is also about 3^ miles from Pond Island Lighthouses. Strangers should not attempt to enter the Kennebec River at night. High Water, It is High "Water at Hunniwell's Point, near the entrance to the Kennebec River, about 12 minutes before it is at Boston. Com- mon Tides rise ibout 8 feet. Sheepscot River. The entrance to this River is about 5 miles Northeast from Seguin Lighthouse. Sendrick'8 Head Lighthouse. Upon Hendrick's Head, the Eastern side of the mouth of this River is erected a Lighthouse, which shows a revolving White Light. Remarks, The depth of water in this River is sufficient to admit the heaviest-draught vessels, 7 fathoms being the shoalest in the chan- nel from the mouth to the town of Wiscasset, a distance of nearly 14 miles. There are quite a number of obstructions near the entrance, and also within the river, but they are all marked with Buoys and Spindles in the channel-waj'. The current in some parts of it runs very strong, and strangers should not attempt to enter it unless they have a fair and commanding wind. 148 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Sheepsoot River in Daytime, with favorable Winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westv/ard, leave Seguin Island about % mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, steer NE. by E. y2 E. On this course you will see the Red Buoy No. 2, off Tom's Rock ; this Buoy bears NE. by E. ^ E. from Seguin Light ; distance 2^3 miles. Leave this Buoy close to on the Port hand, and stjer Tor Hendrick's Head Light, bearing about N.NE. As you . hi " this course, you vill see on the Port hand several Dry Ledt .and 'Iso the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizon- tal stripes oif Grifl.' :■ Ledge. On the Starboard hand will be seen a small Islet, with several dry rocks about one mile to the North- ward of it ; this Island is called Lower Mark Island. Leave Ilon- drick's Head Light about 300 yards to the Easti»ard, find make good the course N. by E. J4 E. On this course the following Buoys, Islands, and Spindle will be left on the Port : First, a Buo}' painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes ; second. Middle Mark Island ; third, a Spindle ; fourth, another Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes ; fifth. Upper Mark Island ; and sixth, the Black Buo}' No. 3, off Ilogdon's Ledge. This last Buoy is 3^ miles from the Lighthouse on Hendrick's Head. On this course, two Red Buoys will be left on the Starboard hand : the first is 2% miles above the Lighthouse, and nearly opposite the Spindle ; the second is a little more than 3^ miles from the Lighthouse, and nearly opposite Ilogdon's Ledge. After passing the two last Buoys, keep the middle of the River for 2^ miles, until abreast the Black Buoy off Greenleaf s Ledge. Leave this Ledge upon the Port hand, and if the current is running up, keep the Western shore best aboard, to avoid being carried ashore or into Cross River. After passing this place, keep the middle of the River again, course about N.NE., 2% miles to the Spindle on Merrill's Ledge, which is left on the Starboard hand. A little before you come up with this last-mentioned Ledge, keep the Western shore aboard until well past it ; then keep the middle until up with the Narrows ; here the river turns suddenly to the Westward. In passing through the Narrows, with an Ebb Tide, keep the Northern side best abonrd, to avoid Seal Rock, which is marked with a Black Buo}' ; but if liio tide is running up, keep in the middle of the passage, leaving the Buoy on the Port hand. From this Buoy make good the course •bout N. by W. for the town of Wiscasset. ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 149 From the Eastward, bring Seguin Lighthouse to bear W. % N., and run for it until abreast the Buoy off Bantum Ledge (before de- scribed in dangers entering the Kennebec River). Leave this Buov about % mile to the Northward, and make good the course NW. by N- >4 N. unti4 Ilendrick's Head Lighthouse bears N. by E. ^ B. ; then follow the directions before given. Strangers should not attempt to run up the Sheepscot River at night. • High Water, It is High Water in the Sheepscot River about 16 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise from 8 to 9 feet. In running up the Sheepscot River, be careful to a jid Ledge having about 10 feet water upon it. This danger bea»*s ab ^^\ South from Hendrick's Head Light, distance ^ mile, ana at this date (1879) is not Buoyed. Ebenicook Harbor. This safe and convenient Harbor is on the Northwest end of Southport Island, East side of the Sheepscot River, about 8^ miles NE. by N. from Seguin Light, and \]{, miles above Hendrick's Head Lighthouse ; it is easy of access, and is said to be free from ice in the winter. There are no obstructions at its entrance, and any stranger can safely enter it in the daytime by the following directions. Sailing Directions for Ebenicook Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westward, leave Seguin Island about % mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, steer NE. by E. % E. On this course you will see the Red Buoy No. 2, off Tom's Rock ; this Buoy bears NE. by E. ^ E. from Seguin Light, distance 2j^ miles. Leave this Buoy close to on the Port hand, and steer for Hendrick's Head Light, bearing about N.NE. As you sail in on this course, you will see on the Port hand several Dry Ledges, and also the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizon- tal stripes off Griffith's Ledge. On the Starboard hand will be seen a small Islet, with several dry Rocks to the northward of it ; 40 150 ELDRIDOES COAST PILOT. this Islet is called Lower Mark Island. Leave this last-mentioned Lighthouse 300 or 400 yards to the Eastward, and steer in about N. by E. y2 E.\ the first opening above Hendrick's Head Light upon the Eastern side is the entrance to this harbor. Continue the course until this entrance is fairly open; then nin in midway (course about E. by S.) until past the Southern point of Green Island, which is left on the Tort hand ; then steer more Northerly, and anchor where you please. From the Eastward, bring Seguin Lighthouse to bear W. % N., and run for it until abreast tlie Buoy off Bantum Ledge (before described in dangers entering the Kennebec River). Leave this Buoy about ^ ^'^^ to the Northward, and make good the course NW. by N. }i N. until Hendrick's Head Lighthouse bears N. by E. ^ E. ; then follow the directions before given. If your vessel draws more than 14 feet water, be careful to avoid a Ledge which bears N. by E. ^ E. from Hendrick's Head Light- house ; distance ^ mile. Booth Bay, or Townsend Harbor. This excellent harbor of refuge lies about 10 miles Northeast from Seguin Lighlhouse, and Northwest about 15 miles from Mon- hegan Island Lighthouse. Burnt Island Lighthou8e, Upon Burnt Island, West side of entrance to this Harbor, is a Light- house which, at this date (1884), shows a fixed White Light ; at this time a fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. Ram Island Light- house bears from Burnt Island Lighthouse SE. % S-, 2^ miles. Ram Island Liyhthouae, Upon Ram Island, on the Eastern and Southern side of the ap- proaches to Booth Bay Harbor, is a Tower built of Granite to a height of 20 feet and of Red Brick above ; the keeper's dwelling is located L'80 feet Southeast from the Lighthouse. At this date (1884), this Lighthouse shows a fixed White Light ; also, between the bearings of W. % N. and W. ^ N., a Red Raij, and another between NE. and NE. by E. Vessels from the Eastward may leave this Light- house about 200 yards on the Port hand, and vessels from the West- ward may leave it about 200 yards on the Starboard hand. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 151 Dangers in approaching Booth Bay Harbor from the Westward. Bantum Ledge, This dangerous Rock, or Ledge (before described in dangers for entering Kennebec River) is bare at Low Tide. Seguin Island Lighthouse bears West fVom it, distance 6 miles ; Southern point of Daniiscove Island (the nearest land to it) NE. by N. % N., distance, Ij^ miles. It is marked upon its Southwest part with a lied Buoy No. 10. Squirrel Island Ledge* This danger, which extends W.NW. about ^ mile from the Northern end of Squirrel Island, has from 6 to 11 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and is marked on its outer part with a Fed Buoy. Burnt Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. J^ E-, 5^ mile. Remarks, In approaching and entering Booth Bay Harbor there are but few obstructions. The depth of water in the passage leading to the Southward of Squirrel Island is sufficient to admit Uie heaviest draught vessel, and the shores are generally bold, with but little current in the channels. Sailing Directions for Booth Bay Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. By the Western Passage. From the Westward leave Seguin about ]^ mile on the Port hand, passing about midwa}' between the Buoy upon Mile Ledge and the Southern point of the Island. When the Lighthouse bears North, steer NE. by E. J4 E. On this course you will leave the Red Buoy off Tom's Rock on the Port hand ; and you will also see the Beacon upon one of the bare rocks called the Cuckolds — this Beacon is 57 feet high, and the upper half is covered with boards painted Black. Leave this Beacon about 400 yards on the Port hand and steer for Burnt Island Lighthouse, bearing N. by E., yi E., distant 2^ miles. As you sail in you will see on the Starboard hand a Red Buoy, which lies off Squirrel Island Ledge ; leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand and make good the course N. bvE. J^ E., leaving Burnt Island Lighthouse about 200 162 ELUIUD(iE'S COAST PILOT. yartU on the Port liatid, niul another Island to the Northward of it ciiUod Mouse Island also on the I'ort hand, and Tumbler Island, which is small, on the Starboard hand. Wlien past this last-men- tioned Island haul gradually to the Eastward, and anchor in East Harbor, in frojn .'J to 4 fathoms water; or, when past Tumbler Island, which hea'-. NE. by N. from Hurnt Island Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Westward and anchor in West Harbor, in from 4J4 to fl fathoms water. At Low Tide, vessels of more than 21 feet draught, from the Eastward or Westward, may, when past Hantum Ledge and the Beacon on the Cuckolds, haul round Squirrel Island at a distance of about ^ mile, leaving it on the Port hand and carrying deep water ; when Burnt Island Lighthouse bears NW. ^ N. then run for it on this course, leaving the Red Buoys off Spruce and Tum- !)ler !;;iand Ledges well on the Starboard hand ; when about 300 yards from this Lighthouse follow the directions before given. Sailing Directions for Booth Bay Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. By the Western Passage* From the Westward, in order to avoid Mile Ledge, leave Seguin Light from 2 to 3 miles to the Northward, and when it bears N. by W. then steer NE. J^ E., and as soon as Ram Island Light is made, bring it to bear NE. yd E., which will bring you into the lied Liifht^ continue the course for the last-named light, keeping in the AW Ray until you judge you are about a mile from it, then gradually haul to the Northward until Burnt Island Light bears NW. }i N, then run for it on this course, leaving the Ledges well on the Starboard hand, until about 200 yards from it, the course is then N. by E. J^ E. about a mile, when you may anchor in flom T) to 7 fathoms water. In running this last course, N. by E. % E. into the Harbor, it is advisable to keep a sharp lookout for Tumbler Island, which lies on the Eastern side, and is small and low, but it is bold on its Western side. Beating in at Night. From the Westward, with Northeasterly winds, when Ram Island Light is made, keep in the Red Ray until about 1^ .iiiles from it, then work up between Squirrel Island and Ram Isl.ind Light until Burnt Island Light bears NW. ^4 N., then run for it ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 153 on this course until about }{ mile from it, thon Imul up sharp to the wind, leaving Tuinltliir Lodgo, which Hon ahout ^j mile E yi N. I'roui liurnt iHlatul Light and ImH 11 fuet of watiu' upon it at Low Tide, well on the Starboard hand. When past the last-named Light there are no dangers in the channel-way ; it is, thereJ'ore, only necessary to keep off the shores, which are bold on botli sides. From the Westward, with Northwesterly winds, it is advisable to (ro to the Northward of Squirrel Island ; providing there is no error in the compass, when Burnt Island Light is made, bring it to bear N. by E. }4 E., and run for it on this course until about ^ mile from it, you are then past Squirrel Island Ledge, and may steer more Easterly, leaving the Light 200 yards on the I'ort hand ; when past it, run in about N. by E. J4 E. about a luilo, where you may anchor in from o to 7 fathoms water. At Night or Day, with strong winds blowing out of the harbor, if you have long Cables, you may anchor on either side of Squirrel Island, with good holding-ground, in IVora 10 to 20 fathoms water. Dangers in approaching Booth Bay Harbor from the Eastward. Pemaqnld Ledge, This Ledge, upon which there are 9 feet water at Low Tide, is marked upon its Southeastern part with a IJuoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes. Ram Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy West S% miles, Pemaquid Point Lighthouse, NE. >^ N., Ij^ miles. Outer Herring Inland Ledge* This Ledge, upon which there is but little water at Low Tide, is marked off its Eastern part with a Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes. Pemaquid Point Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NE. 4^ miles, Northern White Island, N. Yt W., 1^ miles. Gangway Ledge, This Ledge, which lies on the Northeastern side of the approach to Booth Bay Harbor, has about G feet of water upon it at Low Tide, and is marked off its Southwestern part with a Red Buoy, which bears from Ram Island Lighthouse N. by W. ^ W., ^ mile. Card'8 Ledge and Hock, About ^ mile Northwest from Gangway Lodge is Cord's Ledge and Rock, which is marked off its Southwest part with a Red Buoy, 154: ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. which bears from Ram Island Lightliciise NW. by N., nearly ^ mile ; Burnt Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N"^. i^ N., about lj4 miles. In approaching Booth Bay Harbor this Buoy is left on the Starboard hand. Spruce Point Ledges, About ^ mile Northwesterly from Card's Ledge, and near the entrance to Linekin's Bay, are Spruce Point Ledges, which extend nearly north and south nearlj 400 yards, and are bare in some places at Low Tide. At this date (1884) this danger is marked off its Southwest part with a Red Buoy, which bears from Ram Island Lighthouse N.NW., nearly 1|^ miles. Burnt Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy about W.NW., nearly a mile. In approach- ing Booth Bay Harbor, this Buoy is left on the Starboard haud. Tumbler Island Ledge, This Ledge, which is small, lies at the entrance of Booth Bay Har- bor, has about 11 feet water upon it at Low Tido, and is surrounded by deep water. At this date (1884) this danger is marked off its West- ern side with a Red Buoy. Burnt Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. yi S., about yz mile. The widest channel in entering the Harbor is between this Ledge and Burnt Island Lighthouse. Sailing Directions for Booth Bay Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. By the Mastern Passage, From the Eastward, when Riim Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W. J^ N., and run for it on this course, leaving the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes off Pemaquid Ledge well on the Starboard hand, and the White Islands, which are bold, on the Port hand ; when about ^^ mile from Ram Island Lii^hthouse steei more Mortherly, leaving it and the Bell Buoy off Hypocrite Ledge * both about 200 yards on the Port hand ; when past this LightJiouse steer W. by N. until Burnt Island Lighthouse bears NW. ^ N., then run for it on this course, leaving the Red Buoys off Gangway TiCdge, Card's Ledge, Spruce Point Ledges, and Tumbler Island Ledge, all on the Starboard hand. When about 200 yards from the last-named Lighthouse follow the direc- tions before given. * Ram Island Lighthouse bo^re from the Bell Buoy off Hypocrite Ledge W. by N. H mile. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 155 Sailing Directio^'.s for Booth Bay Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. By the Eaatem Passage. At Night-time, from the Eastwai'd, as soon as Ram Island Light Id made, bring it to bear W. J^ N., it will then show a Red Light; continue the course for it, keeping in the Red Ray^ until you judge you are about ^ mile from it, then gradually haul to the North- ward, leaving it and the Bell Buoy oft' Hypocrite Ledge both about 200 yards on the Port hand, and steer W. by N. until Burnt Island Lighthouse bears NW. ^ N., then run for it on this course until about 200 yards from it, then follow the directions before given. Beating in at Night by the Eastern Passage. Beatin"' in by this passage at Night, keep in the Red Ray of Ram Islt . . Light until you judge you are about a mile from it, tiien work in with this Light bearing from West to W. b}- S. ^ S. When past Ram Island Light, in order to avoid the Ledges which lie on the Eastern side, do not bring Burnt Island Light to bear to the Westward of NW. J^2 N. Currents, The current of Flood sets strong to the Northward across Ban- tum Ledge, and also the Ledges South of Damiscove Islands ; it is, therefore, necessarj^ for vessels in thick weather passing without them to proceed with caution. High Water. It is High Water at Booth Bay 27 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^^ feet. Linekin's Bay« This Bay, which is only separated from Booth Bay by a Penin- sula called Spruce Point, is about 'iyd miles in length, and about 1 mile in breadth. The entrance or channel (which has a width of from 500 to 600 yards) is between Spruce Point Ledge and Negro Island, the former of which is marked upon its Southeastern part with a Red Buoy No. 6, which in entering is left on the Port hand. Burnt Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W.NW. ; distance 1 mile. There are several Ledges within this Bay, which at this time are not Buoyed ; but 5 fathoms water can be carried at Low Tide up to the head of it. 156 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Linekin's Bay, with favo>>- able winds and fair weather. Leave the Beacon upon the Cuckolds (before described in direc- tions for Booth Bay Harbor) about 400 yards on the Port hand, and steer for Burnt Island Lighthouse, bearing N. by E. ^ E. ; distance 2^ miles. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard hand a Red Buoy No. 12, which lies off Squirrel Island Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and steer E. % N. one mile to Red Buoy No. 6, which lies off the Southeast part of Spruce Point Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Port hand, and run about NE. As you enter the Bay you will see, a little on the Port bow. Cabbage Island. From the Southern part of this Island shoal water extends off to the Southward 300 yards ; but its Eastern and Western sides are bold. In order to avoid Holbrook's Ledge, which lies 600 yards to the Eastward of this Island, and is bare at Low Tide, jou should not leave the Island more than 250 yards to the Westward. When abreast it, make good the course NE. by N., leaving Seal Rocks (which lie NE. % mile from the Northern end of Cabbage Island, and have but 4 feet water upon them at Low Tide) on the Port hand, and anchor at the Head of the Bay in from 5 to 7 fathoms water. Or 3x11 may leave Cabbage Island to the Eastward and run in about mid- wa}' between it and the Western shore. When abreast tlie Island, haul in about N. by W. >^ W., and anchor on the Eastern side of Lewis Cove in from 4 to 6 fathoms water. From the Eastward, when Ram Island Lighthouse is made, bring it lo bear about W. J^ N-, and run for it on this course, leaving the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes off Pcma- quid Ledge well on the Staiboard hand, and the White Islands, which are bold, on the Port hand ; when about ^ mile from Ram Island Lighthouse steer more Northerly, leaving it and the Bell Buoy about 200 yards on tlie Port hand ; when past this Lighthouse steer W. by N. until Burnt Island Lighthouse bears NW. ^ N., then run for it on this course, leaving the Red Buoys off Gangway Ledge and Card's Ledge well on the Starboard hand ; when the Red Buoy off the Southwest part of Spruce Point Ledge bears N. by E., tiien run for it, leaving it a short distance o\ the Port hand, and Negro Island, which is bold, on the Starboard hand. If bound up BLDUIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 157 the Bay, follow the directions before given. Or when abreast of the Buoy off Spruce Point Ledge, you may run E. by N. Yt. N. about ^ mile ; then haul gruduuliy to the vSouthward, and anchor near the shore, which is bohl, in from 9 to 12 fathoms water. Upon the Eastern side of Liuekin's Bay there are extensive Porgy Factories. High Water, It is High Water in Linogan's Bay about the same time as at Booth Bay. Damarisootta River. The entrance to this River is about 3 miles to the Eastward of Booth Bay, and about the sumo distance to the "Westward of the Lighthouse upon Pemaquid Point. From its mouth to the towns of Damariscotta and Newcastle, the former place of which is situated on its Eastern Bank, the latter upon its Western, the distance is about 14 miles. From Ilogdon'w Mills (which is situated on its Western side, about 8 miles above the entrance) to Damariscotta tliere are a number of dangers wltich, at this time, are not Buoyed ; it is therefore advisable for strangois bound up to the last-men- tioned place to take pilots. Sailing Directions for Damariscotta River in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward follow the directions before given for Booth IJay Harbor until Ram Island Lighthouse is made, then bring it to bear i^E. ^ E. and run for it on this course ; haul round tliis Lighthoi-se at a disttinco of about '200 yards, leaving it on the Starboard liand, and when past it steer NE. by E. >^ E., keep- ing a sharp lookout for the Red Hu.w No. 2, which lies otf the Western side of Inner Horon Island Ledge, which is on the Eastern side of the entrnneo to Damariscotta River. This Buoy bears from Ram Island Lightiiousc NE. by E. ^i E., 1|4 miles. 158 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOJ Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and run up about N. by E. Yi Em keeping in the middle of the river until abreast Vamum's Point ; this point is upon the Western side of the ri .er (about 2I/S miles from the last-mentioned Buoy). When abreast Vamum's Point, you will see Hogdon's Mills on the Western side of the River ; anchor abreast of them, near the middle, in about 5 fathoms water, where you may lie safe from all winds. If bound up to Damariscotta, it is advisable to take a pilot here. Directions to pass without the IDamiacove Islands, From the Westward, leave Saguin Island 2 or 3 miles to the Northward, and when the Lighthouse bears North, steer E. by N., leaving the Buoy off Bantum Ledge well to the Northward. Con- tinue the course until Pemaquid Point Lighthouse bears NE. by N. ; then run for it on this course, leaving Pumpkir* twid Outer Heron Island Ledges well to the Westward. When the Northern White Island bears NW. >^ N., run for it on this course. Leave this Island about 300 yards on the Port hand, and when it bears S. by W. % W., steer N. by E. ^ E., keeping a sharp lookout for the Red Buoy No. 2, off the Western part of Inner Heron Island Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboaid hand, and proceed as before directed. Coming from the Eastwnr ^ -^v Seaward, when Rr.m Island Light- house is made, bring it to bear V7 .^ N., and run for it on this course, leaving the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes off Pemaquid Ledge well on the Starboard hand ; when the Northern White Island bears S. by W. Y^ W., then steer N. by E. % E., and follow the directions before given. It is High Water at Hogdon's Mills about 30 minutes before it Is at Boston. John's Bay. The entra ice to this Bay is from 4 to 5 miles to the Eastward of Booth Lay, and about 10 miles NW- ^ W. from Monhegan Island Lighthouse. Upon ] there is a Bear Monhegan Franklin I Old Man's This Lee water upon with a Buoj quid Lighth miles. In the Lo' a distance ol lie near the s Sailing Di fa I>irection J*>om the Bay Harbor, bearNE.>2 house at a dij hand; when Island, whichl tlie Buoy paiij quid Ledge, tioned Buoy see in the m\\ abovn the Li^ Js quiie high. ^^ ' "h.. aboui J^ii^i^'^ ^,3'^ ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 159 Pemaquid Point lAghthouse, Upon Pemaquid Point, East side of entrance to John's Bay, there is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. Bearings and Distanoes &cm Pemaquid Lig>>thou8e. DiBtanoe. Monhegan Island Lighthouse, . . . SE. }i E., • 9^4 miles. Franklin Island Lighthouse, . . . E.byN, >^ N., 6^ " Old Man's Ledge, off George's Island, E. by S. ^ S., 8^ (( Dangers. Pemaquid Ledge, This Ledge, which lies off the entrance to this Bay, has 9 feet * water upon it at Low Tide, and is marked on its Southeast part with a Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes. Pema- quid Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NE. ^ N. ; distance 1% miles. In the Lower part of the Bay, from this Buoy to John's Island, a distance of 3 milep, there are no dangers excepting those which lie near the shore. Sailing Directions for John's Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. JHreetions to pass within the Damiscove Islands, From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Boolh Bay Harbor, until Ram Island Lighthouse is made, then bring it to bear NE. >2 E., and run for it on this course ; haul round this Light- house at a distance of about 200 yards, leaving it on the Starboardl hand ; when past it make good the course East, leaving Thrumcap Island, which is bold off its Southern end, on the Port hand, and the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off Pema- quid Ledge, well on the Starboard hand. When this last-men- tioned Buoy bears South, steer North. As you sail in you will see in the middle of the Bay, and nearly ahead, about 2^ miles above the Lighthouse, John's Island, the Western part of which is quive higli. Leave this Island, the Western part of which 19 ' .;/;,, about 200 yards on the Starboard, and when abreast 160 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. it, steer N. % W., leaving Thurston's Ledge, which is yi mile North from John's Island, on the Starboard, and McFarling's Ledge, ■which is s/% mile NW. Yz N. from this last-mentioned Island, on the Port hand. After passing McFarling's Ledge, keep in the mid- dle of the river, and run up about 1 ^ miles, or where it is wider. At this place you will find good anchorage in from 4 to 5 fathoms water. McFarling's Cove. If you wish to enter this Cove, when abreast the Northern point of John's Island you will see Beaver Island, which is small, and lies about 300 yards to the Northward of John's Island. Continue the course N. ]4- ^* ^^^^^ *^® centre of Beaver Island bears E. by S. }^ S. ; then make good the course W. by N. J^ N., leav- ing McFarling's Ledge, some parts of which are above water, on the Starboard, and Corbett's Ledge, which has but 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, upon the Port hand. When the Cove is fairly opeu, haul to the Southwestward, and anchor in from 4 to 5 fath- oms water. At the Soutborn end of this Cove there is a large Porg}- Factory. There is also a good harbor nearly opposite McFarling's Cove, near the entrance to Pemaquid River. If you wish to enter this last- mentioned place, leave Beaver Island (before described) about li) 3'ards on the Starboard hand, and haul in about E. ^ S., and oncnor in from 4 to 7 fathoms water. When you are in this har- bor, there will be seen to the Southward, nearly in mid-channel, bet'v, >>n John's Island and the mainland, Knowle's Rocks. There ir* a liivrrow Channel of 10 fathoms water between these Rocks and John's 1 'and. I>ireetiuns to pass without the Damiscove Islands. From the Westward, leave Seguin Island fVom 2 to 3 miles to the Northward, and when the Lighthouse bears North, steer E. by N. On this conrse Bantum Ledge will be left well to the North- ward. Wh.r Pemaquid Lighthouse bears N.NE., run for it on this course. When from 2 to 3 miles from this last-mentionod Lighthouse, keep a sharp lookout for the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes off the Southeast part of Pemaquid Ledge. Leave this Bii by W. until ii Island, and fo From the E run for Pemaq y2 N. to N.lj W. from the I run up the Bay hand, and proc Vessels of ii Ledge having \ date is not Bu( NW. % W. ; In beating in past John's Isla without danger. cipal danger to water upon it at John's Island \ part of this last and McFarling's John's Bay an bound to the W and there are so I fear by following It is High WaJ Boston. Commcf The entrance Pemaquid Point Island Lighthous] Lighthouse. ThJ with an average is deep, but very ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 161 Leave this Buoy about 100 yards on the Port hand, and run in N. by W. until it bears South ; then steer North up the Bay for John's Island, and follow the directions before given. From the Eastward or Seaward, after passing Monhegan Island, run for Pemaquid Point Lighthouse on any bearing from W. by N. Yi N. to N.NE. Leave the point (which bears SW. by W. % W. from the Lighthouse) about J4 mile on the Starboard hand, and run up the Bay about North, leaving John's Island on the Starboard hand, and proceed as before directed. Vessels of more than 15 feet draught should take care to avoid a Ledge having about 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and afthis date is not Buoyed. Pemaquid Point Light bears from this Ledge NW. ^ W. ; distance 3^ miles. In beating in or out of John's Bay there are no obstructions until past John's Island ; vessels may therefore approach near the shores without danger. After passing this last-mentioned Island, the prin- cipal danger to be avoided is Corbett's Rock, which has but 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and bears from the Northern point of John's Island W. by N. J^ N., distance y^ mile. The Western part of this last-mentioned Island is bold ; a part of Thurston's and McFarling's Ledges are above water. John's Bay and River are excellent harbors of refuge for vessels bound to the Westward, especially during a heavy Westerly gale ; and there are so few dangers that strangers may enter them without fear by following the above directions. High Water, It is High Water in John's Bay about 30 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. New Harbor. The entrance to this small harbor is 2j^ miles NE. ^ N. from Pemaquid Point Lighthouse ; 10 miles NW. by N. from Monhegan Island Lighthouse, and about 5^ miles West from Franklin Island Lighthouse. The harbor extends nearly East and West ^ mile, with an average width of about 175 yards. The water at the mouth is deep, but very narrow and crooked. With a good pilot, 14 feet 162 ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. water at Low Tide may be carried in for about 150 yards above the Buoy j the remaining part of the Cove is shoal water. Sailing Directions for New Harbor in Daytime. From the Westwai-d, run for Pemaquid Point Light, bearing NE. by N. y^ N. Leave it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and when it bears W-'st, steer about NE. >^ N. 2 miles. On this course you will see two dry Rocks or Ledges, and a small Island lying near tlie shore, which are all left on the Port hand. After passing this Island, the harbor will open, and you will see the Red Buoy, which, in passing in, '" left on the Starboard hand. On account of the Channel being narrow and crooked, it is advisable for strangers bound in to take a pilot. From the Eastward or Seaward, after passing Monhegan Island, run for Pemaquid Point Lighthouse on any bearing from W. by N. ^ N. to N.NE., and follow the directions before given. Sigh Water, It is High "Water at New Harbor 22 minutes before it is at Bos- ton. Common tides rise about 9 feet. When the en Northerly; ai shore (which As you ent the Red Buoy both of which this last-menti yards from si Poland's Norti the Port hand about N. by E W. by N. ^ : water at Low 1 off Northerly a bor ; vessels, tl yards from its ] From the Ymi run for Pemaqu Vz N. to N.NI It is High Wa it is at Boston. Round Pond Harbor. The entrance to this harbor (which is situated on the "Western side of Muscongus Sound) is 6^ miles NE. by N. from Pemaquid Point Lighthouse. The harbor is a round Cove, a little less than ^ mile in diameter, with good anchorage in all winds, with from 12 to 15 feet water at Low Tide. MusconJ Between RouJ there are two C< the former lies latter 3^ miles | have but little Sailing Directions for Round Pond Harbor in Daytime. From the Westward, run for Pemaquid Point Lighthouse, bcarinj; NE. by N. Yz N. Leave it about y^ mile on the Port hand, iind when it bears West, steer NE. J4 N. When about 2 miles pasi the Lighthouse, you will see two dry Ledges, and also a small Is- land lying near the shore ; these are all left about }{ mile on tli*- Port hand. After passing the Island, 3'ou will open New Ilarbo' The town of Medomak Rivei NE. by N. fror or 4 miles belo^ ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 163 When the entrance to this harbor bears W. by S., haul in more Northerly ; and in order to avoid Brown's Head Ledge, follow the shore (which is bold), keeping not more than 300 yards from it. As you enter Muscongus Sound, you will see to the Eastward the Red Buoys Nos. 2 and 4, off Weber's and Bar Island Ledges, both of which should be left well to the Eastward. After passing this last-mentioned Ledge, you will see nearly ahead, and about 300 yards from shore, two Black Buoys, Nos. 1 and 3, which lie off Poland's North and South Ledges ; these Buoys are both left on the Port hand. After passing these last-mentioned Buoys, steer about N. by E. ^ E. until the harbor is fairly open, bearing ajsout W. by N. J^ N. ; then run in, and anclKjr in about 2^ fathoms water at Low Tide, and 4 fathoms at High Tide. A Ledge extends off Northerly about 200 yards from the Southern point of this har- bor ; vessels, therefore, in entering it should not keep more than 75 yards from its Northern point. From the Eastward or Seaward, after passing Monhegan Island, run for Pemaquid Point Lighthouse on any bearing from W. by N. J4 N. to N.NE., and follow the directions before given. High Water. It is High Water in Round Pond Harbor about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9 feet. . Muscongus Harbor and Greenland Cove. Between Round Pond Harbor and the Head of Muscongus Sound there are two Coves called Muscongus Harbor and Greenland Cove : the former lies about Ij^ miles NE. by N. from Round Pond, the latter 3j4 miles NE. %. N. from Round Pond ; both these Coves have but little water in them at Low Tide. Waldoboro' Harbor. The town of Waldoboro' is situated upon the Eastern bank of the Medomak River, about 8 miles from its mouth, and 16j^ miles NE. by N. from Pemaquid Point Lighthouse. At a distance of 3 or 4 miles below the town, the water commences to shoal, so that 164 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. at Low Tide but 2 feet can be carried up to it. The passage to this River leads up through Muacongus Bay, in which there are many Rocks, Ledges, Shoals, and Islands. Near the mouth of tlie River are two Islands called tow Island and Bremen Long Island which divide the entrance into an Eastern and Western Channel. The Eastern Channel, which lies between the Eastern part of Brctncn Long Island and Ilungr}' Island, is very narrow, and on account of the current whicli rushes through it with great strength and velocity, it is called the Flying Passage. The Western Passage, which is on the Western side of Bremen Long Island, is called the Iloconiuck Channel, and is also narrow, with a rai.id current in it. In this work, however, we shall on\y give directions for the Eastern Pas- sage as far as Hungry Island, whicli is near the entrance to the Flying Passage. Sailing Directions for Muscongus Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bound to Waldoboro', bring Pemaquid Point Light to bear NE. by N. }4 N., and run for it on this course. Leave the Lighthouse from ^ to ^ mile on the Port hand, and when it bears W. ^ S., make good the course E. ^i N., leaving the Red Buoy No. 8, off New Harbor Ledges, close to on the Port hand. Pemaquid Point Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. by S. ; distance 3 miles. When abreast this Buo}', nm for Fjank- lin Island Lighthouse, bearing E. by N. ^ N. On this courso the Western Egg Rock, and Western Egg Rock Ledge (upon which the sea always breaks), will be left }{ mile on the Port hand. As you approach Franklin Island Lighthouse, the Tripod upon the Eastern Egg Rock will be seen on the Starboard hand ; this Tripod is 54 feet high, and the upper half is covered with boards. Con- tinue the course until this Tripod bears South ; on which bearing keep it, and steer North for Wreck Island; distance 1^/^ miles. When Franklin Island Lighthouse bears SE. }4 E., and is just on with the Southwestern part of Crane Island (you are then past ilie Ledge called the Devil's Back, which is bare at ^ P^bb), and is left on the Port hand, and must steer Northwesterly, leaving Wreck Island at least }i mile upon the Starboard hand. In order to a\ old the Ledges which lie off its Northern part, when the centre of this last-mentioned Island bears SE., distance about ys mile, the course is NE. 14 N., leaving the Red Buoy No. 2, off Garden Island ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 165 Ledges, about J^ mile on the Starboard, and the Black Buoy No. 1, off Cow Island Ledges, about ^ mile on the I'ort hand. As you sail up the Bay, you will see on the Starboard hand two small bare Islets (connected at Low Tide) called Gull Rocks. Leave these Rocks about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and steer up about NNE. 1% miles, and anchor to the Southward of Hungry Island in from 7 to 9 fathoms water. It is advisable to take a pilot here. Coming from the Eastward, between George's Islands and Mon- begun Island, leave the Buoy off the Old Man's Ledge about ^ mile to the Northward, and steer W. by N. ^ N., leaving Shark Island, which is bold, about % mile on the Starboard hand. Wlien the Tripod upon the Eastern Egg Rock (before described) is in range with Franklin Island Lighthouse, bearing N.NE., run N. by W. % W. for the Western Egg Rock until the last-mentioned Light bears NE. ; then steer for it until the Tripod bears South ; then follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High "Water in Waldoboro' Harbor 33 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 10 feet. Priondship Harbor. Vessels bound to this harbor ma}' follow the directions before given for Waldoboro' Harbor or Muscongus Bay. Until they make the Gull Rocks these Islets ma}' be left about J^ mile on the Port hand ; and when they bear W. ^ S. make good the course E. % N. about 1 mile, which will take j'ou to the mouth of the harbor* You may then run in about E.NE. After passing the entrance^ keep about in mid-channel and run up from Yz \x) % mile, and anchor in from 3>^ to 5 fathoms water. St. George's River. The eatrance to this River is about 10 miles E.NE. from Fema- quid Point Lighthouse ; and about the same distance N. by E. % E. from Monhegan Island Lighthouse. %. "^ «%, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) V ^ A ,^ N., distance 6^ miles ; from Monhegan Lightbotise, N. ^ W., dis> tance 8^ miles. Remarks, The approaches to this River have a sufficient depth of water for the heaviest-draught vessels, but they are rendered extremely diffi- cult to strangers on account of the numerous Ledges and Shoals which lie to the Southwest of it. There are usually five or six passages used by coasters, but in this work we shall only give three, which are the most direct for vessels coming from the Eastward, Westward, or Seawai-d. The general course of this River, from the entrance to Thomaston, the head of navigation, is NE. by E., and distance 10 miles. About 7 feet water can be taken up to this place at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for St. George's Biver in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bring Pemaquid Point Light to bear NE. by N. J^ N., and run for it on this course. Leave it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and as soon as Franklin Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear E.NE., and run foi it on this bearing, leaving the T u'^hthouse close aboard on the Starboard hand. When past this Light, steer about NE. by E. % E., and leave the Red Buoy No. 2, ofi" the Northwest part of Jenks' Ledge, about 250 yards on the Starboard hand ; distance from the last-mentioned Light, 3 miles. Thence, ^ of a mile farther in, you will leave on the Port hand the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off Goose Island L 'dge, and ^ mile farther on the same hand, the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Southern part of Gay Cove Ledge. After passing this last-mentioned Buo3% steer about NE. % E., keep- ing in the middle of the River, leaving the Black Buoy No. 3, off the Eastern part of Henderson's Ledge, on the Port hand. When you are past the Narrows, there will be seen ahead, nearly in the middle of the Riv^ r, a Black Buoy, No. 5, which lies off the Eastern ELDRIDGB'S COAST PILOT. 167 dis- part of Bailey'i Ledge (which is bare at Low Spring Tides). Leave this lait-mentioned Buoy on the Fort hand, and steer up ohout NB< by B.| keeping in the middle of the River until abreast Fort St. George. Above this the channel is narrow, and the water gradually sboali to Thomaston ; it is therefore advisable to take a pilot here. From the Eastward, after passing Monhegan Island, bring the Lighthouse to bear S.SE., and run N.NW., until Franklin Island Lighthouse bears E.NE. ; then proceed as before directed. Direotions for George's Island, Western Channel. From the Eastward, Westward, or Seaward, leave Monhegan Island about 1)4 miles on either hand, and after passing the Duck Rocks (the farthest of which is about ^ mile to the Northward of this Island) bring the Lighthouse to bear S. % W., on which bearing keep It, and steer N. ^ E., with the Southwest point of the Outer George's Island a little on the Starboard bow. As you sail in, you will see, on the Starboard hand, the Red Buoy No. 6, off the Southwest part of the Old Man's Ledge, which is bare about two hours before Low Tide ; and }4 mile farther to the Northward, the Old Woman's Ledge, which is bare at Half Tide. Both the'se last-mentioned dangers are left on the Starboard hand. Continue the course N> ^ Em leaving the Southwest point of the Outer George's Island (which Is bold) about 300 yards to the Eastward, And also several small Islands and Ledges to the Westward. Wbon Franklin Island Lighthouse bears NW., the Black Buoy No. 1 off the Northeast part of Seal Ledges, will b<. in range of this Light ; and about I mile farther in you will see the Red Buoy No. 2, off the Northeast part of the Ledge called the Kegs, which are bare at Low Tide. Both these last-mentioned Buoys are left on the Port hand. Continue the course N. ^ E., until Franklin Island Light- house bears SW. by W. ^ W. ; then follow the directions before given. Directioni for George's Island, Eastern Channel. Coming ft-om the Eastward, outside of Matinicus Island, in order to clear all the Ledges, bring the Lighthouses upon the said Island to bear B. by S. J4 S., and steer W. by N. ^ N., until Monhe- gan Island Lighthouse bears SW. by S. J^ S. ; then make good the course NE. by N. >^ N., with the Southeastern part of Burnt 168 ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. Island j jst on the Port bow. Leave this Island (itrhioh is bold) about 300 yards on the Port hand, and when you have passed it, steer N. ^ E. 1^ miles, to the Black Buoy oflf the Northwestern part of the Sisters, leaving it close to on the Starboard hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Buoy, steer N. % E., or directly for the Southeast point of Teal's Island ; distance 1 % miles ftom the Buoy on the Sisters. On this last course, the Spindle on the Old Horse Ledge will be left on the Port hand. When about 250 yards from the Southeast point of this Island, steer NE. ^ E. for Hooper's Point ; distance 1>^ miles. On this last course you will see, to the Northward, the Buoy painted in Red and Black Hori- zontal Stripes, which lies off the Southern part of Channel Rock. This Rock has 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and bears from Hooper's Point W. by N. ; distance % mile. Continue the course NE. i^ E., until this Buoy bears N. by W. ; then leave it 100 yards upon either hand, and continue the course N. by W., until the River is fairly open, then run up about NE. % E., as before directed. High Water, It is High Water in St. George's River about 20 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. Davis Straits. These Straits (which lie between George's Islands) have a width of about 300 yards, and are distant 2% miles W.SW. from Marshal's Point Lighthouse, which is on the Eastern side of the entrance to Herring Gut Harbor. A Ledge, having about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies near the middle of the passage, and is marked on its Southeast part with a Red Buoy No. 8, which in going East is left on the Port hand. Between the Ledge and the Southern shore there is a narrow channel at Low Tide of 4j4 fathoms water. Davis Straits at many times are of great advantage to coasters, especially with strong Northerly or Southerly winds. ELDRIDOE'S COAST TILOT. 169 Sailing Direotioiis for Davis Straits in Dasrtime, with favorable Winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bring Pemaquid Point Ligiithouse to bear NE. by N. >^ Nm and run for it on this course. Leave the Light- house about ^ mile on the Port hand, and when it bears W. X S., steer E. }^ N. As you enter the Bay, you will soon see ahead, upon the Eastern Egg Rock (which bears E. % N. from Pemaquid Point Lighthouse, distance 5^ miles), a Beacon 54 feet higli, the upper half of which is covered with boards. As you approach it, you will also see, about ^ mile to the Northward of it, the Red Buoy No. 4, which lies off a Ledge which is awash at Low Tide. Pass about midway between the Beacon and Buoy, and steer E. by N., leaving the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Northern part of Seal Ledges (which is distant 2 miles from Egg Rock Beacon) , on the Starboard hand. Continue the course E. by N. from this last Buoy, and as soon as the Red Buoy in the Straits is made, bring it to bear E NEm and run for it, leaving it close to on the Port hand ; and when about 20 yards past it, steer NE. by S. about 300 yards, to avoid the shoal water that makes off from the point on the Star- board hand. When you are through the Straits you will see the Black Buoy No. 5, off the Northwest part of the Sisters (bearing about E.NE.) , which you will leave close to on the Starboard band, and steer about N"^ by E- ^ E , for the Black Buoy No. 3 off the Northwestern part of Allen's Ledge. On this last course, a Spmdle and Red Buoy will be left on the Port hand. When past tbis last Black Buoy, Herring Gut Harbor will be fairly open, and if bound into it, you may run in about midway of the entrance, leaving a Black Buoy o.i the Port hand, and anchor where you please. If bound farther Eastward, leave the Red Buoy off Herring Gut Lighthouse close to on the Port hand, and run E. ^ Sm leaving the next Buoy, which is Red, off the Southeast part of Mosquito Island Ledge, on the Port hand. When abreast the last-mentioned Buoy steer about SE. by E., leaving Great Mosquito Island about 300 yards on the Port hand. The above courses from Great Mosquito Island through Davis Straits are reversed by vessels bound to the Westward. ^••■•,i 170 ELDRIDOF'S COAST PILOT. (George's Harbor. This small harbor, or place of anchorage, which has a depth of from 4 to 12 fathoms water in it, is between the George's Islands, and bears N. by E. i^ E., from Monhegan Island Lighthouse, dis- tance 7 miles ; and SW. by W> 3 miles fVom the Lighthouse at Herring Gut Harbor. This place of anchorage is somewhat exposed to winds from W.NW. to South, by way of East, but affords shelter with winds from South to W.NW. by way of West. Sailing Directions for QeoTge*s Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair vroather. Directions to enter this Harhor to the Westward, of George's Islands, From the Westward, leave Monhegan Island from 2 to 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when the Lighthouse bears S. % W., make good the course N. ^ E., with the Southwest point of the Outer George's Island a little on the Starboard Bow. As you sail in, you will see the Buoy off the Old Man's Ledge, and ^ mile frirther in the Old Woman's Ledge, both of which are left on the Starboard hand. Leave the Southwest point of the Outer George's Island, which is bold, about 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and when you are abreast it, steer N.NE. As you enter the Bay, you will see on the Starboard hand the narrow passage between Bon- ner's and Allen's Islands which leads into George's Harbor ; but you must still continue the course N.NE. about ^ mile farther. Then the entrance to the harbor will be fairly open, bearing about S.SE. You may then run in, keeping midway of the entrr.nce, and anchor in from 5 to 10 fathoms water, the entrance to the Gut bearing SW- by W. about 300 yards from you. Coming from the Westward, through Egg Rock Channel, follow the directions for Davis Straits, and when abreast the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Northern part of Seal Ledges (which is left on tlie Starboard hand), steer E. % N. about \% miles. The entrance to the harbor will then be fairly open, bearing about S.SE. ; then run in, and anchor as before directed. *. t^.K!* ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 171 JHrectiona to enter this Harbor to thb Ma^tward of George's Islands, Coming from the Eastward, outside of Matiuic Island, when past the Ledges which lie to the Southwest of it, bring Burnt Island, which is the Southeasternmost of the George's Islands, to bear N>NW., and run for it on this course. Leave the Southeastern point of this Island (which is bold) about 300 yards on the Port hand, and when you are past it, steer N. % E. from ^ to ^ mile. The entrance to the harbor will then be fairly open, and you may run in about W.NW., leaving Little Burnt Island not less than 350 yards on the Fort hand, and the next point, which is the Northeast part of Allen's Island, not less than 200 yards on the samo hand, and when the Gut bears SW. by W., anchor as before directed. From White Head, when the Northern part of Burnt Island bears West, run for it oc this course, and proceed according to directions before given. Vessels passing in or out of this harbor should take care to avoid a Ledge which makes off about 150 yards from its Southern shore. High Water. It is High Water in George's Harbor 80 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. Monhegan Island. This Island, which is quite high, lies NE. and SW., and is a mile and one-third long. Its Southwest, Southern, Southeastern, and Eastern shores, are very bold. Near the middle of the Island, on a bare summit, is built a Lighthouse which shows a flashing White Light. Fog Signal, About 200 yards from the Western shore of Monhegan is a small bare Island called Mananas Island. Upon thi Southwest point of this Island is a Fog Signal, giving blasts of 15 seconds at intervals of 40 seconds. »V^ 172 ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Bearings and Oistanoes ftom Monhegan Island Lighthouse. Gape Cod Highland Light, . . Thatcher's Island Lights, . . . Isle of Shoals Lighthouse, . . Boon Island Lighthouse, . . . Cape Elizabeth Lights, . . . Seguin Island Lighthouse, . . Pemaquid Point Lighthouse, White Head Lighthouse, . . . Matinicus Rock Light, . . . Seal Island Light (off Cape Sable), DUtanoe. SW. by S. y; S., 108 SW. H W., . . 87>^ SW.byW.J4 W.,74 SW.byW.^W.,63 W. ^ S., . . . 40 W. X N.> . NW. }i W., . NE. ^ E., . E. by S., . . 19 15^ 20 SE. by E. H Bm 148 miles. Duck Mocks, These are fear bare rocky Islets, the farthest of which lies off about ^ mile from the Northern and Northwestern shores of Mon- hegan Island. Upon the Western Duck Rock a Beacon 57 feet high has been built. Monhegan Island Lighthouse bears fVom it about S.SE. ; distance ^ mile. About N. hy W., ^ mile from this Beacon, in 18 fathoms water, is placed a Whistling Buoy. Bearings and Distances flrom the Whistling Buoy off to the Northward of Monhegan Island. Distance. Seguin Island Lighthouse, . . W., 19 miles. Bantum Ledge, W., 13^ Northern White Island, . . . W. by N. ^4 N., 10}4 Pemaquid Point Lighbhouse, . NW. }^ W., . . 8yi Beacon upon Eastero Egg Rock, N. by W., ... 5j4 Buoy off the Southern part of Old Man's Ledge, .... NE. by N. ^ N., 3^^ Southeastern part of Burnt Is^ land, NE. % N., . . Roaring Bull, NE. by E. ^ E., White Head Lighthouse, . . Fog Signal on Southwest part of Mananas Island, . . . Monhegan Island Lighthouse, . Lighthouse upon Matinicus XwOvKf • • ••'•• • • NE. }i E., 5>^ 15 S. J^ W., . . . l}i S. by E. H E., . 1^ E. by S. }i S., . 21 (( %, ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 173 Bearings and Distanoes of Dangerous Bocks and Ledges. Mo8er*8 Ledge, This Ledge (which at this date is not Buoyed) has 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Monhegan Island Lighthouse bears from it iSE. ; distance 5^ miles. Sunken Duck Mock» This Rock, upon which th^ E. ; then run in, keeping about midway of it, and anchor in from 4 to 10 feet water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, after passing White Head, bring the Light to bear E.NE., and steer W.SW., leaving the Southwest point of Mosquito Head about 200 yards on the Starboard hand, and proceed as before directed. JBigh Water, It is High Water in Mosquito Harbor about the same time it is at Herring Gut Harbor. Common Tides rise about dj4 feet. Tennant's Harbor. The entrance to this excellent Harbor lies about W. }4 S. from White Head Lighthouse, distance 2^ miles; and NE. J^ N. from Monhegan Lighthouse ; distance 13 1^ miles. It is about 1% miles in length, with an average width of about 600 yards. Tennant's Harbor Lighthouse, Upon the Eastern end of Southern Island, South side of entrance to this Harbor, a Lighthouse has been built which shows a revolving Red Light. Sailing Directions for Tennant's Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bring Monhegan Island Lighthouse to bear SW., and make good the course NE., leaving Mosquito Island about 1 mile to the Westward. When Tennant's Harbor Light bears North, steer N. by E., leaving it at least 300 yards on the Port hand. When the harboV is fairly open, run in midway (course about W. by N. J4 N.), and anchor about y^ mile above the Lighthouse in from 3^ to 5 fathoms water. From the Eastward, after passing the Bell Boat off White Head, bring Tennant's Harbor Lighthouse to bear W. % S., ^^^ ^^^^ for it. When about ^ mile fVom this Lighthouse, run about W. by N. yi N., and anchor as before directed. 178 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Coming from the Eastward, through Two Bush Island Channel, when the Lighthouse at Tennant's Harbor bears NW. by W. ^ W., run for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. Beating into Ternant*s Harbor. Metinic Ledge, which has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is marked off its Southwest part with a Buoy, having Red and Black Horizontal Stripes. Herring Gut Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NW. by W. ; distance 4}i miles. From the Westward, after passing th?s I ''dge, you mpy bring Tennant's Harbor Light to bear from North to W.NW., until you are ^4 mile from it ; then stand farther to the Northward until the Lighthouse bears W. by S. Give the shores a small berth, as there are no dangers in the harbor excepting a Ledge, which lies off the Western shore about ^ mile above the Lighthouse ; these last directions will apply to Night- time. Sailing Directions for Tennant's Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, give Monhegan Island a berth of from 2 to 3 miles, leaving it to the Southward. When the Light bejirs SW. make good the course NE., leaving George's Islands, the Old Cilley, and Mosquito Island, all to the Westward. On this course, the Roaring Bull, and the other Ledges Northeast from it, will be left well to the Eastward. Continue t'vj course NE., until the Light at Tennant's Harbor bears N. ty W., then run for it. Leave this Light from .300 to 400 yards on the Port hand, and gradually haul to the Westward. When it bears S.SW. about 400 yards, haul up W. by N. 5^ N., and run in about ^ mile, taking care not to approach the shores in less than 4 fathoms water, and anchor in from 4 to 6 fathoms.* Negro Hifvh Water, It is High Water in Tennant's Harbor 44 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9% feet. * If a vessel with strong NB. winds and ebb tide siiould reach Wiiite Head Light she should not attempt (especially at night) to beat int* Seal Harbor, but may safely run into Tennant's Harbor by the following directions : After passing the Bell Buoy off White Head, bring Tennant's Harbor Light to bear West, and run for it until you judge you are about X mile from it, then steer •bout W.NV7., taking care not to approach either side in less than 4 fathoms. Wbeo the light beara SB., anchor in fk'oin 6 to 7 fathoms water. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 179 White Head Idghthouae. This Lighthouse, which ^ ws a fixed White Light, is built upon the Southeastern part of ^\ hite Head Island, and is intended as a guide for vessels bound into Seal Harbor, and also through the Muscle Ridge Channel into Penobscot Bay. Fog Signal, A Steam Whistle has been placed near this Lighthouse, giving blasts of 8 seconds at intervals of 52 seconds. Bearings ard Distanoes. White Head Lighthouse bears from Distance. Monhegan Island Lighthouse, . NE. ^^ E., . . 1j^ miles. From Matinicus Rock Lighthouses, NW. by N. J4 N., 17 " From Owl's Head Lighthouse, . SW. % S., m OwV8 Head Lighthouse, Upon the summit of a prominent headland, called Owl's Head, is built a Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light. This Light- house is intended to guide vessels into Penobscot Bay. A Fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. Bearings and Distanoes from Owl's Head Lighthouse. DiBtonoe. White Head Lighthouse, . . . SW. Brown's Head Lighthouse, en- trance to Fox Island Thorough- fare, . . . E. J^ Indian Island Lighthouse, entrance to Rockport Harbor, .... Negro Island, entrance to Cam- den Harbor, The Rocky Island, called the Graves, Spruce Head, Matinicus Rock Lighthouse, f . . s., 7^ miles. s., N. J4 E., . . N. by E. ^ E., N. by E.^ E., NE. by N. y2 N. S. ^ E., 6 12^ 20 u Sailing Directions from Monhegan Island (by way of Muscle Ridge Channel) to Bangor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from Seaward or the Westward, leave Monhegan Island fVom 2 ^o 3 miles on either hand, and after passing the Duck Rocks bring t^*^ Lighthouse upon the said Island to bear SW. ^ W., on which bearing keep it, and steer NE. ^ E., for White Head. 180 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. If there is no error in the compass, on this course the Southeast Breaker, Roaring Bull, and Matinic Island Ledge will all be left well to the Eastward. On the other hand, George's Islands, the Ledge called the Old Cillej', and Great Mosqu'to Island will all be left to the Westward. As soon as White Head Lighthouse is .nade, bring it to bear NE. % E., and run for it on this course, leaving the Bell Boat off the Western part of the South Breaker about % mile on the Starboard hand. When abreast White Head Lighthouse, which must be left about 250 yards on the Port hand, steer NE. by E. As you enter the Muscle Ridge Channel, you will see, on the Starboard hand, the Red Spindle on Yellow Ledge, which is left to the Eastward. On the Port will be seen the Black Buoy off Hay Island Ledge, and farther in the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off the Southwest part of Lower Gangway Ledge, both of which are left to th Westward. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy off Lower Gangway Ledge, which bears about NE. by E. from Whitehead Lighthouse ^ mile, about 150 yards on the Port hand, and make good the course NE. % E. 3^ miles to the Beacon on the Eastern point of Ash Island. On this last course, from the Lower Gangway Ledge to Ash Point Beacon, the following will be left on the Starboard hand : First, the Red Buoy No. 2, off the Northern part of Hurricane Ledge ; second, a small bare Rock ; third, Otter Island, the Western part of which is bold ; fourth, the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off the Southwest part of Upper Gangway' Ledge. This last-mentioned Buoy bears from the Beacon upon Ash Island Point S. % W., distance % mile ; and lastly, the Red Buoy, No. 4, off the North- west part of the Inner Grindstone Ledges. On the Port hand will be left, first, the Black Buoy, No. 5, off the Southeast part of a Sunken Ledge ; second, the Black Spindle on Garden Island Ledge ; third, the Black Spindle on Otter Island Ledge ; fourth, the Black Buoy, No. 7, off the Southeast part of Ash Island Ledge. The Beacon upon Ash Island Point is 57 feet high, and is painted White and Brown. Leave this Beacon about y^ mile on the Port hand, and gradually haul to the Northward until it bears West ; then run NE. by N. ^ N. 1^ miles, to the Red Buoy, No. 2, off Sheep Island Bar. On this last course, the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, off the Southwest part of NW. Ledge, will be left about y^ mile on the Starboard hand. When abreast the Buoy off Sheep Island Bar, which may be left close to on the Starboard hand, steer NE., leaving the Black Spindle off ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 181 Dodge's Point, and the Black Buoy off South from Owl's Head Light, both on the Port hand. Sailing Directions from OwPs Head Lighthouse through West Penobscot Bay to Fort Point Light- house. After passing Owl's Head about 1 mile, bring the Lighthouse to bear SW. by S. ^ S., and steer NE. by N. H N., 18 miles. II there is no error In the compass, this course and distance will bring you up with Brown's Head, which is the Southwest point of entrance to Belfast Bay. As you enter the Penobscot Bay on this course, NB. by N. >i N., when from 5 to 10 miles from Owl's Head, a number of small Islands will be left from 1 to IJ^ miles on the Starboard hand. You will next pass, on the same hand. Seven Hundred Acre Island, and about 2 miles farther in a Lighthouse, which stands upon Grindel's Point, the Western part of Long Island. About 3 miles above this Lighthouse you will see, on the same hand, three small Islands, which must be left well to the Eastward, as there are several Sunken Ledges which extend about ^ milo NE. by N. from the Northeasternmost Island. On the Port hand will bo seen Rockland Harbor, the Lighthouse on Indian Island, entrance to Rockport Harbor, the small Rocky Islet called the Ci raves, the Lighthouse upon Negro Island at the entrance to Camden Harbor; and 6^ miles above this last-mentioned Light- house, Sprue© Mend. When you are abreast this last-mentioned Head, the Lighthouse upon Grindel's Point, the Western point of L^ E. This Buoy lies off the Southwest part of Brigadier Island Ledge, and must be left on the Port band by vessels bound into the Penobscot River. After passing thi8 Buoy, and Turtle Head, continue the course E.NE. until the Lighthouse at Fort Point bears NE. ; then run for it on this course. As you approach the Lighthouse there will be seen, about yi mile 182 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. South from it, a Beacon, with a Pole and Keg on its top ; this is on Fort Point Ledge. Leave this Beacon }i mile on the Starboard hand, and the Black Buoy, which lies about }^ mile to the East- ward of the Lighthouse, on the Port hand. Sailing Directions from Fort Point Lighthouse to Bangor. After passing the Blacli Buoy off Fort Point Reef, bring the Light- house to bear SW. by S. X S., on which bearing keep it and steer NE. by N. }i N., leaving the Black Buoy ofl' Sandy Point Ledge, well on the Port hand. As you sail up you will see the Beacon on Odum's Ledge, when it bears North run for it on this course, until about ^ mile from it, then steer more Easterly, passing about mid- wji}- between it and the Eastern Shore. When past this Beacon, keep about midway, passing through Bucksport Narrows. When about a mile past Fort Knox, which is on the Western side, keep tiie Eastern side best aboard, until you make the Red Buoys off Frankport Flats. When the Southern Buoy bears NW. by W., then run for it on this course, leaving them both on the Starboard hand. When past these Buoys, gradually haul to the Northeastward, leaving Winterport on the Port hand. When past this place keep about midway, leavin*' tlie Red Spindle on Buck's Ledge, and the Red Buoy off Bald Hill Flats, both on the Starboard hand, then keep about midway the River to Bangor.* It is High Water at Bangor about 37 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides 13>^ feet. Two Bush Channel at Night. If you are bound into the Penobscot Bay it is not advisable, at Night, to attempt the Muscle Ridge Channel ; but if there is no error in your compass, you ma}' pass safely through Two Bush Channel into this Bay. This last-mentioned Channel is free from Rocks and Shoals, and from Crow Island Ledges to Alden's Rock, and the Ledge called the Northern Triangle, the passage is 2^3 miles in width. Sailing Directions for Two Bush Island Channel at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from Seaward or the Westward, leave Monhegan Island from 2 to 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when the I ight bears • At Low Tide iibout Vi ft. water can be carried through a narrow Cliannel, from llaniixlon to tiie city of Uantfor; but, us the Uiver at tins date (I8H{) iHuot Buoyed It. ovi'cii lliiist! i»l.i(!('s, it is tiierefore adviHablo for Vessels of more than 8 or It ft. linitulit, lit i'ovv Tide to anclior at Hampdeh, which is about i'-i miles below the ^ N until White Head Lighthouse bears NW. ; then steer NE. by E. about 4 miles.* You may then run up about N. yi E., leaving several Islands from 1 to Ij^ miles on the Port hand. After passing Owl's Head, proceed as before directed. Sailing Directions to enter West Penobscot Bay by way of the Middle Channel, in Daytime. When you cOrae from sea, and make Matinicus Rock'Lightl)oiiso, you may run for it on any bearing from NW. to NE. L \ o the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes off the South- east Ledge (which bears NW. b}' W., distance 1^^ miles from the last-named Lighthouses) about 200 yards on the Starboard hand, * A Rod Buoy No, 2 has been placed off the Southwest part of Crow Island Ledges. This Buoy is left well on the Port band by vessels bound to the Eastward through Two Bush Channel. White Head Lighthouss bears N.NW. f^om this Buoy, distance about 2 miles. 184 ELDRIDGE'S COAST TILOT. and steer about NW. by N. about 3'^ miles, leaving the Euoy paiuted in Red and Black tlorizontal stripes off Bantum Ledge (whieli bears NW. J4 N. from Matinicus Rock Lightbouses, distance 5 miles) a short distance on the Starboard, and steer N. y^ E., leaving Ragged Island, Matinicus Island, and the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes off Foster's Ledge, all on the Starboard hand. Green Island Ledges, and the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Ledge called the Northern Triangles, on the Port hand. Continue the course N. J4 E. until Owl's Head Lighthouse opens to the Eastward of Monroe Island, or bears N.NW. ; then steer N. by W., leaving Owl's Head Lighthouse about Ij^ miles on the Port hand, and proceed as before directed. This last Channel should not be attempted by strangers at night. Sailing Directions for East Penobscot Bay in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward, after passing Mount Desert Rock Light- house, bring it to bear E. by S.i and steer W. by N. On this course the Southern part of Isle au Haut, which bears from Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse W. by N. ^ N., distance 21 miles, will be left about 4 miles to the Northward. Continue the course W. by N. until you make the Lighthouse upon Saddleback Ledge ; * this Ledge is a high Black Rock, formed ?omewhat like a Saddle, and lies about 3 miles W.NW. from the Southwestern point of the Isle au Haut. Bring the last-named Lighthouse to bear NW. by N., and run for it, leaving it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and make good the course N. % E- about 13 miles to Eagle Island Light- house.f Give this last-mentioned Lighthouse a berth of about Yz mile, leaving it on the Port hand, and when it bears West, steer N.NW. 6 miles. In running this last course (N.NW.), you will pass between several Islanc^s, the Northernmost of which is called Western Island. About yi mile to the Westward of this last- named Island is a bare rock called Green Ledge. Cape Rozier, a high Bluff Head, with White Roc!'s here and there upon its surface, bears N. by E yi E. from this Ledge ; distance 1 Yz miles. Leave Green Ledge; about % mile on the Starboard hand, and steer about N. by E. 7 miles. On this last course, Cape Rozier, which is bold^ * Upon Saddlei^ack Ledge is a Lighthouse which ihows a fixed White Light t This Light'iouse shows a fixed White Light. About H mile South from thia Light is a Ledge having but 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide. ton. Coma ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 185 and Dice Head Lighthouse (entrance to Castine Harbor) will both be left m the Starboard hand, and Black Buoy off Long Island Ledge on the Port hand. When Fort Point Lighthouse bears NE. by N., follow the directions before given, from Monhegan to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel. Seal Harbor. This Harbor lies about one mile to the Northward of White Head Lighthouse. Sailiug Directions for Seal Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Wesiwarc , follow the directions before given from Monhegan to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel, until White Head Lighthouse (before described) bears NE. K E. ; then run for it on this course, leaving the Bell Buoy off the Western part of the S^ N. for the town. As you sail in, you will see on the Port the Black Buoy No. 1, off Spear Rock, and farther in the Red Buoy off the Southern part of South Ledge. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy on the Starboard hand, and when about }( mile past it, anchor in from 4J^ to 6 fathoms water. If bound to any of the Wharves, wait until High Water. If it is night when you pass Monhegan, follow the directions before given for Two-Bush Channel, and haul round Owl's Head at a distance of }4 mile, leaving it on the Port hand. When Owl's ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 187 Hear* ''jight bears SE., make good the course Nw.j and anchor in A'om 5 to 7 fathoms water. Froui the Northeastward, when past the small rocky Islet called the Graves (Camden Light bears from this Islet N. by W., dis- tance l}i miles), steer SW. J4 S. for Jameson's Point,* leaving Rockport Lighthouse, the Beacon on Portersfield Ledge, Brewster Point Ledge, and the Red Buoy No. 4, otf Jameson's Point, all on the Starboard hand. After passing the last-named Buoy, which may be left close to on t'\e Starboard hand, steer W.SW., leaving the Buoy painted in :;3d and Black Horizontal stripes off the South- western part of Jameson's Ledge on the Starboard, and the Black Buoy on a shoal spot on the Port hand. After passing these Buoys, anchor in from 3 to 4^ fathoms water. High Water, It is High Water in Rockland Harbor 27 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about d}4 feet. Rockport Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor bears North from Owl's Head ; dis- tance 4^ miles. * Rockport Lighthouse* On the Southern point of Indian Island, East side of entrance to Rockport Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed Red Light. This Lighthouse bears from Owl's Head Lighthouse N. % E. 4j^ miles. Sailing Directions for Rockport Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, ^oUow the directions before given from Monhegan to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel. When past Owl's Head, bring the Lighthouse to bear South, and steer North, leaving the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Northeast part of Ram Island, on the Port, and the Beacon on Portersfield Ledge (Rockport Lighthouse bears from this Beacon N. by E. ^ E., • At this (liite, 1S84, a Breakwater is in course of constrnotion, extondinsr > I t > the Soutliward from Jameson's Point, Northern siUu of entrance to Uociland Harbor. 188 ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. distance about ^ tu about }( mile upon the Starboard hand. When the Beacon u^. '^orterstield Ledge bears East about j^ mile, then run N. by E., leaving the Lighthouse and the two Red Spindles, one below and the other above the Lighthouse, both on the Starboard hand. When past the Upper Spindle, keep midway the harbor, leaving the stone Beacon upon Harbor Ledge upon the Port hand. When past this last-mentioned Beacon, anchor nearest the £astern shore in from 4 to 6 fathoms water. Rockport Lighthouse bears fVom the Spindle off Lowell Rock N. ^ E. ; distance about }i mile. Vessels therefore from the Noilih^ard or Eastward may leave this Spindle about }i mile upon the Starboard hand, and steer North, and anchor above the Beacon as before directed. At Night. Portersfield Ledge, which is' marked with a Beacon, is bold all around it. Rockport Light bears from this Beacon ^. by E. >^ E. ; distance about ^4 mile. Vessels bound into this harbor at night should not approach Rockport Lighthouse nearer than 1 mile until it bears North ; then run for it on this bearing. On this last course, the Beacon upon Portersfield Ledge will be left about % mile on the Port hand. Continue the course for the Light until you are % mile from it, or judge you are past Porters- field Ledge ; then haul more Westerly, leaving the Spindle off Lowell Rock and Light about % mile on the Starboard hand, and steer up about N. K E., keeping midway the harbor, and anchor to the Southward of the Beacon. In beating into this harbor at night or day, the principal dangers to be avoided are Portersfield Ledge (before described), Lowell Rock, which lies about % mile to the Southward of the Lighthouse, and Seal Ledge, which lies near the shore, about y% mile above the Lighthouse. This last-mentioned Ledge, which is marked with a Spindle, is bare at Half Tide. High Water. It is High Water in Rockport Harbor 28 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9 feet. ELDUIDQE'S COAST PILOT. Oamden Harbor. 189 The entrance to this Harbor ia about 6^ miles Northeasterly fVom Owl's Mead Lighthouse. Camden lAghthouae, Upon Negro Island, West side of entrance to Camden Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. This Light- house bears from Owl's Head Lighthouse N. by E. ^ E- ; distance 6^ miles. Dangers in entering this Harbor. Outer JLedgea, These are a group of dangerous Rocks (bare at Half Tide) lying Northeast about yi mile from Camden Lighthouse ; they are marked with a Spindle painted Black, and two Buoys, one Red, the other Black. The Red Buoy, No. 2, is placed a short distance from the Southwest part of the Ledge, and bears f^om the Lighthouse NE. by E. ^ E. ^ mile ; the Ship Channel is between this Buoy and the Lighthouse. The Black Buoy, No. 1, is placed off the Northern part of the Ledge. Inner Ledges, These Ledges, which are bare at Low Tide, are separated from the outer Ledges by a Channel about 100 yards wide, with over 3 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. They are marked with an Iron Spindle painted Red, which bears about N.NE- from the Light- house ; distance Yz mile. Harbor Ledge, This Ledge, which has about 2 feet water upon it at very Low Tides, is marked upon its Eastern part with a Black Buoy, No. 3, which in entering the harbor i i left on the Port hand. This last- named Ledge bears from Camden Lighthouse N. by W. % W. ; distance about % mile. Sailing Directions for Camden Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from Monhegan to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel. When 190 SLDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. past Owl's Head, bring the Lighthouse to bear S-SW., And steer N-NEm leaving the small rocky Islet called the Graves about i^ mile upon the Port hand. Camden Light bears from this Islet, which is bold all around it, N. by W. 1^ miles. When past the Graves, run for Camden Lighthouse, bearing about N.NW. As you sail in, you will see the Red buoy No. 2, otf the Southwent part of the Outer Ledges ; this Buoy bears trocx the Lighthouse NE. by E. >^ E., distance ^ mile. Pass about midway between this last-named Buoy and the Lighthouse, leaving the latter on ttie Port, and steer N. by W. ^ W. On this last course you will also pass midway between the Spindle upon the Inner Ledges and the Blaclc Buoy No. 3, off the Eastern part of Harbor Ledge. When past the Spindle on the Inner Ledges, haul a little more Nortlierly, and anclior in Sherman's Cove in fVom 3 to 5 fathoms water, the Lighthouse bearing S. ^ W. ; distance about ^ mile. There is a Channel between the Northeast point of the harbor and the Outer and Inner Ledges. This passage is frequently used in coming down the Bay by those acquainted with it, but it is not advisable for strangers to attempt this Channel. The best way for them is to run down the Bay until Camden Lighthouse bears West ; then run for it on this course, and pass in the Ship Channel, accord- ing to directions before given. Beating into Camden Harbor. In beating into this Harbor, after passing the Graves, you may bring the Lighthouse to bear from West to Nortli. When abreast Negro Island, upon which the Lighthouse stands, the channel between the Ledges is a little more than }i mile wide. Negro Island ma}' be approached in beating in at a distance of 150 yards without danger. Sailing Directions for Night-time. From the Westward, after passing Owl's Head, bring the Light to bear SW. by S. >4 S., and make good the course NE. by N. }4 N. until Camden Light bears NW. by N. ; then run for it on this course. Give the Light a berth of about 200 yanls, leaving it on the Port hand ; and when abreast it steer N.NW. into tlie harbor and anchor in from 4 to 5}4 fathoms water, the Light bear- ing South from you. Coming from the Nortlieastward down the Penobscot Ba3% keep BLDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 191 In the middle of it until Camden Light bears NW. ; then run for it, and follow the directions before given. Strangers should not attempt to beat into this Harbor at Night, when the Buoys cannot be seen. If you are bound to town, it will be necessary, in order to reach the wharves, to wait until High Water. High Water, It is High Water in Camden Harbor 22 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise 9>^ feet. Lincolnville, or Duok Trap Harbor. This Harbor, which lies upon the Western side of the Penobscot Bay, bears NE. by N. J4 N. from Owl's Head Lighthouse ; dis- tance about 12^ miles. It is somewhat exposed to S.SW. winds. Sailing Direotions for Linoolnville, or Duck Trap Harbor, in Daytime, with favorable wmds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from Monhegan to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel, until the L'jghthouse upon Grindel's Point, North side of entrance to Gilkey's Harbor, bears SE. by E. ; then run NW. by W. As you sail in on this last-named course you will see on the Port the Red Buoy No. 2, off the Southern part of Haddock Ledge, which has but little water upon it at Low Tide. On the Starboard will be seen Spruce Head, which is quite bold. Pass about midway between the Buoy and Head, and when the former bears South, steer North until Spruce Head bears E. by S. ; then anchor in from by2 to lyi fathoms water. Coming down the Bay, haul round Spruce Head at a distance of 300 or 400 yards, and anchor as before directed. Spruce Head is on the Western side of the Penobscot Bay, and bears from the lighthouse at Gilkey's Harbor about NW. ; distance 1^ miles. 192 ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. High Water. It is High Water at Lincolnville, or Duck Trap Harbor, 25 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9^ feet. Gilkey's Harbor. This Harbor, which lies on the Western shore of Long Island, is well sheltered, and is easy vi access ; in fact, it is one of the best in the whole Bay. Its entrance is Northeasterly 12^ miles from Owl's Head, and about NE. by E. 6^ miles from Camden Light- house. GrindeVs Point Lighthouse, Upon Grindel's Point, North side of entrance to this Harbor, is a Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light. This Lighthouse bears from Camden Lighthouse NE. by E. ^ E., distance 6^ miles ; from Great Spruce Head, S. }i. W., distance 2^ miles. A Fog Bell is placed near this lighthouse. Dangers. There are no dangers in approaching this Harbor from Penobscot Bay, but there are several inside it, which at this date (1879) are not Buoyed. Lobster Rock, The first danger met with after passing the Lighthouse is called Lobster Rock, which is bare at Half Tide. This Rock bears SE. ^ E. from Gilkey's Point Lighthouse ; distance ^ mile. Shoal water extends Northeasterly' some distance from this Rock. Long Ledge, This Ledge is bare at Low Tide at a distance of ^ mile from the Eastern shore of the Harbor, and its centre bears from Grin- del's Point Lighthouse SE. >^ E. ; distance about ^ mile. Sailing Directions for Gilkey's Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given ft . Monhegan Island to Bangor by way of Muscle Ridge Channel, It is Boston. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 193 until the Lighthouse at Gilkey's Harbor bears East ; then run for it on this course until you are about ^ mile from it, or the passage into the Harbor is fairly open ; then run in, leaving the Lighthouse on the Port hand, and keeping in mid-channel in not less than 5 fathoms water until it bears N'W . by N. ; then haul up E. y^ N. and anchor to the Northwest of Lobster Rock in from 3 to 5 fath- oms water, the Lighthouse bearing about NW. by W. J^ W. from you. Coming down the Penobscot Bay, keep in the middle of it until the Lighthouse at Gilkey's Harbor bears S.SE. ; then run in, keeping it a little on the Port bow, and when the passage leading into the Harbor is fairly open, run in and anchor as before directed. Or when j^ou are in the Harbor, if the Lobster Rock can be seen, leave it about 200 yards on the Port hand, and steer S. by E., keeping in not less than 5 fathoms water, and anchor to the Southwest of Long Ledge in from 5 to ly^ fathoms water. There is another passage from the Southward into this Harbor, but at this date there are neither Lighthouses nor Buoys to mark the channel. In beating into Gilkey's Harbor, aft^r passing the Lighthouse, or when it bears N.NW., the channel is narrow for a short distance : it therefore requires a good working vessel to safely enter it, espe- cially at Low Tide. Hiyh Water, It is High Water in G ilkey's Harbor 26 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9^ feet. Seal Harbor. This Harbor, which has no obstructions in entering it, lies on the Western shore of Long Island, nearly opposite Great Spruce Head, and about 3 miles Northeasterly A:om the Lighthouse at Gilkey's Harbor. Sailing Directions for Seal Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from Monhegan U> Bangor until the Lighthouse at Gilkey's Harbor bears 194 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. East ; then run in, leaving the last-named Lighthouse on the Star* board hand, and follow the shore to the Northeastward, keeping not less than ^ mile from it. As 3'ou sail in, you will see on the Port a small, low, flat, grassy Island ; run in about midway between this Island and the Eastern shore, and anchor in the Cove in from 6 to 8 fathoms water, the last-named Island bearing about W. b}- S. ; distance IjE^ miles from you. Coming down the Penobscot Bay, bring the Lighthouse at Gilkey's Harbor to bear S. by W.' J^ W., and run for it on this course until past the small, low, flat, grassy Island before men- tioned ; then haul in and anchor in the Cove as before directed. Saturday Cove. This small Cove, which lies on the "Western shore of Penobscot Bay, bears about N. by E. from the Lighthouse at Gilkey's Har- bor ; distance 3^ miles. In running up or down the Penobscot Bay, when the Cove is fairly open, run in until j-^ou strike 6 or 7 fathoms water; then anchor. This Cove is somewhat exposed to winds from NE. by N. to S.SW. by way of South. Belfast Harbor. From Owl's Head Lighthouse through West Penobscot Bay to Brown's Head, South side of entrance to Belfast Bay, the course is NE. by N. /i N., di.stance 18 miles; thence Northwesterly about 4 miles to the city of Belfast, which is on the West side of the River. Remarks, About 12 feet water can be carried up abreast the city at Low Tide, and 11 feet water can be taken to some of the wharves at Low Water. With heavy Southeast winds the Harbor abreast the city is somewhat exposed at High Water, but vessels at such times, of not more than 1 2 feet draught, can find good shelter between the Northeast part of the City and Bridge. Danger. The principal danger in entering Belfast Harbor is Steel's Ledge, ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 195 which lies on the Eastern side of the Channel, about 1 mile below the City, and is marked upon its Southern part with a Beacon and Red Buoy No. 2, and on its Northern part with the Red Buoy No. 4. Sailing Directions for Belfast Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from Monbegan Island to Bangor by way of Muscle Ridge Channel until past Brown's Head. When Belfast Bay is fairly open to the Northwest, run in, keeping about ^i mile from the Western shore, which is quite bold and free from dangers. If bound to any of the wharves, at Low Ticl,j, it will be necessary for vessels of 12 feet draugljt or upwards to anchor a little below the City in from 2f^ to 3 fatlioms water, and wait until at least two-thirds Flood. From Penobscot River or the Eastward, when past the Black Buoy No. 1 , off the Southwest part of Brigadier Ledge, steer W. by N., leaving the Monument and Red Buoy No. 2, off the South- ern part of Steel's Ledge, on the Starboard hand. When past the last-named Ledge, run in as before directed. Turtle Head, the Eastern part of Long Island, bears from the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Southwest part of Brigadier Ledge, S. ji W. The above- named Lodge is bare at Low Tide. Tlic above directions for Belfast Harbor will answer for Night as well as Day. Beating into Belfast Harbor in Daytime. After passing Brown's Head (before described) you may approach the Western Hliore at a distance of y^ mile without danger until you ore abreast of the Southern part of the City, when it will be necessary for vessels of 12 feet draught to anchor and wait for Flood Tide. Beating in at Night, after passing Brown's Head, use the Lead, and stand over to the Western shore until the water shoals ^ « 4 fatlioras at Low Tide, and 5^ at High Tide, taking care to avoid Steel's Ledge (before described), and anchor below the city as before directed. High Water, It is nigh Water in Belfast Harbor 25 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9^ feet. 190 ELDRIDGE'S COAST HLOT. Searsport Harbor. This Harbor, which has no dangers in entering it except Briga- dier Island Ledge (before described), lies about 4 miles to the Eastward of Belfast. Sailing Directions for Searsport Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bound to Searsport Harbor, follow the directions before given from Monhegan to Bangor by way of Muscle Rid<'e Channel until the centre of the Village of Searsport bears N. li W., then run in on this course, leaving the Black Buoy of Brigadier Ledge well on the Starboard hand. As you sail in you will see on the Eastern side of the Harbor, the Red Buoy off \\\v. Southwestern side of Long Cove Ledge, which is awash at very Low Tides ; leave this last named Buoy about % mile on the Starboard hand, and anchor off the Village in from 3>^ to 4J^ fathoms of water at Low Tide. Coming through the East Penobscot Bay, or from the Southeast- ward, when Dice Head (near the entrance to Castine) bears East yi mile, steer NW. by N., leaving Turtle Head, the Eastern part of Long Island, about % mile on the Port. After passing this last-named Head, bring it to bear S. by E., and steer N. by W., which course will lead to the anchorage. From the Penobscot River, when past Fort Point Lighthouse, keep about ^ mile from the Southern part of Brigadier Island until past the Blatik Buoy off Brigadier Island Ledge. When Turtle Head bears S. by E., run in N- by W. as before mentioned. Searsport Harbor is exposed to Southerly winds. before it is i Stocktor , or Cape Jellison Harbor. This Harbor, vhich is exposed to Southerly winds, lies between Brigadier Island and Cape Jellison, about 3 miles to the Westv ani of Fort Point Lighthouse. Dangers. The Eastern point of entrance to this harbor is called Squaw Point. It is a sandy Bluff, about 20 feet high, and from it extends ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 197 oat a long Ledge, which is bare at Low Tide ; this is called Squaw Point Ledge, and is the only danger in entering the harbor. In order to avoid this Ledge, vessels bound into this harbor should keep nearest Brigadier Island. Sailing Directions for Stockton, or Cape Jellison Harbor in Da3rtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from Monliegan Island to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel, until about 1 mile past the Black Buoy off the Southwest part of Brigadier Island Ledge ; then run in N. by E. % E., taking care to keep nearest Brigadier Island, or the Western side of the harbor, and anchor where you please. From East Penobscot Bay. when Dice Head Lighthouse bears E. by S. about ^ mile, steer N. b3' W. % W* ^"^il you make the Black Buoy off Brigadier Island Ledge ; then run in as before directed. From Penobscot River, after passing Fort Point Lighthouse, keep about ^ mile from shore until the Harbor opens ; then run in according to directions before given. High Water. It is High Water in Stockton or Cape Jellison Harbor 26 minutes before it is at Boston. Comi jon Tides rise about 9^ feet. Fort Point Harbor. This Harbor, which is on the West side of entrance to Penobscot River, affords excellent anchorage and good shelter. Fort Point Lighthouse, Upon Old Fort Point, West side of entrance to Penobscot River, la a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. Dangers. The principal dangers in entering this na r are Fort Point i^edge, Fort Point Reef, and Sandy Point Ledge. The former. Fort 13 lf)8 ELDKI DOE'S COAST PILOT. Point Ledge, has a stone Beacon upon it, which bears fVom the Light- house S. X ^' ; distance Yi mile. The second. Fort Point Reef, which extends from the shore, is marked upon its outer part with a Black Buo}', No. 3 ; this last Buoy bears from the Lighthouse E. ^2 N., distance ^ mile. The latter, Sandy Point Reef, extends off about ys mile from the Western shore, and is marked with a Black Buoy, No. 5. Fort Point Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SW. by S. J^ S. ; distance 1^ miles. Sailing Directions for Fort Point Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from Monhegan Island to Bangor, by vfay of West Penobscot Baj-, until past the Black Buoy off Fort Point Reef; then haul to the Northwaru, ann run .^oldly up into the harbor, and anchor accord- ing to draught. 8hoal water extends off a long distance from the Western side of this Harbor. From the Eastward, follow the directions before given for East Penobscot Bay until Fort Point Lighthouse bears NE. by N. ; then follow the directions before given. Castine Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor, which lies between Dice Head upon the North, and the Northern part of Cape Rozier on the South, is Southwesterly about 6 miles from Fort Point Lighthouse, and 20 miles Northeasterly from Owl's Head. Dice Head Lighthouse, Upon Dice Head, North side of entrance to Castine Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. This Lighthouse is about 4 miles Northeasterly from Cape Rozier, 3 miles Southeast- erly from Turtle Head, the Eastern extremity of Long Island, 5j4 miles Southwesterly from Fort Point Lighthouse, and 21 miles Northeasterly from Owl's Head Lighthouse. ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 19^ Memarka. From Owl's Head, the most direct way to this harbor is to the Eastward of Long Island, the distance being 4 miles less than by the Channel to the Westward of this Island. Sailing Directions from OwPs Head Lighthouse to Castine Harbor, by the Channel to the Eastward of Long Island, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given from J^donhegan Island to Bangor, by way of Muscle Ridge Channel, until past Owl's Head ; then bring the Lighthouse to bear SW. by W. J4 W. ; on which bearing keep it, and steer NE. by E. J4 E., leaving the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes off the Southwest part of Mcintosh Ledge about yi mile on the Port Hand. Owl's Head Lighthouse bears from this Ledge, which is nearly dry at Low Tide, SW. by W. ; distance 5}^ miles. When abreast this last-mentioned Buoy, steer NE. /^ E., illingham*8 Ledge. This Ledge, which is marked on its Eastern side with a Black Buoy, has 7 feet water upon it at very Low Tides, and lies }4 mile ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 201 from the Western shore. Cnmdcn Lighthouse bears from this Ledge SW. % S- ; distnnce 1^' miles. Ledge, A Ledge, with 7 feet water upon it, lying on the Eastern side of the Bay, about ^ mile from two small Islands called Ensign Is- lands. Camden Lighthouse bears from this Ledge W. by S. ^ S. ; distance 4 miles. Maddock Ledge, This Ledge, which is nearly dry at very Low Tides, is marked off its Southwest part with a Red Buoy, No. 2. Gilkey's Harbor Lighthouse bears from this Buoy E-SE. ; distance about 2 miles. The Ledge lies about s/% mile from the Western shore. Long Ledge, A little more than one-half mile from the Western shore of Long Island is a long Ledge extending N-NE. and S.SW., and having but little water upon it at Low Tide. This Ledge lies to the North- eastward of three small Islets, which are nearly opposite Saturday Cove. Brigadier Island Ledge. This Ledge, which is bare at Low Tide, extends off in a South- westerly direction from the Southwest point of Brigadier Island ; it is marked upon its Southwest part with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Turtle Head, the Eastern part of Long Island, bears S. J4 W. from this Buo)\ Fort Point Ledge. This Ledge is marked with a square stone Beacon, with Mast and Keg on top. Fort Point Lighthouse bears from this Beacon North ; distance }i mile, nearly. Matinicus Bock Lights. Upon the highest part of this Rock, near its Southwest end, are l)uilt two Lighthouses which show two Fixed White Lights.* * The Lighthouse Board give notice that after July 1, 1883, there will 'be but one Light shown at Matinicus Rock, and that will be Fixed Red. 202 ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Steam Whistle and Fog Bell, In thick weather a Steam-Whistle is sounded, giving blasts of h seconds at intervals of 25 seconds. In case of accident to the Whistle, a Fog Bell, struck by machinery, will be sounded during thick weather. Bearings and DiataaooB from Matinious Book Ugtathouses. Diatano*. Cape Coil (Highland Light), . SW. J^ S Boston Light, SW. by W. ^ W Thatcher's Island Lights, . . SW. by W. J4 W Boon Island Light, .... W. by S. >i S., Cape Elizabeth Lights, . . . W. ^ N., Monhegan Island Light, . . W by N., Mount Desert Rock Light, . E. J4 N., 116 miles. 124 102 81 60 20 84 125 Seal Island Light (Cape Sable), SE. by E. ^ E., Dangers to the Northward of Matinicus Lights. Southeast Ledge, This Ledge, which is small, with deep water all around it, has 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide. It is marked with a Buojr, having Red and Black Horizontal stripes. Matinicus Rock Lights bear from this Buoy SE. by E. about Ifi miles. Bantutn Ledge, This Ledge, which is bare at Half Tide, has deep water all around it. A Buoy, painted in Red and Black Horizont.l stripes, marks its position. Matinicus Rock Lights bear from this Buoy SE. y2 S. ; distance 5 miles. Foster's Ledge, This Ledge, which has 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is marked off its Southern part with a Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes. No-Man's Land, a small wooded Island, lying about ^ mile to the Eastward of the Northeast point of Matinicus Island, bears from this Buoy E. % N., distance about 3 miles; Matinicus Rock Lights, S-SE., 6^ miles. Vessels bound up the Bay may leave the three last-mentioned Buo3'S on the Starboard hand, and the Green Islands, with the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Northern Triangles, on the Port hand. ELDBIDOE-8 COAST PILOT. 203 Malcotn Ledges, These dangerous Ledges, which are '>aro at Low Tide, lie nearly midway between Seal Island and Wooilcn Ball. Matinicus Rock Lights bear from them about SW. % W., distance 6 miles. Hatinious Island. This Island lies about % mile to the Northward of Ragged Island, and a little more than 4 miles N. by W. from Matinicus Rock Lights. Upon its Eastern shore are several coves, some of which afford anchorage for vessels of light draught ; but there are many bad Ledges both to the Eastward of this and Ragged Island, some of which are nearly a mile from shore. Matinicus Roads. These Roads lie between Matinicus and Ragged Islands, and the anchorage is only suitable for vessels In moderate weather. Carver's Harbor. This Harbor, which is on the Southwest part of the Southern Large Fox Island, lies East Northerly 26 miles from Monhegan Light ; Southeasterly 9 miles from Owl's Head Lighthouse ; North- easterly 16 miles from Matinicus Rock Lighthouses; and North- westerly 5 miles from Saddleback Lighthouse. Heron Neck lAghthouse, Upon the South Point of Green Island is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed Red Light. This i^ighthouse bears from Owl's Head Light SE. nearly, distance 9 miles ; from Matinicus Rock Lights, N. by E. ^ E., distance 15 milert; from Monhegan Island Light, NE. by E. y^ E., distance 25 miles; from Saddleback Ledge Light, W.NW., distance 6 miles. ^ay Ledge, This dangerous Ledge, which is bare at Low Tide, is marked off its Southwest part with a Red Buoy, No. 2. Heron Neck Light bears from this Buoy N. by E. >^ E., distance about 3^ miles ; Sad' dleback Lighthouse, E. by N., about 6j^ miles. 204 ELDIIIDOE'S COAST PILOT. JiemarkH on Carver*» Harbor, This is not a very goo^ mile on either hand, run NW. by ^. until Heron Nock Lighthouse bears NE. ; then run in as before directed. High Water, It is High Water in Carver's Harbor 27 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9^ feet. ELDUIDOE'S COAST TILOT. 205 Fox Island Thoroughflare. This important passage, which has a depth of not less than 15 feet water at Low Tide, is niucli used by coasters hound Kast or West ; its entrance is East Southerly about 4 miles from Owl's Head. Bvown*H Head lAghthouae, Upon Brown's Head, South side of entrance to Fox Island Thor- oughfare, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. Tliis Lighthouse bears about E. J^ S. from Owl's Head Lighthouse, distance 6 miles ; from Beacon upon East side of Ash I«liind Point, E. by N. % N., distance 8 miles. Whistling Buoy. A "Whistling Buoy has been placed off the entrance of this Thor- oughfare in 21 fathoms water, about midway between the Red Buoy No. 6, off the Northern part of Inner Bay Ledge, and Spindle on Drunkard's Ledge. Bearings and Distances of Prominent Objects trova. Whistling Suoy off entrance to Fox Island Thoroughfare. Distanoe. Brown's Head Lighthouse, . . . E. by N. >^ N., . 2j^ miles. Owl's Head Lighthouse, . . . W- by N. Yz N., 3^ " Beacon upon Eastern part of Ash Island W. by S. J^ S-, . 5^ " Rockport Lighthouse, .... NW. by N. 14: N., 6J/S " Camden Lighthouse, . . . . N. by W. ^ W., 8 " Bearings and Distances of Dangers from Whistling Buoy off Fox Island Thoroughfare. Red Buoy No. 6, off Northern part of ' Distanoe. Inner Bay Ledge., S-SW., . . . J^ mile. Spindle upon Drunkard's Ledge, . N.NE., ... f| " Spindle on Northern part of Dog Fish Ledge,- E., 1/^ " Beacon upon Southwest part of Fid- dler's Ledge, NE. by E. >^ E., % " Between the Whistling Buoy, off entrance to Fox Island Thor- oughfare, and the Lighthouse on Heron Neck, entrance to Carver's Harbor, there are many Islands, sunken Rocks, and Ledges, few of which are Buoyed at this date. 206 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Fox Island Thoroughfare in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward by way of Muscle Ridge Channel, follow the directions before given lYom Monhegan Island to Bangor until past the Beacon upon Ash Island Point. Bring this last-nanied Beacon to bear W« by S> ^ Sm on which bearing keep it and steer E> by N. % N., leaving the buoy painted in Red and Black Hori- zontal Stripes off N. W. Ledge, and the Black Buoy No. 1 off Sheep Island Shoal, both on the Port, and the Red Buoy No 2 off Grind- stone Ledge on the Starboard hand. As soon as the Lighthouse upon Brown's Head (entrance to the Thoroughfare) is made, bring it to bearE. by N. ^ N., and run for it on this course. As you approach the Lighthouse you will see on the Starboard the Red Buoys upon Inner Bay Ledge, and nearly ahead the Whistling Buoy. Leave the last-named Buoy close to on the Port and run for the Lighthouse, bearing About E. by N. % N., passing nearly midway between the Spindle and Beacon upon Fiddler's and Dog Fish Ledges. When a short distance from the Lighthouse you will see on the Port two large, bare Round Rocks, of a peculiar Orange color — these are called the Sugar Loaves — and a short distance to the Northeast of them the Spindle on the Fox's Ears, pass about midway between the Sugar Loaves and Lighthouse. When you are abreast the last-named Spindle, which is left on the Port hand, you will see the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes off Calderwood's Ledge, and the Red Buoy No. 10 off Cross Island Ledge, both of which are left on the Port hand. Aftei passing this last-mentioned Buoy, haul gradually to the Southeast- ward, keeping in mid-channel and leaving the Black Spindle off Young's Point on the Starboard hand. When nearly abreast the village of North Haven (which is on the Northern side of the pas- sage) , there will be seen nearly ahead two Buoys, — the first is painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, and lies off the South- west part of Post-OflSce Ledge, the second is Red No. 8, and lies off the Southeast part of Lobster Ledge. Leave both these last-named Buoys about 75 yards on the Port, and steer about E. by S. J^ S, passing about midway between the Red Buoy No. 6 off the south- east part of Grindstone Ledge and the Spindle upon Iron Po-' t Ledge. When about 150 yards past the last-named Spindle, haul over towards the Southern shore in order to avoid a Rock, having at very Low Tides but 7 feet water upon it ; this Rock, which at this date is not Buoyed, lies nearly in the Channel, and bears about NNE. from the Spindle upon Iron Point Ledge (the last * The oughfare, of NE. b; or leavin by keepii ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 207 one named) distance 250 yards. After passing the last-named Spindle you will sae to the Northeastward in the passage two Buoys ; the first is painted in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes, and lies off the South part of Waterman's Ledge ; the second u Red No. 4, and lies off the South Point of Fish Point Ledge, both these last-named Buoys are left on the Port hand. When abreast the Red Buoy No. 4, which is left close to, steer about £. by S. ^ mile to the Spindle upon the Goose Rocks ; leave this Spindle about 150 yards on the Port, and the Black Buoy off Bradstreef s Rock on the Starboard hand, and steer about SE* by £., when you will see ahead Channel Rock, which is bold, and lies at the Eastern entrance of Fox Island Thoroughfare. Coming through Two Bush Channel, follow the directions before given for entering the West Penobscot Bay by this Channel, until Brown's Head Lighthouse bears E. by N. ^ N. ; then follow the directions before given for entering the Thoroughfare. Entering the West Penobscot Bay by the Middle Channel West of Matinicus Rock Lights, follow the directions before given for that passage until Brown's Head Lighthouse bears E. by N. 5^ N. ; then run into the Thoroughfare as before directed. Beating In. In beating into Fox Island Thoroughfare, do not approach Brown's Head Lighthouse nearer than 3 or 4 miles until it bears E. by N. }2 N. The narrowest part of the Channel, which is about one-half mile in width, lies between Fiddler's and Dog Fish Ledges; the former is marked with a Beacon, the latter with a Spindle. The Channel between the Red Buoy upon the Northern part of Inner Bay Ledge, and the Spindle upon Drunkard's Ledge, the two first dangers met with in beating into this Thoroughfare, is about 1^ miles in width. Sailing Directions to enter Fox Island Thorough- fare at Night-time.* From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Two Bush Island Channel until Brown's Head Light bears E. by N. % • The White light at Brown's Head, Western entrance to Fox Island Thor- oughfare, will (after Sept. 16, 1880) show a Red light, between the bearings of NE. by £. | E., and E. by N. i N. Vessels therefore at night, entering or leaving the Western entrance of the Thoroughfare, will clear the ledgea by keeping in the Bed light 208 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. N. ; then run for it on this course. If there is no error in the Com- pass, ycu "ill pass midway between Fiddler's and Dog Fish Ledges. Continue the course for the Lighthouse, and, in order to avoid the Sugar Loaves, leave it not more than 250 yards on the Starboard hand. If you have smooth water when you are abreast the Light, anchor ; but if the wind is strong from the Westward, run farther in under short sail, and in order to avoid the Ledges upon the Port side, do not keep more than 200 yards from the Southeastern shore. As soon as the water becomes smooth, anchor in from 5}4 to 7 fathoms. In running up the Bay at night, in order to avoid the Ledges which extend off to the Westward of the Fox Islands, do not ap- proach the Light upon Brown's Head nearer than 4 or 5 miles until it bears E. by N. ^ N. On th harbors a pilot. Bovoral I are noltl not advli It li I^ Thorougl rise abou Southern Harbor. This Harbor is about 1% miles Northeasterly from Brown's Head Lighthouse, entrance to Fox Island Thoroughfare. Sailing Directions for the Southern Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Bound to Southern Harbor, follow the directions before given for Fox Island Thoroughfare until about }4 mile from the Lighthouse on Brown's Head, when you will see two large round bare Rocks of a peculiar Orange color ; these are called the Sugar Loaves, and are bold on their Southwest part Leave the Sugar Loaves about 250 yards on the Starboard hand, and make good the course N. by E. about % mile, when the harbor will be fairly open ; then run up about E.NE., keeping in mid-channel, and anchor in from 3}4 to 5 fathoms water. The Large Fox Islands. There are two large Islands known as the Fox Islands: the Southernmost is called Vinal Haven, the Northernmost North Haven. This T at Low T wholo lei what, the a little ov between about Ji Upon fare, ig Trumpet Masters through this paHHQ All Red B Uorkoutii ELDRIDQE'8 COAST PILOT. 209 Harbors. On the Eastern shore of Vinal Haven there are one or two good harbors which are not, however, safe for strangers to enter without a pilot. On the Northern shore of North Haven there are also Bevoral small harbors which have good water in them, but as thece are neither Lighthouses or Buoys to maris the dangers, it is thought not advisable to give directions to enter them. High Water* It is High Water at North Haven, Northern side of Fox Island Thoroughfare, 24 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 10 feet. Deer Island ThoroughflEtre. This Thoroughfare, which has a depth of from 10 to 14 feet water at Low Tide, commences near the Southern part of Deer Isle ; its whole length is little more than 6 miles. Its width varies some- what, the narrowest part being abreast of Green's Head, where it is a little over 200 yards wide ; its widest part is. near its Eastern end, between Lazy Gut Island and Eastern Mark Island, where it is about ^ mile wide. Mark Island Lighthouse, Upon Mark Island, Western entrance to Deer Island Thorough- fare, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. A Fog Trumpet is placed near this Lighthouse. Note, Masters of vessels from the Westward, bound to the Eastward, through this Thoroughfare, will remember that all Black Buoys in this passage, and also York Narrows, are left on the Starboard, and all Red Buoys on the Port hand. Buoys, painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes, are placed upon Obstructions in the Channel. I I 210 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather, from the Eastern part of Fox Island Thoroughfare, through Deer Island Thor- oughfare, across Jericho Sound and through York Narrows. Strangers should proceed with caution. Coming from the "Westward through Fox Island Thoroughfare, follow the directions before given for this passage until 3'ou make Channel Rock, which lies near its Eastern entrance. Leave this Rock a short distance on the Port hand, and steer about E- by S., leaving the Red Buoy off the Southeast part of Black Ledge, on the Port hand. After passing this Buoj', you will see nearly ahead the Lighthouse at the entrance of Deer Island Thoroughfare ; bring it to bear E. by Sm and run across Isle Haut Bay for it. As you draw near this Lighthouse, you will see about S/^ mile to the North- west of it the Red Buoy No. 2, off the Southern part of Mark Island Ledge ; leave this Buoy on the Port ard the Lighthouse on the Starboard hand. When abreast the Lighthouse, there will be seen to the Eastward of it a Black Buoy No. 13, off Field's Ledge ; next, the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes on Gangway Rock ; leave the first Buoy 75 3'ards on the Starboard, and for the deepest water the Buoy with Horizontal stripes about the same distance on the Port hand. After passing this last-named Buoy, a Black Buoy No. 11 will be seen oflf the Northern part of Crotch Island ; leave this last Buoy (which bears from the Light- house E. by N. % N. about 1 1^ miles) on the Starboard hand. When past this last-named Buoy, the Red Buoy off Staple's Lodge will be seen ; leave tliis Buoy on the Port hand. When past it, the course is East nearly, leaving the Black Buoy No. 9 off Russ Island, and the Black Buoy No. 7 off Bold Island Ledge, both on the Starboard hand ; the Red Buoy No. 10 off Door Rock, Red Buoy No. 8 off Haskell's Ledge, and also the Red Buoy No. G off White Rock, all on the Port hand. There is good anchorage Northeast from this last-mentioned Bioy. After passing the Red Buoy off White Rock a Black Spindle will be seen ; this is on Haycock Rock, which is bare at low tide, and may be left about 25 yards on the Starboard hand. When abreast the Spindle, a Black Buoy, No. 3, will be seen lying about N. ^ mile from an Island ; this Buoy is off East Mark Island Ledge, and may be left on the Starboard hand. When past this last Buoy, st^cr about ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 211 "St. by S* leaving the Red Buoy No. 4 off Lazygut Island, on the Fort hand. When past this last-named Buoy, the ^»ed Buoy No. 2, off Long Ledge, will be seen ; leave this Buoy on the Port hand and make good the course E. ^ Sm when you will soon see the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes off Sunken Egg Rock ; you must leave this last-named Buoy not less than 200 yards on either hand. After passing this last Buoy, you will then be near the entrance to York Narrows, and in going through them will leave on the Port hand three Buoys : the first, No. 6 Red, is off the Western part of Long Ledge ; thp xcond is No. 4 Red, and lies off the Southeastern end of Long Ledge ; and the last. No. 2 Red, is off the Northeast point of Long Ledge. Near this last- named Buoy the Channel is narrow ; the Buoy, which sets in about 2/2 fathoms, should therefore be passed close to. The distance from Mark Island Lighthouse through Deer Island Thoroughfare, across Jericho Sound, and through York Narrows, is about 11 miles. When past the last-named Buoy, at the Eastern entrance of York Narrows, you will then be in Blue Hill Bay, and if bound farther Eastward, may steer about East, leaving a Black Buoy on the Star- board, and the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor, Mount Desert, not more than ^ mile upon the Port hand. On this last run, when this Light- house bears N. by E. % E.,you will cross Bass Harbor Bar in about 14 feet water at Low Tide, and when it bears North make good the course E.SE., which will take you well to the Southward of Baker's Island, clear of all dangers. Eggemoggin Reach. This important Reach or Strait, which connects Penobscot Bay with Blue Hill Bay, has a depth of five fathoms at Low Tide. It lies between the villages of Brooklin, Sedgwick, and Brooksville on the North, and Deer Isle and Little Deer Island on the South. The length of this Reach is about 15 miles, and its general course NW. and SE. ; its width varies from J^ to 3 miles. Pumpkin Island Idghthouse, This Lighthouse, which is on the Southwest side of the Reach at its Western end, shows a Fixed White Light, and in passing through from the Westward, is left on the Starboard hand. A Fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. 212 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Masters of vessels from the Westward, bound to the Eastward, through Eggemoggin Reach, should bear in mind that all Black Buoys in the passage are left on the Starboard, and all Red Buoys on the Fort hand. Buoys painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes are placed upon obstructions in the channel. Sailing Directions for Eggemoggin Reach, in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Penobscot River, bound through this passage, after passing the Beacon on Fort Point Ledge, steer about SW. by S. yi S-, passing about midway between Dice Head and the Eastern part of Long Island ; haul round the Western part of Cape Rozier, passing about midway between it and Western Island. This Island bears a lOut S. by W. from the Western part of Cape Rozier ; distance \% miles. When you are midway between this last-noraed Island and Cape, you will see to the Eastward the Lighthouse upon Pump- kin Island, which is on the Western side of entrance to the Reach ; bring this Lighthouse to bear East and run for it. On this last course you will pass nearly midway between the Buoy painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes, off the Western part of Two- Bush Ledge, and the Red Buoy No. 10, off the Southern part of Heron Island Ledge. The Lighthouse bears from the first-named Buoy E. by N. J4 N. 1 mile ; from the latter E- by S- IK miles. As 3'ou draw nearer the Lighthouse you will see the following Buoys and Spindle: First, the Black Buoy No. 13, off the Northwest part of Meriman's Ledge (the Lighthouse bears from this Buoy E. J^ S. ^ mile) ; second, a Black Spindle on a dry Rock, about 200 yards Northeast from the Lighthouse ; third, the Black Buoy No. 11, off Northwest part of Pumpkin Island Ledge (the Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SE. yi mile) ; fourth, the Black Buoy No. 9, off Western part of Triangles (the Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W.SW. Yz mile) ; fifth, the Black Buoy No. 7, off Eastern end of Triangles (the Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W- by S- % S., distance ]^ mile) ; and lastly, the Black Buoy No. ^, off Northern part of Howard Ledges. The Lighthouse bears fiom this last-mentioned Buoy NW. ; distance 1^ miles. All tlioso Black Buoys, going East through the Reach, are left on the Siai- board hand. When past the Black Buo3' off the Northern part of Howard Ledges, the course is about fcJE., keeping nearly in the middle of the passage. As you sail in. Billing's or Sargent ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 213 Cove will be seen on the Northern side. On the Southern side will be seen the passage between Little Deer Island and Deer Isle ; farther in the village of Sedgwick, which is on the West bank of Benjamin River. Stump Cove Ledge makes off about ^ mile from the Western point of entrance to this River, and is marked off its Southern part with a Red Buoy No. 8, which in going to the Eastward is left on the Port hand.* About 13^ miles from the entrance to the last-named River, is a Red Buoy No. G ; this is off the West part of Torrey's Ledge, entrance to Centre Harbor, and must be left on the Port hand. When past this last- named Buoy, Torrey's Islands will be seen, a short distance to the Westward of which is a remarkable bare Rock with a Reddish color, having two large White Boulders or Rocks on its summit. This is called Torrey's Castle, and is left about 300 yards on the Port hand. After passing Torrey's Castle, a Black Buoy No. 3 will be seen ; this lies off the Northern part of Conary Ledge, and must be left on the Starboard hand. The Northeast point of Conary Island bears from this Buoy S-SE. ; distance ^ mile. When abreast this last-mentioned Island, which is left on the Star- board hand, steer about SB. by Sm passing between Hog and White Islands, the former of which lies on the Eastern side of the channel, and close in with the Main Land. When coming from the Westward, it appears like a mass of bare White Rock, and shows a bold bluff-head called Devil's Head. Its Northern end is also high, bare, and rocky, and when coming from the Westward the Island appears like two Rocky Hills with a small valley be- tween them. There is good anchorage between this last-named Island and the Main Land, near the Porgy Factory. When past Devil's Head (the Southern part of Hog Island) , a Black Buoy No. 1 will be seen ; this is off the Northern part of Eastern Half- tide Rock, and must be left on the Starboard hand. Devil's Head bears from this last-named Buoy N. by E. about J4 mile. Another Buoy will also be seen painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes ; this lies off the Western part of Hog Island Ledge, and is left on the Port hand. When past the last-named Buoy, steer about E., passing between * From 1 to 1|< miles SE. by S. }4 S. from the Red Buoy off Stump Cove Ledge, and nearly in the middle of the passage, are two Ledges having but 1 1 and 13 feet water upon them at Low tide. In order to avoid these Ledges, vessels of more than 11 feet draught sailing from Benjamin River to the remarkable Rock called Torrey's Castle, should keep nearest Deer Isle. 214 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Mahoney and Smuttynose Islands ; the former Island is small, low, and dotted here and there with scrubby trees, and has a Red Buoy off its Western part, which is lefb on the Starboard hand ; the latter is simply a bare Rock destitute of trees. When past these Islands you are then through the Reach and may steer E.NE., leaving Pond Island * and the Black Buoy off its Northern part close to on the Starboard hand ; after passing the last-named Buoj' steer about SE. J4 E., leaving Ship Island and two small Islets, called the East and West Barge, all on the Port hand. Upon one of the Rocks called the Shi}) and Barge (which is bare at two thirds Ebb) is placed a Black Spindle 30 feet high, which is left on the Starboard hand by vessels bound to the Eastward. After passing this Spindle 30U are in Bl'ie Hill Bay, and must steer about E.SE. for Bass Head, leaving it and the Lighthouse not more than ]/^ mile upon the Port hand. On this last run, when the Light bears N. by E. J4 E. , you will cross Bass Harbor Bar in not less than 14 feet at Low Tide. When the Light- house bears North, make good the course E.SE., which will take j-ou well to the Eastward of Baker's Island, clear of all dangers. If 30U intend to pass through Eggemoggin Reach, and are from Owl's Head, or an}- place in the West Penobscot Bay, follow the directions before given for Castine Harbor until 3'ou make Cape Rozier ; then follow the directions for this Reach. Buck's Harbor. This excellent harbor, which is sheltered from all winds, lies on the Northern side of entrance to Eggemoggin Reach, about 2 miles Northeasterly from the Lighthouse upon Pumpkin Island. Remarlca, When approaching Buck's Harbor from the Westward, it may be known by what appears to be a remarkable straight White path run- ning from the summit of the hills down their almost perpendicular aides. Sailing Directions for Buck's Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Egge- moggin Reach until Pumpkin Island Lighthouse, on Western side of s . . * Pond Island is the first large Island met with after passing between Ma- honey and Smuttynose Islands. fl ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 215 entrance to the Reach bears about S.SW. ; then steer N.NE. As you sail in, you will see on the Northern shore the large Cove called Buck's Harbor, with an Island lying nearly in the middle of it ; the best Channel is between this Island and the Western point, which is high and quite bold. Run in about midway between this last-named Point and Island, and anchor a short distance to the Westward of the Buoy off Buck's Harbor Ledge, in from 4 to .5 fathoms water at Low Tide, where you may lie secure from all winds. High Water. It is High Water in Buck's Harbor about 25 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9>^ feet. Sedgwick Village, or Benjamin Biver. The entrance to this River lies upon the Northern side of Egge- moggin Reach, about 5 miles from Pumpkin Island Lighthouse. Sailing Directions for Benjamin River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Egge- moggin Reach until you make the Red Buoy off the Southern part of Stump Cove Ledge. Leave this Buoy on the Port hand, and when the end of the Steamboat Wharf on the West bank of the River bears N. by E. % E., then steer in, with the end of the Wharf a little on the Port bow ; this course will lead about midway between the two shores. In order to avoid a Sand Bar which ex- tends off from the Eastern side of the Riveri when abreast the Steamboat Wharf, keep the Western shore best aboard, and anchor at your pleasure. About 18 feet water can be carried to this anchorage at Low Tide. Blue Hill Harbor. This Harbor, which lies at the Head of Blue Hill Bay, is about North 10 miles from Green Island Lighthouse, and Ibyi miles North- westerly from the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor, Mount Desert. 216 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Grc a Inland Lighthouse, This Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light, is built upon a low bare rocky Islet called Green Island, which is Northeasterly from Eastern entrance to Kggemoggin Reach. This Light is in- tended as a guide to Blue Hill and Ellsworth. Sailing Directions for approaching and entering Blue Hill Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, by way of Eggemoggin Reach, follow the directions before given, passing about niidway between Mahoney and Smuttynose Islands. The former Island is small, low, and dotted here and there with scrubby trees ; the latter is simply a bare Rock, destitute of trees. When past these Islands, steer about E.NE., 1^ miles, leaving the Black Buo}' off the Northern part of Pond Island close to on the Starboard hand ; Green Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NW. by N., about a mile ; when past this Buoy steer about NE. b}- N., leaving Channel Rock and the Shoal water which extends off Southeast from it well on the Port hand. When Green Island Lighthouse bears W. by N., then run up about NW. by N. ^ N., leaving Sand Island, which is small and low, well on the Port hand ; as you sail in 3'ou will see off the North- western end of Tinker's Island the two Red Buoys off the Cow and Calf Ledges, both of which should be left a short distance on the Starboard hand. When past the Northern Buoj', steer about N. by W., for the Western part of Long Island (which is bold and free from dangers), leaving Harriman's Ledge, which has 14 I'cct water on it, well on the T^rt hand, then keep midway between Long Island and the Mainland ; when the Northern end of the last- named Island bears SE. by E., steer NW. by W., and anchor in Blue Hill Harbor when the water shoals to 5j^ fathoms. If bound into the Inner Harbor, a pilot is necessary at this anchorage. From the Eastward, bound to Blue Hill Bay Harbor, leave Ba- ker's Island about 2 miles to the Northeastward, and steer W.NW. As soon as the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor Head, Mount Desert, is made^ bring it to bear NW. by W., and run for it on this course, leaving the Red Spindle off Bunker's Ledge well on the Starboard. Leave this last-named Lighthouse not more than 350 yards on the Starboard, and steer about W. by N. % N. until it bears N. by E. ^ E., when tou will cross Bass Harbor Bar in about 14 feet water at Low Tide. Continue the course W. hy N. l{. N. until Bass Harbor Head Light bears E. ^ S., and the extremitj' of the Western point of this harbor bears N. ^4 E. ; then steer about ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 217 NW. by N. along the West shore of Mount Desert Island for the Southern point of Long Island ; distan^^-e about 8 miles. As you sail up the Bay on this course, the Spindle upon the Barges will be seen, which are left about 1 ^ miles on tb* Port ; and about 2 miles farther up, Tinker's Island, which is quite large. Continue the course towards Long Island until the Northern end of Tinker's Island bears West, when the Red Buoy on the Cow and Calf will be seen ; this Buoy lies off about J^ mile NW. from the Northwest part of the last-named Island. Leave this Buoy well on the Port hand, and steer about NW. >^ N. for the Western shore until Blue Hill Bay is fairly open ; then run up as before directed. Before attempting to cross Bass Harbor Bar, it is advisable for vessels of more than 14 feet draught to wait until at least one-half Flood. High Water. It is High Water on Bass Harbor Bar 40 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 9;^ feet. Union River and Ellsworth. The entrance to this River, which is 13 miles Northwesterly from the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor Head, Mount Desert, and about 10 miles Northeasterly from Green Island Lighthouse (Eastern en- trance to Eggemoggin Reach), lies between Oak Point on the East, and Newbury Head upon the West, running in a N.NE. direction for about 10 miles to Ellsworth. It has an average width of about a mile and a half for about 7 miles to Weymouth Point, where it suddenly contracts, and becomes a narrow stream only a few hun- dred yards wide, and gradually diminishing to about 150 yards at the town of Ellsworth. Sailing Directions for Union River in Dajrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, by way of Eggemoggin Reach, follow the directions before given for that passage until past Mahoney and Smuttynose Islands. The former Island is small, low, and dotted here and there with scrubby trees ; the latter is simply a bare rock, ■destitute of trees. When uast these Islands steer about E.NE-, 218 ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 1^ miles, leftvlng the Black Buoy off the Northern part of Pond Island close to on the Starboard band ; Green Island LighthouNo bears from this Buoy NW. by N., about a mile; when past this Buoy steer NE. by N., leaving Channel Rock and the Shoal wator which extends off Southeast ft-om it, well on the Port hand. When Green Island Lighthouse bears W, by N. then run up about NW. by N. ^ N., leaving Sand Island, which is small and low, well on the Port hand. When the two Red Buoys on the Cow and Calf Ledges off the Northwestern part of Tinker's Island is made, leave them both a short distance on the Starboard hand and steer abuut NE. by E. ^ E., about 2 miles, passing about midway between the Southern end of Long Island and Harwood Island, then run up N. by E., about 2 miles, passing about midway between Bartlctl's Island and the Eastern part of Long Island ; you will then see New- bury Head, which is high, and lies on the Western side of entrarice to Union River; then steer more Easterly until the entrance is fairly open ; then run up about N.NE., keeping about midway, until the Black Buoy off the Eastern part of Tupper's Ledge i* made ; then leave this Buoy a short distance on the Port hand, and anchor above it in about 4 fathoms water at low tide. A pilot is necessary from this anchorage to Ellsworth. From Newbury Head, Western side of entrance to Union River, to the Black Buoy off Eastern part of Tupper's Ledge, the distance is about 5^ miles, and there are no obstractions in the passage excepting those lying near the shores. Coming from the Eastward or Westward bound to Ellsworth, keep outside of all dangers until you make the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor Head, Mount Desert ; then bring it to bear NW. Yi W., and run for it on this course, leaving the Red Spindle on Bunker's Ledge well on the Starboard hand. Leave this last-named Light- house not more than % mile on the Starboard, and steer about W. by N. % N. until it bears N. by B. >^ E., when you will cross Bass Harbor Bar in about 14 feet water at Low Tide. Continue the course W. by N. ^ N. until Bass Harbor Head Light bears E. X S., and the extremity of the Western point of this harbor bears N. Yz E., then steer about NW. by N. along the West shore of Mount Desert Island, for the Southeast point of Long Tcland ; distttnce about 8 miles. As you sail up the Bay on this last course, the Spindle upon the Barges will be seen, which are l^ft about 1^ miles on the Port hand; and also about 4 miles ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 219 farther up on the Starboanl, Ilarwood Island, which lies about 1 J{ mil 8 to the Soutlicastwani of the Soutlicrn cntl of Long Island. Pass about midway between this last-named Island and the South- east end of Long Island, and follow the directions before given. Before attempting to cross Bass Harbor Bar, it is advisftble for vessels of more than 14 feet draught to wait until at least one-half Flootl. High Water, It is High Water on Bass Harbor Bar 40 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 9^ feet. Deer Isle. Upon the Western part of this Island there are several harbors, which are seldom used except by the people belonging to it ; they lie somewhat out of the track of vessels bound East or West, and much better harbors can be found both among the Fox Islands and in Eggemoggin Reach. Strangers should not, therefore, attempt to enter them without a pilot. Southeast Harbor, Deer Isle. This Harbor lies upon the Southeast part of Deer Isle ; its entrance, which is between Sheep and Laz3-gut Islands, is East Northerly about 6 miles from Mark Island Lighthouse, West entrance to Deer Island Thoroughfare, and West about 12 miles from Bass Harbor Lighthouse. Sailing Directions for Southeast Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Deer Island Thoroughfare until past the Black Spindle upon Haycock Rock, which is bare at Low Tide. After passing this last Rock and Spindle, you will see to the Eastward a Black Buoy. This is off East Mark Island Ledge. When about 300 yards from it, or that distance to the Westward of it, steer about North. As you sail m, you will see the Buoy, painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes, which lies off the Eastern part of the Boat or Channel Rock ; leave this last-named Buoy 200 yards on the Port hand, and steer more 220 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Westerly, when a Black Buoj- will be seen on the Port. This lies off the Northeast part of the Whale's Back Ledge, and must also be left on the Port hand. When past this last-named Buoy, steer about NW. by N. for the anchorage. If you wish to go into the Jrner Harbor, a pilot will be necessary. Head Harbor (Isle au Haut). This small Harbor, the entrance of which is near the SE. end of Isle Au Haut, bears NE. ^ E. from Matinicus Rock Lights, dis- tance 17 miles; from Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse, W. by N. ^ N., distance 20 miles. Sailing Directions for Head Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Matinicus Rock Lights from 2 to 3 miles to the Northw?ird, and steer about NE. by E., leaving Wooden Ball, Seal Rock, and the Ledges, well to the Northward. When the SE. Head of Isle Au Haut, which is a High Bluff, bears NE. by N., then run for it on this course until about 3 miles from it, tuen steer '.riore Northerly until this Head bears E.NE. ; then run for it, keeping a sharp lookout for the Ledge called the Roar- ing Bull. The Eastern Head of Isle Au Haut bears from this Ledge NE. % E. ; distance about lyi miles. Continue tiie course E.NE. for the Eastern Head, until about 1 mile from it; then haul in NE. ^ N., leaving Flagstaff Point, which is bold, and lies on the Northern side of the entrance, about 250 yards on the Port hand. When abreast this last point, steer about E.NE. Yi mile, leaving the next point at the entrance of the harbor about 75 yards on the Port hand. After passing this last point about 200 jards, anchor midway the hnrbor in about 12 feet water at Low- Tide. Farther up, the water is shallow. From the Eastward, after pa-^iing Mount Desert Rock Light, bring it to bear E. by S., and make good the course W. ')y N. until the Western Head of Isle Au Haut bears NW. ; then run for it on this course, keeping a sharp lookout for the Ledge called the Roaring Bull. The highest part of the Western Head bears ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 221 from this Ledge NW. by N. >^ N. ; distance 1}( miles. Con- tinue the course NW. for the Western Head, until the Eastern Head bears E.NG. ; then run in as before directed. Vessels from the Eastward or Westward, bound into this harbor, should endeavor to make the Ledge called the Roaring Bull.* It lies about 1^ miles off the South shore of the Island, about mid- way between the Eastern and Western Heads, and breaks with a little motion of the sea. After making this Ledge, you may pass it on either hand, and bring it to bear S-SW., on which bearing keep it, and run N.NE. for Flagstaff Point ; distance lj4 miles. This point is bold, and may be left about 250 yards on the Port hand, when the course into the harbor is as before given. In order to avoid the Ledges which lie off the Eastern Head, vessels with a smooth sea should not approach it nearer than 1^ miles until the Western Head bears NW. High Water. It is High Water in Head Harbor (Isle Au Haut) 58 minutes before it is at Bocton. Common tides rise about 9^ feet. Burnt Goat Harbor. This Harbor, which is capable of sheltering a large number of vessels, is one of the best on the coast of Maine. It lies on the South shore of Burnt Coat Island. Its entrance bears from Mount Desert Rock Light NW. % N., distance about 16j^ miles; from Matinicus Rock Lights, NE. by E., about 28 miles. About 5 fathoms water can be taken into this harbor. Range Lights,^ Upon Hockomock Head, Northwest side of entrance to Burnt Coat Harbor, are two Lighthouses about 100 feet apart, ranging nearly NE. ^ N. and SW. Y^ S., which show fixed white lights. Sailing Directions for Burnt Coat Harbor, in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, pass about 3 miles South of Matinicus Rock Lighthouses, and make good the course NE. by E., leaving * An Iron Spindle has been placed ujjon this Ledge. t One of the Range Lights at Burnt Coat Harbor has been discontinued. 222 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. the dangerous Ledge called the Roaring Bull (which lies about Ij^ miles South from the Southern shore of Isle Au Haut) well on the Port hand, and also Spoon Island, Black Ledge, and Heron Island well on the same hand. As soon as the Lighthouse at Burnt Coat Harbor is made, bring it to bear NE. ^ N., and run for it on this course. When about 3 miles from the Lighthouse, you will see the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Southwest part of Heron Island Ledge, which will be left a short distance on the Port hand. As you approach the Lighthouse, you will also see, about ^ mile to the Westward of it, the Black Buoy No. 3, off the Southeast part of Gooseberry Island Ledge, which is left on the Port hand ; and farther in, at the entrance of the harbor, about % mile to the Southward of th'5 Lighthouse, in nearly mid-channel, a Red Spindle, which is on Harbor Ledge. Give this Spindle a berth of about 50 yards, leaving it on the Starboard hand, and run up about J^ mile, and anchor in the Harbor. From the Eastward, bring Mount Desert Rock Light tabear SE. i^ E., on which bearing keep it, and steer NW. % W., leaving Long Island about 3 miles upon the Starboard hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Island, keep a sharp lookout for the large Red Buoy No. 2, off the Southwest part of John's Island Ledge. Long Island bears from it E. j^ S., about 2 miles. Leave this last-named Buo}' about ]^ mile on the Starboard hand, and steer NW. ^ W. until the Harbor Light bears NE. ^ N. ; then run in as before directed. Dangers to be avoided in beating in. In beating into this Harbor, care should be taken to avoid Heron Island Ledge, which is marked off its Southern part with a Black Buoy, No. 1. The Lighthouses bear from this Buoy NE. yi N. ; distance about 2 miles. Also Gooseberry Ledge, which is marked off its Southern part with a Black Buoy, No. 3. The Lighthouse bears from this Buoy E.NE. ; distance ^ mile. The LighthoMse bears from Harbor Island Ledge (which is marked with a Spindle) N. by W. ; distance about % mile. The Channel, which is between this Ledge and Lightliouse, is therefore narrow, but the Head on which the Lighthouses stand is bold, and may be safely approached within a cable's length. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 223 Sailing Directions for Night-time. From the Eastward or Westward, keep outside all the Islands »nd Ledges until the Light at Burnt Coat Harbor bears NE. ^ N., taen run for it on this course until you judge you are about 150 yards from the shore, or the Light is close aboard ; then run E. by N. about ^ mile to the anchorage. In running this last course, E. by N., keep a sharp lookout for the Spindle on Harbor Island Ledge, which lies S. by E. from the Northern Light, distance % mile, and in going It may be left 100 feet on the Starboard hand. Burnt Coat Harbor should not be attempted at Night, if there is any error in the com- pass, as a slight deviation from the course may lead to difficulty. Bass Harbor. This Harbor is situated upon the Southwest extremity of Mount Desert Island. Its entrance bears N. by W. ^ W. from Mount Desert Hock Lighthouse, distance 18 miles ; from Baker's Island Lighthouse, W. >^ N., distance 6 ^ miles. About 7 fathoms water can be carried into the outer harbor. Ba88 Harbor Head Lighthouse, Upon Bass Harbor Head, which is on East side of entrance to this Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed Red Light. At this date (1879) a Fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. Sailing Directions for Bass Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westward, outside of all the Ledges and Islands, as soon as Baker's Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear N^ W., . 143 miles. Thatcher's Island Lighthouses (Cape Ann), .... Boon Island Lighthouse, . Matinicus Rock Lighthouses, Baker's Island Lighthouse, Petit Menan Lighthouse, . Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, E. by N. % N., Northern part of Grand Menan, NE. byE. ^E., W. SW., . W. by S. ^ S. W. Yi S., . N. >4 E., . . NE. ^ N., . 133 114 34 16J^ 27 54 76 (( it t( 44 22d ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Brier's Island Lighthouse, North side of entrance to St. Mary's Dtetanoe. Bay, E. ^ S., . . . 77 miles. Cape Forchu Lighthouse, entrance to Yarmouth Harbor, . . . E.SE., ... 86 " Seal Island Lighthouse (Cape Sable), SE. ^ E., . . 98>^ '' South- West Harbor (Mount Desert). This fine harbor, which is on the Southern part of Mount Desert Island, lies Northeast 38 miles from Matinicus Rock Lighthouses ; Northwesterly 20 miles from Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse ; and 20 miles to the Westward of Petit Menan Lighthouse. Bakeir'a Island Lighthouse, Upon Baker's Island, the Southeasternmost of the group l^ing off the South shore of Mount Desert, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed Light varied by White flashes. The Lighthouse at Winter Harbor bears from Baker's Island Lighthouse NE. % E. ; distance 9 miles. Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from Baker's Island Light- house E. by N. ; distance 16j^ miles. There is no passage for vessels between Baker's Island and Little Cranberry Island. Bear Island Lighthouse, About 4 miles Northwesterly from Baker's Island Lighthouse, upon the Southwest part of Bear Island, North side of entrance to Southwest Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. This Light is also a guide to Northeast Harbor. A Fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. Remarks, Southwest Harbor is more than a mile in length in 9n E.SE. and W.NW. direction, with an average width of about J^ mile. The holding-ground is excellent, the shelter good, and about 6 fathoms water can be carried into it at Low Tide, thus affording Anchorage for the heaviest-draught vessels. There are three passages into ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 227 this harbor. First, the Western, which leads in between Great Cranberry Island and Mount Desert. The entrance to this channel is about 4 miles West from Baker's Island Lighthouse, and has a depth of about 14 feet water in it at Low Tide. Second, the one North of Baker's Island, between Sutton's and Great and Little Cranberry Islands, which has a depth of 4 fathoms water ; and lastly, the Main Ship Channel, which is about 3 miles North of Baker's Island. This last channel is between Bunker's Ledge and Beai' Island Lighthouse on the North, and Sutton's Island on the South. Western Passage. Sailing Directions to enter Southwest Harbor by the Western Passage, in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Matinicus Rock Lighthouses about 2 or 3 miles on the Port hand, and steer E.NE. If this course is made good, all the Islands and Ledges will be left well on the Port hand. As soon as Baker's Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear N.NE., and run for it on this course until the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor boars NW. (Baker's Island Lighthouse will then be distant 4 miles) ; then steer NW. by N., keeping a sharp look- out for Long and South Bunker's Ledges. The former extends off about J^ mile from the Mount Desert shore, and is marked on its outer part with a Black Buoy, No. 3.* The latter is marked with a Red Spindle. Baker's Island Lighthouse bears from it E. i^ S. ; distance 3^ miles. The Black Buoy No. 1, off Long Ledge, bears from this Spindle West; distance ^ mile. The channel is between this Spindle and Buoy. When the Buoy and Spindle are made, pass in between them, giving the latter a berth of at least 250 yards, leaving it on the Starboard, and steer about NE. by N. As you sail in, you will see about ^ mile to the Northeastward of the Spindle two Buo3'8, one Black, the other Red. The Black Buoy, No. 5, lies off the Eastern part of Flynn's Ledge, M'hich has 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide. The Red Buoy, No. 2, lies off the Southwest part of Cranberry Island Ledge, which has but 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide. The channel, which is between these two Buoys, is 275 yards wide, and has a depth of 3}4 fathoms water. Pass in between these two last- named Buoys, leaving the Black one about 50 yards on the Port, _ ♦ The outer part of Long Ledge at this date (1882) is marked with an automatic Bell Buoy. 228 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. and steer about N. by E., keeping in about mid-channel, and crossing Cranberry Island Bar in about 14 feet water at Low Tide. After passing this Bar, continue the course N. by E. for about W miles, leaving the Red Buoy off Cow Ledge on the Starboard hand. When the Southwest Harbor is open, bearing abgut W.NW. then run in about midway, leaving the Red Buoy off Greening's Ledge on the Starboard hand, and anchor near the Head of the harbor in from 3}4 to 6 fathoms water. At Night-time strangers should not attempt to enter Southwest Harbor by this channel. Coming from the Westward, through Eggemoggin Reach or Deer Island Thoroughfare, bound to Southwest Harbor by the Western channel, follow the directions before given for those passages until past Bass Harbor Bar, then bring the Lighthouse at Bass Harbor Head to bear W.NW., and steer E-SE. until the Black Buoy off Long Ledge and the Red Spindle on South Bunker's Ledge are both made ; then follow the directions before given. Sailing Directions to enter Southwest Harbor by Ship Channel, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for the Western passage until Baker's Island Lighthouse is made ; then leave it about 1 mile on the Port hand, and when it bears West steer NW. by N. ^ N., leaving the Black Buoy No. 1, off the Eastern part of Harding's Ledge (which extends off from Little Cranberry Island), on the Port hand. Continue the course NW. by N. ^ N. until Bear Island Lighthouse (East side of entrance to Northeast Harbor) bears NW. by W. ^2 W. ; then steer for it on this course. The Monument on East Bunker's Ledge, and the Red Buojs on Powden's Ledge and Long Point Ledge, will all be left well on the Starboard hand ; and Sutton's Island on the Port hand. When abreast the Northeast part of this last-named Island, or about 1 mile from Bear Island Lighthouse, haul up about W. by N., passing about midway between the Western part of Sutton's Island and the Lighthouse. Continue the course W. by N. until the last-named Lighthouse bears E.NE. ; then steer W.SW.. leaving the Southeast part of Greening's Island about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When Southwest Harbor opens, bearing about W.NW., run in and anchor as before directed. ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 229 Beating into Southwest Harbor by way of Ship Channel. At Night or Day, in beating into this Harbor, the shores are bold» and the principal dangers to be avoided are Harding's Ledge, East Bunker's Ledge, and Long Point Ledge. The first-named danger extends off about East % mile from the Southeast part of Little Cranberry Island, and is marked off its Eastern part with a Black Buoy, No. 1. Baker's Island Light bears from this Buoy about South ; distance 1 % miles. The second danger is East Bunker's Ledge, which is marked with a White square stone Beacon. Bear Island Light bears from this Beacon about W.NW. ; distance 2 miles. In beating in Ship Channel, this last-named Ledge, which is quite bold, may be approached upon its Southern side within 250 yards ; but vessels passing North of it should give the Monument a berth of at leasi Yz mile. The third and last danger is Long Point Ledge, which has 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and is maiked off its Southern part with a Red Buoy, No. 6. Bear Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. by N. J^ N., yk mile. In beating in at Night, in order to avoid this Ledge, Bear Island Light should not bear to the Westward of W.NW. Greening's Ledge, which has but little water upon it at Low Tide, lies off about % mile from Greening's Island, which is on the North side of Southwest Harbor. In order to avoid this Ledge, in going in, keep the Southern shore of the harbor best aboard. In beating in, the Southern side may be approached by vessels of 14 feet draught within 200 yards without danger. At Night or Day, coming from the Eastward or Westward, and intending to beat into Southwest Harbor, when Baker's Island Light bears S. by W., bring Bear Island Light to bear NW. by W. Yz W. ; then keep a sharp lookout to avoid the shores, and hkewise the dangers I have described, and you will work safely into Southwest Harbor. Sailing Directions for Southwest Harbor, by way of Ship Channel, at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, when Baker's Island Light bears SW., bring Bear Island Light to bear NW. by W. % W. If there is no error in the compass, this last course will take you 230 ELDRIDOB'S COAST PILOT. nearly in mid-channel. Wb Baker's Island Light is shut in behind Little Cranberry Islant., or bears S. by E. /i E., you are then past East Bunker's Ledge. Continue the course NW. by W. yi W. for the Light until you judge you are from ^ to 1 mile from it ; then haul up W. by N , passing about midway between Bear Island Light and Sutton's Island. The channel between the last-mentioned Island and Light is about J4 mile wide. When Bear Island Light bears E. by N. ^ N., steer W. by S. %^ S., keeping a sharp lookout for the Southeast point of Greening's Island, which is left on the Starboard hand. When past this Ijoint, haul up about W. by N. into the harbor, and anchor in from 3^ to 10 fathoms water. The Southern shore of Southwest Harbor is bold ; in order, therefore, to avoid Greening's Ledge at Night, keep this side best aboard. If you do not think proper to attempt to enter Southwest Harbor at Night, when Bear Island Light bears ENE., you may anchor in from 10 to 12 fathoms water and wait until daylight. This last anchorage is exposed to winds from East to Southeast. High Water, It is High Water in Southwest Harbor, Mount Desert, 28 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about 10 feet. Northeast Harbor (Mount Desert). This Harbor lies about 5 miles Northwesterly from Baker's Island Lighthouse, and about 1^ miles Northeasterly' from South- west Harbor. Upon Bear Island, Eastern side of entrance to this harbor, is a Lighthouse (before described). Memarks. This Harbor, which is narrow, is about ^ mile in length, and has good anchorage, and also good holding-ground, in from 2 to % fathoms water at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Northeast Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westw/jrd outside of all dangers, or through Eggemoggin Reach, or Djer Island Thoroughfare, follow the direc- BLDRTDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 231 tlo.is before given for the Western passage into Southwest Harbor until past Cranberry Island Bar and abreast the Northwest part of Great Cranberry Island; then steer N.NE. lyi miles, leaving the Lighthouse on Bear Island about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see, about J4 mile Northwest from it, the Red Buoy which lies off the Northwest part of Northeast Harbor Ledge (which is bare at Low Tide). Leave this Buo}- about 50 yards on the Starboard hand, an*' steer in about North, keeping midway of the harbor, and anchor about ^ mile North from the Buoy in about 3^ fathoms at Low Tide. Above thi^ or about J4 mile from the head of the harbor, the water is shoal. By Ship Channel. Entering Northeast Harbor b\' this Channel, follow the directions before given for Southwest Harbor until Bear Island Lighthouse bears El.NE., when you will see, about J^ mile to the Northwest of it, the Red Buoy off the Northwest part of Northeast Harbor Ledge. Leave this Buoy about 50 yards on the Starboard hand, and proceed as before directed. Southeast Hock off Petit Menan, This Rock, which has but 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is marked with a Buoy (painted in Red and Black Horizontal stripes) which lies about 100 feet Southwest from it. From this Buoy, Petit Menan Lighthouse bears NW. by N. }( N. about 3^ miles.- From the Eastward. Vessels from the Eastward, bound to either Northeast or South- west Harbors, may leave the Buoy on this last-mentioned Rock about yi mile on the Starboard hand, and steer W. % N. for Baker's Island Lighthouse; distance 17 miles. "When about 4 miles from it, haul in W.NW., and when the Beacon upon East Bunker's Ledge is made, bring it to bear W.NW., and run for it, leaving it % mile upon the Starboard hand, and follow the direc- tions before given. Beating into Northeast Harbor by way of Ship Channel. At Night or Day, beating into this Harbor, follow the directions before given for beating into Southwest Harbor by Ship Channel 232 ELDRI DOE'S COAST PILOT. until past Bear Island Light ; then keep the Western shore of the harbor (which is bold after the Lighthouse bears SE. by E.) hcHt aboard, taking care to avoid Northeast Horbor Ledge, which In marked otr its Northwest part with a Red IJuoy. Bear Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SE. Yi E. ; distance % mile. At Night, aller passing this Buoy, or the Light bears SE. by S., distance about Yj mile, anchor in from 6«4 to 6^ fathoms water. Sailing Directions for Northeast Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, run in according to directions before given for Southwest Harbor, by way of Ship Channel, until Bear Island Light bears North ; then, in order to avoid North- east Harbor Ledge, haul to the Northeastward around the Light, leaving it not more than 250 yards on the Starboard. When it bears SE. by S. J4 S., steer NW. by N. ^ N., and anchor nt the mouth of the harbor in from T)^ to 7 fathoms water. North- east Harbor Ledge, which is bare at Low Tide, lies NW. 500 3'ards from the Lighthouse ; the Red Buoy is placed about 80 foot W-NW. from its Western part. There is another Ledge on the Eastern side of the harbor which has 4 feet water upon it. This last Ledge bears N. by W. from Bear Island Light ; distance 750 yards. High Water, For time of High Water in Northeast Harbor, see directions for Southwest Harbor. Cranberry Island, or Hadlock's Harbor. This Harbor, which has fVom 2 to 4 fathoms water in it, lies between Great and Little Cranberry Islands. Its entrance is about E.SE. 2^ miles fVom Southwest Harbor, and 1^ miles South fVom Bear Island Lighthouse. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 233 Sailing Directions for Cranberry Island Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for South- west Harbor, by way of the Western passage, until past Cranberry Islai d Bar and the Red Buo}- off Cow Ledge; then haul to the Northeastward around the Northwest part of Great Cranberry Island, leaving it about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and steer about Eaa^ As you pass in, you will see the Red Buoy which lies ort' the Northern part of Sperlin Rock. Leave this Buoy a short distance upon the Starboard hand, and run in S.SE- about ^ mile, and anchor abreast Long Point, in about 3 fathoms water at Low Tide, which will be nearly •'i^ fathoms at High Tide. From the Eastward or Westward, bound into this Harbor, follow the directions before given for Southwest Harbor, by way of Ship Channel in daytime, until the Monument upon East Bunker's Ledge hears E.NE. ; then steer W.SW. until the harbor is fairly open ; then run in about midway, and anchor as before directed. In beating in, after passing the Red Buoy No. 2, off Sperlin Rock, use the lead, and do not approach either shore at Low Tide in less than 3 fathoms water. It is not advisable for vessels of more than 14 feet draught to attempt to enter this harbor, as there are several shoal spots of 15 feet in it, some of which lie nearly mid- way the entrance. Upon the Western side of Cranberry Island Harbor is a shallow Cove called The Pool. Only 2 feet water can be taken into it aj Low Tide, and vessois tL * enter it at High Water must lie aground when the Tide falls. High Watitr, For time of High Water in Cranberry Island Harbor, see direc- tions for South- West Harbor. Somes, or Scsnesville, Harbor. This Harbor is situated near the Head of Somes Sound, and bears N. % E. about 5% miles from South- West Harbor. About 3 fathoms water can be carried at Low Tide up the Sound abreast the village, but in order to reach it vessels must wait until High Water. In sailing through this Sound from Bear Island Lighthouse there are but few obstructions to Navigation, but it is advisable for 234 ELCSJDGE'-; COAST PILOT. strangers to take a pilot either at North-East or South-West Har- bors, as the sudden gusts and heavy flaws of wind from the Moun- tain are apt to capsize or carry a vessel ashore. Frenchman's Bay. The entrance to this Bay, which is between Mount Desert Island on the West, and Schoodick Point (tht Mainland) on the East, is about 6 miles wide, and lies about 20 miles Northeasterly from Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse, 5 miles East-Northerly from Baker's island Lighthouse, and about 12 miles to the Westward of Petit Mauan Lighthouse. ' Hemarks, Frenchman's Bay is about 11 miles iii length, 6 miles in breadth at its entrance, and about 7 miles at its widest part, and has a general course of nearly A'orth and Souch. Within it is West Goldsboro' Harbgr, Sullivan and Wei^t Sullivan Harbors, Bar Har- bor, Hull's Cove, and Winter Harbor, the latter being one of the best on the Coast. There are three large shallow streams which empty into its Northern part, called Jordan's River, Skillings River, and Sullivan River, all of which are of some Commercial importance. Thtre are also several Islands in this Bay, most of which have bold (Chores, with deep water surrounding them. Egg Rock Lighthouse. Upon a small bare rocky Islet, called Egg Rock, which is nearly in the middle of Frenchman's Bay, is a Lighthouse, which at this date (1883) shows a fixed Red Light; at this time a Bell is placed near this Lighthouse, which is struck in thick weather. Shoal water extends off both Northeasterlj, and Southwesterly from this Light- house, and vessels passing to the Westward of it, bound up the Bay, should leave it at least ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and vessels passing to ihe Eastward of it not less than yi mile on the Fort hand. ELDKiDGE'S COAST PILOT. 235 Bearings and Distances tvom Egg Book Lighthouse. Distance. Baker's Island Lighthouse, .... SW. }4 B., 1% miles. Whistling Buoy off Schoodic Point, . SE. ^ E., . 5 " Southern end of Turtle Island West side of entrance to Winter Harbor, . . E.SE., . . 1^ " Otter Creek Poirt, Southeast extremity Mount Desert Island, SW. 5^W.,3>^ " Southern end of Iron-Bound Island, . N. byE., • 1^ " Eastern end of Round Porcupine Island, NW.byN.^N., 254 " Bar Harbor. This Harbor, which is formed by the Northeastern shore of Mount Desert and Harbor, and Porcupine Islands, is on the Western side of Frenchman's Bay, and lies about 9^ miles Northeasterly from Baker's Island Light, and about 3^ miles Northwesterly from Egg Rock LighthouEw. Remarks, In approaching and enterirg this Harbor there are but few dan- gers to be avoided. With Westerly and Northerly winds there is good anchorage off the Wharf in from 4 to 5 fathoms water, with good holding-ground ; but the Harbor is somewhat exposed to gales from East to S. by E. by way of East. This place has re- cently become famous f,8 a watering-place, but it is said to be rarely used by coa^-ters as a harbor of refuge. Sailing Directionf for Bar Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, give Baker's Island Lighthouse a berth of about a mile, leaving it on the Port hand ; when it bears.west, steer about N.NE., leaving the shore of Mount Desert Island well on the Port hand. As you sail in you will see a remarkable, bare, perpen- dicular Bluff, a part of which, at a distance, appears like a schooner with her three lower sails set; this is called Schooner Head. 236 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. When abreast this Head there will be seen to the Northward, king near the shore, a small Island which is bold, and farther in the Porcupine Islands. The first, which lies nijout J^ mile from the Western shore, is high, and has a peculiar white spot on its South side ; this is called Round Porcupine. As you approach this last- 'uentioned Island, 3'ou will see, a short distance to the Westward of it, a dry Ledge ; pass in about midway between this Ledge and the Western shore, taking care not to approach the latter nearer than 300 yards. When the end of the Long W harf bears west then run for it until the water shoals to 5 fathoms at Low Tide, then anchor. If you are bound to Bar Harbor, and wish to pass to the North- ward, or inside- the Cranberry Islands, follow the directions before given for entering the Southwest Harbor b}' the Western passage until past Cranberry Island Bar and the Red Buoy off Cow Ledge. When abreast the latter, steer N. by "E. % E., until Bear Island Lighthouse bears NE., then run for it, passing between Green- ing's and Sutton's Islands. Continue the course for the Lighthouse until about }( mile from it, then steer E. % S., leaving the Red Buoys off Long Point and Bowden's Ledges well on the Port hand, and the Monument on East Bunker's Ledge and the Black Buov off the Northeast part of Lewis Rock both on the Starboard hand ; the latter lies about 400 yards to the Northward of the Monument. After passing the Monument and Buoy it is only necessary to give Mount Desert Island a good berth and follow the directions before given. From the Eastward, give the Lighthouse upon Egg Rock a berth of about a mile, leaving it on the Starboard hand, and steer N. % W. until you make the Round Porcupine Island (before described). Leave this Island about 200 yards on the Port hand and haul in about W.NW., and anchor in about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide, with the end of the Long Wharf bearing West. In beating into this Harbor between the Porcupine Islands there are no dangers, and vessels may stand to the Northwestward aOer they have passed these Islands until the end of the Wharf bears SW. by W., it is then necessary to tack ship, as there is a Shoal Bar which extends from the largest Island to the Western shore. ELDUIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 237 High Water, It is High Water in Bar Harbor 32 minutes before it is at Bos- ton. Common Tides rise about lOj^ feet. Hull's Cove. Tills small, shallow Cove, which is the first to the Northwestward of Bar Harbor, lies on the Western side of Frenchman's Bay, and til)OUt 6 miles above Egg Rock Lighthouse. Remarks, With Westerly winds there is good anchorage in Hull's Cove for Hmall or light draught vessels, but it is somewhat exposed to East- erly winds. Sailing Directions for HuU^s Cove in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Small or light draught vessels, from the Eastward or Westward, limy pass about midway between Egg Rock Lighthouse and Mount DoHiii't Island, and steer about North, leaving the Round Porcupine ImIiuuI (before described) about ^ mile on the Port hand, and steer N. l)y W. ^ W., passing between Slieep and Burnt Islands, when piiHt these Islands keep a sharp lookout for the Black Buoy, which liuH on tlio North'^astern side of Bald Rock Ledges (some of whicli fti'o above water) - When this Buoy is made leave it a short distance oil tlio Port hand, and run in about West, and anchor off the mouth of tliti Cove in from 3 to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Salisbury Oove. This small Cove, some part of which is dry at Low Tide, is on tlio Northern side of Mount Desert Island, about 7^ miles above Kfifg Uock Lighthouse ; the Village of Eden is built on the shore of tills Covo. 238 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Salisbury Cove. From the Eastward or Westward follow the directions before given for Hull's Cove, until past the Black Buoy off Bald lioclc Ledges, then steer NW. j^ N., leaving a Rock above water, and the Black Buoy off Sunken Ledge well on the Port hand, when past this Buoy follow the Shore to the Westward, keeping about 800 yards from it, and anchor off the Cove in firom 3 to 5 fathoms water. Jordan's River. The entrance to this Shallow River, which is nearly opposite Mount Desert Narrows, lies at the extreme Northwestern part of Frenchman's Bay, about 11>^ miles Northwesterly from Egg Rock Lighthouse. Remarks, Jordan's River is a Shallow Stream emptying into the North- western part of Frenchman's Bay ; with a good Pilot, at Low Tide, about 8 feet water can be taken up nearly abreast the village of Lamoine, which is on the Eastern side, about 2 miles above the entrance, and a short distance above this it is dry at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Jordan's Biver in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the directions before given for Salisbury Cove, until abreast the anchorage ; you will then see about % mile to the Northward, the Red Buoys off Googin's Ledge ; leave the Southwestern Buoy off this danger a short distaiu'o on tie Starboard hand, and run up about 2^ miles, keepl»>y the Narrows, and anchor off the mouth of the River, in from 3 to ^. fathoms water at Low Tide ; a pilot is necessary at this anchorage. High Water* It is High Water at the mouth of Jordan's River 30 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise 10>'^ feet. BLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 239 Skilling's River. The entrance to this River, which is at the head of Frenchman's Bay, is between Crabtree Point on the East, and Meadow Point on the West, and is about 1^ miles wide, and lies about 8 miles North- westerly from Egg Rock Lighthoue'3. Memarks, The entrance to Skilling's River, which is between Crabtree and Meadow Points, is about 1^ miles wide, but this width rapidly diminishes until about 2 miles above its mouth, where it is only about 350 yards wide ; above this it widens into a sort of Bay, of irregular shape, about "- % miles wide. Deep water can be carried up as far as the Narrows, but at this time there are no Buoys above this place ; it is, therefore, not prudent to go above the Narrows without a pilot. Sailing Directions for Skilling's River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Fron the Eastward or Westward, pass about midway between the Lighthouse upon Egg Rock and Mount Desert Island, and steer North, leaving the Round Porcupine Island (before described) about %, mile on the Port hand, and steer N. by W. Yz W., pass- ing about midway between Sheep and Burnt Islands ; when past these Islands continue the course N. by W. J^ W. about 1^^ miles, to the Black Buoy off the Northeast part of Bald Rock Ledges ; leave this Buoy a short distance on the Port hand, and make good the course N. by W. J^ W. about 3 miles, which will take you to the mouth of the River ; you may then run up, keeping the Eastern side, which is bold and free from dangers (best aboard), and anchor below the Narrows. Above this a pilot is necessary. Sullivan Harbor, or River. The entrance to this Harbor, which is on the Northern side of Frenchman's Bay, is between Bean's Point on the East and Crab- tree Point on the West, and lies about 7^ miles to the Northward of Egg Rock Lighthouse. 240 ELDIilDGE'S COAST PILOT. Memarka. The course of this Harb'^r, or River, is N.NE., about 3 miles to Sullivan, which is on the Eastern side, then NW. by N. nearly 3 miles through the Narrows, thence the distance is about 3 miles Northeasterly through Taunton Bay to Franklin. There is suffi- cient depth of water for the heaviest draught vessels from the entrance to Sullivan; above this it is not safe to go without a pilot, as there are dangerous Rapids known as the Falls. Sailing Directions for Sullivan Harbor, or River, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, pass about midway between the Lighthouse upon Egg Rock, and Mount Desert Island, and steer North, leaving the Round Porcupine Island (before described) about i^ mile on the Port hand, and steer N. by W. >^ W., passing about midway between Sheep, and Burnt Islands. When past these Islands continue the course N. by W. % W. about 1^ miles to the Black Buoy off the Northeast part of Bald Rock Ledges, leave this Buoy a short distance on the Port hand, and steer N. b}' E. about 21^ miles, which will take you to the entrance ; )'0U will then see nearly in the middle. Bean's Island, which is low and rocky, and appears white with scattering trees here and there on its summit ; a little more than % mile to the Westward of this Island, there will also be seen a Black Buoy, which lies off the Southeastern part of Eaton's Ledge ; pass about midway between the last-named Island and Buoy, and steer about N. by W. about J^ mile ; you will then see to the Northeastward, two Spindles, one Black the other Red ; when the former bears NE. by N. then run up, passing about mid- way between them ; when past these Spindles run up about NE. J4 N., carrying from 6 to 10 fathoms water at Low Tide, and anchor off the Village in from 4 to 6 fathoms water ; if bound farther up, a pilot is necessary. High Water, It is High Water at the entrance to Sullivan Harbor 30 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about lOyi feet. • She high, ai ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 241 West Gooldsborough Harbor. This small, shallow Harbor, which is on the Eastern side of Frenchman's Bay, lies Northeasterly about 7 miles from Egg Rock Lighthouse. JEtetnarks, West Gouldsborough Harbor is a Cove of irregular shape, about Y^ mile wide at its mouth. Hog Island, which is nearly ]^ mile in length, lies directly across the entrance, making two narrow pas- sages. The principal Channel leading into this Harbor is to the Southward of this Island, and has from 5 to 9 feet water in it at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for West Gouldsborough Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward pass about midway between the Lighthouse upon Egg Rock and Mount Desert Island, and steer North, leaving the Round Porcupine Island (before described) about i^ mile on the Port hand, and steer N. by W. yi W. passing, about midway between Sheep and Burnt Islands. When past these Islands, bring the middle of Sheep Island * to bear SW. % W., and make good the course NE. % E. about 2% miles, keeping a sharp lookout for the Red and Black Buoys otf Stave and Calf Islands. As soon as these Buoys are made, bring the Southern- most, or Red Buoy, to bear NE. J^ E., and run for it on this course, leaving two small Islets called Little Calf and the Thrumb- cap, well on the Port, and Stave Island on the Starboard hand ; haul round the Red Buoy, leaving it close to on the Starboard hand, carrying not less than 11 feet water at Low Tide, and steer about E.NE. about yd mile, leaving the Black Buoy off the Southeastern part of Half Tide Ledge a short distance on the Port hand, and anchor about ^ mile E.NE- from it, near the entrance to the Harbor, in from 5 to 7 fathoms, and wait for high water and a pilot. * Sheep Island, which is nearly round, is about M mile in diameter, is quite high, and lies NE. by E. about % mile from the Wharves at Bar Harbor. 2^12 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Hlyh Water, It is High Water at the entrance of West Gouldsborough Har- bor about 15 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 10J4 feet. Bass Co^e, or East Sullivan Harbor. Tf: entrance to this Cove, or Harbor, which is between Ash ilanJ on the West and the mainland on the East, lies about 2 miles Nc.' westerly from West Gouldsborough Harbor. Retnavks, This Harbor, which is irregular in shape, is nearly 2% miles long. The village of East Sullivan occupies its Eastern shore. From 3 to 7 fathoms water c^an be taken into it at Low Tide, where vessels may lie secure from all winds. In crossing the Bar between Stave and Calf Islands, bound to Bass Cove, there are but 11 feet water at Low Tide, but there is deep water in the narrow passage leading in between the Northern End of Calf and Preble's Island. Sailing Directions for Bass Cove, or East Sullivan Harbor, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels bound to Bass Cove, or East Sullivan Harbor, may fol- low the directions before given for West Gouldsborough Harbor un- til past the Black Buoy otf the Southeast end of Half Tide Ledge; when past this Buoy (which is left on the port hand), steer about N. by W., leaving the Black Buoy off the Eastern side of Sunken Ledge, about 100 yards on the Port hand, and run up about NW. by N., and anchor in the Cove in about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide, secure from all winds. Stave Island Harbor. The entrance to this excellent Harbor, which is between Jordan's Island on the^ South and Stave Island on the North, is about ^ ELDRIDGE'b COAST PILOT. 243 mile wide, and lies Northeasterly about 4 miles from Egg Rock Lighthouse, and East-Northerly about 3^ miles from the Wharves at Bar Harbor. Retnark8. This excellent Harbor, which is both commodious und easy of access for strangers, will admit at Low Tide vessels of the heaviest draught ; in entering, the shores are bold and there are no dangers ; it is therefore only necessary to keep off the shores ; the holding ground is superior to any Harbor on the coast of the United States. Sailing Directions for Stave Island Harbor in Day- tin:iO, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, pa; about midway between Egg Rock Lighthouse and Mount Desert Is id, and steer North leaving Round Porcupine Island (which ifisTI^;^7. hv N. i, miles from Egg Rock Lighthouse) about y^ When the centre of this Island bears Wf t, steer NE. by E., leav- ing Long Porcupine Island on the P^ rt hand. As you sail in you will see on the Starboard, Jordan's ; .and. and close to its North- western end, at the Southern side of the entrance to the Harbor, a small low Islet ; this is called Yellow Island ; leave this Islet a short distance on the Starboard hand, and run up and anchor in the Southern part of the Harbor, in from 5 to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide, where you may lie secure from all winds. In the Northern part of this Harbor the water is shallow. High Water, It is High Water in Stave Island Harbor 33 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 10^ feet. 1 iesNW. byN. >^ N. 2^ 1/ mile on the Port hand. Schoodic Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Spruce Point on the Northeast, and Schoodic Point on the Southwest, lies West- Northerly, about iy2 miles from Petit Menan Lighthouse, and 1^ miles Noiiibeasterly from Schoodic Point. 244 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Remarks, There is good anchorage in Sclioodic Harbor, with winds from SW. to E.NE. by way of North, but it is exposed to Southerly, Southeasterly, and ?]asterly winds. In entering by the passage to the Northeastward of Schoodic Island, there are several dangers which at this date (18H3) are not buoyed ; but the channel between Schoodic Island and Schoodic Point, which is about J^ mile wide, is free from dangers, and may with favorable winds be safely entered in daytime ; about 5 fathoms water can be taken into this Harbor at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Schoodic Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bring Baker's Island Lighthouse to bear W. by S. y2 S., and make good the course E. by N. >^ N. about 8 miles, keeping a sharp lookout for the Whistling Buoy, which lies off to the Southward of Schoodic Island. When this Buoy is made, leave it about % mile on the Starboard hand, and steer about N.NE., passing about midway between the last-named Island and Schoodic Point. When past Schoodic Island, in order to avoid a Ledge which lies to the Northward of this Island, gradually haul to the Northward, keeping not more than 250 yards from the Western shore. As you sail in you will see an Islet, which may bo left a short distance on either hand, and anchor not more than 300 yards above it in from 5 to 6 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, leave the Whistling Buoy off Schoodic Island about ^2 mile on the Starboard hand, and proceed as before directed. Whistling Buoy, At this date (1884) a Whistling Buoy has been placed in about 17 fathoms water, Yi mile to the Southward of Schoodic Island. Bearings and Diatanoes from Whistling Buoy off Sohoodio Island. Distance. Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse, . SW. by S. % S. 21^^ miles. Baker's Island Lighthouse, . . . W. by S. ^4 S. 8>4 " Egg Rock Lighthouse, .... NW. ^ W. 5 " ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 245 Red Buoy off Old Woman Ledge, East Side of Entrance to Prospect Harbor, .... NE. >^ N. Sj^ miles. Buoy off Moulton's Ledge, . . . E. by N. >^ N. 5 '' Petit Menan Liglithouse, . . . E.J^N. 7^ " Buoy off Southeast Rock, . . . E. by S. J^ S. 9yi "■ Winter (or Mosquito) Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor bears about NE. l4 E. distance 9 miles from Baker's Island Lighthouse ; and SE. by E. J^ E., 2}^ miles from Egg Rock Lighthouse. Mark Island Lighthouse, Upon the South point of Mark Island, West side of entrance to this harbor, is a Lighthouse, which shows a fixed White Light. Sailing Directions for Winter Harbor in Da3rtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, after passing Baker's Island, bring the Lighthouse to bear SW. Y^ S., and steer NE. J^ N. for Egg Rook Lighthouse; distance 7^ miles. As soon as this Lighthouse is made, keep it on the Port bow, and leave it about ]/i mile on the Port hand. When it bears North, steer E. by S., leaving the Southern part of Turtle Island, which is bold, about % mile on the Port. After passing this point. Winter Harbor Sound will open, and you will see Mark Island Lighthouse, which in enter- ing the Sound is left on the Port hand. Continue the course E. by S- until this Lighthouse bears N. by E. ; then run in about mid- way between it and the Eastern shore. When abreast the Light' house, steer N. by E. % E. As 3'ou sail in you will see, yi mile to the Northward of it, a Black Spindle with Cage on top, which is oq Grindstone Ledge ; pass about midwaj' between this Spindle and the Eastern shore, and continue the course N. by E. J^ E. about Y^ mile, when you will see Winter Harbor Point, which is left on the Port hand. On the Starboard will be seen the Red Buoy off the Northwest part of Abijah's Ledge ; leave this Buoy about 100 yards on the Starboard, and when it bears SE. ]^ S-t haul up 246 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. NW. >4 N. Into the Imrbor, leaving the Red Buoy and Spindle on CiuptiU's Ledge on tlio Starboard hand. When about 100 yards past this last-named Buoy, anchor in about 2«4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Farther up the water is shoal. Petit Menun Lighthouse bears from the Buoy painted in Red and lilnck Horizontal stripes, off the Southern part of Southeast Uock, NW. by N. ^ N. ; distance about 8;^ miles. Vessels, therefore, coming from the Eastward, may leave this Buoy about % mile on the Starboard hand, and steer W. by N. % N. 12 miles, leaving the Whistling Buoy off Schoodic Point and Island well on tlie Starboard hand. When the Lighthouse on Mark Island bears N. K' E., run for it on this course, leaving it ou the Port hand, and follow the directions before given. Beating into Winter Harbor. In beating into this Harbor the shores arc bold, and may be approached within 200 yards without danger. The principal ob- structions are Grindstone, Abijah's, and Guptill's Ledges. The first-named (Grindstone Ledge), which lies upon the Western side of the Channel, is marked with a Black Spindle which bears from Mark Island Lighthouse N. by E. ^ E., distance ^ mile; the second (Abijah's Ledge), which lies on the East side of the Clian- nel, at the entrance of the harbo., is marked on its Northwestern side with a Red Buoy No. 2, which bears from Mark Island Light- house NE. by N. % N., distance \yi miles; and lastly, Guptill's Ledge, which lies on the Northern side of the harbor, and is marked off its South part with a Red Buoy No. 4, which bears NW. by N. ^ mile from the Red Buoy off Abijah's Ledge. In beating in at night or day, bring the Light to bear from N.NE. to N. At night, after passing it, in order to avoid Grindstone Ledge, keep the Eastern shore best aboard until j'ou judge you are past it ; then keep the Western shore best aboard, and anchor in Sand Cove in from 5 to 8 fathoms water. This Cove is on the Western side of Winter Harbor Sound, about 1^ miles above the Light. ELDRIDQE'8 COAST PILOT. 247 Sand Oove Harbor. Strangers should not attempt to enter Winter Harbor at night, but ma}' by the following directions run safely into thiw Cove. This fine harbor, which lies on the Western side of Winter Harbor Sound, \H a large commodious Cove, easy of access to the heaviest-draught vessels. The holding-ground is good, the depth of water about 6j4 fathoms, and there are no dangers in it. After passing the Light, the only danger to be avoided is Grindstone Ledge, which lies }i mile from the Southeast point of Grindstone Island, and is marked with a Black S[)in(lle with a large Cage on top. This vSpindle bears N. by E. J4 E. from the Lighthouse ; distance J^ mile. Sailing Direotions for Sand Cove Harbor, in Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Eastward or Wcst^v^ rd, bring Winter Harbor Light to bear from N.NE. to N. by E-, and run for it. As you approach the Light, haul gradually to the Eastward, leaving it about 300 yards on the Port hand. When abreast it, steer N. by E. }4 E-t and if the night is very dark, use the Lead, and do not go into less than 10 fathoms water until past the Spindle on Grindstone Ledge. When you judge you are about a mile past the Light, haul up N. by W., run y^ mile, and anchor in the Cove in from 5}4 to 7 fathoms water. After passing Grindstone Ledge there are no obstructions, and the shores may be approached within 100 yards without danger. , High Water. It is High Water in Winter Harbor 37 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 10^ feet. Mosquito Harbor, This small shallow Cove, which is only fit for small vessels to enter, lies on the Eastern shore of Winter Harbor Sound. Its en- trance bears NE. yi N. from Winter Harbor Lighthouse ; die about 1 mile. nee 248 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Direction!? for Mosquito Harbor in Daytinic. Coming from the Eastward or "Westward, follow the directions, before given for Winter Harbor in daytime until abreast the Light- house ; then steer NE. by N. >4 N. a little more than a mile, when the Harbor will be fairly open, bearing S-SE. ; then run in about midway, and anchor when the water shoals to 2 fathoms at Low Tide, T.hich will be about 3^ fathoms at High Tide. High Water, It is High Water in Mosquito Harbor -^ t>oui. ILe same time it is at Winter Harbor. Prospect Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor is East Northerly about 12 miles from Baker's Island Lighthouse, and West Northerly about 6 miles from Petit Menan Lighthouse. Prospect Harbor Lighthouse,. Upon Prospect Point, East side of entrance to this Harbor, is a Lighthouse whioh shows a Flashing Red and White Light. This Lighthouse bears from Baker's Island Lighthouse NE. b}' E., tlis- tance 13 miles ; from Petit Menan LigUthouse, about NW. by W.. distance G;'4 miles. Sailing Directions for Prospect Harbor in Day- tme, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, after passing Baker's Island, bring the Lighthouse to bear W. by S., on which bearing keep it, and steer E. hy N. y miles, leaving the Whistling Buoy on the port hand. Con- tinue thf» 'jourse E. by N. until the Lighthouse at Prospect Harbor bears N. oy E ; then run for it on this course, leaving the Black Buo\ off the I^astern part of Harbor Ledge on t'.ie Port, and the Red Buo}' off the Western part of the Old Woma»: L.edge on the Starboard hand. When past the last-named Buoy, steer more Jiasterly until the Lighthouse bea] s North, then run for it ou this course until about ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 249 i^ mile from it ; tlien steer NW. by W. ^ W., leaving the Black Spindle, w'lh wheel and pendant on top, on the Port hand. When the Lighthouse bears E. by N., anchor in the Inner Harbor in from 3 to 5 fathoms water. Above this, the water is shoal. Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from the Buoy off Southeast Rock NW. by N. ^ N. ; distance 3}( miles. Vessels from the Eastward may leave this Buoy }i mile on the Starboard hand and steer NW. by W. J4 W. until Prospect Harbor Lighthouse (which is on the keeper's dwelling) bears N. by E. ; then run in as before directed. There is a Ledge which makes off to the Southwestward about 250 yards from the Lighthouse Point, and at this date (1879) is not Buoyed. Vessels in running in North for the Lighthouse should not, therefore, approach it nearer than 400 yards. High Water, It is High Water in Pro&pect Harbor 32 minutes before it is at Boston. Common tides rise about lOjij! feet. Petit Menan Lighthouse. Upon the Southern part of a small Rocky Islet called Petit Menan a lofty Tower has been erected, which shows a Fixed Light varied by Flashes. JS'og Signal, Near this Lighthouse is a Steam Whistle, which at this date (1879) gives two blasts of 5 seconds each per minute, with inter- vals between the blasts of 8 seconds and 42 seconds. Bearings and Distances of Lighthouses tsova. Petit Menan Lighthouse. Mt. Desert Rock Lighthouse, . . Baker's Island Lighthouse, . . Nash's Island Lighthouse, . . . Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, Bryer's Island Lighthouse, en- trance to St. Mary's Bay, . . SW. }i S., W. by S. NE. by E., E. }^ S>t E^SE., • Distance. 27 miles. 34 (( (( ii ■n i 64 4 miles. Jordan's Delight Ledge. This Ledge, which extends off -.bout S. by E. over a mile from the Island called Jordan's Delif^ht, is marked upon its Southern part with a Red Buoy No. 2. Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from this BuoySW. }i Sm distance 3 miles; Nash's Island Lighthouse, E. by N. >4 N., distance 5 miles. Vessels running from Petit Menan ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. 251 to Naih'ii Island should not go to the Northward of this Buoy, as thoro arc many dangerous Rocks lying between it and the Island called Jordan's Delight. Jackson's Ledge, This dangerous Ledge, which at this date (1879) is not Buoyed, has but 9 feet water upon it at very Low Tides. Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from it W. M S- ' distance about 4 miles. Petit Mdnan Channel. In Daytime, vessels from the Westward, especially with strong Northerly winds, may bring Petit Menan Lighthouse to bear E. by N., and run for it on this course. As they approach this Lighthouse it is necessary to keep a sharp lookout for the large Ued Buoy off Petit Menan Reef. The Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. 54 E. ; distance about % mile. Leave this Buoy about % mile on the Port, and in order to clear Jackson's Ledge, iniiko good the course E.SE. From the Eastward, as soon as Petit Menan Lighthouse is made, in order to clear Jackson's Ledge, bring it to bear W.NW., and run for it on this course, leaving the lied Buoy off Petit Menan Reef on the Starboard hand. After paHsing this, make good the course W. by S. The channel btitwoen Petit Menan Reef and Simm's Rock is about 1 }^ miles In width, and has a depth of not less than 12 fathoms water at Low Tide. Strangers should not attempt this channel at Night, and in paHMJng Petit Menan Light at that time should keep at least 5 miles to the Southward of it. Gouldsborough Bay and Harbor. A little more than 2 miles to the Eastward of Prospect Point Lighthouse, and NW. >^ N. about 4 miles from Petit Menan Lighthouse, is the entrance to Gouldsborough Bay, This Bay, which makes in nearly North and South, has an average width of about 1 % miles to the Narrows, which is 5 miles above its mouth ; bctwciui the Narrows and Steuben the water is shoal. At the ontranco of this Bay there are several small Islands ; the channel, which is about ]^ mile wide, leads in to the Westward of the Eastern- J: 252 ELDRIDGE'S COAST t^ILOI. (.1*. most Island. This Island lies just to the Southwestward of Dyer's Point, and is bare except in the middle, where there is, at tliis time, a small grove of bushes. The next Island to the Westward of this last named has no trees upon it, and is covered with moss and grass. Sailing Directions for Gouldsborough Bay and Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, after passing Schoodic Point and Island, bring Petit Menan Lighthouse to bear E. J4 N., and run for it on tins course until you make the Buoy painted in Rod and Black Horizontal stripes, off' the Southwest part of Moulton's Ledji;o. Petit Monan Lighthouse bears from this Buoy E. by S. ^ S. ; dis- tance about 3 miles. Leave the Biio}' about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and steer N.NE- until the passage hotweon the two East- ern Islands at the entrance of Gouldsborongli Uay is fairly open, bearing N. % W. ; then run in midway between them. Wiion past these Islands, steer N.NW. about a mile, when j'ou will be abreast of Ward's Cove, which is on th<' Western side of tiie Bay. From this Cove steer about North 3^4 mil- 's, and anchor between Garden and Roger's Points, at the mouth oi' tlie Narrows, in from 3 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide, with good holding-ground. If 3'ou wish to go above the Narrows, a pilot will be necessary. From the Eastswau^ bring Petit Menan Lighthouse to bear W.NW., and mn tor it, leaving Jackson's Ledge well on tiie Starboard hand. As you approach Petit Menan Lighthouse, keep a sharp lookout for the large Red Bony off" Petit Menan Rcof. Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. ^ E. ; distance a little more than % mile. Leave this last-mentioned Buoy about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and steer W.NW. until the last- named Lighthouse bears NE- by E. j4 E. about 1 mile ; then nm NW. by N. until you make the passage between the two Eastern islands at the mouth of Gouldsborough Bay. When this passage is fairly open, bearinf? N. J^ W., then run in, and proceed as before directed. High Water, it is High Water in Gouldsborough Bay about the same time that it is at Prospect Harbor. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 253 Dyer's Bay. The aext opening, which is about 1 mile to the Eabtwaid ol' Gouldsborough Bay, is the entrance to Dyer's Bay. Petit Menan Point, which lies on the East side of this entrance, is low, and there extends off from it at Low Tide a long Ledge. This last-named Point bears from Petit Menan Lighthouse NW. by N. ^ N. ; distance about 2}( miles. On the West side of entrance is Dyer's Point, which bears from Petit Menan Point NW. 1^ miles. Sev- eral Rocks and Ledges lie off to the southward of this last-named point, rendering it dangerous of approach. From Petit Menan Point to the Head of the Bay the distance is about 6 miles. In entering this Bay there is a good channel which leads in close to the Dyer's Bay Ledges, which are on the West side ; and there is also, about 3^ miles above this entrance, excellent anchorage in from 4 to 5 fathoms water. About 3^ fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken into this Bay. Sailing Directions for Dyer's Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, after passing Schoodic Point and Island, bring Petit Menan Lighthouse to bear E. by N., and run for it on this course until you make the Buoy with Red and Black Hoi-izon- tal stripes off the Sctuthwest part of Moulton's L. rlge. Petit ""Tenan Lighthouse bears from this Buo}' E. by S- X S. ; dis'tance . mut 3 miles. Leave the Buo^' about ^ mile on the Port hand, art! steer about NE. by N. When the entrance to Dyer's Bay is faii v open, run in, leaving the dry Rock called the Castle (which is (.n tlie Western side of the Chn.nnel) close to on the Port hand ; and \a order to avoid a Ledge which extends off a lOUt ^ mile frou; .-. Sand Bhiff on the Eastern shore, steer about N. >3 E. ^ mile for Stan • ley's Point, which is a White Rocky Head on the Western shore. When abreast this last-named point, keep in the middle of the Bay, course about N. by E J^ E. As jou sail in, you will see ahead the two Sheep Islands ; run for the Western point of the Northern- most Island, which is Yellow. After passing these last-named Islands, which are on the Starboard hand, anchor any-'here to the Nortliward of them in from 4 to 5 fathoms at Law Tide. Small vessels may run further up, and anchor in Dyer's Cove. From the Eastward, in order to clenr Jackson's Ledge, bring Petit Menan Light to bear W.NW., and run for it on this course, 254 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. keeping a sharp lookout for the large Red Buoy off Petit Menan Reef. The Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. ^ E. ; distance }^ mile. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and haul gradually to the Northwestward, leaving the Lighthouse about % mile to the Eastward, and steer about N.NW. for Dyer's Point, which is the Western entrance to the Bay. Leave -the Ledges off this point close to on the Port hand, and follow the directions be- fore given. In running this last course, N.NW., for Dyer's Point, you will leave the Rock called the Old Bull about 300 yards on the Starboard hand. This Rock 'lies about 2 miles to the Northwest- ward of Petit Menan Lighthouse, is bare at Low Tide, and breaks with a little motion of the sea. Pond Island Lighthouse. Upon the Southeastern part of Pond Island is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light, and is intended to guide vessels into Narraguagus and Pigeon Hill Bays. The Lantern is upon the Keeper's dwelling. Pond Island Lighthouse bears from Petit Menan Lighthouse NE. by N. % N., distance b]^ miles; from Nash's Island Lighthouse W. ^ N., distance about 4 miles. Fog Signal, A Bell, struck by hand, is placed near this Lighthouse. Pigeon-Hill Bay, or Bowbear Harbor. The entrance to this Bay bears about N. ]/2 E. from Petit Menan Lighthouse ; distance about 3 miles. Th»s is a good harbor of refuge for small vessels. Sailing Directions for Figeon-Hill Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, after passing Schoodic Point, bring Pcfii Menan Lighthouse to bear E- by N., and run for it on tins jouise, keeping a sharj) lookout for tiio lariio Hcd Buoy off IVtit Menan Reef. Petit Menan Lil J \( miles in ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 259 length, and more than % mile in breadth ; 3 fathoms water can b« found at the anchorage, with excellent holding-ground. It ig exposed to Southerly or Southwest winds. Sailing Directions for Cape Split Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, allcr passing Schoodic Point, bring Petit Menan Lighthouse to bear NE. by E., and run for it on this course, keeping a sharp lookout for the large Red Buoy olf Petit Menan Reef. Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. ^ E. >^ mile. When the Buoy is made, leave it close to on the Port hand, and gradually haul to the Northward until Petit Menan Lighthouse bears SW. % W., on which bearing keep it, and st' ov NE. % E. for Nash's Island Lighthouse, keeping a sharp lookout for the Red Buoy which lies off the Southern part of Jordan's Delight Ledge.* Petit Menan Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SW. 'i/i S. about 3 miles. When this last Buoy is made, leave it well on the Port hand, and run for Nash's Island Lighthouse, keeping it a little on the Port bow. As you approach it, you will see Cone Island, which is the first to the Eastward of the Light- house ; and also Flat Island, which bears from Nash's Island Light- house E.SE., distance 1^ miles. Pass in midway between these two last-named Islands, and steer N. ^ E., leaving a remarkable- looking Islet, called Ladle Island, about Yi mile on the Port hand. When past this last-named Island, the Harbor will be open ; then run in, keeping the Western shore best aboard, and anchor where you please, in about 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. With strong Southerly or Southwest winds, it is advisable to anchor in Tabbott's Cove, which is on the East side of this harbor, about }^ mile above its entrance. Here you may moor NW. and SE. and lie safe from all winds. Channel to fhe Northward of Nash's Island Lighthouse, After passing the Red Buoy which lies off the Southwest part of Jordan's Delight Ledge, steer NE. }4 E. As you approach Nash's Island Light, you will see, about 1 mile to the Northward of it, a ♦ There is said to be a Ledge, with 18 feet water upon it, lying about NE. >iE 2>i miles from Petit Menan Light. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I 1^1^ |2.5 1^ 1^ 12.2 lAo 111112.0 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 ^ 6" ► '^^J^^? ^J^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 33 WeST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. I4S80 (716) S73-4S03 ■ ^^^ 260 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. small, high, bare, rocky Islet. This is called the Big Pot ; and about Yi mile to the Eastward of this, a remarkable-looking Island called the Ladle. Leave both of these last-named Islands about Yj. mile on the Starboard hand, and the Black Spindle on Norton's Rock a short distance on the Port hand. When the entrance to the harbor (which bears NE. by N. from Nash's Island Lighthouse) is fairly open, bearing about N-NE., then run in, keeping the Western shore best aboard, and proceed as before directed. Coming from the Eastward, outside of all the Ledges and Islands, when Nash's Island Light bears N. by W., run for it on this course until the passage between Cone and Flat Islands (before described) is fairly open ; then run in as before directed. High Water, It is High Water in Cape Split Harbor 30 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about \\^^ feet. Moose-A-Bec Reach. The Western entrance to this passage is about 2^ miles North- east from Nash's Island Lighthouse. It lies between the main land on the North, and a group of Islands on the South. Its length from Tabbott's Narrows to Mark Island is about 8 miles, and in some places it is very narrow. The least water in this Reach is j'bcutl4feet(at Low Tide), which is upon Moose-A-Bec Bar, near iis Eastern entrance. There are many dangers in it, but those lying in and near the channels are marked with Spindles and Buoys. Good anchorage is also found in all winds, and strangers may safely pass through it by carefully observing the following directions. Sailing Directions for Moose-A-Bec Reach in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Note, Masters of vessels should bear in mind that in sailing from Nash's Island Light through Moose-A-Bec Reach, Black Buoys and Black Spindles must be left on the Starboard hand, and Red Buoys and Red Spinc.es on the Port hand. In sailing to the Westward ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 261 through this Reach Red Buoys and Red Spindles must be left on the Starboard hand, and Black Buoys and Black Spindles on the Fort hand. From the Westward follow the directions before given for Cape Split Harbor, and run for Nash's Island Lighthouse, bearing NE* ^ E* Leave this Lighthouse about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, passing about midway between it and the Islands called the Big Pot and Ladle (before described). "When Nash's Island Light- house bears SW. by W. % W., keep it on that bearing and steer NE- by E' }i E- for the entrance of Tabbott's Narrows. As you sail in, you will see on the Port, Sheep Island, which lies close to the Main Land. This is a remarkable looking Island, being high, rocky, and nearly bare. On the Starboard will be seen Ram Island, which is smaller than Sheep Island, and at this time is covered with a thick growth of trees. The Narrows, which are about y^ mile wide, lie between these two Islands. As you enter this passage, keep a sharp lookout for the Black and Red Buoys, oflf Tabbott's Rock and Ram Island Ledge. When these are made, pass midway between them, carrying about 6 fathoms water, and make good the course NE. by E., leaving Shabbitt Island, which is low and wooded, about 400 yards on the Starboard hand. Continue the course NE. by E. As you enter the Reach, you will see on the Starboard a Red Spindle with round Cage on top. When this Spindle bears E. }i N. steer E. >^ S., leaving it about 250 yards on the Port hand, and make good the course E. ^ S., 2ji miles to Red Buoy off Cumming's Ledge. Leave this Buoy about 150 yards on the Port hand, tyad continue the course E. J^ S. 1^ miles to the Black Buoy off the Northern part of Horse Ledge. If it is Low Tide, and your vessel draws more than 6 ft. water, and the wind is not favorable to run through the Seguin Passage, you must anchor off the village of Jonesport, and, in order to cross the bar safely, wait for Flood Tide. There is about 18 feet upon Moose-A-Bec Bar at High Water. Leave the Black Buoy off Horse Ledge, close to on the Starboard hand, and steer about E. by S. % S., leaving the Black Buoys and Spindle on the Star- board, and the Red Buoys on the Port hand. When about mid- way between the Red Buoy No. 6 and Black Buoy No. 1,* you will then be on the shoalest part of the Bar, and must make good the course East, leaving the two small, bare. Rocky Islets called the Virgin's Breasts, the Black Spindle on Gilchrist* s Rock and Mark * The Black Buoy No. 1 has been discontinued. 262 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Island (which is the first) on the Starboard hand, and the Red Buoy ofl' Leighton's Ledge and Bay Ledges on the Port hand. In order to clear the dangerous sboals called the Eastern Ledges, when abreast Mark Island, which is bold on the Northern part, continue the course East about 2 miles ; then make good the course E'SE., leaving Libby Island Lighthouse well on the Port hand. Mark Island bears from the Eastern Ledges, which are bare at Low Tide, W- by N. J4 N. ; distance 1}( miles. Seguin Passage. In sailing through Moose- A-Bec Reach at Low Tide, with winds from W. by S« to N. by E. by way of North, you may safely carry 11 feet water through this passage by carefully observing the following directions. After passing the village of Jonesport, keep a sharp lookout for the Black Buoy No. 7, off North part of Horse Ledge. Leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and make good the course E* by S. j^ S-, leaving the following Buoys and Spindle on the Starboard hand. First, the Black Buoy No. 5, off Sand Ledge ; second, the Black Spindle on Snow's Rock with Cage on top ; and lastly, the Black Buoy No. 3, off the Northern part of Little Ledge. Haul round this last Buoy, leaving it close to on the Starboard hand, and steer S. j4 W-, leaving the Red Buoy No. 2 off the South end of Little Ledge on the Port, and the Red Buoy, No. 4 and No. 2 off Nova's Rock and Southwest Ledge, both on the Port hand ; leave the last-named off Southwest Ledge close to on the Port hand, and steer SS. by E. ^ E. about ^ mile, then E. by S> about J4 mile, leaving the Red Buoys on the Port, and the Black Buoys and Black Spindle with Cage on top on Moose Rock, on the Starboard hand. If bound to the Eastward, after passing the Black Buoy No. 1, off Seguin Ledge, which is the last in the pas- sage, make good the course E'SE>, leaving the dangerous shoaU called the Eastern Ledges well on the Port band. Mark Island. This Island, which lies near the Eastern part of the entrance to Moose- A-Bec Reach, is the landmark for vessels bound to the West- ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 263 ward through this passage. It is high and rocky, and at this time is covered with trees. In coming from the Eastward, a large round Head will be seen on its Western part, which appears over the trees as if it were in the middle. The Northern part of this Island is bold, but a Ledge extends off about j/i mile from its Southern part. Vessels bound through the Seguin Passage must leave this Island to the Northward, but those bound over Moose-A-Bec Bar leave it to the Southward. Sailing Directions for Moose-A-Bec Reach in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. At JjOw Tide there are about 6 feet water upon Moose-A-Bec Bar, at Half Flood 12 ft., and at High Water 18 feet. Vessels, therefore, of more than 6 feet draught must wait for Flood Tide. From the Eastward, leave Libby Island about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, steer W. ^ N. about 5 miles, then Mark Island, which lies near the East- ern entrance to Moose-A-Bec Reach, will be distant about 3 miles ; then haul more Northerly, keeping a sharp lookout for the danger- ous shoals called the Eastern Ledges. Mark Island bears from them W. by N. J^ N. ; distance 1}( miles. When this last-men- tioned Island bears West, run for it on this course and leave it about 300 yaras on the Port hand. As you sail in, j'ou will first seu on the Starboard the Red Buoy No. 2, off the South part of the Bay Ledges. On the Port will be seen the Black Spindle on Gilchrist's Rock, and farther in the Red and Black Buoys on Moose- A-Bec Bar ; leave the Red Buoys and Red Spindles on the Star- board, and the Black Buoys and Black Spindles on the Port hand. When midway between the Red Buoy No. 6 and Black Buoy No. 1, you are then on the shoalest part of the Bar, and must steer about W. by N. % N. ji mile to Black Buoy No. 7, off the North part of Horse Ledge ; leave this Buoy close to on the Port, and make good the course W. J^ N. 1^ miles to Red Buoy off South part Cumming's Ledge ; leave this Buoy on the Star- board hand, and continue the course W. >^ N. 2fi miles to the Red Spindle on Fessenden's Ledge. Leave this Spindle about 200 yards on the Starboard, and continue the course about % mile ; then steer SW. by W. for Tabbott's Narrows, leaving 264 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sbabbit's Island about 400 yards on the Port hand. When past this Island, keep a sharp lookout for the Red and Black Buoys at the entrance of the Narrows. When these are made, pass midway between them, and steer SW. by W. % W., leaving Nash's Island Lighthouse about ^ mile on the Port, and also passing about midway between it and the Islands called the Big Pot and Ladle (before described) . If bound inside the Petit Menan Ledges, bring Nash's Island Lighthouse to bear NE. ^ E., and steer SW« % W. until you make Petit Menan Lighthouse ; then bring it to bear SW. ^ W., and steer for it, leaving the Red Buoy off Jordan's Delight Ledge well on the Starboard hand. After passing this Buoy, haul more Southerly, and leave the large Red Buoy off Petit Menan Reef on the Starboard hand. Petit M°ican Lighthouse bears from this last-named Buoy N. ^ £• about ^ mile. Directions for the Seguin Passage from the East- ward. If it is Low Tide, and your vessel draws more than 6 and not more than 11 feet water, you may (with winds from E.NE. to S-SW- by way of South) safely pass through this Channel by carefully observing the following directions. From the Eastward, leave Libby Island about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, steer W. % N. about 5 miles, then Mark Island, which lies near the East- ern entrance to Moose- A-Bec Reach, will be distant about 3 miles. Bring this Island to bear NW. by W. % W., and run in, keeping it a little on the Starboard bow. On this last course the dangerous shoals called the Eastern Ledges will be left well on the Starboard hand. Mark Island bears from these last-named dangers W. by N.^ N. ; distance IJ^ miles. When about J^ mile from the Island, you will see on the Port the Buoys and Spindle which mark the entrance to the Seguin Passage ; the Easternmost Buoy, 'vhich is Black, No. 1, lies oflf the Northern part of Seguin Ledge, and bears from the Eastern part of Mark Island SW. by S< ^2 mile. As soon as this Buoy is made, run for it, and leave it close to on the Fort hand. When past it, steer about W. by N. Yi mile leaving two Red Buoys on the Starboard, and one Black Spindle and one Black Buoy on the Port. After passing these, steer about NW. by W. J4 W. about one mile, leaving the Red Baoy No. 6, off the Southwest part of Long Ledge, on the Starboard ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 265 hand ; continue the course NW. by W. }i W. for the Red Buoy No. 2, leaving it on the Starboard hand. After passing it, haul up N> ^ E., leaving the Red Buoy No. 4 on the Starboard, and the Black Buoy No. 8, o£f Little Ledge, close to on the Fort hand. When past this last Buoy, steer about W> by N> % N. for the Buoy off the North part of Horse Ledge, leaving it close to on the Fort, and follow the directions before given. High Water. It is High Water on Moose-A-Bec Bar 32 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 11^ feet. Jonesport Harbor. This Harbor, which is a small shallow Cove, lies on the Northern side of Moose- A'Bec Reach near its Eastern entrance. Vessels from the Eastwa^ ' or Westward bound to this place should follow the directions before given for this Reach, and at Low Tide anchor off the village in from 7 to 9 fathoms water. Head Harbor. IAghthouae8, Upon Mistake Island, which forms the Southern side of Head Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a flashing White Light. This Light is intended to guide vessels into this Harbor, and also into Englishman's Bay. Sailing Directions for Head Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westward, outside Petit Menan Ledges, as soon as the Lighthouse on Mistake Island is made, bring it to bear NE. by N., and run for it on this course. Leave this Lighthouse about % mile on the Fort hand, and when Head Harbor is fairly open, bearing North, then run in, keeping midway the passage, and anchor off White Point, or run up into the Cow Yard, or Inner 266 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Harbor ; the latter has from 2 to 4 fathoms water in it at Low Tide» and is well sheltered from all winds. From the Eastward, leave Libby Island Lighthouse about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and steer W. by S. As soon as the Light- house on Mistake Island is made, bring it to bear W. by S., and run for it on this course until Head Harbor is fairly open, bearing North ; then run in, leaving the Lighthouse to the Westward, and follow the directions before given. Whistling Buoy. A Whistling Buoy has been placed off about 2 miles S. by E. ^ E. from the Lighthouse on Mistake Island. Machias Bay and River. The entrance to this Bay, which lies between Libby Island on the West and Cross Island on the East, is NE. by E. % E. from Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse, distance about 49 miles, and W. SW. from West Quoddy Head ; distance about 21 miles. About 6 miles from the entrance is Machias River, which empties into this Bay. Machiasport is situated on the West bank of this River, near its mouth, and about 4 miles above the port is the citj' of Machias. About 14 feet water may be carried up to the anchorage off Machias- port at Low Tide. About 12 feet water can be carried from Ma- chiasport to the Bridge, but there is not more than £ or 10 feet in the Channel up to Machias. Libby Island Idghthouse, Upon the Southern part of this Island is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. At this date (1880) a Fog Bell is placed near it. Bearings and Distances fi'oin Libby Island Lighthouse. Distance. Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, . SE. J^ E., . . 12 miles. Bryer's Island Lighthouse, . . . SE. j4 E., . . 46 " Seal Ishnd (Cape Sable) Lighthouse, SE. by S. ^ S., 92 Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse, . SW. by W. K W. , 49 i( {{ ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 267 Avery'8 Mock, A Lighthouse has been built upon this Reck which shows a fixed Bed Light. It bears ft-om the Lighthouse upon Libby Island NE. by N. ; distance 5}4 miles. Sailing DireotionB for Maohiasport in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming irom the Westward outside Petit Menan Ledges, when up with the Whistling Buoy off to the Southward of the Lighthouse on Mistake Island, steer about NE by E. ^ E., leaving the Lighthouse on Libby Island about ^ le on the Fort hand. After passing this Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Northward until it bears SW. by S. ; then steer NE. by N. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard the large Red Buoy No. 2, which lies off the South- west end of Cross Island Ledge ; this Ledge extends from Cross Is. land, and the Buoy, which is left on the Starboard hand, bears NE. by E. }i E. iVom Libby Island Light. On the Fort will be seen the Lighthouse on Avery's Rock, which may be left close to on the Port hand. When abreast this last-mentioned Lighthouse, steer N> j4 E. for Round Island, leaving it on the Fort hand. Wlien past it, you will see, a short distance to the Northward of it, a Black Buoy No. 3, which is left on the Fort hand. When past this Buoy, steer NW. by N. for the Black Buoy No. 5, off the Middle Ground ; leave this Buoy on the Port, and steer about W.NW., keeping She Southwestern shore best aboard, in order to avoid the flats which lie upon the opposite side of the Channel. As you enter the River you will see the Red Buoy No. 2, which marks the Western end of Holmes Point Flats ; leave this Buoy close to on the Star* board hand, and steer about N. by E. ^ E., keeping in the middle of the River to the anchorage off Machiasport. On the above courses there will be deep water as far as the Lighthouse upon Avery's Rock, and from that point not less (in the Channel) than 14 feet to Machiasport. If bound up to Machias^ it is advisable to take a pilot at Machiasport. You will have good anchorage a short distance to the Northwest of the Black Buoy, which lies to the Northward of Round Island. Coming from West Quoddy Head or the Northeastward, steer about SW. by W. j4 W. along the shore, and as soon as Libby Island Lighthouse is made, bnng it to bear W- by N., and run for 208 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. it on this course until about 2 miles fVom it ; then steer NW. unti] it bears SW. by S. when the course is as before given. High Water, It is High Water in Machias Bay 29 minutes before it is at Bos- ton. Common Tides rise about 13^ feet. Little River. The entrance to this excellent harbor of refhge is about 10 miles Northeasterly from Libby Island Lighthouse, and about 13 miles SW. by W. Yz W. from West Quoddy Head. Little Hiver Lighthouse, This Lighthouse is built upon an Island lying in the middle of the entrance to this River, and shows a Fixed Light varied by White Flashes. At this date a Fog Bell is placed near this Lighthouse. Remarks. The Ship Channel into this River is between the Lighthouse on the Southwest and a high steep rocky Head on the Northeast (with a few trees upon it) called Eastern Knubble ; to the Eastward of this Knubble is a high square bare Tower-like Head called Great Head. Little River Head, which is on the Southwest side of the entrance, is of moderate height. The Rocks on the Southern and Eastern faces of this Head have large White spots painted on them just below the top of the Cliffs ; these are for the purpose of en- abling vessels from the Westward to recognize the entrance, as no opening can be seen until past this Head. Sailing Directions for Little River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when Libbj' Island Lighthouse bears N. NW., distance 3 or 4 miles, steer about E.NE. 9J^ miles. As soon as Little River Head is made (which may be known by the White Spots painted near it) , haul more Northerly, and when the Lighthouse is open, run in, leaving it close to on the Port hand, and in order to avoid Eastern Head Ledge, which lies off the North- eastern shore, and is dry at Low Spring Tides, keep the Southwest- ern shore best aboard, and anchor near the lower part of the town ELDUIDQES COAST PILOT. 269 In from 4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide with gotxl holding- ground. To tho Westward of the Lighthouse is a passage into this Uiver which is about 400 yards in width, and has a depth of about 7 feet water in it at Low Tide. Strangers should not attempt this Channel, as there are several Ledges which extend off from both shores. From the Eastward, when the Lighthouse at Little River is made, bring it to bear about West, and ruii for it on this course until close to it ; then follow the directions before given. In beating in, the slioies are bold, and the only danger to be avoided is Eastern Head Ledge, which lies off the Northeastern shore. This Ledge extends about 50 yards NW. and SE., and is bare at very Low Tides. Currents. Off Little River the current of Flood runs strong to the East- ward, and that of the Ebb to the Westward. Machias Seal Island. This Island, which is about 600 yardii in length and 400 yards in breadth, is elevated about 20 feet above high water. A ledge ex- tends about J^ mile Northeastward from its Northern end, upon the middle of which is a rock always above water and connected with the Island by a part of the ledge which is dry at low tide. About ^ mile to the Eastward of this Island there is a shoal spot of 12 feet, at low tide, with 13 fathoms water between it and the Island ; on the other sides there is deep water close to it. Near the middle of this Island are two Lighthouses which, at this date (1882), show two Fixed White Lights; these Lighthouses are 64 feet apart, and when in raiige bear W. by N. J^ N. and E. by s. J^ s. Fog Whistle, Near the Lighthouses is a Fog Whistle which in thick weather sounds 5 seconds every J^ minute. Bearings and Distances from Maohias Seal Island Lighthoosea. Distanoe. Mount Desert Rock Lighthouse, . W. by S. 5^ S., 54 miles. Seal Island Lighthouse (Cape Sable), S. by E. % E., . 80 " Petit Menan Lighthouse, .... W. X N., . . 34 " Libby Island Lighthouse, .... NW. J'z W., . 12 " West Quoddy Head Lighthouse, . NE. 5^ N., . . 20 " 270 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Dangers. From N. by W. to S. by E. by way of East from these Light- houses there are many Shoals, Rocks, and sunken Ledges. We shall therefore only give bearings and distances of a few of the dangers lying to the Northward and Northeastward of them, as no stranger should attempt to pass between Machias Seal Island Liglits and the Gannett Rock Lighthouse. North Shoal. Machias Seal Island Lighthouses bear from this Shoal (which has but 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide) S- by E. ; distance 3 miles. North Rock, Machias Seal Island Lighthouses bear from this Rock (which is bare) SW by S. ; distance 2]^ miles. Between the North Shoal and this Rock there are several spots having from 6 to 8 feet water upon them. Middle Shoal, Machias Seal Island Lighthouses bear from this Shoal (which has 17 feet water upon it) W.SW. ; distance 6 miles. It is said that a Rock, upon which several large vt'ssels have been wrecked, lies about West 3^ miles from these Lighthouses ; the author of this work searched for it in 18.57 y;ithout success. It is, however, advisable for vessels bound up the Bay of Fundy, and intending to pass to the Northward of Grand Menan Island, to give these Lighthouses a good berth to the Southward. Passamaquoddy Bay and St. Croix River. This large deep Bay, which separates the British Provinces from the United States, lies about NE. and SW. between the shores of Maine and New Brunswick. Into the Northwest comer of Passama- quoddy Bay empties the St. Croix River, which also separates the Province of New Brunswick from the State of Maine. The town of Calais is situated on the Western bank, about 13 miles from its mouth ; the town of Eastport is situated on Moose Island, about 10 miles below the mouth of this River. ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 271 Passages into Passamaquoddy Bay. There are several passages into this Bay : the Main Sliip Chan- nel, which lies between East Quoddy Head and Deer Island ; the Southern, through Lubeo Narrows, which opens between West Quoddy Head and the Southern part of Campobello Island. Only 6 feet water can be carried through Lubeo Narrows at Low Tide. An appropriation, however, has been recently made by the United States government for the purpose of improving this channel.* West Quoddy Head Lighthouse, Upon West Quoddy Head, South side of entrance to Lubec Narrows, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. Near this Lighthouse is placed a Steam Whistle, giving blasts of 8 sec- onds at intervals of 52 seconds. Bearings and Distances from West Quoddy Head Lighthouse. Diatanoe. Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, . SW. ^ S., .20 miles. South Wolf Island Lighthouse, . . E. by N. ^ N., 12 " Point Lepreau Lighthouses, . . . E. by N. J4 N., 26 " Cape Spencer Lighthouse, . . . E. by N., . .51 " East Quoddy Head Lighthouse, Upon East Quoddy Head, South side of entrance to Passama- quoddy Bay, by Ship Channel, is a Lighthouse which shows a Fixed Light. Bearings and Distances from East Quoddy Head Light- house. Diatanoe. West Quoddy Head Lighthouse, Southwesterly, . 9 miles. Lighthouse at Bliss Harbor, . . NE. >^ E., . • 4)^ " South Wolf Island Ligi)thou8e, . SE. by E. ?4 E., 7% " Lighthouse on Swallow's Tail (Grand Menan), S. by E., ... 14 " * At this date, 1884, It is said that 12 feet water at Low Tide can be taken through Lubec Narrows. 272 ELDKIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Eastport Harbor. This* Harbor is situated at tlie end of Passamaquoddy Bay. It has two entrances : the Main Ship Channel, which lies between East Quoddy Head and Deer Island ; and the Southern, by way of Lubec Narrows. The latter passage, however, at this date (1879) is only fit at Low Tide for light-draught vessels. Sailing Directions by Ship Channel for Eastport Harbor, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. V From the /Westward, when past Mount Desert Rock (which may be left about a mile on either hand), bring the Lighthouse to bear SW. by W. ^ W., and steer NE. by E. ^ E., for West Quoddy Head ; distance from Mount Desert Rock, 72 miles. If this <'oiuso is made good, the large Buoy off Southeast Rock, painted in Had and Black Horizontal stripes (and which bears SE. by S- 14^ S. 4 miles from Petit Menan Lighthouse), will be left 6 miles on the Port hand ; the Whistling Buoy which lies S. by W. 2 miles from Moose- A-Bec Lighthouse, 3 miles on the Port hand ; Libby Island Lighthouse, 4i^ miles on the Port; Little River Lighthouse, 2% miles on the Port ; and West Quoddy Head Lighthouse about 3^4 miles on the same hand. Machias Seal Island Lighthouses will be left about 7 miles on the Starboard hand. Continue the course NE. by E. % E. until West Quoddy Head Lighthouse bears W.NW., distance about 3^^ miles ; thrn steer about NE by N. 3^ N., along the shore of Campobellc sland until you make East Quoddy Head Lighthouse. When this bears fVom NW. by N- to N.NW., run in, and, with light winds and Flood Tide, haul round this Head, which is bold, leaving it not more than y^ mile upon the Port hand. When past this last-mentioned Lighthouse, steer Southwesterly, and in order to avoid the I4 miles. Vessels from the Eastv:ard, bound to Eastport, when the Light on the South Wolf Island is made, may bring it to bear W. J^ N., and run for it on this course, leaving it about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When past it, steer NW- by W. for East Quoddy Head Light, and follow the directions before given. Head Harbor. About % mile to the Southwest of the Lignthouse on East Quoddy Head is Head Harbor Island. Between this Island > nd the Northeast part of Campobello Island is Head Harbor, which is about 5^ mile in width. In entering this harbor by the Eastern passage there are no dangers, and about 5 fathoms water can be carried into it at Low Tide. A Fog Trumpet has been placed at this harbor near the Light- house, and in thick weather will sound blasts of 8 seconds duration, with intervals of 35 seconds between them. 274 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for East- port Harbor until the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head bears NW. by N. ; then run for it until the harbor is fairly open, bear- ing West, when you may run in, leaving this Lighthouse about 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and anchor near the Southwest part of the Island in from 5 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. There is a passage into this harbor to the Westward of Head Harbor Island in which there are about 2% fathoms water at LoV Tide, but it is narrow. Strangers will, therefore, unless necessity compels, enter by the Eastern passage. From the Eastward, bound into Head Harbor, after passing the Lighthouse on the South Wolf Island, run for East Quoddy Head Light, bearing NW. by W. until about 300 yards from it ; then steer about W. by S. into the harbor, and gradually haul South- erly, and anchor as before directed. Harbor Delute. This Harbor, which has but few dangers in it, lies on the North- ern side of Campobello Island ; its entrance is about 2 miles E. by N. from the town of Eastport, and Southwesterly'^ about 3 miles from the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head. Sailing Directions in Daytime. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the directions for East- port Harbor by Ship Channel until Harbor Delute opens ; then run in, leaving Windmill Point, which is the first on the Northeastern side, about y^ mile on the Port hand. When past this point, steer about SE- by S. J4 S-, leaving two small coves on the Port hand. After passing these (in order to avoid Racer Rock, which lies in the middle of the harbor, and has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide) , keep the Eastern shore best aboard, and anchor in from 8 to 10 fathoms water at Low Tide. The Southwest a;m of this Harbor extends well up into the land, and is sheltered from all winds. About 15 feet Mater can be taken into it at Low Tide ; but the channel is narrow. In entering ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 275 keep in the middle, and when in, keep the Southeastern shore best aboard, and anchor in from 4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Eastport Harbor by way of Lubec Narrows, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Coming from the Westward, follow the directions before given for Eastport Harbor by way of Ship Channel, until West Quoddy Head Lighthouse bears N.NE. ; then run about NE. by N. In order to avoid Sail Rock and the dangerous Whirlpool (which both lie Southeasterly from this Lighthouse), do not approach West Quoddy Head Lighthouse nearer than ^ mile until it bears NW. by W. You are then past these dangers, and may haul to the Northwestward, keeping about 300 yards from West Quoddy Head, which is quite bold. When past this Head, steer about NW., keeping a sharp lookout for the Red Buoy, No. 2, off the Middle Ground. West Quoddy Head bears from this Buoy SE. by S. ^ S. ; distance ^ mile. Leave this last-named Buoy close to on the Starboard hand, and steer N. by W. Yz W. As you sail in, you will see the Black Wooden Beacon, with Tripod on top, on the W^tern Bar. Leave this about 25 yards on the Port, and steer about N. by E., carrying about 8 feet at Low Tide, and leaving the Red Buoy No. 4 close to on the Starboard. When past this last Buoy, steer about NE. by N. Yz N,, leaving the Black Buoy No. 1 (off Eastern part of a Ledge), on the Port hand. From this last Buoj', steer N. by W. for the Eastern end of Lubec Wharves, and when abreast Leadbury Point (which Is the first on the Port hand), steer through the Narrows, keeping in about mid- channel. When a short distance past the town of Lubec, you will cross the Bar, which at this date (1884) has about 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. When you are through the Narrows, the first Island is called Pope's Foil}-. Leave this small Island about 250 yards on the Starboard hand, and steer up about NE. by N., leaving Dudley's and Treat's Islands (which are both bold on their Eastern part) on the Port hand. When past these Islands, follow the directions before given for Ship Channel. Or when you are through Lubec Narrows, you may steer up NW. ^ N. about 1 mile, passing to the Westward of these Islands, Gull Rock, and Burial Island (wliich is small) . When past this last-named Island, haul more Northerly, and anchor off the town or in Broad Cove. 276 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. The Flood and Ebb sets strong through Lubec Narrows ; sailing- vessels, therefore, cannot pass through them unless they have strong favorable winds. When you pass West Quoddy Head, if the tide is low, or wind unfavorable, anchor in Quoddy Roads about 200 yards to the Southwest of the Red Buoy No. 2, off the Middle Ground, in about 3^ fathoms water at Low Tide. Quoddy Roads. These Roads, which lie a short distance to the Northward of West Quoddy Head Lighthouse, are exposed to Southeasterly winds, but have a good anchoi'age in from 3 to 7 fathoms water, with winds from South to N>NE. by way of West. Sailing Directions for Quoddy Roads at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave West Quoddy Head Light at least 3^ mile to the Northward, and when it bears W.NW. haul in, leav- ing the Head, which is quite bold, about 300 j-ards on the Port. When past the Northern point of Quoddy Head, run from N. by W. to N.NW. Yz mile, and anchor in about V/2 fathoms water at Low Tide, and about 6^2 at High Tide. From the Eastward, with Easterly or Northeasterly winds, as soon as West Quoddy Head Light is made, bring it to bear West, and run for it on this course. In order to clear Liberty Point Ledge, which is on the Northern side of the harbor, continue the course until you judge you are ^ mile from this Light, then haul in about North, and anchor with the Light bearing about S.SW., in about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide, and 7 at High Tide. Beating in at Night. From the Westward, leave Quoddy Head Light at least }^ mile to the North wai-d, and when it bears NW. by W. haul sharp on the wind, and in order to avoid Liberty Point Ledge (which bears from West Quoddy Head Light NE. by E. ^ E., distance 1 mile) keep this Head best aboard, and anchor in from 4 to 6 fathoms water at Low Tide, the Light bearing from S.SW. to SW. from you. From ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 277 the Eastward, run for West Quoddy Head Light, bearing West, and do not haul up into the Roads until you are J^ mile from it ; then anchor as before directed. After passing the Northern point of West Quoddy Head, be careful to avoid Wormell's Ledges, which lie E.SE. and W.NW. nearly )^ mile, and are bare at very low tides ; their Northern part bears NW. >^ W. from the Northern part of West Quoddy Head ; distance about % mile. Both Coves on the Southwestern and Northeastern sides of Quoddy Roads are full of Shoals, with some Rocks and Ledges ; and Flats extend off on the Northern part in some places nearly ^ mile. In summer the Fish Weirs are excellent guides, as their outer parts are always on the edges of the channel. Campobello Island. The Eastern shore of this Island is bold and quite free from dangers. Vessels bound East or West, with tide and wind ahead, may anchor in any of the coves on this shore, in from 5 to 10 fathoms water. Steam Whistle. A Steam Whistle is placed near West Quoddy Head Lighthouse, which gives blasts in thick weather of 8 seconds at intervals of 52 seconds. Vessels, therefore, in thick weather, coming from the Westward, should keep off at least ^ mile from the Lighthouse until it bears W.NW. ; then run for it on this course until you judge you are about 300 yards from the Whistle, then haul in about North, keeping about 300 yards from the head, and anchor about }( mile North of it in the Roads, in from 3}4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, in thick weather, as soon as the Whistle is heard at West Quoddy Head, bring it to bear West, and run for it on this course, until about 300 yards from it; then follow the directions before given. Morton's Mock. Vessels passing West Quoddy Head should beware of this Rock,' which lies near the shore about 2j4 miles to the Westward of the Lighthouse on this Head. This Rock is now marked with a Red Buoy. 278 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Lubec. If you are bound to this place, follow the sailing directions before given for Eastport Harbor, by way of Lubec Narrows. If it is Low Water when you arrive at West Quoddy Head, anchor in the Roads and wait for High Water, when you will have slack tide to go to the Wharves. High Water, It is High Water at Eastport on the days of the full and change of the moon at llh. 8m., or about 21 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 18 feet. Gobscook Bay and Pembroke River. The entrance to this Bay lies between Estes Head (which is the extreme Southern part of the tu'^n of Eastport) on the North, and Seward's Neck on the South. The entrance to Pembroke River is Northwesterly about 5 miles from Eastport. The town of Pem- broke is situated about 4 miles from the entrance to this River. There are many dangers in entering Cobscook Bay and Pembroke River, and the current, which runs ver}- strong, sets in several places on to them ; it is therefore advisable for strangers bound to Pem- broke to take pilots at Eastport. St. Oroix River. The entrance to this River is about N. 5^ W. from Eastport ; distance about 10 miles. About h fathoms water at Lov Tide can be carried up about 7^ miles above its entrance ; here, the River divides, the main branch turning abruptly to the Westward, and running with some changes of course for about 5^ miles to the town of Calais. This town .s built on the South bank of the River, 13 miles above its mouth, and 23 miles from Eastport. About 11 feet water at Low Tide can be carried up to Hackman's Point (which is on the North bank of this River about 2 miles below Cala'.s), and 6 feet from this last point to Calais. ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 279 Dochet Inland Lighthouse, Uijon Dochet Island, which lies about 6j^ rniles from the mouth of the St. Croi:. River ; and nearly in the middle, is a Lighthouse which shows a Fixed Light varied b3' flashes. Sailing Directions for St. Croix River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward follow the directions before given for Eastport Harbor until you are abreast this town ; then, if you intend to go up without a pilot, and have the tide with you, and also a favorable wind, with a commanding breeze, keep about 250 yards from the Wharves. When you are nearly abreast the Northern part of the town, you will see Dog Island, which is small. In order to avoid the Whirls on the Eastern side of the passage, give this last-mentioned Island a berth of 200 yards, leaving it on the Port hand. When past Dog Island, steer about NW. by N. J^ N for Kendall's Head; distance about Ij^ miles. Leave this Head about 350 yards on the Port, and when past it you will soon see the Black Buoy No. 1, which lies off the Eastern part of Frost's Ledges, which are about 2 miles above Kendall's Head, opposite Clam Cove Head ; leave this Buo}'^ on the Port, and steer about N. % W. 5j/^ miles across Passamaquoddy Ba}' to the entrance of the River. As you enter this River, you will see on the Starboard the Port of St. Andrews, and likewise a low sandj' Island South of this place called Navy Island ; the Beacon to the Northwest of it is on Nav}' Island Reef. After passing this Beacon, keep about in the middle of the River, passing the village of Robbiston. As you sail up, 3'ou will see the Lighthouse, which is on Dochet Island, nearly in the middle of the River, and also, about \% miles South of this Lighthouse, the Black Buoy off the Southern part of Middle Ground. You may leave this Buoy on either hand, but the Chan- nel to the Eastward of the Lighthouse is the widest ; you will therefore leave this Buoy and the Red Buoy on Half-Tide Ledge, together with the Lighthouse, all on the Port hand. After passing this Lighthouse there will be seen to the Northward of it another Red Buoy, which must be left on the Port hand. When past this last Buoy, in order to clear the Shoals which lie off Sandy Point (which is on the Starboard side), steer for Devil's Head, which is on the Western side of the River, about 2 miles above the Light- 280 ELDHIDGE'S COAST PILOT. house ; haul close round this Head, and when past it, steer about NW., leaving two Black Buoys close to on the Port hand. Tliis last course leads up to the Beacon on the Ledge ; this Beacon is 3 miles below Calais, and in going up is left on the Port hand. It is advisable to anchor here, where you can lie afloat at Low Water, and take a pilot to Calais. St. Andrew's Harbor. This Harbor, which is well sheltered, and has from 12 to 14 feet water in it at Low Tide, lies on the East side of the entrance to the St. Croix River, about lOj^ miles above the town of Eastport. There are two entrances, one of which is to the Northwest of Navy Island, the other to thd Southeast of it ; both these passages are narrow, and have but little water in them at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for St. Andrew's Harbor. Vessels from the Eastward or Westward bound to this harbor may follow the directions before given for Easiport Harbor and St. Croix River until they make the Beacon off the Northwtist part of Nav}' Island Reef. Leave this Beacon about Ys mile on the Star- board hand, and when the Lighthouse at the Southeastern part of the town bears SE. b}- E. ^ E., run for it, passing about midway between this Beacon and the Northern shore of he harbor, and anchor off the town. If it is Low Tide when you make the Beauon, anchor about y^ mile Northwest of it in about 4 fathoms water, and wait for Flood Tide. At High Water, with Southeasterly winds, j'ou may enter this harbor to the Southeastward of Navy Island by the following direc- tions : Leave the Southeast point of this last-named Island (which is opposite the town) about ^ mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse at the Southeastern part of the town bears NW. }'2 W.. run in between the Beacons on this course, leaving the Light- house close to on the Starboard hand, and anchor off the town. High Water. It is High Water in St. Andrew'c Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon lOh, 50m., or about 39 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tiles rise about 23 feet. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 281 There is another entrance to Passamaquoddy Bay called the Lettte Pass. This Pass bears NW. by N. from the Lighthouse on the South Wolf Island, distance about 10 miles. This last-named Channel is narrow, and has a number of dangers at the entrance, and also within it. Strangers bound to St. Andrew's should there- fore go by the way of Eastport. Bliss Harbor. The Western entrance to this excellent Harbor bears from the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head NE. ; distance about 4 miles. It has two entrances, one of which is to the Westward of Bliss Island, the other to the Eastward. JBU88 Island Lighthouse. Upon Bliss Island, Southeastern side of entrance to this harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a Red Fixed Light. Bearings and Distances firom Bliss Island Lighthouse. Distance. East Quoddy Het»d Lighthouse, . SW. J^ W., • 4j4 miles. Lighthouse at South Wolf Island, . SE. by S. J4 S., 7 " Lighthouse at Point Lepreau, . . E. by S., . .17 " Sailing Directions for Bliss Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward follow the directions before given for East- port Harbor (by Ship Channel) until you make the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head. Leave this Lighthouse about 1^ miles on the Port, and make good the course NE. by E. until the Lighthouse at Bliss Harbor bears N. by W. ; then run for it on this course, leav- ing the Island called tht. White Horse and also the Ledges called the North and South Rocks well to the Westward. In order to avoid the shoal water which extends off Southwest from the Light- house point, give it a berth of about ^ mile, leaving it to the East- ward. When the Lighthouse bears East, haul up into the harbor, and in order to avoid Man-of-War Rocks, which bear from the Lighthouse NE. by N. about % mile, and are bare at Half-Tide, 282 ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. follow the shore on Starboard hand (which is quite bold), keep, ing about 160 yards in,.» it. When Fisherman's Cove opens, which is the first to the fjouthward after passing the Lighthouse, haul in midway, and anchor in about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. The Lighthouse bears from this anchorage W. by S. ; distance about ^ mile. Coming from the Southeastward, leave the Lighthouse on the South Wolf Island from >^ to ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course N-NW. for Bliss Island Lighthouse. When the Lighthouse at this harbor is made, bring it to bear N.NW., and follow the directions before given. From the Eastward, with Easterly winds, bound to Bliss Har< bor, you ma}' enter it by the Eastern Passage by the following directions. Leave the Lighthouse at Point Lepreau about 1^ miles to the Northward, and when it bears N. by E., steer about W. by N. K N., leaving the Lighthouse at Beaver Harbor on the Starboard, and the East Wolf Island well on the Port hand. When 3'ou make the Lighthouse on the East side of entrance to L'Etang Harbor, which is about 2 miles to the Eastward of the Lighthouse on Bliss Island, continue the course until L'Etang Light bears NW. by N. ; then run for it. Give this Light a berth of about }( mile, leaving it on the Starboard hand, and steer in about N.NW., leaving several Rocks, some of which are only bare at Half-Tide, on the Port, and the Roaring Bull (which lies about 300 yards Northwest from the Lighthouse, and is awash at High Water) on the Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see on the Port Mink Island, which is small, and bears from the Lighthouse W. by N. : haul round it at a distance of 250 yards, leaving it on the Port, and when it bears South, steer about W. by S., leaving Flea Island, which is also small, on the Starboard. When past this last-named Island, run for the Lighthouse on Bliss Island, bearing SW. by W., until Fisherman's Cove, which is the first on the Port hand, opens ; then run in, and anchor as before directed. Sigh Water, It is High Water in Bliss Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at llh. 15m., or about 14 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 22 feet. ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. L'Etang Harbor. 283 The entrance to thb Harbor is NE. by E. 6 miles ft-om the Light- house at East Quoddy Head, and W. by N. X N. from Point Lepreau Lighthouse ; distance 15 miles. I*ea Island Lighthouse* Upon Pea Island, East side of entrance to L'Etang Harbor, is a Lighthouse which at this date shows a Green Fixed Light. Bearings and Distanoea from Pea Island Lighthouse. Dlitanoe. East Quoddy Head Lighthouse . SW. by W., . 6j4 miles. Lighthouse on South Wolf Island, S. ^ E., . . 7 »* Point Lepreau Lighthouse, . . . E. by S. ^ S., 1^>^ *' Sailing Direotions for L'Etang Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for East- port Harbor, by Ship Channel, until you make the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head. Leave this Lighthouse about 1^ miles on the Port, and make good the course NE. by 1 ., leaving the White Horse and the Ledges called the North and Ijouth Rocks, and also Bliss Island Lighthouse, well on the Port hand. When the Light- house at the entrance of L'Etang Harbor is made, bring it to bear N.NE., and run for it on this course until about ^ mile from the Lighthouse ; then haul in for a high Bluff (on the West side of the entrance), bearing N. by W. J^ W., leaving the Colt and Mare Rocks (the former of which is bare at Half-Tide) on the Port, and the Rock called the Roaring Bull, which lies a short distance North- west from the Lighthouse, on the Starboard hand. When the Light- house bears E.SE., steer ^T. by E. until it bears S.SE. ; on which bearing keep it, and run N.NW., passing about midway between McCann Island and L'Etang Head ; the shore of the latter, which is on the Starboard, is very bold. When past this last-named Head, steer about N. }i W., and anchor at Low. Tide in from 7 to 9 fathoms water, the Southeastern part of the town bearing from NE. by E. to E.NE. Vessels from the Westward, with Southerly or Westerly winds, bound to L'Etang Harbor, may follow the directions before given 284 ELDRIDQE'8 COAST PILOT. for Bliss Harbor until past Man-of-War Rock (which bears NE. by N. from tlio Lighthouse on Bliss Island, distance % mile, and ia bare at Half-Tide) ; then steer about NE. by E. ^ E., IcAving Flea and McCann's Islands, which are both bold, on the Port hand. "When L'Ktang Lighthouse bears S-SE., steer N.NW., and follow the directions before given for this harbor. From the Eastward, leave the Lighthouse at Point Leprcau about V/i miles to the Northward, and when it bears N. by E., steor about W. by N. % N., leaving thp Lighthouse at Beaver Harbor on the Starboard, and the East Wolf Island well on the Port hand. When you make the Lighthouse on the East side of entrance to L'Etang, which is about 2 miles to the Eastward of the Lighthouse at Bliss Harbor, continue the course until L'Etang Light bears NW. by N. ; then run for it. Give this Light a berth of about ^ mile, leaving it on the Starboard hand, and steer in about N.NW., leav- ing several Rocks, some of which are only bare at Half-Tide, on the Port hand, and the Roaring Bull, which lies about 300 yards Northwest fVom the Lighthouse (and is awash at High Water) , on the Starboard hand. After passing this last danger, haul more Northerly until the Lighthouse bears S.SE. ; then steer N.NW., and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in L'Etang Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at llh. 16m., or about 13 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 23 feet. Wolf Island Lighthouse, Upon the Southeast point of Southwest Wolf Island is a Light- house which shows a White Light which revolves every 1% min- utes ; this Lighthouse is square, and is painted White. Bearings and Distances from Light on Southwest Wolf Island. Distanoa. West Quoddy Head, ... W. by S.. ?< S-, . 12 miles Fog Whistle on Northeastern part of Grand Menan, . . . SW. by S., . . . 9 " East Quoddy Head Lighthouse, NW. by W. % W., 7j^ " Point Lepreau Lighthouse, . E. by N. ^ Nm • 1^ " ELDRIDOB'8 COAST PILOT. 2S5 Dangers. The Southern part of this Island is bold, and may be approached as near as /$ milo without danger. Point Lepreau lAghthouae. Upon Point Lepreau are two Fixed Lights, one above the other. The Lighthouse is painted in Red and White Horizontal stripes. Bearings and Diatanoes ttoxa Point Lepreau Lights. Steam Whistle on Northern part of Grand Menan Island, . . SW. by W. Jj( W., 21^ miles. Lighthouse on South Wolf Island, W. by S. ^ Sm • 14 " Revolving Red and White Light at Cape Spencer, .... E., 25 Lighthouse at Point Prim, Digby Gut, SB. by 3., . . . 36 Isle Haut Lighthouse, . . . E. ^ S., • • • • 64 u Stettfn Whistle, A Steam Whistle is placed near this Lighthouse, which is sounded twice a minute in thick weather. Dangers. Point Lepreau is very bold off its Southern part ; the only danger near it is a Ledge, which has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. This danger bears f^om the Lighthouse NW. by W. % W. ; dis- tance about % mile. Beaver Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor bears fVora the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head about E.NB., distance 9}^ miles, and W. by N. }4 N., 11 miles from Point Lepreau Lights. Beaver Harbor Lighthouse, On Drew's Head, West side of entrance to Beaver Harbor, is • Lighthouse which shows a IBixed White Light. 286 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Beaver Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the "Westward, follow the directions before given for East- port Harbor by way of Ship Channel, until you make the Lighthouse at East Quoddy Head. Leave this Lighthouse about 2 miles on the Port, and make good the course NE. by E. J4 E., leaving the Island called the White Horse, and also Bliss and L'Etang Harbor Lights, on the Port, and the Wolf Islands well on the Starboard hand. When the Lighthouse at Beaver Harbor is made, bring it to bear N. by W. Vz W., and run for it on this course until you judge you are about Yi mile from it ; then steer more Northerly, leaving the Lighthouse a short distance to the Westward, and anchor on the Western side, close in to the village, in about 2 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, give Point Lepreau Lighthouse a berth of about ^ mile, leaving it to the Northward, and steer W. by N. y^ N., leaving the Eastern Wolf Island well on the Port hand. When Beaver Harbor Lighthouse bears N.NW., follow the direc- tions before given. This harbor is exposed to Southerly winds, but vessels will find shelter on the Western side, close to the village. A sunken Rock lies about S- by E. from the Lighthouse ; distance about 300 yards. There is also a shoal spot of 13 feet about yi mile Northeasterly from this Lighthouse. Sigh, Water, It is High Water at Beaver Harbor about 10 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 22 feet. Musquash Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor bears from Point Lepreau Light- house E. by N., distance 10^ miles, and W. Spencer Lighthouse, distance 14^ miles. N. from Cape ELDRIDCfE'S COAST PILOT. MuBQuaah Harhwi* Idghthmise, 287 Upon the Eastern point of entrance to this Harbor is a Lights house which shows from seaward a Green Fixed Light, and White in the harbor.* Hemarka, The entrance to this Harbor is about J^ mile wide, and there is good anchorage a little way in, with 3^ fathoms at Low Tide ; but farther in a Bar extends across the harbor, upon which there is but little water at Low Tide. Vessels can cross this Bar at High Water, and nin into the River, where there is a narrow Channel having from 2 to 3 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Musquash Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, give Point Lepreau Lighthouse a berth of about ^ mile, leaving it to the Northward. When it bears North, make good the course E. % N. 10 miles, or until Musquash Har- bor Lighthouse bears NE. by N. ; then run for it on this course. When the Harbor is fairly open, ruu in about N. by E., keeping nearest the Lighthouse, which is 1 ift on the Starboard, and anchor in about 3}^ fathoms water at Low I'ide. The Lighthouse bears from this anchorage (which is exposed to Southerly winds) S.SE. about }4 mile. Farther in the water is shoal at Low Tide. From the Eastward, give Cape Speni er a berth of about 1 mile, leaving it to the Northward. When the Lighthouse bears North, make good the course W. ^ N. 14^ miles, or until the Lighthouse on the East side of Musquash Harbor bears N. by W. ; then run in, and anchor as before directed* High Water, It is High Water at Musquash Harbor about the same time as at Boston. Common Tides rise about 24 feet. Harbor of St. John. The entrance to this Harbor, by Ship Channel, is Northeast- erly about 47 miles from the Lighthouse at West Quoddy Head, ♦ A Whistling Buoy has been moored in about 30 fathoms water, about li miles Soutil flrom Musquash Lighthouse. Partridge Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NE. by E. f E. lOi miles; Cape Spencer Lig'.t- house E. i N. 14 miles. 288 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. and about 21 miles in the same direction flrom Point Lepreau Lights. J?artridge Inland Lighthouse, Upon Partridge Island, entrance to this Harbor, is a Lighthouse which is painted in Red and White Vertical stripes, and shows a fixed White Light. Bearings and Distances from Lighthouse upon Partridge Island. Distance. Bryer's Island Lighthouse, . . SW. by S-, • • 61 miles. Boar's Head (entrance to Petit Pass), SW.byS. ^S., 51 « Prim Point (entrance to Digby Gut), S 35J^ " Steam Whistle. A Steam Whistle is placed near this Lighthouse which sounds in thick weather 10 seconds every minute. Breakwater Light, At this date a Red fixed Light is placed on the outer end of the Breakwater off Negro Point. This Light, which bears from Par- tridge Island Lighthouse N. by W., distance ^ mile, is said to be uncertain. 8t, John Harbor Light, To the Northward of Partridge Island, on a Spit or Bar, which extends off nearly ^ mile from the Western sTiore, is erected n Lighthouse which is painted in Red and White Vertical stripes, and shows a fixed White Light. This Lighthouse bears from Partridge Island Light N. by E. ^ E. ; distance nearly 1 mile. Remarks, There are two entrances to this Harbor. The Ship Channel, which has a depth of about 16 feet at very Low Tides, leads into the Eastward of Partridge Island ; but 12 feet of water, however, at Low Tide, can be carried through it on a direct course for the Har- bor Light. The other passage, which is to the Westward of Par- tridge Island, has about 8 feet water in it at Low Tide. ?^ ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 289 Sailing Directions for the Harbor of St. John in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when past Mount Desert Rock, which may be left about a mile on either hand, bring the Lighthouse to bear SW. by W. 54 W., and steer NE. by E. 3^ E. for Point Lepreau Lighthouse ; distance 98 miles. If this course is made good, the large Buoy off Southeast Rock, painted in Red and Black Hori- zontal stripes, and which bears S-E. by S.^ S. 4 miles from Petit Menan Lighthouse, will be left 6 miles on the Port hand ; the Whistling Buoy, which lies S. by W. 2 miles from Mcose-A-Bec Lighthouse, 3 miles on the Port ; Libby Island Lighthouse, 4j4 miles on the Port ; Little River Lighthouse, 2^ miles on the Port ; West Quoddy Head Lightliouse, 3i^ miles on the Port; and the Lighthouse on the South Wolf Island, 2^ miles on the Port hand. Machias Seal Island Lighthouses will be left about 6^ miles on the Starboard hand ; Northern part of Grand Menan Island, which is bold and free from dangers, about 2^ miles on the Starboard hand. When Point Lepreau Lights are made, bring them to bear NE. by B. ^ E., and run for it on this course. Give this Lighthouse a berth of about 1 mile, leaving it on the Port, and when it bears North, make good the course about E. Yz N. along the shore, keeping not less than ^ mile from it. When Partridge Island Lighthouse bears NE. b}- N., then run for it on this course. If intending to enter the Harbor by the Ship Channel, give Partridge Island a berth of Y^ mile, leaving it to the Westward ; and in order to avoid the Reefs which lie to the Northeast of this Island, keep a sharp lookout for the Bell Boat, which bears from Partridge Island Lighthouse E. J^ S. ; distance about Yi ^i'®* When this Bell Boat is made, leave it close to on the Port, and steer N. by W. As you sail in, you will see a Red Buoy, which is left close to on the Starboard hand, and when past it, steer North for the Harbor Lighthouse, which may be left about 100 yards on the Port hand. When past the Lighthouse, make good the course N- J4 W. up ' \% harbor. In order to avoid the deep water and strong current, anchor close in near the Northern part of the city, or a little below the Southern Wharves on the West side of the river, in from 3 to 5 fathoms at Low Tide. About 12 feet water may be taken in on the above courses at Low Tide. If you intend to enter the Harbor to the Westward of Partridge ■• 290 ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. Island, follow the directions before given until the Lighthouse on this last-named Island bears NE. by N. ; then run for it oa this course until you make the outer end of the Breakwater off Negro Point ; then haul to the Westward until the end of the Break- water bears NE. J4 N. ; then run for it, and leave it close to on the Port. When past it, steer NE. ^ N. for a Red Buoy ; leave this Buoy close to on the Starboard and run for the Harbor Light, bearing North, and follow the directions before given. About 8 feet water can be carried through this passage at Low Tide. From the Eastward, after passing Cape Spencer Lighthouse, bring the Lighthouse on Partridge Island to bear N. by W. y^ W., and run for it until about yi mile from it ; then steer about N. by B., keeping a sharp lookout for the Bell Boat, which lies to the Eastward of Partridge Island Reef. When this is made, leave it close to on tlie Port, and follow the directions before given. Sailing Directions for the Harbor of St. John, at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. If a vessel at Night, with favorable winds, take her departure from Mount Desert Rock Light, bound to St. John, her best course is NE. by E. ^ E. for Point Lepreau ; distance 98 miles. If this course is made good, the Fixed Light, varied by White Flashes, upon Petit Menan Island, will be left 10 miles to the Northward ; 15 miles farther, the Flashing Light upon Mistake Island, 5 miles to Northward ; the Fixed White Light on Libby Island, 4^ miles to the Northward ; the Fixed Light varied by White Flashes, * at Little River, 2^ miles to the Northward ; the Fixed White Light at West Quoddy Head, Z]{, miles to the Northward ; the Revolving Light upon the South Wolf Island, 2^ miles to the Northward. After passing this last-named Light, you will mak the two Fixed Lights, one above the other^ upon Point Lepreau. On this course, NE. by E. ^ E., from Mount Desert Rock Light, the Machias Seal Island Lights will be left 654! miles on the Starboard hand ; the Northern part of Grand Menan Island, which is bold and free from dangers, 2^ miles on the Starboard hand. In running up the Bay of Fundy, from Mount Desert Rock Light to Point Lepreau, if you judge your vessel is off the line of the above course, you can haul more Northerly or Southerly as circumstances require. ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 291 From Point Lepreau Lights to St. John Harbor. At Night, when the two Fixed Lights, one above the other, are made, upon Point Lepreau, give theni a berth of about lj4 miles, leaving them on the Port hand ; and as soon as they bear North make good the course E. j4 N. for the Revolving Red and White Light at Cape Spencer, distance 26 miles. On this course, the Green Fixed Light at Musquash Harbor will be left about 2J4 miles on the Port hand. When Cape Spencer Light is made, bring it to bear E. ^ N., and run for it on this course until the Fixed White Light on Partridge Island, entrance to the harbor of St. John, bears N.NE. ; then steer NE. by N. As you sail in, you will see, a short distance to the Northward of the Light on Partridge Island, the Red Fixed Light upon the outer end of the Breakwater, and also the Harbor Light, which is a fixed White Light. Con- tinue the course NE. by N. until this last-named Light bears N. ^ W. ; then run for it on this course, leaving Partridge Island Light about }4 mile on the Port. Give the Harbor Light a berth of about 100 yards,ileaving it on the Port hand, and make good the course N. }4 W. up the harbor, and anchor off the city. In entering this Harbor at Night, after passing Partridge Island Light, a careful attention to the current is necessary. It is also a good plan to have plenty of chain overhauled, as the water in the harbor is very deep in some places. Vessels of more than 12 feet draught, bound into the harbor of St. John, should not atcempt to cross the Bar until at least }^ Flood. Tliick Weather, In sailing from Mount Desert Rock up the Bay of Fundy, in thick weather, captains will bear in mind that at this time (1880) there is placed at Petit Menan Lighthouse a Fog Whistle ; about 2 miles S. by W. from Moose- A-Bec Lighthouse, a Whistling Buoy; at Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, a Fog Whistle ; at West Quoddy Head, a Fog Whistle ; at Bishop's Head, Northern part of Grand Menan, a Fog Whistle ; at Point Lepreau, a Fog Whistle ; and at Partridge Island, entrance to the Harbor of St. John, a Fog Whistle. All these, in thick weather, should be heard from 5 to 10 miles ; therefore, in navigating this part of the coast, the ear, assisted by the compass and lead, will be pil ^ 292 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. High Water. It is High Water in the Harbor of St. John on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at llh. 21m. ; or about 8 minutta before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 25 feet. Grand Menan. This Island, which is about 12 miles in length, has a width of from 1^ to 6 miles. On its Western side the cliffs are nearly per- pendicular, and from 150 to 400 feet above the level of the sea. Dangers. Off the Western part of Grand Menan, from its Northeast to Southwest Heads, there are no dangers excepting a few Rocks which lie near the Southwest Head, close in with the shore ; but there are many Rocks, Shoals, and Ledges which lie off to the Southwest, Southward, Southeast, and Eastward of this Island. The current of Ebb and Flood sets very strong across these Ledges, making the navigation, especially in thick weather, extremel}' dan- gerous in this vicinity. A better knowledge of these dangers can be obtained by closely inspecting the charts than by any written de- scription. Seal Cove, or Wood Island Harbor. This Harbor, which has a depth of from 5 to 7 fathoms water in it at Low Tide, lies near the Southern part of Grand Menan, and is easy of access. Gull Head Lighthouse, ^ Upon Gull Head (Southwest part of Grand Menan), West side of entrance to Seal Cove, is a Lighthouse which shows a flashing Red and White Light. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 293 Bearings and Distances from Gull Head Lighthouse. West Quoddy Head Lighthouse, Little River Lighthouse, . . . Macbias Seal Island Lighthouses, Gannet Rock Lighthouse, . . Distance. N. 5^ B., . . 13 miles. NW. by W., . 13 W. by S. Yz S., 10^ " SE. by S. Yz S., lYi " Sailing Directions for Seal Cove in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, as soon as the Lighthouse on Gull Head is made, bring it to bear E. by S., and run for it on this course ; haul round this Lighthouse at a distance of about ^ mile, leaving it on the Port hand. When the harbor is fairly open, bearing about NE., run in, and in order to avoid Buck's Ledge, which lies off about Yi mile from the Western side, a little above the entrance, and is left on the Port hand, keep nearly' midwa}' the entrance, and anchor near the Western shore, at the head of the harbor, in about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide, and 8 at High Tide. From the Eastward, as soon as the Gannet Rock Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W. J^ N., and run for it on this course, leaving the Spindle on the Old Propi'ietor about 1)^ miles on the Starboard hand ; give the last-named Lighthouse a berth of about Y2 mile, leaving it on the Port hand. When it bears SE. by S. j^ S., keep it on this bearing, and steer NW. by N. ^ N. for Gull Head Lighthouse, and follow the directions before given. In beating into this harbor, after passing Buck's Rock (before described), there are no dangers near the Western shore, and it may be approached at a distance of ^ mile without danger. Sigh Water* It is High Water at Seal Cove (or Wood Island Harbor) on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at lOh. 54m., or about 35 minutes before it is at Boston. Common Tides rise about 1ft feet. 294 ELDRIDGE'S COaST PILOT. Grand Harbor. The entrance to this Harbor, which is on the Southeastern part of Grand Menan Island, is about 7 miles East Northerly from Gull Head Lighthouse, and about NE. by N. ^ N. 8 miles from Gan- net Rock Lighthouse. Remarks, About 9 feet water can be carried into this harbor at Low Tide, and there is a ndrrow Channel of about 12 feet water a short dis- tance above the Lighthouse. Above this the water is shoal, but vessels may lie aground on mud secure from all winds. Grand Harbor Lighthouse. Upon Ross Island, East side of entrance to Grand Harbor, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. This Lighthouse bears from Ganhet Rock Lighthouse NE. by N. ^ N. ; distance 9j4 miles. Sailing Directions for Grand Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, as soon as Gull Head Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear E. by S., and run for it on this course. Give this Lighthouse a berth of nbout y^ mile, leaving it on the Port hand, and make good the course E. by S. J^ S. As you sail in, you will see on the Port hand the Wood Islands, the largest of which is quite high, and nearly ahead will also be seen the Three Islands. The best Channel into Grand Harbor, which is about l}( miles wide, is between the Wood Islands and Three Islands. When this passage is fairly open, run in, with the Lighthouse bearing about NE., keeping about midway the passage, leaving Green Island, which is small, on the Starboard hand. When well past this last- named Island, haul more Easterly until the Lighthouse bears NE. by N. ; then, with the harbor fairly open, run in, keeping nearost the Lighthouse, and anchor about }4 niile above it in about 2 fath- oms water at Low Tide, and 5 at High Tide. Above this the water is shoal. A short distance below the Lighthouse, in nearl}' mid- channel, there is said to be a Rock. Strangers entering this harbor at Low Tide should therefore shorten sail, and proceed with cau- tion. From the Eastward, as soon as the Gannet Rock Lighthouse is Upon Swallo Bearings ai ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 29n made, bring it to bear W. J4 N., and run for it on this course, leaving the Spindle on the Old Proprietor about 1% miles on the Starboard hand ; give the last-named Lighthouse a berth of about 1^ mile, leaving it on the Port hand. When it bears South, keep it on this bearing, and steer North until the passage between the Wood Islands and Three Islands is fairly open ; then run in as before directed. In beating in, keep about midway between the Wood Islands and Three Islands, as there are Ledges which extend otf some dis- tance from them. Vessels of more than 9 feet draught bound into Grand Harbor should anchor near its mouth in from 5 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide, and wait until at least }{ Flood before attempting to enter it. High Water, It is High Water in Grand Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at llh. 9m., or about 20 minutes before it is In Boston. Common Tides rise about 19 feet. Flag Cove. This deep Cove, which is easy of access, is situated upon the Northern side of Long Island Bay, which is on the Eastern side of Grand Menan Island, about 2j^ miles from its Northeast Head. Swallow Tail Lighthouse. Upon Swallow Tail, north side of entrance to Flag Cove, is a Lighthouse which shows a fixed White Light. Bearings and Distances from Swallow Tail Lighthouse. Distance. East Quoddy Head Lighthouse, . N. by W., . . 13 miles. South Wolf Lighthouse, . . . . N. by E. J^ E., 10^ " Point Lepreau Lighthouse, . . . NE. >^ E., . 21 Cape Spencer Lighthouse, . . . E. by N. ^ N., 44 Point Prim Lighthouse, entrance to DigbyGut, E.SE., ... 41 (( (( ti 296 ELDBIDOES COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Flag Cove in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for East- port Harbor (by Ship Channel) until Bishop Head, the Northeast part of Grand Menan, bears E. by S. ; then run for it on this course. Lea\e this last-named Head about ^ milo on the Star- board hand, and steer about S-SE., and haul round the Lighthouse on the Swallow Tail at a distance of about >^ mile, leaving Flag Point, which is the first point to the Westward of the Lighthouse, about Yi mile on the Starboard hand. After passing this last- named point, haul in to the Northwestward, and as soon as you strike 4 fathoms water at Low Tide, which will be 7 at High Tide, anchor with the outer part of Flag Point bearing about E.NE. From the Eastward, run for the Lighthouse on Swallow Tail on any bearing from SW. to NW., and follow the directions before given. In beating into this Cove the only danger to be avoided is a Ledge of Rocks which lies off about ^ mile Southeast from Flag's Point, and is bare at ^ Ebb. This Cove is somewhat exposed to Southeasterly winds, but the holding-ground is excellent. Whale Cove. This deep Cove, which is exposed to Northeasterly winds, is about \y2 miles Southeasterly from the Northeast Head of Grand Menan. Vessels beating down the Bay maj' anchor here, and wait for the turning of the Tide. The best anchorage is in from 10 to 15 fathoms water^ about yi mile from shore. Vessels entering this Cove should always sound before letting the anchor go. Steam WJiistle, On Bishop Head, Northeastern part of Grand Menan, is a Steam Whistle, which sounds in thick weather. West Quodd}' Head Lighthouse bears from this Steam Whistle NW. by W. % W., distance 7% miles ; East Quoddy Head Lighthouse, N. by W., distance 10^ miles ; Lighthouse on South Wolf Island, NE. by ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 297 N. /i N., distance 9 miles ; Point Lepreau Lights, NE. by E. j^ E., distance 20^ miles. Anchorage, There are several more good places of anchorage upon both the Eastern and Southeastern part of Grand Menan Island, but in no case should vessels attempt to enter them without a pilot. Currenta, The currents around Grand Mcnan Island, especially near its Southern, Southeastern and Eastern parts, run very strong. Vessels should not, therefore, attempt to navigate in this vicinity without a commanding breeze. Gape Spencer Lighthouse. Upon Cape Spencer, Northern side of Bay of Fundy, is a square white building with tower on top, which at this date (1884) shows a Revolving Bed and White Light. Bearings and Distances tcoxa Cape Spenoer Lighthouse. Diata&oe. Revolving Light upon South- west Wolf Island, . . . W- J^ S., . . . 38 >4 miles. Swallow Tail Lighthouse (NE. part Grand Manan) , W. by S. 54 S., • . U% Gannet Rock Lighthouse, . SW. by W. J< W., 65 J^ Boar's Head Lighthouse (en- trance to Petit Passage) , . SW. byS., ... 50 Point Prim Lighthouse (en- trance to Annapolis Basin) , S. 5iW., . . t( Haute Island Lighthouse, Quaco Head Lighthouse, . Quaco Ledge, . . . . Sisters Ledge, . . . . E.byS. J^S., E* yi If.) . . 31J^ 39 18 E.byS. ^S., nearly 23^ E. by N., nearly . 6^ 298 SLDBIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. Quaco Head Lighthouse. Upon Quaco Head, Northern side of Bay of Fondy, la a Tower, painted white, with keeper's dwelling attached. At thi» date (1884) this Lighthouse shows a Revolving Light. Bearings and Distances from Quaco Head Lighthouse. Cape Spencer Lighthouse, . Point Piim Lighthouse (en- trance to Annapolis Basin) , Haute Island Lighthouse, Apple River Lighthouse, . . Cape Enrage Lighthouse, Quaco Ledge, Dlstanoe. W. J4 s., . . . . 18 m SW. byS., . . . 40 SE. byE. ^E., . 22^ E' /^ S., • . . . 80 E. ^N., . . . . 86K ' SE. by S., nearly . 8y^ ' ti u u (( u Inlets between Cape Spencer and Quaoo Head. Between Cape Spencer and Quaco Head, a distanca of about 18 miles, there are several sn^all Inlets or Creeks, Thich, however, are but little importance to navigation at Low Tide. Black River, about 5}4 miles Northeast from Cape Spencer, although dry at Half Tide, is a safe Inlet for a small Vessel. Dangers lying off the Coast from Cape Spencer to Quaco Head. From Cape Spencer to Quaco Head, u distance of about 18 miles, the principal danger is a small cluster of Rocks called the Sisters. This danger, which is about 6% miles to the Eastward of Cape Spencer, lies about one-half mile from land, and is cov- ered at High Wfitei'. There is a narrow Channel of 6 fathoms water between these Rocks and the shore. Quaco Ledge, This dangerous Ridge of Rocks, which is about % mile in length, is bare about an hour after Half Ebb. When covered they show a heavy Tide Rip. At Low Tide 11 fathoms water was found % mile Southwest from this danger ; 8 fathoms E. /^ N. %. mile from it ; and 12 fathoms ^ mile North from it. In night-time or ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 299 thick weather the lead, therefore, gives no warning in approach- ing it. Bearings and Distances from Quaoo Ledge. Diatonoe. Quaco Head Lighthouse, . . NW- hyjjt., . . 8^ miles. Haute Island Lighthouse, . . E. by S- ^ S-, • IH}^ ^' Cape Spencer Lighthouse, . W. by N- X N., . 23 J^ " Chigneoto Channel. This Channel, which lies between Cape ChignecUi ca the South and the Main-land on the North, ia really the Nortaeastern branch of the Bay of Fundy. Its width in entering is about 13 miles, with no dangers excepting those which lie near the shores. Oape Enrsige Lighthouse. Upon the Northern side of Chignecto Bay, near the pitch of the Cape,* is a white square building, which at th's date (1884) shows a Fixed White Light, visible from NW. to NE. by way of South. At this time a Steam Fog Whistle is placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather is sounded 4 seconds in each minute. Quaco Head Lighthouse bears from Cape Enrage Light- house W. ^ S., distance 36^ miles. Apple Biver Lighthouse, SW') 83^ miles. Grindstone Island Lighthouse, NE. by E. yi Em 10;^ miles. Salisbury Bay. This Bay, which lies between Mathews Head and Cape Enrage Lighthouse, has anchorage in it with winds from West to East by way of North. Sailing Directions. Vessels with Northeasterly Winds and an Ebb Tk]o, bound up the Bay, may leave Cape Enrage Lighthouse about two miles to the * A dry Ledge extends off S.SW. frOiii Cape Enrage Lighthouse nearlj' j{ mile. Vessels in thick weather or night-time should therefore leave this Lighthouse at least a mile to the Northward. 300 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Eastward, and run in about N. by W., leaving Salisbury Shoal (which has 20 feet water on it at Low Tide) well on the Port hand, and anchor about a mile from shore in about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. Inlets between Quaco Head Lighthouse and Cape Enrage Lighthouse. On the Northern side of the Bay of Fundy, between Quaco Head and Cape Enrage, a distance of about 36 miles, there are several small Rivers or Creeks, among which are the Salmon Rivers and also Wolf River. The entrance to Salmon River lies Northeasterly 8 miles from Quaco Head Lighthouse ; the entrance to Little Salmon River is Northeasterly 14 miles from this Light- house ; the entrance to Wolf River lies Northeasterly about 25 miles from Quaco Head Lighthouse, and about 11 miles to the Westward of. Cape Enrage Lighthouse ; the entrance to the thu-d Salmon River lies West-Northerly, about 7 miles from the Light- house at Cape Enrage. These Inlets are of little importance to vessels at Low Tide. r' Dangers lying off the Coast from Quaco Head Lighthouse to Cape Enrage Lighthouse. Quaco Shoal, This Shoal, which lies about a mile from shore, extends NE. and SW. one mile, and has at Low Tide as little as 8 feet water upon it. This depth lies NE. ^ E. about a mile from Quaco Head Lighthouse. There is a narrow Channel of 6 fathoms water between this danger and the shore. St. Martin's Sead, This Rock, which is elevated about 100 feet above the water, lies East-Northerly 17^^ miles from Quaco Head Lighthouse, and about Yi mile from land ; there is no passage £ jr vessels between this danger and the shore. Salisbury Shoal. This small spot, which lies about 2 miles from shore, has at Low Tide not less than 20 feet of water upon it. The centre of this ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 301 danger bears from Cape Enrage Lighthouse W. by N. j4 N. 3J^ miles. Between this Shoal and the shore there is a Channel of about 6 fathoms water at Low Tide. This passage has a width of about a mile. Between Quaco Head and Cape Enrage, in sev- eral places shoal water extends off some distance from the shore. Vessels, therefore, navigating this part of the coast, should, after passing Quaco Shoal, keep at least a mile from this part of the coast. High Water, It is High Water at Quaco Head on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at llh. 35m., or about 6 minutes after it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 28ft. From Cape Spencer to Cape Enrage, the currents of both Flood and Ebb set along the coast from 1^ to 2 knots. PETIT OOUDIAO RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is at the head of the North- eastern branch of the Bay of Fundy, lies East-Northerly about 65 miles from Cape Spencer, about 47 miles East-Northerly from Quoco Head Lighthouse, and 11 miles East-Northerly from the Lighthouse on Cape Enrage. Grindstone Island Lighthouse. Upon the Western side of Grindstone Island, West side of en- trance to Petit Coudiac River, is a small white octagonal build- ing, wliieh at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. A Fog Trumpet is placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather sounds blasts of four seconds in every minute. Cape Enrage Lighthouse bears from Grindstone Island Lighthouse SW. by W* Yi W. 10>4 miles. Grindstone STioal. This Shoal, which is about two hundred yards wide, extends NE-byE. and SW. byW. about one mile, and at Low Tide has about 9 ft. water upon it. Grindstone Island Lighthouse bears 302 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. from this last-named depth NE- by N. ji N., distance ^ mile. Between the Northeastern end of this danger and Grindstone Island, there is a passage of about 4j4 fathoms water at low tide. HUlahorough Wharf Lighthouse, On the West side of the River Petit Coudiac, on the end of the wharf leading to the coal mines, is an open frame, which, at this date (1884), shows a fixed White Light. This Lighthouse is about 13^ miles above Grindstone Island Lighthouse, and is in- tended to guide vessels up the River and to the coal and plaster wharves. Memarks, Shoal water extends oflC from both sides of the Petit Coudiac River. At Low Tide about 4 fathoms water can be carried up through a narrow Channel as far as Cole's Head, which is on the Eastern side about 9 miles above the entrance ; and from this Head to Moncton (which is 18 miles further) , there is in some places but little water in this River at Low Tide. From Moncton to Salisbury, a distance of 12 miles, the direction of this River changes from North to West. Dangers, About 65^ miles above Grindstone Island 'Lighthouse, on the Eastern side of the Channel, at the entrance to Grand Anse Bay, are some Rocks called Grand Anse Ledge. This danger covers at about one-half Flood. On the Eastern side of the Channel, a little below Cole's Head (before mentioned) , there are also Rocks called Memramcook Spit. Both the Grand Anse Ledge and Memram- cook Spit can be avoided by keeping in the middle of this River. Currents in the Betit Coudiac River, From the entrance to Cole's Head (before mentioned) the Cm- rent of Flood sets up from 2^ to 3^ knots, and from this last- named Head to Hillsborough Wharves from 3^ to 4 knots. Sailing Directions for Petit Coudiac River in Day- time with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels coming up the Bay of Fundy, bound up the Petit Cou- diac River, may leave Quaco Head about 1 % miles on the Toi i hand, an( good the order to about ly^ Lighthous (before d< with a CO open, run miles on tl from 11 t( hand. T^ N.NE., t Ledge on hand ; con fathoms ws up about 1 well on the Hillsboroug It is advi against the '4 Flood, a the rising 1 It is Hig Coudiac Ri ]|jIoon at llf Mean rise The entra Petit CoudijI house. * Cole's Hel nearly opposj Head, is the 1 !l ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 303 hand, and when the Lighthouse on this Head bears North, mike good the course E. ^ N. about 35j^ miles to Cape Enrage. In order to avoid the dangers ofif this Cape, leave the Lighthouse about 1}{ miles on the Port hand; when past this last-named Lighthouse, haul up about E.NE., leaving Grindstone Shoal (before described) well on the Port hand ; then at about j4 floods with a commanding breeze, with the entrance to the Kiver well open, run in about midway, leaving Grindstone Island about 1 ^ miles on the Port hand, and run up about NE. 3 miles, carrying from 11 to 6 fathoms water, and leaving the Ripples on the Port hand. When Cole's Head,* which is on the eastern side, bears N-NE', then run for it on this course, leaving Grand Ansa Ledge on the Starboard, and the Middle Ground on the Port hand; continue the course N.NE., carrying not less than 5 fathoms water, until about l}i miles from Cole's Head ; then haul up about N.NW., leaving the Rocks called Memramcook Spit well on the Starboard hand, and keep the middle of the River to Hillsborough "Wharves. If bound farther up, a pilot is necessary. It is advisable for strangers not to attempt to enter this River against the Current of Ebb, or at Low Tide, but to enter at about ^ Flood, as in case of getting ashore they may soon get off with the rising Tide. High Water, It is High Water at Grindstone Island entrance to the Petit Coudiac River on the days of the Full and the Change of the I^oon at lib. 47m., or about 18 minutes after it is in Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 37^ feet. MEMRAMCOOK RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is on the Eastern side of the Petit Coudiac, lies about 9 miles above Grindstone Island Light- house. * Cole's Head is 146 feet high, and lies on the Eastern side of the River, nearly opposite Folly Point ; between this last-named Point and Cole's Head, is the entrance to the Memramcook River. 304 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Memarhs, About. 4 feet water at Low Tide can be carried up as far as Dorchester Island, which lies on the Eastern side of the Channel, about Ij^ miles from the entrance. Above this last named Island there is in some places but little water at this time of tide. In order to avoid Memramcook Spit, vessels in entering this River should keep nearer Folly Point, which is on the Port side. This River is so narrow that it is advisable for strangers bound up to take pilots. Anchorage to the Northward of Grindstone Island, There is good Anchorage in 3J^ fathoms water at Low Tide, about ifo ™^l6 to the Northward of Gr'ndstone Island. In enter- ing, the Channel between Grindstone Island and St. Mary Ledge* is narrow. About 3^ fathoms water can be taken in to this anchorage at low tide. Sailing Directioiis. Coming up the Bay of Fundy, when past Cape Enrage bring Grindstone Island Lighthouse to bear NE. by E., and run for it on this course, leaving Grindstone Shoal, before described, on the Starboard hand. When about %. mile from the Lighthouse steer NE. by N., passing between St. Mary and Jones Ledges, and carrying not less than 3^^ fathoms water at Low Tiie through the narrow Channel. When Grindstone Island Lighthouse bears S> J4 W. , then anchor in about 3 J^ fathoms water, at Low Tide, muddy bottom. At Low Tide there is no passage for vessels to the Northward of Grindstone Island. SHEPODY RIVER. The entrance to this River lies about 2% miles Northwesterly from Grindstone Island Lighthouse. * The Eastern end of St. Mary Ledge, which exiends oik Northeastly fh)m St- Mary Island, bears flrom the Western part of Qrlndstone Island NW. by N., distance six-tenth mile. direction froj entrance to ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 305 Remarks, The Shepody River is very narrow and crooked, with but little water at Low Tide at the entrance. It is therefore advisable for strangers bound up to take pilots. Albert Quarry. This Quarry is located upon the Southern part of St. Mary Island, and may be approached within Tide. This Quarry lies West about end of Grindstone Island. bv vessels at Low % mile J J4 miles from the Western Remarks. About 12 miles al;ove Gape Enrage, the Northeast Branch of the Bay of Fundy ii'ivides into two branches, one leading to the Petit Coudiac River, the other to Cumberland Basin. It is said that the Cumberland branch is navigable to within 13 miles of Vsfte Bay in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. CUMBERLAND BASIN. The entrance to this Basin, which is about \y^ miles wide, lies between Cape Maringouin on the North and Boss Point on the South. In entering there are extensive Flats, which extend off in some places a long distance from both sides. At Low Tide from 214^ to 9 fathoms water can be carried up as far as Woody Point, which is on the Northern side, about l}i miles from the entrance. Above this there is at Low Tide but little water to Sackville. There are several Rivers which empty into the Cum- berland Basin, among which are Herbert River, Macan River, Napan River, Amherst River, Missiquash River, Oulac River and Tantremar River. Most of these Rivers are navigable at High Water. Cape Maringouin Shoals, Dangerous Shoals, some of which have but little water upon them at Low Tide, extend off nearly 2 miles in a Southwesterly direction from Cape Maringouin, which is on the Northern side of entrance to the Cumberland Basin. Grindstone Island Light- 306 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. house bears from the outer end of this danger NW*? distance about S}( miles. Currents, In entering Cumberland Basin the currents of Flood and Ebb set in and out from 4 to 5 knots. Sailing Directions for Cumberland Basin in Day- time, with Favorable Winds and Fair Weather. Vessels coming up the Bay of Fundy, bound to Cumberland Basin, may leave Cape Enrage about a mile to the Northward. When the Lighthouse on this Cape beai's N W. , make good the course E. ^ N., leaving Cape Maringouin Shoals (before de- scribee') well on the Port hand; then, on the first of the Flood, with the passage leading to Cumberland Basin well open, and also with a coxfimanding breeze, run in about midway ; when past Boss Point (which is the first on the Starboard hand in entering) keep the Port side Ibest aboard. There is at Low Tide good anchorage a short distance above Woody Point,* in about 3^ to 4 fathoms water. If bound to any of the Rivers in Cumberland Basin a pilot is necessary at this Anchorage. High Water, It is High Water in Cumberland Basin on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 11 h. 55 m., or about 26 minutes after it is in Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides about 42 ft. APPLE RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is on the Southeast side of the Northeast branch of the Bay of Fundy, lies East-Southerly, 30 miles from Quaco Head Lighthouse, Northeasterly 9 miles from Cape Chinecto, Southwest 8^ miles from Cape Enrage Light- house, and West-Southerly about 19 miles from Grindstone Island Lighthouse. * Woody Point is on the ]S 'rtbern side about 7i miles from the en- trance. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 307 Apple River Lighthouse, Upon Hetty or Capstan Point, north side of entrance to Apple River, is a Wiiite oblong building witli tower on top, which, at this date (1884), shows a fixed White Light. Bearings and Distances from Apple Biver Lighthouse. Distances. W. ^ N., . . 30 mUes. NE. 85^ NE. ^ E., . . 18j4 W. by S. % S., 26 Quaco Head Lighthouse, . . Cape Enrage Lighthouse, . . Grindstone Island Lighthouse, Quaco Ledge, (( (( (( Remarks, At Low Tide about 6 feet water can be taken into Apple River about a mile past the Lighthouse. Above this it is only navigable at High Tide. In entering keep nearer the Lighthouse Point. High Water, .» It is High Water at Apple River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 11 h. 35 m., or about 9 minutes after it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 34 ft. Dangers lying off the Coast from Boss Point (en- trance to Cumberland Basin) to Apple River Lighthouse. Between Boss Point and Apple River Lighthouse, a distance of 24 miles, there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shore. Vessels, therefore, bound up or down the Northeast branch of the Bay of Fundy, may approach this part of the coast within a mile without danger. Inlets between Boss Point (entrance to Cumber- land Basin) and Apple River Lighthouse. Between Boss Point and Apple River Lighthouse, a distance of 24 miles, there are several Creeks or small Inlets which are of little importance to vessels, especially at Low Tide. 308 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Cape Chignecto. This Cape, which is steep Cliffs of Rocks and Red Earth, with deep water close to it, is elevated about 800 feet above mean Low Water, and lies Southwesterly about 10 miles from Apple River Lighthouse. From thie Cape to the last-named Lighthouse, there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shore. Ves- sels may therefore approach this part of the coast within J^ mile without danger. Haute Island Lighthouse bears from Cape Chignecto SW. V2 W., distance, 5^ miles; Cape D'Or Fog Whistle, SE. by E., 7^ miles. Cape D*Or. This Cape, which is elevated about 500 feet above the level of the sea, is bold, and bears from Cape Chignecto about SB. by E., distance, 7^4 miles. On the Flood Tide heavy Rips extend off about 1^ miles to the Southward of this Cape. Cape D^Or Fog Whistle, Upon the extreme point of Cape D'Or, North side of entrance to the Basin of Mines, is a Fog Whistle, which in thick weather is sounded 6 seconds in every 30 seconds. In thick weather or night-time this Whistle may be approached close to without danger. Bearings and Distances from Cape D'Or Fog Whistle. Distanoea. Cape Chignecto, . . . Haute Island Lighthouse, Black Rock Lighthouse, . Cape Spencer, .... Cape Split, NW. byW., . . W. >^ N., . . S. by W. )i W., £• y^ J?iM • • • E* ^ S., lYi miles. 10 J^ " 12^ High Water, It is High Water at Cape D'Or on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 11 h. 42 m., or 13 minuter after it is in Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 36 ft. The Currents of Ebb and Flood run by Cape D'Or from 5 to 6 knots. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 309 ADVOCATE BAY. This Bay, which lies between Cape Chignecto and Cape D'Or, hds at Low Tide a depth of from 10 to 18 fathoms water in it. Shoal water extends off from the Southeastern part of this Bay, but the Northwestern part is bold. Isle Haute Lighthouse. Upon the highest part of Haute Island, at the entrance of thie Gut leading into the Basin of Mines, is a white square wooden building nearly hidden by trees, which at this date (1884) shows an Intermitting "White Light 40 seconds in every minute . The Island is bold on all sides excepting its Eastern end. From this part Shoal Water extends off about y> mile in an Easterly direction. From the Eastern part of this Island heavy Rips extend oif about a mile to the Northward, and there are also Rips to the Southward of it. Bearings and Distances from Isle Haute Lighthouse. Diatanoei. Cape Spencer Lighthouse, W. by N. J^ N., . Quaco Head Lighthouse, . NW. by W. % W, Cape Chignecto, . . . NE. % "E.j . . . Black Rock Lighthouse, . SE., . . . . . Fog Signal on Cape D'Or, E. >^ S., . . . . Cape Split, E- >^ S., . . . . 39 miles. 22^ u 5y2 (( ny2 (( ^0% (( (( Cape Spencer. This Cape, which is on the Northern side of the entrance to the Basin of Mines, has deep water close to it, and lies E- % N., about 3^ miles from Cape D'Or. The currents of Flood and Ebb set in and out from 5 to 6 knots by Cape Spencer. Spencer Island- This Island, which is small, lies about a mile NE> }^ E> from Cape Spencer, and about |^ mile from shore. Between this Island and the Main-land there is a Channel of 2 fathoms water at Low Tide. 310 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Anchorage, About a mile \o the Northward of Spencer Island there is good Anchorage about ^ mile from shore in 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. This is a good place for vessels waiting for winds or tides. Cape Sharp. This Cape, which has deep water close to it, is on the North- ern side of entrance to the Basin of Mines, and lies E. ]4t S. 14 miles from Cape Spencer, and E. >^ N- 5 miles from Cape Split. Black Rook. West-Northerly, about a mile from Cape Sharp and J4 mile from shore is Black Rock. There is a narrow Channel between this Rock and shore. Strangers should not attempt this passage except in cases of emergency. At such times keep neai'er the Bock. Dangers between Cape Sharp and Spenoer Island. From Spencer Island to Black Rock (before described), a dis- tance of about 12 miles, there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shore. Vessels navigating this part of the coast may therefore approach the shore within ^ mile without danger. Inlets between Cape Spenoer and Cape Sharp. Between Cape Spencer and Cape Sharp there are but few Inlets, which are of little importance to commerce. Cape Split. This Cape, which lies on the Southwest side of entrance to the Basin of Mines, is elevated about 400 feet above the level of the sea, and lies E. f^ S. 1'2J^ miles from the Fog Whistle at Cape D'Or. A Rocky Shoal extends off Northwesterly nearly a mile from the Northwest point of this Cape, over which the currents of Flood and Ebb set in and out with great strength and velocity. At the time of the Full and Change of the Moon there are Whirl* pools which are said to be dangerous. about .5 mi ELDUIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 311 BASIN OP MINES. The entrance to the Basin of Mined, which is between Cape Split on the Southwest and Cape Sharp on the Northeast, is in its nan'owest part about 3 miles wide, and lies about 15 miles to the Eastward of Cape D'Or. Memarks, The length of tlie Basin of Mines from Cape Split to Economy Point (the Northirn side of entrance to Cobequid Bay) is about 26 miles, and its average width about 12 miles. There are ex- tensive flats or shoals which at Low Tide extend off from both sides. The principal Inlets on the Northern side are Parrsboro River and East River, both of which are not navigable at Low Tide. On the Southern tide are Cornwallis River, Horton River and Avon River, the latter of which at Low Tide is navigable for very light draught vessels as far as Hantsport. On account of the great strength and velocity of the currents there are but few good places of anchorage in the Basin of Mines. Anchorage in the Basin of Mines, EDEN COVE. The entrance to this Cove, which is on the Northern side of entrance to the Basin of Mines, lies between Cape Sharp on the West and Partridge Island on the East, and bears East from Cape Split distance about 6 miles, and from Cape Blomidon North about 5 miles. On the last of the Flood it is advisable for strangers (especially with light winds) when past Cape Split to haul in and anchor in this Cove, in about 11 fathoms at High Water, which will be 5 <'athoms at Low Tide. Then, if bound to Windsor or Cornwallis, get under way a little before Low Water, in order to get into the stream which runs to the Southward by Cape Blomidon* into the Cornwallis and Avon Rivers ; otherwise, * Cape Blomidon, which is elevated about 600 feet above the level ot the sea, has deep water close to it, and Ilea about 7^ miles to the South- eastward of Cape Split, which is on the Southwest side of entrance to the Basin of Mines. 312 ELURI DOE'S COAST PILOT. witli light winds, there id danger of being carried up with the Cobc(iuid Bay tide, which runs with great strength and velocity. Ancliorage to the Southward of Cape Blomidon, Vessels bound to tins Anchorage may leave Capo Bloraidon about a mile to the Westward and make good the course SS-W. "When the water shoals to 4 fathoms at Low Tide then anchor. This depth will be about 12 fathoms at High Tide. Masters of vessels will therefore govern themselves according to time of tide. Capo Blomidon bears from this Anchorage N. by E. about 5 miles. OORNWALLIS RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is near the Southwest side of the Basin of Mines, lies Southwesterly about 12 miles from Capo Blomidon. About 3 miles above the entrance, on the South side of this River, is Cornwallis. Kingsport Lighthouse, Upon Oak Point Pier, West side of entrance to Cornwallis River, is an open frame painted brown ; the upper part, which is enclosed, is painted white, and at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Iteniark8, Cornwallis River, which is narrow and crooked, is not navi- gable at Low Tide. Strangers bound to this place should there- fore employ pilots. Sailing Directions for Cornwallis River in Day- time, with favorable Winds and fair Weather. Strangers coming up the Bay of Fundy bound to Cornwallis River, may, with a commanding breeze, on the first of the Flood, leave Cape Spencer (before described) about a mile on the Port hand, and make good the course £. by N-, leaving the Tide Rips and Whirlpools off Cape Split well on the Starboard hand. When the ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 313 iiv c-nained Capo bears &£• hy S., steer more easterly, paaHing iu about luiilway ; leave Cape LUomidon about a mile on the Star- board, and baul up about S>SW' When the water Hlioalu to 4 fatUoniH at low tide, then anchor. A pilot is necessary here. Cape lUomiudon boai's from this anchorage N- by £}. about 5 miles. With light winds and the last of the Flood, when abreast Capo Spencer, it is advisable for strangers to haul in and anchor about a mile to the Northward of Spentser Island in about 5 fathoms at Low Tide. AVON RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is on the southern side of the Basin of Mines, lies between Horton BlufiC on the Southwest and Indian Point on the Northeast, and bears from Cape Blomidon about South 1 2 miles. Horton Bluff Lighthouse, Upon Horton Bluff, "West side of entrance to Avon River, is a white square building which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Memarks. The approaches to Avon River are rendered extremely diffi- cult on account of extensive Flats which extend off to the North- ward more than .5 miles from the entrance. On account of the rapid current these Flats are constantly changing, leaving narrow channels without any well-defined leading marks. No stranger should therefore, under any circumstances, attempt to enter this River without a local pilot. From Horton Bluff Lighthouse to Hantsport (which is on the West side), the distance is 3^ miles ; thence about 5 miles to Windsor. Sailing Directions for Avon River in Day-time, with favorable Winds and fair Weather. Strangers coming up the Bay of Fundy bound to Aron River or Windsor, may with a commanding breeze, on the first of the Flood, leave Cape Spencer (before described) about a mile on the Fort 3M ELDEIDGE'S COAST PILOT. hand, and make good the course E. by N., leaving the Tide Rips and Whirlpools of Cape Split well on the Starboard hand. When the last-named Cape bears SEI. by S., steer more easterly, pass- inet in about midway. Leave Cape Blomidon about a mile on the Starboard hand, and haul up about S.SW. When the water shoals to 4 fathoms at Low Tide, which is about 11 at High Water, then anchor, and take a pilot to Avon River. With light winds and the last of the Flood, when abreast Cape Spencer, it is advisable for otrangers to haul in and anchor about a mile to the Northward of Spencer Island in about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. See directions tor this Anchorage before given. High Water. It is High Water in the Avon River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 12 h. 30 m., or 1 h. 1 m. after it is in Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 44 ft. WALTON HARBOR. The entrance to this small Harbor, which is on the Southern Bid? of the BaRin of Mines, lies East-Northerly 11 miles from the entrance to the Avon River, West-Southerly 10 miles from the Lighthouse at Burntcoat Head, and East-Southerly 14 miles from Cape Blomidon. Walton Harbor Lighthouse, Upon the Northeast side of entrance to Walton Harbor is a square white building which at this date (1884) shows a fixed Red Light. Remarks, A Bar which is dry rit Low Tide, extends off Northerly nearly 2 miles from the entrance of this Harbor. Strangers should not therefore attempt to enter this {narrow shallow place without a pilot. Upon the Southern side of the Basin of Mines there arc several small Creeks and Rivers, which are of little importance to com- merce at Low Tide. ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. PABRSBORO RIVER. 315 The entrance to this River, which is on the Northern side of the Basin of Mines near the entrance, lies abont 8 miles East from Cape Split, and about 6 miles Northeasterly from Cape Blomidon. ^Parrahoro Lighthouse, Upon the West side of entrance to Parrsboro River, is a Square White Dwelling with lantern on top which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Remarks, Parrsboro River is only navigable at High Water. Strangers bound to Parrsboro should anchor in Eden Cove (before described) , and take pilots into this place. High Water, It is High Water at the entrance of Parrsboro River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 12 h. 05 m., or 36 m. after it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 40 feet. Remarks, On the Northern side of the Basin of Mines, from Partiidge Island (West side of entrance to Parrsboro River) to Economy Point, there are several Rivers, among which are North River, East River and Economy River. The entrance to the two former lies Northeasterly from the Five Islands ; the latter lies on the Western side of Economy Point. These Rivers are only navi- gable at High Water, and to safely enter them the services of a pilot are necessary. OOBEQUID BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is at the Eastern part of the Basin of Mines, is about 4 miles wide, and lies between Economy Point on the North, and Burncoat Head on the South. The en- 316 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. trance to this Bay bears from Cape Blomidon E- by S. J4 S., distance 21 miles. The length of this Bay from Bumcoat Head Lighthouse to Truro is 21 miles. Bumcoat Head Idghthouae, Upon Burncoat Head, South side of entrance to Cobequid Bay, is a Square White Dwelling with lantern on top, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Cape Blomidon bears from this Lighthouse W- by N. ji N. 22^ miles. Western part of the Brick-kiln Ledges NW- by W. % W. 6^4 miles, and Economy Point NW. ^ N. 4 miles. Vessels bound in or out of Cobequid Bay may at Low Tide approach Burncoat Head within a mile witliout danger. Economy Point. This Point is on the Northern side of entrance to Cobequid Bay. Rocky Shoals called the Brick-kiln Ledges extend off to the Westward nearly 4 miles from it. The Southern part of these dangers bears from Economy Point West about 3 miles. In order to avoid these dangers vessels bound up or down Cobequid Bay should keep nearer the Southern side. Spencer Point Lighthouse. Upon Spencer Point, North side of Cobequid Bay. is a small Building which at this date (1884) shows from one of the win- dows a fixed White Light. Burncoat Head Lighthouse bears from Spencer Point Lighthouse W. ^ S. 9j^ miles. Memarka, By keeping in the middle, at Low Tide about 5 fathoms water can be carried up about 4 miles past Burncoat Head Lighthouse Above this there are extensive Flats, most of which at this time of Tide are dry. Between Burncoat Head and Point Economy (entrance to this Bay) the current of Flood and Ebb set» out and in from 4 to 5 knots. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. sii SHUBENAOADIB RIVER. The entrance to this River, which ia on the South side of Cobe- quid Bay near its head, lies East-Southerly about 13 miles from Burncoat Head Lighthouse, and Southeasterly 6j4 miles from Spencer Point Lighthouse. Memarka, From the entrance to "Welsford, a distance of about 15 miles, the Shubenacadie River is navigable at High Tide. Upon the the Western side of the entrance of this River is Maitland. Truro. About 8 miles to the Eastward of the entrance to Shubenaca- die River, near the head of the Bay, is Truro. Vessels at High Tide can pass up to this place. Inlets on the Northern Side of Cobeqnid Bay. Upon the Northern side of Cobequid Bay, there are several small Inlits or Rivers, none of which are navigable at Low Tide. High Water. It is High Water in Cobequid Bay on the days of the Full ana Change of the Moon at 12 h. 41 m., or about 1 h. 12 m. after it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 48 ft. This is the highest rise in Bay of Fundy. Black Rock Lighthouse. Upon the Southern side of the Bay of Fundy is a White Square Building with lantern on top, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Haute Island Lighthouse bears from Black Rook Lighthouse NW. Ilj4 miles; Fog Whistle on Cape D'Or, N. byE. }4 E., 7^ miles; Cape Split, E. by N. ji N. 15 miles. 318 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. SCOTSMAN'S COVE. To the Southward of Cape Split is a large deep bend called Scotsman's Cove, which has hut litile water in it at Low Tide. Vessels navigating this part o^ the coast should therefore give this Cove a wide berth. Dangers between ScotsnLiLii's Cove and Black Rock Lighthouse. Between Scotsman's Cove and Black Rock Lighthouse there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shore. Vessels there- fore navigating this pai't of the coast may keep about % mih from the shore without danger. Margaretville Idghthouse. Upon the extremity of the Point (South side of Bay of Fundy) is a Lighthouse painted in Horizontal Black and White Stripes. At this date (1884) this Lighthouse shows a fixed Red Light. A short distance to the Eastward of this Lighthouse is a small Pier or Breakwater. Black Rock Lighthouse bears from Mar- garetville Lighthouse £. by N. 15 miles, Haute Island Light- house NE. by N. ^/( N. 12j4 miles, and Fog Whistle on Cape D'Or NE. by E. X E- 19 miles. Dangers between Black Rock Lighthouse and Margaretville Lighthouse. Margaretville Shoal, This Shoal, which is about ^ mile from shore, lies E.NE- and' W.SW. about ^ mile, and at I-ow Tide has but little water upon it. The shoalest part of this danger bears from Margaret- ville Lighthouse NE. by E. K E. about a mile. There is a nar- row Channel between this obsti'uction and the shore. There are no other dangers off this part of the coast, and vessels bound up or down the Bay may approach the shore within a mile without danger. ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 319 Part Williama or Marshall Cove Idghthouse, Upon the South side of Bay of Fundy is a White Square Build- ing with lantern on top. At this date (1884) two fixed White Lights (one above the other) are shown from this Lighthouse. A short distance to the Westward of this Lighthouse is a small Pier or Breakwater. Point Prim Lighthouse, entrance to Annap- olis Basin, bears from Port Williams Lighthouse W. by S. ji S-j 27 miles ; and Margaretville Lighthouse, E. by N. }4 N, 10^ miles. Dcngers between Margaretville Lighthouse and Fort Williams Lighthouse. Between Margaretville Lighthouse and Port Williams Light- house there are not any dangers excepting those which lie near the shore. Vessels bound up or down the Bay of Fundy may approach this shore within j^ mile without danger. Currents between Fort Williams Lighthouse and Black Bock Lighthouse. Between Port Williams Lighthouse and Black Rock Lighthouse, a distance of about 26 miles, the currents of Flood and Ebb set up and down the Bay from 2 to 3 knots. The current turns out of the Bay off shore about 20 minutes after High Water, and turns in about 20 minutes after Low Water. High Water, It is High Water at Port Williams Lighthouse on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 11 h. 15 m., or about 14 min- utes before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides 25 feet. St. Croix Bay. This small Bay or Cove lies about 2j4 miles to the Westward of Port Williams Lighthouse. In Summer, with good weather and winds off the land, small vessels may anchor in this place iu about 5 fathoms of water at Low Tide. 320 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. ANNAPOLIS BASIN. The entrance to this Basin, which is by the narrow passage called Digby Gut, lies West-Southerly about 26 miles from Port Williams Lighthouse, about 35 miles S. % lii* from Partridge Island Lighthouse, entrance to the Harbor of St. John ; East- Southerly 44 miles from the Northeast part of Grand Manan, and East-Northerly about 26 miles from Boar's Head, entrance to the Petit Passage. Point PHm Lighthouse, Upon Point Piim, Southern side of the Bay of Fundy, and West side of entrance to Annapolis Basin, is a Lighthouse painted in Red and White vertical Stripes, with square Tower. At this date (1884) this Lighthouse shows a fixed White Light. A Whistle is placed near the Lighthouse which in thick weather sounds 8 seconds in each minute. Bearings and Distances f^om Point Frim Lighthouse. Distance. . E. by N. ^ N., . 27 miles. Port Williams Lighthouse, . . Partridge Island Lighthouse, enti'ance to St. John, . . . Swallow Tail Lighthouse, . . Gannet Rock Lighthouse, . . Boar's Head Lighthouse, en- trance to Petit Passage, . . Ncwrth, .... 35 NW.byW.?^ S., . . 9J4 " Memarks, Petit Passage is about 2 miles long, and about }( mile wide, with a depth of from 6 to 20 fathoms water at Low Tide. In navigating this Passage the principal danger is Boar's Head Shoal, which lies at the Northern entrance, and at Low Tide has 7 feet water upon it. Boar's Head Lighthouse bears from this danger SW. by S. y3 mile. There is a narrow Channel of 4 fathoms water between this Shoal and the Lighthouse. Strangers should not, however, attempt to pass through this last-named passage except in cases of emergency. KLDltlDGES COAST TILOT. C? rents* The current of Flood sets to the Northward through this passage at the rate of about 7 knots, while the YMb sets through to the Southward with about the same strength and velocity, btrangers should uot therefore attempt this passage with light winds. Sailing Directions for Petit Passage in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels coming down the Bay of Fundy, and wishing to pass through the Petit Passage into St. Mary Bay, may, with a com- manding breeze, on the Ebb, run through, keeping about midway the Passage. In order to avoid Boar's Head Shoal (before de- scribed), in entering, keep nearer the Eastern side. Vessels from St. Mary Bay, wishing to pass through the Petit Passage into the Bay of Fundy, may, with a commanding breeze, on the Flood, run through, keeping midway the passage. In order to avoid Boar's Head Shoal, when abreast the Lightliouse Jceep nearer the Eastern side. ♦ High Water, It is High Water at the entrance of the Petit Passage on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 10 h. 41 m., or about 48 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean Rise and Fall of Tides, 20 feet. Dangers between Point Prim Lighthouse (entrance to Annapolis Basin) and Boar's Head Lighthouse (entrance to the Petit Passage). Between Point Prim Lighthouse and Boar's Head Lighthouse, a distance of 25 miles, there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shore. Vessels, therefore, bound up or down the Bay of Fundy, may approach this part of the coast within ^ mile with- out danger. Currents, The currents of Flood and Ebb from Point Prim Lighthouse to Petit Passage set along the shore at the rate of from 2 to 2^ knots. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 325 Orand Passage. The entrance to this Passage which leads into the entrance of St. Mary Bay, is on the Southern side of the Bay of Fundy, and lies West-Southerly about 9 miles from Boar's Head Lighthouse i Southwesterly 58 miles from Partridge Island Lighthouse ; South- westerly about 47 miles from Point Lepreau Lighthouse ; South- easterly about 2314 miles from the Ga^rot Rock Lighthouse, and East-Northerly 3^ miles from Bryer Island Lighthouse. Weatport Lighthouse, Upon Peters Island near the middle of the Southern entrance to the Grand Passage is a White, Square Building, which at this date (1884) shows two fixed White Lights 24 feet apart; these lights are visible fi-om the Northward between the bearings of S. by W-, and S.SWm and from the Southward between the bearings of NE. by E., and NW. by N- % N . Dangers in Navigating the Orand Passage. Peters Island Ledge, This Ledge extends off about ^ mile to the Northward of the Lighthouse on Peters Island ; but the Eastern, Western and Southern sides of this Island are quite bold. • Passage Shoal, This small Rocky Shoal, which at Low Tide has about 19 feet water upon it, lies nearly in the middle of the Passage, and has deep water on both sides of it. Peters Island Lighthouse bears from this danger S. % W. ]^ mile. Heavy draught ves- sels should avoid this danger. Cow Ledge, About % mile from tlie Northern entrance to the Grand Pas- sage, upon the Eastern side of the Channel, is Cow Ledge. This danger, which extends off from the Eastern side about J^ mile, is bold on its Western side. In order to avoid this danger, vessels navigating this Passage should keep the Western shore close aboard. 326 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Cow Ledge Shoal, At the Northern entrance to the Grand PuHsage, nearly in the middle of the Channel, is Cow Ledge Shoal, which at Low Tide has about 13 feet water upon it. The best Channel is to the Westward of this danger. Shoal water also extends off about 250 yards Northeasterly from the Northern Point of Bryer Island, West side of entrance to this passage. Remarks, The length of the Grand Passage from tne Northern entrance to Peters Island, which is near the Southern entrance, is 1^ miles ; its width varies from ^ to -)4 mile. At Low Tide about € fathoms water can be taken through this Passage. Currents, The currents of Flood and Ebb run through this Passage at the rate of from f) to 6 miles an hour ; the Flood sets to the Northward, while that of the Ebb runs to the Southward. With light winds strangers should not attempt this Passage. Sailing Directions for the Grand Passage in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Bay of Fundy intending to pass through the Grand Passage may, with a commanding breeze and Ebb Tide, run, through ; in order to avoid Cow Ledge Shoal and Cow Ledge ' (both of which have before been described), keep the Western shore close aboard ; when past Cow Ledge large or heavy draught vessels should run for Peters Island Lighthouse, bearing S- by W. % W., leaving Passage Shoal on the starboard hand; when about y^ mile from the Lighthouse, steer moi'e Southerly, leaving it not more than 300 yards on the Starboard hand ; when past this Lighthouse steer SSW- out of the Passage. Vessels from St. Mary Bay bound through the Grand Passage may, with a commanding breeze and Flood Tide, leave the Light- house on Peters Island about 300 yards on the Port hand, and steer about North (leaving Passage Shoal which has 19 feet water upon it at Low Tide) on the Port hand ; when past this danger, in order to avoid Cow Ledge and Cow Ledge Shoal, keep the Western shore close aboard, and run out of the Passage. Thor (opposi Isl' nd, Vess« in and Northeii from th At Lc vessels < Passage It is I and Chai at Bostoi Upon t onal Bull Light. A Steal weather of 4 secoi house bee miles. TheNc the Granc no dangei therefore, danger. Fi'om tl is dry at and termii named dai water clos Lighthous bound out ELDRIDGF/S COAST PILOT. 327 Anchorage in the Qrand Passage. There is Anchorage on the Western Hide of this Passage (opposite the vilhij^e of VVestport), about J^ mile above Peters Isl' ad, in from 7 to U fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels bound either way through tlie Grand Passage may haul in and anchor in from 7 to 9 fathoms water at Low Tide ; the Nortlieaf c end of Peters Island bears about SB. by S., ^ mile from this Anciiorage. At Low Tide, by keeping midway the channel, which is narrow, vessels of not more than 12 feet draught can enter the Grand Passage to the Westward of Poters Island. High Water, It is High Water in the Graad Passage on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, 10 h. 43 m., or about 46 ra. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 19 feet. Bryer Island Lighthouse, Upon the Northwestern point of Bryer Island is a Wliite Octag- onal Building, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. A Steam Whistle is placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather sounds three blasts of 4 secords duration, with intervijls of 4 seconds between them, in each minute. Gannet Ilock Light- house bears from Bryer inland Lighthouse NW- by N. yi N. 23 miles. Remarks, The Northwestern side of Bryer Island from the entrance of the Grand Passage to the Lighthouse, is quite bold, and there are no dangers excepting those \y'\\>% near the shore. Vessels may, therefore, approach this part of the Island within y^ mile without danger. . From the Southwest end of Bryer Island, a Rocky Shoal, which is dry at about Yz Ebb, extends off Southwest about l]^ miles, and terminates with a small Rock called Gull Rock. This last- named danger is about 6 feet above High Water, and has deep water close to it except on its Southwest side. Bryer Island Lighthouse bears from Gull Rock N. by E. 2^ miles. Vessels bound out or into St. Mary Bay should beware of this danger. 328 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Bryer Island S^ W, Ledge, This Ledge, which is small, has at Low Tide about 12 feet water upon it. Gull liock (before described) bears from the centre of this danger NE. by E. ^ E. about 2 miles, Bryer Island Lighthouse NE. %. N. about 4 miles. One-half mile S.SW. from this danger 8 fathoms water is found ; SE. by S. )4 S., ^ mile, 14 fathoms; E-NE. ^ mile, 7 fathoms; W. NW. % mile, 5 fathoms ; and North J^ mile, 20 fathoms. Iq approaching this danger in thick weather or night-time, the lead therefore gives but little warning. Currents near 8. W. Ledge, The currents of Flood and Ebb run st'-ong across the S. W. Ledge making a heavy Tide Rip ; there ai e also strong Ripples between the Gull Rock and this danger, b':t the Channel between them,. which is nearly 2 miles wide, has irom 6 to 13 fathoms water in it. Northwest Ledge, This small, dangerous Ledge has but 4 or 5 feet water on it at Low Tide. Bryer Island Lighthouse bears from it S. by W. about 4 miles. This danger is very bold on its Northern, North- eastern and Northwestern parts, and cannot be approached by the lead JBeatson Ledge, This small Ledge, which at Low Tide has about 12 feet water upon it, lies West-Southerly about a mile from the Northwest Ledge. This danger is also bold, and cannot be approached by the lead. Bryer Island Lighthouse bears from Beatson Ledge S. K E., 3^ miles, to the Southeastward and South westward of Beatson and Northwest Ledges. There are several spots of from 5 to 10 fathoms water. Between these dangers and Bryer Island Lighthouse the Channel is about 3 miles wide, with a depth of from 20 to 30 fathoms water. Currents, The currents of Flood and Ebb set strong across these dangers, forminf^ heavy Tide Rips ; and tliere are also strong Tide Ripples in this vicinity. With light winds vessels bound up or down the Bay of Fundy should give these dangers a wide berth. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 329 ST. MARY BAY. Thi8 Bay lies between Cape St. Mary and the Mainland on the South, and Bryer Island, Long Island and the narrow Peninsula called Digby Neck on the North, and extends Northeasterly and Southwesterly about 30 miles. At the entrance it is about 11 miles wide, and gradually diminishes to 4 miles near its Head. Near the entrance the depth of water is from 20 to 30 fathoms, but gradually dec: eases to 10 and 5 fathoms. Near its Head it is dry at Low Tide. Cape St, Mary Lighthouse, Upon Cape St. Mary, South side of entrance to St. Mary Bay, is a White Octagonal Building, which at this date (1884) shows a Revolving Red and White Light every minute. Bearings and Distances from Cape St. Mary Lighthouse. Distance. CapeFourchu, S. by W., . . . ITJ^ miles. Peters Island Lighthouse, South entrance to the Grand Pass, N. by W., . . . Uj^ " South entrance to the Petit Pass, NE. byEj^E., . 17j^ " Trinity Rock, SW. 3^ W., . . 7 «' Bryer Island S. W. Ledge, . NW- 5^ N., . . 11 " Upon the Northern side of Cape St Mary the shore is bold, and vessels may approach within J^ mile without danger ; but a Rocky Shoal runs off Southwesterly nearly ^ mile from the Lighthouse, over which the current rui j strong, showing a heavy Tide Rip. Montegan Lighthouse. Upon the Southern side of St. Mary Bay about 8^ miles N'>rtheasterly from Cape St. Mary Lighthouse, upon the extreme end of the Breakwater, is a Lighthouse painted in lied Vertical Stripes on the seaward side. Lantern Black. At this date (1884) this Lighthouse shows a Green Fixed Light. The tide leaves the Breakwater upon which the Lighthouse stands, about an hour before Low Tide. Southern entrance to Grand Passage bears 330 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. from Montegan Lighthouse NW. by W- % W. 8>^ miles. South entrance to Petit Passage, N. %. £• 10 miles. From Montegan Lighthouse Shoal Water e .tends off North- westerly about a mile, and vessels bound up or down St. Mary Bay should beware of this danger. Church Point Idghthouae, About 15J^ miles Northeasterly from Cape St. Mary Light- house, upon Church Point, which is on the Southern side of St. Mary Bay, is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a Red Fixed Light. South entrance to Grand Pas- sage bears from Church Point Lighthouse W. by S ^ S. lOj, miles ; South entrance to Petit Passage, NW. |4 N. 4^^ miles. Between Montegan Lighthouse and Church Point Lighthouse Shoal Water extends off in some places nearly a mile. A Rocky Shoal also makes off a considerable distance Northeasterly from the last-named Point. Vessels bound up or dowu St. Mary Bay should not therefore approach this part of the coast nearer than IJ^ miles. SISSIBOU RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is on the Southern side of St. Mary Bay, lies Northeasterly 23 miles from Cape St. Mary Light- house, East-Northerly 18 miles from the South entrance to the Grand Pass, and East-Northerly 9 miles from the South entrance to the Petit Pass. 8i88ibou River Lighthouse, Upon the Southern side of St. Mary Bay, about 8 miles North- easterly from Church Point Lighthouse, and on the South side of entrance to Sissibou River, is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Remarks, On account of a Bar which lies near t'je entrance, the Sissiboa River is only navigable for vessels, at High Water, of from 14 to ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 331 1 7 f (!et draught. Near its entrance upon its Eastern side is the village of Weymouth. From Church Point Lighthouse to the en- trance of this River in some places Shoal "Water makes off nearly a mile from shore. Vessels bound up or down St. Mary Bay should beware of this danger. XJast Sandy Cove, This Cove, which is on the Northern side of St. Mary Bay, \a very small, and lies about 8j^ miles above the Southern entrance to the Petit Passage, and neai'ly opposite the entrance to Sissibou Eiver. At High Water about 6 feet can be taken into this Cove. St. Mary Shoal, This Shoal, which is about 4 miles above the entrance of the Sissibou River, extends Northeast and Southwest about 2 miles, and has a general width of about a mile. Near the middle of the shoal is a small rocky spot of 4 feet. With this exception the soundings upon it at Low Tide range from 9 to 18 feet. Between this danger and the Northern side of the Bay, close to the shore, there is a narrow Channel of 5 fathoms at Low Tide, and there is also a Channel of from 5 to 15 fathoms between it and the South- ern shore. Above St. Mary Shoal, to the head of the Bay there, is but little deep water at Low Tide. The Northern side of this Bay, from St. Mary Shoal to the entrance of the Grand Passage, is very bold, and vessels may approach it within ^ mile without danger. High Water, It is High Water in St. Mary Bay on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 10 h. 45 m., or abou*^^ 44 minutes before it is at Boston. Mean Rise and Fall of Tides, 19 ft. Gannet Hock Lighthouse, Gannet Rock, which is small, is elevated about 25 feet above water at High Tide. The Lighthouse, which is an Octagonal Tower, is painted in Vertical Stripes, Black and White, and at this date (1884) shows a Flashing White Light. A Gun is fired to answer signals in thick weather. 332 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Bearings and Distances from Oannet Book Lighthouse. Distance. Point Prim Lighthouse (en- trance to Annapolis Basin) , E. ^ Sm • • • • 44 miles. Boar's Head Lighthouse (en- trance to Petit Passage) , . SE. byE. 5SE> 4 miles. Between West Ledge and the Northern part of Long Ledge there is a Channel ^ mile wide, with a depth of 10 fathoms water at Low Tide. Wallace Ledge, This small Ledge, which is bare at about y^ Ebb, is the Northernmost of the Murr Ledges, and has deep water all round it. Gaunt ., Rock Lighthouse beai's from this danger SE. by E. 41^ miles ; Gull Head Lighthouse (Southwest Head Grand M;inan) N- ]4. E. 4^^ miles ; Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, W- Y^ N. 10 miles. Between Wallace Ledge and the Southwest Head of Grand Manan th«jre is a clear Cliannel 4 miles wide, having a depth of from 10 to 20 fathoms water ; but between this last-named Ledge and Machias Seal Island Lighthouses there are two dangerous Rocks called the Bull and S.E. Shoal. The former is bare at Low Tide, while the latter has about 9 feet water upon it ut this time of tide. Bull JRock, This small Rock, which is dry at Low Tide, has deep water rU round it. Gannet Rock Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by S. /i S., 7 miles ; Gull Head Lighthouse (Southwest Head Grand Manan), NE. by N., ^%. miles; Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, W. by N. Yt N., 7 miles. Southeast Ledge, This danger, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather, has not less than 5 fathoms water upon it at Low Tide. The current of 334 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT Flood and Ebb sets strong across this Ledge, forming heavy Tide Rips. Gannet Rock Lighthouse bears from Southeast Ledge E. Yi N. 10 miles; Machias Seal Island Lighthouses NW. Yt N., 5 ^ miles. Southeast Shoal, This is a small, Rocky Shoal, having but 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Machias Seal Island Lighthouses bear from this danger NW. 1^ miles. Machia8 Seal Island Ledge. This danger, upon which there are about 12 feet water at Low Tide, lies E. by S. J^ S., from Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, distance Yz mile. Cross Jack Ledge, This danger, which is above water, has deep water all round it. Gannet Rock Lighthouse bears from it C by S.* 2 miles. Half-Tide Rock. This danger, which has deep water all round it, lies W. Y2 N. about ^ mile from Gannet Rock Lighthouse. Gannet Rock Ledge, This Ledge, which has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies about Y^ ™il6 SE. by S. ^ S. from Gannet Rock Lighthouse. Manan Ledges, The Ledges which lie to the Southward of White Head Island * are Black Rock, the Northeasternmost of which is above water ; the Brazils, which are bare at Low Tide ; the Tinker, Northwestern- most, dry at Low Tide ; the Diamonds, which are also dry at Low Tide ; the Rans, or Westernmost ; the Proprietor, just seen at Low Tide, with Shoal Water about ^ mile to the Southward of it ; and lastly, the Old Proprietor, or the Outer or Southernmost of these dangers. T^iis dj Ledges, i marked w is elevate was found W., 1 mil covered, t and veloci from this ] Islands N" Between Island thei and Ebb se and Rippl( Strangers s of tuis Bea Between 1 Lighthouse 20 fathoms vessels in t about 20 f( from this ds Sailing D i Vessels fi as soon as tf W. Y2 N., ''2 mil I/, * White Head Island lies Southeasterly about 3 miles from the South- east end of Gran^ S. 2^^ miles. Sailing Directions for Gannet Rock Channel, with, favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Eastward, with a commanding breeze, may, as soon as the Gannet Rock Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W. J4 N., and run for it on this course, leaving the Beacon on the Old Proprietor about l}i miles on the Starboard hand ; when about }4 mile from this Lighthouse make good the course NW. byN. J^ N., and as soon as Gull Head Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NW. by N. }4 N., and run for it on this course. If bound to the Northward leave Gull Head, which is bold and free from dangers, about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. From the Northward or Westward, wishing to pass through Gannet Rock Channel, leave Gull Head Lighthouse about ^ mile 33G ELDUIDOE'S COAST PILOT. on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, make good tlie course SE. by S. As soon as Gaunet Rock Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear SE. by S- % S., and run for it on this course, leaving it about ^2 mile on the Starboard hand. High Water. It. i J High Water at Gannet Rock Lighthouse on the days of the r U !»'»d Change of the Moon at 10 h. 50 m., or about 39 minutes h( fon 1^ is at Boston. Jlean rise and fall of tides 18 feet. Trinity Ledge, . This Ledge, which in some parts is bare at Low Tide, lies about 6 miles from the Nova Scotia coast, and extends E.NE. and W.SW. about yi mile, and has a width of about % mile. At this time it- is marked off its Western side with a Bell Buoy. Cape St. Mary Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NE. by E. 7 miles ; Bryer Island Lighthouse, N. % E. 15^ miles ; Cape Fourchu, S. by E. 13^ miles; Whistling Buoy, off Lurcher Shoal, SW. by W. 12^^ miles ; N., >^ mile from this Ledge, 8 fathoms water was found; NE. by E. 1^ miles, 6 fathoms; E.SE. yi mile, 9 fathoms ; S., ^ mile, 7 fathoms, and W., \% miles, 30 fathoms. The current of Flood and Ebb sets strong over this danger ; the Flood sets North 2y^ knots, and the Ebb South, with about the same velocity. Lurcher Shoal* This dangerous Shoal, which lies about 14 miles from the Nova Scotia shore, extends about NE. and SW. about 3^ miles, and has from 9 feet .to 8 fathoms water on it. A Whistling Buoy has been placed in 13 fathoms water about Yz mile to the Westward of this danger. Cape Fourchu bears from this Buoy SE. by E. 54E. 14^4 miles; Cape St. Mary Lighthouse NE. by E. ?.9i^ miles; Bryer Island Lighthouse NE. by N. j^ N. 25^ miles; Gannet Rock Lighthouse N. 42 ^^ miles; Machias Seal Island Lighthouses N. by W. >^ W. 47j^ miles ; Bell Buoy of Trinity Ledge NE. by E. Viy^ miles. All round and close to this Ledge there are from 8 to 13 fathoms water and a little farther off on all sides, excepting the Northern, from 20 to 30 fathoms. Between the Lurcher Shoal and Trinity Ledge there is a Chan- ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 337 nel 10 miles wide, having from 10 to 30 fathoms water in it. The current of Flood sets strong to the Northward across the Lurcher Shoal, while that of the El ') sets to the Southward. Both these currents make a heavy Tide Rip upon this danger. Coast f^om Cape St. Mary to Cape Fourchu. From Cape St. Mary the coast runs Southwesterly about 17j4 miles to Cape Fourchu. Between the two last-named Capes there lire several Inlets which are of little importance to commerce. Dangers, From Cape St. Mary to Cape Fourchu tl le 'e but few dan- gers excepting those lying near the shor**. \..'3el8, therefore, navigating this part of the coast may approach it within a mile without danger. YARMOUTH HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is on the Western coast of Nova Scotia, lies about North 24j^ miles from Seal Island Light- house, Southwesterly 18 miles from Cape St. Mary, Southeasterly 29)^ miles from Bryer Island Lighthouse, Southeasterly about 51 miles from the Gannct Rock Liglithouse, and Southeasterly about 59 miles from Machias Seal Island Lighthouses. Yarmouth Lighthouse, About Yi mile fi'om the Southern point of East Cape, West side of entrance to Yarmouth Harbor, is an Octagonal Tower painted in Red and White Vertical Stripes, which at this date (1884) shows a Revolving White Light. A Steam Whistle is placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather sounds 10 seconds every minute. Bearings and Distances from Yarmouth Lighthouse. Distance. Gannet Rock Lighthouse, . N. by W. % W., . 51 miles. Machias Seal Island Light- houses, NW. byN. ^N., . 69 " 338 ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. Seal Island Lighthouse, . S> % Wm • • • Bunker Island Lighthouse (Yarmouth Harbor), . . NE-, Whistling Buoy ofif Lurcher Shoal NW. by W. % W., l^)% " Roaring Bull (about 3 feet 24;^ mUes. above Low Water), . . S. by W. X W-, Southern Point Cape Four- chu, NW. by W., . . 2^ (( mile. Between East Cape and Cape Fourchu is Outer False Bay. This entrance must not be mistaken by strangers bound to Yar- mouth, as the entrance to the last-named place is to the Eastward of the above Lighthouse. Bunker*8 Island Idghthouae, Upon the end of Reef off Southwest point of Bunker's Island, East side of entrance to Yarmouth Harbor, is a Dwelling, with Lantern on top, which at this date (1884) shows a Fixed Red Light, which in entering may be left close to on the Starboard hand. Y'armouth Lighthouse bears from Bunker's Island Light- house SW. IX niiles. This Light, which is intended to guide vessels into Yarmouth Harbor, is only visible from the South- ward between the bearings of N. ^ £• und NE. by N. Dangers in approaching and entering Yarmouth Harbor. Roaring Bull, This small Rock, which has deep water all round it, lies about a mile from shore, and is about 3 feet above Low Water. Yar- mouth Lightliouse bears from this danger N. by E. % E. '^Yi miles. Between the Roaring Bull and entrance to Yarmouth ILir- bor there are no dangers for common vessels excepting those lying near the shore. Foul Ground. About X i"ile to the Southward of the Roaring Bull and -% mile from shore, is a spot of Foul Ground having from 7 to 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. The current of Flood and Ebb ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 339 makes a Tide Rip over tliia danger. In entering the Harbor there arc also two obHtructions lying near the channel-way, one a short distance below Bimlter's Island Liglithouse, the other above it. Both these dangers are said to be marked at this time with Buoys. Remarks, In entering Yarmoutli Harbor, Shoal Water extends off from botli sides, making the Channel in some places very narrow. At Low Tide about IH feet water can be carried up abreast Bimkcr's Isliind Lighthouse, and from tliis about 10 feet water can be taken to the end of tlie Long Wharf. Witli winds from West to Sontii by way of North, tliere is Anchorage in about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide, about ]/>, mile E. by S. from Yarmoutli Light- house ; and there is also good Anchorage about ^ mile above Bunker's Island Lighthouse. At this time it is said that the Channel leading up to Yarmouth is well marked with Beacons and Buoys. In entering, Red Buoys should bo left on the Starboard, and Black on the Port hand. Sailing Directions for Yarmouth Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds ai^d fair weather. Vessels from the Bay of Fundy bound to Yarmouth Harbor, may, when past Trinity Ledge and the Lurcher Shoal (before de- scribed) bring Yarmouth Lightliouse to bear East, and run for it on this course, leaving it at least yi mile on tlie Port hand. Wlien the entrance to Yarmoutli Sound is well open, then run in about midway until Bunker's Island Lighthouse is made ; bring this Lighthouse to bear N. by E. ^ E., and run for it, leaving the lieu and Chickens, which lie on the P^astern side and are cov- ered at Yi Flood, well on the Starboard hand. When well past Yarmouth Lighthouse, leave the Red Buoys, Red Beacons and Bunker's Island Lighthouse on the StarboaVd, and Black Buoys and Beacons on the Port hand, as they are placed to mark the narrow Channel up to the wharves. At Low Tide vessels bound to the wharves sliould anchor about % mile above Bunker's Island Lightliouse, and wait for High Water. Vessels from the Southward bound to Yarmouth Harbor should leave the outer dangers, Gannet Ledge (which is bare at about Half Tide), the Gannet Rock above water, and Green 340 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PI LOT. Island, all oa tho Starboard hand, and us soon as Yarmouth Lighthouse is mado, briuf^ it to hour NE. by N-, and run for it on this courso, leaving tho Rocic called the Roaring Hull well oa the Starboard hand. When Yarmouth Sound is well open, pro- ceed us before directed. Beating into Yarmouth Harbor. In beating into Yarmouth Harbor, wiien the Lighthouse is made, bring it to boar from E. to NE. by N. Yz N. until past tho Roaring IJuIl (before described). You may then stand farther in until about ^ mile from shore, and anchor at the entrance in about .'J fatlioms water at Low Tide, tlie Liglitljouse luiaring "W. by N. about '^3 mile. Strangers should not attempt to beat into this Harbor, as the Channel in some places is very narrow. as- sailing Directions for Yarmouth Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. When Yarmouth Light is made, bring it t(j bear from NE- to E-NEm a"d run for it on this course, until you judge you are about tt mile from it; then steer more Kastcrly, leaving tliis Lighthouse not less tlian Y^ mile on tlie Port hand. Wiieu Bunker's Island Light (Red fixed) bears N. by E. ^ E., tlieu run for it on tiiis course, carrying not less than .'J fathoms water at Ix)w Tide, until Yarmouth Lightliouse bears W-SW. ; then anchor in from 3^ to 5 fathoms water, and wait for ;htliouse, and 20 ^^ miles North- easterly from Seal Island Liglithouse. Dangers in approaching this Biver. Jchouge Ledge, This Ledge, which has but little water upon it at Low Tide» generally breaks with an ordinary swell. The current of Flood and Ebb sets across tliis danger, making Tide Rips which can be plainly seen, especially in moderate weatlier. Cape Je- bouge bears from this Ledge NE- >^ E. al)out a mile ; Southern point of Reef Island (which is about 50 feet high), E. by S. about 2 miles. Jehongc Point Shoal, This Slioal, which lies between Jebouge Ledge and Cape Je- bouge, has not less than 13 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cape Jebouge bears from this danger NE. by N- ji N. about ^ mile; South point of Reef Island E. by S. /^ S. 1^ miles. About midway between this Shoal and Cape Jebouge there is a Channel of about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Meef Shoal, This Shoal, which has about 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide, has deep water close to it, and generally shows by the Tide ♦ Cape Jebouge, which Is 30 feet high, lies S. \ E. about 4 miles *; >»;,i Yarmouth Lighthouse. 'T* Z : 342 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Rip8 upon it. Cape Jebouge bears from vbis danger N. J^ W. about 1}4 miles ; South point iiccf island, E. by N. J^ N. about a mile. There is a good Channel of not leac than 6 fathoms between this Shoal and the Jebouge Ledge. Meef Island Ledge. This Ledge shows at about % Ebb. Shoal "Water extends to the Southward from it about a mile, and Shoal Water also makes off to ^he Westward .''.nd Northward some distance from it. Cape Jebouge bears from the centre of this danger NW. by N. Vi N. 15^ miles ; Southern part of Reef Island, E. by S. }i S., a little more than % mile. Metnarks, Near the entrance to Jebouge River is Fox Island, which divides the entrance into two passages. The entrance to the Western passage, which is about ^ mile wide, lies between Cape Jebouge and the Southwest part of Fox Island, which is about 40 feet high, and is called Garden Head. The entrance to the Eastern Passage, which is narrow, lies to the Eastward of Robbins Head, which is the Southeast part of the last named Island. There is good anchorage on both sides of Fox Island. By the Western Passage about 12 feet water at Low Tide can be carried U|) to the Anchorage, wliich is about a mile from the entrance ; by tlie Eastern Passage about 7 feet at Low Tide can be taken to tiic Anchorage, wiiich is a Utile more than a mile from the entrance. Above Fox Island there is in some places but little water at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Jebouge River in Day-time, with favorable win(|s and fair weather. At Low Tide vessels of not jnore than 10 or 11 feet draught, from the Northward with a couiinanding breeze, may, as soon sis Cape Jebojgc is made, bring it to bear E.SE., and run for it on this course, leaving the Roaring Bull and Foul Ground (before described) well on the Port hand. When about a mile from the Cape steer more Southerly, leaving it abont l^ mile on the Port, and Jebouge Jiedge (before described) about the same distance ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 343 on the Starboard hand. "When Garden Head,* the Southwest part of Fox r,4aud, bears E.NE*, then run for it on this course, carrying from 3^ to 4 fathoms water. Continue the course until 111 tout ^ mile from this Head; then, in about 3J^ fathoms at Low Tide, steer NE. by N. ^ N., keeping not more than 200 yards from the Northern part of Fox Island, and carrying at Low Tide from 12 feet to 6 fathoms through the narrow Channel, and anchor about 2o0 yards to the Northward of the last named Island, in from 3 to 4^^ fathoms water at Low Tide. The Channel leading up to tlie anchorage to the Eastward of Fox Island is considered too intricate for strangers. Vessels with a commanding breeze from the Soutwestward may leave Green Island,t which is 50 feet high, and is bold on its N^orthern side, about J^ mile on the Starboard hand, and steer i' .st until the highest part of this Island bears SW-, on which bearing keep it and steer NE., leaving Jebouge Ledge (before described) well on the Port hand. Continue the course NE. until Garden Head, the Southwest part of Fox Island, bears ENE> ; then run for it, and follow the du*ections before given. Sigh Water, It is High Water in Jebouge River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 10 h. 4m., or about 1 h. 25 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 13j^ feet. LITTLE RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is between the main land on the East and Pinkney Point on the West, is about a mile wide, and lies Southeasterly about 4 miles from Cape Jebouge, and E. by S. 4^ miles from Green Island. ♦ Garden Head is 40 feet high, and bears E. by S. J^^ S. from Cape Jebouge, distance about a mile. fCape Jebouge bears from Green Island, which is small, NE. yi N., 2}j( miles. 344 ELDRID&E'S COAST PILOT. Memarks. The Channe* leading up this River in some places is very nar- row. About 8 feet water at Low Tide can be taken about 2 miles above the entrance. There are several Sunken Rocks lying in the Channel-way. It is therefore advisable for strangers bound up to take pilots. Tusket Islands, The centre of these Islands lie Southeasterly about 10 miles from Yarmouth Lighthouse, 7 miles Southeasterly from Cape Jebouge, and Northeasterly about 15 miles from Seal Island Lighthouse. Pease Island Idghthouse. Upon the Southern part of one of the Tusket Islands is a White Square Wooden Dwelling, which at this date (1884) shows two lights, one above the other. The upper light is a Revolving Red and White, the lower Fixed Red. Bearings and Distanoes from Pease Island Lighthouse. Distance. Seal Island Lighthouse, . S- by W. }( W., . . 14 miles. White Head Lighthouse, . E., lyi " There are many Rocks, Shoals and Ledges in the vicinity of this Lighthouse. We shall, liowcver, only attempt to de8cril)o some of the most dangerous. Tlie current of Flood and Kl)b sets strong across those dangers, and strangers should beware of vhis part of the coast, especially witii light winds and thick woathcM'. By inspecting the charts of this locality a better idea of the dangers can be obtained than by any written description. Bearings and Distances of Dangers from Pease Island Ligbthouse. Old Woman's Mock, This danger, whicli has Shoal Water all round it, is bare at 2 hours Ebb. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this Rock W- ^ilH.'l^ miles. Old Mail's Rocks* Shoal Water extends about y'; mile to the Southward of these Rocks, which are bare about 1 hour before Ix)w Tide. Pease ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 345 Island Lighthouse bears from thia danger NW. by N. 54 N., 1^ miles. Cleopatra Shoal, This danger, over which the current sets strong, making a heavy Tide Rip, has at Low Tide about 11 feet water upon it. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this Shoal N. nearly 3^ miles, and Bald Tusket, 50 feet high (the Southernmost of the Tusket Isles), N. by W. 1^ miles. Tliirteen Foot Spot, Between Cleopatra Shoal and Bald Tusket is a small spot hav- ing about 13 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this danger Tusket, N.NW. y& mile. N. nearly 2j4 miles ; Bald Soldier Ledge. Shoal Water extends Northerly about J4 mile from this danger- ous Ledge, which is bare about 2 hours after High Water, and the sea generally breaks upon it when covered. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. by IJ . ^ N. 5j4 miles ; Northern Mud Island S-SE. '^Yz miles; Bald Tusket, which is the Southernmost of the Tusket Isles, NE. by N- % N. 3^ miles; Cleopatra Shoal NE. ^ N. 2^ miles. Between Soldier Ledge and Cleopatra Shoal there is a Channel more tlian 2 miles v'ide, with a depth of from 5 to 7 fathoms water. From the Bald Tusket to Soldier Lec^ge, a distance of 3^ miles, the current of Fli, aI and Ebb sets strong, forming heavy Tide Rips, which at times are said to be dangerous to small and deeply-laden vessels. The Flood sets about NW., and Ebb SE. Jacko Ridge. This Ridge, which is the Southwosternmost danger lying off the Tusket Isles, consists of two small spots having at Low Tide about 25 feet water upon them. Seal Island Lighthouse bears from Jacko Ridge S- by E. J^ E. 10 miles ; Pease Island Light- house, NE. by E. }^ E. "tyi miles ; Flat Island, the Northwest- ernmost of the Mud Islands^ SE. by E. (i^i miles ; Gannet Dry Ledge, N- % B. 4^ miles ; Gannet Dry Rock, N. by E. Yz E. 6^ miles. The current of Flood and Ebb sets strong across the H iff II! I 34G ELDRIDGE'3 COAST PILOT. Jacko Ridge, forming heavy Tide Rips ; and tlio sea is said ta break upon it in heavy weather. Gannet South Shoal, This small spot, which has about 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide, has deep water all round it. Pease Island Liguthouse bears from this danger NE. by E. ^ E. 5j4 miles ; Soldier Ledge, SE- 3^ miles. The current of Flood and Ebb sets strong across it, causing Ripples, which sometimes break in a heavy »ea. Gannet SW. Shoal. This Shoal, which has about 18 feet water upon its Northern part, extends about yi mile North and South, with deep water all round it. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E. J4 N. Q/4 miles ; Soldier Ledge, SE. 6 miles ; Gannet Dry Ledge, N. about 1^ miles. Tliis Shoal shows a small Ripple, and the sea breaks upon it in heavy weather. Gannet Dry Ledge, This Ledge, which is the Westernmost danger lying off the Tusket Isles, extends North and South about ^/^ mile, and is bare at about two hours Ebb. Seal Island Lighthouse bears from this Ledge S. by B- 14^ miles ; Pease Island Lighthouse, E. ^ S. 6j4 miles. Yarmouth Lighthouse, NN.E. 10^ miles ; Gannet Rock (50 feet ab< v ,ter), NE. by EV 1^ miles ; Green Island (50 feet above wat«» , NE- by N. 4:'4 miles; Southeast Rock, E. }i S. Iji miles; South Rock, covered at j4 tide, E- by N. 1^ miles. Southeast Mock, This Rock, upon which the sea generally breaks in heavy weather, has about 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and from 5 to 10 fathoms round it. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by S. 4^ miles; Gannet Rock (50 feet above "ater), N. by W. X W. 1^4 miles. Gannet Mock, This is a small Rock, about 50 feet above High "Water, and whi ened by the dung of birds. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from this Rock E-SE- 5i<3 miles ; Grecu Island (50 feet above High Water), NN-E. 3 miles. iiLDllIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 347 South Rock, This Rock, which is small, lies nearly midway between the Gannet Bock and Southeast Rock, and is bare at about Half Tide. North Mock. This small Rock, which is bare at Half Tide, lies North about i^mile from the Gannet Rock, and has deep water all round it. Green Island, This Island, from which Shoal Water extends off to the South- ward nearly % mile, is about 50 feet above High Water. Be- tween this and Gannet Rock there is a good Channel two miles wide, having from 5 to 18 fathoms water in it. Pease Island Lighthouse bears from Green Island SB- ^ S. Gj/^ miles ; Spec- tacle Island, the Westernmost of the Tusket Isles, SE. by S. i^ S. 5 miles ; Cape Jebouge, NE. J4 N. 2^ miles ; Yarmouth Lighthouse, N- by E. 6j4 miles. Green Island is the Northern- most danger lying off the Tusket Isles. Sarriet Ledge, This Ledge, which lies about a inile to the Northward of the Bald Tusket (which is the Southeroraost of the Tusket Islef^), is bare at Low Tide. Pease Island Lighthouse bears froi: tbis danger NE. 1^ miles. Spectacle Ledge, This Ledge, which lies about a mile Southwesterly from Spec tacle Island (which is the Westernmost of the Tusket Isles) has about 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Pease Island Light- house bears from this danger E- by N- J^ N. 1%. miles. Be- tween Spectacle Ledge and Harriet Ledge there is a Channel nearly a mile wide, having from 8 to 10 fathoms water in it. There is also a good Channel 3^ miles wide, between Spectacle Ledge and the Gannet Rock (before described) having from (i to 15 fathoms water in it. Remarks, There are many Shoals, Rocks and Ledges among the Tusket Islands, and there are several Passages leading through, among fi ■ t >■ ^^;i *^' • •»«*;■!#■: vi' .is ^ ■"'-'fmms'l J ml. --- -.Si 348 ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT which are the EUenwood and Schooner Passages. About 18 feet water at Lovr Tide can be taken through the foi'mer, and 4 fathoms can be carried through the latter, but these Passages are considered too intricate for strangers. There arc also several places of Anchorage where vessels may lie secui'c from all winds, but it is not advisable for strangers to undertake to enter these places excepting in cases of emergency. We shall therefore only give directions to enter when a pilot cannot be obtained. Sailing Directions for the Tusket Islands in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 14 feet draught, from the Northward and compelled to seek shelter among the Tusket Islands, may, after making Green Island (before described) , leave it about j^ mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course S. by E., leaving the North Rock, Gannet Rock, South Rock and Southeast Rock (all of which have been described) well on the Starboard, and Spectacle Island, the Westernmost of the Tusket Islands, well on the I'ort hand ; when past this last Island, keej) a sharp lookout foi the Lighthouse on the Southern part of Pease Island. When this Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear E., and run for it on this course, carrying about 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. When about % mile from this Lighthouse, steer N-NE. for the Eastern part of Allen Island, passing about midway between Pease and Mark Island.* When past the latter, which is left on the Port hand, haul up about N.NW-, aiul anchor to the Westward of Bird Rock, between Allen and EUeu- wood Islands, in from G to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. This is called EUenwood Anchorage. The shore on the Western side of this Anchorage is quite bold and free from dangers, while on the Eastern side there is Foul Ground with Sunken Rocks. Between the Tusket Islands the current of Flood sets to tlie "JS\?rthward, while that of the Ebb sets to the Southward. From the Westward, as soon as the Lighthouse on Pease Island is made, bring it to bear E., and run for it on this course, * riark Island lies about J mile NW. ftora Pease Island Lighthouse. ELDKIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 349 leaving the Gannet Dry Ledge and South Rock well on the Port hand, and follow the directions before given High Water, It it High Water at Ellenwood Anchorage (Tusket Islands) on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon h. 54 m., or 1 h. S5 ra. before it is in Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 12 feet. Seal Island, This Island, which lies about 17 miles to the Westward of Cape Sable, is a little more than 2 miles in length from North to South, and its average width is about ^ mile. This is the outer- most Island off the Western part of Nova Scotia, and at this date (1884) its Northern and Southern parts are thickly wooded. Seal Island is surrounded by Shoal Water which on its Southern and Western parts, extends off nearly J^ mile from shore. Seal Island Lighthouse, Near the South point of this Island is a White Octagonal Tower which at this date (1884) shows a Fixed White Light. A Fog Whistle is placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather sounds blasts of 5 seconds duration with intervals of 5 seconds. Bearings and Distances from Seal Island Lighthouse. Cape Sable Lighthouse, . . Bon-portage Lighthouse, Piibnico Harbor Lighthouse, "White Head Island Light- house, Tusket River Lighthouse, . Pease Island Lighthouse, Yarmouth Lighthouse, . . Machias Seal Island Light- houses, Mt. Desert Rock Lighthouse, Matinicus Rock Lighthouse, Mouhegan Island Lighthouse, Cape Elizabeth Lighthouses, Distance. E. by S. y2 R., . . llVi miles E., . 12>^ " WK. byE., . . . 16 NE. % N., . . . \iy2 " NE. by N. Ya N., . 19 " N. byE. K E., . . 14 " N. ^ E., . . . . 24^ " N. by W. ^ W., . 80 NW. 34 W., . . 98 J^ NW. byW. -5^8 W., 125 NW.byW. 3/^W., 148 W. by N. ^ N. . 181 u «( u ;]50 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Thatcher's Island Light- houses, W. 3^ N. (nearly), 205>^ miles. Cape Cod (Highland) Light- house W. by S. (nearly),. 197 « "Whistling Buoy oft Blonde Rock, ^' H ^-1 .... 4 (( Dangers in the Vicinity of Seal Island. Elbow Shoal, This Shoal, which extends North and South about ^ mile, has from 24 to 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, but near the middle thcie 18 a Rock which is called Elbow Rock, which has less water upon it Seal Island Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. }^ "K. \i/i miles. The current of Flood and Ebb runs strong across the Elbow Shoal, forming a heavy Tide Rip both to the Northward and Southward of it. The Flood sets to the Westward, and that of the Ebb to the Eastward. Between this Shoal and Seal Island there is a Channel about J^ mile wide, having from 6 to 8 fathoms water in it. Blonde Mock, This Rock, upon which the sea generally breaks, is bare at Low Tide, and has from 5 to 10 fathoms waters close to it. Witli light winds it is very dangerous, as the current of the Ebb sots directly for it, forming heavy Tide Rips to the Southward of it. At this date (1884) a Whistling Buoy has been placed in about H fathoms water, j4 mile to the Southward of this Rock. Seal Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N- }{ W. 4 miles ; Cape Sable Lighthouse, E. >^ S. 16}i miles; Elbow Rock, N. by W. 2;^ miles ; Purdy Rock, NE. by N. '4 N. 3J^ miles. The Blonde Rock is the Southernmost danger lying off Seal Island. About a mile to the Westward of the Blonde Rock arc some very heavy Tide Rips, which at certain times have the appeaiance of Breakei-s ; but lot less than 9 fathoms water have been found upon and around them. Zetland Shoal, This Shoal, which lies a mile to the Westward of the Kll)ow Rock, has at Low Tide about 20 feet water upon it. Seal Island ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 351 Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. ji N. ij4 miles ; Whis- tling Buoy, off Blonde Kock, SE. by Q. % S. 3 miles. The Zetland Shoal is the Southwesternmost danger lying off Seal Island. About NE. % mile from Zetland Shoal there are several spots of broken ground, having from 4j^ to 6 fathoms water upon them at Low Tide. I^urdy Hock, This Rock, which is small, has about 13 feet water upon it at Low Tide, with deep water all round it, and breaks in heavy weather. Seal Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. by W. ^ W. 2}^ miles ; Whistling Buoy, off Blonde Rock, SW. by S. /i S- 3J^ miles. Between Purdy Rock and Seal Island there is a passage about 1}^ miles wide, with a depth of from G to 12 fathoms. Vessels navigating this Channel should keep nearer the Rock. Purdy Rock is the Easternmost danger lying off Seal Island. J)eviV8 Idmh, This Ledge is about 8 feet above High Water. Seal Island Lighthouse bears from it SE. J^ E. 1 Ji( miles ; the Ledge called the Limb's Limb, N. by E. J^ E. ^ mile. About j{ mile to the Southward of the Devil's Limb are some Rocks called Loch Foyne, which are bare at Low Tide. Between these last named dangers, and the Devil's Limb there is a Channel of 15 feet water at Low Tide ; but strangers should attempt it only in cases of emergency. In thick weather vessels from the Southwestward or Westward should not approach the Devil's Limb in less than 15 fathoms, water. Limb's Limb, This Ledge is bare about one hour after high water. Shoal Water, with Sunken Rocks, extends about ]^ mile Southeasterly from it. Seal Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger SE. by S- j^ S. 1^ miles. The Ledges called Limb's Limb, and Devil's Limb, are the Westernmost dangers Ivinj; off Seal Island. Between these last mentioned dangers and Seal Island there is a narrow passage of 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. This Channel should not be attempted by strangers excepting in cases of emergency ; at such times keep nearer the Ledges. 352 ELUKIDGES COAST PILOT. Anchorage under Seal Island. With Westerly winds vessels may Anchor off the Bend on the Eastern side of Seid Isliind, in from ;"j to fathoms water at Low Tide, and there is also Anchorage witli Easterly winds on tlie Western side, in what is called Crowell Cove, in fro .< 4 to f) fathoms water at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Seal Island Anchorage in Daytime. Vessels from the Westward with AVesterly winds, may, as soon as Seal Island is made, bring the Northern end to bear about !E*SEi-, and run for it on this course, leaving it about % mile on the Starboard hand ; and gradually haul to the Southward, and Anchor with the Lighthouse bearing S- W. by W. }{> W., in from 4^ to 5^ fathoms water at Low Tide. Directions to pass to the Southward of Seal Island. From the Westward, as soon as Seal Island Lighthouse is made, bring it t(^ bear about East, and run for it on this course In order to avoid the Shoal Water which extends off from the South point of the Island, leave it about ^ mile to the North- ward, and the Elbow Kock and Shoal (before described) well to the Southward, carrying about fathoms at Low Tide. When the Lighthouse bears NW-^. then gradually haul to the Nortii- ward, and anchor with it bearing SW". by "W". ] .: W., iu from 4j4 to Tti^ fathoms water at Low Tide. Directions for Crowell Cove. From the P^astward, with Easterly winds, as soon as Seal Island is made, bring the Northern end to bear W.NW., and run for it on this course and haul round it at a distance of J^ mile, leaving it to the Southward ; when the Lighthouse on this Island bears S. ^ E-, then run for it on this course until the water shoals to 4 or 4^ fathoms at Low Tide ; then Anchor in Crowell Cove. A strict watch should be icept while lying here, and the Cove, especially in autumn, winter or spring, should be left on the first indications of a Northwesterly wind, which brings in heavy Bea. ELDRIDGE'S C0A8T PILOT. 353 High Water, It is High Water at Seal Island on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at t) h. 2 ra., or about 2 h. 27 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 10 1^ feet. Mud Islands, These Islets, which lie from 2J^ to r> miles Northeasterly from the Northern end of Seal Island, extend North and South about y miles. Commencing from the Southernmost they are called Noddy Island, Mud Island, Round Island, and Flat Island. Round Island, the highest of the cluster, has an elevation of k5 feet above High Water, and is wooded, as is also Mud Island, tho largest and central of the group. These Islets are surrounded by Shoal Water with from 12 to 18 foot between them at Low Tide. These passages should be attempted by strangers only in light draught vessels, and then only in cases of emergency. In going througli between them keep about midway the passages. Black Ledge, About a mile to the Westward of Mud Island, the largest of the group, is Black Ledge, which is covered at High Water ; the Southern part of the lust named Island bears from the centre of this danger SE. 34 E. about a mile ; N. by E. >^ E., about J^ mile from Black Ledge, are several Sunken Rocks, and near this last danger is a Shoal spot of 15 feet at Low Tide. Mud Island Shoal, This Shoal, upon which the sea breaks in heavy weather, is sur- rounded by deep water, and at Low Tide has not loss than 24 feet water upon it. The Southern part of Mud Island (the largest of the group) bears from this danger E. by S- ^ S. 2^ miles. Mud Island Shoal is liie Westernmost danger lying off the Mud Island. Anchorage under the Mud Islands, There is Anchorage on both sides of these Islands where vessels may And moderate protection in both Easterly and Westerly winds. Upon the Eastern side of Noddy Island, Mud Island, and IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I ■ 50 "^^ ll^H 1125 1 1.4 ■ 1.6 Photographic Sciences Corporation 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. USSO (716) S73-4503 354 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Round Island, there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shore. Vessels may therefore approach them on this side within ys mile without danger. Sailing Directions for Mud Island Anchorage in Daytime. With Westerly winds, vessels from the Westward should, as soon as the Mud Islands are made (in order to avoid the Shoal Water which extends off to the Northward from them) , leave the Northwesternmost about a mile on the Starboard hand, and gradually haul to the Southward, leaving Round Island about }4 mile on the Starboard hand, and anchor abreast Mud Island (the largest of the group) about yi mile from shore in from 5 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels from the Westward may pass to the Southward of these Islands by the following directions : as soon as the Islands are made, bring Noddy Island, the Southernmost (which is 18 feet high), to bear £. by S<, and run for it on this course, leaving it about j4 mile on the Port hand, and crossing the Tide Rips which lie to the Southward of it, in not less than 6 fathoms water. When past the last-named Island, haul gradually to the North- ward, and anchor abreast Mud Island (which is the largest of the group) , about y} mile from shore, in from 5 to 8 to fathoms water at Low Tide. With Southeasterly winds there is Anchorage on the Northwest side of Flat Island (the Northwesternmost of the group) iu about 5j4 fathoms water at Low Tide. There is, however, very little shelter here except in moderate weather. JTigfi Water, It is High Water at the Mud Islands on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 9 h. 2 m., or about 2 li. 27 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 10 feet. Between the Northern part of Seal Island and Noddy Island (the Southernmost of the Mud Islands) , there is a clear Channel 2J^ miles wide, having from G to 18 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. The current of Flood and Ebb sets through this Passage from 3 to 4 miles per hour. The Flood runs NW., and Ebb SE. Between Soldier Ledge (before described) and Flat Island (the ELDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 355 Northwesternmost of the Mud Islands) , there is a clear Channel 1^ miles wide,, having from 4j4 to 6 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. The current of Flood and Ebb sets through this Passage from 2 to 3 miles per hour. The Flood runs NWm and Ebb SE. TUSKET RIVER. The entrance to this River is Northeasterly 19 miles from Seal Island Lighthouse, East-Northerly 5J^ miles from Pease Island Lighthouse, Northwesterly 24 miles from Cape Sable Lighthouse, and Northwesterly 4j4 miles from White Head Lighthouse. Tusket River Lighthouse, Upon the Southwest point of Big Fish Island, at the entrance of Tusket River, is a Square White Wooden Building whinh at this date (1884) shows two fixed White Lights 24 feet apart. These lights are intended to guide vessels into Tusket River. Bearings and Distances from Tusket Biver Lighthouse. Distanoe. Seal Island Lighthouse, . . SW. by S. ^ S., . 19 miles. Bon-portage Island Light- house, S. by E. ji E., . . 173^ " White Head Lighthouse, . . S£« /^ S>, • . 4^ " Dangers in approaching Tusket River. In approaching Tusket River there are many dangers lying in the Bay, some of which are sunken, and some are above water. We shall only attempt to describe those lying in the Channel-way. Chill Ledge, This Ledge has about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tus- ket River Lighthouse bears from it N. ji W. 5 miles ; White Head Lighthouse, NE. by E. yi E. 3 miles ; Pease Island Light- house, W. by N. ^ N. 5^ miles. 356 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Southwest Shoal. This Shoal has about 14 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tus- ket River Lighthouse bears from this danger N. ^ C 3 miles ; White Head Lighthouse, E. ^ S- 3^ miles ; Pease Island Light- house, W. ^ S. 4^ miles. Fish Ledge, This Ledge, which is bare at Half Tide, lies on the Eastern side of the Channel. Tusket River Lighthouse bears from this danger N. ^ W. about a mile ; Little Fish Island N. by W. % W. a little more than y^ mile. Big Fish Mocks. These Rocks, which are bare at Low Tide, lie nearly in the Channel-way. At Low Tide about 19 feet water can be carried up to the Westward of this danger, and about 15 feet to the East- ward of it. Tusket River Lighthouse bears from these Rocks SE. by S. ^ S-A niile. Memarks. By the Channel to the Westward of Big Fish Rocks about 19 feet water at Low Tide can be carried up to the Anchorage above Tucker Island, and about 15 feet to the Eastward of these Rocks. From Tucker Island Anchorage to Tusket Village (which is on the P^astern side of the River), the distance is about 9 miles, and in some places there is but little water in the River at Low Tide. A pilot is therefore necessary from the above Anchorage to the Village. Sailing Directions for Tusket River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weatber. From the Southwestward, when Seal Island is made, br'ng the Northern end to 1)ear E. by S., and run for it ( a this course, leaving it about ^ mile on the Starboard hand ; when past the Northern end of this Island, haul gradually to the Northward, leaving the Mud Islands about ^ mile on the Port hand. Bring Round Island (which is the highest of the Mud Islands) to bear S.SW., on which bearing keep it, and steer N.NE., leaving Cleo- patra Shoal, Old Man Ledge, and Old Woman Ledge, all of ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 357 which have heretofore been described, on the Port hand. Aa soon as Tusket Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear N-NE-j and run for it on this course, leaving Gull Ledge, South- west Shoal, and Fish Ledge, and lastly Little Fish Island, which lies about % mile to the Southward of the Lighthouse, all on the Starboard hand. Continue the course for the Lighthouse until about y^ mile from it; then gradually haul to the Westward, carrying about 3 fathoms -rater at Low Tide. Leave the Light- house not more than 200 yards on the Starboard hand ; when abreast it make good the course N. by E. % E. until it bears S., on which bearing keep it. and steer N., carrying about 15 feet water across the Flat Ground, and leaving Big Fish Rocks on the Port hand; continue the course N., until the water deepens to 4j4 fathoms at Low Tide, then haul up about NE by N. J^ N., carrying not less than 4 fathoms water at Low Tide through the narrow Channel, and leaving Tucker Island, which is the first to the Northeastward of the Lighthouse, about 400 yards on the Starboard, and Tucker Island Ledge which lies o> the Western side of the Channel, nearly opposite this Island on the Port hand ; when about J^ mile past the last named Island steer more Easterly, and anchor with the Northern point of it bearing S. by W. Yi mile, in from G to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. Above this a pilot is necessary. From the Southeastward, when past Cape Sable, leave Bon- portage Island Lighthouse about 2 .. . es on the Starboard hand, and make good the corpse N. by W. J^ W., leaving Gull Ledge and Southwest Shoal (both of which have been described) well on the Starboard hand ; when Tusket Island Lighthouse is made, , aad follow the directions before given. bring it to bear N-NE. Directions to pass betwef^n the Tusket Islands. From the Northward leave Green Island (before described) about J^ Inile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course S. by E. When Pease Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear East, and run for it on this course, carrying not less than 16 feet water at Low Tide, and leaving Spectacle Island on the Port, and Half Bald Island, and Little Half Bald Island on the Starboard hand ; when about ^ mile from the Lighthouse steer about SE> by E' Yz Ev passing about midway between the last named 358 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. f Island and Lighthouse ; when this Lighthouse bears NW. make good the course "K. by Sm leaving the Old Woman Ledge (before described) well on the Fort hand ; when Tusket Island Lighthouse bears N«NE!>) then follow the du'ections before given. Sigh Water, It is High Water at the entrance of Tusket River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, 9 h. 30 m., or about 2 hours before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 12 feet. fjiones Anchorage, or Argyle Harbor, This Anchorage, which is among the Islands, lies 2^ miles to the Northward of White Head Lighthouse. Argyle Lighthouse, Upon the South Point of White Head Island is a White, Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a Red Fixed Light. This Lighthouse is intended to guide vessels to Argyle, and also to Jones Anchorage. Bearings and Distances from Argyle Lighthouse. Diatanoe. Seal Island Lighthouse, . . . SW> ^ S.? • • 17^ miles. Bon-portage Lighthouse, . . . S.^C,. • • 14 Pease Island Lighthouse, . . . WOSt^ (nearly) lyi Tusket Island Lighthouse, . . NW. J^ N., . 4>4 (( (( (( Bearings and Distances of Dangers in approach- ing Jones Anchorage and Argyle. In approaching Joneo Anchorage and Argyle there are many dangers. We shall only describe some of the most prominent lying in the Channel-way. St, Ann Shoal, This danger has about 13 feet water upon it at Low Tide. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from it North about Z% miles; centi-e of Gull Island NW. by N. % N. 4^ miles; Pease Island Lighthouse, NW- by W- >^ W- 8 ^ miles ; Gull ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 359 Ledge, NW- J4 W. 3j^ miles. The current of Flood and Ebb «ets strong across this Shoal, forming Tide Kips, which are plainly visible excepting at Slack Water. * Gull Ledge. This Ledge has about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tuskfct River Lighthouse bears from it N. J^ W. 5 miles ; White Head Island Lighthouse, NE- by E. j^ E. 3 miles ; Pease Island Lighthouse, W- by N. ^ N. SJ^ miles; St. Ann Shoal, SE- J4 E. 3j4 miles. White Head Ledge. This Ledge, which is bare at very Low Tides, has Shoal Water around it. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from this danger W. ^ N. ^ miles. West Shoal. This Shoal has about 11 feet water, upon it at very Low Tides. White Head Island Lighthouse bears f.jm the centre of it SE. about J4 mile. Between West Shoal and White Head Island Lighthouse there is a Channel about % mile wide, with a depth of 6 fathoms water at Low Tide. Bumpkin Ledge. This Ledge, which lies in the Channel-way, is about % mile to the Eastward of Pumpkin Island, and has but 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from this danger SW. by W. ^ mile ; between this Ledge and Pumpkin Island, which is the first to the Northward of the Lighthouse, there is a Channel Y^ mile wide, having from 4 to 6 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. Jones Ledge. This Ledge, which extends N.NE. and S.SW. nearly y^ mile, lies to the Northwest of Pumpkin Island, and in some places has but little water upon it, at Low Tide. White Head Island Light- house bears from the centre of this danger S. }i E. Ij^ miles. JRemarks. Vessels bound to Jones Anchorage can pass on either side of White Head Island Lighthouse. The Channel leading in is the 360 ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. widest to the Eastward of this Lighthouse. After passing Pump> kin Island, keep nearer Jones Islands, which lie on the Western side about 2j4 miles to the Northward of the Lighthouse. When past Pumpkin Island (which is the first to the Northward of the Lighthouse) , from 5 to 7 fathoms water can be taken to the Anchorage. Sailingr Directions for Jones Anchorage in Daytime, •With, favorable winds and fair weather. From the Southwestward, when Seal Island is made, bring the Northern end to bear E- by S., and run for it on this course, leaving it about J4 mile on the Starboard hand. When past the Northern end of this Island, haul gradually to the Northward, leaving the Mud Islands about ^ mile on the Port hand. Bring Round Island, which is the highest of the Mud Islands, to bear SW. ^ W., on which bearing keep it, and steer NS. J^ E» When White Head Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear N.NE!-, and run for it on this course, leaving St. Ann Shoal on the Starboard, and Gull Ledge on the Port hand. Leave the Lighthouse about J^ mile on the Port hand, and when it bears W., make good the course N. by E. }( E., carrying not less than 3^ fathoms water at Low Tide, and leaving White Head Ledge and Pumpkin Ledge both well on the Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see on the Port, Pumpkin Island, which is the first to the Northward of the Lighthouse. Leave the Northern point of this Island, which is quite bold, not more than 300 yards on the Port, and gradually haul to the Northwestward until the centre of this Island bears S. ^ E., on which bearing keep it» carrying not less than 5 fathoms water at Low Tide, leaving Thrum Island and Lear Island (the former of which is small) on on the Starboard, and Jones Island (the Eastern parts of which are bold) on the Port hand. When about 2 miles above Pump- kin Island, anchor in from 6 to 7 fathoms water. If bound to Abraham River a pilot is necessary at this Anchorage. From the Southeastward, when past Cape Sable, leave Bon- port' ye Island Lighthouse about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears E , make good the course N. by W., leaving St. John's Ledge well on the Starboavd hand. When White Head Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to beai* N.NE., ard run for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 361 Directions to p^ss between the Tusket Islands. From the Northward, leave Green Island (before described) about % mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course S. by S. When I'case Island Lighthouse is made, brmg it to bear Em and run for it on this course, carrying not less than IG feet water at Low Tide, and leaving Spectacle Island on the Port, and Half Bald Island and I ittle Half Bald Island on the Star- board hand. When about yi mile from the Lighthouse, steer about SB. by E- J4 E., passing about midway between the last- named Island and Lighthouse. When this Lighthouse bears NW., make good the course E. }i S., leaving the Old W< 'nan Ledge (before described) on the Port, and Gull Ledge w on the Starboard hand. When White Head Island Lighthouse bears N'NEm then follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water at Jones Anchorage (Argyle) on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, 9 h. 27 m., or 2 h. 2 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 12 feet. PUBNIOO HARBOB. The entrance tu this Harbor is 14 miles Northwesterly from Cape Sable Lii,hthouse, 8 miles North from Bon-portage Light- house, East-Northerly about 10 miles from the Mud Islands, and East-Southerly about 11 miles from Pease Island Lighthouse. . Fuhnico Harbor Lighthouse, Upon Beach Point, Eastern side of entrance to Pubnico Harbor, about 120 yards from Low Water mark, is a Square White Build- ing which at thia date (1884) show J a fixed White Light.* * The Canadian government gives notice that this Light has been dis- ... 16 iniles^ BouDd Island (the North- easternmost of the Mud Islands), W- by S J^S., . . 10>4 '^ Remarks, The entrance to this Harbor, which is between St. Ann Point on the West, and the Main Land on the East, is about a mile wide, and gradually contracts to Beach Point, where the Light- house stands, to less than % mile. From this last point the Bay runs up Northeasterly nearly 6 miles, and the greater part of it is occupied with Flats, which are dry at Low Tide, with a narrow winding Channel between them. Eight fathoms water, at Low Tide, can be carried to the Anchorage, which is about a mile. above the Lighthouse. Sailing Directions for Fubnico Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 14 feet draught, from the Northward, may, after making Green Island (before described) , leave it about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course S. by E., leaving the North Rock, Gannet Rock, South Rock, and Southeast Bock (all of which have been described) , well on the Starboard, and Spectacle Island, the Westernmost of the Tusket Islands, well on the Port hand. When past this last Island keep a sharp lookout for the Lighthouse, on the Southern part of Pease Island \ when the Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear East and run for it on this course, carrying about 16 feet at Low Tide ; when about yi mile from this Lighthouse, steer about SE. by E. % E., pass- ing about midway between Little Bald Island and the Lighthouse ; when about a mile past this Lighthouse bring it to bear NW. by W., on which bearing keep it and steer SE. by E., leaving Gull Ledge and St. Ann Shoal well on the Port hand ; when the Light- house in Pubnico Harbor is made, bring^ it to bear NE. byE-i and run for it on this course until about ^ mile from it, then gradually haul to the Northward and leave it about 200 yards on che Starboard hand ; when pas^t it, bring it to bear S. by W. ^ ELDRIDOE'S ..OAST PILOT. 363 Wm und make good the course N. by E. ^ E., leaving the buoy wliit'h lies off the Eastern part of a Ledge which is about j^ mile from the Lighthouse, close to on the Port hand, and carrying from 7 to 10 fathoms water through the narrow Channel ; when about a mile past the Lighthouse anchor in from 7 to 10 fathoms water at Low Tide. If bound further up it is advisable to take a pilot at this Anchorage, as there are several dangers which are only seen at Low Tide. From the Southwestward, as soon as Seal Island is made, bring the Northern end to bear about E. by S. , and run for it on this course, leaving it about J^ mile on the Starboard hand ; wlien past the Island continue the course E. by S. until Seal Island Lighthouse bears SW. by W., on which bearing keep it and steer NE. by E. ; when Pubnico Harbor Lighthouse is made ; bring it to bear NE. by E., and run for it on this course and follow the directions before given. From Cape Sable, leave Bon-portage Island Lighthouse about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and make goo l the course N. by Wm leaving St. John's Ledge and St. John's Island, the former of which generally breaks, both well on the Starboard hand ; when Pubnico Harbor Lighthouse bears NE. by E., then run for it on this course and follow the du'ections before given. In beating into Pubnico Harbor, in order to avoid St. John's Ledge (which generally breaks) , keep Pubnico Harbor Light- house open to the Westward of John's Island ;* when near the entrance of the Harbor, in order to avoid the dangers lying near the shores on both sides, keep nearly in mid-channel, and anchor about Ys mile to the Southwestward of the Lighthouse, in from 5 to 10 fathoms water at Low Tide. Strangers should not attempt to enter Pubnico Harbor at night-time. High Water, It is High "Water in Pubnico Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, 9 h. 25 m., or about 2 h. 4 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides 11 feet. * Pu})ntco Harbor Llghtbouse bears from the centre of John's Island, which is 80 feet high, NE. by N. 8i miles. 364 ELDRIDOE'S COAST I'lLOT. Cockerwit Passage, This passage, which is between Bon-portage, Mutton and St. John Islands on the West, and the Main Land on the Kant, in from 1^ miles to ^ mile in breadth, and about miles in lenf^tli. Its Northern entrance, which is narrow and shallow, is about -ly, miles Southwest from Pubnico Harbor Lighthouse. Tlie Southc. n entrance, which lies between Bon-portage Island and Stoddard Island, is more than a mile wide, and is called Shag Ilurhor Sound. This last named entrance is East 14 miles from Seal Island Lighthouse, and Northwesterly about 6 miles from Cape Sable Lighthouse. Bon-portage Island Lighthouse, Upon the South Point of Bou-portage Island is a White, Square, Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a Red, Re- volving Light, which is intend<'d to guide vessels into Shag Harbor Sound, and also Barrington West Bay. About lyi miles to the Southwestward of Bon-portage Light- house are heavy Tide Rips, which extend North and South about 2 miles. Not less than 7 fathoms water at Low Tide has been found upon these Rips. Bearings and Distanoes frova. Bon-portage Island Lighthouse. Cape Sable Lighthouse, . Seal Island Lighthouse, Pease Island Lighthouse, . Stoddard Island Lighthouse, Stoddard Island Idghthouse, Upon the Northwest Point of Stoddard Island is a small, White, Square Tower, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed Red Light which is intended to guide vessels to the Anchorage in Stoddard Harbor, and also into Shag Harbor Sound. Bon-portage Lighthouse bears from Stoddard Island Lighthouse SW. by W. J^ W., 1^4 miles. Remarks, About 7 feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken through the Cockerwit Passage, but as there are many obstructions lying iu Distance. SB* ^ Sm • 6^^ miles West, . . . 1-1% " NW. by N., . 16>^ " NE.byE. XE., ly^ '' ELDRinOE'S COAST PILOT. 36'i ^ N* 1^ miles. About ^ mile Northeasterly from this danger, there are several Rocks, which are bare at Low Tide. Between Southwest Ledge and the shore there are several Shoal spots, over which the current of Flood and Ebb sets very strong, forming heavy Tide Rips which are visible excepting at Slack Water. Between the last-named danger and Green Island there are also Ledges. It is therefore advisable for strangers to give this part of the coast a wide berth. The Southwest Ledge is the Westernmost danger lying near Cape Sable. Columbia Rock, This dangerous Rock, which is surrounded by Shoal Water, has, at very low Tides, as little as 6 feet water upon it. Cape Sable Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by W. % W. about a mile. Shoal Water extends off nearly a mile to the Southward of this Rock, over which the current of Flood and Ebb sets very strong, forming heavy Tide Rips which are seen excepting at Slack Water. About ^ mile to the Southward of Cape Sable Lighthouse, there is a Channel of 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Small or light draught vessels may therefore pass about midway between Columbia Rock and the Lighthouse. ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 369 Shoal Spot, This Spot, upon which there are Ripples, has about 14 feet water upon it Low Tide. Cape Sable Lighthouse bears from it NW. }i N. about a mile. Between this danger and the Light- house there is a Channel having from 4 to 6 fathoms water in it lit Low Tide. | Black Hock, This Rock, which always shows, has deep water all round it. Cape Sable Lighthouse bears from it W. 5^ N. 5^ mile. Between this danger and the shore there is a narrow Channel of 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. White Knoll Ledge, This Ledge, which lies otf about a mile from the Eastern shore of Cape Sable Island, has about 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and only breaks with a heavy sea. Cape Sable Lighthouse bears from this danger SW- by W. /^W- 2^ miles. There are many Rocks, Shoals and Ledges, which lie off the Eastern shore of Cape Sable Island. In order to avoid these dangers, vessels bound out or into Barrington Eastern Bay should not approach nearer than a mile to this part of the Island. In order to avoid the Blonde Rock, Brazil Rock and also the other dangers lying off to the Southward of Cape Sable, vessels in thick weather, should not approach this part of the coast in less than 20 fathoms water. High Water, It is High Water on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at Cape Sable at 8 h. 30 m., or 3 hours before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides 8 feet. The current of Flood sets to the "Westward, and that of the Ebb to the Eastward, by Cape. Sable. Memarks on approaching and entering the Bay of Ftindy, If a Chart of the Southwest part of Nova Scotia be examined, the mariner will readily perceive that on account of the Rocks, Ledges, and Shoals, the navigation must be extremely dangerous 370 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. in this locality ; but when we take into consideration that the atmosphere, during spring and summer, is almost constantly en- veloped in thick fog, with the currents setting with great strength and velocity over these dangers, and a difficulty of obtaining anchorage on account of the depth of the water, it must bo obvious to every intelligent mariner, at such times, that the only remedy to prevent disaster is to use the deep-sea lead often. It is therefore advisable in thick weather for vessels from Europe or the Eastward, bound to the Bay of Fundy, to round Cape Sable and Seal Island in not less than 40 fathoms water ; when past the latter haul gradually to the Northward, passing to the Westward of the Lurcher Shoal (before de- scribed) in not less than 55 fathoms, and also to the Westward of JMachias Seal Island Lighthouses, in not less than 45 fathoms. The passage to the Westward of Grand Manan Island is con- sidered safer than to the Eastwartl of it, and there are also better shelter in the Harbors, with less current, on the Northern side of the Bay of Fundy than on the Southern side. At this date (1884) there is a Whistling Buoy about 2 miles to the Southward of Mistake Island Lighthouse ; a Steam Whistle at Machias Seal Island Lighthouses, which in thick weatlier sounds 5 seconds in ^ minute ; a Steam Whistle at West Quoddy Head which sounds 8 seconds at intervals of 52 sec- onds ; and a Steam Whistle on the extreme Northern end of Grand Manan, which sounds 4 seconds duration, with intervals of 16 seconds. Between the coast of Maine and Grand IVIauau loland the passage is free from danger, the soundings varying from 10 to 50 fathoms water; the shores are bold, and the tidal currents regular. The Channel between Grand Manan and the coast of Maine is therefore recommended as the best and safest for vessels bound out or into the Bay of Fundy, especially in thick weather. When running between Grand Manan and Bryer's Island, the utmost caution is requisite, especially in thick weather and with light winds, as vessels are sometimes drawn by tiic current among the licdges and Rocks ; at such times it is advis- able to have the anchors and cables ready for immediate use. The author of this work spent most of the summer of 1851 in ex- ploring this |)art oi the coast, and found by experience that the only safety in thick weather, with light winds or calms, was the cables and anchors. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 371 Barrington (West) Bay, This passage, which is between the Northwestern part of Cape Sable Island and the Main Land, leads to liarrington. About 3 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken through a narrow, winding Channel, as far as the Lightship, but there are so many Rocks, Ledges, and Shoals lying in the Channel-way, and also a rapid current, that no stranger should attempt this passage with- out a pilot. Barringtori (Bast) Bay, The entrance to Barrington (East) Bay, which is between the Eastern part of Cape Sable Island on the West, and Baccaro Point on the East, is about 4 miles wide, and lies about 6J^ miles Northeasterly from Cape Sable Lighthouse. Baccaro Point Lighthouse. Upon Baccaro Point, East side of entrance to Barrington Bay, is a White Square Building with Black Ball to Seaward ; at this date (1884) this Lighthouse shows a fixed Red Light. Rocks, with Shoal Water, extend oflf about % mile Southwesterly from this Lighthouse. Bearings and Distances from Baeoaro Point Lighthouse. Distance. Cape Sable Lighthouse, . . . W- by S., • • • 7J^ miles. Barrington Bay Lightship, . . NW. by N. Brazil Rock (Bell Buoy), . . S. J^ W., N., 6^ 55/8 Bearings and Distances of Dangers from Baccaro Lighthouse in entering Barrington East Bay, from the Eastward. Brazil Mock, This dangerous Rock, which has deep water all round it, has as little as 11 feet water upon it at very Low Tides. At this date (1884) it is marked off its Southeastern part with a Bell Buoy. The sea breaks heavily upon this Rock in heavy weather, and iu fine weather only shows itself by a Tide Rip. In thick weather, or night-time, the lead gives no warning in approaching this danger. Baccaro Point Lighthouse bears from Bell Buoy off 372 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Brazil Rock N. J^ E. o^ miles. Cape Sable Lighthouse, NW. by W. ^ W. 8 miles. Cape Negro Lighthouse, NS. % N. lOYz miles. Baccaro Outer Ledge, This Ledge has about 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Baccai'o Point Light^iouse bears from it NW- ^ W.» about 1}^ miles. Bantam Mocks, These Rocks, which are bare at very Low Tide, generally break with a little motion of the sea. Baccaro Point Lighthouse bears from these dangers NE. about 1}^ miles; there is a Passage about ^ mile wide between Bantam Rocks and Baccaro Poiut, having from 5 to 8 fathoms water in it ; vessels passing through this Channel should keep nearer Bantam Rocks, as Shoal Water with rocks extends off to the Southwestward, nearly ^ mile from Baccai'o Point. Stony Island Shoal. This small Shoal, which has about 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies nearly midway to the entrance of Barrington East Bay. Baccaro Point Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by S. X S. 3^ miles. BarHngton Bay Lightship, In Barrington East Bay, in mid-channel, in about 6 fathoms water, is placed a Lightship which is painted Red, with the word Barrington in AVhite letters on both sides. This Lightship at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light, and is intended as a guide to Barrington East and West Bays. Baccaro Point Light- house bears from this Lightship SE. by S. ^ S- 6^ miles. Itemarks, Shoal "V^'ater, with many Rocks upon it, extends off from both sides of Barrington East Bay. Vessels, therefore, bound up to BaiTington, should keep about midway until the Lightship is made. About 20 feet water, at Low Tide, can be carried up as far bs the Lightship, and from this about 10 feet, at Low Tide, can be taken up abreast the wJ a'ves. Above the Lightship the ELDllIDGE'S COiST PILOT. 373 Channel is very narrow, with Flats, Rocks and Ledges on both Bides. It is therefore advisable for strangers not to go more than j^ mile above the Lightsh p without a pilot. Sailing Directions for Barrington East Bay in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 10 feet draught, from the Westward, bound to Barrington, in order to avoid the dangers to the South- ward of Cape Sable, should leave it about 3 miles on the Port hand, and when it bears NW., steer about NE. by N., taking care to not approach either shore nearer than a mile. When the Lightship in Ban-ington Bay bears NW. by N. Yz N., then run for it on this course, carrying not less than 3^ fathoms water across the Flat Ground. Leave the Lightship close to on the Starboard hand, and make good the cours;i N. J^ E. about yi mile. Then anchor in about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. It is not prudent to go above this without a pilot, as the Channel is very narrow, and the Flats are steep, too. From the Eastward, in wrder to avoid Bantam Rocks (before described) , leave Baccaro Point Lightliouse about "2 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears NE. by E., gradually haul to the Northward. When Barrington Bay is wt!l open, then run in about midway ; when about 3 miles past the last-named Light- house, bring the Lightship to bear NW. by TS. % N., and follow the du'ections before given. Beating into Barrington East Bay. In beating into Barrington East Bay, do not approach either side nearer than a mile, until about 3 miles from the Lightship. Then keep this Lightship bearing about NW. by N. >^ N. , and make use of the lead ; and when the water shoals to 3 fathoms at Low Tide, tack ship, and anchor on either side of the Lightship, close to it. Wauses Ledge lies SW. by W. ^/z W. about ^ mile from this Lightship. Sailing Directions for Barrington East Bay at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Westward may, as soon as Baccaro Point Light is made, bring it to bear NE. by E., and run for it on this 374 ELDTUDOE'S COAST PILOT. course, leaving the dangers off Cape Sable well on the Port hand. When the Lightship in the Bay bears N- by W., Baccaro Point Ligiit will tlien be distant about 2 miles. Then staer N. yi E. until this Lightship bears NW- by N. ^^ N- Then run for it on this course, leaving it close to on the Starboard hand, and anchor a short distance above it in from 4j4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, in order to avoid Bantam Rocks (before described), leave Baccaro Point at least 2 miles on Starboard hand, and when it bears NE. by E. haul up N- J4 E. until the Lightship bears NW. by N. J4 N. ; then follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Barrington East Bay on the days of the Full .and Change of the Moon at 8 h. 27 m., or 3 h. 3 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 7^ feet. PORT LATOUR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Baccaro Point Lighthouse on the West, and a small Island on the East, called Blanche Island, lies East-Northerly about 9 miles from Cape Sable Lighthouse. Dangers in entering this Harbor. South Ledge, This Ledge consists of several Rocks, some of which are sunken and some are above water. Baccaro Lighthouse bears from this danger West, nearly lyi miles. North Ledge* This also consists of severaJ Rocks, some of which are sunken and some are above water. Baccaro Point Lighthouse bears from this danger SW. by W. % W- IJ^ miles; between Baccaro Point and the North and Soutli Ledges there is a Channel having from G to 9 fathoms water in it. The Ship Channel, in entering Port Latour, is to the Eastward of both these Ledges. ELDKIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 375 Cuckold Mock, This oinall Rock, whicJ L awash at very Low Tides, has deep water all round it. Baccaro Point Lighthouse bears from this diinger W. % S. fj mile. Between the South Ledge and Cuck- old Rock there is a Channel about ^ mile wide, with a depth of from 7 to 9 fathoms water. Memarks, Port Latour is somewhat exposed to Southerly winds, and is principally used by small fishing vessels. Aijout 9 feet water at Low Tide can be taken into this place, out as the Channel is narrow, and there are several dangers in entering, it is therefore advisable for strangers to employ a pilot. There is, however, safe Anchorage in a small hole on the East- ern side of John's Island, in about 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. Strangers should not attempt to enter this hole except in cases of emergency. Sailing Directions for Fort Latour Anchorage in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Eastward or "Westward, of not more than 12 feet draught, may, when the entrance to Port Latour is well (ipen, run in, leaving the South and North Ledges, which are both above water, about ^ mile on the Port hand ; when past these Ledges (both of which have been described) steer about N. by E-, keeping not more" than y^ mile from Green Island, which is quite bold, and lies on the Starboard side of the passage ; as you sail in you will see on the Port, John's Island, which is 60 feet high, and midway between it and Green Island, a little Island lying nearly in the middle of the passage ; this is called Rain Island. In order to avoid two sunken Rocks which lie about 400 yards Northeast from Rain Island, it is necessai'y to leave it not more than 75 yards on the Port hand ; when abreast the Northern part of Rain Island make gooC the course N. }4 E., carrying about 2^ fathoms at Low Tide across the Flat Ground, and anchor about }4 mile above the last named Island, in about 3J^ fathoms at Low Tide. 376 ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. NEGRO HARBOR AND C "DE RIVER. On account of Negro Island, this Harbor and River has two entrances ; the Eastern, which is the Ship Channel, is between Grey Rocks and Negro Island, and is about 3^ mile wide ; the Eastern entrance to this Harbor and River is about 7 miles South- westerly ironi Ciipe Roseway (entrance to Shelburne Harbor), imj East-Northerly 7^ miles from Baccaro Point Lighthouse. Negro Island Lighthouse. Upon the Northeastern part of Negro Island is a White, Square Building, which at this date (1884) shows a Red and White Re- volving Light. Bearings and Distanoes from ITegro Island Lighthouse. Dlatanoe. Bell Buoy, off South part Brazil Rock, Cape Roseway Lighthouse, west side of entrance to Shelburne Harbor, Grey Rocks (Southwest part), SW. % s., 10^ miles. JM^^j.) .... NE. by E. ^ E., Budget Rock, NE.byN. i^N., 1 5/8 Dangers to the Eastward of Negro Island. Grey Rocks. These Rocks, which are on the Eastern side of entrance to Negro Harbor, extend Northeasterly and Southwesterly about Yi mile, and are mostly above water; the largest, which is about 10 feet above High Water, lies near the Southwestern part ; they arc very bold and may be approached close to on their South wester u side. These Rocks are of great service in pointing out the Channel between Budget and East Point Rocks. Negro Isltuul Lighthouse bears from the Southwest part of Grey Rocks SW. by W. % W. about a mile. Budget Rock. This dangerous Rock, upon which there are but 3 feet water at Low Tide, lies nearly in mid-channel between Negro Island and ELDUIDGKS COAST PILOT. 377 Kiiist Point. Negro Island LighthouKo boars from this danger SW". l>v S. Vi S., uijout y% milo ; Soutliwestom part Gri-y Uocks E- % S. y^ inilo. A Buoy has been placed to mark Uadget Kock, but too much reliance should not be placed on its being in the proper position. Between tliis Rock and Negro Island there is a narrow Channel of 4 fathoms water at Low Tide ; in going tlirougli it is necessary to keep nearer the Rock, as Shoal Water extends off. Northeasterly nearly % mile from Negro Island. Ea8t Point Hocks, These Rocks, which lie Southwesterly nearly j{ mile from East Point, which is on the Eastern side of entrance, are bare at Low Tide ; they are nearly on a line with Budget Rock and the Lighthouse. The Ship Channel, which is about }( mile wide, and has a depth of 8 fathoms water, lies between Budget and East Point Rocks. Dangers to the Westward cf Negro Island. The Salvages, These Rocks, which extend NE. by N. and SW. by S. nearly 2 miles, are very bold on their Eastern part, and are the South- ernmost dangers in approaching Negro Harbor from the West- ward. Some of these dangers are 10 feet above High Water, while others are only bare at very low Tides. The Southwestern part of Negro Island bears from the Northeastern part of the Salvages NE. about a mile. Triangle Mocks, These three Rocks, which lie nearly in mid-channel, form a tri- angle. They are nearly }^ mile apart, and have about 4 fathoms water between them. The two Western show at low spring Tides, while the Easternmost has 3 feet water upon it. About J^ mile to the Northward of the Triangles, and a short distance from the Western part of Negro Island, is Mackerel Rock, which is above High Water. Between Mackerel Rock and the Triangles the Channel leading into Negro Harbor is about ^ mile wide, with a depth of 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. The Southwest part of Negro Island bears from the Northeastern Triangle E>SE. ^ mile. 378 ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. Shag Rock, This Rock, which xa ul)oiit (> feot above High Water, \s upon the WcHtiMD Hide of the Channel, und lioH about i^ mile W.SW. from tlie Western Triangle. This danger is of great eervico iu pointing out the widest Channel leading into Negro Harbor. Be- tween Shag Uock and the Western Triangle, the Channel iu nearly ^ mile wide, with a depth of from 7 to 8 fathoms water. Remarks, Negro Island, which is upwards of 2 miles in length, has the appearance of 2 islands, the connecting link being a low narrow shingle Causeway. The Southeastern end of this Island (which is called Cape Negro) is Dark and Rocky, and gradually ' .es to nearly 100 feet above the level of the sea. Siioal ' ater, with sunken Kocks, extends off about % mile from its Northeastern and Southwestern sitles, and a long 8hlu<>;lo Spit extends off Northeasterly ^ mile from its Northwetsteru point. By the Ship Channel about 24 feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken in past Negro Island, and from this about 21 feet can be canied up a short distance above Davis Island.* By the Western Passage about 21 feet, at Low Tide, can be carried in past Negro Island. Sailing Directions for Negro Harbor and Clyde River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. By Ship Channel, Vessels of not more than 15 feet draught, from the Westward, in order to avoid the Salvages (before described), may, as soon as Negi'o Island is made, bring the highest part to bear N. byE., and run for it on this course, leaving the Southeast point about }4 mile on the Port hand. When past the last-named po'nt, steer about N. by E. J^ E., keeping a sharp look-out for Grey Rocks (before described). When these are made, leave them about 200 yards on the Starboard hand, and gradually haul to * Davis Island is on the West side of the Channel about 5 miles above Negro Island Lighthouse. ELDRIDOE'8 COAST PILOT. 379 the Northwunl until the SouthwcHtern Hock al)ovc water bcurs ESE- Then nuike good the eouiHe W-NW., pasHlng about midway between lludj^et und Kuwt Toint UockH. Wlion the Llj^lit- hoU8C l)ear8 8., you are then puwt llnd^'t Uoek. and may Htew more Nortlicrly, about NW. hy "W., li-aving tlie Northwewt Spit wcU on the Port hand. Wlien puwt Xe}j;r() Ishmd, tlie lIurl>or will bo well open, und you may run up, keeping the Wewtern whoro best aboard for alwnit 1^ miles. Then keep the Eastern shore best aboard, and anchor about '2y^ miles above the Nortliwest point of the last-named Island, in about 3^ fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, as soon as Negro Island Lighthouse is iimde, l>ring it to bear W. by 8., and run for it on this course. VViien about 2 miles from it, keep a shari) look-out for Grey Kocks (before described). When these are made, haul round the Southwestcrnmost (which is about 10 feet above High Water), leaving it about 200 yards on the Starboard hand. When this Rock bears E-SE., make good the course W.NW., and follow the directions before given. By the Western Channel, Vessels of not more than 1 '> feet draught, from the Westward, wishing to enter this Harbor by the Western Passage, in order to avoid the Salvages (before described) should, as soon as Negro Island is made, bring the highest part to bear N. by E., and run for it on this course ; when about a mile from the Island keep a sharp lookout for Shag Rock (before described) ; when this is made bring it to bear W-NW., and run for it on this course, leaving it about 300 yards on the Port hand ; when past this Rock steer about North, keeping near the middle of the Passage, leaving the Triangles and Northwest Spit well on the Starboard band, and follow the directions before given. Beating into Negro Harbor, When the Eastern Passage, or Ship Channel, is fairly open, keep a sharp lookout for Grey Rocks ; when these are made leave them about 200 yards to the Eastward, and work in between the Buoy on Budget Rock, and East Point Rocks (before described) ; when past these keep the Island side best aboard, until past the 380 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Northwest Spit, then keep nearer the Western side, until about lj4 miles past the Northern end of Negro Island ; then keep in the middle to the Anchorage. • When the Western Passage is fairly open bring Shag Rock to bear from W. by N. % N. to NW- by W. J^ W. ; then work in between this Rock and the Triangles, taking care to not stand more than j^ mile to the Northeastward of the former ; when about ^ mile past Shag Rock, keep the middle of the Passage until past the Northwest Spit. Then keep nearer the Western side until about lj4 miles past the Northwest end of Negro Island. Then keep the Eastern side best aboard to the Anchorage. High Water, It is High Water in Cape Negro Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 8 h. 12 m., or 3 h. 17 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. NORTHEAST HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between East Point on the South, and John's Point on the North, is about 2 miles wide, and lies about lj4 miles North from Negro Harbor Lighthouse. Hemarks, The entrance to this shallow Harbor is much obstructed with Rocks, Shoals and Ledges, which narrow the Harbor at the entrance to }{ mile. About 9 feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken up above Tony Island, which ic 'ery small. On account of these obstructions, it is advisable for vessels bound to this Harbor to follow the directions before given for Cape Negro Harbor (Ship Channel) , and when past Budget Rock, take a pilot. SHELBURNE HARBOR. The entrance to this excellent Harbor, which is between McNutt's Island and the main land, is a little more than a mile wide, and lies East-Northerly 22 miles from Cape Sable Light- ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 381 it is lionse, Eost-Northerly about 9 miles from Negro Island Light- lioUHO, and West-Southerly about 89 miles from Sambro Light- house. Cape Roseway Idghthouae, Near the Southeast end of McNutt's Island, "West side of iMitranco to Shelburne Harbor, is a White Octagonal Tower, piiintud in Black and White Vertical Stripes, which at this date (1881) shows two fixed White Lights, one above the other. At this tinio a Fog Horn is placed near this Lighthouse, which, in tliick weather, sounds 10 seconds, with intervals of 110 seconds. Bearings and Distances from Cape Bose;:7'a7 Lighthouse. Diatanoe. Negro Island Lighthouse, . SW., 7j4 miles. Rugged Island Harbor Light- house, E. 5^ S., . . . . 7J4 " Dull Hook (which generally breaks), E. by S., .... 5^4 " UoU lloek (above water), . E. by N. >^ N., . . 2j^ " .)!;>• Uoc'k (which breaks with a heavy swell), .... SW. by S- J< S., . 1^ " Dangers in approaching Shelburne Harbor from the Eastward. Bull Rock, This danger, which has but 3 feet water upon it at Low T :le, is surrounded by deep water, and breaks with a little motion of tho sou. Cape Roseway Lighthouse bears from it W- by N- 5^4 miles ; Rugged Island Harbor Lighthouse, NE. by E. yi E. about 2 miles ; Bell Rock, NW. by W. ^ W. 3^ miles ; about ]( mile N.NE. from Bull Rock is another Rock, having about 10 foot water upon it at Low Tide ; between this last Rock and Wostorn Head there is a Channel about ^ mile wide, having from 13 to 14 fathoms water in it. Bell Bock. This danger, which is always visible, has deep water all round it. Cape Roseway Lighthouse bears from it W. by S. J^ S. ^yi miles J Bony's Point, the nearest land, N.NW. 1^4 miles ; Shoal 382 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Water, viith Rocks, extend, off Southwesterly nearly J^ mile. From Bony's Point, the outermost danger is called Strap-tub Rock, which is bare at Low Tide ; there is a Channel about ^ mile wide between Bell and Strap-tub Rocks ; vessels in passing between them should keep nearer the former. Jiff jRock, This Rock, which breaks with a heavy swell, has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Shoal water extends both North and South about 250 yards from it. Cape Roseway Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. by N. /^ N- 1 ^ miles ; between Jig Rock and the Southern end of McNutt's Island, there is a Channel ^ mile wide, having about 4 fathoms water in it. Vessels passing be twee ^ this danger and the Island should keep nearer the Rock, as Shoaj 'Vater extends off more than ^ mile from the Southern end of li!) jNutt's Island. Sand Spit Lighthouse. Off Sand Point, East side of entrance to Shelburne Harbor, upon a Pier, is a White, Square Building, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed Red Light. Sand Spit Lighthouse is about 5 miles above Cape Roseway Lighthouse. Bearings and Distances of Dangers in entering Shelburne Harbor. Middle Rock. This danger, upon which there are about 13 feet v/ater at Low Tide, lies nearly in mid-channel, and has from 3J^ to 4 fathoms water round it. Sand Spit Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by W. }i W. about a mile ; the Ship Channel is to the West- ward of this danger. Adamant Shoal, This danger, which is more than % mile in extent, lies neitrly in the middle of Shelburne Harbor, and has an average depth of from 2i) to 30 feet water upon it at Low Tide. The real dansfers are Adamant and Man )f-War Rocks, which lie on the Northwest part of the Shoal ; the former has 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide, while the latter has but 4 feet ; these Rocks lie E. by S- Lighthc nearly Koeks, This Tide, lie the usua McNui nearly 3 part is el part of tl deep wat( of access, about 5 f{ mile of th Sand Spii Nutt's Isl extensive Tides, wit Sailing time, From tt scribed) , bring it to| it about y- haul gradi Eastern sil When pa/ than 13 fel Leave thiJ Lighthousj * Surf Po Tills pohit : ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 383 ^ S., and W. by N. ^ N., about 300 yards apart. Sand Spit Lighthouse bears from Adamant Rock the Easternmost, S. % El. nearly 1J4 miles. There is deep water on both sides of these Rocks, but the Eastern Channel is recommended for strangers. Hero Shoal, This danger, which has about 13 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies on the Western side, near the head of the Harbor, above the usual place of Anchorage for large vessels. Memarks. McNutt's Island, at the entrance of Shelburne Harbor, is nearly 3 miles long, and about Ij^ miles wide, and its highest part is elevated 130 feet above sea level ; between the Eastern part of this 7.sland and the main land, the Channel is clear, with deep water. The hai'bor is safe and commodious, and being easy of access, is most admirably adapted for vessels seeking shelter ; about 5 fathoms water at Low Tide, can be carried up within ^ mile of the village ; but there is safe anchorage anywhere above Sand Spit Lighthouse. The Passage to the Westward of Mc- Nutt's Island and the main land is rendered impassable by an extensive Bar, which in some places is nearly dry at very Low Tides, with scattering Rocks upon it. Sailing Directions for Shelburne Harbor in Day> time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, in order to avoid Jig Rock (before de- scribed), when about 3 miles from Cape Roseway Lighthouse,, bring it to bear N. ^ E., and run for it on this course, leaving; it about y^ mile on the Port hand. When past the Lighthouse,, haul gradually to the Westward, keeping about ^ mile from the Eastern side of the Islana, which is bold, and free from dangers. When past the Northwestern end of this Island, vessels of more than 13 feet draught should steer for Surf Point,* bearing NW. Leave this ^oint about 300 yards on the Port, and Sand Spit Lighthouse about 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and in order ♦ Surf Point is the first on the West side after passing McNutt's Island. This point is bold, and has a remarkable Bowlder lying on the Shore. 384 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. to avoid Adamant and Man-of-War Rocks (before described), keep about ^ mile from the Eastern shore, and anchor anywhere above the last-named Lighthouse, in from 5j^ to 6 fathoms water. From the Eastward, as soon as Cape Roseway Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W- by N- }4 N., and run for it on this course, leaving Bull Rock and Bell Rock (before described) well on the Starboard hand. Continue the course W. by N. % N. for the Lighthouse, until about a mile from it. Then gradually haul to the Northward, and follow the directions before given. Beating into Shelbume Harbor. In beating into Shelburne Harbor, in order to clear the Rocks on both sides, bring Cape Roseway Lighthouse to bear from N. J^ E. to W-NW. When past the last-named Lighthouse, keep nearer the Eastern side of McNutt's Island, which is quite bold. When past this Island, vessels of more than 12 feet draught should look out for Middle Rock (before described). When past this Rock, keep nearly in mid-channel, until past Sand Spit Light- house. Then, in order to avoid Adamant and Man-of-War Rocks, keep nearer the Eastern shore. Sailing Directions for Shelbume Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 12 feet draught, from the Westward, may bring Cape Roseway Lights to bear Nm and run for them on this course, leaving them about a mile on the Port band. When they bear W., the entrance to the Harbor will then be fairly open, and they may then run in about NW. by N. j4 N., keepinjr about midway the Passage. When about 2}4 miles past Capo Roseway Lights, bring the Red fixed Light on Sand Spit to bear N.NW., and run for it on this course, leaving it not more than }( mile on the Starboard hand. When past the last-named Light, in order to avoid Adamant and Man-of-War Rocks (before described) , keep the Eastern shore b .;st aboard, and anchor a])out 2 miles above Sand Spit Light, in pbout G fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, as soon as Cape Roseway Lights are made, bring them to bear W-NW., and run for them on this course, leaving Bull and Bell Rocku well on the Staiboard hand. Whea ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 385 about a mile from these Lights, the Passage leading into the Harbor will be fairly open. Then run in midway until about 2j4 miles above the Lights. Then follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Shelburne Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 8 h. 4 m., or 3 h. 25 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6J^ feet. Birchtoivn Bay, The entrance to this Bay, which is on the "Western side of Shel- burne Harbor, is about a mile wide, and extends Northwesterly about 2 miles. There arc many dangers in this Bay, some of which lie near the shores, and others in mid-channel. It is therefore advisable for strangers bound into this place, to employ pilots. JORDAN RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is about 1 5^ miles wide, la between a small Island called Blue Gull, on the "West, and Green Island on the East, and lies East-Northerly about 4^ miles from Cape Roseway Lighthouse. Memarks, Jordan River extends nearly North and South ; from the en- trance to Enslow Point, the distance is about 5J^ miles ; about 5 fathoms water can be taken up as far as the Sisters, which lie on the Western side about J^ mile from Shore, and 3 miles above the entrance ; from these dangers about 2j4 fathoms water at Low Tide, can be carried as far as Onslow Point ; above this, the River divides into two parts, which have but little water in them at Low Tide. In this River there is good Anchorage, in all ex- cept Southerly winds, which bring in a heavy sea ; there are no dangers in this River excepting the Sisters, which lie on the AVest- ern side, and are bare at Half Tide ; vessels, therefore, bound into this place, should keep the Eastern shore best aboard. 386 ELDKIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Jordan River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when Cape Roseway Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear N. by Em Jvnd run for it on this course; leave this Liglithouse about a mile on the Port hand and when it bears W. NW., steer NE. by E , keeping a sharp lookout for Bell Rock. Cape Roseway bears from this danger (which is always visible) W' by S. Y^ S. 2J^ miles ; when Bell Rock is made, leave it close to on the Port hand, and steer NE. Yi E. about 2 miles. Jordan River will then be fairly open, bearing N. ^ E. Then run in about midway, leaving Blue Gull Island, which is small, on the Port, and Green Island, which is 70 feet high, well on the Starboard hand ; when past the last-named Island, in order to avoid the Sisters, which lie on the Western side, keep the Eastern side best aboard, and anchor about 4 miles above the entrance in from 3J4 to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, leave Rugged Island Harbor Lighthouse, about Yi n^il^ to the Northward, and steer W- by N. about 3J^ miles, leaving Bull Rock on the Port, and Western Head on the Starboard hand. The entrance to Jordan River will then be fairly open, when you may run in midway, and follow the direc- tions before given. High Water, It is High Water at Jordan River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, 8 h. 1 ra., or .'3 h. 28 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of tides, 7 feet. Ancho: South 1 Suilin Froir dan Ri^ tl)(; Por Green I then rui wutor, 8 From dan Ri N.NE., The 61 the East and lies house, E house, bouse. Green Harbor, The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Green Island and the main land, is about a mile wide, and lies East-Northerly 5J^ miles from Cape Roseway Lighthouse, and about 3 miles Northwesterly from Rugged Island Harbor Lighthouse. ' Hemarks, In entering this harbor there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shores ; G fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken up about 2 miles from the entrance, and about 2^^ fathoms at Low Tide, can be carried about a mile further up ; there is good ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 387 Anchorage in this Harbor, in all windt excepting those from South to South-West ; these bring in a heavy sea. Sailing Directions for Green Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Jor- dan River, until Bell Rock is made ; leave this danger (dose to on tlu! Port hand, and make good the course E.NE., about 3 miles, (ircen Harbor will then be fairly open, bearing about N.NE. ; then run in about midway, and anchor in from 3j4 to G fathoms wutor, at Low Tide. From the Eastward, follow the directions before given, for Jor- dan River, until Green Harbor is fau*ly open, bearing about NNE-, then run in as before directed. RUGGED ISLAND HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Black Point on the East, and Western Head on the West, is about 3 J^ miles wide, and lies East-Northerly, about 28 miles from Cape Sable Light- house, East-Northerly about 8 miles from Cape Roseway Light- house, and West-Southerly about 82 miles from Sambro Light- house. Mugged Island Sarbor Lighthouse, Upon a small Ledge called Gull Rock, nearly midway the en- trance to Rugged Island Harbor, is a White, Square Building which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Cape Roseway Lighthouse bears from Rugged Island Harbor Lis^ht- house, W. ^ N. 7>^ miles ; Negro Island Lighthouse, W-SW- 13^^ miles ; Sambro Island Lighthoui|e, E. by N- }4 N.81 miles ; and Hope Island Lighthouse, E. by N- }i N. 18 miles. Shoal water extends off some distance to the Southward, from Rugged Island Harbor Lighthouse. :'^--4 mile from the Lighthouse ; then gradually haul to the Northward, leaving it not more than .'300 yards on the Starboanl hand; when it bears- £i.SEi., make good tlie course N-NE-, leaving the Chain Ledges (before described), about 100 yards on the Portliand, and Trini- dad Rock (before described), about the same distance on the Starboard hand ; when about ^ mile past the Chain Ledges you ELDllIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 391 will Hcc on the Port a number of small Islands ; these are called Cnuil)erry Islands. In order to avoid the Rocky Shoal called tlio Middle Ground, haul j^radually to the Northward, and leave llu'se last named Islands not more than 200 yards on the Port liuad, and Carter's Island Lighthouse not more than i^ mile on the same hand ; when abreast the Lighthouse make good the course NE. by N. }i N. about 1% miles, carrying 3 fathoms water at Low Tide across the flat ground, and anchor on the East- ern side in from 4 to -1^ fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels of not more than 12 feet draught, from the Eastward, should, when Rugged Island Harbor Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W-NW-, and run for it on this course. When about 1J4 miles from the Lighthouse, keep a sharp look-out for Whale Rock, which lies NE- by E- J^ mile from this Lighthouse, and always breaks. When this Rock is made, iuiul to the Northward, and leave it about yi mile on the Port hand. When it bears W.NW. , make good the conrse N. yi W-, leaving the Blow Breaker well on the Starboard, and Trinidad Rock well on the Port hand. As you sail in, you will see the Cranberry Islands. In order to avoid the Rocky Shoal called the ISIiddle Ground, leave these Islands, which are bold, not more than 250 yards on the Port Hand, and Carter's Island Lighthouse not more than ^ mile on the same hand, and follow the diiections before given. T/ie Basin. Small vessels from the Eastward or Westward, of not more than 7 feet draught, may follow the directions before given until about % mile from Carter's Island Lighthouse. Then haul to the Westward, leaving this Lighthouse not more than "^00 yards on the Starboard hand, and anchor in the Basin, with the Lighthouse bearing E-NE., distant not more than Yz mile, in about 9 feet water at Low Tide. Nearer the village there is less water. High Water, It is High Water in Rugged Island Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 7 h. 59 m., or 3 h. 30 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 7 feet. 392 ELDUIDOES COAST PILOT. SABLE RIVER. Tho entrance to this River, wliich is between Harding Point on tlio East, and Raspberry Head on the West, is about lj4 miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about 7 miles from Rugged Island Harbor Lighthouse, and West-Southerly about 10 miles from Little Hope Island Lighthouse. Dangers in approaching Sable River. Bantam Rock, This dangerous Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, lies about ^ mile from the entrance of Sable River. Harding Point, the near- est land, bears from this danger NE. by N. '^^ mile ; centre of Ram Island, SW. by W. % W. ^i^ miles ; Green Island (40 feet high) , NE. by E. 2^^ miles. From ^ to ^ mile to the Southward of Bantam Rock, there are two small Spots, having from 19 to 22 feet water on them at Low Tide. Jiemarka, About Ji mile above the entnuici' to this River is a Bar with only 2 feet water upon it at Low Tide, which l)reak8 heavily in Southerly gales. The Channel leading up is very nai*row, witli but little wat( ' in some places, and also requiring a favorable wind to entei or leave the River. It is therefore advisable for vessels bound to this place to take pilots. Sigh Water, It is High Water at the entrance of Sable River on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 8 h. 4 m., or 3 h. 25 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. PORT L'HEBERT. The entrance to Port L'Hebert, which is between Thrum Point on the East, and Richardson Head (which is 130 feet high) on the West, is about ^ mile wide, and lies East-Northerly about 19 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 393 miles from Cupo UoHCway Li<^htliou8e, East- Northerly about 12 miles from Uuggod lalautl Harbor Lighthouse, and Wost-North- erly '>}i miles from Little Hope Island Lighthouse. Port L'Hebert lAghtfiouae, About 1 J4 miles above the entrance to Port L'Hebcrt, upon Shingle Point, East side, is a White Scjuare Building, winch at this date (1884) shows a lied fixed Light. Dangers in approaching and entering Fort L'Hebert. Green Island, About ^ mile from shore, and SW. by S. 2^ miles from the entrance to Port L'Hebert, is a small Island called Green Island, which is 45 feet high. About Southwest ^ mile from the South- west point of this Island, is a ftock which is bare at Low Tide. Between Green Island and the shore, there is a narrow Channel of 3^ fathoms at Low Tide. Strangers should not attempt to pass through it, as there are sunken liocks lying on both sides. Ebert Bocks, About ^ mile from the entrance to Port L'Hebert, and a little more than ^ mile from the Western side, are Ebert Rocks, which are bare at Low Tide. The Lighthouse on Shingle Point just open to the Eastward of Richardson Head, clears these dangers. Ttirum Point Shoal. From Thrum Point, the Eastern side of entrance to Port L'Hebert, Shoal Water extends off Southwesterly nearly J^ mile. Remarks, The entrance to Port L'Hebert may be easily known by the steep and abrupt appearance of its Western side (Richardson Head) . About ^ mile above the entrance, is a Bar having but 2^ fathoms water upon it at Low Tide. The sea breaks heavily upon this Bar during heavy weather. Above this the Channel is narrow, with many obstructions lying in it. Strangers should not attempt to enter this place without a pilot. 394 ELDRIDGE'S COAS"> PILOT. High Water, It is High Water in Port L'Hebert, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 8 h. 9 m., or 3 h. 20 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. PORT JOLIE. The entrance to Port Jolie, which is between Jolie Point on the East and the main land on the West, is about 2 miles wide, and lies East-Northerly 22 miles from Cape Roseway Lighthouse, East- Northerly about 3 miles from the entrance to Port L'Hebert, and West-Northerly about 3 miles from the Lighthouse upon Lit* tie Hope Island. Remarks, Port Jolie is open to Southerly winds, which bring in a heavy sea. From the entrance to the Head the distance is 5 miles. In entering, Shoal Water with rocks extends off a long distance from both sides, and there is also but little water about 2 miles above the entrance, making it only available for small vessels with off> shore winds. Little Hope Island Lighthouse, Near the centre of Little Hope Island, which is about 2 miles to the Eastward of Jolie Point (the nearest land), is a White Square Building with Lantern on top, which at this date (1884) shows every minute a Revolving Red Light. Bearings and Distances ^om Little Hope Island Lighthouse. Distance. Rugged Island Harbor Light- house, W. by S. ^ S., . Coffin Island Lighthouse, . N£-, .... West Iron-bound Light- honse, NE. byE., . . Sambro Island Lighthouse, . E. by N. % N., Little Hope Shoal, . . . W. ^ S., . . . Jolie Point (nearest land) , . W.NW.; . • • 18 miles 15 (( 34 (( 63 (( 2 (( 2 44 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 395 Shotil Water, with Rocks, extends off Southwesterly about yj, mile from Little Hope Island, and Shoal Water also extends o\t about the same distance from its Northern and Eastern parts. lU'twccu this Island and Jolie Point (the nearest land) there is a (/luuuiel about lj4 miles wide, having from 10 to 15 fathoms water in it. Vessels navigating this Channel should keep about midway between the last-named Point and Island. Little Hope Shoal, This Rocky Shoil, which is about yi mile long, has about 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide. In heavy weather the sea breaks upon this danger. The Lighthouse upon Little Hope Island bears from the centre of Little Hope Shoal, E. ^ N. 2 miles. Slack IPoint* About 2^ miles North from Little Hope Island Lighthouse is lUuck Point, from which Ledges extend off nearly J^ mile. Ves- sels passing within Little Hope Island should therefore give this Point a good berth. PORT MOUTON. About 7 miles Northc^asterly from Little Hope Island Light- house, and about 8 miles West-Southerly from the entrance to Liv- erpool Bay, is a deep Bay called Port Mouton. Port Mouton Lighthouse, Upon the Northeastern end of Spectacle Island (which is in this Bay) is a Square, Wooden Building which at this date (1884) uhows a Red Fixed Light. Dangers in approacliing and entering Fort Mouton by the Eastern Passage. White Point Bock, This small Pock, on which there is about 15 feet water at Low Tide, has deep wnter all round it. Port Mouton Lighthouse boars from this danger W. ^ N. 3^ miles. 396 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Brazil Mocks, About W. by S. >^ S. 1 i uiiles from White Point Rock is the Brazil Rocks, which form a cluster about ^ mile in length ; several of these Rocks are bare at different times of Tide, Imt one known as Round Rook is always above water, and is conse- quently of great advantage in entering Port Mouton by the East- ern Channel. Port Mouton Lighthouse bears from Round Rock W. by N. 2}4 miles. About }i mile Southeast from Rouiul Rock is a small detached Rock having but 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Between the Brazil Rocks and Mouton Island the Channiii is more than a mile wide, with deep water and no dangers. Mouton Island (Northern Shoal), From the Northern point of Mouton Island an extensive Spit extends off about N-NW. nearly a mile. Vessels of not more than 12 feet draught, bound out or into Port Mouton (by the Eastern passage) , may cross the Spit J^ mile from the point, and vessels of 15 feet draught about ^4 ™^ile from it. South Rock, This Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, lies about J^ mile from the Southern point of Mouton Island. Thei'e is no passage for vessels between this Rock and Island. Devastation Shoal. This Shoal, which is nearly % mile in length, extends N-NW. And S.SEm and has on its Northern end, at Low Tide, as littlo as 11 feet water upon it. The Southern point ol Mouton Island bears from the Northern end of this danger W. ^4 S. % niilc ; between Devastation Shoal and Mouton Island there is a narrow- Channel of 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. Memarks, Upon the Southwestern side of this Bay are several Islands, among which is Mouton Island, the largest and Easternmost of the Group. By their position these Ishinds form a safe and com- modious Anchorage for vessels of any draught. There are two ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 397 Passages leading to this harbor ; the Eastern Passage, which is to the Eastward of Mouton Island, is available for vessels of any size or draught, but on account of the obstructions the Western Channel is narrow and not adapted for vessels, only with favorable winds, of more than 15 feet draught at Low Tide. Eastern Passage, Sailing Directions for Port Mouton in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when about a mile past Little Hope Island, bring the Lighthouse to bear SW. }4 W. and make good the course N.E- J4 E. about 5 miles, leaving the Southern point of Mouton Island about lj4 miles en the Port hand. When this point bears W-NW., then gradually haul to the Northward, leaving Devastation Shoal (before described) well on the Port hand, and keeping a sharp lookout for Round Rock (before described) ; when this is made, pass about midway be- tween tliis Rock and the Island, and in order to avoid the Spit which extends off to the Northward of this Island, steer NW. until the Lighthouse at the entrance of the Harbor bears SW- by S. /4 S. The Harbor will then be fairly open and you may run in, leaving the Lighthouse about % mile on the Port hand, and anchor in about 6 fathoms water at Low Tide, the Lighthouse bearing about E- by N. J^ N. ^ miie distant. Vessels of not more than 15 feet draught, when about midway between Round Rock and Mouton Island, may steer NW- until the Lighthouse at the entrance of the Harbor bears W- by S., then run for it on this course, crossing the Spit in not less than S}( fathoms at Low Tide. Haul round this Lightliouse at a dis- tance of ^ mile, leaving it on the Port hand, and anchor as be- fore directed. From the E.astward, when Mouton Island is made, bring its Northern end to bear West and run for it on this course ; when iibout 3 miles from it, keep a sharp lookout for Round Rock, the top of which is always seen ; when this Rock is made, leave it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and steer W.NW. until the Lighthouse bears SW« by S* J^ Sm then run in and anchor as before directed. 398 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Beating into Fort Mouton. In beating into Port Mouton by the Eastern passage, when past Devastation Shoal, ressels may approach within }^ mile of the Eastern part of Mouton Island, and when past Brazil Rooks may stand within ^ mile of the Northern and Western shores. When past the Lighthouse, vessels may approach the Northwestern part of Spectacle Island* within 350 yards without danger ; and also approach Mink Island (which is small and lies W. by N. about a mile from the Lighthouse) within 350 yards without danger. Dangers in approaching and entering Fort Mouton by the Western Channel. Bull Mock, This Rock, which is about 4 feet above High Water, lies on the Western side of the Channel, in the NaiTows between Bull Point on the mainland and Mouton Island on the East. Bull Bock is of great advantage to vessels bound through the Western Passage, as by its position the Channel can be determined with certainty. The Southern end of Mouton Island bears from this danger SE. >^ E. 1^ miles ; about 300 yards N. by W- J4 W- from Bull Rr;ck is a Rock with 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Jacket Island, This small Island, which is in the Western Passage leading to Port Mouton, lies on the Eastern side of the Channel, and is steep-to on its Northwestern side, but Shoal AVater extends from its Southern end to Mouton Island. Between Jacket and Mou- ton Islands the ground is foul ; strangers should not therefore at- tempt to pass between them. Middle Rock, This Rock, which has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies nearly in the middle of the Narrows between Bull Kock and Jacket Island ; there is a narrow Channel of about 18 feet nt Low Tide on both sides of this Rock, but vessels bound in should pass to the Westward of it. The LijflttUouiso stands uu Spectacle Island. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Massacre Island, 399 This small Island, which is in the Western Passage between the Northern end of Mouton and Spectacle Islands, lies on the Western side of the Channel. Port Mouton Lighthouse bears from this Island, which is bold on its Eastern side, North ^ mile. Between Massacre Island and the Southwestern part of Spectacle Island there is no passage for vessels. Spectacle Hock. This small Rock, which lies a short distance from Port Mou- ton Lighthouse, is quite bold on all sides, and is elevated about 3 feet above High Water. Port Mouton Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. by W. }4 W. 400 yards ; between this Rock and Lighthouse there is a narrow Chanc'^l having 7 fathoms water in it. Vessels passing through this Channel should keep nearer the Rock. JBy the Western Passage, Sailing Directions for Fort Mouton in Daytime > with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 15 feet draught, from the Westward, when about a mile past Little Hope Island, may bring the Light- house to bq^r SW. by S., and make good the course NE- by N. about 2^4 miles. The Western Passage leading into Port Mouton will then be fairly open. Then run ;n about midway, keeping a sharp lookout for Bull Rock (before described) . When this is. made, bring it to bear N. by W. ^ W., and run for it on thisi course, leaving it not more than 150 yards on the Port hand, and carrying about 3 fathoms water at Low Tide through the narrow Channel. When past Bull Rock, make good the course N., leav- ing Massacre Island and Spectacle Rock wdll on the Port hand, and haul round the Lighthouse, leaving it about }{ mile on the Port hand, and run up to the South westward, and anchor as before directed. High Water, It is High Water in Port Mouton, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 54 m., or 3 h. 35 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, G}4 feet. 400 SLDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. IiIVERPOOL BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between the Southei'n point of CofHn Island on the East and the mainland on the West, is about 1^ miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about 57 miles from Cape Sable Lighthouse, East-Northerly about 38 miles from Cape Roseway Lighthouse, Northeasterly about 13^ miles from Little Hope Island Lighthouse, and West-Southerly about 52 miles from Sambro Lighthouse. Coffin Island Lighthouse* Upon the South point of Coffin Island, East side of entrance to Liverpool Bay, is a Tower pcinted in Horizontal Stripes, Red and White, eight in number, which at this date (1884) shows a Revolv- ing White Light. This Light is seen 30 seconds in every 2 minutes. Fort Point Lighthouse bears from Coffin Island Light- house NW. by W. ]^ W. 3^ miles ; Brooklyn Pier Lighthouse, NW. by W. about 3 miles ; Sambro Lighthouse, E. % N- 51 miles. There is no passage for vessels between the Northern point of Coffin Island and the mainland. Fort Point Lighthouse. Upon Fort Point, South side of entrance to Liverpool Harbor, is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this ^ate (1884) shows a Red Fixed Light. Coffin Island Lighthouse bears from Fort Point Lighthouse, SE. by E. ]^ E. about 3j^ miles; Brooklyn Pier Lighthouse, E- by S- f^ mile. Brooklyn Pier Lighthouse, Upon the end of Brooklyn Pier or Breakwater, at the entrance to Herring Cove, is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light when coming up the Bay, and a Red Fixed Light towards the Harbor. Fort Point Lighthouse bears from Brooklyn Pier Lighthouse, W. by N- Y^ mile ; Coffin Island Lighthouse, SE. by E. about 8 miles. Remarks, In entering Liverpool Bay, there is deep water >>nd no dan jCis excepting those lying near the shores, but it it> exposed to ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 401 Southeasterly winds, and is not considered safe, especially during spring, autumn and winter months. Herring Cove, This Cove, which lies at the Head of the Bay, about a mile to the Eastward of the town of Liverpool, has a Breakwater where vessels of not more than 18 feet draught may find shelter with Southerly winds. At the entrance to Liverpool Harbor there is a Bar which will not admit vessels, at Low Tide, of more than 4 or 5 feet draught. Formerly the town of Liverpool had a population of 7,000, and, iu connection with Milltown above, carried on an extensive trade with Halifax, the United States and West Indies. The exports were principally lumber, cord-wood, fish and farm- produce. Ship-building was carried on to a small extent, and a considerable amount of tonnage belonged to the port. There was a patent slip, adapted for vessels of 600 tons, and also a foundry whare small repairs could be effected. Provisions and water could always be procured. Sailing Directions for Liverpool Bay and Herring Cove Anchorage in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Westward, of not more than 20 feet draught, may, when Coffin Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NE. by N. % N-, and run for it on this course, leaving Western Head, which is quite bold, about a mile on the Port hand. When about 2 miles from the Lighthouse, steer more Northerly until Liverpool Bay is well open, then run up to the Northwestward about midway ; as you sail in, there will be seen near the head of the Bay on the Eastern side, Brooklyn Pier Lighthouse ; when about a mile from this Lighthouse, bring it to bear N.W. by N. y2 N., and run for it on this course. Haul round the outer end of the Breakwater leaving it a short distance on the Starboard hand, and anchor inside, about 250 yards N.NE- from it, iu about 3j4 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, when Coffin Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W. by N. ^ N., and run for it on this course, leaving it about % mile on the Starboard hand. When past 402 ELDUIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Coffin Island Lighthouse, IJverpool Bay will then be fairly open, and you may then run up midway and follow the directions be- fore given. Sailing Directions for Liverpool Bay and Herring Cove Anchorage at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when Coffin Island Light is made, bring it to bear N-NEj.^ fvnd run for it on this course, until the fixed AV'hite Liglit on Brooklyn Pier bears NW- by N., then run for it on this bearing, and haul round it, leaving it a short distance on the Starboard hand, and anchor about 2o0 yards N.N£i. from it in about 3% fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, when Coffin Island Light is made, bring it to bear W". by N. j4 N., and i-'m for it on this course, leav- ing it about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When it bears N-NE-, steer W.NW. until the fixed White Light on Brooklyn Pier bears NW. by N., then run for it on this bearing, and fol- low the directions before given. Directions for entering Liverpool Bay in thick weather. A Whistling Buoy, painted in Black and White Perpendicular Stripes, has been placed in about 20 fathoms water at the en- trance of Liverpool Bay. Coffin Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. /^ E., distance about 1^ miles; Western Head (which is the first point on the Western side of entrance) W. ^ S. 2^ miles. Sailing Directions for Liverpool Bay and Brooklyn Anchorage in thick weather. Vessels from the Eastward or Westward, making or hearing the Whistling Buoy at the entrance of Liverpool Bay, may leave it close to on eitlier hand, and make good tlie course NW. ^ N. 4 miles, wliich will bring them up witli the Lighthouse on the end of Brooklyn Pier. In running this course, after the first mile from the Buoy, the water will Shoal gradually from li) fathoms to 4 fathoms it Low Tide. If there be no deviation fi-om tlie course, the last named depth (4 fathoms) will be near the Lighthouse. ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 403 Sailing Directions for Liverpool Harbor. Vessels of not more than 10 feet draught, bound to Liverpool Harbor, may at High Water ^ follow the directions before given for Liverpool Baj' and IIoiTing Cove Anchorage. When abreast Brooklyn Pier Liglithouse, keep a sharp lookout for the Buoy which lies al)out 3^0 yards Noi'theast from Fort Point Lighthouse. When this Buoy is made, leave it close to on the Port hand, and steer about West, crossing the Bar in from 10 to 12 feet water at High Tide. When Fort Point Lighthouse bears SEv steer more Southerly, keeping nearer the wharves, and anchor below the bridge in from 12 to lo feet water at Low Tide. Beating into Liverpool Bay. Shoal AVater extends oflE Southerly and Southwesterly a consid- erable distance from Coffin Island. Vessels in beating into Liver- pool Bay, should not therefore approach nearei than % mile to this Island. The Western side of the Bay is quite bold, and may be approached within 400 yards without danger, but the Eastern side is foul, and should not be approached nearer than Yz mile until within }( mile of the Lighthouse on the outer end of Brook- lyn Breakwater. The Eastern side may then be approached within 250 yards without danger. High Water, It is High Water in Liverpool Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 50 m., or 3 h. 39 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. PORT METWAY. The entrance to Port Metway, which is between a small Island on the East, called Frying Pan Island, and Metway Head (which is 110 feet high) on the West, lies East-Northerly about 6 miles from Coffin Island Lighthouse, West-Southerly 9^ miles from Cape Le Hftve, and West-Southerly 45 miles from Sambro Light- house. 404 ELDRIDOE'S TOAST PILOT. Port Metway Lfffh^house, Upon Metway Iload, Wewt side of er . -ance to Port Metway, i:> a White, Square Building witli a I'laek Square to Seaward, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed AVhite Light. Dangers in entering Fort Metway. The Eastwrn side of the entrance to Port Metway consists of a iminbor of small islands extending off S. by W. % W- about .'} miles from the mainland (with no Channels for strangers between them), and terminating in Frying Pan Island, a small Rocky Islet about 10 feet above High Water; Port Metway Lighthouse bears from the centre of Frying Pan, the outermost Islet, NW. by W. y2 W. ^4 miles. Stone Horse Hock* This Rock, which is bare at very Low Tides, lies about J4 mile SE. from Frying Pan Island. There is a narrow passage of -ij^ fathoms water between the Stone Horse Rock and Frying Pan Island. Strangers should not attempt to pass between them ex- cepting in cases of emergency ; at such times keep nearer the Rock. Southwest Breaker, This danger extends North and South about % mile ; near its Southern part is a rock having but 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide ; Port Metway Lighthouse bears from the Southwest Breaker N.NW. 1% miles. Rugged Rock. This is a detached Rock, with but 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and lies off a Spit extending from the Western shore about 1 ^ miles South from Port Metway Lighthouse ; this last-named Lighthouse bears from this danger N.NE. about ^^ mile. Strangors should not attempt to pass between this Rock and the Western shore. Middle Island Rock, This danger, which has about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies on the Eastern side of the Channel about lyi miles above the Lighthouse. ELDRIDQE'S COAST TILOT. 405 Middle Led'je, This danger, which is bare at Half-Ebb, lies on the Eastern iiide of the Channel. The Northern part of the village beara from the centre of Middle Ledge W. by N. about l>i miles. Nautiliia Hock, This Rock, which lies on the "Western side of the Channel, has about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Between this danger and tbe Middle Ledge is the Channel which leads to Port Met way. Reniark8, In entering Port Metway there is a giod Channel about Ij^ miles above the Lighthouse. There is then an irregular basin, having Shoal Water, with numerous Rocks and Ledges lying in it. The Nautilus Rock and Middle Ledge (both of which have been described), narrow the Channel to }l mile in width. About 15 feet water can be carried at Low Tide up to the A nchorage off the wharves. About 3^ miles Northwest from Port Metway, is Mill Village ; but little water, however, can be taken to this village. Sailing Directions for Port Metway in Daytime, ■vTith favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not moi'e than 10 feet draught, from the Westward, may leave Coffin Island about a mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse upon this Island bears N. by W.» make good the course E. by N., leaving the Rocks and Ledges off Pud- ding Pan Island well on the Port hand. Continue the course E. by N. until Port Metway Lighthouse bears North, then at about i^ Flood run for it on this course, leaving the Sout.'wost Breaker well on the Starboard, and Rugged Rock on the Port hand. Wlien about J^ mile from the Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Eastward, leaving it about % mile on the Port hand, and when it bears West, make good the course North, keepi* g not more than yl mile froni the Western side, and carrying not less than 16 feet water. When the Northern end of the wharves at the village bears W-NW., then steer NW. by N. /4^ N-, passing about midway between the Middle Ledge and Nautilus Rock (the former of which is bare at % Tide), and carrying not less than 1:2 feet water across the flat ground. When the Northern end of the \vl\arves at the village bears W- ^ N-^ then run for them, car- 400 ELDUIDOE'S COAST PILOT. ryinj? from l to 7 futljoms through the narrow Channel, and anchor a uhort di8tauco to the Kuatward of them, in from 5 to 7 futhomH water. Knjui the Eastward leave Cape Le Have (which is about 150 feet liigli) about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and steer about W. by S. yi S., until Port Metway Lighthouse bears North, thou run for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. Vessels of more than 10 feet draught may find good Anchonuro off Neil's Point* in from lij/j to 4>4 fathoms wattu* at Low Tide, with winds from SW. to E-SE. by way of North. From the Ktistward or Westward when Port JNIetway Lighthouse is made, biing it to bear North, and run for it on this course, leaving it al»out ^ mile on the Port hand; when al)reast this Lighthouse steer North, keeping about ^ mile from the Western side, and anchor about a mile above the Lighthouse in from 3j4 lo ij^ fathoms water at Low Tide. This Anchorage is exposed to Southerly winds ; it will therefore be necessary for vessels of more than 10 feet draught, if bound farther up, to take pilots. Beating into Fort Metway. In beating into Port Metway, when past the Southwest Breaker (before described), bring the Lighthouse to bear from NW. % N- to North, and when past it, keep the Western side best aboard, and anchor J^ above the Lighthouse, nearer the Western side, in from 6 to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. High Water, It is High Water in Port Metway on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 li. ^){) m., or ;5 h. 3i> m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, CJ^ feet. GREEN BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between Green Point oa the East, and the luamland on the West, is about 2% miles wide, • Neil's Point is on the West side of entrance to Port Metway, about a mile above the Lighthouse. ELDUIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 407 uiid lips Kast-Nortliorly li /^ miles from Coffin iMlnml Light- lioiisc ; KiiHt-Nortlu'ily ul»o>it (>^^ miles from Port Motway Liglit- lioiise, und West- Northerly .'l^ miles fiom Cupe Le Iluve. Indian Inland, This Island, which is about 2^^ miles to the Westward of Capo I,e Have, extends about N-NE. and S-SW. nearly >^ mile, and lies off the entrance to (Jreen Bay. Shoal Water extends off some distance from all parts of this Island. Vessels should not therefore approach it nearer than ^ mile. Dangers in entering Oreen Bay. G^reen Ledf/e, This Ledge, which is nearly '/( mile in extent, is bare at ^ Ebb, and lies nearly midway the entrance to (Jreen Hay. Green Point, the Eastern side of entrance to this Bay, bears from the centre of this Ledge SE. by E. Ij4 niiles. Halfway Itock. About S. by E. }^ mile from Green Ledge lies Halfway Rock, which is surrounded by Deep Water and has 15 feet upon it at Low Tide. Green Point bears from this danger E. by S. 1^ miles. Or fen Point Rock. About yi mile NW. % W. from Green Point la Green Point Rock, which has U feet water upon it at Low Tide. Memarka. The above are the only dangers in entering Green Bay, except- ing those lying near the shores on each side. About 6 fathoms water can be carried up 2 miles past Green Ledge ; and from this 4 fathoms can be taken up near the head of the Bay, a short dis- tance from the Petite River, which empties into this Bay. There is good anchorage at the Head of Green Bay with winds from W-SW. to S'SE. by way of North ; but it is exposed to South- westerly winds, which bring in a heavy sea. At such times, with the assistance of a local pilot, vessels may find good shelter upon the Eastern side of this Bay, among the Islands, in what is called 408 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Crooked Channel Anchorage. About 4 fathoms water can be taken into this place at Low Tide. In entering, the Channel is very narrow, with a strong Current. Sailing Direction; . for Green Bay in Daytime, with, favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bound to Green Bay, leave Coffin Island a])out a mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse upoa this Island bears N. by W., make good th6 course E. by N. about 8 miles. You will then see on the Port, Cape Le Have, which is an abrupt Cliff with a Reddish face, nearly iOO feet high. "When this Cape hi made, steer more Northerly, keeping a sharp lookout for Indian ] Uand, which lies about 2/^ miles to the West- ward of Cape I.e Have. When this Island is made, leave it about ^ mile on the Starboard, and steer N.NE. until the Northern end bears S. ^ E. Then make good the course N. j4 W., leav- ing Halfway Rock and Green Ledge (before described) well on the Port, and Green Point Rock (before described) on the Star- board hand. When Green Point, which is the first in entering on the Eastern side, bears SE., thou steer N.NE. up tlie IJay, and auchm" when the water whoals to 4 fathoms, nearly midway. From the Eastward, leave Cape Le Have about 2 miles on the Starboard hand, and run for Indian Island bearing about W. NW. , leaving it sibout y^ mile on the Port hand. When the Northern point of this Island bears S. J^ E., make good the course N. j4 W., and follow the directions before given. Beating into Green Bay. In beating into Green Bay, when past Green Point, keep the Eastern side best aboard until about a mile from the Head. Then keep midway. High Water, It is High Water in Green Bay, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 50 m., or 3 h. 39 m. before it ! at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tidep t'^l^ feet. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 409 in be nel is with Island 5 upon byN. Have, it high. I sharp e West- it about orthern r., leav- well on le Star- ering on Jay, and y- !S on the )out W. Then the good the le eep the Head. Full and ire it - at LE HAVE RIVER. Tho entrance to this River, which ia between West Ironboand Ishiud on the East, and Mosher Island on the "West, is about 1 ^ inilos wide, and lies East-Northerly 78 miles from Cape Sable Li}J!hthou8e, East-Northerly 33 miles from Little Hope Island Lijjhthouse, East-Northerly 18j4 miles from CoflSn Island Light- house, and 33 miles to the Westward of Sambro Lighthouse. West Ironbound Island Lighthouse, Upon the Southern end of West Ironbound Island, Eastern sido of entrance to Le Have River, near the edge of the Cliff, is a White, Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows u Revolving White Light. Cross Island Lighthouse bears from West Ironbound Island Lighthouse NE. by E. j4 E. 6^ miles ; Sambro Lighthouse, East 31^2 miles ; Mosher Island Lighthouse, NW. H W. 1^ miles ; Black Rock, 5 feet above High Water, SW. }i W. 4 miles. Mosher Island Lighthouse, Upon the East end of Mosher Island, West side of entrance to Le Have River, is a White Square Building, which at this date (IHH4) shows a fixed Red Light. West Ironbound Island Light- hoiiMO bears from Mosher Island Lighthouse, SE. ^ E- 1^ milos ; Black Rock, SW. by S. ^ S. 3J^ miles ; Cape Le Have, SW. l4 S. 3^/8 miles ; Fort Point Lighthouse, West side of entrance to Le Have River, N- ^ W. 3^ miles. Fort Point Lighthouse, Upon Fort Point, West side of Le Have River, is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a llxcd Red Light. Mosher Island Lighthouse bears from Fort I'oiut Lighthouse, S' ^ E. ^yi miles. Dangers in Approaching and Entering Le Have River. Bantam Shoal, This ttinall Slioal, which has about 2 feet water upon it at Low TidOt Ues between Cape Le Have and Indian Island. Cape 410 ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Le Have, which is an abrupt Clifif, nearly 100 feet high, bears from this danger about E by S- 1 ^ miles. Vessels passing between Cape Le Have and Indian Island should keep nearer the latter. Black Rock, This small Rock, which is surrounded with Shoal Water, is 5 feet above High Water. Cape Le Have bears from this dangei-^ NW. about a mile ; West Ironbound Island Lighthouse, NE. ^ E. 4 miles ; Mosher Island Lighthouse, NE. by N. ^ N. 3^ miles. Cape Le Have Mock, This Rock has about 19 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cape Le Have bears from this danger N. ^ E. % mile ; Black Rock SE* by E. % E' about ^ mile. Between Cape Le Have Rock and Black Rock there is a channel ^ mile wide, having from 8 to 10 fathoms water. Heavy draught vessels passing between Cape Le Have and Black Rock, should therefore keep nearer the latter. Ironbound Island Breaker, This Ledge has but little water upon it at Low Tide. West Ironbound Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E* ^ S' nearly }4 mile. Vessels should not attempt to pass between this Ledge and the Lighthouse. Shag Bock, This Rock, which lies off the Northeast part of West Iron- bound Island, has Shoal Water close to it. West Ironbound Island Lighthouse bears from, this danger SW. by S- ^ mile. Be- tween Shag Rock and West Ironbound Island, there is a narrow Channel having 5 fathoms water in it. Strangers should not at- tempt to pass through it, excepting in cases of emergency ; then keep nearer the Rock. Between the Northern end of West Iron- bound Island and Gaff Point, there is a Channel of about t fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels passing through should keep nearer West Ironbound Island. Cockawee Shoal, This Shoal, which extends about E. by S. and W- by N. about Yi mile, lies nearly in the middle of the river, and has but ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 411 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Fort Point Lighthouse beara from the centre of this danger N-NE. Ij4 miles. The Channel leading up this river is on both sides of this Shoal, however, should go to the Eastward of it. S''(- rangers, Bull Mock, This small Rock, which is surrounded with Shoal Water, is always visible, and lies on the Western side of the Channel about ^ mile Southwesterly from Fort Point Lighthouse. Vessels bound up should leave this danger about }{ mile on the Port hand. JRemarks. About 24 feet water at Low Tide can be taken to the Anchor- age above Spectacle Island, and from this about 14 feet water can be carried to the Eastward of Coekawee Shoal across the Bar. Le Have River is navigable for light draught vessels as far as Bridgewater, a settlement on the Left bank of the River, nearly 15 miles from West Ironbound Island Lighthouse. Sailing Directions for Le Have River in the Day- time, with ffl'^'oralle winds and fair weather- From the Westward, leave Coffin Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and make good the course E. by N. When Cape Le Have (which is an abrupt Clifif, with a Reddish face, nearly 100 feet high) is made, steer more Northerly, leaving Black Rock (before described) about }^ mile on the Port hand. When this Rock bears NW.» then steer about NNE-, with Mosher Island Lighthouse, which is on the West side of entrance to the river, on the Port hand. Leave the last-named Lighthouse about 5^ mile on the Port hand, and when it bears W.SW-, liaul up about N.NW. As you sail in, you will see, on the Port hand, Spectacle Island.* Leave the Eastern part of this Island about }4. mile on the Port, and gradually haul to the Westward, carry- ing not less than 4 fathoms water at Low Tide, and anchor with the Western end of Spectacle Island bearing S- ^ E- ^ mile ♦ Spectacle Island, some parts of which are 108 feet high, appears like two Islands, and lies about a mile Northwesterly from Mosher Island Lighthouse. 412 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. distant, in about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels of not more than 18 feet draught may go farther up, and anchor with the Western end of the last-named Island bearing SE. by S., in 3J4 fathoms water. A lom the Eastward, when West Ironbound Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear from W. by S. to NW., and run for it without fear. In order to avoid Ironbound Breaker (before de- scribed) , leave this Lighthouse about ^ mile to 1 3 Eastward, and run in about N.NW-, leaving Mosher Islanu Lighthouse about }( ^^^^ ^^ *^® ^^^'^ hand, and follow the directions before given. A?ichorage between Spectacle and Mosher Islands, Theie is good anchorage to the Southwestward of Spectacle Island in about 4 fathoms water in all winds. The onlv danger in entering is French Roclc,* which lies nearly midway between Mosher and Spectacle Islands, and has about 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sailing Directions in Daytime. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the directions before given until Mosher Island Lighthouse bears AYest, then make good the course NW. ^ mile. Then, in about 3^ fathoms water at Low Tide, with the Eastern end of Spectacle Island bearing N. by E Yi E., steer W. % N., carrying about 15 feet water across the Bar at Low Tide, and anchor in about 4 fathoms watLi, with the Eastern end of Spectacle Island bearing E. by N- J8 mile. It is not prudent to go farther up, on account of Moslur Ledge, which has but 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tln' Western end of Spectacle Island bears from this danger N. % E. yz mile. If bound farther up the River, follow the directions befoio given, leaving Mosher Island Lighthouse about % mile on tlie Port hand, and make good the course N.NW., leaving Spectaolo Island well on the Port band. When the Lighthouse at Fort * Mosher Island Lighthouse bears flrom French Bock, which has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide, SE. | mile. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 413 )f not »r with S., iu ithouse 1 for it )re de- 3tward, lithouse before ler •pectacle r danger between iter upon iS before len make ims water [l beariuj^ (eet water is water, |by N- ?a Moslior ide. TliL' [ev N. /2 13 before le on tlu' I Spectacle at l''ort Point is made, bring it to bear about N., and run for it, leaving Bull Re. : (before described) on the Port hand, and carrying about 14 feet water at Low Tide, across the Bar. When about ^ mile from Fort Point Lighthouse, Imul gradually to the Eastward, keeping in mid-channel, and carrying deep water. "When about i^ mile past this Lighthouse, which is left on the Port hand, haul gradually to the Westward, and anchor about a mile above the Lighthouse, in from 5 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. If bound to Bridgewater, it is advisable to take a pilot at this Anchorage. Beating into Le Have River. In beating into Le Kfive River, when past Black Rock (before described), bring . osber Island Lighthouse to bear from N.NE. to N.NW. When past this Lighthouse, keep the Eastern shore best aboard until above Spectacle Island. Then anchor as before directed. Sailing Directions for Le Have River at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, as soon as West Ironbound Island Light is made, bring it to bear NE. by N-, and run for it on this course until Mosher Island Light bears N. Then steer for it on this bearing, leaving it not more than }{ mile on the Port hand. When this Light bears W., haul up N-NW., and run about 1^ miles. You are then past Spectacle Island, and may steer more Westerly, can'ying not less than 4 fathoms water at Low Tide, and anchor when Mosher Island Light is shut in behind Spectacle Island, in about 4 fathoms water. With Easterly winds, when abreast Mosher Island Lighthouse, haul up about N'NE., and when the water shoals to 5 fathoms at Low Tide, then anchor on the Eastern side of the entrance. This Anchorage is open to Southerly winds. High Water, It is High Water at the entrance of Le Have River, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 51 m., or 3 h. 38 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall Tides, 6^ feet. has 7 feet 414 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. LUNENBURG HARBOR. The en^'-ance to this Harbor, which lies at the Head of Lunen> burg Bay, is between Battery Point on the South, and Moreau Point on the North, and is about ^ mile wide, and lies about 7^ miles Northwesterly from Cross Island Lighthouse. Cross Island Lighthouse, Upon the Eastern end of Cross Island, East side of entrance to Lunenburg Bay, is a Red Tower with Octagonal base, which at this date (1884) shows two Lights, one above the other. The upper Light is flashing White, the lower fixed White. At this time a Horn is placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather sounds 10 seconds in every IJ^ minutes. West Iron- bound Lighthouse bears from Cross Island Lighthouse SW. by W. yi W., 6^ miles ; Green Island Lighthouse, E. by N. ^ N., 6^ miles ; Sambro Lighthouse, E. ^ S. 26 miles ; centre of Big Duck Island, NE. 'iyi miles. Battery Point Lighthouse, Upon Battery Point, South side of entrance to Lunenburg Har- bor, is a White Square Tower on dwelling, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Ligh*. Dangers in approaching Lunenburg Harbor. Sculpin Shoal, This Shoal, which lies nearly in the middle of Lunenburg Bay, consists of several Rocky Patches which extend E. by N. 3^ N. and W. by S. ^ S. about j^ mile, and there is but three foot water upon the Western patch. This danger breaks in heavy sea. Battery Point Lighthouse bears from this danger NW- l)y N. 2% miles. Outer Middle Rock, In Lunenburg Bay about a mile NW. by W. Yz W. from Scul- pin Shoal, is Outer Middle Rock, wliich has 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Battery Point Lighthouse bears from this daugor N. by W. 3^ W. 154 miles. danger in it. This about 3 from Mo Lunenbi danger £ nel abon Rock, w^ no Char shore. The pi but there! ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 415 men- oreau ,nce to lich at The \.t this i thick t Iron- iW. by jntre of irg Har- his date )or. [irg Bay» [u-ee feet |ia heavy [W. 1'y I'om Scul- k" upoi\ it |b daugei' Inner Middle Mock, In Lunenbxirg Bay, about NW. by N. j4 N. ^ mile from Outer Middle Rock, is Inner Middle Rock, which has 13 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Battery Point Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by W* about a mile. Shingles, Upon the Western side of the Channel leading to Lunenburg Harbor, is a Rocky Shoal called the Shingles, which extends N. NW- and S-SE. about ^4 mile. Some parts of this danger is bare at % Ebb. Battery Point Lighthouse bears from the North- ern part of this Shoal NE. about % mile. Between the Shingles and Mosher's Head, which is on the Western side, there is a nar- row Channel of 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. Strangers should not, however, attempt to pass through this Channel. Long Shoal, This danger, which has about 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies near the entrance to Lunenburg Harbor, and extends about N.NW. and S-SE. ^ mile. Battery Point Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger N.NE. about J4 mile. Channels lead up to Lunenburg on both sides of Long Shoal. The one between this danger and the Lighthouse is narrow, and has about 18 feet water in it at Low Tide ; while the one between this danger and the Shingles is wider, and has about 4 fathoms water in it. Moreau Point Mock. This Rock, which is on the Western side of the Channel, has about 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and lies about 400 yards from Moreau Point, which is on the Western side of entrance to Lunenburg Harbor. Biittery Point Lighthouse bears from this danger SE. about }4 mile. Upon the Western side of the Chan- nel about W. by N. ^ mile from Batteiy Point Lighthouse, is a Rock, which has but little water upon it at Low Tide. There is no Channel for vessels between this danger and the Western shore. Meniarks. The principal dangers in Luuenburg Bay have been described ; but there are other dangers lying near the shore on both sides. 416 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. In order to avoid these, vessels should give the shores a l)erth of yi mile. About 15 feet water at Low Tide can be taken in about J-a mile past the Lighthouse on Battery Point, and from this, about 1) feet water can be carried within a short distance of the wharves. Sailing Directions for Lunenburg Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 12 feet draught, from the Westward, bound to Lunenburg Harbor, may leave West Ironbound Island about a mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears W-NW., make good the course NE. j4 E. about 4 miles, Luenburg Bay will then be fairly open, bearing about North. Then run in about midway between Cross Island and Rose Point, keeping a sharp lookout for Battery Point Lighthouse. When this last-named Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NW. by N. ^ N., and run for it on this course, leaving the Rocks off Ovens Point well on the Port, and Sculpin Shoal well on the Starboard hand. Continue this course NW. by N. ^ N. for the Light- house, until about Ys mile from it. T.hen gradually haul to the Westward, passing to the Northeastward of Long Shoal. Haul round the Lighthouse at a distance of 400 yards, and run up, keeping the Starboard side best aboard, and anchor about J^ mile above the Lighthouse in about 15 feet water at Low Tide. From this Anchorage the Lighthouse bears S. by E. % E. Small or light draught vessels may go farther up, and anchor off the wharves in about 9 feet at Low Tide. From the Piastward, when Cross Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear from W. to W-NW., and run for it on this course. Haul round this Lighthouse, leaving it about J^ mile on the Starboard hand. Wher Lunenburg Bay is well open, then run in midway, and in order to avoid Sculpin Shoal (before de- scribed) bring Battery Point Lighthouse, as soon as it is made, to bear NW. by N. 5^ N., and run for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. With Northerly or Northeasterly winds, vessels from the East- ward may pass inside Cross Island by the following directions. When Cross Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W. by S., and run for it ori tixis course. When about 4 miles from this Lighthouse, you w.'U see on the Starboard, Big Duck Island, ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 417 which lies about 2 miles NE. from Cross Island Lighthouse, and is bold on its Southern part. When this Island is made, leave it about % mile on the Starboard hand, and when past it, haul up NW. until its centre bears E. J^ S. Then make good the course W. % N., leaving Hound's Ledge (which lies off the Northern part of Cross Island, and is bare at ^ Ebb) well on the Port, and East Point Rock, which has 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide, well on the Starboard hand. Continue the course W. >^ N. until Battery Point Lighthouse bears NW- % W- Then run for it on this course, leaving Sculpin Shoal well on the Port hand. When about 2 miles from Battery Point Lighthouse, haul to the West- ward until it bears NW. by N. ^ N. Then follow the directions before given. It is not advisable for strangers to attempt to beat into Lunenburg Harbor, but with Northwesterly or unfavorable winds, they may anchor in Rose Bay. High Water, It is High Water in Lunenburg Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 54 m., or 3 h. 35 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. ROSE BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between Ovens Point on the North and Rose Point on the South, is about 1^^ miles wide, and lies on the Western side of the entrance to Lunenburg Bay, or about "W. by N. 54 N. 2^^ miles from the South end of Cross Island. Dangers in entering Hose Bay, About J^ mile to the Northward of Rose Point are several Rocks, one of which is bare at Low Tide. Shoal Water extends ofif a long distance from the Head of this Bay. Rocks also extend ofif to the Southward and Eastward of Ovens Point, some of which are bare at Low Tide. Vessels in entering or leaving this Bay should therefore keep about midway of it. 418 ELDKIDGE'S COAST PILOT. jRemarka, The depth of water in this Bay is sufflcieat to admit the heaviest draught vessels, and there is good Anchorage in it with winds from South to North by way of West, but it is exposed to Easterly winds. Sailing Directions for Rose Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the directions before given for Lunenburg Harbor, until Rose Bay is fairly open : then boldly run in midway, and anchor with the Northern point of en- trance bearing E.N£i>, in about 8 fathoms water. MAHONE BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between New Harbor Point on the East and Lunenburg Promontory, on the West, is about 8 miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about 90 miles from Cape Sable Lighthouse, and West-Northerly about 23 miles from Sam- bro Lighthouse. Remarks, In Mahone Bay there are numerous Islands. The largest, which lie on the Eastern side near to the entrance, are Great jtiid Little Tancook Islands. The Eastern part of this Bay is steep-to and comparatively free from dangers. But on the Western side the Islets, Rocks and Shoals are almost innumerable, rendering an intelligible description nearly impossible. There are several Harbors in it, and also several good places of anchorage. In ap- proaching Mahone Bay from Seaward, it may be known by tiie Highlands of Aspatageon, whose appearance in three regular swellings, is very remarkable, from a distance, sometimes, of more than 20 miles. G^^een Island Lighthouse, Upon the South Point of Green Island, oflf the entrance to Ma- hone and St. Margaret Bays, is a White, ^--quare Building, with ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 419 <3welling attacheu, which at this date (1884) shows a Red and White Revolving Light. South Rock, with 15 feet water upon it, lies about 225 yards to the Southward of this Lighthouse. Bearings and Distances from Oreen Island Lighthouse. Diatanoe. Cross Island Lighthouse, . W. by S. ^ S. • . 6^ miles. Hobson's Nose Light- house, NW. by W. . . East Ironbound Island Lighthouse, N. J^f W. . . . Peggy's Point Lighthouse, . NE. by E. ^ E. . Betty Island Lighthouse, Sambro Lighthouse, . . ■El- /4 S. . . • E. by S. ^ S. . 125/^ 20 Dangers in approaching Mahone Bay. • Middle Ledge, This is a Rocky Shoal extending E. by S. and W. by N. about J^ mile, with but 3 feet water upon it in some places at Low Tide. Green Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger E. by S. J4 S- 3)^ miles ; East Point of Big Duck Island SW- J4 S. 2 miles ; West Ironbound Island Lighthouse NE- about 4 miles ; Cross Island Lighthouse on with the East end of Big Duck Island, bearing SW. J4 W., clears this Ledge on its Eastern side, and this Lighthouse on with the West end of the last-mentioned Island bearing SW. ]/i S., clears this danger on its Western side. Northeast Shoal, This danger, which lies Northeasterly from Green Island, is about % mile in extent, and has about 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Green Island Lighthouse bears from this danger SW. by S. 1^ miles ; West Ironbound Island Lighthouse NW. by N; 2^4 miles. East Ironbound Island, This Island, which lies on the Eastern side of entrance of Mahone Bay, extends E. by S. and W. by N. about a mile, and is elevated about 60 feet above the level of the sea. It may be approached upon all sides within y^ mile without danger. 420 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. JSaat Ironhound Island lAghthouae, A little to the Eastward of the centre of this iHland, is a Wiiite, Oblong Tower on Dwelling, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. In approaching this light at niglit, it may he seen from all points of the compass, but in the daytime the lantern at this time is only visible, the other parts of the building being hidden by trees. Hobson's Nose Lighthouse bears from East Inni- bound Island Lighthouse , W. % N. 6 J4 miles ; Peggy's Point Lighthouse E. H N. 7^ miles. Flat Island, About 2 miles to the Westward of East Ironbound Island Light- house-, is Flat Island, which is about ^ mile in extent. Upon ita Northern part is a narrow eminence 40 feet high, whilst the re- mainder is very low. This Island may be approached on all sidoa within % mile without danger. About ^ mile from the Soutliern part of Flat Island, is a small Shoal with about 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Between East Ironbound Island and Flat Island there is a Channel about 1^ miles wide, having from 7 to 10 fathoms water in it. Bull Rock, This Rocky Shoal, which extends East and West about % mile, is bare at % tide, and lies upon the Eastern side of the main Ship Channel which leads into Mahone Bay. The Western part of Flat Island bears from this danger £. ^ N. about a mile. Hob- son's Nose Lighthouse W-NW. 3^4 miles. HEOKMAN'S ANCHORAGE. This Anchorage, which is on the Western side of entrance to Mahone Bay, lies Northwesterly 6^ miles from Cross Island Lighthouse, 7j4 miles to the Westward of East Ironbound Light- house, and Southwesterly about \% miles from Hobson's Nose Lighthouse. Mobaon's Nose lighthouse. Upon Hobson's Nose, Western side of entrance to Mahone Bay, is a White, Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. 421 BhowB a fixed Red Light. Green lalnnd Lighthouse bears from Hobson's Nose Lighthouse SE. byE. 8^ miles; East Ironbound Island Lighthouse E. % S. 6^ miles ; Westhaven Island Light- house NW. by W. 4^ miles. Remarks, About 5 fathoms water at Low Tide can be carried into Heck- man's Anchorage, which is '.i^ell sheltered from ivll winds. Hut there are several dangers lying between this Anchorage and the Lighthouse, with no leading marks or bearings to clear them. Strangers should not, therefore, attempt to enter this place with- out pilots. PRINCES INLET. The entrance to this Inlet, which is on the Western side of MahoneBay between Little Harmon's Island and the mainland, is about % mile wide, and lies West-Northerly about 4 miles from Hobson's Nose Lighthouse. Remarka* The Anchorage in Princes Inlet, though small in extent, is safe from all winds. About 6 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken into this place. Sailing Directions for Princes Inlet in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bound to Princes Inlet, leave Crosa Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and steer about Nm leaving Big Duck Island (which lies NE. about 2 miles from Cross Island) about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When past this Island, haul to the Eastward until its highest part bears S. J^ E. Then make good the course N. Yz Wm passing about mid- way between Middle Ledge (before described) and Little Duck Island. Continue the course N. J^ W-, leaving Bull Rock (be- fore described) well on the Starboard hand, until Hobson's Nose Lighthouse bears W. by N. Then haul to the Westward, leaving the last-named Lighthouse about Yi mile on the Port hand until it 'M. ; 422 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. bears S. Then make good the course W- 54 N. As you sail in, yon will see on the Starboard, Bookman's Island, which has the appearance of two Islands, and farther in Little Harmon's Island. Pass about midway between the forme 'nd the mainland until about abreast the latter ; then, in order to avoid a Spit which ex- tends ofif from the Eastern side, keep the Western side best aboard, and anchor in about 6 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, when East Ironbound Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NW. by W., and run for it on this course, leaving Northeast Shoal (before described) well on the Port hand. "When about 2 miles from this Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Northward, leaving it about ^ mile on the Port hand, until it bears S. ; then haul up about W. for Hobson's Nose Lighthouse, leaving the Southern part of Great Tancook Island about J^ mile on the Starboard hand. When about a mile from the last-r.amed Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Northward, leaving it about y^ mile on the Port hand, until it bears S. Then follow tLv direc- tions before given. High Water. It i« ""ligh Water in Frincco lulot, on' the days of the Full and Chai i of the Moon, at 7 h. 45 m., cr 3 h. 44 m. before it is at Bostoa. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 03^ feet. MAHONB HARBOR. This Harbor, which is on the Western side of Mahono Bay, lies West-Northerly about Wy? miles from East Ironbound Island Lighthouse, and Northwesterly a little more than 5 miles from Hobson's Nose Lighthouse. Westhaven Island Lighthouse, Upon Westhaven Island is a Lighthouse which at this date (1884) showed a fixed Light. Hobson's Nose Lighthouse bears from Westhaven Island Lighthouse SE- by E- 4|/^ miles. Meniarks* Mahone Harbor is well sheltered from all winds, but it is some- what difficult of access on account of the many Islands, Rocks and ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 423 Ledges which lie on the Western side of Mahone Bay. About 6 fathoms water can be carried to the Anchorage at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Mahone Harbor in Dajrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from tlie Eastward or "V^estward bound to Mahone Harbor, may follow the directions before given for Princes Inlet, imtil Ilobson's Nose Lighthouse bears SE. by E. Then make good tlu' course NW. Yz W., leaving Soutliwest and Gull Ledgeswell on tliO starboard, and Bockman's Shoal and Covey's Ledge (which is bare at J^ Tide) well on the Port hand. Continue the course NW. Vz W. until Westhaven Island Lighthouse bears NW. by W. V2 W. Then run for it on this bearing until about a mile I'rom it. Then haul to the Westward, passing not less than Yi mile to the Southward of the Lighthouse, and follow the Western nliore, keeping about 2o0 yards from it, carrying 6 fathoms water tliruugb. the narrow Channel, and leaving the Lighthouse on the Starboard hand, and anchor above Ham Island (which is the first to the NorthAvard of the Lighthouse) , in about 6 fathoms water. The Lighthouse bears from this Anchorage SE. by S. Y^ S-, dis- tant Yi iwi^*^- Farther up the t> ater is shallow, with several dan- gors lying in the Channel-way. High Water* It is Hiu'h Water in Mahone Harbor, on the days of the Full luul Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 47 m., or 3. h. 42 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. MARTIN'S RIVER ANCHORAGE. This safe and connnodious Anchorage, which is on the Western side of Mahone Bay, is between Birch Island on the East, Earnest Inhmd on the South, and Indian Point (the main land) on the Wost, and lies Northwesterly about 5 miles from Ilobson's Nose Lighthouse, and East-Northerly about 2^ miles from Mahone Uai'bor. 424 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Memarhs, About 7 fathoms water, at Low Tide, can be taken into Mar- tin's River Anchorage, but the approaches are narrow and lead i,p among Islands, Rocks, Ledges and Shoals, without any leading marks or bearings to clear them. Strangers should not, there- fore, under auj" circumstances, attempt to enter this Anchor- age without pilots. CHESTER HARBOR. This Harbor, which is on the Northern part of Mahone Bay, is commodious and safe, and is between Zinc Head on the East, Norse Island on the South, and Peninsula Point on the West, and lies Northwesterly about 9 miles from East Ironbound Island Lighthouse, Northeasterly 7 miles from Hobson's Nose Light- house, and East-Northerly about 7^ miles from Westhaven Island Lighthouse. Chester Lighthouse, Upon Quaker Island, about Ij^ miles to the Southward of the town of Chester, is a Square Tower, painted White, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed Red Light. Dangers in approaching Chester Harbor. Lynch Shoal. This danger, which extends about N.NW. and S.SC l4) mile. has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide, from it NW. -^ mile. Chester Lighthouse bears Middle Shoal, This small Spot has about 17 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Chester Lighthouse bears from it NW. by N. ^ N. l^miies. Bii'ch Shoal. This small Shoal has 14 feet water upon it at Lo.v Tide. Chester Island Lighthouse bears from it EI.NE. 1^ miies. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 425 Remarks, Upon the Northern side of this Harbor is the town, the streets of which run at right angles to each other. The population num- bers several thousands, the majority of whom are engaged in the fisheries and lumber trade, and a good business was for- merly done in manufacturing fish barrels for out ports. There are three passages leading into this Harbor; the two from the Southward being more direct than the one to the Eastward, which is narrow and somewhat intricate. About 4 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken in to the Westward of Quaker Island Lighthouse, and 6 fathoms by the Passage to the Eastward of this lighthouse. Chester Rock, This small Rocky Patch, which has about 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is surrounded by deep water, and lies in the middle of the Harbor, about 400 yards to the Southward of the wharves. Sailing Directions for Chester Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bound to Chester Harbor, leave Cross Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand and steer about North, leaving Big Duck Island (which lies NE. about 2 miles from Cross Ig^cind) about % mile on the Starboard hand. When past this Island haul to the Eastward until its highest part bears S. }i E. Then make good the course N. ^ W., leaving Bull Keck well on the Starboard hand. As you sail in you will see on the Starboard, Great Tancook Island, and on the Port will be seen Refuse Island. In order to avoid the Shoals ■='hich extend from these Islands, keep midway between them and steer North, keep- ing a sharp lookout for the Lighthouse on Quaker Island. When this Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear North and run for it on this course, leaving Middle Shoal and Lynch Shoal well on the Starboard hand and Birch Shoal on the Port hand. Continue the course North for the Lighthouse until about J^ mile from it. Then haul to the Westward, leaving the Western end of Quaker Island (on which the Lighthouse stands) about 350 yards on the Starboard hand, and run in about NE. J4 N., keeping midway between the Islands, and anchor outside Chester Rock in from 7 to 9 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, when East Ironbound Island Lighthouse is 426 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. made, bring it to bear NW. by W. and run for it on this course, leaving Northeast Shoal (before described) well on the Port hand. When about 2 xa}\ea from this Lighthouse haul gradually to the Northward, leaving it about % mile on the Port hand until it bears South. Then haul up about West, leaving the Southern part of Great Tan cook Island ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When the passage between this last-named Island and Refuse Island is fairly open, then run in midway and follow the direc- tions before given. Sigh Water, It is High Water in Chester Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 7 h. 44 m., or 3 h. 45 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. EAST RIVER BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is at the extreme Northeast- em part of Mahone Bay, is about J^ mile wide, and lies about 9 miles to the Northward of East Ironbound Island Lighthouse, 10 miles from Hobson's Nose Lighthouse, and 3J^ miles East- Northerly from the town of Chester. Memarks, In entering this Bay, there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shores. About 6 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken up to the Anchorage, but it is somewhat exposed to South- westerly winds. Sailing Directions for East River Bay in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather- Vessels from the Eastward or Westward bound to East River Bay, may follow the directions before given for Chester Harbor, until past Refuse IslancV Then bring its Eastern end (which is 50 feet high), to bear SW. 'j W., and make good the course NE. % E., leaving Coachman Ledge, which in bare at J^ Ebb, well on the Starboard, and the Middle Shoal, which has not less tha^ 18 feet upon it, on the Port hand. As you sail in, you will see on the Fort, a number of Islands, the Northeastern- ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 427 most of which is called Snake Island, which is bold on its East- ern side. Leave this Island about ^ mile on the Port hand, and steer about North for the high Bluff on the Western side of the Bay. When East River Bay is fairly open, bearing about NE. by N. J4 N., then run in about midway and anchor in muddy bottom when the water shoals to G fathoms at Low Tid but it is exposed to Easterly winds. Sailing Directions for Southeast Cove in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Cross Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and steer about N., leaving Big Duck Island (which lies NE. about 2 miles from Cross Island) about 1/2 mile on the Starboard hand. When past this Island, haul to the Eastward until its highest pai*t bears S. 5^ E Then make good the course N. % W., leaving Bull Rock well on the Starboard hand. When Hobson's Nose Lighthouse bears W. by N., then steer about E. by N., with the Southern part of Great Tancook Island on the Port, and leaving Flat Island well on the Starboard hand. When the Passage leading into Southeast Cove is fairly open, bearing about N-, then run in midway, leaving Grassy Island (which is small) on the Starboard hand, and anchor with this Island bearing about SE. % E., in from 5 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, when East Ironbound Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear about W.NW-? and run for it on this course, leaving Northeast Shoal well on the Port hand. When about 2 miles from this Lighthouse, haul gradually to the North- ward, leaving it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and steer about W.,with the Southern part of Great Tancook Island on the Star- board bow ; when the Passage leading into Southeast Cove is fairly open, then run in, and anchor as before directed. With Northerly winds, vessels of not more than 20 feet draught may enter Southeast Cove to the Northward of Grassy Island. At such times, keep midway the Passage. Beating into Southeast Cove. In beating into this Cove by either Channel, keep in the middle of the Passages. High Water, It is High Water in Southeast Cove, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 45 m., or 3 h. 44 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. 430 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. ASPATAGEON HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is Southeasterly about 2 miles from the high land of Aspattigeon, lies Northeasterly about 4^ miles from East Ii'onbound Island Lighthouse and West- Noi ■ herly about 5 miles from Peggy's Point Lighthouse. Dangers in cT^aching and entering Aspatageon Harbor. S-sa,l Ledge, This Ledge, which consists of broken ridges of Rocks, is about }^ mile in extent, is covered at about J^ Flood, and generally breaks. East Ironbound Island Lighthouse bears from this dan- ger SW. by W- 'i% miles ; Peggy's Point Lighthouse, E. J^ S. 6^ miles. Between this Ledge and the main land there is a Channel about ^ mile wide, having 11 fathoms water in it. Horseshoe L^dge, This Ledge, which lies near the entrance to St. Margaret Bay, consists of ridges of Rocks running about N.NW. and S.SE. about % mile. This danger, which generally breaks, is bare at % Ebb, and the ridges resemble somewhat the form of a Horse- shoe. East Ironbound Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger W. ^ S. 4^ miles ; Peggy's Point Lighthouse E. 3 miles. Gravel Island. This Island, which is about GO feet high, lies at the entrance of Aspatageon Harbor. Shoal "Water with Ledges, some of wliicli are bare at ^ Ebb, extends off more than J^ mile from the South- ern part of the Island, making the approach to it on its Southoiu and Western sides very dangerous. East Ironbound Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this Island SW- % W- ^ miles ; Peggy's Point Lighthouse E.SE- about 5 miles. Saddle Island, At the entrance to Aspatageon Harbor and about ^ mile Northwesterly from Gravel Island is Saddle Island, which is low ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 431 and extends about W. by S- and E. by N. a little more than }( mile. This Island is bold on its Northern part, but Shoal Water with Ledges, some of which are bare at Low Tide, extends nearly 1/3 mile from the Southwestern end of this Island. Between Gravel Island and Saddle Island there is a narrow Channel, hav- ing about 4 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. Strangers should not, however, attempt to pass through it. There is also a Chan- nel of 5 fathoms water between Saddle Island and the mainland ; but there are numerous Rocks and Ledges extending off nearly j4 mile from the latter. As there are no leading marks or bearings to clear these dangers, it is advisable for strangers not to attempt it without pilots. Hetnarks, The main Channel, which leads into Aspatageon Harbf , is nearly % mile wide, and lies between Gravel Island on the South- west and Black Island (which is bold on its Southern part) on the Northeast. About 7 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken in past Black Rock, which is small, and lies nearly in the m Me of the Harbor. There is good Anchorage in this Harbor, with winds from W-SW. to !B>S£i. by way of North ; but it is some- what exposed to Southerly winds. At such times vessels may find shelter close in under the Northern side of Saddle Island, which is bold and free from dangers on its Northern part. Sailing Directions for Aspatageon Harbor in Day- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Green Island Lighthouse about ^4 mile on the Port hand, and steer about NE-, leaving Northeast Shoal (before described) well on the Port hand. When past this Shoal, steer more Northerly, until Green Island Lighthouse bears SW. by S- Then make good the course NE. by N-, leaving Horseshoe Ledge (before described) well on the Star- board, and Seal Ledge and Gravel Island Ledges well on the Port hand. Continue the course NE- by N- until Peggy's Point Lighthouse bears E.SE. The entrance to Aspatageon Harbor will then be open, bearing about NW., then run in about midway between Gravel and Black Islands (the latter of which is very bold and is left on the Starboard hand). As you sail in you will see to the Northward, nearly in the middle of the Har- 432 ELDHI DOE'S COAST PILOT. bor, Black Rock, which is hold on all aides. When this Rock bears N. by W.. lun for it on this course, leaving it close to on the Starboard hand, and anchor about 300 yards above it, in from i')!^ to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels bound into this Harbor, should be careful to avoid a Sunken Rock haviui; but little water upon it at Low Tide. This danger lies SE. about 400 yards from Jllack Rock. From the Southeastward, leave Betty Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course NW., leaving Horseshoe Ledge (before described) well on the Port hand. When Peggy's Island Ligiithouse bears E.SE-, then make good the course W.NW. and follow the directions before given. With strong Southerly winds, vessels from the Eastward or Westward, bound to Aspatageon Harbor, may follow the direc- tions before given until the Southern end of Black Island bears E. by S. J4 S. ; then steer W- by N. Yz N., and haul to the Westward, and anchor close in under Saddle Island (which is bold on it:i Northern part) in from 6 to 10 fathoms water at Low Tide. High Water, It is High Water in Aspatageon Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 44 m., or 3 h. 45 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. ST. MARGARET BAY. The entrance to this Buy, which is about 7 miles to the Eastward of Mahone Bay, is between Middle Point on the East and Southwest Island on the West, and is a little more than 2 miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about &% miles from P2ast Ironbound Island Lighthouse, and West-Northerly about 18 miles from Sambro Lighthouse. Peggy^s Point Lighthouse, Upon Peggy's Point, East side of entrance to St. Margaret Bay, is a White, Scjuare Building with lantern on top, which at this ELDRIDGE'S COAST I'lLOT. 433 date (1884) shows a fixed Red Light. Betty Island Lighthouse bears from Peggy's Point Lighthouse SB. 7^ miles; East Iron- bound Island Liglithouse W. J^ S. lys miles ; Horseshoe Ledge W. 3 miles. Vessels bound up St. Margaret Bay should not approach this Lighthouse nearer than yi mile. Meniarks, St. Margaret Bay is a noble sheet of water, about 10 miles in length and in some places 5 miles in breadth, and compared with other portions of this coast, is unusually free from dangers. The water in it is deep, and in several parts of it, there are Harbors capable of admitting vessels of the heaviest draught. The entrance to this Bay may be known by the high land of Aspatageou, which is elevated nearly 500 feet above the level of the sea, and is a very conspicuous landmark. Vessels from sea, may bring the summit of this eminence to bear NW. X N., and run for it on this course, which will lead to the entrance. Dangers in approaching and entering St. Margaret Bay. Horseshoe Ledge. This dangerous Ledge, which lies near the entrance to St. Mar- garet Bay, consists of Ridges of Rocks running about N-NW. and S-SE- about % mile. This danger is bare at % Ebb, and the Ridges resemble somewhat the form of a Horseshoe. East Ironbound Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this dan- ger W. ^ S. 4^ miles ; Peggy's Point Lighthouse East 3 miles ; Summit of the high land of Aspatageon NW. by N. o miles. In thick weather this danger should not be approached nearer than 10 fathoms water. Southwest Island, This Island, which is on the Western side of the entrance to St. Margaret Bay, is about J^ mile from the main land, and ex- tends North and South about J^ mile. Peggy's Point Light- house bears from the centre of this Island SE. by E. about 31^ miles. Southwest Island is bold on its Eastern side. Between this Island and the main land, there is a passage having from 6 434 ELDUIDOKS COAST PILOT. ta H fiithorriH water in it ; but there in a. Rock which lies to the Nortiiward of this Island nearly in the middle of the Channel, with only H fi't't water upon it at Low Tide. Strangers should not, therefore, attempt this passage. Charley Rock, This (lanjiferous Rock, which is small, has about 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide, with deep water all around it, and lies on thi' Western side of entrance to vSt. Marj^aret Bay. Pe}jf by N. J4 N., leaving Charley Rock well on the Port hand. When past Southwest Island, follow the directions before given. 438 ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. High Water. It is High Water in Hubbard Cove, on the days of the Pull and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 4& m., or 3 h. 43 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. INGRAM RIVER. The entrance to this River, which is on the Northern part of St. Margaret Bay, is between East and "West Heads, and lies Northeasterly about 9 miles from Southwest Island, West side of entrance to this Bay, East-Northerly about 4 miles from the en- trance to Hubbard Cove, and North about a mile from Croucher's Ijland Lighthouse. Croucher's Island Lighthouse* Upon the Southern point of Ci'oucher's Island is a Lighthouse, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. South- west Island, West side of entrance to this Bay, bears SW- by S. % S. '^% miles ; Northern end of Shut-In Island S-SW. 5i^ miles ; Middle Shoal S.SW- 'i% miles. Vessels may approach this Island on its Southern end within \ mile, but Shoal Water extends off a long distance from its Northeastern part. Croucher's Shoal* In approaching and entering Ingram River, the only danger is Croucher's Shoal, which hns al)()ut 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Croucher's Island Lighthouse bears from this danger SE. ^ S. about ^ mile. Semarks. The entrance to Ingram River is about J^ mile wide, and runs in about N. by E. ]{ E. 5i])<)ut \% miles, whence it receives the v/aters of a fresh-wiitor stream ; fjithoms water at Low Tide can be taken in '^ "lilc al)ove the entrance, and 4 fathoms can bo carried within yl mile of the fresh-water stream. There is good Anchorage in this River in all excepting Southerly »vinds. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 439 Sailing DirectioDS for Ingram River in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the sailing directions ht'fore given for Hubbard Cove, until past Southwest Island, then steer about N. by E., leaving Shut-In Island and Middle Shoal (before described) well on the Starboard hand. When Croucher's Island Lighthouse is made, continue the course until it bears NE. >4 E. Then run for it on this course, and leave it about a % mile on the Starboard hand; when it bears SE-, In- gram River will then be fau'ly open, bearing about N-NE- ; then run in keeping the Western side best aboard, and anchor in from 4 to G fathoms water at Low Tide. High Water, It is High Water in Ingram River, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 4G m., or 3 h. 43 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. HEAD HARBOR, The entrance to this excellent Harbor, which is at the extreme Northeastern part of St. Margaret Bay, is between Croucher's Island Lighthouse on the Northwest and Indian Point on the Scntheasl, and lies Northeasterly about Sj^ miles from South- west Island, West side of entrance to St. Margaret Bay, North- easterly 5 miles from the Northern end of Shut-In Island. Remarks* • Head Harbor is both capacious and safe from all winds, and will admit vessels of the heaviest draught. The best Anchorage is above Clam Island (which lies E-NE. 1^ miles from Crouch- er's Island Lighthouse), and is small in extent, and has a Shoal Si)it extending off about 200 yards from its Northeastern end. Tiiore is deep water on either side of this Island, but the Chan- nel on the Northern side is the widest, and consequently is pref- erable with favorable winds. MO ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Head Harbor in Daytime,, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Green Island Lighthouse about J^ mile on the Port hand, and steer about NE. Yz £., leaving Northeast Shoal and Horseshoe Ledge (before described) well on the Port hand. When past these dangers, St. Margaret Bay will then be well open, and you may then run in, leaving Charley Rock (before described) well on the Port hand. When past iSouthwest Island, steer up the Bay about N. by E-, leaving Shut- in Island and Middle Shoal (before described) well on the Star- board hand. When Croucher's Island Lighthouse is made, con- tinue the course N. by E. until it bears NE. Yz E., then run for it on this course, leaving it about ^ mile on the Port hand. When this Lighthouse bears W.NW., make good the course NE- by E., leaving Strawberry Island, which is the first to the Northeastward of the Lighthouse, at least J^ mile on the V\\x\, hand. As you sail in you will see, nearly in the middle of ilio passage, Clam Island ; leave this last-named Island about 4(!0 yards on the Starboard hand, and when past it, haul gradually to the Eastward and anchor in about 9 fathoms water at Low Tido. The centre of Clam Island bears from this Anchorage W.SW. about Yi mile. From the Eastward, leave Peggy's Point Lighthouse about '4 mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course NW- by N. Yi N., leaving Charley Rock vc': •..>.. the Port hand. When past Southwest Island, steer aboi't M. by E., and follow tiie directions before given. Hiyh Water, It is High Water in Head Harbor on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 46 m., or about 3 h. 43 ra. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, C^ feet. FRENCH VILLAGE HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is on the P^astern side of Si. Margaret Bay, iy between Davy's Point on the South and Iiidiun Point on the North, and lies Northeasterly about ly^ ELDRIDGE'S OOAST PILOT. 441 miles from the entrance to St. Margaret Bay, and Southeasterly about a mile from Croucher's Island Lighthouse. Wedge Island. About a mile Southwesterly from the entrance to French Vil- lage Harbor, and about J^ mile from the Eastern shore, is Wedge Island, which extends Northeast and Southwest about 300 yard'^ From the Southwest end of this Island a Shoal extends off }( mile to the Westward ; a Spit also extends off about 300 yards from the Northeast end of it. Croucher's Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of Wedge Island N. ^ E. about 1^ miles. Davy's Bock, This Rock, which lies nearly midway the entrance to French Village Harbor, has about t) feet water upon it at Low Tide. Davy's Point, South side of entrance to this Harbor, bears from this danger SE. j4 mile. JKetnarlef^, The Channel leading into this Harbor, to the Northward of Davy's Rock, is contracted to }{ mile by a Spit which extends off from Indian Point. The best Channel, which is about }( mile wide, is to the Southward of this Rock. About 11 fathoms water, at Low Tide, can be carried in to the Auchoraije by the last- named Channel, and o fathoms can be taken up 1^ the Head of the Harbor. A small Rock, with 21 feet water upon it, lies a little more than y^ niile above Davy's Point, and about 300 yards from the Southern shore of the Harbor. Sailing Directions for French Village Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the du-ections before given for Head Harbor until Croucher's Island Lighthouse bears NE- ^4 E. ; then run for it on this course. When about 1^ miles from this Lighthouse, French Village Harbor will tlien be fairly open, bearing about E. Thou run in, and in order to avoid Davy's Rock, leave the first Point, which is bold, on the South side of tntraace to this Harbor, not more than 300 yards on the St?. ' .:; vxl hand. When past this Point, with Westerly MM •in lip Mill 442 • ELDKIDGE'S COAST PILOT. winds, anchor midway the first Cove on the Southern side, iA about 11 fathoms water at Low Tide. High Water, It is High "Water in French Village Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 47 m., or 3 h. 42 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. LUKE ANCHORAGE. This Anchorage, which is on the Eastern side of St. Margaret Bay, is between Luke and Troop Islands on the West and Gram- pus Island and the main land on the East, and lies Northeast about 2 miles from the Northern end of Shut-In Island, about 3 miles to the Southward of entrance to French Village Harbor, and Z}d miles to thv Southward of Croucher's Island Lighthouse. Idttle Thfmm Island, About l4 mile to the Northward of Luke Island are several Islets. The smallest and outermost of these is Little Thrum Island, which is about 100 yards long. From it a Shoal Spit extends Northwesterly nearly ^ mile. There is also Shoal Water on its Southwestern aud Northwestern Bides, which should not be approached nearer than 500 yards. Memarks, Within Luke Island, which is 40 feet high, there is excellent Anchorage for the heaviest draught vessels, secure from all winds. Sh.jal Water extends off about 250 yards from the Southwestern part of this T.-;!and. About 7 fathoms water can be taken in betwt on Luke i^^and and the main land. Sailing Directions for Luke Anchorage in Dajrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the f^astward or Westward, follow the directions before given for Head Harbor, until past Charley Rock and Southwest Island (before described) ; then steer about N.N£I> As ycu sail ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 443 up the Bay, you will see on the Starboard, Shut-In Island (before described). Leave the Northern end of this Island, which is bold, about % mile on the Starboard hand, and when it bears S., steer E-NEm with Luke Island on the Port bow; leave the Southern end of this Island about 400 yards on the Port hand, and haul gradually to the Nortlmard, and anchor with the North- ern end of it bearing W. by N., in about 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. High Water, It is High Water at Luke Anchorage, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 47 m., or 3 h. 42 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, G^ feet. The Coast from Peggy's Point Lighthouse to Sambro Light- The coast from Peggy's Point Lighthouse to Sambro Light- house is Craggy, Broken and Barren. The shore is also Iron- bound and Steep, and scarcely a tree is seen. Fish, however, were formerly abundant, and the Harbors are conveniently situ- ated for this business. PORT DOVER. The Eastern entrance to Port Do. 3r, which is between several Islands and Ledges, lies East-Southerly 3 miles from Peggy's Point Lighthouse, 4^4 miles Northwesterly from Betty Island Light- house, and E. by N. H N. lOj^ miles from Green Island Light- house. ^Remarks, This Harbor, in which there is good and safe Anchorage, hcs two passages which lead into it. The Eastern, which is the best, has deep water in it, and leads in to the Eastward of Taylor's and Fleming's Islands. The Western entrance has several dangers lying in it. In entering this Harbor there are no leading marks or bearings. No sailing directions can therefore be given. h m 'fflU m 'V' M%(l I m m^ma ■'' V S^i i £Ji '^^#h1|B;I m\ -Ml m 444 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. BLIND BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between Black Point on the East and Coyle's Head on the West, is about ^ mile wide, and lies East-Southerly about 4 miles from Peggy's Point Lighthouse, about 4 miles Northwesterly from Betty Island Lighthouse, and E. by N. about llj4 miles from Green Island Lighthouse. Shag Bay Breakers, This dangerous Shoal, which lies off the entrance to Blind Bay, extends NE. J^ N- and SW. J^ S. J4 mile, and has but little water in some places "^ou ii at Low Tide. Betty Island Light- house bears from the centre of this danger SE. by S. 3^ miles ; Peggy's Point Ligh- house, NW. % W. 4 miles ; Shag Head, NE. by E. 1^ milt; Outer Gull Rock, NE. % N. i^j mUe; Black Point (Eastern side of entrance to Blind Bay), NE. by N. >^ N. 1^ miles. Shag Bay Breakers are the leading mark for the entrance to Blind Bay. Green Shoal, This small Rocky Shoal, which lies about yi mile to the East- ward of Shag Bay Breakers, has 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Thert' is a Channel of 10 fathoms water between this danger and Shag Breakers. Bemarks, In approaching and entering Blind Bay there are upon the Western side many dangers, and there are also dangers upon the Eastern side until abreast Black Point, which is the first in enter- ing. From the last-named point to the Anchorage, which is to the Northward of Myra Dry Ledge, the Eastern shore is free from dangers. About 5^ fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken to this Anchorage, which is safe from all winds. Sailing Directions for Blind Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Green Island about ^ mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, make good the course E- by N. about 11 miles, which will bring you up with gers, SOI best Chi ELDllIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 445 on the de, and thouse, ise, and nd Bay, lut little i Light- ^ miles; g Head, ^9y mUe; E. by N. mark for Shag Bay Breakers (before described) . When these are made, bring them to bear E. by N., and run for them on this course, and leave them about 300 yards on the Starboard hand. When past these Breakers, make good the course NE. by N. for Black Point, leaving the Outer Gull Rock, Frying Pan Rock, which is covered at High Water, and Black Point Ledge above water, all on the Starboard hand. When abreast Black Point, which is left on the Starboard hand, keep about 250 yards from the Eastern shore until past Myra Island and Dry Ledge, which are on the Western side about ^ mile to the Northward of Black Point. Then haul to the Westward and anchor about 250 yards to the Northward of this Ledge in about 5j4 fathoms water. From the Eastward, leave Betty Island Lighthouse about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course N.NW., keeping a sharp lookout for Shag Bay Breakers (before de- scribed) , and leaving the dangers to the Northward of the last- named Lighthouse well on the Starboard hand. When Shag Breakers are made, leave them about 300 yards on the Star- board hand, and follow the directions before given. the East- ,ow Tide, nger and upon the upon the , in entei- iich is to free from taken to High Water. It is High Water in Blind Bay, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 46 m., or 3 h. 43 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet. SHAG BAY. The enti'ance to Shag Bay is but a short distance to the East- ward of Blind Bay. Vessels bound to the last-named Bay, must leave Black Point on the Starboard hand, while those bound to Shag Bay must leave this Point on the Port hand. Metnarks. At the entrance of Shag Bay, which is between Shag Head on the South and Black Point on the North, there are several dan- gers, some of which are above water and some are sunken. The best Channel is between Black Point Ledge and Black Point. 11 Pi! 446 ELDBIDGES COAST I'lLOT. About 7 fathoms water at Low Tirle can be carried to the An- chorage off Northwest Cove, which is on the Northwestern side about 1% miles above the last-named Point. Sailing Directions for Shag Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or Westward bound to Shag Bay, follow the directions before given for Blind Bay until Shag Bay Break- ers iue made, then leavo them about 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and when past them, make good the course NE. by N. for Black Point, leaving the Outer and Inner Gull llocks, and Frying Pan Rock, which is covered at Higli Water, well on tho Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see on the Star- board, Black Point Ledge, which is about 3 feet above Iligli Water, and lies Southwesterly about 400 yards from Black Point. Leave this Ledge about 150 yards on the Starboard hand, and steer about E. by S. until Shag Bay is fairly open, then run up about midway and anchor at the mouth of Northwest Cove (which is the first ou the Northwestern side) , in about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. It is High Water in Shag Bay about the same time that it is in Blind Bay. Betty Island Lighthouse, Upon Brig Point, Southwest eud of Betty Island, is a Square, Wooden Building, painted White with Two Horizontal Red Bands, with Dwelling attached ; at this date (1884) this Lighthouse shows a Revolving Red Light. Green Island Lighthouse bears from Betty Island Lighthouse W. ^ N. 12^4 miles ; Peggy's Point Lighthouse N.W. !%■ ^^^^^ '■> ^l^rs Head (70 feet high) E.SE. 1^ miles. Dangers in the vicinity of Betty Island Lighthouse. Southwest Shoal, This is a small Rocky Patch having at Low Tide about 9 iwt water on it. Betty Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by N. about Yi mile. Strangers should not attempt to pass be- tween this Shoal and the Lighthouse. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 447 the An- jrn side time, r. y, follow ly Break- jtarboard E. by N. )cks, and ell on tho the Star- love High ack Point. hand, and len run up ove (which loras water \ same time 3 a Square, Red Bands, lOUse shows bears from Tgy's Point tub) E.SE. rhtliouse. ibout 9 fL'L't is danger E- to pass be- Devereux Shoal, This small Rocky Patch, which has 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is the outermost danger lying off Betty Island. The Lighthouse bears from this Shoal E. by N. j4 N. nearly ]4 mile. JDuck Island, About }i mile Northwesterly from the Northern part of Bett> Island is Duck Island, which is small. There is a Channel of 3j4 fathoms water between this last-named Island and Betty Island ; but as there are dangers lying in it, strangers should not attempt this passage. Hopaon's Island, About ^ mile Northwesterly from the Northern part of Betty Island is Hopson's Island, which is about 80 feet high. Between this last-named Island and Duck Island, there is a narrow Chan- nel of 8 fathoms water, but as there are numerous dangers lying in the Passage, it is advisable for strangers to not attempt it. Norri8 Bald Rock, About yi mile Northwesterly from the Northern end of Hopson's Island, is Norris Bald Rock, which is 20 feet above High Water. Betty Island Lighthouse bears from this Rock SB- by S. % S. 154 miles. Norris Bald Rock is the leading mark for vessels. bound to Prospect River. White Horse Rock, Nearly midway between Norris Bald Rock and Hobson's Island, is White Horse Rock, which has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Betty Island Lighthouse bears from this danger S.S£. about \}i miles. Southeast Shoal, This Shoal, which has 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is small, and generally breaks in bad weather. Betty Island Light- house bears from this danger W. by N. % N. about 5^ mile. Kittee Wittee Shoal, This small Rocky Patch, which lies off the Western entrance to Prospect River, has about 30 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and generally breaks in bad weather. Betty Island Lighthouse bears from this danger SE. 14- S- 2^ miles. -1 i' \w IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) 4^0 1.0 l;|28 ■ 50 *^" 2.2 I.I i.*^ I- 11:25 1111114 11.6 % / % Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14SS0 (716) 873-4S03 m \ iV \\ « ^ 6^ '9>'- K^ o i\ 9> 448 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. PROSPECT HARBOR The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Church Point on the West and Heron's Island on the East, is about ^ mile wide, and lies Northeasterly 1^ miles from Betty Island Lighthouse, and East-Southerly about 6}^ miles from Fegg/s Point Light- house. Memarka, When Norris Bald Rock (before described) is made, there is no difficulty in entering this Harbor in daytime. The Anchorage is to the Eastward of Heron's Island, where vessels of the heaviest draught may lie secure from all winds. About 7 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken into Prospect Harbor. On the Western side of entrance to this Harbor, is the town of Prospect. Sailing Directions for Prospect Harbor in Daytiice, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, bound to Prospect Harbor, leave Green Island Lighthouse about j4 mile on the Port hand, and steer E> for Betty Island Lighthouse. When this last-named Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear E., and run for it on this course until about a. mile from it. Then steer N., leaving Hopson's Island Cbefore described) about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When abreast this Island keep a sharp look-out for Non-is Bald Rock (before described). When this is made, run for it bearing NE. byE., and leave : : bout 100 yards on the Port hand. When past it you will see Heron's Island, which is 107 feet high. Run for the Northern end of this Island, bearing about E. by N.? and haul round it at a distance of about 300 yards, leaving it on the Starboard hand, and anchor with the Northern part of it bearing W> by S., in about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. A Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, lies E. about 150 yards from the Northern end of the last-named Island. From the Eastward, leave Betty Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Starboard band, and when it bears E., steer N.f leaving Hopson's Island (before described) about % mile on the Star- board hand. When abreast this Island, keep a sharp look-out for Norris Bald Rock. When tLxS is made, follow the directions before given. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 449 If bound up Prospect River, a pilot is necessary at Heron's Island Anchorage, as there are several dangers lying nearly in the middle of this River. There is a Passage to the Eastward of Betty Island Lighthouse, which leads into Prospect Harbor, but as there are several dangers lying in the Channel-way, without any leading marks or bearings for strangers, sailing directions are therefore omitted for this Passage. High Water, It is High Water in Prospect Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 46 m., or 3 h. 43 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6|^ feet. BACK BAY. About 2 miles East-Northerly from Betty Island Lighthouse is the entrance of Back Bay, which, on account of the numerous sunken Rocks and Ledges at the entrance, is of little consequence to shipping, especially to strangers. PENNANT BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is the first to the Westward of Sambro Harbor, is between Pennant Point on the East and Mars Head on the West, and lies East-Southerly 3}^ miles from Betty Island Lighthouse, and about 5 miles West-Northerly from Sam- bro Lighthouse. Mara Head, This Head, which is about 70 feet high, is on the Western side of entrance to Pennant Bay, and lies E.SE> 2 miles from Betty Island Lighthouse, and W-NW. 3^ miles from Pennant Point. Shoal Water, with dry and sunken Ledges, extends oflf South- westerly nearly % mile from Mars Head. The outermost of these dangers, which has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and breaks with a little motion of the sea, is called the Grampus. lu 450 ELDhlDGF/S COAST PILOT. order to avoid these dangers, vessels bound out or into Pennant Bay, should not approach Mais Head nearer than ^ mile. Dangers in entering Pennant Bay. Puffer Rock, This Rock, which always breaks, lies a short distance within the entrance to Pennant Bay. The highest part of Mars Head bears from this danger W> 1^ miles. Broad Rock* This danger, which is covered at High Water, lies on the West- ern side of Pennant Bay, and is about Yz mile from Wood Island. Vessels bound up this Bay, should leave this danger on the Port hand. Middle Shoal, This Shoal, which extends about 400 yards NE. by £. and SW. by W., has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. The highest part of Mars Head bears from this danger W< % S. 1|^ miles; Eastern part of Pennant Point, SE< ^ S. about 2 miles. Ves- sels bound up Pennant Bay may leave thi& danger on either hand. Long Ledge, This Ledge, which lies on the Eastern side of the entrance to Pennant Bay, extends E.SE. and W.NW. about 600 yards. Pennant Point bears from the centre of this danger SE. by S. % S. 2J^ miles. This Ledge is left on the Starboard hand by vessels bound up Pennant Bay. Bay. TURNER BAY. About 2 miles above Mars Head (before def^ N. If^ miles; Pennant Point NW. 8^ miles. Smithson Rode. This Rock, which has about 12 feet water-upon it at Low Tide, is the Southwesternmost danger lying o^f Sambro Lighthouse. This Rock has deep water close to its Southern, Eastern aad Western sides; the lead, therefore, gives no warning in ap- proaching it from the Eastward, Westward or Seaward. Sam- bro Lighthouse bears from this danger E.NE. 2% miles. About a mile Northeasterly from Smithson Rock are three dangerous Ledges, which are called the Colt, Horse and Mare ; the two latter dangers have but little water upon them at Low Tide. Bull Bock, This Rock, which is above water, lies ^ mile to the Southeast- ward of Pennant Point, and is the Westernmost danger lying off Sambro Lighthouse. This Rock is bold on its Southern side, but ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 455 Shoal Water extends about 300 yards in a Northerly direction from its Northern end. Sambro Lighthouse bears from this dan- ger E. by S- 3 miles ; outer part of Pennant Point NW. by W. about ^ mile. Bull Rock is the leading mark for entering Sam- bro Harbor by the Western Channel. Sisteifs, The Sisters are nearly }^ mile in extent, and are the Eastern- most danger lying off Sambro Island. Sambro Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger W. }( 8. ly' miles, forty fath- oms water was found yi mile to the Eastward of this danger. Blind Sister, About yi mile Southwesterly from the Sisters is a Rock hav- ing at Low Tide but 9 feet water upon it. This danger is called the Blind Sister, and is mrrked at this date (1884) off ita South- ern part with a Bell Buoy. Sambro Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. by N. y^ N. iy2 miles. Fifty fathoms water was found }i mile Southeast from this Buoy. SAMBRO HABBOB. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Inner Sambro Island on the East and Penrant Neck on the West, Is about a mile wide, and lies Northwesterly about 2 miles from Sambro Light- house, and No 'theasterly about 2^ miles from Pennant Point. liemarka. In entering Sambro Harbor there are many Rocks, Shoals and Ledges, but there are two good Channels leading to the Anchor- age ; one of these Channels is to Eastward of a small Islet called Fairweather Rock,* the other is to the Westward of this Rock. The Anchorage (which is in about 6 fathoms water at Low Tide), is about }^ mile to the Northward of a small Islet called the Isle of Man. * Sambro Lighthouse bears from Fairweather Bock SE. % E. lyi miles. 456 ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. Sailing Direotions for Sambro Harbor in Dasrtime^ with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Pennant Point about % mile on the Port hand, and run for Sambro Lighthouse, bearing E. by S., keeping a sharp lookout for Bull Rock (before described) ; when this Rock is made, haul round it, leaving it close to on the Port hand, and make good the course NS. % C, leaving Eldad Ledge and Island Rock well on the Port, and Paddle Rock and Torpcy Ledge well on the Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see on the Starboard, Fairweather Rock which is small, and further in Inner Sambro Island, the Western end of which is bold. Con- ttnue the course NE. }i E. until the Western end of the last- named Island bears E. by N., then run for it on this course, leaving Fairweather Rock well on the Starboard hand. Leave the Western end of Inner Sambro Island about 150 yards on the Starboard hand, and in order to avoid Cowley Rock (which has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide), steer NE. % E. As you sail in, there will be seen on the Port hand, several Islets, the North- ernmost of which is called Isle of Man. When this last-named Islet bears N. by W., you are then past Cowley Rock, and may run for this Islet on this last course, leaving it about 100 yards on the Port hand, and anchor with it bearing about South 300 yard& distant, in about 6 fathoms water at Low Tide. If bound into the Basin, a pilot will be necestary at this Anchorage. From the Eastward do not approach Sambro Lighthouse nearer than 2 or 3 miles, until it bears NE. % N. ; then run for it on this course, keeping a sharp lookout for the Black Buoy off the Southwest Breaker (before described) . When this Buoy is made, leave it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and make good the course N. yi Wm leaving the Rocks called the Horse, Mare and Colt well on the Port, and Shag Rock and Sambro Lighthouse well on the Starboard hand. As you sail in, you will see on the Port, Fairweather Rock (before described). Leave this Rock about 200 yards on the Port hand, and when past it steer more Northerly, leaving the Western end of Inner Sambro Island about 150 yards on the Starboard hand, and follow the directions be- fore given. There is a Channel inside Sambro Lighthouse which leads into Sambro Harbor, but as there are many sunken rocks in it, some ELDRIDOE'S C AST PILOT. 457 of which have but little water upoa them at Low Tide, it is therefore advisable for strangers not to attempt this passage without pilots. High Water* It is High Water in Sambro Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. d7 m., or 3 h. 42 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6 feet. OATOH HABBOR. The entrance to this small Harbor, lies Northeasterly about 3 miles from Sambro Lighthouse, and West-Southerly about 1^ miles from Chebucto Head Lighthouse. Hemarka, A Bar having about 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide, on which the sea breaks heavily with strong winds from seaward, e:ctends across the entrance to this Harbor ; near its head there is An- CQorage in about 2 fathoms water at Low Tide ; but it is so small and the access so difficult that it is only frequented by the small- est vessels with the assistance of local pilots. HALIFAX HARBOR. The Western entrance to this excellent Harbor, which is be- tween a small Islet called Thrum Cap on the East, and Sand- wich Point (the main land) on the West, is about 1}^ miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about 113 miles from Cape Sable Light- house, 93 miles East-Northerly from Cape Roseway Lighthouse, (entrance to Sfielburne Harbor) East-Northerly 58 miles from Coffin Island Lighthouse, entrance to Liverpool Harbor, and about 117 miles to the Westward of Cape Canso. 458 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Chebucto Head Idghthouae, Ui)on Chebucto Head, West Bide of approach to Halifax Har> bor, is a White, Squure Wooden Building, which at this dato (1884) bhows a Revolving White Light. Sambro Lighthousn bears from Chebucto Head Lighthouse 8 W. 4^ miles; Devil Island Lighthouses NE. ^ E. 5}4 miles ; Maugher Beach Light- house N. by E. 5^ E. 6 miles ; Outer Whistling Buoy off Halifiix Harbor SE. by E. 6^ miles ; Inner Whistling Buoy NE. ji E. 1^ miles. Chebucto Head is bold, and vessels bound into Halifax Harbor may approach the Lighthouse within ^ mile without danger. Devil Island Lighthouaea, Upon the South Point of Devil Iflacd and East side of ap- proach to Halifax Harbor, are Two Whit<3 Octagonal Towers 175 yards apart, which range E. }i N. and ^. ^ S. ; at this date (1884) these Lighthouses show fixed White Lights. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from Devil Island Lighthouses SW. % W- ^% miles; Sambro Lighthouse SW. ^ W. 9^ miles. Shoal Water extends off more than ^ mile from all ports of this Island. Maugher Beach Idghthouae, Upon the West end of Maugher Beach East side of entrance to Halifax Harbor, is a White Tower, with Red Roof which, at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. Chubuoto Head Light- house bears from Maugher Beach Lighthouse S* by W. J4 W< Q miles; George Island Lighthouse (Halifax Harbor) N. }i W. 2^ miles. Maugher Beach Lighthouse is also a guide to the An- chorage in Macnab Cove. A Fog Bell has been placed near this Lighthouse which in thick weather is struck 7 times in each min- ute. George laland Idghthouae, Upon the West side of George Island, in Halifax Harbor, is a Drab Square Wooden Buildmg, which at this date (1884) shows two fixed White Lights, one above the other. Dangers in approaching Halifax Harbor. Bell Bock. This danger, which lies on the Western side of the approach to Halifax Harbor, has 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide. At this ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 459 date (1884) this danger ia marked off its Southoast part with a Blaclc Buoy with staflf and vune, which, in approaching Halifax Harbor, is left '.u the Port hand. Cheliucto Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. by E. about a mile. JPortugueae Shoal, Upon the Eastern side of the approach to Halifax Harbor, ia Portuguese Shoal. This danger has about 30 feet water u()on it at Low Tide, and at this date (1884) is marked on its SoutliwcHtern side with a Buoy, painted in Ucd and Black Horizontal Stripes^ which is left on the Starboard hand by vessels approaching HtpU- fax Harbor. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SW. 2f^ miles ; Devil Island Lighthouses, NE. ^ E. 8 miles ; Maugher Beach Lighthouse, N. ^ W> ^ miles. Bockhead Shoal. About NE. by E. J4 E. ^ mile from the Buoy off Portuguese Shoal, is Rockhead Shoal, which has about 19 feet water upon it at Low Tide. This is the Easternmost danger in approaching Halifax Harbor. At this date (1884) this Shoal is marked off ita Southern part with a Buoy painted in Black and White Perpen- dicular Stripes. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SW- jl4 W. 3 miles ; Devil Island Lighthouses, NE. ^ E. 2«4 miles; Maugher Beach Lighthouse, N. by W. 4 miles. This Buoy may be left }( mile on either ha,nd by vessels bound to Halifax. Between Portuguese Shoal and Rockhead Shoal thexe ia a Channel about }^ mile wide, having from 7 to 8 fathoms water in it. Neverfail Shoal, This small Shoal, upon which there is about 26 feet water at Low Tide, lies nearly in the middle of the approach to Halifax Harbor. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger S. by W- ^ W. 3^4 miles ; Devil Island Lighthouses, E- ^ N* 3 miles; Maugher Beach Lighthouse, N. ^ E. 2^ miles. The ship Channel leading to Halifax Harbor is to the Westward of this Shoal. Lichfield Mock, This small Shoal, which is surrounded by deep water, haa about 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and lies about 460 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. }i mile from the "Western shore. At this date (1884) it is marked on its Eastern side with a Black Buoy, which, in approaching Halifax Harbor, is left on the Port hand. Chebuclo Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy S. ^ W. 3^ miles; Devil Island Lighthouses, E- J4 N. 3J^ miles ; Maughor Beach Lighthouse, N. by E- ji E. 2|4 miles. The Ship Channel in approaching Halifax Harbor is between Litchfield Rock and Neverfail Shoal, and is about ^ mile wide, with a depth of about 9 fathoms water. The leading marks for sailing between these dangers, is the Flagstaff of the Citadel at Halifax, just open East of Sandwich Point,* bearing about N. X W. There is a good Channel ^ mile wi(ie betwecL Lichfield Rock and the "West- ern shore. Thrum Cap Shoal. This dangerous Shoal, which, at Low Tide is dry in some places, lies on Lhe Eastern side of the entrance to Halifax Harbor, and extends off more than a mile from the Southern end of Macnab Island. At this date (1884) it is marked off its Southwest part with a Red Buoy, which, in entering Halifax Harbor, is left on tbo Starboard hand. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SW. by S. J^ S- 4 miles ; Devil Island Lighthouses, E. J4 N. 2^ miles ; Maugher Beach Lighthouse, N. by W* 2^ miles. Between the Buoy off the Thrum Cap and Neverfail Shoals, there is a good Channel ^ mile wide, having from 7 to 9 fathoms water in it. In thick weather, vessels from the Eastward may approach the Thnim Cap Shoal by the lead, and haul round it in about 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. Mars Rock, This Rock, which has about 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies about J^ mile to the Southward of Sandwich Point, and about 2/^ mile from the "Western shore. At this date (1884) this dan- ger is marked off its Southeastern part with a Black Buoy, which, in entering Halifax Harbor, is left on the Port hand. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy S. by W. 4j4 miles; Devil Island Lighthouses, E. by S. ^ S. 3j^ miles ; Maughor * Sandwich Point, which lies on the Western side of the entrance to Halifax Harbor, is about 1% miles to the Northward of the Buoy off Lichfield Uock. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 461 Beach Lighthouse, NE. by N. 5^ N. 1^ miles. Heavy draught vessels should not attempt to pass between this Buoy and the Western shore. Maugher Beach Shoal. Shoal Water extends off about Yz mile to the Southward of Maugher Beach Lighthouse, and also some distance to the North- ward and Westward of this Lighthouse. This danger is marked off its Western part with a Red Buoy. Maugher Beach Light- house bears from this Buoy SE. by E. about ^ mile. Middle Ground, This small Shoal, which lies nearly in mid-channel in entering Halifax Harbor, has about 26 feet water upon it at Low Tide, with deep water all round it. Maugher Beach Lighthouse bears from this danger SE. by S. J^ S. ^ mile. The Ship Channel leading into Halifax Harbor is to the Westward of this Shoal. P'leaaant Shoal. This Rocky Shoal, which extends off nearly ]^ mile Southeast- erly from Pleasant Point, is marked off its Eastern part with a Black Buoy. Maugher Beach Lighthouse bears from this Buoy S-SE 1% miles; George Island Lighthouse N. }i E. lyi miles (nearly) . Meed Rock, This Rock, which has about 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies on the Western side of the Channel, and at this time is marked off its Eastern side with a Black ;puoy. George Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N, by E. ^ E. i^ mile. Ives Knoll, This small Shoal, which is nearly dry at very Low Tides, lies about ^ mile from the Northern end of Macnab Island. At this time this danger is marked off its Western side with a Red Buoy. George Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy N. by W. % W. about a mile. The Ship Channel which is between this Knoll and Reed Rock is about ;4 mile wide, with a depth of from 10 to 16 fathoms water. f' C^f-yi 462 ELDRroOE'S COAST PILOT. Belleiale Spit, This Spit, which is nearly abreast the Southern end of the city of Halifax, extends oflf about % mile from the Western shore, and at this time is marked off its Eastern part with a Blac],: Buoy. George Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy NE. by N. a little more than % mile ; about % mile further in on the Western side of the Channel and nearly opposite George Island Lighthouse, is a Black Buoy which lies off the Eastern part of Leopard Shoal. Remarka, In entering Halifax Harbor there are two Channels, one to the Westward of Macnab Island, the other to the Eastward of it ; the former which is nowhere less than J^ mile wide, has in it not less than 10 fathoms water, while the latter has about 9 feet at Low Tide. This Harbor, which is one of the finest in British America, is easy ot approach and is also accessible at all seasons, and is large enough to accommodate a large number of vessels in per- fect security. Sailing Directions for approaching and entering Halifax Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Note. In approaching and entering Halifax Harbor, Red Buoys are left en the Starboard, and Black Buoys on the Port hand. Buoys paint'id in Red and Black Horizontal Stripes or Black and White Perpendicular Stripes are on dangers in the Channel-way, and may be left on either hand. Vessels of not more than 22 feet draught, from the Westward, may leave the Black Buoy off the Southwest Breaker, which lies off Sambro Lighthouse, about % mile on the Port hand, and stetr about E> by N., leaving the Bell Buoy off the Southern part of the Sisters well on the same hand. When Chebucto Head Light- house bears North, then steer about N. 5^ E., leaving the Bhuk Buoy off Bell Rock well on the Port hand, and this Lighthoui-e about yi mile on the same hand. When Chebucto Head Liglit- housc bears W. NW-ithen make good the course N. J'2 E., leaving the Whistling Buoy to the Northeastward of Chebucto ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 463 Head, the Buoy off Portuguese Shoal, and the Red Buoy off the Thruiri Cap Shoal well on the Starboard hand, and the Black Buoys off Lichfield Rock and Mars Rock both on the Port hand. "When past the Black Buoy off the last-named danger, continue the course N- J4 E', leaving the Black Buoy off Maugher Beach Lighthouse well on the Starboard hand ; when past this Light- house, there will be seen on the Port, the Black Buoy off Pleas- ant Shoal, the Black Buoy off Reed Rock, and further in the Black Buoy off Belleisle Spit, which are all left on the Port hand. On the Starboard will be seen the Red Buoy of Ives Knoll, which is left on the Starboard hand. You may pass on either side of George Island, which is bold on its Western side, and lies off the Southern part of the city ; if you go to the Westward of this Island in order to avoid Leopard Shoal, keep nearer the Light- house. When past George Island, there is good Anchorage any where above it in from 7 to 13 fathoms water. From the Eastward, leave Devil Island Lighthouses about a mile on the Starboard hand, and steer about W. by N., keeping a sharp lookout for the Red Buoy off the Southern part of Thrum Cap Shoal (before described) ; when this Buoy is made, leave it about 200 yards on the Starboard hand and steer NW. for the Black Buoy off Mars Rock. Leave this last-named Buoy about 200 yards on the Port hand, and follow the directions before given. Beating into Halifax Harbor. From Chebucto Head Lighthouse to Pleasant Point, a distance of 7j4 miles, the Western shore is bold, and vessels beating into Halifax Harbor will keep this side best aboard, taking care to avoid Lichfield and Mars Rocks (before described) . When past Pleasant Point and Macnab Island, it is advisable to keep nearer the Eastern side, and pass in to the Eastward of George Island where there are neither Rocks or Shoals excepting those lying near the shores. At this date (1884) the Neverfail and Middle Ground Shoals are not marked with BuOys. Both these dangers lie nearly in mid-channel and have about 26 feet water upon them at Low Tide ; it is therefore advisable for heavy draught vessels, bound to Halifax, to employ pilots. 464 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Halifax Harbor at Night- time, with favorable winds and fair weather. In order to avoid the dangers off Sambro Island, vessels from the "Westward of not more than 18 feet draught, should give the Light a berth of at least 3 miles, leaving it to the Northward. When the Kevblving Light on Chebucto Head, Western side of approach to Halifax Harbor, bears North, you may then run in leaving it about ^ mile on the Port hand; when abreast this Light, steer for Maugher Beach Light, bearing N< |^ E. until you judge you are about a mile from it ; then haul to the West- ward, passing about midway between this Light and the Western shore. When Maugher Beach Light bears E.SESm in order to avoid Pleasant Point Shoal, steer N. by E. until George Island Lights (which are located one above the other,) bear North, then run for them on this course leaving them not more than 200 yards on the Starboard hand, and anchor about ^ mile above the Lights in from 7 to 13 fathoms water. From the Eastward, when the Revolving Light on Chebucto Head is made, bring it to bear W.NW*, and run for it on this course until you are about ^ mile from< it, then run for Maughc Beach Light bearing N. ^ E., and follow the directions before given. Thick Weather. In order to guide vessels to Halifax Harbor, at this date (1884) two Whistling Buoys have been placed without the en- trance. These Buoys bear from each other NW. }4 N. and SE. J4 S. 6 miles. The outer Buoy, which lies in about 37 fathoms water, is painted Black. Sambro Lighthouse bears from it W. J4 N. 8^ miles ; Chebucto Head Lighthouse, NW. by W. 614 miles. The inner Buoy, which is painted Bed, lies in about 18 fathoms water. Chebucto Head Lighthouse bears from this Buoy SW. 54 W. 1^ miles. Vessels from the Eastward, Westward or Seaward, making or hearing the outer Whistling Buoy, must leave it close to on either hand, and make good the course NW. j^ N. 6 miles, which will bring them up with the inner Whistling Buoy. Jjcave this last- named Buoy clof e to on either hand, and make good the course N. ^ W. 5 miles, which will take them up with Maugher Beach Lighthouse. When the Fog Bell at this Lighthouse is heard, it is ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 465 advisable for strangers to haul in, and anchor in Macnab Cove. (See sailing directions for this Cove.) High Water. It is High Water in Halifax Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 49 m., or 3 h. 40 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. MACNAB COVE. The entrance to this Cove, which is on the Eastern side of en- trance to Halifax Harbor, lies \Q% miles Northeasterly from Sambro Lighthouse, 6>^ miles Northeasterly from Chebucto Head Lighthouse, and about 3 miles below the city of Halifax. Maugher Beach Lighthouse, Upon the West end of Maugher Beach, East side of entrance to Halifax Harbor, and South side of entrance to Macnab Cove, is a White Tower with Red Roof, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light. A Fog Bell has been placed near this Lighthouse, which in thick weather is struck 7 times in each minute. This Light is intended to guide vessels to Halifax Har- bor, and also into Macnab Cove. « Memarks, Macnab Cove, in which there is suflicient depth of water for the largest vessels, is somewhat exposed to Northwesterly winds. The holding ground in this Cove is excellent, and vessels well found in ground tackle may safely ride in it with all winds and weathers. Sailing Directions for Macnab Cove in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels bound to Macnab Cove, may follow the directions before given for Halifax Harbor, until abreast the Lighthouse on the West end of Maugher Beach. Then haul round this Light- house at a distance of about Yi mile, leaving the Red Buoy, which lies to the Northwestward of it, well on the Starboard hand, and 466 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. anchor ^ith the Lighthouse bearing S.SWm in from 7 to 8 fathoms water, good holding ground. These directions will answer for night or day. In entering Macnab Cove, be careful to avoid a Rocky Shoal which extends off to the Noiiihward of the Lighthouse nearly i^ mile. Eastern Entrance to Halifax Harbor. Small or light-draught vessels may enter Halifax Harbor to the Eastward of Macnab and Lawler Islands ; but as there is a Sand Bar in this Passage having but 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide, with no leading marks or bearings for the Channel, it is therefore advisable for strangers bound through this Passage to take pilots. HERRING COVE. This small Cove, which is on the "Western side of entrance to Halifax Harbor, lies about 1 ^ miles Southwesterly Trom Sand- wich Point, and about 4^ miles to the Northward of Chebucto Head Lighthouse. Remarks* The enti'ance to this Cove is about 200 yards wide, with a depth of about 4 fathoms water, at Lovf Tide, as far as the elbow that forms the Inner Cove, and above this 6 feet, at Low Tide, can be taken in, where small vessels may lie secure from all winds. Vessels bound to Herring Cove should take pilots off the enti'ance. COLE HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is the first to the Eastward of Halifax, lies East-Northerly about 4 miles from Devil Island Lighthouses. Remarks* At the entrance to Cole Harbor there is a danger v>us Sand Bar, having but 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Within the Harbor are extensive Mud Flats, which are mostly dry at Low Tide. Only small or light-draught vessels can therefore enter this place at High Water, with pilots. ELDUIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 467 Egg Island, About 2 miles to the Eastward of the entrance to Cole Harbor, and tt tniloM East-Northei ly from Devil Island Lighthouses, is Kgg iHlund, which is small. Shoal Vater also extends from the ibore to this Island, and Shoal Water also extends off about ^ mllo to the Southward of it. Shut-In Island, Thli iMlnnd, which is small in extent and very low, is connected with tho main land by a Reef of Rocks, and lies East-Northerly about 8 mlle« from Devil Island Lighthouses. Shut'In Island Shoals. A llttlo more than J4 mile from the Western end of Shut-In Island, Is a small Rocky Shoal with 15 feet water upon it at Low Tido, and about a mile from the Western end of this Island is anothit' spot with about the same depth upon it. These Shoals aro very dangerous for heavy-draught vessels, especially in thick waathor or night-time. In ^rder to avoid them, the coast should sot be approached in less than 15 fathoms water. OHISSETOOOK INLET. The antranoe to this Inlet, whLh is between Story Head on the East and Capo Entry on the West, is about ^ mile wide, and lies about 4 miles Northeast from Shut-In Island, and 9^ miles West-Northerly from Jedore Rock Lighthouse. Memarks, In entering this Harbor, a Bar extends across the principal Channel, with but little water upon it at Low Tide. There are also within the entrance extensive Mud Flats, which are mostly dry at Low Tide. This harbor is therefore of but little use to «blpplQg. PBRPISAWIOK INLET. The entrance to this Inlet, which is the first to the Eastward of Cblssetoook Inlet, is about ^ mile wide and lies East-North- 468 ELDRIDGE'S C04ST PILOT. erly about 13^ miles from Devi! Island Lighthouses, and about 7 miles West-Northerly from Jedore Rock Lighthouse. Hemarks, A Sand Bar having about 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide, extends across the entrance to this Inlet ; from this there is a nar- row Channel between the Mud Flats (which are dry at Low Tide) to the head of this Inlet, a distance of 5 miles. This Channel has a sufficient depth for vessels which can cross the Bar. About a mile from the head is a deep hole having 6 fathoms water in it. In entering Perpisawick Inlet, Reefs lie off some distance from the shores on both s'.des. Strangers should not, therefore, at- tempt to enter this place without pilots. High Water. It is High Water at the entrance of Perpisawick Inlet, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 50 m., or 3 h. 39 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. MUSQUIDOBOIT INLET. The entrance to this Inlet, which is the first to the Eastward of Perpisawick Inlet, lies about 17 miles East-Northerly from Devil Island Lighthouses, and Northwesterly about 3^ miles from Jedore Rock Lighthouse. JReniark8, Musquidoboit Inlet is navigable at High Water for small craft and boats about 7 miles above the entrance. The Channel, after crossing the Bar, leads up among Sand and Mud Flats, which are dry in many places at Low Tide. Strangers should not, there- fore, attempt to enter this place without pilots. Musquidoboit Shoal, This Rocky Shoal, which extends NE. and SW. about ^ mile, has about 17 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Jedore Rock Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by S. 3j4 miles. To the Northward and Westward of Musquodoboit Shoal are several patches having from 4^ to 5 fathoms water upon them In or- ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 469 der to avoid these dangers, in thick weather or night-time, large or hea"y draught vessels f 'lould not approach the coast in less than 80 fathoms water. JEDORE HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is the first Ship Harbor to the Eastward of Halifax, lies East-Northerly about 29 miles from Sambro Lighthouse, 2 miles Northeas; riy from Jedore Rock Lighthouse, and Northwesterly 6J^ miles from Egg Island Light- house. Jedore Mock Lighthouse, Upon the summit of Jedore Rock about 2 miles Southwesterly from the entrance to Jedore Harbor, is a "White, Square Wooden Building with Dwelling attached ; at this date (1884) this Light house shows a Red Fixed Light. Dangers in appi'oaching Jedore Harbor. Arnold Rock, This Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, can almost always be seen. Jedore Rock Lighthouse bears trom it N. by E. }i E. about J^ mile. In entering Jedore Harbor the best Channel is to the Westward of this Rock. Old Man Rock, This small Rock is about 12 feet above High Water. Jedore Rock Lighthouse bears from it NW. J^ W* about }^ mile. A small sunken Rock with only 4 feet upon it at Low Tide lies about 200 yards Southwest from Old Man Rock. Chill Rock, Shoal Water extends in every direction from this Islet. Jedore Rock Lighthouse bears from it W. by S. >X S. 1^ miles. Be- tween this Lighthouse and Gull Rock there is a Channel of 15 fathoms water. Vessels bound to Jedore Harbor should keep nearer the former. 470 ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. Roger lalani These Islands among which there art ny Rocks, some of which are sunken and some are above water, lie about 2 miles Northeasterly from Jedore Rock Lighthouse, and are left well on the Starboard hand by vessels bound into Jedore Harbor. Jedore Head* This remarkable Headland, which is on the Western side of entrance to Jedore Harbor, attains an elevation of 200 feet above the level of the Sea, and lies about 1^ miles N.NW. from Jedore Rock Lighthouse ; on the Western side of the head are Cliffs of Red Clay nearly 70 feet high, and on its Southeast side arc Cliffs of the same color, about 140 feet high. In approach- ing Jedore Harbor these Cliffs form an excellent landmark for mariners. Hemarks, The entrance to Jedore Harbor from East Head to West Head is nearly }i mile wide ; but Thorn Shoal with only 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide, extends from the Western side nearly half way across, making the Channel narrow. About 4 fathoms water at Low Tide can be taken into the Anchorage, which is about 2 miles above the entrance, and with a pilot vessels can go further up. Sailing Directions for Jedore Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when Jedore Rock Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear from £. by N. to NE., and run for it on thene courses, leaving it about }4 mile on the Starboard hand. When past this Lighthouse, haul to the Eastward until it bears SW. by S., on which bearing keep it, and steer NE. by N. for Eastern Head, leaving Thorn Shoal, which extends on the Western side, well on the Port hand. Continue the course Nfi. by N., until about ^ mile from the last-named Head. Then haul to the Northwestward around Thorn Shoal, keeping about midway and carrying not less than 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. When about ^2 mile above the entrance, in order to avoid Bar Shoal, gradually haul over for the Western shore, keeping it best aboard, carrying from 5 to 7 fathoms water until about yi mile from Marsh Point (which is on the Western side, about \% miles above ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 471 the entrance). Then keep midway, and anchor alwut y^ mile above it, nearer the Eastern side, in from G to 7 fatlioms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, keep a sharp look-out for the Bell Ruoy off to the Southward of Brig Rock. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy E- by N- J4 N. 4 miles. When this Buoy is made, leave it close to on the Starboard hand, and make good the course NW-i leaving Arnold Rock (before described) well on the Starboard hand. Continue the course NW. until Jedore Rock Lighthouse bears NE. by N. Then steer more Northerly, leaving this Lighthouse well on the Starboard hand, and follow the directions before given. With Northerly winds, vessels from the Eastward may pass within the Southwest Ledges by the following directions. As soon as Egg Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W- NWv and run for it on this course. When about 2 miles from this Lighthouse, keep a sharp look-out for the Transport Ledges, which lie about }4 niile to the Southward of it. As soon as these Ledges (which are above water) are made, run for them, leaving the Western part about }{ mile on the Starboard hand. When Egg Island Lighthouse bears NE., make good the course NW. by W. l4 W- ) leaving Southwest Ledges well on the Port hand, and Macdonald Rock an(i Hopkin Rock well on the Starboard hand. As you draw near Jedore Rock Lighthouse, you will see on the Port, Old Man Rock (before described), and on the Star- board, Gull Rock. Keep nearer the former, and leave Jedore Rock Lighthouse about ^ mile on the Port hand, and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Jedore Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 45 m., or 3 h. 44 m. before it ia at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. CLAM BAY. This Bay, which lies but a short distance to the Eastward of the entrance to Jedore Harbor, has many dangers in it, some of which are below and some above water, and affords no safe Anchorage for vessels. 472 ELDRIDGE'8 COAST PILOT. Mgg Island Lighthouse, Upon the centre of Egg Island is a Tower, painted on the Sea- ward side in Black and White Vertical Stripes, which at this duto (1884) shows a Flashing Red and White Light. This Light is intended to guide vessels clear of the Jedore Ledges. Egg Island is bold on its Northern side, and there is a good Channel, ^ milo wide, between it and Flint Ledge and Long Island. Vessels pass, ing through this Channel should keep nearer Egg Island. Dangers in the Vicinity of Egg Island Lighthouse. Transport Ledges* These two Ledges, which lie about ^ mile to the Southward of Egg Island, are about b feet above High Water, and extend E. by N. and W. by S. Yi mile. They are bold on all sides except the Western, where a Rocky Shoal extends off W- by S. about 250 yards. There is a narrow Channel of 10 fathoms water between these Ledges and the Lighthouse. Vessels navigating this Passage should keep nearer the Ledges. Pyche Rock* This Rock has 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this danger W.NW. about ^ mile. €h*i»zle Rock, This Rock has 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. J^ N. -^ mile. Rrig Rock, This dangerous Rock, which ha^ but 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is marked at this date (1884) off its Southern part with a Bell Buoy. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy E. by N. }4 N. 4 miles. In heavy weather largo vessels should leave this Buoy at least a mile to the Northward, as there are several Shoal Spots to the Westward of it, one of which has but 5 fathoms water upon it. Bull Shoal, About 1 % miles to tlie I^astward of Brig Rock is Bull Shoal, which has 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Egg Rock Light- ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 473 houao bears from this danger E.NE. 2^ ratios. This Shoal rarely breaks, and m therefore oxtremoly dangerous for largo, vessels. Bull Hock, This dangerous Rock, which lies about 2 miles to the Eastward of Brig Rook, has about 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and generally breaks with a little motion of the sea. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E.NE* about 2 miles. Southwest Ledges, These are three Rocky Patches extending NE. by E* and SW. by W. 600 yards, and are bare at Low Tide. They lie North- easterly about 1% miles from Brig Rock. Egg Island Light- house bears from the centre of these dangers E. % N< 2^ miles. Barae Bock, This Rock, which has not less than 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is the Southeasternmost danger lying ofif Egg Island. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. 3 miles. E- by N. J4 N. about Ji mile from Barse Rock, is Hurley Rock, with 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Both these dangers should be avoided by heavy draught vessels. Zittle Bock, This Rock, which has deep water all around it, has 24 feet upon it at Low Tide. Egg Island Lighthouse bears from this danger W- ^ N. 7 miles. Thick Weather. In order to avoid the Jedore Ledges, and also the Ledges in the vicinity off Egg Island Lighthouse, vessels, in thick weather, should not approach these dangers in less than 85 fathoms water. OWL'S HEAD BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between Black Ledge on the West and Friar Island on the East, is about IJ^ miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about 88 miles from Sambro Lighthouse, 474 ELDRIDQE'S COAF.T PILOT. 5 miles East-Northerly from Egg Island Lighthouse, and about 20 miles to the Westward of Beaver Island Lighthouse. Remarks, Owl's Head Bay, it is said, is much frequented by coasters on account of the facility in beating in and out, there being but one danger in the Channel, Owl Rock, which lies on the Eastern side, and has but 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Five fathoms water cac be "arried in as far as Cable Point, which is on tho Eastern side about 2 miles above the entrance. Above this tho water shoals gradually to the Head. This Bay is exposed to Southeasterly winds, but vessels of not more than 12 feet draught may find shelter on either side, according to the direction of tlio wind, in about 2J^ fathoms water at Low Tide. Sailing Directions for Owl's Head Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. ' From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthouse about ^ mile on the Fort hand and steer about £• by N. leaving Bald Rock (which is 8 feet above High Water and lies E. % N. 2iJ^ miles from the Lighthouse) about yi mile on the Port. Continue the course E. by N. about \% miles past Bald Rock ; Owl's lloiul Bay will then be open and you may run in about North ; when past Black Ledge, which lies at the Western side of entrance, in order to avoid Owl Rock keep the Western side best aboard and anchor above Cable Island, which is on the Eastern side, according to the wind, in from 3 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tiile. Fi'om the Eastward, as soon as Egg Island Lighthouse is nuulo, bring it to bear West and run for it en this course. When abt)ut 5 miles from this Lighthouse, Owl's Head Bay will be open, niul you may then run in. In order to avoid Owl Rock, which ha8 I) feet water upon it, after entering the Bay keep the Western siilo best aboard, and anchor as before directed. In beating in you may approach the Western side within 'lOU yards without danger. High Water, It is High Water in Owl's Head Bay, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 54 m., or 3 h. 35 m. before it ia in Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. i*:** :, ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 475 SHIP HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Black Point on t^a East and Beach Point on the West, is about ]^ mile wide and lies East-Northerly 40 miles from Sarabro Lighthouse, 11 miles East-Northerly from Jedore Rock Lighthouse, 7 miles North- easterly from Egg Island Lighthouse, and West-Northerly 20 miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse. Dangers in approaching Ship Harbor. In approaching Ship Harbor from the Westward, there are a number of dangers which lie off Nichol Island, which is on the Western side, among which are the Rocks called Eastern and Western Bulls, Friar Ledges and Flat Ledge ; the two latter are above water. Vessels, therefore, in entering should leave these Ledges well to the Northward. In approaching Ship Harbor from the Eastward, there are several Ledges which lie off Charles Island, which is on the East- ern side ; the outermost is the Bull Rock, which has 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and generally shows a breaker. Vessels, therefore, in entering should leave these dangers well on the Star- board hand. Bear Rock, This small Rock, which lies nearly midway the entrance, is ele- vated about 4 feet above High Water. It is quite bold on its Eastern side, but a Reef, mostly dry, extends about 300 jirds from its Western side, there is a good Channel on both sides of this Bock. Northeast Shoal, This small Shoal, which has 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies W. ^ S. ^ mile from Bear Rock ; Northeast Shoal is left to the Westward by vessels bound to Ship Harbor. There are also several outlaying dangers off the approach to this Harbor, among which are Little Rock and Broad Breaker ; the former, which has 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies S.SE. about 2 miles from Flat Ledge, which is on tlie Western side of the ap- proach to Ship Harbor; the latter, which has the same depth upon it, lies 1>^ miles S. by E. from Charles Point, which is on the Eastern side of the approach to this Harbor. j«A';,«£|gwmw -mm 476 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Remarka, Ship Harbor is an Inlet more than 4 miles in length, but the entrance is but ^ mile wide. "With favorable winds it is not difficult of access. There is a sufficient depth of water for the heaviest draught vessels to enter at Low Tide, and when once in they may lie secure from all winds. Sailing Directions for Ship Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears North, make good the course E. by N. 7J^ miles, leaving Bald Rock, Friar Ledges and Flat Ledges well on the Port hand. The approach to Ship Harbor will then be fairly open, and you may then run in, keeping a sharp lookout for Bear Rock (before described). When this small Rock, which lies nearly midway the entrance is made, in order to avoid the Reef, which extends about 300 yards to the Westward of it, leave this Rock about ^ mile on the Starboard hand, and make good the course N. by W. yi W. Ij^ miles to Wolf Point, which is 80 feet high and is on the Western side. Leave the last-named point % mile on the Port hand, and make good the course NW- about 2 miles to Lapstone Point. In or- der to clear Black Ledge, which lies on the Eastern side near the entrance of the Harbor, keep about 300 yards from the Western shore, carrying not less than 5 fathoms water. Haul round Beach Point (which is the next on the Western side) at a dis- tance of about 150 yards, and run up about ^ mile carrying deep water, and anchor in fron 4 to 5 fathoms water secure from all winds. From the Eastward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears N., make good the course W. J^ N. 17 miles, leaving the numerous Rocks and Ledges which lie to the Westward of Beaver Island Lighthouse well to the Northward. The approach to Ship Harbor will then be open, bearing about N.NW. ; then run in, keeping r. sharp lookout for Bear Rock (before described) . When this is made, leave it close to on the Port hand, and make good the course WW. by N. J^ N. 1^ miles to Wolf Point, and follow the directions before given. ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 477 Beating into Ship Harbor. In beating into Ship Harbor there* are two Reefs or Ledges, ' both of which lie on the Eastern side of the Channel. The former, Black Ledge, lies about }( mile below Black Point, which is on the Eastern side of the entrance. The latter, O'Brien Ledge, lies about yi mile above the entrance. In order, there- fore, to avoid these dangers, vessels beating into this Harbor should keep the "Western shore best aboard, and make short tacks to the Eastward. It is, however, advisable for vessels, with Northerly winds, intending to make a Harbor, to anchor in Day Cove. DAY COVE. This Cove, which lies on the Western side about a mile below the entrance to Ship Harbor, has good Anchorage in from 2}i to 4 fathoms water. Sailing Directions for Day Cove in Dajrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels from the Eastward or Westward may follow the direc- tions before given for Ship Harbor, until abreast Wolf Point ; then steer about NW. IJ^ miles. Day Cove will then be fairly open, bearing about W. by S. J^ S. Then run in about midway and anchor in from 2^ to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Beating up to Day Cove. In beating up to this Cove, when past Bear Rock (before de- scribed) , keep in mid-chani:el until the Cove is fairly open. Then run in as before directed. High Water, It is High Water in Ship Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 54 m., or 3 h. 55 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5j4 feet. mw^?i^^^^^sr^^W^W^W'' 478 BLDRroOE'S COAST PILOT. \W^ SHOAL BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is the first to the Eastward of Ship Harbor, lies East-Northerly 9j4 miles from Egg Island Lighthouse, and about 15 miles to the Westward of Beaver Island Lighthouse. Dangers in entering Shoal Bay. Baltee Shoal, This danger, which lies on the Eastern side of Shoal Bay, has 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Charles Point, Western side of entrance to this Bay, bears from this danger W. by S> ^ S. about 1^ miles. Borgle Shoal, This Shoal, which lies on the Western side of Shoal Bay, has 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide. A Red Clifif at the upper end of the Bay, just open to the Eastward of Borgle Bluflf (which is on the Western side), bearing N.NW., leads up to the Eastward of this danger. Net Shoal, This danger, which has about 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies upon the Eastern side of Shoal Bay, nearly opposite Borgle Bluflf, which lies on the Western side, and is about 80 feet high. Eve Ledge, This Ledge, which is awash at High Water, lies near the Head of the Blj on the Eastern side of the Channel. Borgle Bluff bears from the centre of this danger S. by W. about ^ mile. Middle Ground, This Shoal Spot, which has about 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies near the Head of the Ba^ , on the Western side near the Anchorage. Borgle Bluff bears from this danger SB. about a mile. Remarks, Although this Inlet is called Shoal Bay, it has a sufficient depth of water to admit the heaviest draught vessels. Five fathoms can ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 479 be taken in to the Anchorage, which is on the Northwestern part, and is excellent, especially for large vessels. By avoiding the dangers given, this Bay is sufficiently wide for large vessels to beat in. Sailing Directions for Shoal Bay in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthousd about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears N., make good the course E. y^ N. 10 miles, leaving Little Bock, which has 24 feet water upon it, well on the Starboard, and Broad Rock, which has the same depth upon it, well on the Port hand. Shoal Bay will then be fairly open, and you may run in, keeping about midway. As you sail in., there will be seen on the "Western side, Borgle Bluff, which is 80 feet high. Leave this Bluff, which is bold, about % mile on the Port hand, and when past it, haul up NW., carrying from 6 to 8 fathoms water. When past the Middle Ground (before de- scribed), steer about W., and anchor at the Head of the Bay, in from 4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. Borgle Bluff bears from this Anchorage SE. 1^ miles. From the Eastward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears N., make good the course W. J^ N. about 13^2 miles, leaving the numerous Bocks and Ledges which lie to the Westward of Beaver Island Lighthouse well to the Northward. Shoal Bay vdll then be fairly open, bearing about N.NW. Then run in midway, and follow the directions before given. Beating into Shoal Bay. In beating into this Bay keep midway until past Borgle Shoal (before described) ; then keep the Western side best aboard and anchor as before directed. m- m. \ Sigh Water, It is High Water in Shoal Bay, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon at 7 h. 45 m., or 3 h. 44 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5j4 feet. :^-. f^ 480 ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. W TANGIER HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is the first to the East- ward of Shoal Bay, is between Tangier Island on the "West and Ironbound Island on the East, is about ^i mile wide, and lies East-Northerly 11 miles from Egg Island Lighthouse, and West- Northerly 13 miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse. There is a narrow passage leading from Shoal Bay to Tangier Harbor, hav- ing about 12 feet water in it at Low Tide. Dangers in entering Tangier Harbor. Tangier Island Shoal, This small Shoal, which is on the Western side of entrance to Tangier Harbor, has about 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and lies about yi mile to the Southward of Tangier Island. JPope Mock, This Rock, which lies off the Eastern side of entrance to Tan- gier Harbor, is elevated about 3 feet above High Water. The Southern Point of Tangier Island, which lies on the Western side of entrance to this Harbor, bears from this danger W. >^ S. 1>^ miles ; Western end of Ironbound Island (Eastern side of en- trance) NW. about a mile. Shoal water, with sunken Rocks, extends off to the Southward more than ^ mile from Pope Rock, and Shoal Water also extends some distance Northeasterly from it. Vessels in passing in or out should therefore give this Rock a wide berth. Horse Hock, This dangerous Rock, which has but 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is the outermost danger lying off the Eastern side of entrance to Tangier Harbor, and generally breaks with a little motion of the sea. Pope Rock (before described) bears from this danger NW. by N. X N. 1>^ miles. Drunken Dick, This Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, lies off the Eastern side of entrance to Tangier Harbor. Pope Rock bears from this dan- ger obo Island I about fj This obaQQol, Point* b up oa bo TbIsL at Low 'I Tangier ] SE. atia Lodge. Tangle] oi'ly wlndi above Poi more than is on the Sailing From til oa the Pol E. ^ KT.I opoa beai UoMcrlbodi band, \^ log from on the Ef plnu H\\oi\ foot WUtt'l and Hhaj not more • Porcul the EiiMtori ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. 481 ger ftbont E*SE> nearly J^ mile ; Western end of Ironbound Illand Kttitorn side of entrance to Tangier Harbor NW. by N. about fi milo. Whale Back, This Lodge, which is bare at Low Tide, lies nearly in mid- ohaooal, a little more than a mile f"om the entrance. Porcupine Point* bean* from this danger SB. about }^ mile. Channels lead up OQ both sides of Whale Back. Shag Ledge, This Lodge, which is about yi mile above "Whale Back, is bare at Low Tide, and lies nearly midway the passage. In entering TaBgior Harbor, Porcupine Point bears from this danger about aoarly a mile. Channels lead up on both sides of Shag Jtemarks, Tanglor Harbor affords good Anchorage to all but Southeast- erly winds. About 20 feet water at Low Tide can be carried in ftbovo Porcupine Point, and secure Anchorage for vessels of not more tlitin 12 or 14 feet draught is found in Mason Cove, which is on tho Eastern side about 2J^ miles from the entrance. Sailing Directions for Tangier Harbor in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears North make good the course E> ^ N< about l\% miles. Tangier Harbor will then be fairly open bearing N.NW-, then run in leaving the Ledges (before doseribod) on the Eastern side of entrance well on the Starboard band. When past Ironbound Island, keep about midway, carry- ing from 3J4 to 4 fathoms water until Porcupine Point, which is on the Eastern side, bears about East ; you are then past Porcu- pine Hhoai, which lies on the Eastern side of entrance and has 15 foot water upon it. Then in order to clear Whale Back Ledge and Hhag Ledge, steer more Easterly, leaving Porcupine Point not more than aoo'yards on the Starboard hand. When past this ♦ Porcupine Point Is a conspicuoua Landmark 120 feet high, lying on the EttMtorn side of tlie entrance to Tangier Harbc. 482 ELDRIDGE'S COAST TILOT. Point run up and anchor to the Eastward of the last-named Ledges in from 3j4 to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Porcupine Point bears from this Anchorage (which is about ^ mile from the Eastern side) S.SE- -% mile. Vessels of not more than 12 or 14 feet draught may go farther up and leave Hog Island Point (which is the first on the iiastern side above Porcupine Point) not more than 300 yards on the Star- board hand, and anchor about 350 yards to the Northward of Hog Island Point, secure from all winds, in from 12 to 15 feet water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears North, steer about W. J4 N. about 13 miles, leaving the numerous Rocks and Ledges which lie to the Westward of Beaver Island Light- house well on the Starboard hand. Tangier Harbor will then be fairly open, and you may run in, leaving Horse Rock and Pope Shoals (before described) well on" the Starboard hand, and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High "Water in Tangier Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 40 m., or 3 h. 49 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, byi feet. POPE HARBOR. The enti'ance to this Harbor, which is the next to the East- ward of Tangier Harbor, is between Pope Head on the East and Ironbound Island on the West, and lies East-Northerly 12 miles from Egg Island Lighthouse, and about 13 miles to the West- ward of Beaver Island Lighthouse. Pope Harbor Idghthouse, Upon the Western end of Harbor Island fs a White Square Wooden Building, with dwelling attached, which at this date (1884) shows a Red Fixed Light. Vessels bound in should leave this Lighthouse at least 250 yards oc the Starboard hand. Dangei This d on it at Pope Ha trance to miles; P miles. This R< Harbor, is which is I from this Shoal Wa1 more than some dista in passing Westward. This dai lies nearly this dange: Eastward This Ro on the We! Rock. Pc }4 mile. Channel o^ This dai of the ent very bold from the ^\ j4 mile. Harbor, ji clears this ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 483 Dangers in approaching and entering Pope Harbor. Horse Rock, This dangerous Rock (before described) has but 3 feet water on it at Low Tide, and lies on the Western side of approach to Pope Harbor. Pope Head, which is on the Eastern side of en- trance to this Harbor, bears from this danger N. ^ E. 1^ miles; Pope Rock (before described) NW. by N. % N. 1J4 miles. Pope Rock. This Rock, which lies off the "Western side of entrance to Pope Harbor, is elevated about 3 feet above High Water. Pope Head, which is on the Eastern side of entrance to this Harbor, bears from this danger E. by N. 5^ N. a little more than a mile. Shoal WatCx', with Sunken Rocks, extends off to the Southward more than j4 mile from Pope Rock, and Shoal Water also extends some distance to the Northeastward from it. "Vessels, therefore, in passing in or out should give this Rock a wide berth to the Westward. Schooner Rock, This danger, which has about 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies nearly in mid-channel. Pope Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N. ^ W. about % mile. The best Channel is to the Eastward of this Rock. Black Rock, This Rock, which is above water, is bold on all sides, and lies on the Western side of the Channel about -^ mile above Schooner Rock. Pope Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E* j4 mile. Between this Rock and the Western shore, there is a Channel of 20 feet water at Low Tide. Barrier Reef, This dangerous Reef, which extends off from the Eastern side of the entrance to Pope Harbor, is dry in some places, and is very bold on its Western part. Pope Harbor Lighthouse bears from the Western part of this danger NW. by N. % N. about }4 inile. A Roman Catholic church on the Northern side of the Harbor, just open to the Westward of Pope Harbor Lighthouse, clears this danger. 484 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Mink Islands. These Islands, of which there are two, are small. Shoat Water, with Rocks above and below the surface, extends Nortu- easterly to the shore. Pope Harbor Lighthouse bears from the Westernmost of these Islands SE. ^ S' about yi mile. Remarka. This small Harbor, which lies to the Northeastward of Pope Harbor Lighthouse, has Anchorage which is safe from all winds. About 24 feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken in. It is neces- sary for large vessels to moor, as its width is not more than 300 yards. There is a narrow Passage having about 8 feet water in it at Low Tide, leading from Pope Harbor to Spry Harbor. Sailing Directions for Pope Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears N-, make good the course E* yi N. 12j^ miles, keeping a sharp look out for Horse Uock (befoi'e described). The sea generally bi'eaks upon this danger. When this is made, leave it about % mile on the Starboard hand, and when it bears S-, steer N. for Pope Head (which lies on the Eastern side /f entrance) , leaving Pope Rock and Shoals well on the Port hand. When about %, mile from Pope Head, which is bo!i, haul up about NW. by N., leaving Schooner Rock and Black Rock (before described) well on the Port hand, and Bar- rier Reef (before described) well on the Starboard hand. Haul round the Lighthouse at a distance of about 300 yards, and anchor about midway, in from 4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. The Lighthouse bears from this Anchorage SW> by W. about 400 yards. From the Eastward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears N., make good the course W- J^ N. 11 miles, leaving the dangers which lie to the Westward of Beaver Island Lighthouse well on the Starboard hand. Pope Harbor will then be fairly open, bearing about N. NW. Then run in on this course, keeping a sharp look out for Horse Rock (before described). When this is made, leave it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and steer about N. by W., leav- ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 485 ing Pope Rock and Shoals well on the Port hand. AVhen alwut ^ mile from Pope Head (which lies on the Jiastern t le of entrance, and is bold), follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Pope Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 40 ra., or 3 h. 49 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, b% feet. SPRY HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is the next to the Eastward of Pope Harbor, is between Taylor Head on the East and Pope Head on the West, is about 3 miles wide, and lies about 14 miles to the Eastward of Egg Island Lighthouse, and West-Northerly lOj^ miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse. Dangers in approaching and entering Spry Harbor. Maloney Shoals, These dangers, which lie near each other, are small, and have about 12 feet water upou them at Low Tide. They lie nearly midway the entrance to Spry Harbor. Maloney Rock, which is always above water, bears from the Eastern Shoal about N. by E. about Yz mile. The best Channel leading to Spry Harbor is to the Eastward of these dangers. Herring Shoals, These dangers, which are about y^ mile to the T/estward of Maloney Shoals, lie on the Westeru side of the entrance to Spry Harbor, and have 12 feet water upon them at Low Tide. Ma- loney Rock bears from these dangers NE. by E. about a mile. Mad Moll Reef, This dangerous Reef, which is bare in some places, extends about a mile to the Westward from Taylor Head (Eastern side 486 KLDHIDOE'S COAST PILOT. of entrance to Spry Harbor) , and Is bold on Its Western side. Maloney Rock, always above water, boars from the Western end of this Reef NW. H N. about ^ mile. Maloney Mock, This Rock, which is the guide in entering Spry Ilai-bor, is al- ways above water, and lies a short distance above the entrance, and is nearly in mid-channel. Taylor Head, Kasturn side of en- trance, bears about E!>SEi- IH miles. There is a narrow Chan- nel of 6 fathoms water, about ^ mile wide, to the Westward of this Rock. Never fail Shoal, This danger, which has 17 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies E. % S. about ^ mile from Maloney Rock. The best Channel leading up to Spry Harbor is to the Eastward of this danger. Shoal Spots, ' These dangers, which have from 28 to 30 feet water upon them, lie Northeasterly from }4 to ^ mile from Maloney Rock. Bald Mock, This Rock, which is above water, is quite bold on its Western side, and lies on the Eastern side of the Channel about 1^ miles above Malon( Rock. To the Eastward of this Rook are Leslie and Green Isli.nds, both of which are small and surrounded by Shoal Water. Ham Hock, This danger, which is bare at Low Tide, is nearly opposite Bald Rock, and lies about }£ mile from the Western shore. The Channel leading up to Spry Harbor is between Ram Rock and Bald Rock and is about ^ mile wide. Memarka, ^ Spry Harbor is situated at the Southwest end of Spry Bay and is sufficiently commodious to accommodate a large fleet. The Anchorage, wliich is considered safe from all winds, is near tUu Southwest part in from 7 to 8 fathoms water, good holding ground. About 6 fathoms water can be taken into this Harbor at Low Tide. miles on the {■ Boston. Me ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 487 Sailing Directions for Spry Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears North, make go«)d the course E. J4 N. l''J>4 miles, keeping a sharp lookout for llorso Rock (before described). The sea generally breaks upon this danger. When this Rock is made, leave it about % miK on the Port hand, and steer NE. by E. for Taylor Head, which is com- posed of large White Rocks, is destitute of trees, lies ou the East- ern side of entrance, and is easily distingnished. As you ap- proach this head, keep a sharp lookout for IMaloncy Rock, which is always above water. When this boars N. by W. % W., then run for it on this course, leavin/^ it about 300 yards on the Port hand. When past this Rock, steer about North, keeping a sharp lookout for Bald Rock (before described) ; when this is made, leave it about 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and gradually haul to the Westward, and run in about midway, and anchor near the Southwest part of the Harbor in from 7 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about 3 miles on the Starboard hand, and when it bears North, make good the course W. J^ N. about 9J^ miles, leaving the dangCi-s which lie to the Westward of Beaver Island Lighthouse well on the Starboard hand. When Taylor Head (which is composed of large White Rocks, is destitute of trees, and lies on the Eastern side of entrance to Spry Harbor) bears North, then run in about N.NW., keeping a sharp lookout for Maloney Kock (which is always above water) ; when this Rock is made, bring it to bear N. by W. /4 W. and run for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Spry Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 8 h. 2 m., or 3 h. 27 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5j4 feet. TAYLOR BAY. This Bay lies on the Northern side of Spry Harbor, and affords good Anchorage for light draught vessels. 488 ELDRIDGE'F COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions in Daytime. Vessels bound to Taylor Bay, should follow the directions bo- fore given for Spry Harbor, until past Bald Rock. Thou make good the course NW. by N. about a mile ; Taylor Bay will thca be fairly open and you may then run in. In order to avoid tbo Sunken Rocks, which lie on the Eastern side of the Channel, keep the Western side best aboard, and anchor when the water shoals to 3 fathoms at Low Tide, about J^ mile above the en- trance. It is not prudent for strangers to go above this without a pilot. MUSHABOON HARBOR. This Harbor, which is next to the Eastward of Spry Harbor, is exposed to Southeasterly winds and affords no shelter for vessels only on the Eastern side near its head ; during these winds it is therefore advisable for vessels seeking shelter, to make eithiir Spry Harbor or Sheet Harbor, both of which are near the en- trance to Mushaboon Harbor. SHEET HARBOR. The entrance to this fine Harbor, which is between Danbury Island on the East and Western Island on the West, is about Yi mile wide, and lies East-Northerly about 52 miles from Sanibro Lighthouse, 19 miles East-Northerly from Egg Island LighthouHo, 74 miles to the Westward of Canso Lighthouse, and West-Norlli- erly about 7 miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse. Sheet Hock Lighthouse, A little more than J^ mile without the entrance to Sheet Harbor is a small Islet which presents to Seaward a remarkab.le Cliff of Clay Slate resembling somewhat a suspended sheet. This is colled Sheet Rock. Upon this Rock is a White Square Wooden Build- ing, with dwelling attached, which at this date (1884) shows ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 489 every 40 seconds a Red Revolving Light. From Seaward tliia Light is only seen from NE. by E^ ^ E- to NW. % W- Ves- sels bound to the "Westward of this Lighthouse should leave it at least 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and vessels bound to the Eastward of it should leave it at least 250 yards on the Port hand. Dangers in approaching Sheet Harbor from the Southwestward. Yankee Jack, This small dangerous Rock has 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. by N. ^ N. 4 miles ; Taylor Head (composed of large "White Rocks) , NW. by N. K K". 2^ miles. "With a smooth sea Yankee Jack is very dangerous. About ^ mile W.N W. from Yankee Jack is another Rock with 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Taylor Goose. This dangerous Rock, which lies about ^ mile to the North- westward of Yankee Jack, is awash at High "Water, and is bold on its Southeastern side. "Vessels may pass to the Southward of this danger within a cable's length, but Shoal "Water extends Northwesterly about J^ mile from it. Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears from Taylor Goofee NE. by N; 4 miles ; Taylor Head (composed of large "White Rocks), NW- by N. ^ N. IJ^ miles. JIushaboon Shoal, This small Rocky Patch, which lies about ^ mile NE. by N. from Taylor Goose, has about 17 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. by N. 3^ miles; Taylor Head, NW. l4 W. 1^ miles. The sea upon Mushaboon Shoal seldom breaks, but its position may be known by the bearings of Taylor Goose, which is awash at High "Water. Pyche Shoals, These Shoals, which lie about a mile to the Eastward of Taylor Head, have in some places about 16 feet water upon them at Low Tide. Sheet Pock Lighthouse bears from the centre of these Shoals NE. ^ E. 2J^ mUes. ?^. »■*?«»" 490 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Dangers in approaching Sheet Harbor from the Southward and Eastward. Logan Rock* This Bock, which has about 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies E. by S. }i S- 1J4 miles from Yankee Jack. Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears from Logan Bock N. % E. ^}i miles. Western Shagroost. This Bock, which is about 6 feet above High Water, is always visibifc m daytime. A Beef, which is dry in some places, extends about Yz mile from it in a Southwesterly direction. About % mile to the Eastward of this Bock there are several Bocky Patches. Sheet Bock Lighthouse bears from Western Shagroost N. by W. }i W. ^yi miles. Vessels bound into Sheet Harbor should give this Bock at leaet a berth of % mile on either hand. Munroe Mock, This Bock, which lies about 7^ mile to the Southward of West- em Shagroost, has 11 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sheet Bock Lighthouse, Western Shagroost and Munroe Bock lie nearly on a line. JEastem Shagroost, This is a low Bocky Ledge about 6 feet above High Water. Shoal Water lies from yi to % mUe to the Northward and West- ward of it. Sheet Bock Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. Z% miles. There is deep water between the Eastern Shagroost and Pumpkin Island, the latter of which lies E- by N. }i N. about \7/i miles from the former. About a mile NW. by N. from Eastern Shagroost is a Bocky Patch having ubout 19 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Bdbin Shoal, This danger, which lies about NW. by N. 54 N. 1^^ miles from Western Shagroost, has 14 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sheet Bock Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by W. 1% miles. Between Western Shagroost and Babin Shoal are several Bocky Patches having from 24 to 30 feet water upon them. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 491 Macdonald Mock and Shoals, This Rock, which is on the Eastern side of approach to Sheet Harbor, is dry at Low Tide, and lies on the extensive Macdonald Shoals, which extend oflE SW. by W. about j4 mile from Mac- donald Point. Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears from the Western part of these Shopils N. by W. about a mile. White Bock. This Rock, which lies on the Eastern side of Sheet Harbor, has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sheet Rock Light- house bears from this danger S.SW. 1^ miles. In order to clear this Rock, when running up the Lighthouse should be kept open about a vessel's length to the Westward of Danbury Island. This last-named Island, which is 60 feet high, lies on the Eastern side of entrance to Sheet Harbor, and bears NE. by N. % N. ^ mile from the Lighthouse. Memarks, ThiM excellent Harbor of Refuge, the entrance of which is be- tween Western Island and Danbury Island, is about J^ mile wide. There is good Anchorage on the Western side in about 6 fathoms water at Low Tide immediately after entering. The Harbor ei"- tends inland more than 5 miles, and with one exception, by keep- ing midway, is navigable for heavy draught vessels nearly to its head. Good water may be obtained in this Harbor at Watering Cove, which is on the Western side about 3J^ miles from the en- trance. In approaching Sheet Harbor there are four passages leading in among the Rocks and Shoals, either of which may be used by large vessels as the wind or other circumstances may require. Sailing Directions for Sheet Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Egg Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears North, make good the course East 14 miles, leaving Horse Rock well on the Port hand. Tay- lor Head, which is composed of Large White Rocks and is desti- tute of trees, will then bear NE. by N. }i N. about d}{ miles. When this Head is made, run for it on this course until about -^ .- i ■ . . • ■ 492 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. mile from it ; then steer East, leaving Yankee Jack, Taylor Goose, Mushaboon Shoal (before described) on the Starboard, and Pyche Shoals well on the Port hand. Continue the course East until Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears NE. by N., then run for it on this course, and leave it about % mile on the Starboard hand. When past this Lighthouse bring it to bear S. }i W., and run N. % E., passing about midway between Danbury Island and "Western Island. When past these Islands run up about N. by E. In order to avoid White Rock (before de- scribed) , keep the Lighthouse open to the Westward of Danbury Island. When past this Rock keep midway, and anchor in from 6 to 8 fathoms water, about 4 5^ miles above the Lighthouse, where you may lie secure from all winds. From Seaward, keep a sharp lookout for Sheet Rock Light- house, and as soon as it is made, bring it to bear N. by E., and run for it on this course, leaving Yankee Jack, Taylor Goose, and Mushaboon Shoals well on the Port, and Logan Shoal and Western Shagroost well on the Starboard hand. Continue the course N- by E. until about 1^ miles from the Lighthouse, then gradually haul to the Westward and leave it about J^ mile oo the Starboard hand, and follow the directions before given. From the Eastward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Starboard hand, and steer W. by N., leaving the Eastern Shagroost well on the Starboard hand. Continue the course W. byN. until Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears NW. by N., then run for it on this course passing about midway between the Rocks called Eastern and Western Shagroost ; when the Western Shagroost, which is about 6 feet above High Water, bears S- by W. % W., then steer W- NW. passing about midway between Babin and Macdonald Shoals. Continue^ the course W-NW- until Sheet Harbor Lighthouse bears N. byE., then follow the directions before given. With favorable winds, vessels of not more than 14 feet draught from the Eastward, may pass to the Northward of Beaver J3land, by the following directions : When Beaver Island Lightliouse is made, bring it to bear W.NW. and run for it on this course. Wlicn about 1 % miles from it, steer more Northerly. As you sail in you will see Horse Island, which is 40 feet high, and lies about a mile to the Northwestward of Beaver Island ; pass about midway between these two Islands, leaving Beaver Island Light- It is High W ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 493 house abojit J^ mile on the Port hand. When this Lighthouse bears S-SEm make good the course W- J4 N., leaving Pumpkin Island (which is nearly 100 feet high and bears W. by N- 1^ miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse) not more than 250 yards on the Port hand. Continue the course W. Yi N. 4J^ miles, or until Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears N. by E., then run for it and follow the directions before given. Vessels may find good Anchorage on the Western side of Sheet Harbor immediately within the entrance, by the following direc- tions : When past Sheet Rock Lighthouse, bring it to bear S. ^^ W' and steer N. Yi Bypassing about midway between Dan- bury Island and Western Island. When past these Islands, haul in and anchor in the Western part of the Harbor in from 6 to 8 fathoms water at Low Tide with good holding ground. Beating into Sheet Harbor m Daytime. When past Yankee Jack and Taylor Goose Rocks, vessels of not more than 15 feet draught may bring Sheet Rock Lighthouse to bear from NE. by N. to N. until about Y\ ^i^*^ from it; then pass to the Eastward of the Lighthouse, where there are no dangers excepting those lying near the shores, and work in be- tween Danbury Island and Western Island (before describea) , and anchor on the Western side, immediately within the entrance, in from 6 to 8 fathoms water. Sailing Directions for Sheet Harbor at Night-time, with favorable winds and fair weather. At night-time, from the Eastward or Westward, keep outside all the Ledges (before described) until Sheet Rock Lighthouse bears N. by E., then run for it on this course until you judge you are about J^ mile from it, then haul round it leaving it about Yl mile on the Port hand. When this Lighthouse bears S. K W., steer N. J^ E. ^ niile, passing midway between Danbury Island and Western Island. When past these Islands, haul in and anchor on the Western side of the Harbor, in from 6 to 8 fathoms water. High Water, It is High Water on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 8 h. 6 m., or 3 h. 23 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, S^^ feet. ^%^- 494 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. BEAVER HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which i^ the first to the Eastward of Sheet Harbor, is easy of access, and lies East-Northerly 5 miles from Sheet Rock Lighthouse, and North-Westerly 4^^ miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse. Beaver Island Idghthouse, Upon the Eastern end of Beaver Island is a Dwelling painted White, with two Black Balls to Seaward. Upon the building is a lantern, which at this date (1884) shows a Revolving White Ligbt which attains its greatest brilliancy every two minutes. Vessels bound to Beaver Harbor ihould leave this Lighthouse at least yi mile to the Westward. Bearings and Distances firom Beaver Island Lighthouse. Sambro Lighthouse, . . . W. J^ S., . . Egg Island Lighthouse, . . W. ^ S., . . Green Island Lighthouse, . E. ^ N., . . White Head Island Light- house, E. >^ N., . . Cranberry Island Lighthouse, East-Northerly, Distanoe. 68 miles 24^ u 38^ u 66>^ u 68 (( Dangers in approaching Beaver Harbor William Shoal. This Shoal, which is the principal danger in approaching Beaver Island from Seaward, has 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Beaver Island Lighthouse bears from it N.NW. 2 miles. Marmot Rock, This danger, which is awash at low spring Tides, is the outer- most on the Eastern side of the Channel leading up to Beaver Harbor. Beaver Island Lighthouse bears from this Rock SW- ))y W. ^ W. 2]/^ miles. Middle Shoal, This Shoal, which lies on the Eastern sidt of the ap) loacli to Beaver Harbor, has about 14 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Boaver U\ nllai. Ab two Mpoti ; Tide. Thii Rod iag up to Be Sboftl Watoi This Man Northward c Cbanael. Sh era part of a tli@re ore seve Tbli liland tb© approach tbfta ft mile fro off «omo distil bouad to Beav to th@ Westwt Thii Iiland,) Islaad, Js on [ lieavor Harboj high, which Is I Jsqult© bold, I i mil© without I Beaver Uivl the Lighthouse heavliisdraugl Jag Soutbeasteii pais above Hti Inner Beaver fi'om Beaver hJ ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 495 Boaver Islancl Lighthouse bears from this danger S-SW. IJ^ milei. Ab6ut y^ mile to the Westward of Middle Ground are two (ipoti having from 24 to 26 feet water upon them at Low Tide. Harbor Rock. Thii Rook, which lies on the Eastern side of the Channel lead- iag up to Beaver Harbor, is elevated 12 feet above High Water. Shoal Water extends about 250 yards to the Westward of this danger. Sandy Island, Thii Island, which is 20 feet high, lies about % mile to the Northward of Harbor Rock, and is on the Eastern side of the Chanael. Shoal Water extends oflf about }( mile from the South- era part of this Island. Between Sandy Island and Harbor Rock there are several spots having as little as 18 feet water upon them. Morse Island, Thii Island, which is 40 feet high, lies on the Western side of the approach to Beaver Harbor, and Northwesterly a little more tbaa a mile from Beaver Island Lighthouse. Shoal Water extends oS some distance from its Eastern part. Vessels, therefore, bound to Beaver Harbor, should leave this Island at least ^^ mile to the Westward. Sutherland Island. Thii Island, which lies about a mile Northwesterly from Horse Island, is on the Western side of the Channel leading up to Beaver Harbor, and has upon it a conical-shaped Hill 107 feet high, which is a good landmark for vessels. Sutherland Island is quit© bold, and vessels may approach its Eastern side within ^ miles from this Ledge, is a spot of 18 feet called the Horseshoe. This is one of the outer- most dangers for vessels from the Eastward, approaching Ni- comtau Bay or Beaver Harbor. Beaver Island Lighthouse bears from the Horseshoe Shoal W- J^ N. ^y^ mi'es. Halihut Islands, These Islands, the highest of which is 35 ifect, are about a mile in extent and mark the Eastern side of the entrance to Ni- comtau Bay. Beaver Island Lighthouse bears from these Islands W. by S. 7 miles. About j4 mile Southwesterly from the Hali- but Isles, is the Pollock Bock with 17 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Salamander Rock, This Rock, which is nearly dry at Low Tide, lies on the East- ern side of the entrance to Nicomtau Bay. The Western end of the highest Halibut Island bears from this danger, South, J^ mile. Kitts Beef, This Reef, which has but little water upon it at Low Tide, lies on the Western side of the approach to Nicomtau Bay. The Western end of the highest Halibut Island bears from this dan- ger SB- }i B. about 1^ miles. The Channel leading in be- tween Salamander Rock and Kitts Rocks is about 1 5^ miles wide. Harbor Mock, This Rock, which is the guide to Nicomtau Bay, is 30 feet above High Water, and lies nearly in mid-channel. Vessels bound up the Bay, may leave this Rock 150 yards on either hand. ^mmm 500 ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. Bull Bock, This Rock, which has but little water upon it at Low Tide, lic» n little more than % mile E- ]i S- from Harbor Rock. Between Hull Rock and the Eastern Hide of the Hay there is a Channel about J^ mile wide, with a depth of (J fathoms water in it. Ship Island Shoal, This Shoal, which has 16 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies NW. by N. about % mile from Harbor Rock. There is a nar- row Passage of 9 fathoms water between Harbor Rook and Ship Island Shoal. ' JRemarka, From the Halibut Islands, which lie on the Eastern side of tlte entrance to the Anchorage near the Head of this Bay, the distance is about 3 miles. About 6 fathoms water, at Low Tide, can bo carried to this Anchorage. There is also Anchorage in from 8 to 10 fathoms water on the Western side of this Bay, in all except- ing Southeasterly winds. Sailing Directions for Nicomtau Bay in Daytime^ with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about a mile on the Port hand, and when it bears N., make good the course E. about G miles, leaving the Bassoon Reefs (before de- scribed) well on the Port hand. Nicomtau Bay will then be fauly open, and you may run in about N., leaving the Halibut Islands (before described) about ^ mile on the Starboard hand. When the Western end of the highest of the Halibut Islands bears E., then steer about N. by E., keeping a sharp lookout for Harbor Rock (before described). When this is made, bring it to bear N. by E. % E., and run for it on this course, leaving it about 150 yards on either hand,. and steer about NE. by E. ^ E-, and anchor on the Eastern side near the Head, in from 5 to 6 fathoms water at I^ow Tide. White Islands, These Islands, which are Wooded, show White Cliffs to Sea- ward, and are elevated at their Eastern extremity about 80 feet above the level of the sea. They lie off the li^astcrn entrance to ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 501 Nicomtaii Bay, and bear from Bcavor Island Lijrhthonso E. about 9 miles. The White iHlands may ho. approaclK'd on their Soutlicrn and Eastern Hides within y^ mile, but Shoal VVutor extends oflf a long distance from their Northern {)art. Vessels from the Eastward bound to Nicomtau Bay may, as soon as the White Islands are made, bring their highest part to bear W.NW., and run for them, leaving little White Island (which is 50 feet high) well on the Starboard hand. When about a mile from these Islands, steer more Westerly, leaving Bowen Ledge (before described) about % mile on the Starboard hand. When past this Ledge, steer more Northerly, leaving the Halibut Islands about ^ mile on the Starboard hnnd, and follow the directions before given. . Vessels may anchor on the Western side of Nicomtau Bay, nearly opposite the Halibut Islands, by the following directions. Follow the directions before given until Nicomtau Bay is well open. You will then see, on the Western side, nearly opposite the Halibut Islands, Broken Back " land, which is small, and is elevated 60 feet above High Water. When this Island bears NW. by N-, then run for it on this course until about ^2 mile from it. Then steer more Northerly, leaving this last-named Island (which is bold on its Eastern end) }{ mile on the Port hand, and Fitts Reef (before described) well on the Starboard hand, and run up about N.NW-, and anchor at the Head, in from 8 to 10 fathomb water at Low Tide. This Anchorage is ex- posed to Southeasterly winds. HiffJi Water, It is High Water in Nicomtau Bay, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 8 h. 3 m., or 3 h. 26 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5J^ feet. BAY OF ISLANDS. This is the name generally given to the coast between Beaver Island Lighthouse and Mary-Joseph Harbor. The Islands off this part of the coast are very numerous, with Channels between them, •JKMM |f*|| 602 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. which in many cases are narrow, with Ledges and Hooks in them. There is generally a suflacient depth of water in these Channels for large vessels, but no suitable sailing directions can be given. It is therefore advisable for strangers navigating this part of the coAst to employ pilots. MARY-JOSEPH HARBOR. This Harbor, which is the first to the Westward of Liscomb Harbor, lies East-Northerly 71 miles from Sambro Lighthouse, 37 j4 miles East-Nortl rly from Egg Island Lighthouse, 13^ miles East-Northerly fir>m Beaver Island Lighthouse, 55 miles to the Westward of Cr - nberry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso) , and 26 miles to the Westward of Green Island Lighthouse. Remarks. Mary-Josi'ph Harbor is well sheltered from all winds. It has two passages leading in, one from the Eastward, the other from the Westward. About 5 fathoms water pan be taken in at Low Tide, but the Channels arv- ao narrow, and the dangers so numer- ous without any leading marks or bearings to clear them, that it is advisable for strangers not to attempt it without pilots. LISCOMB HARBOR. The entrance to this excellent Harbor, which is between the Western end of Liscomb Island on the East and Liscomb Point on the West, is about ^ mile wide, and lies East-Northerly 75 miles from Sambro Lighthouse, 42 miles East-Northerly from Egg Island Li'^hthouse, 17^2 miles East-Northerly from Beaver Iwliuul Lightho'ise, 22 miles West-Northerly from Green Island Light- house, tiud 51j^ miles to the Westward of Cranberry Island Ligh' • houpj (Cape Canso). Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse* Upon the Western end of Liscomb Island, East side of en- trance to Liscomb Harbor, is a White Square Wooden Building, ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 503 which at date this (1884) shows a Red and "White Revolving Light. In order to avoid Mackerel Shoal, vessels should leave this Lighthouse at least ^ mile to the Eastward. Dangers in approaching and entering Liscomb Harbor. Hawbolt Mock, This Rock, which has 27 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is the outermost danger in approaching Liscomb Harbor from the Southwestward. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. 4^^ miles. Sand Shoal, This Rocky Shoal, which is nearly Yj, mile in extent, has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. Yz E. 3j4 rr^iles. Lang Shoal, This small Shoal, which lies about Yi ™ile ^ ^^^ Northward of Sand Shoal, has 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Lis- comb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N.NE. 2^ miles. Macinlay Shoal, This rocky Shoal, which lies SE. by E. J4 E. ^ mile from Lang Shoal, has about 28 feet ^"ter upon it at Low Tide. Lis- comb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. 3 mUes. Black IPHnce Ledge, This dangerous Ledge, which lies a short distance Northeast- erly from Lang Shoal, is bare at Half Tide. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. 5^ B. 2^ miles. ^ortlieast Breaker, This small rocky Shoal, which lies Northeasterly about ^ mile from Black Prince Ledge, has but 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger N- by E. 1 ^ miles. mm. '•'m 504 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Lu'tnp JRock. This small spot, which lies nearly j^ mile Northwesterly from the Northeast Breaker, has 11 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. by N. >^ N. 1^ miles. Seal Ledge, This danger, which extends oflf more than a mile from the East- ern part of Barren Island, lies on the Western side of the ap- proach to Liscomb Harbor. Some of the Rocks on it are above High Water, and some are bare at Low Tide. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from the Eastern part of Seal Ledge NE. J4 N. about 3 miles. Channel Rock, This danger, which is the Southeasternmost in approaching Liscomb Harbor, has 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Lis- comb Harbor Lighthouse bears from this Rock NW. ^ W. 3^ miles. Crook Shoals, These Rocky Shoals, which are bare in some places at Low Tidv-^, extend off Southeasterly nearly a mile from the Southeast part of Liscomb Island, upon which the Lighthouse stands. Ves- sels from the Eastward bound to Liscomb Harbor should give these dangers a wide berth. Liscomb Shoal, This danger, which extends off about 3E. by E. J^ mile from Liscomb Point, has from 3 to 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, and lies on the Western side of entrance to Liscomb Harbor. Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse bears from the Southeastern end of this Shoal N.NE • about ^ mile. Vessels bound in should be- ware of this danger. Mackerel Shoal, This danger, which has but 2 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies W. by S. 350 yards from Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse. In order to avoid Mackerel Shoal, vessels bound in should leave thia Lighthouse at least l^ mile to the Eastward. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 505 This excellent and capacious Harbor, which is completely land- locked, makes in about W.NW. 5 miles from the Northwesi-^rn end of Liscomb Island, on which the Lighthouse stands. A Shoal nearly di'y at Low Tide, extends off Southwesterly about 400 yards from Wilson Point, which is on the Northern side of the Harbor about 3 5^ miles above the Lighthouse. About 27 feet water at Low Tide can be taken in abreast the watering place, which is on the Southern side about 2^ miles above the Light- house ; and by keeping the Southern side best aboard about 17 feet can be taken up near the head, which is about 2^^ miles above this last-named place. Sailing Directions for Liscomb Harbor in Daytime, with, favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave Beaver Island Lighthouse about 3 miles to the Northward, and steer about East, which will clear all the Shoals and Ledges. When Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear North and run for it on this course, leaving Sand Shoal, Lang Shoal, Black Prince Ledge and North- east Breaker, all of wbir'b havf; been described, well on the Port hand. Continue the course xor the Lighthouse until about J^ mile from it, then gradually haul to the Westward, and in order to avoid Mackerel Shoal, leave the Lighthouse not less than Yz mile on the Starboard hand. When about a mile past this Light- house the harbor will then be fairly open bearing about W-NW-, then run in, keeping the Southern side best aboard, and anchor where you please. From the Eastward, in order to clear Crook Shoals (before de- scribed) , do not approach the Southeast end of Liscomb Island nearer than a mile. When the Lighthouse bears N.NW., then run for it on this course until about J^ mile from it, then grad- ually haul to the Westward and follow the directions before given. Beating into Liscomb Harbor. In beating into Liscomb Harbor, keep outside all the Shoals and Ledges (before described) and work in with the Lighthouse bearing from N. to N-NW. until about >^ mile from it. Then, in order to avoid Mackerel Shoal, I'.eep in mid-channel until 506 ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. past Smoke Point (which is the first above the Lighthouse on the "Western side), then run up and anchor where you please. Sailing Directions for Liscomb Harbor at Night, tim^^, jnth. favorable winds and fair weather. From the Eastward or "Westward, keep outside all tiie dangers until Liscomb Harbor Light bears N. by W., then run for it on this course until about j4 mile from it. Then gradually xul to the Westward, and in order to avoid Mackerel Shoal, keep about midway the passage, until the Light bears SC by S. ; then gi-ad- ually haul to the "Westward and run up, keeping the Southern side best aboard, and anchor in from 4 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. Sigh Water, I: is High "Water in Liscomb Harbor, on the days of the Full and Ciiange of the Moon, at 8 h. m., or 3 h. 29 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5j4 feet. -. SPANISH SHIP BAT, The entrance to this small Bay, which is on the Northern side of Liscomb Harbor, lies NW. about 2j4 miles from Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse. Remarks, At Low Tide, about 15 feet water can be carried into Spanish Ship Bay, where vessels may lie secure from all winds. But the Channel leading in is very narrow, and there are several obstruc- tions lying in it without any leading marks or bearings to clear them. It is therefore advisable for strangers to take pilots. LITTLE LISCOMB HARBOR. The entrance to this small Harbor, which is between Hog Is- land on the West and Redman Head on the East, is about J^ mile wide, and lies about 1^ miles Northeasterly from Liscomb Har- bor Lighthouse. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Memarks, 507 A little aoove Redman Head there is good anchorage in 4 fathoms water at Low Tide in all but Southerly and Southeasterly winds ; and farther in there is safe anchorage for light draught vessels, secure from all winds. Sailing Directions for Little Liscomb Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, in order to avoid Crook Shoals (before described) , leave the Southeast end of Liscomb Island not less than a mile to the N" ^hward. Whea past this Island you will see Redman Head, which is 100 feet high, and lies N. by W. about lyi miles from the Southeast end of this last-named Island. When the Western part of Redman Head bears NW. by N. , then run for it on this course and leave it about 300 yards on the Starboard hand, and run up midway, and anchor in from 2 to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, leave Wedge Island Lighthouse about a mile to the Northward, and run W. by N- until Redman Read is on with the Eastern end of Hemloe Island, bearing NW. by N. Then run in on this range, leaving the Tobacco Ledges and Shag Ledges well on the Starboard hand, and follow the directions be- fore given. JEGOGAN HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Byrne Head on the East and Redman Ec?rl on the West, is about 2 miles wide, and lies about 2}4 miles Northeasterly from Liscomb Harbor Lighthouse and about 2 miles Northwesterly from Wedge Island Lighthouse. Memarks, The entrance to this Harbor is much obstructed by Shag and Tobacco Ledges. There are two Channels leading in ; one to the Eastward of Tobacco Island (which is 40 feet high, and lies nearly midway the entrance) , the other to the Westward of this 508 ELDllIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Island. There is Anchorage in about 4 fathoms water about 2 miles above Tobacco Island, but it is somewhat exposed to South- erly winds, which bring in considerable sea. Vessels of not more than 12 feet cJi-aught may anchor near the Head above Rae Island, where they may lie secure from all winds. Sailing Directions for Jegogan Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. Vessels of not more than 15 feet draught, from the Westward, may, when Wedge Island Lighthouse is ii.?de, bring it to bear ITHi., and run for it on this course, leaving Crook Shoals, which lie oflf to the Southeastward of Liscomb Island, well on the Port hand. When about a mile from Wedge Island Lighthouse, in order to avoid the Ledges which lie to the Southward and Southwestward of it, haul to the Westward, leaving it not more than % mile on the Starboard hand. When the Lighthouse bears SB., steer NW. As you sail in. Tobacco Island, which is 40 feet high, will be seen on the Port hand, and further in Tobacco Ledge, which is small. Leave this Island and Ledge about 250 yards on the Port hand. When past the Ledge, in order to avoid the dangers which extend off from both sides, keep midway the Harbor, and anchor above Brig Point (which is on the Western side about Ij^ miles above Tobacco Island), in about 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels of not more than 12 feet draught, with pilots, may ^o further up, and anchor above Rae Island, where they may lie secure from all winds. High Water, It is High Water in Jegogan Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 57 m., or 3 h. 32 m. before it is in Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. ST. MARY BI VER. The entrance to this River, which is between Cape St. Mary on the East and Barachois Point on the West, is about \% miles wide, and lies 80 miles to the Eastward of Sambro Island Light- ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 509 hoiwo, Kftst-Northerly 24 miles from Beaver Island Lighthouse, EaHt-Northerly 49 miles from Egg Island Lighthouse, 44 miles to tho Westward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso), l/i mllo» to the Westward of Green Island Lighthouse, and about 2 mlloi to the Northward of Wedge Island Lighthouse. Wedge Island Lighthouse. Off tho Western side of entrance to St. Mary River, is an Islet brivlng ft White Square Wooden Building upon it, with dwelling ivttivt'liod. At this date (1884) a Revolving Red Light is shown fi'oin tbl» Lighthouse. Ledges extend ofif nearly J^ mile both to the Northward and Southward of Wedge Island, but it is quite Hold oa its Western side. Memarks, St. Mary River is one of the largest in Nova Scotia. From the ontvanae to the town of Sherbrooke, which is situated on its Kiwtui'ii bank at the Head of Navigation, the distance is about 8 m 11(^1 The entrance to this River is obstructed by a Sand Bar wliltih ha» about 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. There are hIho many dangers in it, making it necessary to employ a pilot. About G feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken up to the town of Shurbi'ooke. High Water, It \n High Water on St. Mary Bar, on the days of the Full and Chang© of the Moon, at 8 h. m., or about 3 h. 29 m. before it iii at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. INDIAN BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between Walter Island on tho West, and HoUins Head on the East, is about 3 miles wide, and lies l4 miles from this Lighthouse, gradually haul to the Westward, leaving it about J^ mile on the Starboard hand. Bring this Lighthouse to bear E. ^ N., and make good the course W. % S. for the Pollux Rock, leaving Tomcod Shoals well on the Port and Rose Shoal well on the Starboard hand. When the Pollux Rock (which is small and is elevated 4 feet above High Water), is made, gradually haul to the Westward, leaving it at least ^ mile on the Port hand. When the White Cliffs on Barachois Head bear N. by W. % W., then run for them on this course and follow the directions before given. COUNTRY HARBOR. The entrance to this fine Harbor, which is between Harbor Point on the East and the main land on the West, is about Yz mile wide, and lies 93 miles to the Eastward of Sambro Lighthouse, about 60 miles to the Eastward of Egg Island Lighthouse, 35 miles to the Eastward of Beaver Island Lighthouse, 12^ miles East-Northerly from Wedge Island Lighthouse, 34 miles to the Westward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso), and Northwesterly about 7 miles from Green Island Lighthouse. G-reen Island Lighthouse. Upon the Southern end of Green Island is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed White Light which is intended to guide vessels to Fisherman's Harbor and Country Harbor. Shoal Water extends Northeasterly a long distance from Green Island, but vessels may approach its South- western, Southern and Southeastern sides within ^ mile without danger. nu ELDRinr.E'S COAST PILOT. Dangers in approaching Country Harbor from the Eastward. Brandy Ledge, Thia Ledge is about y^ mile in length and ai)out Yz mile in breadth. Near the centre ia a wpot wliich only covers at Iligli AVatev. Between this dangtM* and the coast is u Channel free from dangers, witli from 7 to 15 fathoms water in it. Green Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger W. 3^ miles. Split Rock* This small Rock, which is awash at Low Tide, lies near the Southern end of a Rocky Shoal which extends about N-NW. ^ mile from this Rock. Green Island Lighthouse bears from Split Rock W- /4 S. 2^ miles. Between this Rock and Brandy Ledge is a good Channel, free from dangers., with from 8 to 12 fathoms water in it. White Rock, This small Rock has 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Green Island Lighthouse bears from it W. about \yl miles. A little more than J^ mile to the Eastward of White Rock is another Rock having about 28 feet water upoix it at Low Tide. Between White Rock and Green Island Lightiiouse there is another Shoal Spot with 13 feet water upon it at Low Tido. Vessels unacquainted should not pass to the Northward of White Rock and Green Island, as there are many dangers to the North- ward of this Island, some of which lie more than 2 miles from it. Dangers in approaching Country Harbor from the Southward or Seaward. Tomcod Rock, This dangerous Rock, which usually breaks, is covered at High Water. Green Island Lighthouse bears from it N.NE. about 1^ miles. Tomcod Shoals, These two Rocky Shoals, which have in some places, 19 feet water upon them, lie about }4 i">lti Northwesterly from Tomcod Rock. Green Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of these dangers N.NE. 1^ miles. danger E. U ELDHI DOE'S COAST PILOT. 615 Fourteen Feet Shoal, This danger, which lies }{ mile to the Westward of Toracod Rocic, is surrounded i)y deep water. Green Island Lighthouse bears from Fourteen Feet Shoal NE. by N. l^i miles. O^ull Nest Shoal, This Rocky Shoiil, which has 1? feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies Northeasterly nearly ^ mile frotn'l'omcod Ilock. Green Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. by N. 3^ N. ^ mile. About 1>4 miles Southeast from Tomcod Rock there is an exten- sive Shoal having about 30 feet water upon it at Low Tid'\ Heavy- draught vessels approaching Country Harbor should beware of this danger. Middle Ledge or Southeaster, This dangerous Ledge extends NW. by N. and SB. by S. nearly ^ mile. Near its centre is a Rock which is bare at Half Tide. This danger is surrounded by deep water. In thick weather or night-time the lead, therefore, gives no warning in approaching it. Green Island Lighthouse bears from Middle Ledge NE. by E. 3J4 miles. Dangers in approaching Country Harbor from the Westward. Pollux Rock, This small Rock, which is 4 feet above High Water, is a guide in approaching Country Harbor from the Westward. Pollux Rock is bold on its Southern side, but a Reef extends about; y^ mile N.NW. from it. Green Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E. ^ N. 5^ miles. Taylor Shoal, This danger, which extends NW. and SE. nearly yi mile, lies a little more than a mile SE. from Pollux Rock, and has 17 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Green Island Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by N. J4 N. 5 miles. I 516 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Bingley Shoal, Th: small Rocky Shoal, which has 15 feet water upou it at Low Tide, lies a little more than % mile to tho Enstward of Pollux Rock. Green Island Lighthouse bears from this danger B. ^ N. nearly 5 miles. Castor Mock and Shoals, This dangerous Rock, which is about 4 feet above High "Water, lies NW. by W. nearly 2^^ miles from the Pollux Rock. Rocky patches, liaving from 3 to 4J^ fathoms water upon tliem, lie some distance to the Southeastward, Southward and West- ward of it. Fleek Shoal, with SJE^^ fathoms water upon it, bears from the Castor SW. by S. ^ S. 1^ mile. Mose Shoal, This Shoal, which extends nearly North and South, is abort ^ mile in length, and nearly ^ mile in breadth, and has as littli f7ith favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, follow the directions before given for Country Harbor until past Black Ledge. You will then see the Lighthouse, which is on the Western side of enti-ance to Isaac Harbor. Bring this Lighthouse to bear 1M. , and run for it on this course until about 300 yards from it. riien gradually haul to the Eastward, keeping the Western side best aboard, carrying not less than 5 fathoms of water at Low Tide. When past the first point on the Western side, which is about ^ mile above the Lighthouse, keep the Eastern side best aboard, and anchor ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 521 about a mile above the Lighthouse, in from 3 to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, follow the directions before given for Country Harbor until past Black Ledge. Then bring the Light- house at the entrance of Isaac Harbor to bear N. , and rm ) for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. It is not advisable for strangers to attempt to beat into Isaac Harbor, as dangers extend off some distance from both sides. WEBB COVE, The entrance to this small Cove, which has about 12 feet water in it at Low Tide, lies on the Eastern side of Isaac Harbor, a little more than ^ mile above the Lighthouse. la this Cove small vessels of not more than 10 or 11 feet draught may find shelter from all winds. Sailing !&^irections. From the Eastward or Westward, follow the directions before given for Isaac Harbor until about 300 yards from the Light- house. Then gradually haul to the Eastward, keeping about mid- way the Passage. "When about. J^ mile above the Lighthouse, Webb Cove will then be fairly open, and you may then run in about midway, and anchor in about 12 feet water, at Low Tide, secure from all winds. High Water, It is High Water in Isaac Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. .50 m. or 3 h. 39 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 6 feet. ISLAND HARBOR. This Harbor, which is on the Eastern side of approach to Country and Isaac Harbors, lies Northwesterly about 4 miles from Green Island Lighthouse. ■-e««f*«!!*!*wSP^ppr.cgr ^pp- 522 ELDRIDQE'S COAST PILOT. Remarks, The Anchorage in this Harbor is between the Northern part of Harbor Island and the main land. There are two passages lead- ing into it ; one to the Westward of Harbor Island, the other to the Eastward of this Island. About 5 fathoms water can be taken in at Low Tide, but there are dangers lying at the entrance of both Passages, with no leading marks or bearings to clear thera. It is therefore advisable for strangers not to attempt this Harbor without pilots. Island Harbor is somewhat exposed to !B.SE. winds, but is considered safe during the summer months. CODDLE HARBOR. The main entrance to this Harbor, which is between Coddle Island on the South and the main land on the North, lies about Zyi miles Northeasterly from Green Island Lighthouse. Revnarks, This Harbor has safe Anchorage for small vessels in from 10 to 12 feet water at Low Tide. The principal entrance is to the Eastward of Coddle Island, but the dangers in entering are too nomerous for any written directions. Strangers should on na account attempt to enter it without pilots. NEW HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is between Eastern Head on the East and New Harbor Head on the West, is about \% miles wide, and lies East-Northerly about 5J^ miles from Green Island Lighthouse, and about 5^ miles to the Westward of Tor Bay Lighthouse. Remarks, With winds from West to East by way of North there is good Anchorage in this Harbor in from 2^^ to 5 fathoms water at Low ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 623 Tide, but Southerly winds bring in heavy Sea. From the "West- eni Slide Shoal Water extends off some distance. Vessels, there- timu bound in, will keep the Eastern side best aboard. St. Cath- arlue Elver, which is very shallow, empties into New Harbor. Sailing Directions for New Harbor in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, in order to avoid Tomcod Shoals (before de^artbed), leave Green Island not more than j4 mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears North, make good the oowvm East, keeping a sharp lookout for Brandy Ledge, which lloH East 3^ miles from Green Island Lighthouse and is covered at High Water, and generally breaks with a little motion of the Boa. When this Ledge is made, leave it at least % mile on the Port hand and continue the course East about a mile. New Har- bor will then be fairly open bearing about N. by E., then run in, kseplng the Eastern side best aboard and anchor in from 3 to 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. From the Eastward, in order to avoid Gull and Shag Rocks, leave Tor Bay Lighthouse at least 1}^ miles to the Northward, and when It bears North, make good the course W. by N. about 6 milei$. New Harbor will then be fairly open, and you may then rua In, keeping the Eastern side best aboard and anchor as be- fore directed. Sigh Water. It is High Water in New Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 50 m., or 3 h. 39 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, S feet. TOR BAY. The entrance to this extensive Bay, which is between Flying Point on the East and Berry Head on the West, is about 5 miles wide, and lies about 108 miles to the Eastward of Sambro Light- houio, about 75 miles to the Eastward of Egg Island Lighthouse, 61 miles to the Eastward of Beaver Island Lighthouse, about 13 m^ 524 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. miles to the Eastward of Green Island Lighthouse, and about 18 miles to the Westward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso) . Tor Bay Ziighthouse. Upon Berry Head west side of entrance to Tor Bay, is a tower painted in White and Red Vertical Stripes, which at this date (1884) shows a Red Fixed Light to Seaward, and White into the Bay towards Molasses Qailjor. (Jreen Island Lighthouse bears from Tor Bay Light/ - ^'^. y^ S. 11>^ mi.'es ; White Head Island Lighthouse E. b^ »• H ^' ^/^ miles. I jhoal Water with Rocks extends off to the Souths *> i and also to the Eastward fron> this Lighthouse. Vessels, therefore, bound into Tor Bay should leave it at least % mile on the Port hand. Dangers in approactdng Tor Bay from the West- ward. Shag Rock, This Rock, which is 2 feet above High Water, has Shoal Water extending to the Southeastward nearly J^ mile from it. Between it and the shore, there are several Rocks which are bare at Low Tide. Tor Bay Lighthouse bears from this danger E. by N. % N. 2% miles. Gull Mock, This smaL Rock, which has deep water all round it, lies about 1^ miles to the Eastward of Shag Rock, and has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tor Bay Lighthouse benrs from this dan- ger N£. ^ E. nearly a mile. Dangers in approaching Tor Bay from the East- ward. French Rock, This Rock, which is the outermost danger in approaching Tor Bay from the Eastwaxxl, has 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tor Bay Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. by W. ^ W. 1^ miles. Bull Rocks, About ^2 mile to the Eastward of French Rock are three Rocks called Bull Rocks. These dangers lie near each other and the ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 525 Eastern Rock has but 3 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Tor Bay Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger W.NW. nearly 2 miles. Tor Bay Ledges. To the Northward and Northeastward of Bull Rocks on the Eastern side of the Channel leading into Tor Bay, there are a large number of Ledges and Islets with deep water between them, but so scattered as to leave no safe passage between them. In entering Tor Bay in night-time or thick weather, the Ledges are so bold that the lead gives but little warning in approaching them. Wehhev Shoal, This Shoal, which lies at the entrance of the Harbor, is a little more than a mile to the Northward of the Lighthouse, and extends N.NE. and S-SW. about % mile, and has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Channels lead up on both sides of it. The Channel to the Southward of it has a width of about 400 yard with 4 fathoms water in it at Low Tide, while the one to the Northward is nearly ^ mile wide, with 6 fathoms water in it. In entering Tor Bay Harbor Webber Shoal is much in the way, at Low Tide, for vessels of more than 11 feet draught. Larry Reef, This Reef, which lies on the Northern side of the Harbor, is bare at Half Tide, and extends about NW. by N. and SB- by S. nearly J^ mile. The Channel between Larry Reef and Webber Shoal is nearly ^ mile wide, with 6 fathoms water in it. Charlo Shoal, This Shoal, which extends off to the Southward nearly J^ mile from Foster Island, lies on the Northern side of the Harbor, and bears N. by E. ^ E. 2^ miles from Tor Bay Lighthouse. Vessels bound in should leave this danger well to the Northward. Remarks, Tor Bay is more than 8 miles long, and nearly 4 miles deep. The Anchorage, which is quite easy of access, is off Webber Cove in 6 fathoms water, near the Western end of the Bay, and ia said ■3^«??ffl»^:.;j5ii 526 ELDRIDGE'S COAST I'lLOT. to be secure from all winds, with good holding ground. "There are many Ledges in this Bay, but vessels, in entering, pass to the Westward of most of them. Sailing Directions for Tor Bay in Dasrtime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, when Tor Bay Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear NE. byN., and run for it on this course. When al)out Ij^ miles from it, in order to avoid the Ledges wliich extend from the Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Eastward, leaving it not less than ^ mile on the Port, and French Rock and Tor Bay Ledges (before described) well on the Starboard hand. When this Lighthouse bears W-SW., haul to the Westward, around Flat Point, which is the first to the Northward of the Lighthouse, leaving it about % mile on the Port hand, and in order to avoid Webber Shoal (before described) , run up, keeping not more than ^ mile from the Southern side, and anchor in from 4 to G fathoms water at Low Tide, with good holding ground. From the Eastward, when Tor Bay Lighthouse is made, bring it to bearNW., and run for it on this, course. When about a mile from it, haul to the Northward, passing about midway between French Rock (before described) and the Ledges which extend from the Lighthouse. When this Lighthouse bears W. SW., follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Tor Bay, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 55 m., or 3 h. 34 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. Ledge call Dangers a] able for sti The entn side of Tor house. Th( in 2 fathomi Southeaster] The entrai Tor Bay, lie house, and a Lighthouse. About 3 1 there is And the entrance without any fore advisabl COLE HARBOR. The entrance to this small Harbor, which is on the Northern side of Tor Bay, lies NE. ^ N. 3^ miles from Tor Bay Light- house. Hemarks, There is good Anchorage in Cole Harbor for small vessels, in from 2 to 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. In entering there is a The entran Island Light! on the East, miles from Tc of Cranberry ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. 527 Ledge called the Sisters, which lies nearly midway the Channel. Dangers also extend off from both sides. It is therefore advis- able for strangers bound to this Harbor to take pilots. OHARLO HARBOR. The entrance to this small Harbor, which is on the Northern side of Tor Bay, lies about N.NE. 3 miles from Tor Bay Light- house. There is good Ancliorage for small vessels in this Harbor in 2 fathoms water at Low Tide, but it is somewhat exposed to Southeasterly winds. MOLASSES HARBOR. The entrance to this Harbor, which is on the Eastern side of Tor Bay, lies about 4J/^ miles E. J^ N. from Tor Bay Light- house, and about 4 miles Northwesterly from White Head Island Lighthouse. Memarks, About 3 fathoms water can be taken into this Harbor, where there is Anchorage secure from all winds ; but as the Channel at the entrance is very narrow, with numerous dangers lying in it, without any leading marks or bearings to clear them, it is there- fore advisable for strangers bound in to employ pilots. WHITE HAVEN. The entrance to White Haven, which is between Three Top Island Lighthouse on the West and Spry Point (the main land) on the East, is about }^ mile wide, and lies East-Southerly G^ miles from Tor Bay Lighthouse, and \2% miles to the Westward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso) . 528 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. White Head Inland TAghthonse, Upon the Soutliwestorn extremity of White Head Inland (which is a little more timn ii mile Soutlieurtterly from the entnincc to "White Iliiven) in a Pyriimichil Tower wliich iit tliif* date (1884) shows a Revolvinj5 White Light wiiicli attuiiw itH greatest bril- liancy every 20 seconds. Green Island Ughtliouso l)ears from White Head Island Lighthouse W- % N. 18>4 miles ; Tor Bay Lighthouse, W- by N. ^ N. 7>^ miles. Hoimd to the Eastward or Westward, in order to avoid the dangers, vossols, should not approach nearer than a mile to White Head Island Lighthouse. Dangers in the vicinity of White Head Island Lighthouse. East Bull, This Rock, which has 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is one of the outer dangers lying off the Eastern entrance to White Haven. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. li N. about Yz mile. About yi mile to the Eastward of the Eastern Bull, is a Rocky patch having about 20 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Sculpin Hock, About half-way between Eastern Bull and the Eastern end of White Head Island is Sculpin Rock, which is dry at Low Tide. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. by W. nearly yi mile. Southwest Bull, This Rock, which is the outermost danger lying off White Head Island, has 5 feet water upon it at Low Tide. White Head Is- land Lighthouse bears from this danger NE. about ^ mile. Rocky Bottom, with from 20 to 30 feet water, extends nearly ^ mile Northwesterly from the Southwest Bull. Black Ledge, This Ledge, which is dry at Low Tide, is quite extensive and lies a short distance to the Westward of the Shag Ledges, both of which are above water. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from the outer part of Black Ledge E. ^ S. about a mile. ELDRIDOE'S C0A8T PILOT. 529 Bound into White Haven by the Western passage, this Ledge is left on the Starboard hand. Shafi Rocks, These Rocks, which are above water, lie on the Western side of the Southern approach to White Haven and about % mile to the Westward of White Head Island Lighthouse. Gammon laleta, These Islets, of which there are four, lie Northwest about % mile from White Head Island Liijhthouse, and on the Western side of the Southern approach to White Haven Bald and Gull Ledges, These Ledges, some of which are above water, extend from Deming Island, and lie on the Northern side of the Western ap- proach to White Haven. Three Top Island Lii^hthouse bears from the Southern or outer part of these dangers E.NE. ^ mile. Three Top Island Lighthouse, Upon the Southeast point of Three Top Island, Northern side of entrance to White Haven, is a White Square Wooden Build- ing, with Dwelling attached, which at this date (1884) shows a flxed White Light. White Head Island Lighthouse bears from Three Top Island Lighthouse SE. by S. l>i miles. Three Top Island Light is intended to guide vessels into White Haven. It is obstructed when bearing to the Eastward of NE. by E., but it is visible from all other points of the compass, excepting where it is intercepted by the High Land of White Head Island. ^ :N'et Mock, This Rock, which is above water, lies about 200 yards South- easterly from Three Top T^land Lighthouse. Vessels bound into White Haven may leave this danger about 200 yards on the Port hand. Itemarks, White Haven Inlet runs up to the Northeastward a little more than 3 miles from Three Top Island Lighthouse, and has suflBcient 4 530 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. depth of water for the heaviest draught vessels. It then di- vides into two parts, called the Nortlioast and Northwest Arras. On the Western side of the Inlet, about 2}{ miles aijovo 'I'hrco Top Island Lighthouse, is Marshall Cove, where veshols amy anchor in from 4 to 5 fathoms water secure from all winds. In approaching White Haven there are three passages (leading in among the Rocks and Ledges), called the Southern, Western and Eastern Passages. The latter, which has a Iloek with (! fin^t water on it lying in the middle oi the Channel, ia considered too intricate for strangers. We shall therefore only give direetious for the Southern and Western passages. Sailing Directions for White Haven in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. By the Western JPassuge, When White Head Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear E. by N- and run for it on this course until about 3 miles from it. You will then open Three Top Island Lighthouse (bctfore described). Continue the course until the, last-named Lighthouse bears NE., then run for it, passing about midway between lHauk Ledge and Gull Ledge. When about }i mile from this Light- house you will see Net Rock, which lies about 200 yards South- easterly from it. Leave this Rock about 200 yards on the I'ort hand, and run up N. by W. }( W-, carrying from 9 to 12 fath- oms water. When about 1% miles above Three Top Island Lighthouse, you will open Fisherman Island, which lies on the Elastern side. In order to avoid Kelp Shoal, which has .'I feet water upon it at Low Tide, continue the course N. by W. X W.? until the ceu:re of this Island oears NE. by N. ; then run for il on this couisc, until about 300 yards from it, tiien steer more Northerly, lea\ Ing Fisherman Island not more than 200 yards on the Starboard and Kelp Shoal well on the 1* irt hand, and carry- ing about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide through the luirrow Chan- nel. When the centre of Fisherman Island bears SE. by E. }/i E., Marshall Cove will then be fairly oi)en, and you may run NW. by "W. ^2 W., and anchor when the water shoals to I (tr 5 fathoms at Low Tide. If ])ound further up, th;re are no dan- gers for vessels of less than 20 feet d'-aught in tv.) Chanuel-wi»y until near the entrance to the Northwest arm. .P- « ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 531 Sy the Southern Passage, Vessels from the Eastward, witti Easterly winds, may, by the following directions, enter White Haven by the Southern Passage. Keep outside the East Bull (before described) until White Head Lighthouse bears N.NW- Then run for it on this course until about ^ mile from it. Then steer more AVesterly, and haul round the Lighthouse Point at a distance of 2i^)0 yards, leaving it on the Starboard hand. When past this Point, the Passage leading in between White Head Island and the Gammon Islets will then be fairly open, bearing about N. by E. Then run in, keeping the Starboard side best aboard, carrying from 8 to 14 fathoms water. When Three Top Island Lighthouse bears NW- by W- , then run for it on this course until about J^ mile from it. Then follow the directions before give High Water, It is High Water in White Haven Inlet, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, 8 h. m., or 3 h. 29 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^4 feet. PORT HOWE. The enti'ance to Port Howe, which is between Howe Point on the East and Fluid Point on the West, is nearly J^ mile wide, and lies East-Northerly about 3^ miles from While Head Island Lighthouse, and West-Southerly about 9 miles from Cranberry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso) . Memarks, There is good Anchorage, with all winds, in the small Bay called Port Howe, but the approaches are rendered somewhat difficult on account of the numerous Shoals which lie on both sides. About 4 fathoms water, on a direct line, can be taken into this place at Low Tide. On the Western side of the entrance la Black Rock, which is 4 feet above High Water. I n 532 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Sailing Directions for Fort Howe in Da3rtime> with favorable winds and fair weather. * From the "Westward, in order to clear the East and West Bulls, leave White Head Island about a mile on the Port hand, and when the Lighthouse bears N., make good the course E. J^ N. about 3^ miles, leaving the Vache Shoals and Ledges, some of which are bare at Low Tide, well on the Port hand. The entrance to I'ort Howe will then be fairly open, bearing about N. Bring Fluid Point, which is 30 feet high, and lies on the Western side of the entrance, to bear N. by W., and run for it on this course, pass- ing about midway between Whale and Snorting Rocks. The former is bare at Low Tide ; the latter is always above water. As you sail in, you will see Black Rock, which is small, and lies about 300 yards Southeasterly from Fluid Point. Leave this Rock about 200 yards on the Port hand, and when it bears W-, haul up about N. by W. , and anchor to the Northward of Port Island, which is the first on the Starboard hand, in about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide ; or when the West end of the last- named Island bears SB- }i E-, then run NW. % W., and anchor in the Western arm, iu about 7 fathoms water. From the Eastward, as soon as White Head Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear W. by N., and run for it on this course until about 3^ miles from it. The entrance to Port Howe will then be fairly open. Bring Fluid Point (the Western side of entrance) to bear N. by W-, and follow the directions before given. High Water, It is High Water in Port Howe, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 8 h. m., or 3 h. 29 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 5^ feet. DOVER BAY. The entrance to this Bay, which is between White Point on the East and Dover Head on the West, is about 2^ miles-wide, and lies about 6 miles to the Eastward of White Head Island Light- house, and about 6 miles to the Westward of Cranbe.ry Island Lighthouse (Cape Canso). ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 533 Remarks* Ledges extend off to the Southward nearly ^ »nile from White Point (the Eastern side of entrance to Dover Bay) , and there are dangers which lie off more than % mile to the Southward and Eastward of Dover Head, which is on the Western side of the entrance — the Home and Lumsden Shoals. The former, which has 18 feet water upon it, lies nearly in the middle, while the latter, with 12 feet water upon it, lies on the Eastern side. Both these dangers lie a little more than a mile above the entrance. This Bay, which has a depth of from 10 to 14 fathoms water, is exposed to Southerly winds. Shelter, however, may be found near the Head, among the numerous Ledges and Islets, but as there are no leading marks or bearings to clear these dangers, it is advisable for strangers not to attempt to enter it without pilots. LOUSE HARBOR. The entrance to this small Harbor, which is between Louse Head on the North and Louse Island on the South, is about % mile wide, and lies on the Western side of Dover Bay, about 1^ miles above Dover Head. Remarks, In louse Harbor small vessels may find good shelter from all winds. About 22 feet water, at Low Tide, can be taken in to the Northward of Louse Island, but the winding Channel nearly opposite the High Bluff on the Northern side is not more than 80 yards wide. It is therefore advisable for strangers bound in to employ pilots. OANSO HARBOR. The approach to this Harbor from the Southward, which is be- tween Cranberry Island on the East and Cape Canso, the Eastern extremity of Nova Scotia, on the West, is about 1% miles wide, and lies about 120 miles to the Eastward of Sambro Lighthouse, Western side of entrance to Halifax Harbor. 5U ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Cranberry Island Lighthouse, Upon Cranberry Island, which is about 1 % miles to the North- eastward of Cape Canso, is a Tower with Dwelling attached. The Tower is 78 feet high from the ground to the Lantern Vane, is Octagonal in shape, 48 feet above the roof of the dwelling, and is painted in Red and White Horizontal Bands, the dwelling at- tached being of a dark color. At this date (1884) this Light- house shows two fixed White Lights, one above the other. Shoal Water extends oflf a considerable distance in every direction from Cranberry Island Lighthouse, and there are also many outlying dangers in this vicinity. Canso Marhor Lighthouse, Upon the Northeast side of Hart Island, West side of the Northern entrance to Canso Harbor, is a White Square Wooden Building, which at this date (1884) shows a fixed Red Light. Dangers in approaching Canso Harbor from, the Westward. Gannet Shoal, ' This danger, which consists of several Spots, having in one ^^lace as little as 9 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies ubout one mile to the Eastward of White Point ; o^' •^'' Rocks lie to the Northward of it, off Madeline J\)int and nx i<:^: entrance of Little Dover Run. Cranberry Island Lighthouse kept open to the Eas t- ward of the trees on Cape Cunso, bearing NE. J^ N., clears the Gannet Shoal, White Point Ledges and White Rock. Gannet Ledges, The outermost of these dangers, which have but little water upon them at Low Tide, extends off Southeast nearly a mile from Gannet Point, the Southern extremity of Andrew Island. Cran- berry Island Lighthouse l^ears from the outer part of these dan- jjers NJE. by If. ]^ N. -3 miles. Vessels fro'n the Westward, bound to Cfiijso Harbor, should give the Gannet Rocks a wide berth. Boom Rock, Th'i Rock, which has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies abouo ).v ''^''i*' to the Eastward of the Gannet Ledges. Cranberry ..ijiei ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 535 Island Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. J^ E. about 2^ miles. Between Boom Rock and Gannet Ledges there is a Channel nearly ^ mile wide, having from 7 to 12 fathoms water in it. Moaring Bull. This dangerous Rock, which has but 2 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies a little more than J^ mile Southeasterly from Cape Canso. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. J^ E. If^ miles. Between the Roaring Bull and the Rocks off Cape Canso there is a Channel a little more than % mile wide, having from 8 to 10 fathoms water in it. Cape Breaker, This Rocky Shoal, which lies Southeasterly about a mile from Cape Canso, has 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger North 1^^ miles. Between the Cape Breaker and Roaring Bull there is a Channel about Yi mile wide, having froi- 5 to 7 fathoms water in it. Heeper Reef, This Reef, which lies % niile Northwesterly from the Cape Breaker, has about 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cran- berry Island Lighthouse bears from this danger N. by E. 1% miles. Stanley Shoals, These are 4 Spots lying nearly in the middle of the Southern approach to Canso Harbor. The two Northwestern Shoals, which lie }^ mile apart, have 24 feet water upon them, while the two Southeasternmost have 30 feet water on them. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of these dangers N.NW. Ij^ miles. Dangers in approaching Canso Harbor from the Eastward. Grime Rock, This Rock, wlich has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is the outermost danger in approaching Canso Harbor from the East- ward. Cnivibocry Island Lighthouse bears from this danger W- by S. J-^ %-'iyii tuiies. ii 636 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Whistling Buoy, In order to warn vessels in thick weather of the approach to the dangers Lying to the Eastward of Cape Canso, a Whistling Buoy has been placed in 20 fathoms water E.SE. Ij4 miles from Grime Rock. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from this Buoy W. 3^ miles. Bass Mock. This danger, which lies about ^ mile Southwest from Grime Bock, has 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from it W. ^ S. 2% miles. From J^ to ^ mile Southwesterly from Bass Rock there are several Spots hav- ing from 24 to 30 feet water upon them. . Middle Rock. This danger, which has 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, lies a little more than a mi'e W-NW. from Bass Rock. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from Middle Rock SW. by W. J4 W. 1^ miles. Inner Bass, This Rocky Ledge, which lies but a short distance Northwest- erly from Middle Rock, extends nearly J^ mile N. by E. and S. by W., and has but little watej' upon its Southern part at Low Tide. Cranberry Ivsland Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger SW. about 1>^ miles. Kelp Bocks, These three Ro'iks, which lie a little more than J^ mile North- westerly from the Inner Bass, are about 200 yards apart and have from 12 to i"> feet ivucer upon them. Cranberry Island Light- house bears from tku certre of these dangers S.SW. about IJ^ miles. Broad Shoal, This Rocky Shoal, which lies a little more than -/i mile to the Southwai''. of the Inter Bass, is about 250 yards in extent and has from 9 to 18 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears tvoxu. the centre of this danger W-SW. about yi mile. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 637 Fanning Hock, This Is a Rocky Shoal about 200 yards in extent, lying nearly }i mllo E. 5^. N. from Cranberry Island Lighthouse. There is 0. narrow Channel of 6 fathoms water between this danger and the Shoals extending off to the Eastward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse. Scott Rock, This Rocky Shoal, which has 8 feet water upon it at Low Tide, haisi an extent of about 150 yards, and lies about Yz mile to the Southward of Fanning Rock. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger W.NW. a little more than \i mile. There is a narrow Channel having 5 fathoms water in it between this Rock and the Shoals which extend off to the East- ward of the Lighthouse. Nickeraon Mock, This danger, which has 24 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is small In extent, and lies to the Southeastward of Cranberry Is- land. The Lighthouse upon this Island bears NW. from it IJ^ miles. David Bock, This Rocky Shoal, which lies nearly midway between Nicker- lon Rook and Cranberry Island Lighthouse, has 12 feet water «pon It at Low Tide. CranbeiTy Island Lighthouse bears from this danger NW. 5^ N. about ^ mile. Between David and Nlokerson Rocks there is a Channel nearly j4 mile wide, having from 10 to 13 fathoms in it. Washball Mock, This Rock, which is bare at Low Tide, lies nearly }( mile to the Westward of David Rock. Cranberry Island Lighthouse boars from Washball Rock NW- by N. ^ N- about ^ mile. Shottl Water with Scattering Rocks extends from Cranberry Island to the Washball Rock. Vessels should not, therefore, attempt to pass within it. IHnk Mock, This Rock, which lies West-Northerly nearly }4 mile from the Washball Rock, has 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cran- 538 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. berry Islaud Lighthouse bears from this danger N. ^ E- about Yi mile. Vessels should not pass between this Rock and the Lighthouse. Both the Pink and Washball Rocks lie on the Northeastern side of the Channel, and break with a little motion of the Sea. Dangers in entering Canso Harbor by the South- ern Passage. Kirby Rocks* This Rock, which is on the Western side of the entrance to Canso Harbor, lies a little mo'-c that ^ mile East-Northerly from Cape Canso, and has about 14 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from this danger N£i. by N. a little more than a mile. Then is a narrow Passage between Kirby Rock and Cape Canso with 4 fathoms water in it at Low Tide. Black Mocks, These two small Rocks, which are on the "Western side of the Ship Channel leading into Canso Harbor, are above High Water, and lie about 400 yards apart on a bearing of nearly North and South. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from the Southern Black Rock "JfLNE- a little more than ^ mile. Between the Shoal Water which extends off from Glasgow Head and the Black Rocks there is a Channel nearly yi mile wide with 6 fathoms water in it. Bootes Bank, This Shoal, which is about ^ mile to the Northward of the Northern Black Rock, extends nearly North and South J-S mile, and has from 6 to 15 feet water upon it at Low Tide, with an average width of about 300 yards. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger E. by S- about a mile. Be- tween Bootes Bank and Glasgow Head thei'e is a Channel about 400 yards wide, having about G fathoms water in it at Low Tide. There is also a Channel about 400 yards wide between the North- ern Black Rock and the Southern end of the Bootes Bank, with 3 fathoms water in it. ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 530 Man of War Mock, This danger, which cover at Half Tide, lies on the Western side of the Ship Channel, in entering Canso Harbor. Cran- berry Island Lighthouse bears from this Rock SE. by E. ^ E. about a mile. Vessels may approach this Rock on its Eastern side within 150 yards without danger, but Shoal Water extends W.NW. nearly ^ mile from it. There is a good Channel be- tween Man of War Rock and the Western shore with deep water in it. There is also a narrow Channel between the Northern part of Bootes Bank and Man of War Rock with 5 fathoms water in it. Mackerel Mock, This danger, which has 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide, is about 150 yards in extent, and lies nearly midway the Ship Chan- nel leading into Canso Harbor. Cranberry Island Lighthouse bears from this Rock SE.byE. }( £• 1>^ miles nearly; Bea- con on Grave Island (Western side of entrance to Canso Har- bor) NW. a little more than a mile. The highest part of a Small Island with Red Cliff 50 feet high bears NE. distant a little more than J^S naile from this Rock. Vessels bound in should not ap- proach nearer to this Rock on its Eastern side than 5 fathoms water. Channels lead up on both sides of the Mackerel Rock, but the one to the Eastward of it is considered the best for strangers. There is also a Channel J^ mile wide between Man of War Rock and Mackerel Rock, with 8 fathoms water in it. Grassy Meef, This Reef, which is bare in some places at Low Tide, extends off Southeast nearly }( mile from Grassy Island, which is on the Northeastern side of the Channel leading into Canso Harbor. The Channel between the outer part of this Reef and Mackerel Rock is nearly ^ mile wide, with 7 fathoms water in it. South Shoal, This Shoal, which has from 4 to 7 feet water upon it at Low Tide, extends off Northeasterly about ji mile from the Western side of the Southern entrance to Canso Harbor. Mackerel Rock boars from tlio outer end of this danger, SE- by E. }4 E. nearly u 540 ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Yi mile. Vessels, ia beating in, should be careful to avoid Grassy lleef and the South Shoal. Canso Harbor is well sheltered from all winds, and has a suffi- cient depth of water in both the Northern and Southern entrances for the heiiviest draught vosstld. In approaching this Harbor, with a, rough sea, the numerous dangers show themselves, but with smooth water the utmost caution is necessary for strangers. In thick weather the constant use of the lead should be deemed indispensable. Sailing Directions for Canso Harbor, by the South- ern Passage, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, keep outside all the dangers before described, until Cranberry Island Lighthouse is made. Then bring it to bear N. by W-, and run for it on this course, leaving the Cape Breaker and tlie Rock called the Roaring Bull both well on the Port hand. Continue the course N- by W- for the Light- house until about 1 %, miles from it. You will then see on the Port, the Black Rocks, which are above High Water. When the Northern Black Rock bears N W. , then run for it on this course until about J^ mile from it. Then steer for a small Island, 50 feet high, with Red Cliffs, bearing N. by W- Vz W-, leaving Man of War Rock (before described) well on the Port hand. Continue the course N. by W. J^ W- for the Island until Cran- berry Island Lighthouse bears SE. by E. ; then make good the course NW. by W. If there is no error in the compass, the Mackerel Rock (which has 10 feet water upon it at Low Tide) will be left about 200 yards on the Port hand. It would bo well, however, to use the lead on this last course, and not approach this Rock nearer than 5 fathoms water at Low Tide. When the small Island before mentioned, with Red Cliffs on its Southern side, bears E-NE., you are then past the Mackerel Rock, and there will be seen, about a mile to the Northwestward, on the Southern side of the entrance to Canso Harbor, a small Island with a Beacon upon it. When this Beacon bears NW. , run for it on this course, and haul round it at a distance of 200 yai'ds, ELDRIDGES COAST PILOT. 541 leaving it on the Port hand, and anchor in about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide, with the Beacon on the Island bearing SE. 400 ^ards distant. By the Western Channel, From the Westward, when Cranberry Island Lighthouse is made, bring it to bear N. yi W., and run for it on this course, leaving the Rock called the Roarmg Bull and Cape Breaker both well on the Port hand. "When a little more than a mile from the Lighthouse, you will see the Black Rocks, which are above High Water. When the Southern of these Rocks bears NW-, then run for it on this course, leaving Kirby Rock well on the Port hand. When about ^ mile from the Southern Black Rock, gradually haul to the Westward, and leave it about 300 yards on the Starboard hand. When this Rock bears E., make good the course NN.W., leaving the Northern Black Rock, Bootes Bank, Man of War Rock and Mackerel Rock all well on the Starboard, and Glasgow Head Shoal and South Shoal both well on the Port hand. When the Beacon on Grave Island bears NW-, then run for it on this course, and follow the directions before given. From the Eastward, when the Whistling Buoy is made, leave it close to on the Starboard hand, and make good the eosrse SW- byW. yi W-, until Cranberi-y Island Lighthouse bears NW. by N. Then run for the Northern Black Rock, bearing NW. by W-, leaving the Washball and Pink Rocks (before described) well on the Starboard hand. When about ]^ mile from the Northern Black Rock, steer for a small Island, .')0 feet high, with Red Cliffs, bearing N. by W. Yz W- and follow the directions before given. By the Northern Passage, With winds from East to West by way of North, vessels from the Eastward will find this Channel the best to enter Canso Harbor. , Sailing Directions, Having made the Whistling Buoy, leave it about ^ mile on the Port hand, and when it bears S., haul up NW. by W- yi W., leaving Grime Rock, Inner Bass and Derabie Islands (the latter of which are quite bold on their Northern part) well on the Port hand. When the Lighthouse on Hart Island bears S., the narrow Passage leading into Canso Harbor will then be open, and you >:? ^>. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 4 A f/. 1.0 I.I ■ JO "^™ 2.5 •^ 1^ 1 2.2 lis lill^ 1.8 Its L25 III U III L6 Hiotographic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ^ m \ \ 1^^ ^ '•fe v^^4p «^ 542 ELDRIDOB'S COAST PILOT. may run for the Lighthouse on this last bearing, leaving the Net Rocks (which are bare at }( Ebb) and Whitmans Rock (which has 2 feet water upon it at Low Tide) on the Starboard, and Bald Reef and Bald Rook well on the Port hand. When about 250 yards from the Lighthouse, steer mo:*e Easterly, keeping midway the Passage. When the Beacons on Lanigan Hill and Grave Island are in line, bearing S* ^ Wm ^^Q 'un in on this range, leaving Starling Rock (which has 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide) on the Port hand. When well past the Southern Point, on which the Lighthouse stands, haul in, and anchor in about 7 fathoms water, with the Beacon on Grave Island bearing SE. 400 yards distant. High Water* It is High Water in Ganso Harbor, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 7 h. 48 m., or 8 h. 41 m. before it is at Boston. Mean xise and fall of Tides, 6^ feet GLASaOW HABBOK. The entrance to this Harbor (which is on the Western side of the approach to Ganso Harbor) , is between Glasgow Head on the North and Barse Point on the South, and is about }i mile wide, and lies about 1^ miles to the Westward of Cranberry Is- land Lighthouse. Memarks, There are two Passages leading into this Harbor ; the Western, which is a little more than 2 miles to the Westward of Cape Can- so, is called the Andrew Passage. There are several Rocks lying in mid-channel in this Passage. Strangers should not, therefore, attempt to pass through it without pilots. The East- ern Passage has a Rock lying nearly in mid-channel with 6 feet water upon it at Low Tide. The Southern Black Rock bears from this danger E are no dangers excepting those which lie near the shores. There are several places in this Gut where good Anchorage may be found for small vessels, and large vessels may find good Anchor- age in Ship Harbor, now called Port Hawksbury. Sailing Directions for Out of Canso, in Daytime, with favorable winds and fair weather. From the Westward, leave the Whistling Buoy to the Eastward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse close to on either hand, and make good the course NW. ^ N., keeping a sharp lookout for the Red Buoy off the Southern part of Cerberus Rock (before de- scribed) . This last-named Buoy bears from the Whistling Buoy NW. ^ N. 13 miles. When the Red Buoy off Cerberus Rock is made, leave it about }{ mile on the Starboard hand, and con- tinue the course NW. ^ N., leaving the Black Buoy off Eddy Point Lighthouse a short distance on the Port hand, and steer about NW. J4 N. When past Bear Head, which is on the East- ern side, and lies abont 2 miles to the Northward of Eddy Point Lighthouse, then keep midway, and pass through the Gut of Canso. Vessels wishing to pass to the Westward of Cranberry Island Lighthouse and George Islands, may follow the directions before given for Canso Harbor until past Grave Island. Then, in order to avoid Starling Rocl< ""hich has 4 feet water upon it at Low Tide, bring the Beacons on this last-mentioned Island and Lani- gan Hill in range, bearing S. ^ W., and run with them in range until abreast the Southern end of Hart Island. Then keep mid- way the Passage until Hart Island Lighthouse bears S. Then make good the coarse N., leaving Bald Rock and Bald Reef on the Starboard, and Whitman's Rock and Net Rocks (the latter of which are bare at }( Ebb) on the Port hand. When past the last-named Rocks, make good the com-se N-NW., leaving the Red Buoy off Cerberus Rock well on the Starboard hand. When about 3 miles from Eddy Point Lighthouse, haul gradually to the Northward, leaving the Black Buoy off this Point a short distance on the Port hand, and follow the directions before given. Beating through the Gut of Canso. In beating through the Gut of Canso, in order to avoid Ship Eock, Dixon Rock, Balache Rock, Cahil Rock and Madagascar 546 ELDBIDGE'S COAST PILOT. Rock, do not approach either side nearer than 850 yards. The three first-named Rocks lie on the Eastern side, and the other two on the Western side. None of these Rocks lie more than 200 yards from shore. SHIP HARBOR, OR PORT HAWKS- BURY. This fine Harbor, which is on the Eastern side of Gat of Canso, lies Northwesterly about 1% miles from Eddy Point Lighthouse, and Southwesterly about 7 miles from North Canso Lighthouse. iBevnarka* Ship Harbor is nearly ^ mile in length, and has an average width of ubout ^ mile. About 24 feet water, at Low Tide, can be carried in past the Lighthouse, and 18 feet can be taken up near the Head. Dangers in entering Ship Harbor. The only danger in entering Ship Harbor, excepting those lying near the shores, is Premier Shoal, which ties nearly midway the entrance, and has 12 feet water upon it at Low Tide. Ship Har- bor Lighthouse bears from the centre of this danger SW. by W. about 400 yards. Channels with not less than 24 feet water, lead in on both sides of this Shoal, but the Channel to the Northward of this Rock is the widest. Sailing Directions for Ship Harbor. Vessels of rot more than 11 feet draught, bound to Ship Har- bor may follow the directions before given for Gut of Canso until the Harbor is fairly open. Then run in about midway, and anchor iu from 3 to 4 fathoms water at Low Tide. In order to avoid Premier Shoal, vessels of more than 11 feet di*aught, at Low Tide, should leave the Lighthouse about ^ mile on the Star- board hand, and steer E.NS. until about 300 yards from the Northeastern side of the Harbor. Then run up, and anchor in about 4 fathoms at Low Tide. , * ELDBIDQE'S COASf PILOT. 647 PIRATE OOVE, OR PORT MULQRAVB. The entrance to this small Cove, which is on the Western side of the Gut of Canso, lies about IJ^ miles Southwesterly from Ship Harbor Lighthouse. Small vessels may, when the Cove is fakly open, run in, and anchor near the Mouth, to the North- westward of Pirate Island, in about 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. MAONAIR OOVE. This shallow Cove, which is on the Western side of Gut of Canso, lies nearly oppooite Ship Harbor. Small vessels may anchor in this Cove, in about 3 fathoms water at Low Tide. PORT HASTINGS, OR PLAISTER OOVE. This Fort, which is on the Eastern side of Gut of Canso, lies 2j4 miles to the Northward of Ship Harbor Lighthouse, and has anchorage in from 5 to 7 fathoms water at Low Tide. Vessels bound out or into Fort Hastings, should be careful to avoid Dixon Bock, which lies on the Northern side of entrance. Submarine cables cross the Gut of Canso at Fort Hastings, and direction boards are placed to warn vessels not to anchor in this vicinity. High Water, It is High Water at Fort Hawksbury, East side of Gut of Canso, on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, at 9 h. 10 m., or ^ h. 19 m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, 4 feet. 5:^ ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. Currents, After strong Northwesterly winds the Current runs to the Northward through the Gut of Canso, from 4 to 5 knots, and after strong Southerly winds it sets through to the Southward, with about the same strength and velocity. SABLE ISLAND. This Island, which is almost entirely composed of White Sand, extends about E- by S. ]^ S. and W- by N. >^ N. 17 miles, and is about a mile broa(^ in its middle. In the interior of the Is- land is a Salt Lake which commences near the Western end and is about 12 miles long. Sable Island Lighthouse (West End), Upon the Western end of Sable Island, in Lat. 43° 57' N. and Long. 60° 08' W., is a White Octagonal Building elevated 123 feet above the level of the sea. At this date (1884) this Light- house shows a Revolving White Light, which gives three flashes at intervals of half a minute, and is then eclipsed during 1^ minutes, making a total revolution in 3 minutes. This Light should be seen from the deck of a common vessel in clear weather about 17 miles. Sarabro Ligbthouse boars from the Lighthouse on the Western end of Sable Island NW. by W. 145 miles. Cranberry Isls,nd Lighthouse North 89 miles, Lighthouse on East end of Sable Island £. by S. Y? S. 15^^ miles. Sable Island Lighthouse (East End), About IJ^ miles from the Eastern end of Sable Island, in Lat. 43°58J^' N., and Long. 59° 4G' Wm is an Octagonal Tower painted in White and Brown. This Lighthouse, which is ele- vated 128 feet above the level of the sea,, shows a fixed White Light, which in clear weather should be visible from the deck of a common vessel about 17 miles. Sambro Lighthouse bears from the Lighthouse on the Eastern end of Sable Island NW. by Tl W. 9^ byN. The miles f ually d there w These I of ve8S( to the In bad ^ the Wes ally sho TheN Sand lli E.NE. to the i fathoms. Hills, thi rough w( upon the th.it hav< breaks s( ELDRIDGE'S COAST PILOT. 549 by W. % W. 160 miles, Cranberry Island Lighthouse N. ^ W. 94 miles, Lighthouse on the West end of Sable Island W. by N. J4 N. l^Yt miles. Northwest Bar, The outer part of this Bar, which lies Northwesterly about 22 miles from the Western end of Sable Island, runs off about NW. J4 N. 12 miles, thenoe W-NW. about 10 miles, and then grad- ually deepens to 20 fathoms vater. In 1851, this danger was dry 54 mile from the Western end of the Grass v Sand Hills, and there were several patches of sand nearly dry lile further out. These last are supposed to have accumulated ..^ound the wrecks of vessels \fhich have been lost. Beyond the last-named patchea to the outer lump of 10 fathoms, there are from 4 to 12 fathoms. In bad weather the sea upon this Bar breaks nearly 10 miles from the Western end of the Island, and the remaining 12 miles usu* ally shows u large ripple or heavy cross-sea. Northeast Bar, The Northeast Bar extends out nearly 17 miles from the Grassy Sand Hills to the depth of 10 fathoms. Its direction is about E.NE. for the first 7>^ miles ; beyond this it gradually curves to the E.SEl.t and from its outer part deepens suddenly to 170 fathoms. This Bar is dry about 4 miles without the Grassy Sand Hills, the sea washing over the outer half of that distance only in rough weather. There are on this Bar sand hills with some grass. upon them which hatre accumulated around the wrecks of vessels thit have been lost upon it. The sea in heavy weather generally breaks some 8 or 10 miles without the dry part. Currents, The current of Ebb runs to the Southward across both the Northwest and Northeast Bars, at the rate of from 1^ tx> 2 miles an hour, and with strong Northerly winds, the current of Flood is much weaker in an opposite du'action. On account of the influence of winds, the Currents in the vicin- ity of Sable Island are strong and u-regular, but the general ten- dency is weU known to be to the Westward. Vessels find no difficulty in beating to the Westward anywhere to the Northward 550 ELDRIDOE'S COAST PILOT. of tho Gulf Stream, and henco it is that many of the vessels wrecked on this Island supposed that they were well to the East- ward of it. Soundings in approaching Sable Island. In thick weather vessels should not approach the Southern side in le^s than 20 fathoms water, and the Northern side in less than 30 fathoms. Both the Northeast and Northwest Bars are very steep on their Northern sides, especially the Northeast Bar, which has 30 fathoms water close to it ; on the contrary, on the Southern sides of both these Bars, the water deepens gradually for miles, and it appears almost impossible for vessels using the lead, to run ashore on the Southern side of this Island, or its Bars. Anchorage under Sable Island* Upon the Northern side of Sable Island, excepting near the Eastern part where the Deep Water is close to land, there is good Anchorage with winds off shore in from 5 to 10 fathoms, sandy bottom. A strict watch, however, should be kept and the Is- land should be left on the first indication of an on-shore wind. Remarks, In 1852 the principal establishment on Sable Island was situ- ated on the North side, between the Pond and Sand Hills, and consisted of a House for the Superintendent and his family and several other buildings. Opposite the house was the Western Flag-staff, which was strongly and substantially erected on a Sand Hill 40 feet high. On the top of this Flag-staff was a Crow's Nest or lookout, elevated 100 feet above the level of the sea. About 7 miles to the Eastward of the Superintendent's House, near the Eastern end of the Salt Lake, is another Flag-staff, the top of which can be seen over the Sand Hills. The Eastern Flag- staff was located on a Sand Hill about 4^ miles to the Westward of where the Eastern Lighthouse now stands. At this date (1884) the British Government give notice that the establishment on Sable Island consists of a Superintendent and ten Assistants, also with abundance of stores and provisions for the relief of shipwrecked mariners. BLDBIDOE'S COAST PILOT. 551 High Water, It 1b High Water on the days of the Full and Change of the Moon, on the Northern side of Sable Island, at 7 h. 80 m., or 4h. m. before it is at Boston. Mean rise and fall of Tides, aboutiiB feet. On the South side of this Island it is High Water about an hour earlier. The current of Ebb sets to the Southward over the Bars from 1^ to 2 miles an hour, the Flood at a much less rate in an opposite dbrection. With fe I Several 1 Our Windla-sses small BY on Approved t AMERI w I Established 186T. IMPROVED METHODS or XXaiidlinir ^noliors and Oliaina, With fewei men, in leia time, and eanier than by any other arrangement, by the use of our I IN U8B UPON Several Thousand First-ClasH Steamers and Sailing Vessels. Our Windlasses iim not confined to liiri;o vessels, hut are equally adapted to all sizes, small as well as large. These Windlasses are the only successful Iron Windlasses ever brought out in this country, having been tested thoroughly By OVER TWENTY-FIVE YEARS CONSTANT USE, Approved by Underwriters, Owners, Masters and Builders. MANUFACTURED BY THE AMERICAN SHIP WINDLASS COMFY, WATERMAN AND EAST RIVER STREETS, PROYIDENCE, R. I. A,J FRANK S. MANTON, AGENT. (X) fe 1% \'^ '\ f / * THE "PROVIDENCE" CAPSTAN WINDLASS. Patented Feb. 17, 1874, March 21, April 18, 1876, March 27, Nov. 13, 1877, June 25, Doc. 3 and 17, 1878, June 1, 1880, Feb. 8 and 15, 1881. American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, K. I. (2) The cut on the opposite page repr jnts our " Providence " Capstan Windlass. We have named it the "Providence" Capstan Windlass, to distinguish it from the old-fashioned style, called the " Emerson " Windlass, which had none of our recent improvements. This is the only windlass made that has a capstan with a single head that can operate the windlass, and has double power as an independent capstan, two heads being objectionable and inconvenient. Our Locking Gear is so constructed as to avoid all trouble in locking, as .he head need not agree exactly with the wild cat to enable the block key to lock, the opening being much larger than the key. It is stronger than any other slyle, as the key takes the strain endways instead of crossways, and is also more convenient, as is shown by the numerous imitations, none of which equal the original. .^^ The Patent Deck Centre Bearing holds the shaft firmly in place and prevents springing and breaking of the gears. The straight clearing guard being bolted to the deck, is much easier set and much stronger and mo'-e effectual than the old style. The Pawl Lifter is a great convenience, also the patent device for turning the wild cat, and the Deck Pipe is simple and never allows the shackles to catch and foul the chain, though set well forward to carry the chain under the wild cat, and is as easily caulked as the old style. We have repeatedly increased the sizes of the shafts and thickness of the castings on the different sizes of windlasses, with a view if possible of prevent- ing breakdowns — the result is shown by the extremely small number of ac- cidents to our windlasses, notwithstanding the great number in use. While retaining all these advantages of construction, of material and workmanship, we shall endeavor to keep the price as low as is consistent with these qualities. We would call attention to the class of vessels that use our windlasses, as it will be found that the majority that require the best outfits, and the best labor- saving appliances, have them. (3) CO CO S . Q ffl Oh Oh tf O ;i3 CS n S o O SO 4 (A S i5 * C o K CO o s (1) M IN ciS The cut style of Wir we would ca The chea] windlass witl have a totall Instead oi ratchet whee strong and n clown. With the ( was such a d there is abso lass would ta rim pump bi and very ligh Norway iron usual thing tc the cheap ire windlasses, than any oth< The Locki cat and heac styles, and as out. Our C old-fashioned very conveni simple and cc By building ing rough as gun iron and stock in the v ever, that it v gation of the; nothing more generally four our windlass other styles, t (1) The cut on the opposit » page represents our Pump Brake Windlass ; as this style of Windlass is peculiar and different from any other style in the market, we would call especial attention to the advantages which it possesses. The cheap Pump Brakes on the market are simply a copy of the old wood windlass with wild cats added in place of the wood barrels ; in our windlass we have a totally different method of communicating power. Instead of the old-fashioned ratchets and rims, we have substituted a single ratchet wheel which also answers for the pawl wheel ; it is made very solid and strong and none of this style of wheel has ever been known to give out or break down. With the old style of ratchet and rims there is still all the lost motion, which was such a disadvantage on the old wood windlass ; with our pawl arrangement there is absolutely no lost motion, so that, other things being equal, our wind- lass would take an anchor in two-thirds the time required with the ratchet and rim pump brakes. While the ratchet and rim arrangement is all of cast iron and very light, our clamps are made of heavy gun iron, and the pawls of forged Norway iron, capable of outlasting the vessel in all cases. As it was no un- usual thing to have to replace the ratchets and rims in the wood windlass, so in the cheap iron windlasses — they cannot be as durable as the arrangement on our windlasses. Using only one wheel the windlass is more simple and compact than any other style. The Locking Gear is so constructed that it is not necessary to have the wild cat and head agree exactly before the locking block will enter as in the other styles, and as in the old hand block key, before our locking gear was brought out. Our Clearing Guards and Deck Pipes we believe to be superior to the old-fashioned kind, and the sockets, for throwing the wild cat over with lever, very convenient ; the method also of changing from power to speed is very simple and convenient. By building the windlass without turning the ratchet wheel, leaving the cast- ing rough as it comes from the foundry, by substituting ordinary cast iron for gun iron and for Norway iron forgings, and by cutting down the amount of stock in the windlass, we could materially decrease the price ; we believe, how- ever, that it would also make it less durable, reliable and efficient. An investi- gation of these facts is requested of those intending to purchase. There is nothing more important on ship-board than a good windlass, and the best is generally found to be the cheapest in the end. The strength and durability of our windlass is shown by the small number of breakdowns, compared with other styles, though we have such an immense number in use. (6) hi M t^ "^ ^ ^^^^B Vi^^BfiHHHHUI^^Hlllllllt^ I windlasses :^ g g ^.:% ^^^BIl^^HBlH^^^^n^Hlflliiiilllliii; ^ ■ i-endering ^ ^ ^ I " iflB^^SafllB^HII ill ' ^ ■ TV, • ^^ " ^ - '- ^i^^^B^a^^^^^^^^^^i^^^»i^ra««i iiiiiiijfl ^ /rom ^two O i ^ J^ J /IBM MinnHB^ W^^Tt^mBM « ■ and is ah w have more It is eas when requ ^ C! I .« \ ^^Hi^^^^^Hll^H^^Hilllii'liJiiJi ■ gaining a With thi time requii and no los (G> 'W^OOD M/'INDLASS, WITH OUR PATENTED PUMP-BRAKE ATTACHMENT. In order to accommodate those who prefer to use the "Wood Wind- lass," we have adapted our patented improvements upon pump-brake windlasses to the Wood Windlass, as shown upon the next page, thereby rendering it supei'ior to any wood windlass heretofore used. These improvements consist in reducing the distance between the bitts from two to four feet, for each windlass, as we dispense with two of the ratchet wheels which were necessar}- upon this class of windlasses, and is also worked from the after side of pawl-bitt, whereby the men have more room for working the brakes. It is easilj' and quickly changed from speed to power, or vice versa, when required, by simply loosening the handle nut and sliding the bolt and connection in the groove towards the centre of the vessel, thereby gaining a ratio of 3 to 1. With this windlass anchors and chains can be taken in one half the time required with the ordinary wood windlass, there being little friction and no lost motion. (7) (Pa SHII £^L (S) THE "PROVIDENCE" Flush Bi€k Wihblas! (Patented Mirch 21, 1876, Nov. 13, 1877, Dec. 17, 1878, June 1, 1880, Feb. 8 and 15, 1881,) MANl'FAC TrUKl) HY THE CO ^ 2 •J O ^ AMERICAN SHIP ^VINDLASS COMPANY, This Windlass is especially adapted to work as a On Yachts, Small Steamers, Revenue Cutters, etc. (9) VM wssRS ■mmm ssss sssss jissss s^sss^?k isisi Trmm. -wm. z^f^. ^m gs^?j ww ^^^ mm s!S^ mmwn wi- ^^.y^y^'.t^^^^^w, mm. m^^ •msM/mm k^ mm. vst^. Wm si^ ^?^ vism vraa. ^^ wm 7^. THE " PEOVIDENOE " STEAM CAPSTAN WINDLASS. Patented Feb. 17 and Oct. 13, 1874, Oct. 26 and Nov. 30, 1876, March 21 and April 18, 1876, March 27, Nov. 13 and Dec. 18, \877, June 25, Dec. 3 and 17, 1878, June 1, 1880, Feb. 8 and 15, 1881. Aoierican Ship Windlass Company. Providence. R. I. ao) , ,\\\m\™\ '^^^^/m* ^^^^^^\W! v/vmm ^mmm WKmut s«*mws «ssv\\>e[s v/z/Ase^ 'msmm kh^mk vmsxm mv/WM mm. I™"'"""" '""" THE "PKOVIDENOE " STEAM CAPSTAN WINDLASS. Patented Feb. 17 and Oct. 13, 1874, Oct. 26 and Nov. 30, 1876, March 21 and April 18, 1876, March 27, Nov. 13 and Dec. 18, 1877, June 25, Deo. 3 and 17, 1878, June 1, 1880, Feb. 8 and 15, 1881. American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, R. I. (11) «« f9 STEAM CAPST>*N WINDLASS, (New Style.) Mi aured by AMERICAN SHIP WINDLASS COAi'ANY, PROVIDENCE, R, I. PKteiUed February 17 and October 13, 1874 ; October 26 and November 30, 1B7» ; March 21 and April 18, 1876; Afarch 27, Jf0vember 13, and December 18, 1877 ; June 26, December 3 and 17, 1878 ; Jun« 1, 1880 : February 8 and 15, 1881. iVay 1, 1883. The above cut fihowi onr new style of Steam Capitnn WindlasR. The advantageH of this style of Windlass over our old Steam Windlass are : First — It can be set up in one quarter the time and one quarter the expense required when the engines are bung up to deck above. Second — The engines being connected to the plate, and all the parts of the Windlass being tied together by the same plate, the whole must remain always in line ; if the deck above twists or strains, or is entirely crushed in or swept away, the Windlass can be worked by steam as efficiently as before. Third — Tbe engines are more accessible, being nt the right height and in the most convenient position possible; the Kn^.nes, Locking Gear of Windlass, and Friction Levers being all within reach. Fourth — The Windlass can be set up in tbe shop, and every part, including Engines, Friction Htands, Deck Pipes, and BItts, bolted to Its place and marked, so that when set up on ship-board, each part must come to its place without trouble or delay. Fifth —The Patent Automatic Lubricating device, wherebyeachtoothof the worm-gear is supplied with lubrication as the whocl revolves, reduces the friction, imd prevents cutting and wear. The above advantages, combined with and in addition to all those good points possessed by the old style, would seem to recommend this Windlass to the confldencu of all in want of a Hrst-class machine. (12) THE "PROVIDENCE" P (MKW tiTYLK;, MANUFACTURED BY AMERICAN SHIP WINDLASS COMPANY. f WlndlaBs over zpense required ,nd all the parts the deck above olently as before, on poBBlble; the ndlasB can be Bet to its place and y. Fifth —The Hon as the wheel old style, would I^ie.O"V^IIDEI^OE, I^. I. Patented Nov. 4, 1873; Oct. 26 and Nov. 30, 1875; March 21, 187G; Nov. 13, 1877 Dec. 17, 1878; June 1, 1880; Feb. 8 and 15, 1881; May 1, 1883. (13) The Providence " Steam Pump Brake Windlass. Patented Nov. 4, 1873, March 21, 187C, Nov. 13, 1877, Dec. 17, 1878, June 1, 1880, Feb. 8 and 15, 1881. .American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, R. I, (14) The "Providence" Messenger Chain Capstan Windlass. Patented Feb. 17, 1874, March 21 and April 18, 187G, March 27 and Nov. 13, 1877, June 25, Dec. 3 and 17, 1878, June 1, 1880, Feb. 8 and 15, 1881. American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, II. I. (16) UJ ffi u u 00 Uunet«r of Baae. 23 in. 24i " 29j " 32 " 34 " 37^ '' Height. in. 27 31 34 36J " 38J " 42 »' Weight. 400 lbs. 60C '» 800 " 1,050 " 1,800 ♦♦ 1,660 " Prloe. ■■m- POWER CAPSTAN. Our Power or Geared Capstan is the result of many years stud}', and we recommend it as being the simplest, strongest and least liable to derangement of any Capstan in the market. The only way to produce perfect machines of an}' kind, at a reason- able pricey is to reduce their manufacture to a system, with special machinery for the purpose, and to do this they must be made in large numbers. The extensive demand for our Power Capstan enables us to employ the same set of men constantly in their manufacture, and we can thus offer a strong, tlioroughly made Capstan at as low figures as the cheaper made, lighter machines in the market. When the men walk ro''nd with the sun it produces power and the reverse speed with- out any other change. SIMPLE CAPSTAN. Our Simple Capstans have the same heavy castings as our Power Capstans, without the internal gearing. CRANK CAPSTAN. Our Crank Capstan is made to work where the use of bars is not possible or convenient. This Capstan is made to work Power or Speed, according to the direction in which the cranks revolve, without any other change. In arranging our different styles of Capstans, we designed to over- f^ome the breakdowns which are continually occurring from the want of sufficient stock to stand a severe strain. Instead of spreading out the castings for the sake of mere show, we have made them as com- pact as possible, and very thick and heavy. Our motto has been " Simplicity and Strength," and we would call particular attention to these points. All of our different styles of Capstans are of tlie same general design. The bearings are all lined with Babbitt metal, thereby reducing the friction and corrosion to a minimum. The workmanship and stock are guaranteed first-class in every respect. (26) PATENT RUDDER SUPPORTERS. ^, Clamp Supporter in Halves. Section through Supporter. (27 > SIZES jlnj:> phiobs ov BUDDEB SUFPORTEES, WHOLE SUPPORTERS. 9 Inch Rudder, Price H 10 lOi 11 lU 12 12A 18 13i 14 14i 15 15i ♦17.50 i8.00 18.50 19.00 10. .W 20.00 20.50 21.00 21..V) 22.00 22. .50 2JJ.00 24.00 25.00 16 Irti 17 174 18 184 19 194 20 204 21 214 Inch Rudder, Price 126 27 28 20 30 31 ai .35 87 ;^.\> 41 43 45 CLAMP SUPPORTERS. 9 inch Rudder, Price 94 4 ( tt 10 << 104 i< 11 t< 114 (< 12 i< 124 It 13 41 134 It 14 << 144 ti 15 t( 154 It $27.50 £8.00 2S..'0 20.00 29.50 ;J0.00 :30.50 31.00 32.00 ;i3.00 34.00 35.00 30.00 37.00 16 164 17 174 18 184 19 194 20 204 21 214 22 inch Rudder, Price $38 39 40 42 44 4d 48 50 52 54 66 58 60 (2t) The cuts on tlie next page represent different views of the Hawm Pipe Stopper, patented by Hermnn Winter of Hrooklyn, N. Y. This arrangement is a positive device and wilt ensure a perfect air and water tight Joint. It is strong, simple and durable. A pair of these stoppers, having been in use on the Morgan Line Steamship '* Excelsior " about a year, we wrote to Captain Hawthorn, asking his opinion of them, and he answered as follows — New York, May 7th, 1883. Frank S. Manton, Agt. American Ship Windlass Co., Providence, R. I. Dear Sir :— I am in receipt of your valued favor of the 6th of April, and contents carefully noted, in reply would say that the Patent Hawse Pipe Stoppers, designed by Mr. Herman Winter, constructing engintor ot the Morgan Line, and made by you, are simply perfect and work to my entire satisfaction in every respect, and no sea-going vessel is thoroughly equipped without them. As they can be put in and taken out in a few moments and are perfectly water-tight at the same time, it gives the commander of a ship every confidence to Itnow that his chains and anchors are ready for use at any moment without the trouble of bending chains. In a large ship like the " Excelsior," and loaded deep, it would be impossible to get along without unbending chains. With these Patent Hawse Pipe Sioppers we could go to any part of the world, as far as water entering Hawse Pipes. They have no equal or superior as a Hawse Pipe Stopper ; nothing can excel them ; they are water-tight, simple, easily adjusted, and you could not make any- thing more desirable for a Stoi^per. Yours very respectfully, J. W. HAWTHORN, Commanding S.S. '•'■ Excelsior" Morgan Line. The new Steamer " City of Gloucester " of the Boston and Gloucester Line has a pair of the Stoppers, and we are making them for the large Schooner " Haroldine," just launched at North Weymouth ; for the Steam- ship " H. F. Dimock " just launched at Philadelphia for the Metropolitan Steamship Co., and for three Steamships building by Wm. Cramp & Sons Co. for the Morgan Line. We will guarantee to make the Hawse Pipes water-tight. Herman Winter's Kawse Pipe Stopper. PATENTED FEB. IS, 1884 Section in Plan Looking Forward. AMERICAN SHIP WINDLASS COMPANY, Sole I^anuflicturers. (30) The cut shown on the next page represents a Wharf Drop or Bridge Way. It is designed to move up and down to meet the varying require- ments of tides and light or loaded vessels, for passenger foot bridges, ship or ferry bridges, etc., where a fair way is to be made with the least possi- ble labor, combined with the greatest possible security and despatch. We. have furnished these drops to various parties; among others, recently', seven of them to the Metropolitan Steamship Companj* for their Boston (India) Wharf, where they are in constant uSe ; five to the Central Wharf Company, one for Foster Wharf, and one for Lewis Wharf, Boston, and ten lo the Morgan Steamship Company, for Pier 37, North River, New York. Each drop or bridge is twenty-five feet long by twelve feet wide, is of heavy proportions, and capable of taking twenty tons over it with the greatest safety, yet can be quickly raised or lowered by one man through a height of ten feet or more by the power of a thumb and finger. It will remain secure in any position without any locking arrangement. We can furiiish at shortest notice the machinery for any size of bridge, from that of a small passenger foot bridge to the largest ship or ferrj- bridge. As shown by the cut this arrangement is in itself made a perfect balance, is therefore capable of being moved with the least possible amount of friction, and from the nature of the mechanism is at once powerful, sim- ple, and free from danger of derangement. It is much on the plan of machinery used for operating the cables and anchors on the largest and smallest steamers or sailing vessels, a busiiiess in which we have been engaged during the past twenty-five years. If (31) Herman Winter's Patent Wharf Drop. AMERICAN SHIP WINDLASS CO., No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. SOLE MANUFACTURERS. C.'«2) WINDLASSES. ;o., "We make a specialty of this business, and do nothing else, — the only concern in America that confine themselves to this one branch of business. As we were the first par- ties in the field in this country, and the only ones that have ever ^nade an Iron Windlass that has come into general use, our Windlasses are being imitated and our numerous pa- tents infringed by parties who are without the facili- ties or the experience to originate a practical machine for the purpose. These imitations are very defective, being generally of poor material and workmanship. In trying to avoid our patents they have often spoiled the machine, without accomplishing the aim in view. There are often cases where, in critical times, our Windlasses have paid for themselves in a few moments of time. On a lee shore, or when getting under way in a gale of wind, it is important not only that everything about the Windlass should work perfectly, but that it ehould be strong in every part. Also, when taking in chain, with the man in the locker stowing the chain, if anything gives way his life is the forfeit for the want of fidelity in the construction of the Windlass. Par- ticular attention is called to our Naval Capstans and Wind- lasses fitted to work either by hand or steam. The following is a list of our patents : No. 9,665, dated Dec. No. 144,227, dated Nov. No. 147,667, dated Feb. No. 166,877, dated Oct. No. 169,182, dated Oct. No. 174,977, dated Mar. No. 176,331, dated April 18, No. 188,926, dated Mar. 27, No. 197,039, dated Nov. 13, No. 197,040, dated Nov. " No. 197,041, dated Nov. No. 203,846, dated May No. 231,949, dated Sept. No. 237,886, dated Feb. No. 276,987, dated May No. 276,988, dated May No. 293,610, dated Feb. 27, it 13, 26, 21, 13, 13, 'i: 16, 1, 1, 12, 8, 1881. 3, 1878. 18, 1877. 1870 ; reissued Feb. 1873. 1874; reissued Dec. 1874; reissued Dec. 1875; reissued Nov. 30, 1876. 1876; reissued June 1, 1880. 1876; reissued June 26, 1878. 1877. 1877. 1877. 1877. 1878. 1880. 1881. 1883. 1883. 1884. All parties are hereby cautioned against infringing these patents, as we shall hold all vessels having Windlasses that conflict with our rights strictly responsible. (3S) Extract Jrom Nautical Gazette of April 17, 1880. STEAM ^WINDLASSES. Opinions and Statements of Practical Men who hate used the Amer- ican Ship Windlass Company's Steam Windlasses and Capstans, manufactured at providence, r. i. As a fitting supplement to the elaborate illustrated articles which have appeared in these columns respecting the several styles of windlasses and capstans oiade at Prov- idence, R. I., by the American Ship Windlass Company, and as an indorsement, if they needed any, of what we have said concerning their merits and superiority, we have conversed with some of the leading ship-masters who are constantly using them, and have written to owners, superintendents and others respecting their opinion of what we have believed to be the best of this class of labor-saving machinery made in the world, and we present now their statements as near verbatim as possible. The letters speak for themselves. Captain Peter E. Lefe^'re, the Marine Superintendent of the Ocean Steamship Co., Savannait Line, one of the best and most reliable authorities in this country in all matters pertaining to all classes of vessels and their equipments as well as co&otruc- tion, said, " I consider the Providence Steam Windlass the best in the world that I know of. We have them in all our present fleet of steamers, and will put one in the ' City of Augusta,' now building. They do their work with great celerity, efficiency and reliability, and are always in perfect working order. As for the steam capstans made by this cuiii|,any, they are invaluable for warping into dock and for general use. The steam capstan takes up but little room, and can be worked effectually where ir< jn could not exert their force with bars or cratks on decks covered with ice and snow." Captain Nickerson, of the steamer " City of Columbus," and who is the senior captain of the Ocean Steamship Co., said, " We use our steam windlass quite often, as we are frequently compelled to anchor off Tybee Bar to wait for the tide before going into the Savannah River. I usually give her forty-flve fathoms of chain, lying comfortably and easy at a long scope. When we are ready to get under way it is no trouble to get o ir anchor with our steam windlass. Nothing of its kind is made that ^ know of that approaches it in reliability. It is simple to handle, never gets out of order, and the only bother I have ever had with it is, sometimes my mates wanted to run it too fast. I have waited until steamers which were anchored near me had hove short with their old-fashioned windlasses, before I started to ^et my anchor and forty- five fathoms of chain, and before they had their anchor at the cat head I have had all my chain in, and the anchor in its place. One officer and a boy ret our anchor and chain. Nothing can excel it ; more than this, they are as noisel laa as such a machine can be, and in great contrast with the clattering British windlasses." We next called upon Captain S. P. Griffin, commanding the " Colon," of the Pacific Steamship Co. He said, " The messenger chain windlass which is on this vessel is a poor, miserable contrivance ; is continually getting out of order, is unreliable, and given us no end of trouble. It was made, as you see by the mark on the capstan- head, by Coffin & Woodward, of Boston. We are obliged to slack up the chain, fleet it over the wildcats, and are tormented with it just when wo require most that its movements be certain and sure. I would rather have an ordinary hand-power pump- brake windlass than this thing, which, at any rate, is not fit for a vessel of this size, which should have a two-cylinder direct steam windlass. Tiie steam wiudla.s8 on the (34) ' City of Peking,' which I commanded when she was new, was made by the Amer- ican Ship Windlaas Co., of Providence, and it always worked to our p faction, never requiring repairs. We want just that style of windlass on this vessel. Henry J. Bullay, the Superintendent of the Pacific Mail Steamship Co., at New York, said, " The ' Colon's ' windlass had always been complained of, as well as that on the ' Acapnlco,' which was of the same manufacture." Philadelphia and Reading Railroad Company Steam Colliers, Port Richmond, Philadelphia, March 30, 1880. Editor the Nautical Gazette : Sir,— Replying to your favor of March 30, 1 would say that in 1874 our com- pany built eight (8) new iron steam colliers, six of 1,283 tons, one of 1,03.5 tons, and one of &53 tons register. We selected the American Ship Windlass Company's Windlasses, and since then they have been in constant use in weighing anchors and warping the ships. They have given us excellent results, and I do not remerab'>- ^a instance of com- plaint from our captains about them. Yours truly, John L. Howard, Superintendent. Mr. Herman Winter, Inspector of British Lloyds and the Marine Superintendent of the Morgan Line steamers, who designed and superintended the construction of the " Chalmette," one of our largest fro;fi:hting steamers in the New Orleans trade, in speaking of the American Siiip WiKdlass Company's Steam Windlass on that ship, said, " It works like a charm, has no equal or superior among labor-saving appliances. All they do is to open a little valve, give it the steam, and it is at work, doing its duty with reliable promptitude. Nothing too good can be said of the Providence Steam Windlass." Lieut. Z. L. Tanner, U. S. N., now in command of the U. S. Fish Commissioner's steamer "Fish Hawk," who commanded the Pacific Mail Steamship Company's steamer " City of Peking " for two years, writes as follows : — Washington, D. C, April 4, 1880 Editor The Nautical Gazette : Dear Sir, — Your favor of the 25th is received. In repiy I beg leave to say that the steam windlass in use on the P. M. steamship " City of Peking gave entire sat- isfaction. It required no repairs during the two" years I was in command of that vessel, and was looked upon as thoroughly reliable. It would heave in from ten to eleven fci'uoms of chain per minute at the speed we usually run it. At this speed it ran smoothly, re({uiring no attention except occasional oiling. Yours respectfully, Z. L. Tanner. In reply to our communication to Captain S. Howes, commanding the new steamer " I). H. Miller," the new flagship of the Merchants' & Miners' Transportation Com- pany's fleet, plying between Baltimore and Boston, we have the following : — Baltimore, April 6, 1880. Editor The Nautical Gazette : Dear Sir, — Yours of the 25th of March duly received; contents noted, and will say in reply that the steam windlass and capstan on board the steamer " D. H. Miller," furnished, by the American Ship Windlass Company, of Providence, we like very much. They work well, by far the best I have ever seen, and can fully recommend them to parties wanting &Jirst-rate windlass and capstan. Yours truly, S. Howes, Captain steamer " D. H, Miller. Captain Pennington, Marine Superintendent of the Clyde Line Steamers at thi» port, a ship-master of large and varied practical experience, says of the steam wind- lass made by the American Ship Windlass Company, which is on the " Santo ' Domingo " : " It gives tue most unqualified satisfaction in every respect, and is without a peer among that class of machinery ; it is never out of order, can always be depended on for quick and certain action. This company, unquestionably, pro duce the very best steam windlasses made. This I know from practical experience." Mr. F. Alexandre, the senior and founder of the house of F. Alexandre & Sons, (35) whose fine ■teamcrs are engaged in the New York, Havana and Mexican trade, put one of the latest improved sveam windlasses on the flagship " City of Alexandria." He says, " The windlass gives the best of satisfaction. The fact that all large steam- ers now built in the United States use the American Ship Windlass Company's steam windlasses in preference to any other kind made, prove the superiority of this wind- lass. Our steamers are obliged, from the nature of their route, to anchor often and frequently in dangerous places, and we are compelled to have, fur our own protection, the very best and most perfect ground tackle and machinery for getting our anchors or riding to our anchors. We believe, in the Providence Steam Windlass we have the very best known." The following letter is from Mr. A. Vanderbilt, the Superintendent of the Ward Line of Cuba steamers, a gentleman of ability and skill in his profebsion, and one of great practical experience in machinery. His statement shows that both the wind- lasses and capstans have given "entire satisfaction" in the fleet which he represents. New York and Cuba Mail Steamship Line, James E. Wakd & Co., 113 Wall St., New York, April 9, 1880. Editor The Nautical Gazette : Deab Sir, — In nply to your inquiry of the 8th inst., I would say that the steam- ships of this line are lurnished with the windlass and capstan worked by steam, and made by tlie American Ship Windlass Company of Providence. They have given entire satisfaction. Yours truly, A. Vanderbilt, Capt. E. Spicer, Jr., of the Mallory and Brazil Line steamers, says : — " We use the steam windlasses made by the American Ship Windlass Company of Providence, 11. 1., on all our steamers, and thev have always given us perfect satisfac- tion, and we can fully indorse them as being thoroughly ruliable. They are the best that are made anywhere." The officers of the Sound steamer " Massachusetts " say that her windlass is "just splendid," is always id order, and does its work without any failing. Captain E. V. Gager, who commands the steamer " Louisiana," of the Cromwell Line, which is supplied with a steam windlass made by the American Ship Windlass Company, of Providence, R. I., when asked his opinion of the windlass, said, '• It is the best appliance in the world for handling anchors and chains. Of this there can be no question. It is simply perfection itself, and no steam vessel is thorou<;lily equipped without one of them. Ours work to a charm in every respect. It is, I repeat, perfect." We think we have, for the present at least, produced abundant and convincing proof from practical users of the steam windlasses and capstans made by the Amer- ican Ship Windlass Company, that tliis establishment produces tiie most perfect machine for handling anchors and chains that is made in the world. They are not only speedy, but reliable, easily handled, almost noiseless, and take up but little room, comparatively speaking ; when once put in are a fixture, and can always be depended upon. This company have, for years past, been adopting improvements, but it now seems almost impossible to make them more perfect. In addition to the above extracts IVom tlic Nautical Gazette we have the following letter from Captain Thomas Wilson : Cleveland, O., Dec. 21, 1881. American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, h. '. .• Gentlemen : The steam windlass which you put \^*o the steamship " Tacoma," ^ives entire siitisl'action, and I cheerfully recommend its use v.<) all hirgc btuamci-s. Your, truly, '.' "Cd. Wilson. Passed Assistant Engineer G. W. Uaird, U. S. N., writer -s follows U. S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries, Stbameu Albatross, Woods Holl, M^ss., Octobers, Wi'A. American Ship Windlass Company, Providence, R. /.: Gentlemen : In mv quarterly report on the " Albatross " I have entered the foUowinyr concerning our windlass : " The steam windlass, never h",vlii}r ;fiven any troulilc nor requiring any i-cpuirs, lucrita a special mention." Yours, t!(:c., G. W. Uaiuu (36) We would call the attention of the Nautical Public to the following partial list ol vessels using our Windlasses for handling their anchors and chains. These are all the names of which we have a record, as in a great many cases no names have been obtained. This list shows the style of Windlasses the best class of vessels use. -♦♦*- Yard 1 fci'JL' E. AJbj£±^l:t^. ■ ne of ■ City of Waco . . Mallory Line, ^few York. | Mercedita New York. wind- H State of Texas . ii (i (( tt Seawanhara 44 14 h he I San Antonio i( ii a tt Varuna . . , 44 44 _ I Rio Grande It >t a ti Grand Gulf 44 44 [ilNE, ■ Colorado . ti i( 14 tt Aries 44 44 ^1 Guadalupe (t It it tt Memphis . 4. 44 ' 1 San Marcos i( (i it it City of Panama, Pacific Mail S.S. Co., " '« iteam- ■ Western Texas . t( a It tt City of Callao " 44 44 44 44 44 given ■ Lampasas . (( (( tt City of Sidney . " 44 44 44 44 44 ILT. H Alamo . . (( 44 tt City of San Francisco ' ' 44 44 44 44 44 ■ City of Rio Janei ro . (( It CityofPekin . 44 44 44 44 44 anv of ^1 City of Para . (1 tt CityofTokio . 44 44 44 44 44 '. itisfac- ■ What is it? • • • t( tt City of New York " 44 44 44 44 44 te best ■ General Barnes . • • • tt tt Union . . '♦ 44 44 44 44 44 ■ Ajax . . (( it Winchester . " 44 44 44 44 44 i "just I Garmpts . . (t tt San Jose . 44 44 44 44 44 . 1 Walrus . . i( tt San Juan . . " 44 44 44 44 44 omwell ■ Monatus . • • ■ i< it San Bias . 44 44 44 44 44 ^indlatiH H Nautilus . * • • ti It Alaskao . . Pacific Coast. " It is 1 Quaker City • • • (( II Saratoga . Ward's Line, New York. ere can H Manhattan • ti it Santiago . 44 44 44 44 rou;rl]Iy ■ Moyune . . It Ii Newport . 44 44 44 44 It i:i, I I Kin Kiang ■ • » • It It Niagara . . 44 44 44 44 I Conquerer • • • * II Cienfuegos 44 44 44 44 iviucing ■ Admiral . . • • tt City of Macon, Ocean Steamship Co., " " ) Amer- I Cotopaxi . 1 • • • Ii City of Savannah " 44 44 44 i( perfect 1 Leyah t • • • t< Ci City of Columbus " 44 44 44 4< are nut 1 Galatea . • • • ■ ii City of Augusta " 44 • 44 44 44 le room, ■ Oceanus . • • - • tt Gate City . " 44 . 44 44 44 epeuded H Electra . * * * * tt Tallahassee " 44 44 44 44 t it now ■ Thetis p ■ • • Ii Ii Chattahoochee " 44 44 44 44 Dg letter 1 Metis • • • '• ti t ( Nacoochee " 44 44 «4 44 Thomas Kelso • • • • tt it Oregon . . . Oregon Steamship Co , 1881. I Meteor • • • * It It Columbia . ... 44 44 tt a." irivcs Andalusia • • • * (1 it Umatilla . t( t< ti Wf f,» ' *'*' Virgo Leo . • • • • ii II Williamette it tt tt ILSON. • • * * i( ii Walla WaUa . •• •' •• BATUOSS, ( 87) following; oiil)le iioi' Uaiku « J f Mississippi Oregon Steamship Co. Tacoma . Central Pacific Railroad Co. San Pedro It ti It It San Pablo U U II tt Santa Rosa, Oregon Railway and Navigation Co. State of California Pacific Coast Line. Queen of the Pacific II i( It Mariposa . Oceanic Steamship Co. Alameda . . ti Goldsboro Qyde Line. Santo Domingo II • • • li Delaware . II it Danville . It it Regulator II It City of Alexandria Alexandre Line, New York. CityofPuebla . If 11 II Chalmette Morgan Line, " Excelsior . 11 11 II Lone Star It II It New York ' it II II Algiers K II It Morgan City . It II tt Eureka It It II El Paso . It It tl H. F. Dimock . Metropolitan Steamship Co. Finance . . ] 'iTew Brazil Line, New York. Advance . << tl tl It Reliance . It t( It it Amazonia It It It It Louisiana Cromwell Line, " New Orleans . it it It Knickerbocker ti 11 It Hudson . 11 II tt Massachusetts, Ptov.6 i Stoning'n S.S. Co. " Rhode Island " t( > 4t Boston It ii 11 li Perseus . " '• It It II Co., Portland. Atlanta <1 u 11 11 Pegasus . «' " It It ti ip Co., Boston, Dolphin Despatch Boat, il li Dean Richmond, People's Line, N. York & Albany. etCo., Hassler . U. S. Coast Survey. Drew , •• li ii ne. Providence. Blake - . . '* " ii St. John . •• II II Collier, Boston. Haze U. S. Lighthouse Dep't. City of Troy New York. * Dahlia It It It Cleopatra .... II George M. Bibb U. S. Revenue Dep't. Excelsior .... II • Levi Woodbury 11 Gen. Sedgwick . II • Warrington ti City of Chester . , , 11 tt • Lincoln . . " Louis Bucki II li • Gallatin . il Mary Morgan . . New Orleans. 11 Hamilton . 11 C. W. Lord il II • Oliver P. Walco tt . . " City of Dallas . It It • Seward . ^11 Wanderer It II It • Colfax . . " City of Richmond Philadelphia. 11 • Bache ti Habanero ti Walter Forward 11 I'bcrty .... II George S. Bout> veil . . " North America . 11 I Commodore Per ry . . " Crescent City . Wm. P. Clyde, •' Dallas II Reading . P. & R. Railroad Co. , •• iicester S. B. Co. 1 Ewing II Harrisburg " it 11 H Fessenden > . . " Columbia . •* II It Boston. 1 Albatross . U. S. Fish Commission. Lancaster . " II It Russian Navy. 1 Yosemite . . Steam Yacht, New York. Pottsville . " ii M Stranger . • • Phoenixville " II II Corsair . . • • Perkiomen " II If H Namouna . . . Berks II it ^H Atalanta, Owne i J. Gould Chas. F. Mayer Collier, ^1 Utowana " G< JO. W. Scott Frostburg . ii II Port au Prince. ■ Viking " W . E. Connor Pensacola . ii II ^M Lagonda " J. < ::. Hoagland North America . Wrecking Tug, " South America. H Sigma " M. S. Smith •' Detroit.Mich. George W. Pride, Jr. it ii ^1 Bretagne . . Steam Yacht, Paris. City of Topeka . Topeka & Santa F6 R. R. Co. ^H Roanoke . Ol d Dominion S.S. Co., New York. George S. Homer . New Bedford. ^1 Guyandotte :i 11 It ii It Col. H. T. Baya Florida. H Manhattan tt It • II il II Lucy P. Miller . 11 H Breakwater It It It 11 It United Empire . Sarnia, Ont. 1 Geo. W. Elder It It It It It Sir Leonard Tilley . . St. Catharines, Ont. U. S. Navy. ■ City of Palatka . ' . Florida Steamship Co. Conemaugh . . On the Lakes. l^l Caracas . B( julton, Bliss & Dallett, New York. R. G. Peters . ii ii ii ^1 Valencia . II II It A. Everett ii il ii ^H Maracaibo it tt It Thomas W. Palmer . ii li ii ^H Cetus Iron Excursion Boats, James H. Shrigley It ti ii ^H Taurus It It It Queen of the West . tt 11 ii ^1 Cygnus It It It John B. Lyon . ii ii it ^1 Cepbeus • II ti it John C. Gault . 11 II il (89) I Russell Sage Iron Cliff . Iron Chief City of Rome Cumberland Robert A. Packer Michigan . Wisconsin Clyde Fred McBrier Business . Portage Wissahickon Andrew J. Smith Avon Juniata Nyack Delaware . Conestoga New York Milwaukee Chicago Rochester Boston Lehigh Lycoming Minnehaha Wocoken . Robert Wallace M. F. Butters Starucca . Escanaba . Oceanica . Ohio Commodore Waverly . Midland . Calumet . David Wallace Waldo A. Aveiy Buffalo Iron State Iron Age Hiawatha Middlesex Jesse H. Farwell Clarion H. C. Akeley On the Lakes. 'Charles H. Davis 1 Flushing . It It Montana .... Greenpoint, L. I. * (t 1 Rapidan Providence, R. I. Iron Age .... Kennebunk, Me. ' u « •< 1 F.egulator . M II Oregonian . . . San Francisco, Cal. » «« " 1 City of Providence " " E. B. Ward . . . New Orleans, La. It II t< II II «l II It " II II tl II II 14 1 Chickamauga l< « - 1 1 ;i ss:: EJteS. i t. CoUey, Boston. 1 H •< C. H. Lord 1 Paine, It riscotta, " Edward Everett, II McQellan, It It " Idaho It Howe, It t« •• Monsoon . It Flye, tt Uelfast, " William Lord, Jr., It Brown, It t. Cook, " Singapore . Martha P. Tucker . New York. Alice J. Grace . Tillie Biker *ll It Addie E. Sleeper Capt. Foote, New Yorli l< (1 11 (( l< H II (>. M (( II (( 11 .. II II Bath, M ai:ii. Richmond, Waldoboro, 11 Searsport, Thomaston, Rockland. (+4) New Yorl, •1 (( « (( (1 (•. arker, '♦ II James M. Ives II ti Nathan Easterbrook, Jr. II • I Beuie E. Dickinson J. D. Robinson Odell . . Capt. George Sealy . " Lizzie Chadwick Wyer G. Sargent Nelson Bartlett Lizzie B. Willie Levi S. Andrew.* Jennie Lockwood Nellie A. Druary Eldrldge Souther Emily F. Watts E. D. Sidbury Sarah & Ellen Lucy A. Davis Willie H. Higgins Benjamin C. Cromwell Mattie J. AUes H. C. Higginson John Bracewell Annie F. Conlon Florence Dean Robert Portner Wild Pigeon . D. M. Anthony Stephen Morgan John E. Ssnford Bertha F. Walker Zacctieus Sherman Enoch Robinson William O. Snow Samuel H. Walker William L. Walker Baylies Wood . William D. Marvel William R. Huston Alfred Brabrook Calvin P. Harris Bertha Dean . Alice B. Phillips Henry S. Culver Emma F. Angell A. B. Sherman Benjamin B. Church Thomas J. Lancaster Ida Lawrence . Jonathan May Bath, Me. Winslow, McI)onald, Sargentville, Thomaston, Portland, H. Rockland, Dover, N. Portsmouth, Taunton, Mass New Bedford, Philadelphia. Caleb S. Ridgws G. G. Greene Wallace J. Boyd Amanda C. Pad Joseph W. Fost< Josephine . Taylor Dickson Charles E. Youn Emma C. Cotton Samuel Vroomat Frank Pratt Lee Susie H. Davidsi Tena A. Cotton , Gov. John W. H Henry Wadding! Daniel E. Bailey Nimrod David Dows Our Son Golden Age James Couch San Diego Henry A. Kent, H, H. Brown Thomas L. Park< Joseph Paige Geo. Pfister Marengo . J. B. Merrill Agnes Smith Alice B. Norris F. M. Knapp George Murray Minnie Lucy G. S. Hasard George W. Adan F. A. George James Couch Kate Winslow Transport . Wamsutta . Gov. Morton Baltic, Bee Line Bravo *' C4fl) Bath, Me. ntville, " laHton, " rtland, ckland, " 3ver, N. H. smouth, " nton, Mass. edford, " 'hiladelphia. Caleb S. Ridgway . Philadelphia. Lucerne . . . . . Buffalo, N. Y. G. G. Greene . ^ fiMORS Line. " McNEAR," Boston. "R.B. FULLER." "ERIC THE RED," Bath. Schooner " CALVIN P. HARRIS," Taunton. " "D.M.ANTHONY," " GEORGE W. WHITFORD," Providence. "CARRIE S. HART," " "MATTIE W. ATWOOD," Boston. " '^ RICHARD WIN SLOW," Buffalo. " "H. H. BROWN," Detroit. "WEALTHY PENDLETON," Searsport, Me. PERLEY WINDLASSES. " BLACKSTONE," Providence, Norfolk & Balti- more Line . "DEAN RICHMOND," "DREW," " ST. JOHN," " METEOR," (built by R. B. Forbes) Boston. " CLEOPATRA," New York. "CITY OF LAWRENCE," Norwich <& New York Transportation Co. IT. S. Lighthouse Steamer " DAHLIA," Detroit. HYDE WINDLASS. Barque " VERONICA," New Bedford. GLOBE IRON WORKS WINDLASS. U. S. Revenue Steamer "WARRINGTON," Detroit. HARFIELD WINDLASSES (English). Spanish Steamer " NEUOVO BARCELONA." Steamship " COLUMBUS," Clyde, sold to Russian Government. Italian Barque " MARCHIN." Schooner " SAN DIEGO," Buffalo. Enomsh Stkamek "VERTUMMES." (48) Barque Steamer tt t( 4( People's Line between Al- bany and New York. WOOD WINDLASSES. Stlamhr t< •I II II II Darqub II 11 II II II Schooner II It II II II II ii ti <• It i( K II II ti " " " BOUTWELL." " " " DALLAS." " " "EWING." Lighthouse Steamer " HAZE." Coast Survey Steamer " BLAKE." "HASSLER.' " " Schooner "DRIFT." (49) ^ i^ FOR THB Sale of the "PROVIDENCE" Windlasses, Capstans, &c. IN THE UNITED STATES. GEORGE FISHER Bath, Maine. Bath, Bowdoinbam, Gardiner, Phippsburg, Richmond, Wiscasset, Damariscotta and Brunswick, Me. I. M. BOARDMAN . Belfast, Maine. HINCKS & NE ALLEY . . . . . . Bangor, Maine. Bangor and Viciiiity. PTDEOUT & LORD Calais, Maine. COBB, WIGHT & CO Rockland, Maine. Rockland, Rockport and Camden, Me. Capt. S. brown Kennebumkport, Maine. Kennebunkport and Saco, Me. G. M. STANWOOD & CO Portland, Maine. J. A. CREIGHTON Thomaston, Maine. EDSON MFG. CO Boston, Mass. HENRY SUTTON New Haven, Conn. J. P. SNELLING New York City. E. GEORGE & CO " CHAS. G. ENDICOTT Jersey City, N. J. JONATHAN MAY & SONS . . . . Philadelphia, Pa. GEORGE W. STONE ...... Wilmington, Del. F. M. PEED . . Norfolk, Va. LOUD, CLARIDGE & CO. . . . . . Baltimore, Md. J. P. AGNEW & CO Alexandria, Va. WOODWARD, WIGHT & CO. . . . New Orleans, La. WARD & BRADY St. Louis, Mo. CASSILLY, COLLINS & CO Cincinnati, O. ENOS, HILL & CO. . . . . . . Gallipolis. O EDWARD JORDAN Pittsburgh, Pa. R. H. WOOLFOLK & CO. . . . . . Louisville, Ky. JOHN J. SINZICH . . . . . . . EvANSviLLE, Ind. H. P. GREGORY & CO San Francisco, Cal. FOR THE LAKES. D. S. AUSTIN & CO Buffalo, N. Y. Lakes Erie and Ontario. JAS. P. DONALDSON «& CO Detroit, Mich. Detroit and Lake Huron. G. D. NORRIS & CO. . . . . . . Milwaukee. Wis. Lakes Superior and Michigan. UPSON, WALTON & CO Cleveland, O. M. I. WILCOX Toledo, O. DUNHAM & H\MT Chicago. III. (60) 2 THE FOLLOWINQ TABLE GIVES THE DIMENSIONS OF STUD AND CLOSE-LINK CHAINS, which we would recommend for use upon our Windlasses, and adopted by the leading chain manufacturers in the United States : — N.J. L, Pa. ^Del. ^ Va. M<1. Va. La. Mo. Ko. IS. O. ,Pa. Ky- Ind. Cal. SiZK OF Chain Cablks. Inches. STUD-LINK. Outiide Length. Inches. Outside Width. Inches. 3] 3| 4| 4| d 4| CLOSE-LINK. Outside Length. Inches. Outside Width. Inches. H ^ 2| 21 3 34 Si 31 3| 4| 44 41 4f 5 54 5j Avkraok Wkioht pkb Fath. Stud-Link. Pounds. Close-Link, rounds. 15 19 25 30 33 35 38 40 43 47 60 54 57 60 63 67 71 74 76 82 83 90 92 98 105 108 110 118 122 128 133 138 145 15G 152 165 179 195 209 225 250 280 300 325 350 375 40U 425 We recommend Stud-Link Chains in all cases as being cheaper and stronger and better adapted to work on iron windlasses. (51) p / -^ ? MiMtehvutti CluuriUUt lltolitDiei' AifocUtlon, USB. / Emerson's Patent Windlass works by slow or fast power by a capstan on the forecastle. This machine can perform with four men the work usually reqpiring a dozen, and is a valuable element in safety of life and propert}'. more especially in these days of ' ' ordinary seamen." Your Committee deem it well to add ends to the Windlass, dutside the bitts as usual, to serve occasionally. To this valuable machine the Committee awarded a Goli H. B. f ORBES, » JOHN S SLEEPER, BENJAMIN L. ALLEN, JOHN H. GLIDDON. ^ , ELIAS E. DAVIDSON, Committe*. IhiMchwietU ChariUUi Mechanics' Assodfttion, 1878. ZTAMB AND ADOBBSS OF EXHIBITOIl: American Ship "Windlass Company, PROVIDENCE, R. I. V^ AM] Appro\ true The above award was for "WINDLASSES AND ATTACHMENTS,'* and was the only award given for Windlasses or Capstans. The American Ship Windlass Company have taken the highest prize at every Fair or Exposition they Lave ever entered. These Windlasses have been manufactured in consin: tly increasing numbers since 1857, and of the large number in use for 30 many years, not one has failed to give satisfaction. (62^ ,il L. C The Dial E: Windlasses and Capstans. NAMlI.Ain> ADDRESS OF EXHIBITOB: AMERICAN SHIP WINDLASS COMPANY, PROVIDENCE, R. I. The undersigned, having examined the product herein described, re- spectfully recommends the same to the United States Centennial Commission for award, for the following reasons, viz. : — EXCELLENCE OF MECHANISM. LUIZ DE SALDANHA, Signature of Judge. Approval of Group Judges : -^ F. H RICH. H. C. GOODS PEED. JOHN W. GRIFFITHS. I. NEWTON. ,,^true cop3' of Record : FRANCIS A. WALKER, Chief of the Bureau of Awards. ,\ A. T. GOSHORN, Director-General. J. R. HAWLEY, President. L. CAMPBELL, Secretary. ^ ^..^ The above was the ONLY AWARD given at the United States Centen- nial Exposition for Windlasses and Capstans. (63) ■%L ) r XtMtehnMtti Cktritabli lliehaaloi' AiiooltUon, 186B. Emerson's Patent Windlass works by slow or fast power by a capstan on the forecastle. This machine can perform with four men the work usually requiring a dozen, and is a valuable element in safety of life and property', more especially in these days of ' ' ordinarj' seamen." Your Committee deem it well to add ends to the Windlass, Outside the bitts as usual, to serve occasionally. To this valuable machine the Committee awarded a Goli M£D4.L. R. B. FORBES, 1 - ' JOHN 8 SLEEPER, BENJAMIN L ** „.t.^^j^^ \J O "A O CO 4) .1^ I 90 1 ft) •\T IT r^ «0 e I e «0 ^ ^ 8 e «0 I %> s 2 "^ S: ,«o ^ s ^«» ^ ns s eS '•■^ .XI i « * i K3 I O Oh 5 cS It I o e ^ « I II S3 I I «0 I c QJ .3 o 3i '§ «> s: .•0 8 e I 8 ?o 8 8 «o i 12 80 8 e • 90 I 8 so 8 ?3 Co ^ "3 8 ^1 8 I 2 4 o o (/) < X 0) z < o LiJ < H 1^ i i .I'.-' (6*>